7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM
PIPESIM* production system analysis software
Version 2011.1

User Guide

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 1/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Copyright 2011 Schlumberger. All rights reserved.

No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or translated in any form or 
by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, without the prior 
written permission of Schlumberger Information Solutions, 5599 San Felipe, Suite 1700, Houston,
TX 77056-2722, USA.

Use of this product is governed by the License Agreement. Schlumberger makes no warranties,
express, implied, or statutory, with respect to the product described herein and disclaims without
limitation any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Schlumberger reserves
the right to revise the information in this manual at any time without notice.

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 2/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Table of Contents

1 User Guide ................................................................................................................... 1

1.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Company profile .................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.2 Getting Started .................................................................................................................... 1
 Applications ..................................................................................................................... 2 
1.1.3 Reporting ........................................................................................................................... 22
1.1.4 Extensibility ....................................................................................................................... 22
1.1.5 PIPESIM Hot Keys ............................................................................................................ 22
File Hot Keys ................................................................................................................. 22 
Simulation Hot Keys ...................................................................................................... 23
Windows Hot Key s ........................................................................................................ 23
Tools Hot Keys .............................................................................................................. 23
Editing or General Hot Keys .......................................................................................... 23
1.1.6 Main Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 24
1.1.7 Toolbox ............................................................................................................................. 24
Single branch T oolbox ................................................................................................... 25 
Network Toolbox ............................................................................................................ 26 
1.1.8 Wizard Feature .................................................................................................................. 27
Steps ............................................................................................................................. 27 
1.1.9 Find ................................................................................................................................... 28
Finding an object in a network model ............................................................................ 28 
1.1.10 PIPESIM versions ............................................................................................................. 29
PIPESIM Suite (Build26) to PIPESIM Conversion ......................................................... 29
1.2 Building Models ........................................................................................................................... 31
1.2.1 Steps in building a model .................................................................................................. 31
Basic overview ............................................................................................................... 31
Creating a new model .................................................................................................... 32 
 Adding objects to a model and connecting them ........................................................... 32 
 Adding data to an object ................................................................................................ 32 
Minimum data ................................................................................................................ 32 
Duplicating an obj ect ..................................................................................................... 33
Disconnecting obj ects .................................................................................................... 33

Saving the mod el ........................................................................................................... 33

 
i 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 3/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1.2.2 Network Models ................................................................................................................ 33

Creating a network model .............................................................................................. 33
Network Operations ....................................................................................................... 34
Source ........................................................................................................................... 34
Sink ................................................................................................................................ 35 
Branch ........................................................................................................................... 35 
Network Separator ......................................................................................................... 36 
Production Well ............................................................................................................. 37 
Injection Well ................................................................................................................. 38 
Well Curves ................................................................................................................... 39
Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................................... 40 
Network Constraints ...................................................................................................... 41
Network Estimates ......................................................................................................... 41
1.2.3 Single Branch Models ....................................................................................................... 42
Well Performance Analysis Overview ............................................................................ 42 
Pipeline tools .................................. ............................................................................... 81
Source, Sink and Boundary Conditions ....................................................................... 108 
1.3 Flow Correlations ...................................................................................................................... 110
1.3.1 Selecting a flow correlation ............................................................................................. 110
Source ......................................................................................................................... 110 
Correlation .................................................................................................................. 111
Options Control ........................................................................................................... 111
1.3.2 Defining User Flow Correlations ..................................................................................... 111
Tuning flow corr elations ............................................................................................... 111
Data matching ............................................................................................................. 111
Flow Correlation c omparison ....................................................................................... 111
Suggested correlations ................................................................................................ 111
1.3.3 Flow Regime Number and Flow Pattern ......................................................................... 113
Gas-Liquid .......................................................... ........................................................... 0 
Oil-Water ....................................................................................................................... 0 
1.3.4 Configuration File for user specified flow correlations ..................................................... 114
1.4 Fluid modeling ........................................................................................................................... 117
1.4.1 Modeling systems ........................................................................................................... 117
Water Systems ............................................................................................................ 117 
Gas Condensate Systems ........................................................................................... 118 
Dry Gas Systems ......................................................................................................... 118 
1.4.2 Managing Multiple Fluid Models ...................................................................................... 119

Precedence of Fluids when Multiple Fl uids Defined .................................................... 119

Local Fluid Data ................................ ........................................................................... 120 

 
ii 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 4/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1.4.3 Black Oil Fluid Modeling .................................................................................................. 120

Introduction .................................................................................................................. 120 
Black Oil Data Sets ...................................................................................................... 121
Black Oil Options ......................................................................................................... 122 
Calibrate a Fluid to match lab data .............................................................................. 122 
Bubble point calibration data ....................................................................................... 123
Gas Phase Contaminants ............................................................................................ 126 
Black Oil Thermal Data ................................................................................................ 126 
1.4.4 Compositional Fluid Modeling ......................................................................................... 127
Compositional Template .............................................................................................. 127 
Specifying the Composition ......................................................................................... 134
Compositional usi ng MFL file ...................................................................................... 139
Fluid Property Table (E   xternal PVT Tables) ................................................................ 140 
Solids Modeling ........................................................................................................... 140 
Compositional Flashing ............................................................................................... 144
Stock tank Conditi ons .................................................................................................. 145 
Steam .......................................................................................................................... 146 
1.5 Options ....................................................................................................................................... 147
1.5.1 Common Options ............................................................................................................ 147
Project Data ................................................................................................................. 147 
Units ............................................................................................................................ 147 
Heat Transfer Opt ions ................................................................................................. 149
Engine Options ............................................................................................................ 150 
Output Options ............................................................................................................ 150 
Erosion and Corrosion Options ................................................................................... 153
Engine Preferenc es ..................................................................................................... 155 
1.5.2 Network Options .............................................................................................................. 156
Speed up the calc ulation engine ................................................................................. 156 
Network Iterations ........................................................................................................ 157 
Fluid Models ................................................................................................................ 159
1.5.3 View Options ................................................................................................................... 160
View Properties tab ..................................................................................................... 160 
Objects tab .................................................................................................................. 160 
General Tab .................................................................................................................161
Viewing a large model ................................................................................................. 162 
Viewing flowline d ata ................................................................................................... 162 
1.6 Database ..................................................................................................................................... 162

1.6.1 New
ESPESP/Pump/Compressor Curve ............................................................................... 162
............................................................................................................................. 162 
Generic Pump .............................................................................................................. 163
Compressor/Expander ................................................................................................. 163
New Reciprocating Compressor Curve ....................................................................... 163
User Curves ................................................................................................................. 164
Electrical Submer sible Pumps (ESP) Selection .......................................................... 165 

 
iii 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 5/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1.6.2 New PCP Curve .............................................................................................................. 167

Creating a New Curve ................................................................................................. 168 
Selecting a PCP from the Catalog ............................................................................... 168 
Standard PCP Curves ................................................................................................. 168 
Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP) Selection .................................................................. 169

1.6.3 Gas Lift Valve List ........................................................................................................... 170

1.6.4 Flow Control Valves ........................................................................................................ 171
How to add an FCV to a completion ............................................................................ 171
1.7 Operations .................................................................................................................................. 172
1.7.1 Common Operations ....................................................................................................... 172
Check model ................................................................................................................172 
Run Model ................................................................................................................... 172 
 Abort Run .................................................................................................................... 173
Terminate Run ............................................................................................................. 173
1.7.2 Single Branch .................................................................................................................. 173
System Analysis .......................................................................................................... 173
Pressure/Temperature profile ...................................................................................... 174
Flow correlation comparison ........................................................................................ 175 
Data matching ............................................................................................................. 175 
Nodal Analysis ............................................................................................................. 177 
Horizontal length .......................................................................................................... 179
Reservoir tables ........................................................................................................... 179
Well Performance Curves ............................................................................................ 181
Gas Lift rate vs C asing head pr essure ........................................................................ 181
 Artificial Lift System Performance curv es .................................................................... 182 
Wax Deposition ........................................................................................................... 182 
Sensitivity variabl es ..................................................................................................... 188 
User variable ............................................................................................................... 188 
1.7.3 Network Operations ........................................................................................................ 189
Restart Model .............................................................................................................. 189
Well Optimization ......................................................................................................... 190 
1.8 Artificial Lift analysis ................................................................................................................. 190
1.8.1 How to create artificial lift performance curves ............................................................... 190
1.8.2 General Gas Lift .............................................................................................................. 190
Gas Lift Operations - Deepest Injection Point ............................................................. 191
Gas Lift Operations - Bracketing ................................................................................. 192 
Gas Lift Operations - Lift Gas Response Curves ........................................................ 193

Gas Lift Design ............................................................................................................ 194

Gas Lift Diagnostics ..................................................................................................... 207 
Gas Lift Theoretical background .................................................................................. 209
Gas lift instability .......................................................................................................... 209
 Annular Gas Pressure Design Method ........................................................................ 211

 
iv 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 6/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1.8.3 Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESP) .............................................................................. 212

General ........................................................................................................................ 212 
ESP System Components: Motor ................................................................................ 212 
ESP System Components: Pumps .............................................................................. 213
Motor Selection ............................................................................................................ 215 
ESP Database ............................................................................................................. 216 
Selection ...................................................................................................................... 216 
Stage-by-stage modeling ............................................................................................. 216 
Install a Pump .............................................................................................................. 216 
ESP Design ................................................................................................................. 217 
ESP System Com ponents: Cable ................................................................................ 217 
Errors ........................................................................................................................... 218 
ESP Design ................................................................................................................. 218 
ESP / Compressor / Pump data entr y ......................................................................... 218 
1.8.4 Rod Pump Module .......................................................................................................... 218
 About the Rod Pump Module ...................................................................................... 219
Getting Started ............................................................................................................ 220 
RP Operation Menu ..................................................................................................... 220 
Components and Options ............................................................................................ 226 
Rod Pump Desi gn ....................................................................................................... 227 
Selection of Design Methods ....................................................................................... 228 
Rod Pump Diagnostics ................................................................................................ 229
Operations ................................................................................................................... 229
Rod Pump Database Configuration ............................................................................. 229
Open Project ................................................................................... ............................. 229
Basis Input Data i n PIPESIM ....................................................................................... 229
RP Application from PIPESIM Drop-down Menu ......................................................... 229
Optimization Desi gn .................................................................................................... 230 
Operation Diagnostics ................................................................................................. 231
Database ..................................................................................................................... 231
1.9 Reports ....................................................................................................................................... 231
1.9.1 Plotting ............................................................................................................................ 231
Single branch plot s ...................................................................................................... 232 
Network plots ............................................................................................................... 232 
PsPlot .......................................................................................................................... 232 
1.9.2 Report Tool Details ......................................................................................................... 105
1.9.3 Network Report Tool ....................................................................................................... 238
Exporting to Excel .......................................................... .............................................. 240 
1.10 Expert Mode ............................................................................................................................... 240
1.10.1 Expert Mode ................................................................................................................... 240
Calculation engine ....................................................................................................... 240 
Network models ........................................................................................................... 240 
Single branch models .................................................................................................. 240 
1.10.2 How to work in Expert mode ........................................................................................... 241

 
v 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 7/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1.10.3 Batch mode ..................................................................................................................... 241

How to batch run a number of models, using Expert Mode ......................................... 241
1.10.4 Run Multiple Models ....................................................................................................... 241
1.10.5 Expert Data Entry ............................................................................................................ 242

2 Case studies ............................................................................................................ 244

2.1 Condensate Pipeline Case Study ............................................................................................ 245
2.1.1 Flow Assurance Considerations for Subsea Tieback Design ......................................... 246
Task 1: Developing a Compositional PVT Model ........................................................ 246 
Task 2: Constructi ng the Model ................................................................................... 247 
Task 3: Sizing the Subsea Tieback ............................................................................. 250 
2.1.2 Hydrates .......................................................................................................................... 251
Hydrate Mitigation Strategies in PIPESIM ..........................................................................
Task 4: Selecting Tieback Insulation Thickness .......................................................... 253
Task 5: Determini ng the Methanol Requirement ......................................................... 253
2.1.3 Severe Riser Slugging .................................................................................................... 255

Task 6: Screeni ng for Severe Riser Slugging .............................................................. 256 

2.1.4 Slug Catcher Sizing ......................................................................................................... 257
Hydrodynamic Slugging ......................................................................................................
Pigging ................................................................................................................................
Ramp-up .............................................................................................................................
Evaluating Each Scenario ............................................................................................ 0 
Task 7: Sizing a Slug Catcher ..................................................................................... 261
2.2 Oil Well Performance Analysis Case Study ............................................................................ 262
2.2.1 NODAL Analysis ............................................................................................................. 263
Getting Started ...................................................................................................................
Task 1: Building the Well Model .................................................................................. 263
Task 2: Performing NODAL Analysis .......................................................................... 266 
Task 3: Performing a Pressure/Temperature Profile ................................................... 267 
2.2.2 Fluid Calibration .............................................................................................................. 268
.............................................................................................................................................
Single Point Calibration ......................................................................................................
Multi-Point Calibration ........................................................................................................
Task 4: Calibrat ing PVT Data ...................................................................................... 270 
2.2.3 Pressure/Temperature Matching ..................................................................................... 273
Task 5: Matching Flow Correlations ............................................................................ 274
Task 6: Matching Inflow Performance ......................................................................... 277 
2.2.4 Well Performance Analysis ............................................................................................. 278
.............................................................................................................................................
Task 7: Conduc ting a Water Cut Sensitivity Analysis .................................................. 278 
Task 8: Evaluating Gas Lift Performance .................................................................... 279
Task 9: Working w ith Multiple Completions ................................................................. 280 
2.2.5 Flow Control Valve .......................................................................................................... 284
Task 10: Modeli ng a Flow Control Valve ..................................................................... 286 
2.3 Gas Well Performance Analysis Case Study .......................................................................... 286

 
vi 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 8/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2.3.1 Compositional Fluid Modeling ......................................................................................... 287

Equations of State (EoS) ...................................................................................................
Binary Interaction Parameter (BIP) Set ..............................................................................
Task 1: Creating a Compositional Fluid Model for a Gas Well .................................... 291
2.3.2 Gas Well Deliverability .................................................................................................... 294
2.3.3 Task 2: Calculating Gas Well Deliverability ..................................................................... 294
Task 3: Calibrating the Inflow Model Using Multipoint Test Data ................................ 297 
2.3.4 Erosion Prediction ........................................................................................................... 298
.............................................................................................................................................
 API 14 E .............................................................................................................................
Salama ...............................................................................................................................
Task 4: Selecting a Tubing Size .................................................................................. 299
2.3.5 Choke Modeling .............................................................................................................. 300
Task 5: Modeling a Flowline and Choke ...................................................................... 302 
Task 6: Predicting Future Production Rates ................................................................ 303
2.3.6 Liquid Loading ................................................................................................................. 304
Turner Droplet Model ..........................................................................................................
Task 7: Determini ng a Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading .............................. 305 
2.4 Looped Gas Gathering Network Case Study .......................................................................... 306
2.4.1 Model a Gathering Network ............................................................................................ 306
Boundary Conditions ..........................................................................................................
Solution Criteria ..................................................................................................................
2.4.2 Task 1: Building a Model of a Network ............................................................................ 307
2.4.3 Task 2: Performing a Network Simulation ....................................................................... 313
Looped Gathering Network Data ........................................................................................
2.5 User Equipment DLL Case Study - User Pump ...................................................................... 316
2.5.1 Task 1. Write a DLL to define a piece of equipment for use with PIPESIM .................... 316
Introduction .................................................................................................................. 316 
How to write a DLL ...................................................................................................... 317 
Note on Fortran ........................................................................................................... 318 
Note on C/C++ ............................................................................................................. 318 
PIPESIM flash ............................................................................................................. 318 
Exporting routines ........................................................................................................ 319
Build the DLL ............................................................................................................. .. 319
2.5.2 Task 2. Build a single branch model and use the DLL .................................................... 319
Place the built DLL in the PIPE SIM programs directory .............................................. 320 
Inform PIPESIM of the equipment DLL and its entry points ........................................ 320 

Build a single branch

of equipment model with an Engine Keyword Tool to represent the piece
................................................................................................................ 320 
Note on Network models ............................................................................................. 321
2.5.3 Task 3. Run the model and verify that the DLL worked .................................................. 321
2.6 Field Data Matching Case Study .............................................................................................. 324
2.6.1 Measured Data ................................................................................................................ 325
2.6.2 Model Setup .................................................................................................................... 326
2.6.3 Task 1. IPR matching ...................................................................................................... 326

 
vii 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 9/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2.6.4 Task 2. Optimizing Flow Correlation & Heat Transfer Coefficient ................................... 327
Load Measured Data ................................................................................................... 327 
Setup Optimizer Options ............................................................................................. 327 
Select flow correlation parameters and U factor .......................................................... 328 
2.6.5 Task 3. Validate Match .................................................................................................... 328
2.6.6 Task 4. Determine Choke Settings ................................................................................. 329
2.7 Liquid Loading Analysis Case Study ....................................................................................... 329
2.7.1 Task 1. Set up the Liquid Loading Model ........................................................................ 330
2.7.2 Task 2. Control Liquid Loading Options in PIPESIM ....................................................... 330
2.7.3 Task 3. Analyze Well for Liquid Loading ......................................................................... 330
2.7.4 Task 4. Determine Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading ....................................... 331
2.8 Ramey Heat Transfer Model Case Study ................................................................................. 331
2.8.1 Task 1. Set up Ramey Heat Transfer Properties ............................................................ 332
2.8.2 Task 2. Set up Detailed Heat Transfer for the Tubing ..................................................... 332
2.8.3 Task 3. Run the Model and View Results ....................................................................... 334

3 Support and Contact Infor mation .......................................................................... 335

3.1 Support ....................................................................................................................................... 335
3.1.1 SIS web and phone support ............................................................................................ 335
3.1.2 On-site support ......................................................... ....................................................... 335
3.1.3 SIS Education ................................................................................................................ 335
3.1.4 See Also: ......................................................................................................................... 335
3.2 How To Reach Us ...................................................................................................................... 336

4 Technical Description ............................................................................................. 337

4.1 Flow Modeling ............................................................................................................................ 337
4.1.1 Flow Correlations ............................................................................................................ 337
Flow Regimes .............................................................................................................. 337 
Horizontal Multiphase Flow Correlations ..................................................................... 339
Vertical Multiphase Flow Correlations ......................................................................... 343
Friction and Hol dup factors .......................................................................................... 347 
Single Phase Fl ow Correlations .................................................................................. 348 
Swap Angle ................................................................................................................. 352 
deWaar d (1995) Corrosion Model ............................................................................... 353
C unliffe's Method for Ramp Up Surge ......................................................................... 355 
Liquid by Sphere .......................................................................................................... 356 
Liquid Loading ............................................................................................................. 359
4.1.2 Inflow performance relationships (IPRs) ......................................................................... 360
Inflow Performance Relationships for Vertical Completions ........................................ 360 
Inflow Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions .................................... 389
Oil / Water Relative Permeability tables ...................................................................... 403
Coning ......................................................................................................................... 403

 
viii 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 10/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4.1.3 Chokes, Valves and Fittings ............................................................................................ 404

Choke .......................................................................................................................... 404
Choke Subcritical Flow Correlations ............................................................................ 407 
Choke Critical Pressure Ratio ..................................................................................... 410 
Choke Critical Flow Correlations ................................................................................. 411
Flow Control Valves Mechanistic Theory .................................................................... 412 
Fittings ......................................................................................................................... 413
4.1.4 Compressors, Pumps and Expanders ............................................................................ 416
Centrifugal Pum ps and Compressors .......................................................................... 416 
Reciprocating Compressor Operation ......................................................................... 419
Electrical Submer sible Pumps (ESP) .......................................................................... 212 
Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP) ................................................................................. 426 
Expanders ................................................................................................................... 428 
4.1.5 Multiphase Boosting Technology .................................................................................... 431
Positive Displacement Type ........................................................................................ 434
Dynamic Type .............................................................................................................. 438 
Helico-Axial Type ......................................................................................................... 438 
Contra-Rotating A xial Type ........................................................................................ 440 
 Alternative approach .................................................................................................... 440 
Guide to Multiphase Booster Efficiencies .................................................................... 441
4.2 Heat Transfer Modelling ......................................... ................................................................... 442
4.2.1 Energy Equation for Steady-State Flow .......................................................................... 442
4.2.2 Heat Transfer Coefficient ................................................................................................ 443
Resistances in series ................................................................................................... 443
Resistances in parallel ................................................................................................. 444
Heat transfer mod els ................................................................................................... 445 
Note ............................................................................................................................. 446 
4.2.3 Internal Fluid Film Heat Transfer Coefficient ................................................................... 446
KREITH8 ..................................................................................................................... 446 
Single Phase General Correlations ............................................................................. 447 
Multiphase Correlations ............................................................................................... 449
4.2.4 Calculation of Conductive Heat Transfer Coefficients ..................................................... 450
Wax Heat Transfer Coefficient .................................................................................... 451
Pipe wall heat transfer coefficient ................................................................................ 451
Conductive layer heat transfer coeff icient ................................................................... 451
4.2.5 Calculation of Convective Heat Transfer Coefficients ..................................................... 452
Convection in a fluid filled vertical annulus .................................................................. 453
Convection in a fluid filled horizontal annulus .............................................................. 453
Fully exposed pipe ....................................................................................................... 453
4.2.6 Heat Transfer Between a Horizontal Flowline and the Ground Surface ......................... 453
Fully Buried Ground Heat Transfer Coefficient ............................................................ 453
Partially Buried Gr ound Heat Transfer Coefficient ...................................................... 455 
4.2.7 Heat Transfer Between a Vertical Well and the Surrounding Rock ................................ 457
Ramey Model .............................................................................................................. 457 
4.3 Fluid Modelling .......................................................................................................................... 459

 
ix 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 11/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4.3.1 Black Oil Fluid Modeling .................................................................................................. 460

Black oil Correlations ................................................................................................... 460 
Solution Gas-oil Ratio ................................................................................................. 462 
Oil Formation Volume Factor ....................................................................................... 467 
Oil Viscosity ................................................................................................................. 469
Gas Compressibility ..................................................................................................... 475 
Gas Viscosity ............................................................................................................... 478 
Surface Tension .......................................................................................................... 479
Black Oil Enthalpy ....................................................................................................... 479
Black Oil Mixing ........................................................................................................... 481
4.3.2 Compositional Fluid Modeling ......................................................................................... 127
Cubic Equations of State ............................................................................................. 489
Non-cubic Equations of State ...................................................................................... 492 
Components for Non-Cubic Equations of State ........................................................... 497 
Viscosity Models for Compositional Fluids .................................................................. 469
Solid Precipitation ........................................................................................................ 499
4.3.3 Fluid Property Table Files ............................................................................................... 502
Internal fluid property tables ........................................................................................ 503
4.3.4 Liquid Properties ............................................................................................................. 503
Liquid Viscosity and Oil/Water Emulsions ................................................................... 503
Liquid-gas Surface Tension ......................................................................................... 508 
4.4 Solids Modeling ......................................................................................................................... 140
4.4.1 PIPESIM-DBR Wax Deposition Models .......................................................................... 509
Single phase (oil) Wax Deposition Model .................................................................... 509
Two Phase (Gas/Oil) Wax Deposition Model .............................................................. 509
Nomenclature .............................................................................................................. 510 
4.5 Workflows ...................................................................................................................................511
4.5.1 Solvers ............................................................................................................................ 511
Tolerance Equations .................................................................................................... 511
4.5.2 Addressing Network Speed Issues ................................................................................. 511
4.6 Typical and Default Data ........................................................................................................... 517
4.6.1 Limits ............................................................................................................................... 517
General ........................................................................................................................ 517 
Pipeline and facilities ................................................................................................... 517 
Well Performance ........................................................................................................ 517 
Network ....................................................................................................................... 517 
4.6.2 Tubing and Pipeline Tables ............................................................................................. 518
Tubing/Casing Tables .................................................................................................. 518 
Pipeline tables ............................................................................................................. 523

 
 x 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 12/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4.6.3 Typical Values ................................................................................................................. 527

Fluid Properties ........................................................................................................... 527 
Roughness .................................................................................................................. 528 
Thermal Conductivities ................................................................................................ 528 
Permeability ................................................................................................................. 529
Drainage Radius .......................................................................................................... 530 
Fittings ......................................................................................................................... 530 
4.7 Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... 532
4.7.1 Roman Letters ................................................................................................................. 532
4.7.2 Greek Letters .................................................................................................................. 535
4.7.3 Subscripts ....................................................................................................................... 536
4.8 Conversion Factors ................................................................................................................... 536
4.8.1 Length ............................................................................................................................. 537
4.8.2 Volume ............................................................................................................................ 537
4.8.3 Mass ................................................................................................................................ 537
4.8.4 Time ................................................................................................................................ 537
4.8.5 Gravity ............................................................................................................................. 537
4.8.6 Pressure .......................................................................................................................... 537
4.8.7 Energy ............................................................................................................................. 538
4.8.8 Power .............................................................................................................................. 538
4.8.9 Dynamic viscosity ........................................................................................................... 538
4.8.10 Permeability .................................................................................................................... 538
4.9 References ................................................................................................................................. 538

5 Keyword Index ........................................................................................................ 555

5.1 Keyword List .............................................................................................................................. 555
5.1.1 A ...................................................................................................................................... 555
5.1.2 B ...................................................................................................................................... 555
5.1.3 C ...................................................................................................................................... 556
5.1.4 D E .................................................................................................................................. 556
5.1.5 F ...................................................................................................................................... 556
5.1.6 G ..................................................................................................................................... 556
5.1.7 H ...................................................................................................................................... 557
5.1.8 I ....................................................................................................................................... 557
5.1.9 J ...................................................................................................................................... 557
5.1.10 K ...................................................................................................................................... 557
5.1.11 L ...................................................................................................................................... 557

5.1.12
5.1.13 M .....................................................................................................................................
N ...................................................................................................................................... 557
558
5.1.14 O ..................................................................................................................................... 558
5.1.15 P ...................................................................................................................................... 558
5.1.16 Q R .................................................................................................................................. 558
5.1.17 S ...................................................................................................................................... 558
5.1.18 T ...................................................................................................................................... 559
5.1.19 U ...................................................................................................................................... 559

 
 xi 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 13/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.1.20 V ...................................................................................................................................... 559

5.1.21 W ..................................................................................................................................... 559
5.1.22 XYZ ................................................................................................................................. 559
5.2 Input Files and Input Data Conventions .................................................................................. 559
5.2.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 559
5.2.2 Statements ...................................................................................................................... 560
5.2.3 Delimiters ........................................................................................................................ 560
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 561
5.2.4 Abbreviations .................................................................................................................. 561
Example ....................................................................................................................... 561
5.2.5 Numeric data ................................................................................................................... 562
Example ....................................................................................................................... 562 
5.2.6 Units Description ............................................................................................................. 562
5.2.7 Character Input ............................................................................................................... 562
Example ....................................................................................................................... 563
5.2.8 Comment Statements and Blank Lines ........................................................................... 563
Example ....................................................................................................................... 563
5.2.9 Multiple Value Data Sets ................................................................................................. 563
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 564
5.2.10 Input Files ........................................................................................................................ 564
General ........................................................................................................................ 564
The main input ('.PSM' or '.PST') file ........................................................................... 565 
Included files and the INCLUDE statement ................................................................. 565 
 AUTOEXEC.PSM ........................................................................................................ 566 
modelname.U2P or branchname.U2P ......................................................................... 566 
5.3 General Data ............................................................................................................................... 566
5.3.1 HEADER - Job Accounting Header (Required) ............................................................... 566
Example ....................................................................................................................... 567 
5.3.2 JOB - Job Title (Optional) ................................................................................................ 567
5.3.3 CASE - Case Title (Optional) .......................................................................................... 567
5.3.4 UNITS - Input and Output Units (Optional) ..................................................................... 567
Example ....................................................................................................................... 568 
5.3.5 OPTIONS Calculation Procedure Options (Optional) ..................................................... 568
5.3.6 RATE: Fluid Flow Rate Data ........................................................................................... 578
5.3.7 ITERN Iteration Data (Optional) ...................................................................................... 580
5.3.8 INLET System Inlet Data ................................................................................................. 582
5.3.9 PRINT Output Printing Options (Optional) ...................................................................... 583

Per-case output page options ...................................................................................... 583

 Attributes ..................................................................................................................... 586 
Point report subcodes .................................................................................................. 587 
One-off output pages ................................................................................................... 589
5.3.10 PLOT Output Plotting Options (Optional) ........................................................................ 590
5.3.11 NOPRINT Output Print Suppression Options (Optional) ................................................. 593
5.3.12 BEGIN , END - Block delimiters ...................................................................................... 593
Example ....................................................................................................................... 594

 
 xii 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 14/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.3.13 PUSH - Remote Action Editing (optional) ....................................................................... 595

5.3.14 PLOTFILEDATA .............................................................................................................. 596
5.3.15 EXECUTE - deferred execution of a statement .............................................................. 596
5.3.16 USERDLL - Equipment ................................................................................................... 597
5.4 Flow Modeling ............................................................................................................................ 598
5.4.1 FLOW CORRELATION DATA ........................................................................................ 598
VCORR Vertical Flow Correlation Options .................................................................. 598 
HCORR Horizontal Flow Correlation Options .............................................................. 601
SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (Optional) ......................................................... 604
USERDLL - Flow Correlations ..................................................................................... 606 
5.4.2 SYSTEM DATA ............................................................................................................... 606
Changing Parameters within the System Profile ......................................................... 607 
CHOKE (Optional 
 ) ....................................................................................................... 608 
COMPCRV and P UMPCRV: Compressor and Pump performance curves ................ 612 
COMPLETION Completion Profile Delimiter ............................................................... 613
COMPRESSOR C ompressor (Optional) ..................................................................... 615 
CORROSION .............................................................................................................. 616 
RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump ................................................................................ 616 
EROSION Erosion Rate and Velocity (Opt ional) ......................................................... 617 
EQUIPMENT Generic Equipment ............................................................................... 618 
EXPANDER Expander (Optional) ................................................................................ 620 
FITTING : Valves and Fittings ..................................................................................... 621
FMPUMP (Optional) .................................................................................................... 623
FRAMO 2009 (Optional) .............................................................................................. 623
HEATER Heater/C ooler (Optional) .............................................................................. 624
GASLIFT: Multiple Injection Ports in Gaslifted Wells ................................................... 624
INJPORT Gas Lift Injection Valve ............................................................................... 628 
INJGAS: Injection Gas (Optional) and INJF LUID: Fluid Injection ................................ 630 
MPBOOSTER (O ptional) ............................................................................................. 632 
MPUMP Multiphase Pump (Optional) .......................................................................... 633
NODE System Pr ofile Data (Required) ....................................................................... 635 
PIPE: Pipe or Tubing cross-section dimensions (Required) ........................................ 636 
PUMP Pump (Opt ional) ............................................................................................... 638 
COMPCRV and P UMPCRV: Compressor and Pum p performance curves ................ 612 
REINJECTOR (O ptional) ............................................................................................. 641
RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump ................................................................................ 616 
SEPARATOR Separator (Optional) ............................................................................. 642 
SLUG Slug Calcul ation Options (Optional) .................................................................. 643
WELLHEAD Well head Profile Delimit er ...................................................................... 645 

 
 xiii 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 15/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.4.3 WELL PERFORMANCE MODELING ............................................................................. 645

INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................... 645 
WELLPI Well Productivity Index (Optional) ................................................................. 646 
WPCURVE (Optional) ................................................................................................. 647 
VOGEL Vogel Equation (Optional) .............................................................................. 647 
FETKOVICH Fetkovich Equation (Optional) ................................................................ 647 
JONES Jones Equation (Optional) .............................................................................. 648 
IFPPSSE : Data f or the Pseudo Steady State Equation (Optional) ............................. 648 
WCOPTION Well Completion Data (Optional) ............................................................ 650 
IPRCRV or IFPCR V: Inflow Performance Curve ......................................................... 653
IFPTAB Inflow Performance Tabulation (Optional) ..................................................... 654
CONETAB Coning Relationship Tabulation (Optional) ............................................... 656 
BACKPRES Back Pressure Equation (BPE) (Optional) .............................................. 656 
HORWELL Horizontal Well Inflow Performance .......................................................... 657 
LAYER Reserv oir Layer Properties ............................................................................. 659
RESER VOIR ............................................................................................................... 660 
PERMCRV: Curves of Relative Permeability versus Saturation (Optional) ................. 660 
PERMTAB: Tabulation of Relative Permeability versus Saturation (Optional   ) ............ 661
HVOGEL (Optional) ..................................................................................................... 662 
FORCHHEIMER ( Optional   ) ......................................................................................... 662 
FRACTURE: Data for H ydraulic Fracture ................................................................... 662 
TRANSIENT: Data for the Transient Inflow equation (Optional) ................................. 663
5.5 HEAT TRANSFER DATA ........................................................................................................... 664
5.5.1 Notes on Heat Transfer Output Printing .......................................................................... 665
5.5.2 HEAT Heat Balance Options (Optional) .......................................................................... 665
Heat transfer mod e ...................................................................................................... 667 
5.5.3 COAT Pipe Coat and Annular Space Medium Data (Optional) ....................................... 668
Example ......................................................................... .............................................. 669
5.5.4 TCOAT Pipe Coat Thickness Data (Optional) ................................................................. 669
5.5.5 KCOAT Pipe Coat Thermal Conductivity Data (Optional) ............................................... 670
Files ............................................................................................................................. 671
Example .......................................................... ............................................................. 671
5.5.6 FLUID Fluid Thermal Conductivity Data (Optional) ......................................................... 672
5.5.7 CONFIG: Pipe Heat Transfer Configuration Data (Optional) .......................................... 673
5.5.8 Pipeline burial depth examples ....................................................................................... 674
5.6 Fluid Modeling ........................................................................................................................... 674
5.6.1 BLACK OIL DATA ........................................................................................................... 674

BLACKOIL: Black Oil Fluid definitions ......................................................................... 675 

PROP Fluid Property Data (Optional) .......................................................................... 677 
LVIS: Liquid Viscosity Data (Optional) ......................................................................... 678 
CPFLUID: Fluid H eat Capacity Data (Optional) .......................................................... 683
CPFLUID: Fluid H eat Capacity Data (Optional) .......................................................... 683
TPRINT Black Oil Table Printing (Optional) ................................................................ 684
CALIBRATE: Blac k Oil Property Calibration (Optional) ............................................... 684
CONTAMINANTS Gas phase contaminants data (optional) ....................................... 686 

 
 xiv 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 16/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.6.2 COMPOSITIONAL DATA ................................................................................................ 686

 AQUEOUS: Aqueous Component Specification ......................................................... 687 
COMPOSITION: Compositional Fluid Specification .................................................... 687 
LIBRARY: Library Component Specification ............................................................... 691
MODEL: Model Properties Specification ..................................................................... 692 
PETROFRAC: Petroleum Fraction Specification ......................................................... 693
TPRINT Tabular Data Print Options (Optional) ........................................................... 694
5.7 PIPESIM OPERATIONS OPTIONS ............................................................................................ 694
5.7.1 NAPLOT: Nodal Analysis ................................................................................................ 694
5.7.2 NAPOINT System Analysis Point .................................................................................... 698
5.7.3 MULTICASE Introduction and Summary ........................................................................ 699
General Rules for use with MULTICASE ..................................................................... 699
5.7.4 Explicit Subcodes ............................................................................................................ 700
5.7.5 General Purpose Subcodes ............................................................................................ 702
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 703
5.7.6 Combining MULTICASE and CASE/ENDCASE ............................................................. 704
5.7.7 Multiple Case and PS-PLOT ........................................................................................... 705
5.7.8 Reservoir Simulator Tabular Data Interface .................................................................... 705
5.7.9 ASSIGN Changing Profile Data by Assignment .............................................................. 707
Example ....................................................................................................................... 707 
5.7.10 OPTIMIZE ....................................................................................................................... 708
Examples ..................................................................................................................... 708 
5.7.11 Wax deposition and Time Stepping modeling options .................................................... 182
Time subcodes ............................................................................................................ 709
Termination subcodes ................................................................................................. 710 
Wax subcodes ............................................................................................................. 711
BP, DBRS or DBR M method subcodes ....................................................................... 712 
Shell subcodes ............................................................................................................ 713
5.8 PIPESIM-Net keywords .............................................................................................................. 715
5.8.1 SETUP ............................................................................................................................ 715
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 715 
5.8.2 BRANCH ......................................................................................................................... 717
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 718 
5.8.3 SOURCE ......................................................................................................................... 719
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 719
5.8.4 SINK ................................................................................................................................ 722
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 722 

5.8.5 JUNCTION
Subcodes......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... 724
724
5.8.6 NSEPARATOR .............................................................................................................. 724
Subcodes ..................................................................................................................... 724
5.9 Keyword Index ........................................................................................................................... 555

 
 xv 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 17/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.9.1 Keyword List .................................................................................................................... 555

 A .................................................................................................................................. 555 
B .................................................................................................................................. 555 
C .................................................................................................................................. 556 
D E ............................................................................................................................... 556 
F .................................................................................................................................. 556 
G .................................................................................................................................. 556 
H .................................................................................................................................. 557 
I .................................................................................................................................... 557 
J ................................................................................................................................... 557 
K .................................................................................................................................. 557 
L ................................................................................................................................... 557 
M .................................................................................................................................. 557 
N .................................................................................................................................. 558 
O .................................................................................................................................. 558 
P .................................................................................................................................. 558 
Q R .............................................................................................................................. 558 
S .................................................................................................................................. 558 
T .................................................................................................................................. 559
U .................................................................................................................................. 559
V .................................................................................................................................. 559
W ................................................................................................................................. 559
 XYZ .............................................................................................................................. 559

6 Open Link ................................................................................................................ 731

7 Third party applications ......................................................................................... 732

Index ...................... ...................... ............................................................................................................ 733

 
 xvi 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 18/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

User Guide 1
1.1 Introduction
PIPESIM was originally developed by a company called Baker Jardine. Baker Jardine was formed in
1985 to provide software and consultanting services to the oil and gas industry. In April 2001, Baker 
Jardine was acquired by Schlumberger.
Schlumberger has invested in the redevelopment of the industry's leading Production Engineering
software to ensure that it cansolve challenging multiphase flow problems. PIPESIM couples a leading-
edge Graphical User Interface (GUI) with a field-proven computation engine.

1.1.1 Company profile

Schlumberger has wide experience in the design and optimization of oil and gas production systems
particularly in the transportation of live hydrocarbon fluids, a vital element in the production and
processing of hydrocarbons. The development of efficient gathering and transportation systems
requires a combination of detailed theoretical knowledge and practical experience of the complex
behavior of multiphase hydrocarbon mixtures.
Schlumberger is at the leading edge of software development for the oil and gas industry with the
software products such as PIPESIM, OFM, and ECLIPSE. These tools have been successfully
applied to numerous systems for the modelling and data management of new and existing oil and
gas production and distribution systems for most major oil companies.
PIPESIM is a steady-state, multiphase flow simulator used for the design and diagnostic analysis of 
oil and gas production systems. PIPESIM software tools models multiphase flow from the reservoir 
to the separator.

Schlumbergerand
technologies, is actively involvedain
has managed research
diverse andofdevelopment
range joint industryofprojects
new of in
multiphase
this field. fluid flow

1.1.2 Getting Started

Training courses on the use of PIPESIM can be arranged. Please contact your local Schlumberger 
Support office or visit www.pipesim.com.
New users are encouraged to read the following sections in the user guide/help system:

User Guide
1
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 19/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Case Studies (p.244) (either Oil Well Design (p.262) or Condensate Pipeline (p.245)) for details
on how to build models.
• Using the model wizard (p.27) to build a model.

Applications
PIPESIM offers a wide ranging capability for modeling entire production systems from the reservoir 
to the processing facility. Typical applications include:

Well Performance analysis

• Well design
• Well optimization
• Well inflow performance modeling
• Gas Lift design and performance modeling
• ESP design and performance modeling
• PCP performance modeling
• Horizontal well modeling
• Injection well design
• Reservoir VFP table generation
• Detailed sensitivity analysis
• Automated model matching

Pipeline and Facilities

• Point by point generation of pressure and temperature profiles

• Prediction of solids formation (hydrates, wax, asphaltene, scale)

• Slug catcher design (hydrodynamic slugs, pigging, ramp-up)
• Equipment selection (pumps, compressors, multiphase boosters)
• Pipeline design
• Comparing measured data with calculated data

Network analysis module

• Unique network solution algorithm to model wells in large networks
• Rigorous thermal modeling of all network components

• Multiple looped pipeline/flowline capability

• Debottlenecking studies
• Comprehensive pipeline equipment models
• Gathering and distribution networks
• Gas lift optimization

User Guide
2 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 20/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Technical Description of Features

Depending on the type of application, users may select from an extensive set of features to model a
wide variety of production systems and fluids. The following tables provide a technical summary of 
these features. Additional details are available throughout the online help system.

Feature Description
Black Oil • Latest industry standard fluid property correlations that cover all types of 
(p.460) petroleum fluids from extra heavy oil to light oil and condensate. It can also
be used for simplified gas, utility fluids, and so on.
• Multi-level calibration from simple bubble point matching to advance fluid
calibration matching multiple sets of lab data measurements.
• Wide range of viscosity correlations that includes options for user-specified
dead oil and emulsion viscosities.
• Wide range of emulsion correlations covering tight to light emulsion types.
 Also, users can specify emulsion tables, and specify or calculate the
inversion point.
• Ability to plot fluid properties at lab or reservoirs conditions.
• Specify gas contaminants used for compressibility factor adjustment and
corrosion calculations.
• Specify thermal data for all phases of a black oil fluid for accurate thermal
modeling and some of the standard methods for fluid enthalpy calculation for 
accurate energy balance prediction.
• Comprehensive Fluid Mixing rules.
Compositional • Choices of Schlumberger developed and third party flash packages,
(p.127) including:
• Eclipse 300
• Multiflash
• DBR
• GERG 2008
• Refprop V8
• These packages come with their own standard library of components and
binary interaction parameters. Most of these packages allow users to define
and calculate properties of pseudo components for accurate modeling of fluid
properties in the absence of detailed fluid characterization.
• Has a wide range of equation of states and transport properties correlations
that are based on selected flash packages:
• Flash Packages : 2-3-Peng-Robinson (standard and corrected), SRK
(standard and corrected), Association (CPA), BWRS, GERG-2008, NIST
default, and so on. Correction for volume shift and Accentric factors as
applicable.

User Guide
3
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 21/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Binary Interaction Parameters : OilGas1, OilGas2, OilGas3, OilGas4,
user specified
• Viscosity Models : Pederson, LBC, Aasberg-Petersen, NIST default

• Emulsion Methods : Woelflin, Volume ratio, continuous phase, none

• Surface Tension : Macleod-Sugden, NIST default
• Generate Phase Envelopes, including quality lines and formation curves for 
hydrates, waxes and asphaltenes.
• Has Quick Flash calculations to examine fluid properties at specified P-T
Flash/Separation conditions.
• Ability to perform phase ratio matching for water, Oil and Gas based on field
measurement. This feature is useful for quick updates of fluid composition
based on actual measurement of phases at the field separator.
• Salinity analysis based on Ion, Salt Components and TDS (Multiflash).

Note: Listed features vary depending on selected flash package. Refer to

the PIPESIM application for available options against a given flash package.

PVT Files  A number of third-party applications are capable of generating PVT files that
(p.140) can be used by PIPESIM. These applications include:
• PVTSim
• HYSYS
• UniSim
• ScaleChem
• DBRSolids
• GUTS
Steam (p.146) PIPESIM allows steam modeling and interprets the properties of fluid based on
 ASTM97 Steam Tables. Steam models can be used for producers and injectors
in both single branch and network modules of PIPESIM.
Table 1.1: Fluid Property Modeling 

Feature Description
Single Phase • Moody

Flow Correlation •
(p.348) AGA (with tuning option for drag factor)
• Panhandle A (with tuning option for flow efficiency)
• Panhandle B (with tuning option for flow efficiency)
• Hazen – Williams (with tuning option for C factor)
• Weymouth (with tuning option for flow efficiency)

User Guide
4
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 22/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Cullender – Smith
Vertical Standard
Multiphase Flow • Beggs & Brill (Original & Revised)
Correlation
(Standard) • Duns & Ros
(p.343) • Govier, Aziz
• Govier, Aziz & Fogarasi
• Gray (Original & Modified)
• Hagedorn & Brown (Original/Revised - with/without Duns & Ros map)
• Mukherjee & Brill
• Orkiszewski
• No-Slip

OLGA
• Olga-S 2000 Version 6.2.7 (Oct 2010) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.3.2 (Feb 2009) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.3 (Feb 2008) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.0 (Jun 2006) – 2/3 Phase
TULSA Unified Mechanistic Model
• TUFFP Unified 3-Phase v 2011.1 (with default/override emulsion viscosity)
• TUFFP Unified 2-Phase v 2011.1
LedaFlow Point Model
• LedaFlow Point Model v1.0.231.1 (Jun 2011) – 2/3 Phase
Horizontal Standard
Multiphase Flow • Beggs & Brill (Original & Revised – with/without Taitel Dukler map)
Correlation
(Standard) • Baker Jardine Revised
(p.339) • Dukler, AGA & Flanagan (with/without Eaton Holdup)
• Lockhart & Martinelli (with/without Taitel Dukler map)
• Mukherjee & Brill
• Oliemans

• Xiao
• Dukler  
• No-Slip
OLGA
• Olga-S 2000 Version 6.2.7 (Oct 2010) – 2/3 Phase

User Guide
5 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 23/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.3.2 (Feb 2009) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.3 (Feb 2008) – 2/3 Phase
• Olga-S 2000 Version 5.0 (Jun 2006) – 2/3 Phase
TULSA Unified Mechanistic Model
• TUFFP Unified 3-Phase v 2011.1 (with default/override emulsion viscosity)
• TUFFP Unified 2-Phase v 2011.1
LedaFlow Point Model
• LedaFlow Point Model v1.0.231.1 (Jun 2011) – 2/3 Phase
Calibration PIPESIM includes a feature that can adjust the holdup-factor, friction-factor,
(p.122) and U-value multiplier automatically to match measured pressures and
temperatures. Additionally, the flow correlation comparison operation can
quickly sensitize on flow correlations to aid in selecting the most appropriate

model.
Flow Regime PIPESIM produces high-resolution flow regime maps at any point in the system
Maps (p.113) that is selected.
Extensibility PIPESIM includes code templates that can assist users in compiling their own
(p.111) 2-phase or 3-phase flow correlation plug-in dll.
Table 1.2: Flow Correlation Options

Feature Description
Wellbore Heat • User Specified Heat Transfer Coefficient
Transfer (p.90) • Calculated Heat Transfer Coefficient using Ramey’s Model (takes into
account thermal properties of various layers – rock, cement, completion
fluid, casing, tubing, etc)
Flowline & Riser  • User Specified Heat Transfer Coefficient
Heat Transfer  • Calculated Heat Transfer Coefficient taking into account pipe and ground
(p.443) thermal properties and properties of multiple layers of pipe coatings
(optional) choosing. PIPESIM rigorously calculates conductive and
convective (free and forced) heat transfer for pipes that are fully buried,
partially buried and fully exposed to air or water.
Inside Fluid Film  Available methods are:
Heat Transfer  • Kreith Model
Coefficient
(p.446) • Kaminsky Model (flow regime dependent)
User has the option to consider/ignore Fluid Film Heat Transfer coefficient.
Energy Balance PIPESIM has comprehensive energy balance calculation taking into account
(p.149) potential energy, kinetic energy, and internal energy to effectively calculate
heat loss/gain in the system and heat transfer with the outside environment.

User Guide
6 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 24/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
Detailed Thermodynamics are considered such as Joule-Thomson heating/
cooling and frictional heating.
Flow Assurance PIPESIM provides several other calculations to aid accurate flow assurance
Related (p.127) studies:
• Calculation and reporting of Hydrate sub-cooling Δ T.
• Calculation and reporting of Asphaltene sub-cooling Δ T.
• Calculation and reporting of wax sub-cooling Δ T.
Table 1.3: Heat Transfer Calculations

Feature Description
Wellbore PIPESIM allows simple and detailed modes for defining a wellbore for single and
Modeling multilayer producers and injectors. Options include:
(p.42) • 2-dimensional deviation surveys
• Simple/detailed geothermal data for heat transfer calculations
• Tubular, annular or mixed flow (using equivalent hydraulic diameter concept)
• Downhole equipment, including chokes, sub-surface safety valve, separators,
chemical injectors
• Artificial Lift equipment, including gas lift valves, ESP’s, PCP’s and Rod
Pumps
• Coil Tubing/velocity string modeling
Skin Several standard completions options are supported in PIPESIM:
Calculations • Open hole Completion and associated skin calculations due to
(p.59)
• Damaged zone, Partial penetration
• Open hole Gravel Pack Completion and associated skin calculations due to
• Damaged zone, Partial penetration, Gravel Pack
• Perforated Completion and associated skin calculations due to
• Damaged zone, Compacted Zone, Partial penetration and Perforation
(perforation skin calculation use methods like McLeod and Karakas/Tariq;
taking into account perforation geometry, density and phase angle)
• Gravel Pack and Perforated Completion and associated skin calculations due
to
• Damaged zone, Compacted Zone, Partial penetration, Gravel Pack and
Perforation
• Frac-Pack Completion and associated skin calculations due to
• Partial Penetration and Frac-Pack Skin (accounting for fracture half length,
fracture width, proppant permeability, frac face damage, fracture choke
damage, and so on)

User Guide
7 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 25/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
Most of the parameters responsible for skin contribution are available for 
sensitivity and uncertainty analysis.
Skin calculations available in PIPESIM across horizontal completions account
for effects of the damaged zone, gravel pack, compacted zone and perforations.
For both horizontal and vertical completions, the user has the option to override
skin calculations by supplying a user defined skin component that may be
available from well test data.
Inflow Vertical Completions:
Performance • Well PI - Gas
Modeling
(p.360) • Well PI – Liquid (with/without taking into account Vogel correction and
correction for water phase)
• Vogel – (Liquid only)
• Fetkovitch – (Liquid only)
• Jones – Gas & Liquid
• Backpressure – (Gas only)
• Forchheimer (Gas only)
 All of the above equations allow calculation of dependent parameters based on
user supplied well test data (if available).
• Pseudo Steady State – Gas (variation – Pressure squared/Pseudo Pressure
and with/without transient calculation)
• Pseudo Steady State – Liquid (with/without Vogel correction and with/without
transient calculation)
• Hydraulic Fracture Model – Gas (with/without transient calculation)
• Hydraulic Fracture Model – Liquid (with/without transient calculation and/or 
Vogel correction)
Horizontal Completion (Single Point PI Models):
• Steady State Joshi Model for Liquid and Gas based IPR calculation
• Pseudo Steady State Babu & Odeh Model for Liquid and Gas based IPR
calculations
Horizontal Completion (Distributed PI Models): Distributed PI models take
into account detailed profile of tubular in the horizontal completion interval:

• Steady State Joshi Model for Liquid and Gas based IPR calculation
• Pseudo Steady State Babu & Odeh Model for Liquid and Gas based IPR
calculations
• Simple distributed PI Model

User Guide
8 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 26/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
Intelligent This feature allows users to control flow from a particular layer to reduce
Completions backpressure on other potential contributing layers. This has been implemented
(p.171) by introducing downhole flow control valve linked to the completed layer. Example
applications include:
• Shut-off/control of high watercut layers
• Shut-off/control of gassy layers
• Control water and gas coning
• Regulate flow from various layers
• Enhance overall production for well by managing system back-pressure
• Control corrosion problems that could be due to fluid contribution from a
specific layer 
• Inject into target zones

Well specific
Operations Refer to PIPESIM Operation features section.

Table 1.4: Well Modeling 

Feature Description
Flowlines (p.86) PIPESIM allows simple and detailed modes for defining flowlines and risers.
and Risers (p.102) Options include:
• Ability to define pipe undulations to account for uneven ground (flowlines)
• Model a Riser and Downcomers
• Specify data required from simple to detailed heat transfer calculation (For 
more information, refer to the heat transfer section.)
• Specify measured pressure and temperature (if available). This
information is used for model tuning. (For more information, refer to data
matching operation under the ‘Flow Correlation’ section.)
• Simplified schematic is available to indicate flowline/riser geometry.
Sources & Sinks Define points of fluid entry into and exiting the system instead of production/
(p.108) injection wells.
Network sources may be specified with PQ curves to represent wellhead
responses.
Chokes (p.404) PIPESIM allows users to model choke/flow restriction both at surface or 
(Surface/ downhole/wellbore. Options include:
downhole) • User specified or calculated choke bean size.
• User specified or calculated critical pressure ratio across choke.
• Various correlations for calculation of pressure losses:
• Subcritical Correlation: Mechanistic, API 14B, Ashford

User Guide
9
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 27/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Critical Correlation: Mechanistic, Gilbert, Ros, Achong, Baxendell,
 Ashford, Poetbeck, Omana, Pilehvari, User Specified Correlation
• Advanced options are available to tune performance of choke by
specifying flow coefficients for liquid and gas phases, discharge
coefficient, Cp/Cv, Gas Expansion factor, etc.
Pumps (p.107) • Control pump performance by applying limits for DP, Power, and so on,
or combination of these
• Calculate pump parameters – DP, Power, and so on — for single or 
multiple sets of operating conditions
• Simple thermodynamic model or user specified curves
• Most pump performance parameters — head, DP, power, number of 
stages (if applicable), speed (if applicable), efficiency, and so on are
available as sensitivity variables for design or uncertainty analysis

• Viscosity correction (Turzo method)

Multiphase • Generic Multiphase booster (treated as pump and compressor in parallel)
Booster (p.92) • Twin Screw Multiphase Booster (ability to specify vendor booster 
performance data)
• Framo Multiple Boosters:
• Model catalog
• Tuning factors
• Models Series vs. Parallel and recirculation behavior 
• Generates detailed performance maps
• Control booster performance by applying operational limits in various
combinations.
• Calculate booster parameters for single or multiple sets of operating
conditions.
• Most of the booster performance parameters (depending on selected type
and model) — head, DP, power, speed, efficiency, head parameter,
flowrate parameter, and so on are available as sensitivity variables for 
design or uncertainty analysis.
Compressor  • Model both centrifugal and reciprocating compressors/expanders.
(p.82) and • Control compressor performance by applying limits for DP, Power, and so
Expander (p.85) on, or combination of these.
• Calculate pump parameters – DP, Power, and so on for single or multiple
sets of operating conditions.
• Ability to model various thermodynamic routes – Adiabatic, Polytropic or 
Mollier.

User Guide
10 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 28/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Reciprocating compressors allows multiple stages with the option to add
inter-cooler temperature condition. User can model compressor 
performance for a series of discharge pressure settings.
• Users can add Vendor pump performance curves to the PIPESIM
database.
• Most of the compressor performance parameters — head, DP, power,
number of stages (if applicable), speed (if applicable), efficiency, and so
on are available as sensitivity variables for design or uncertainty analysis.
Generic Equipment Generic equipment allows user the option to model any type of object that is
(p.81) not available in PIPESIM equipment library. Some of the key features are:
• Model equipment with several combination of inputs to offer following
types (or combination) of equipment settings:
• Fixed discharge temperature device

• Heater/cooler 
• Pressure booster or reducer devices
• Device with fixed duty
• Several combinations of these.
• Generic equipment in PIPESIM supports various thermodynamic routes
 – Isothermal, Isenthalpic, and Isentropic.
• Control compressor performance by applying limits for DP, Power, and so
on, or combination of these.
Separator Inline PIPESIM has several options for modeling separators, including:
and Network (Inline
for both surface & • Inline separators (separated streams get discarded) of various types —
Liquid, Gas or Water with user specified separation efficiency.
downhole) (p.106)
• Inline separators can be used both at surface or downhole (downhole
separators are also available at the upstream of various artificial lift
equipments.)
• Network separators allows tracking of both product and separated
streams.
• Separation relies on rigorous PIPESIM engine flash calculations
performed for all types of fluid definitions based on in-situ P, T conditions.
• PIPESIM allows separators configured in series/parallel arrangements to
model conditions to model multistage separation trains.
• PIPESIM network separators adjust for pressure continuity across
separators to allow boundary condition matching for each outlet stream.
Heat Exchangers Generic equipment allows user the option to model any type of object that is
(p.88) not available in PIPESIM equipment library. Some of the key features are:

User Guide
11
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 29/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Model heat exchangers with several combination of inputs to offer 
following types (or combination) of equipment settings:
• Fixed discharge temperature, temperature differential or duty.

• Fixed discharge pressure or pressure drop.

• All the above parameters are available as sensitivity variables.
• Wide range of reports are available at inlet and outlet conditions.
Fluid Injection PIPESIM allows modeling of fluid injectors both at the surface and in the
(Surface/ wellbore. Fluid injection can be used to inject chemicals or other fluids to
downhole) (p.79) handle flow assurance issues. Key features include:
• Ability to inject any type of petroleum fluid (Black Oil, compositional, MFL
file (generated from Multiflash Standalone.)
• Injected fluid is seamlessly mixed with the main fluid to predict mixture
properties.
Adders/Multipliers  Adders and/or multipliers are used as a tool to simulate performance of a
flowing production/injection system to account for many scenarios. Some
examples are:
• Designing a pipeline system accounting for expected wells in future.
• Simulating turndown scenarios in surface networks.
• Designing parallel pipelines.
• Many other similar scenarios.
Report Tool Report tools are widely used to generate detailed report at any point in the
(p.105) flowing system.
• Available reports include:
• Flow map (to generate high resolution flow regime map)
• Phase split (compositional fluids)
• Fluid properties (stock tank condition)
• Fluid properties (flowing condition)
• Cumulative values
• Multiphase flow parameters
• Slugging Values

• Sphere generated liquid volumes

• Heat Transfer input values
• Heat Transfer output values
• Compositional detail (in-situ condition)
• Phase envelope
• These reports have several uses. Some are:

User Guide
12 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 30/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• As FEED for designing any equipment to be installed at any point in
the system.
• Detailed performance analysis across any surface equipment.

• Analyzing performance of production system on phase envelope to

understand possible flow assurance issues.
Engine Keyword This is an advanced tool that allows expert PIPESIM users to perform
Tool (p.84) advanced modeling tasks beyond the range of functionalities exposed in the
PIPESIM user interface. There are many tasks that can be performed using
engine keyword tool. Some of the high level applications are:
• Perform advanced settings such as changing flow correlations, heat
transfer methods and other calculation options in the middle of a flowing
system.
• Use keyword tools to build special equipment or combination of equipment
not supported by the PIPESIM User Interface.
• Add special equipment such as inline heaters, coolers, pressure boosters,
and so on.
• Configure special reports at any point in the system.
Table 1.5: Surface Equipment 

Feature Description
Gas Lift PIPESIM uses advanced methods to perform design and diagnostics for a gas
Systems lifted wells. There are many other associated operations also available in
(p.190) PIPESIM to analyze performance of a gas lifted well. Some of the key features
include:
Gas Lift Valve Database
• Extensive database of gas lift valves of several types/series and sizes from
various manufacturers.
• Bompet
• Daniel
• Hughes
• Macco
• Schlumberger (Camco)

• Schlumberger (Merla)
• Weatherford
Users can easily add new valves to the database.
Gas Lift Design
• Several design methods available (IPO-Surface Close, IPO-pt-Min-Max &
PPO)

User Guide
13
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 31/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Valve sizing and mandrel spacing calculations for optimum design
• Valve sizing for existing mandrel spacings
• Design can be based on pressure boundary conditions or at a fixed target
production rate
• Design takes into account detailed hydraulic calculations inside the tubing as
well as frictional pressure loss for injected gas through the annulus.
• User configurable design bias/safety factors to control design (conservative
vs. worst case scenario)
• User control over choice of valve manufacturer, size, series
• Redesign option available with change in spacing, change in one or more
valves, change in design temperature profile, and so on
• Design results and plots include:

• Recommended valve information – model, spacing, size, and so on

• Recommended test rack opening pressure for all valves
• Valve throughput calculations
• Pressure and temperature profiles in the tubing and annulus section as well
as values across each valve.
• A well formatted report including input data (design control, design
parameters, design bias, fluid data, and so on), design calculation and
spacing plot.
Gas Lift Diagnostics
• Gas lift diagnostics take into account injection gas conditions and operating
boundary conditions to provide operational status of each valve (open/closed/
throttling.)
• Graphical diagnostic results provide production and injection profiles and the
status of valves.
• Tabulated performance data sheet reporting operating status of each valve.
Other Analysis
• Deepest Injection Point Operation : Calculated deepest injection point and
associated production rate for given fluid and operating conditions
• Gas Lift Bracketing Operation : Calculated deepest injection point and

associated
(typically production
current rate for
and future minimum and maximum sets of conditions
performance.)
• Lift Gas Response : Analyzes performance of a well under gas lift for various
conditions such as changing fluid data, injection and operating conditions and/
or varying injection depths.
• Gas Lifted Wells in PIPESIM are also exposed to all PIPESIM standard single
branch and network operations and gas lift optimization.

User Guide
14
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 32/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
Electrical PIPESIM uses advanced methodology to perform ESP Design and associated
Submersible operations. Key features include:
Pumps (ESP’s) ESP Database
(p.212)
• Extensive database of Electrical Submersible Pump performance curves
covering a wide range of production rates. Pumps curves are available from
the following manufacturers:
• Centrilift
• ODI
• Ramco-Alnas
• Schlumberger-REDA
• Trico
• Wood Group
• Users can easily add performance curves from any manufacturer and use it
for design and simulation purposes.
• Database also includes motors of various series and power ratings and cables
of various sizes (AWG) and current ratings.
ESP Selection & Design Calculations
• PIPESIM recommends series of pumps in the order of decreasing efficiency
based on target production rates and size constraints.
• ESP Design calculates the required number of stages (talking into account
losses between stages), as well as performance data for pumps at design
condition including head, differential pressure, intake gas volume fraction,
power required, and so on.
• Effects of downhole separation, head factor tuning and viscosity corrections
are considered in the design and staging calculations.
• Design results and plots Includes:
• Standard performance curve with operating condition annotated.
• Multispeed pump performance curves at operating conditions indicating
gas volume fraction at pump intake.
• A formatted report that includes input design data, pump performance data,
motor and cable performance data.

ESP Well Simulation

• All PIPESIM standard operations can be used to model ESP wells (such as
PT profile, nodal analysis, system analysis, network simulation.)
• ESP parameters (speed, number of stages and power) are available as
sensitivity variables.

User Guide
15 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 33/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
Rod Pump PIPESIM uses a third party Rod Pump module for the design and diagnostics.
Module (p.218) For standard simulation operations (such as, PT profile, nodal analysis, system
analysis, network simulation) a rod pump may be modeled.

Rod Pump Equipment Database (3rd Party)

• Extensive database of pumping units (including various geometric
configurations and ratings) from leading vendors, including:
• International Vendors - American Conventional, Ampscot, Baker 
Torqmaster, LUFKIN – Conventional, LUFKIN – Mark II, Ramco-Alnas
• Chinese vendors - ER JI, DA AN, BAO JI, LAN TONG, SI JI, TONG HUA,
LAN SHI, FU SHUN, SAN JI, XU ZHOU, XIN JIANG
• Motor vendor:
• International Vendors – Sargent, General Electric, Reliance, Robbins &
Meyers, Westinghouse, Baldor,
• Chinese vendors - ER JI, DA AN, BAO JI, LAN TONG, SI JI, TONG HUA,
LAN SHI, FU SHUN, SAN JI, XU ZHOU, XIN JIANG
• Extensive database of Steel and Fiberglass Rods of various grades from API,
 Axelson, Continental Emmsco, COROD, Metalmecanica UHS, Norris, Trico,
Upco, Weatherford XD, etc.
Rod Pump Design Module (3rd Party)
• Derives basic reservoir, wellbore and fluid data from base PIPESIM model.
• Clockwise & counterclockwise crank rotations.
• Rod String selection may be calculated or user specified. Supports tapered

rod design and sinker bars.

• Design basis may be defined by pump intake pressure, fluid level, target
production rate or fixed pumping parameter.
• Support for downhole gas separation.
• Design results include:
• PLOTS: Pressure profile of wellbore, rod loading analysis/stress plot, pump
efficiency plot.
• REPORT: Formatted report showing design parameters, hydraulic
condition across pump, motor sizing, polished rod loading, rod string stress
analysis, pump efficiency analysis, and so on.
Rod Pump Diagnostics (3rd Party)
• PIPESIM supports various dynocard file formats.
• Result include calculated dynocards (surface, rod sections and pump), torque
curve, load balance analysis, rod string stress loading analysis, pump
conditions, and so on.
Rod Pump Simulation

User Guide
16 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 34/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• PIPESIM allows simulation of rod pumps as downhole equipment with
required data, including support for downhole separator (optional) and the
ability to recombine annulus gas at the wellhead.)
• Rod pumping wells can be simulated for all types of standard PIPESIM
operations including network simulation (wells must be flow rate specified.)
Progressive PIPESIM uses industry standard methods to simulate progressive cavity pumps.
Cavity Pump Key features include:
(PCP) (p.426) PCP Pump Database
• PCP’s performance curves for various sizes and nominal rates are available
from the following manufacturers:
• PCM
• Weatherford
• Users can easily add performance curves from any manufacturer.
PCP Well Simulation
• PIPESIM supports PCP’s with both top and bottom drive configurations.
• Options to adjust head factor, viscosity corrections and gas separation.
Table 1.6: Artificial Lift Design and Simulation

Feature Description
Single Single-branch operations pertain to analysis performed on a model configuration
Branch that has typically a single source fluid and single delivery point. These sources can
Operations be completed reservoir layers (in a well) or a generic source representing a surface
(p.42) inlet stream. There are special scenarios where multiple sources are allowed but
the flow path must have no branching. These include:
• Multilayer wells
• Fluid/chemical injection at any point in the branch
• Lift Gas injection (tubing or riser base)
Key single-branch operations include:
• Pressure Temperature Profile: Reports many detailed variables (such as, flow,
pressure distribution, fluid properties, thermal properties, multiphase flow
characteristics and flow assurance parameters) over the length of flow path.
• Solves for the unknown boundary condition – pressure or flowrate.
• Equipment operating conditions if both pressures and flowrate are provided.
• Sensitivity analysis for model objects, fluid properties, boundary conditions.
• Profile plots with hundreds of potential result variables available.
• Used for well performance analysis, well design, pipeline design, flow
assurance, and many other analysis.

User Guide
17 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 35/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Nodal Analysis: Standard well performance analysis operation that can also
be applied to a simple pipeline system. Applications include well & completion
design, artificial lift selection and design, equipment sizing, system
debottlenecking, flow assurance analysis and many other applications.
• Inflow & outflow sensitivities
• Nodal Plot – with several plot control options
• System Analysis: One of the most versatile analysis tools in PIPESIM allows
users to analyze performance of production and/or injection systems (well,
pipeline, etc). It has advanced sensitivity options that enables varying multiple
parameters through either permutations or on a case-by-case basis
• Flow Correlation Comparison:  Aids in selection of suitable flow correlation
by comparing several correlation against measured data.
• Data Matching:  Advanced tool that uses optimization techniques to select and
match best suited flow correlations and adjust friction, holdup and heat transfer 
factors to match field pressure and temperature data.
• Optimum Horizontal Well Length: Specific operation to optimize horizontal
well design.
• Reservoir Tables: Generates vertical lift performance curves for both
production and injection wells allowing sensitivities for flowrates, fluid properties,
oulet pressure and artificial lift quantities. Results are generated in specific
formats for several reservoir simulators:
• Eclipse
• Pores

• VIP
• Comp4
• MoRes
• Well Performance Curves: Specific well performance analysis operation to
generate PQ curve for the well for multiple sensitivities.
• Artificial Lift Performance Curves: Specific well performance analysis
operation to generate PQ curves for artificially lifted wells for multiple
sensitivities.
• Gas Lift Rate vs Casing Head Pressure: Specific operation for gas lifted wells
to determine the required casing head pressure to achieve a target production
rate.
• Wax Deposition: Predicts thickness and volume of wax deposition over time.
This operation requires specific wax properties files based on selected
deposition models.

User Guide
18 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 36/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
Network PIPESIM has a very advanced network solver that can solve any type of network
Simulation including large and complex networks having thousands of well and branches and
may include multiple loops and crossovers.

Key features
• Solves for unspecified boundary conditions (pressure and/or flowrate).
• Handles multiple rate constraints.
Well PIPESIM offers very powerful network optimization capabilities to maximize
Optimizer  production from a network of wells (self flowing, wells with choke, wells on gas lift/
ESP) under various types of constraints. This optimizer has been successfully used
to optimize large network containing thousands of wells.
Key features of the Well Optimizer 
• Optimization for maximum oil or Liquid production using:
• Optimum lift gas distribution (for gas lifted wells)
• Optimum ESP power/speed settings (for ESP wells)
• Optimum choke setting (for wells under choke control)
• Selected wells ON/OFF (to reduce system back pressure)
• Any combinations of the above
• Several state-of-the-art algorithms are available:
• Newton-Raphson
• Genetic algorithm
• SDR Lexico
• SDR MINLP
• Comprehensive constraint handling capabilities:
• General: Well stability, Min/Max flowrates (liquid, water), well drawdown
limits, control for gas coning, bubble point pressure margin
• Flow assurance: erosion control, CO2/H2S limits
• Operational constraints: Available lift gas, available ESP power, facility
capacity limits, and so on
• Gas Lifted Wells: Lift gas limits (min/max), casing head pressure, dual string
wells

• ESP Wells: ESP Power limit (min/max)

• Wells on Choke: Min/max choke setting
• Any combinations of the above
• Other associated features include network validation, group constraints
application (high watercut wells, sour gas producers, and so on)

User Guide
19
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 37/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• Several types of results and plots are available including and overall solution
plot, comparison tables (to compare results from multiple scenarios), results
overlay on a network diagram (bubble map, and so on.)
Table 1.7: PIPESIM General Simulation/Optimization Modules

Feature Description
Liquid Loading • Liquid loading analysis is available primarily to determine the minimum stable
(p.359) flow rate for vertical gas wells.
• User can tune predicted calculation by applying a correction factor.
• Analyze a well or network for locations susceptible to liquid loading.
Hydrates • Uses the Multiflash compositional package to generate hydrate formation
(p.500) curves on the phase envelope.
• Users can create a production profile superimposed on a phase envelope to
predict occurrence and location of Hydrate formation.
• Report hydrate formation temperatures and/or hydrate sub-cooling delta-
temperature to determine occurrence and location of hydrate formation in a
single well or large networks.
• Analyze effects of hydrate inhibitor and determine the required treatment
quantity to prevent hydrate formation.
Asphaltenes • Uses the Multiflash compositional package to generate Asphaltene formation
(p.499) curves on the phase envelope.
• Users can create a production profile superimposed on a phase envelope to
predict occurrence and location of Asphaltene formation.
• Report Asphaltene formation temperatures and/or Asphaltene sub-cooling
delta-temperature to determine occurrence and location of Asphaltene in a
single well or large network.
Waxes (p.502) There are several modules in PIPESIM for wax precipitation and deposition
analysis:
• Multiflash thermodynamic prediction module:
• Generates a wax formation curve on the phase envelope.
• Superimpose a production profile on top of the phase envelope to predict
occurrence and location of wax.
• Report critical wax formation temperatures and/or sub-cooling delta-
temperature to determine occurrence and location of wax in a single well
or large network.
• DBR Wax deposition module:
• DBR-Solids package provides detailed characterization of fluid for wax
properties.

User Guide
20 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 38/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
• PIPESIM wax deposition module uses wax properties file generated by
DBR-Solids to perform detailed thermodynamic calculation to predict
occurrence and quantity of wax deposition.
• Reported parameters include wax volume in pipeline (at different time
steps), wax deposition rate in pipeline, wax thickness along pipe profile (at
different time steps), wax thermal properties (thickness, conductivity, heat
transfer coefficient, and so on.)
Emulsion • Available Emulsion Models include:
Modeling • Use Continuous Phase Viscosity
(p.132)
• Volume-weighted mixture viscosity
• Woelflin loose, medium and tight models
• Brinkman
• Vand (Vand coefficients, Barnea & Mizrahi coefficients or user specified
coefficients)
• Richardson (with tuning for K factor)
• Leviton & Leigton
• User specified Emulsion Table
• Inversion watercut may be user specified or calculated using the Brauner-
Ullman equation
Corrosion • DeWaard Corrosion Model for predicting CO2 corrosion.
Modeling • Tuning options for efficiency
(p.153)
• User may override pH calculation or derive from ScaleChem PVT files
• Effect of corrosion inhibitors (MEG, DEG) are accounted for 
• Available results include corrosion rate, pH, glycol inhibition factor, and many
other variables
Erosion • Erosion models available include:
Modeling • API 14E
(p.140)
• Salama Model (for sand-laden fluids)
• Tuning options for efficiency
• Available results include erosional velocity limit, erosional velocity ratio,
erosion rate and many other variables.
Slug and • Slug length correlations
Pigging • Slug growth calculations
Analysis
• Probabilistic slug length distribution
• Severe riser slugging indicator 
• Pig generated slug volume calculation

User Guide
21
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 39/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Feature Description
Scaling • Ability to use ScaleChem generated PVT file for predicting occurrence, type
Analysis location and severity of scale formation
(p.142)

Table 1.8: PIPESIM Flow Assurance Capabilities

1.1.3 Reporting
• Flexible plotting functionality with hundreds of potential variables to select from
• Configuration of multiple y-axis
• Detailed spot reports including phase splits and flow regime maps
• Interactive network simulation result viewer 
• Summary and Detailed output report
• Specially formatted reports for nodal analysis and gas lift design

1.1.4 Extensibility
PIPESIM includes a rich and fully documented API called Openlink that enables integration with
various other software products, including:

 Avocet IAM Schlumberger product used to integrate PIPESIM to reservoir, process and economics
models.
 Avocet Schlumberger production operations platform used to integrate PIPESIM to high-
frequency production data.
HYSYS Process simulation software developed by Aspen Technology. PIPESIM single-branch
and network models can enhance the models built in the process simulation software
HYSYS. For more information, refer to the Aspentech website.
UniSim Process simulation software developed by Honeywell Process Systems. PIPESIM
single-branch and network models can enhance the models built in the process
simulation software UniSim Design. For more information, refer to Honeywell website.

1.1.5 PIPESIM Hot Keys

Hot keys are short cuts for menu options.

File Hot Keys

The following specific hot keys are available:

Create New Single Branch Model CTRL+W

Create New Network model CTRL+N
Open model CTRL+O
Open engine file for text edit CTRL+T

User Guide
22 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 40/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Save model CTRL+S

Close PIPESIM ALT+F4
Export to Engine file CTRL+E
Purge Engine Files CTRL+Y
Open Single Branch Wizard CTRL+ALT+W

Simulation Hot Keys

The following specific hot keys are available:

Run model CTRL+G

Restart Model (applicable only for PIPESIM Net models) CTRL+R

Windows Hot Keys

The following specific hot keys are available:

New Model Window for Selection CTRL+ALT+N
Close Active Window CTRL+F4
Go to Next Window CTRL+F6 or CTRL+TAB
Go to Previous Window CTRL+SHIFT+F6 or CTRL+SHIFT+ TAB

Tools Hot Keys

The following specific hot keys are available:

Print CTRL+P
 Access Help F1

Editing or General Hot Keys

The following hot keys are available:

 Access Pull-down menus ALT or F10

Cut CTRL+X
Copy CTRL+C
Paste CTRL+V
Delete Del
Select All CTRL+A
Find CTRL+F
Sticky key mode SHIFT
Zoom in SHIFT+Z

User Guide
23
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 41/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Zoom out SHIFT+X

Zoom Full View SHIFT+F
Restore View SHIFT+R

1.1.6 Main Toolbar 

The main toolbar (like all toolbars in PIPESIM) is a docking toolbar. That is, it can be re-positioned
on the screen.

From left to right, the icons are:

1. New model (p.27)
2. Single Branch Wizard (p.27)
3. Open an existing model,

4. Save active model (p.33)

5. Save as (p.33)
6. Save all open models (p.33)
7. Find (p.162)
8. Boundary Conditions (p.108)
9. Cut
10.Copy
11.Paste
12.Run Model (p.172)
13.Restart (p.189)
14. Abort Run (p.173)
15.View summary file
16.View Output file
17.View System plot
18.View profile plot
19.View flow regime map
20.Report Tool (p.238)

21.Export engine files (for FPT)

22.Help
See also: Well Performance (p.42), Pipeline tools (p.81) and Network (p.33)

1.1.7 Toolbox
 All tools can be accessed using the Tools menu.

User Guide
24
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 42/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

See also Hot Keys (p.22), Main toolbar (p.24), Wells (p.42), Pipeline tools (p.81), Network
(p.33) components, Case studies (p.262), and How to add objects (p.32)

Single branch Toolbox

Button Function
Returns the mouse pointer to its original function. If you place an object,
 Select such as a node, in the work area, further clicks will continue to place
objects of that type until the select arrow button is pressed.
 Adds a text box to the model. Any number of text boxes can be added to
 Text the model. The size and color of the text and the background can be
changed.
 Allows two connection objects to be connected together where no
 Node (p.108) equipment is located between them. In the network module, boundary
nodes are used to identify the "ends".

 Boundary Node Final node in a single branch model where the branch connects to the
network..
(p.108)
The generic source object is a means by which you can specify explicit
 Source (p.108) upstream boundary conditions of pressure and temperature in a given
model.
The vertical completion component models flow from the reservoir to the
 Vertical bottom hole using an Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR). A multilayer 
Completion (p.49) reservoir model (p.43) can be defined by several layers (completions)
which, can, if required, be separated by a section of tubing.
 A horizontal completion with multiple sources along the horizontal
 Horizontal wellbore. This takes into account reservoir drawdown and wellbore
Completion (p.43) pressure drop.
The basic pump model uses centrifugal pump equations to determine the
 Pump (p.107) relationship between inlet pressure and temperature, outlet pressure and
temperature, flowrate, shaft power, hydraulic power and efficiency.
 A device that boots the pressure of an oil-gas mixture.
 Multiphase
Booster (p.92)
Placing a separator in the model removes up to 100% of the gas, water 
 Separator (p.106) or liquid (oil plus water) phase.
Either centrifugal or reciprocating compressors can be modeled.
 Compressor 
(p.82)
The basic expander model uses centrifugal expander equations to
 Expander (p.85) determine the relationship between inlet pressure and temperature, outlet
pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, and efficiency.

User Guide
25 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 43/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Button Function
 A heat exchanger in the model allows a fluid temperature change to be
 Heat Exchanger  modelled.
(p.88)

 Choke (p.404)  A choke is a device that restricts the flow rate.

Placing an injection point in the model allows a side stream to be injected
 Injection Point without creating a new pressure boundary conditon.
(p.92)
Simulates a generic unit operation in which the pressure and/or 
 Equipment (p.618) temperature of the stream are modified.
 A rate change device in the model that can increase or decrease the fluid
 Adder/Multiplier  flowrate at that point in the system
(p.102)
Placing a report tool in the model gives additional reporting of the
 Report (p.105) conditions at that point in the model.
Placing an Engine Keyword Tool (EKT) in the model allows access to the
 Engine Keyword PIPESIM Input Language
Tool (p.84)
Defines where the system is to be broken in two for the Nodal Analysis
 Nodal analysis operation
Point (p.79)
 Allow two objects to be connected by a "zero-length" flowline. This is
 Connector  normally used to connect two items of equipment together where there is
no significant pressure or temperature change between them.
Placing a flowline in the model allows the modeling of horizontal or near-
 Flowline (p.86) horizontal flow (up or downhill).
Placing the tubing object in the model allows the modeling of vertical or 
 Tubing (p.67) near-vertical flow (production or injection) in a well bore.
Placing a riser in the model allows the modelling of vertically or near-
 Riser (p.102) vertical flow (up, down or inclined).

Network Toolbox

Button Function
 Allows the user to select, drag and drop any object in the working window
Select arrow
 Allows a text box to be added to the model.
Text

User Guide
26 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 44/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Button Function
 A junction is a location in the model where two, or more, branches meet.
Junction The fluid from the incoming branches are then mixed at the junction. The
 junction itself has no associated pressure drop.

 Branch (p.35)  A branch isAan

a junction. objectmay
branch thatcontain
connects two equipment
many junctions orobjects.
a well sources/sink to

 A point in the network where a stream removed from a separator can be

 Network directed to an injection well or sink.
Separator (p.36)
 A source is a point where the fluid enters the network. A network model can
 Source (p.34) have any number of sources.
 A sink is a point in the network where the fluid leaves the system. Normally
 Sink (p.35) used to represent a surface outflow point as opposed to an injection well.
 A production well is a well where the fluid enters the network.
 Production well
(p.37)
 A injection well is a well where the fluid exits the network.
 Injection well
(p.38)
 Allows parts of network to be "collapsed" in to a sub-network of the main
Folder  model. This could be used to divide a large model into a number of smaller 
sections. Place a folder on the model window and double-click to enter. A
sub-network can then be built in the folder. Double-click on any "white"
background in a folder to take you up a level. Links can be made into the
folder by connecting a node to the folder via a branch. The "dangling" end
of the branch within the folder must then be connected.

1.1.8 Wizard Feature

The wizard can be used to create the following new models:
• Production well
• Injection well
• Surface and Facilities Model

Steps
To open the wizard, click the Single Branch Wizard button on the Main Toolbar (p.24). The wizard
involves the following steps:
1. Supply general project information.
2. Select the model type requir ed.
3. Select the operation type and, if it's Nodal Analysis, the Nodal Analysis point.
4. (Optional) specify the model file name and directory.

User Guide
27 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 45/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5. Select the units (p.147) to use.

6. Select the fluid model type, one of the following:
• Black Oil
• Compositional
• PVT File
7. Select the following flow correlations (also friction and holdup factors, and swap angle):
• Vertical flow
• Horizontal flow
• Single phase
8. Identify the model source, one of the following:
• vertical completion
• generic source

• horizontal completion
9. Identify Pipes and Equipment objects to include in the model, by using one of the following
methods:
• Double-click on the object type to add it to the model.
• Highlight the object then use the Add Pipe>> or Add Equip>> button.

Note: Objects MUST be added in the correct order (from source to sink), for example, tubing,
flowline, riser, choke, compressor, and so on.

10.(For an injection model only) Identify the model sink.

11.The required objects are connected in the model window. If the model window appears to be blank,
scroll down to locate the model.
12.Click Finish to close the wizard.

Note: Do not forget to save the model.

1.1.9 Find
Use the Find tool to find quickly any object (well, source, flowline, and so on) in a PIPESIM model.

Finding an object in a network model

To find an object, do the following:
1. Launch the Find tool from the main toolbar (p.24) or by using Edit » Find.
2. The Find dialog lists object types (branch, well, source, sink, junction).
3. Do one of the following:

User Guide
28 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 46/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• enter the object name in the text box and click Find. The appropriate part of the tree structure
opens to show it selected.
• select the object type in the tree and then select the actual object, by name.
4. The chosen object is highlighted in the model and the screen display updated.

5. The Edit button can be used to modify the data.

1.1.10 PIPESIM versions

Only one version of PIPESIM can be installed on a machine at a time. To install a new version, first
uninstall any existing version. PIPESIM models are forward compatible. For example, a model
created using PIPESIM 2009.1 can be read and used with PIPESIM 2011.1. However, models are
not back-compatible. Once it has been saved with a version of PIPESIM it can not then be read by
older versions. Versions of PIPESIM prior to 2001 may need to be converted (p.29) before they can
be used.

PIPESIM Suite (Build26) to PIPESIM Conversion

The converter has been tested with PIPESIM Suite Build 26, release in 1999. Previous versions may
not convert correctly.
The following Build 26 files can be converted:
• PIPESIM: *.PSW
• PIPESIM-Net: *.NET and *.PSW
The following do not need conversion. They can be loaded directly in PIPESIM:
• Compositional: *.PVT. These do not need to be converted. Load the PVT file directly into PIPESIM
using the Setup » Compositional.... » Import menu option.

• Plotting: *.PLT
directly into theand *.PLC.
PsPlot PLOT (PLT, PLC) files do not need to be converted. Load the plot file
tool.

What is not converted

PIPESIM models cannot be converted to PIPESIM Suite models.
The following options from Build 26 input files are not converted:
• The Black box object does not exist in PIPESIM. It is converted into a heat exchanger.
• Gas Lift Design
• Horizontal completion data
• PIPESIM operations
• Upstream inheritance is not supported. Therefore any models that use this feature will have data
(normally flowline ID) missing.

Pre-conversion preparation
Before conversion, do the following:
• Back up your data.

User Guide
29
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 47/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Load the PIPESIM Suite model into Build 26 and run the model with Build 26 to verify that the
results are correct.

Note: The converter does not prompt for file save; any existing previous conversion is overwritten.

Converting a model
Do the following:
1. Select File »  Import Build26.
2. Open the required Build 26 model (*.psw or *.net). The file is converted and written to the same
directory as the build 26 input, along with a log file.
3. For a large PIPESIM-Net model, if an Out of Memory error appears, use the conversion utility
instead.

Using the conversion utility

Use this external

if a number method
of models areof
tofile
be conversion if there's
converted and anPIPESIM
used in Out of Memory error
at a later (due
date. Dotothe
a large file), or 
following:
1. From the Windows Start menu, select Programs  » Schlumberger  » PIPESIM » Utilities » B26
to P2K Converter .
2. This opens the Network File Converter dialog. In its Options menu, choose whether to overwrite
existing files. This must be off (don't overwrite) if the file is being converted because of a an out
of memory error.
3. From the converter's File menu, choose the Build 26 file (*.psw or *.net) to convert
4. If an Out of Memory message appears, click Cancel and rerun the conversion. With the option
not to overwrite, the converter starts from where it last stopped. Otherwise it restarts completely..
5. When the model has been successfully converted, all the *.bps files in the directory can be deleted.

Post-conversion QC
 After conversion:
• The log file *.lgg for PIPESWIM, or *.p2k for PIPESIM-Network, is in the same directory as the
PIPESIM model.
• The new model is saved to the same directory as the Build 26 model. The file extension for a
PIPESIM single branch model is .bps., and .bpn for a PIPESIM Network model. All input data is
now saved in one file.
• The PIPESIM file might be large. All flowlines are converted as if they were defined in PIPESIM
as detailed profiles, that is the node data is imported. This is done so that no important data is
lost. This can be reversed in PIPESIM by using Setup » Flowline Properties » Simple profile.
 All detailed profiles are then ignored.
• Check the default units. The converter saves the model in Engineering units.
• Run the new model in PIPESIM and verify that the results are the same as those produced by the
PIPESIM Suite. There may be small differences due to changes in the calculation engine.

User Guide
30 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 48/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• If you have any problems with the file conversion, please send a copy of the file(s) to PIPESIM
support.
• Check the default units. The converter will save the model in Engineering units.
• Run the new model in PIPESIM

• Verify that the results are the same as those produced by the PIPESIM Suite. There may be small
differences due to changes in the calculation engine. If you are unsure about any results, please
contact PIPESIM support.
• If you have any problems with thefile conversion, please send a copy of the file(s) to PIPESIM
support

Troubleshooting
If the results from PIPESIM Suite and PIPESIM are not the same, please try the following before
contacting the PIPESIM support.
1. Units settings -Save (a copy) of the PIPESIM Suite model with the following settings:

a. Set the units to standard Eng or SI, that is not customized. Use Setup » units » Eng.
b. Set the option to write file with default units, using Preferences  » Options » General » Write
file with default units.
c. All units can be restored later in PIPESIM.
d. Repeat the conversion.
2. Language -Save (a copy) the PIPESIM Suite model with the following settings
a. Set the language to English by using Setup » Preferences  » Language  » English or Setup »
Preferencias  » Idioma » English.
b. Repeat the conversion.
3. Contact PIPESIM support with a copy of your input file(s). Do not forget that for PIPESIM-Net
models both the *.net and *.psw files are needed.

1.2 Building Models

1.2.1 Steps in building a model
This topic outlines the basic steps involved in building models.

Basic overview
The steps in building a PIPESIM model are slightly different for each module, but all involve the
following basic steps:
1. Select units.
2. Set fluid data and (optionally) calibrate it.
3. Define components of the model.
4. Add well components (completion, tubing).

User Guide
31
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 49/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5. Add pipeline components.

6. Add field equipment.
7. Set heat transfer options.
8. Select flow correlations.
9. Save the model.
10.Perform an operation.
11.Analyze the graphical and tabular results.
12.Use the schematic.

Creating a new model

To create a new model, select File » New and then select from the following:
• pipeline and facilities model
• well performance model (production and injection wells)
• network model (more than one well or source)
 Alternatively, use the wizard (p.27).
 A model is made up of "node" and "connection" type objects.
Before an operation (p.172) can be performed on the model it must be saved. Single branch models
have the file extension .bps and network models, .bpn.

Adding objects to a model and connecting them

The objects in the toolbox (p.24) are defined as either node or link objects, as follows:
• node objects — for example, source, sink, junction/node, completion, equipment, Nodal analysis
point, report tool, and so on. Add node objects to the model first. Select a node object in the toolbar 
then click to place it in the model window. To add a number of the same type of node object, press
the SHIFT key to turn the selector into a "sticky" mode where the same object is added to the
model window whenever the mouse button is pressed.
• link (connection) objects — for example, tubing, flowline, riser, connection, and so on. Link type
objects are used to connect two node type objects. The node objects must have already been
added. Select the link object from the toolbox. Hover the mouse over a node object, then press
and hold done the (left) mouse button and "drag" the resulting link to another node object.

Adding data to an object

 After adding the object to the model, double-click it to open its data entry screen. All the data in an
object is self-contained and does not affect, or rely, on data from any other object.

Minimum data
Missing data is reported at the following levels:

• Dialog
• Object

User Guide
32 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 50/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Folder  
 All dialogs that have data entry fields display a red box around any mandatory data. This shows the
minimum data required. The red box disappears when the data is entered.
In the model objects and folders that have data missing are displayed with a red box around them.
Missing data includes data in dialog fields with a red box, the fluid model, and boundary conditions.
 Again, once the necessary data has been entered, the red box disappears.
Data range checks are made on some data entry fields.

Duplicating an object
The Edit » Copy and Edit » Paste (or Ctrl+c, Ctrl+v) commands can be used to copy an object and
all its associated data. The only data that is changed in the copy is the identifier of the object.
This option works in both single branch and network mode. It also works on multiple selections, so
you can duplicate more than one object at a time.

Disconnecting objects
To disconnect objects, do the following:
1. Select the link (connection) object. End markers (small squares) appear at each end of the object.
2. Select the end marker (small square). The pointer changes into an arrow.
3. Press the left mouse button and hold it down while dragging the link to its new node object.

Saving the model

The PIPESIM models are stored in binary data files with the following extensions:
• .bps - single branch model

• .bpn - network model. A network model is stored in a single input file. It is not necessary to store
each network model in a separate directory. However, it is important to note that each individual
branch has its own output files. Thus, using separate directories ensures that the output files are
not overwritten. Using separate directories may be useful in the following cases:
• If results from models having the same well/branch names are to be compared.
• If models having the same well/branch names are to be run simultaneously.

1.2.2 Network Models

Network models contain multiple single branch models, linked at junctions. They can be used to model
parts of, or complete, production or injection systems, from the reservoir to the final delivery point(s).

Creating a network model

To build a network model, perform the following basic steps:
1. Select a units (p.147) set.
2. Develop the network model. The basic building blocks — sources, sinks, branches and junctions
— can be found in the Network Toolbox (p.26). Branches can be built up of equipment items, using

User Guide
33
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 51/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

the Single branch Toolbox (p.25). Prebuilt single branch models of wells and flowlines can also
be used.
3. Set the fluid properties (p.117) .
4. (Optional) Calibrate the fluid (p.460).

5. Set the boundary conditions (p.40).

6. Save the model (p.33).

Network Operations
Operations for network models differ from those available for single branch models. They are:
• Run Model (p.172)
• Restart Model (p.189)
• Gas Lift Optimisation
• Linking to reservoir models

Source
 A source is a point where fluid enters the network. A network model can have any number of sources.
 A production well (p.37) can be used instead of a source.
Right-click on a source to display the following menu:

Data  Access the Source Properties (p.34) and Fluid Model (p.159) tabs

Fluid Model  Access the Fluid Model tab

Active If active is selected, the source is included in the model at run time,
otherwise it is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects
of switching off parts of the network without having to delete any data.

Plot Results Plots the results for the branch containing this source.

Cut / Copy / Paste / Delete  Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and
deleted.

Move to Top / Move to Back For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected icon
to the top or bottom.

Source Properties tab

Double-click
parameters: a source to open the Source Properties tab, where you can set the following

Temperature Fluid Temperature at the inlet

Pressure/Flowrate Boundary Condition Specify the boundary condition in terms of a fixed

pressure and/or flowrate. The flowrate type can be

User Guide
34
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 52/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

selected. The flowrate can be entered in either stock

tank or flowing conditions by using the "@" button.

PQ Curve Specify the boundary conditions in terms of a Pressure

versus Flowrate (PQ) curve (there must be at least 2
data points and a maximum of 30)

Type Flow type for the PQ Curve flowrate data.

Sink
 A sink is a point in the network where the fluid leaves the system. It is normally used to represent a
surface outflow point as opposed to an injection well. A network model can have any number of sinks
(p.108). An injection well (p.38) can be used instead of a sink.
Right-click on a sink to display the following menu:

Data  Access the Sink Properties (p.35) tab

Active If active is selected, the sink is included in the model at run time,
otherwise it is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects
of switching off parts of the network without having to delete any data.

Plot Results Plots the results for the branch containing this sink.

Cut / Copy / Paste / Delete  Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and
deleted.

Move to Top / Move to Back For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected icon
to the top or bottom.

Sink Properties tab

Double-click a sink to open the Sink Properties tab, where you can set the following parameters:

Pressure Outlet pressure

Flow rate Flowrate in Liquid/Gas/Mass units at stick tank conditions. The flowrate can be entered
in flowing conditions by the "@" button.

Branch
 A branch is an object that connects two junctions or a source/sink to a junction. The branch can

contain
types offlowlines
branchesand
thatequipment.
combine a Production
branch withwells (p.37)(p.34)
a source and injection wells (p.38) are special
or sink (p.35).
Right-click on a branch to display the following menu:

Data Gives access to the Branch Properties (p.36), Limits (p.41) and
Flow Correlations (p.110) tabs.

Flow Correlations Gives access to the Flow Correlations tab.

User Guide
35 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 53/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Import Single Branch Model  Allows a model already defined in a single branch mode to be
imported. The file name of the model to import will be requested.

Active If active is selected, the branch is included in the model at run time,
otherwise it is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects
of switching off parts of the network without having to delete any
data.

Switch Flowline Geometry Changes the assumed direction of flow for this branch.

Plot Results Plots the results for this branch.

Cut / Copy / Paste / Delete  Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and
deleted.

Move to Top / Move to Back For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected
icon to the top or bottom.

Branch Properties tab

Double-click a branch to open the Branch Properties tab, where you can set the following
parameters:

Block Determines whether the branch is allowed to flow in both directions. Block reverse acts
as a non-return valve.

Estimates Estimates of the Pressure and/or flowrate for the branch (optional).

Network Separator 

 A point
well. in the network
Sometimes this iswhere a stream
also known asremoved from a separator can be directed to a sink or injection
a re-injector.
The network separator (reinjection node) acts in a similar manner to a junction. It links to the following
branches:
Incoming / feed stream branch
The branch upstream of the network separator, that is before separation takes place.
Outgoing main stream branch
The branch where the main fluid, that is the remaining fluid after separation, goes.
Outgoing separated stream branch
The branch where the separated fluid goes.

Note: This branch MUST not be connected directly to a sink. Place a node before the sink
and add a dummy branch.

The following must be defined:

• The incoming feed stream and the separated stream branches.

User Guide
36 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 54/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Type of separator (liquid, gas, or water) and its efficiency.

Note: There will be a pressure discontinuity between the separator and the separated branch inlet.
This represents the pump, compressor, or choke required to adjust the stream's pressure to that
necessary to balance the remainder of the network.

See also: How to add objects (p.32), Separator Details (p.106)

Production Well
 A production well is a well where the fluid enters the network. A network model can have any number 
of production wells. A well can also be modelled using a well head performance curve (p.39). This
aids in the solution time of the network.
 A production well is a combination of a source (p.34) and a branch (p.35), and has similar data
requirements.
Right-click on a production well to display the following menu:

Data Gives access to the Production Well Properties (p.37), Limits (p.41),
Fluid Model (p.159), Flow Correlations (p.110) and Estimates (p.41)
tabs.

Fluid Model Gives access to the Fluid Model tab.

Flow Correlations Gives access to the Flow Correlations tab

Import Single Branch  Allows a model already defined in a single branch mode to be imported.
Model The file name of the model to import will be requested.

Active If active is selected, the well is included in the model at run time,
otherwise it is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects of 
switching off parts of the network without having to delete any data.

Plot Results Plots the results for this well.

Cut / Copy / Paste /  Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and
Delete deleted.

Move to Top / Move to For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected icon to
Back the top or bottom.

Production Well Properties tab

Right-click on a production well and select Data to open the Properties tab, where you can set the
following pressure and flow boundary condition parameters:

Block Determines whether the well is allowed to flow in both directions. Block reverse acts
as a non-return valve and will stop the well from becoming an injection well. If the
solution algorithm determined that a production well, with block reverse set, was an
injector then it will be shut-in.

User Guide
37 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 55/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: If Multilayer (p.65) production wells are used in a Network model, then the
well should have the block reverse flow option set to prevent cross-flow.

Pressure Inlet pressure, normally the static reservoir pressure.

Flow rate Flowrate in Liquid/Gas/Mass units at stick tank conditions. The flowrate can be entered
in flowing conditions by the "@" button.

Well Models the well using a well head performance curve (p.39).
Curves

Injection Well
 A network model can have any number of injection wells.

Note: Multilayer (p.65) Injection wells cannot be modelled in this version of PIPESIM. If multilayer 
production wells are used in a Network model, set the well's Gives access to option.

 An injection well is a combination of a sink (p.35) and a branch (p.35), and has similar data
requirements.
Right-click on an injection well to display the following menu:

Data Gives access to the Injection Well Properties (p.38), Limits (p.41),
Flow Correlations (p.110) Estimates (p.41) tabs.

Flow Correlations Gives access to the Flow Correlations tab.

Import Single Branch  Allows a model already defined in a single branch mode to be imported.
Model The file name of the model to import will be requested.

Active If active is selected, the source is included in the model at run time,
otherwise it is left out. This flag can be used to determine the effects of 
switching off parts of the network without having to delete any data.

Plot Results Plot the results for this well.

Cut / Copy / Paste / Delete  Allows items in the network diagram to be cut, copied, pasted and
deleted.

Move to Top / Move to For use when several icons are overlaid, this moves the selected icon
Back to the top or bottom.

Injection Well Properties tab

Right-click on an injection well and select Data to open the Properties tab, where you can set the
following pressure and flow boundary condition parameters:

User Guide
38 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 56/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Block Determines whether the well is allowed to flow in both directions. Block reverse acts as
a non-return valve and will stop the well from becoming a producer. If the solution
algorithm determined that an injection, with block reverse set, was a producer then it will
be shut-in

Pressure Outlet pressure, normally the static reservoir pressure.

Flow rate Flowrate in Liquid/Gas/Mass units at stick tank conditions. The flowrate can be entered
in flowing conditions by the "@" button.

Well Curves
 A production well in a network model can be modeled using a well performance curve of flowrate
versus [outlet] well head pressure - example curve (p.181). These well performance curve(s) are
stored in ASCII files and can be created using a PIPESIM operation (p.172) or any another suitable
Nodal analysis package.
This option has been introduced for the following reasons:
• To reduce the time required to solve large networks. A significant amount of time is spent
computing well bore pressure losses.
• To ensure that the well operates in its stable region.
• To interface with 3rd party applications so that they can create these well curves, that is Shell's
WePs module.
• To ease debugging when wells do not flow and the network solution does not converge . In this
case the individual well curves can be examined to insure that the well will flow at the required
pressure.
To simulate a well, right-click on it and select Data. On the Properties tab, select the Well Curves
check box. Each production well can be simulated by one of the following options:
Create (during network run) only when necessary
The time stamp of the last created performance curve is checked. The curve is regenerated
automatically, if necessary. Once the file has been created, it can be viewed using the Plot
button.
Create on every network run
The performance curve is always regenerated. This is time consuming.
Online
Model the well online (the default). The well's details must be included in the PIPESIM
Network model.
Offline from a well performance curve file
The curve is generated by the simulator automatically, as it is needed. The well's details must
be included in the PIPESIM Network model.
With the curve(s) being pre-generated, the well's details need not be included in the PIPESIM
Network model. The data file may contain a number of well head curves over a range of 
values, for example, reservoir pressure, watercut, and so on, so that it need only be recreated

User Guide
39
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 57/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

if the operating conditions are outside the specified ranges. Before the network can be solved,
the exact value to use during the simulation must be defined.
Data Entry
If use Well Curves is selected.

Use File
Use a specific performance curve file for this well. A single file can be used by a number of wells. The
file can contain data over a range of values or a single point. Once you specify the file, the options
are as follows:
Sensitivities
Interrogates the performance curve file to determine what range of values it was created
over. A specific value for each variable must then be defined. Extrapolation is not allowed.
Plot Interpolated Curve
Plots the resulting interpolated curve that will be used during the simulation.

Plot
Plots all curves in the file.

Boundary Conditions
The network engine solves the mass, momentum and energy conservation equations for the fluid
pressures, flow rates and temperatures, in a network. Users must specify acceptable boundary
conditions. To view and/or modify boundary conditions, select Setup » Boundary Conditions....
This also displays the number of boundary conditions that are required and the number that have
been set.

Hydraulic boundary conditions (pressure and flow)

The requirements are as follows:
• The number of boundary conditions required for a model is known as the model's Degrees of 
Freedom. This is equal to the total number of boundary nodes. That is, number of wells (production
and injection) + number of sources + number of sinks.
• A boundary condition specifies the pressure (P) or flowrate (Q). For sources, a pressure-flowrate
curve (C) can be specified.
• At least one pressure boundary condition must be specified.
• Normally there should be one boundary condition (P, Q or C) for each boundary node. However,
you can specify two boundary conditions, pressure and flow rate (PQ) at some sources or 
production wells, and specify no boundary conditions at some sinks, as long as the total number 
of boundary conditions equals the Degrees of Freedom.

Note: Use this flexibility with care as it may produce networks that cannot be solved.

Temperature boundary conditions

Users must specify the fluid temperature at all sources and the reservoir temperature for all production
wells. The fluid temperatures at all sinks and injection wells are always calculated. Energy will be

User Guide
40 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 58/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

transferred from the fluid to the environment by heat loss, so ambient temperatures and heat loss
properties must be specified for each branch in a network.

Input fluids
The Fluid model (p.159) must be specified for each production well and each source.

Network Constraints
To set network constraints, select Setup » Flowrate Limits....
You have two options:
• Set flowrate limits for each branch in a network model. The flowrate limits apply both to forward
and reverse flows. So a flow limit of 20 STB/d will limit the flow to 20 STB/d independently of 
whether the flow is backward or forward.
• Set flowrate limits for an individual network branch (network connector - flowline). Right-click on
the branch and select data, then click on the Limits tab.

The following flowrate limits can be set:

• Mass (p.578)
• Liquid (p.578)
• Water  
• Oil
• Gas (p.578)

Network Estimates
Each time the network is solved, an initial estimate of the unknown boundary condition (inlet pressure,
outlet pressure or flowrate) in each branch is required.
Internal default estimates are pr ovided as follows:
• Production/injection well static pressure = 5,000 psia
• Source/sink/node pressure = 1,000 psia
• Flowrate = 10 lb/s
However, it is possible to speed up network convergence by providing good estimates of the unknown
boundary condition in each branch. User estimates can be supplied locally and globally, and four 
hierarchy options are available to specify which estimates should be used. To do this, select Setup »
Estimates . The following parameters are available:
Do not use any estimates
The internal default values, shown above, are used. This is sufficient in most cases. (Default)
Use local if present else use global
If local estimates have been set, use these. Otherwise, use the global values (if set),
otherwise use the internal defaults.
Use local everywhere
If local estimates have been set, use these. Otherwise, use the internal defaults.

User Guide
41
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 59/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Use global everywhere

If global estimates have been set, use these. Otherwise, use the internal defaults.
Set the local estimates by using the Pressure and Flowrate fields.
To aid convergence and speed of solution, the results from a previous converged solution can be
used as initial
including estimates.
the internal To do this, use the restart (p.189) feature. This overrides all settings here,
defaults.

1.2.3 Single Branch Models

Well Performance Analysis Overview

Well Performance analysis involves modeling a production or injection well, including any artificial lift.

Well Performance Specific Operations

The following operations are available:

• Nodal Analysis (p.177)

• Reservoir tables (p.179)
• Optimum horizontal well length (p.44)
•  Artificial Lift Performance (p.190)
• Pressure Temperature Profile (p.174)
• Gas lift rate vs casing head pressure (p.181)
• Flow correlation comparison (p.175)
• Systems Analysis (p.173)

Well Performance
Perform the following basic steps to build a well model (single or multiple completion):
1. Select the units (p.147) set to use.
2. Specify the well's completion type, one of the following:
• Vertical (p.49)
• Multiple (p.43)
• Horizontal (p.43)
3. Add the necessary components to the model (tubing, choke, and so on) and define the necessary
data.
4. Define the fluid specification (black oil (p.460) or compositional (p.127)).
5. (Optional) Calibrate the fluid (p.460).
6. Define suitable vertical correlations (p.598) and Horizontal correlations (p.601).
7. Save the model (p.33)

User Guide
42 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 60/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Multilayer Reservoir IPR

 A Multilayer reservoir model can be defined by several layers (completions). These can, if required,
be separated by sections of tubing.
In a multilayer model, each layer can have the following:

• A different IPR method.

• Different fluid model properties. That is, each layer can have a different watercut, GOR, or a
different composition, and so on.
• Different fluid types for each layer. Oil and gas layers can be mixed.

Note:  As of release 2008.1, multi-layer injection well models can be simulated in PIPESIM.

More details (p.65)

Horizontal Well Completion

This refers to a horizontal completion with multiple sources along the horizontal wellbore, taking into
account reservoir drawdown and wellbore pressure drop. The horizontal well performance models
included in PIPESIM allow the user to accurately predict hydraulic wellbore performance in a
horizontal completion. As such, they are an integral part of the reservoir-to-surface analysis.
 A horizontal well model can be used in all Operations modes. However, you may be especially
interested in investigating the productivity of a horizontal completion using the Optimum Horizontal
Completion Length (p.44) option.
Reservoir inflow and wellbore pressure drop equations are solved to calculate the changing
production rate along the well length. More details (p.389)

Distributed PI mode
In Distributed PI mode the inflow performance is expressed as a Productivity Index (PI) per unit
length which can be assigned explicitly (Distributive PI) or calculated using the following:
• Steady-State (oil reservoirs)
• Steady-State (gas reservoirs)
• Pseudo-Steady-State (oil reservoirs)
• Pseudo-Steady-State (gas reservoirs) productivity equations.
In this mode the pressure drop along the horizontal completion is computed.
These equations take account of the effect of the vertical/horizontal permeability ratio, completion
skin, and reservoir thickness.

Single point PI mode

In Single Point PI mode inflow is assumed to be at the heel of the well only (no pressure drop along
the horizontal completion is computed). The following IPRs are available:
• Pseudo Steady-State (oil reservoirs)
• Pseudo Steady-State (gas reservoirs)
• Steady-State (oil reservoirs)

User Guide
43
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 61/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Steady-State (gas reservoirs)

Horizontal completion length

Using the Optimum Horizontal Completion analysis option, PIPESIM accurately predicts the
hydraulic wellbore performance in the completion. This is an integral part of PIPESIM's reservoir-to-
surface analysis.
The technique subdivides the horizontal completion into vertical cross-sections and treats flow
independently from other cross-sections. This multiple source concept leads to a pressure gradient
from the blind-end (Toe) to the producing-end (Heel) which, if neglected, results in over-predicting
deliverability. The reduced drawdown at the Toe results in the production leveling-off as a function of 
well length and it can be shown that drilling beyond an optimum length would yield no significant
additional production. Several IPRs are available. These are solved with the wellbore pressure drop
equations to yield the changing production rate along the well length.

Note: To use the Optimum Horizontal Completion option, you must include a horizontal well
completion in the system model.

How to determine the optimal horizontal completion length

Follow these basic steps to determine the optimal horizontal completion length:
1. Build the well performance model (p.42), include the horizontal completion.
2. Select the Horizontal completion length operation.
3. Enter the required data.
4. Run (p.172) the operation.
5. Save the model (p.33).

Horizontal Completion data entry

To access this area, double-click a horizontal completion.

Properties Tab
Use this tab to set up the Reservoir data and IPR model.

Reservoir data
The reservoir boundary conditions must be specified:
Static Pressure:
The static reservoir pressure
Temperature
The reservoir temperature

IPR Model 
Select Distributed or Single Point model and select the model type, one of the following:
Distributed PI (Finite Conductivity)
The complete length of the horizontal section is modeled. See Well bore... (p.86)

User Guide
44
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 62/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Single Point PI (Infinite Conductivity)

The input data is used to compute an equivalent straight line PI value and this is then used
as single point inflow.
Model type is the type of IPR model to use for calculation. Each option requires a different set of 
parameters, as described below.

SS Oil (Joshi) and SS Gas (Joshi)

Reservoir Size
Rextn
External boundary radius of the drainage area
Thickness
Reservoir thickness

Well Location

Eccen
Well bore eccentricity. This is the offset of the well from the center of the pay zone.

Reservoir Properties
Kx
Permeability in the x-direction, that is Kh
Ky
Permeability in the y-direction, that is parallel to the well
Kz
Permeability in the z-direction, that is Kv

Well Properties
Length
Length of the horizontal well (completion). Assuming that the horizontal completion is exactly
horizontal. A profile for the horizontal section can be entered using the Well bore... button.
The length must not be greater than the reservoir diameter (that is twice the reservoir 
extension radius Rextn).
Rw
Sandface radius, that is. pipe+annulus+cement
Skin
Mechanical skin factor. Can be entered or computed. To compute the skin, select the
Calculate Skin check box. This activates the Options (p.48) button. If the value is
computed, sensitivity cannot be performed directly on the skin value.

Single Point PI only 

The following data are required for single point PI only:
Fluid properties

User Guide
45 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 63/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 At reservoir conditions (the first two parameters are alternatives):

OFVF
Oil Formation Volume Factor (oil well)
Gas Z

gas compressibility factor (gas well)

Viscosity
fluid viscosity
Calculate PI
Compute the single point PI values from the data supplied.

Distributed PI only 
Well bore... (p.86)

PSS Oil (Babu and Odeh) and PSS gas (Babu and Odeh)

Reservoir Size

Note: this is referenced only in PSS gas.

X dim
drainage width perpendicular to the well
 Y dim

drainage width parallel to the well

Thickness
reservoir thickness

User Guide
46 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 64/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Well Location (based on the well midpoint)

Note: this is referenced only in PSS gas.

X well
x coordinates of the horizontal well trajectory.
 Y well
y coordinates of the horizontal well trajectory.
Z well
z coordinates of the horizontal well trajectory.

Reservoir Properties
Kx
Permeability in the x-direction, that is Kh
Ky
Permeability in the y-direction, that is parallel to the well
Kz
Permeability in the z-direction, that is Kv

Well Properties
Length
length of the hor izontal well (completion). (This assumes that the horizontal completion is
exactly horizontal.) A profile for the horizontal section can be entered using the
Well bore... (p.86)
button.
Rw
Sandface radius. That is, pipe+annulus+cement
Skin
Mechanical skin factor. Can be entered or computed. To compute the skin, select the
Calculate Skin check box . This activates the Options (p.48). If the value is computed,
sensitivity cannot be performed directly on the skin value.

Single Point PI only 

The following data are required when you specify Single Point PI as the IPR model:
Fluid properties
enter these for reservoir conditions
OFVF
Oil Formation Volume Factor (oil well)

User Guide
47 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 65/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Gas Z
gas compressibility factor (gas well)
Viscosity
fluid viscosity

Calculate PI
Click this button to compute the single point PI values from the data supplied.

Distributed PI only 
The following data are required when you specify Distributed PI as the IPR model and select
Distributed PI as the model type:
Distributed PI
Enter a straight line PI value for liquid or gas.
Well bore... (p.86)
Click the button to set the properties.

Horizontal Completion Well Properties Options

This dialog opens when you select the Calculate skin check box on the Properties tab and click the
Options button.

Damaged Zone
Diameter 
Diameter of the damaged zone around the well bore. The default is the well bore radius, that
is the damaged zone does not exist
Permeability

Permeability of the damaged zone around the well bore. The default is the formation
permeability.

Gravel Pack 
Permeability
Permeability of the gravel pack. The default is estimated according to the sieve size.
Tunnel
Length of the tunnel. This is usually the sum of the thickness of cement, casing and annulus.
The default =0

Compacted zone
Diameter 
Diameter of the compacted zone (or crushed zone) around the perforation. The default is the
diameter of the perforation (that is, the compacted zone does not exist).
Permeability
Permeability of the compacted zone (or crushed zone) around the perforation. The default
is the permeability of the damaged zone.

User Guide
48 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 66/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Perforation
Diameter 
Diameter of the perforation into the formation. The default = 0.5 inches, 12.7 mm
Length

Length of the perforation into the formation. The default = infinity (which results in a zero skin
due to perforation)
Shot Density
Shot density. The default = 4 shots/ft ,13.12 shots/m

Calculate Skin
Calculate
Click the Calculate button to compute the skin from the data supplied. This overwrites any
value already set.

Vertical Well Completion

The vertical completion component models flow from the reservoir to the bottom hole using an inflow
performance relationship. More details (p.360).
The following data must be entered:

Reservoir Data
• Static Pressure
• Temperature

Note: The pressure may be a calculated variable, provided that the other two boundary conditions,
flowrate and outlet pressure, are entered.

IPR Model 
Inflow Performance Relationship (p.360)
Relationship between completion drawdown and flowrate.
Flow Control Valve (FCV)
The default is a completion without FCV. To use an FCV, select the check box and click FCV
Properties to configure it.

Local fluid properties

Local Fluid properties that pertain to this completion.

Note: Vertical completions can be "stacked" to form a multiple completion well and (optional) tubing
can be placed between the completions. Thus each completion can have its own fluid properties.

User Guide
49
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 67/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PI Data

Data required 
The following parameters are required for a PI (p.361) IPR.
PI coefficient
 A function of bottom hole flowing pressure (Pwf) , Static reservoir pressure (Pws) and
Flowrate (Q).
Vogel Below bubble point correction
Use this in cases of undersaturated reservoirs where wellbore pressure may be above or 
below the bubble point. Note: The "Well PI with Vogel correction below the bubble point"
completion model is only intended for use when the reservoir pressure is above the bubble
point. If the static reservoir pressure is below the bubble point, then you should use a different
completion model, for example Vogel (p.362) or Fetkovich (p.363) which are intended for 
saturated fluids.
Calculate/Graph button
The required parameters can be computed from multi-rate test (p.55) data.

Vogel's Equation Data

The Vogel equation (p.362) was developed to model saturated oil wells.

Data required 
If you select Vogel's Equation as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties tab, the
following parameters are displayed:
Abs. Open Flow Potential
The maximum liquid flowrate that the well could deliver if the bottom hole pressure was 0.

In the Absolute Open Flow Potential section, enter the following data that will be used to calculate
the AOFP:
PI Coefficient
The value is usually around 0.8 (the default).
Q
The actual flowrate of the well from a well test.
Pwf 
Flowing bottom hole pressure
Pws
Static Reservoir pressure
Calculate AOFP
use the above data to compete the AOFP. This overwrites any values already entered for 
the AOFP.

User Guide
50 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 68/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Fetkovich's Equation Data

Fetkovich's equation (p.363) is a development of the Vogel equation to take account of high velocity
effects.

Data required 
If you select Fetkovich's Equation as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties tab, the
following parameters are displayed:
Open Flow Potential
The well's maximum flowrate.
n exponent:

Calculate/Graph button
The required parameters can be computed from multi-rate test (p.55) data.

Jones' Equation Data

Data required 
If you select Jones' equation (p.364) as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties tab,
the following parameters are displayed:
Fluid type; Liquid or Gas:
Changes the units of the A and B coefficients
A (turb)
turbulent coefficient, must be => 0
B (lam)
laminar coefficient, must be => 0
Calculate/Graph... button
The required parameters can be computed from multi-rate test (p.55) data.

Jones 4-point test 

To run a Jones 4-point test, do the following:
1. Select Jones IPR
2. Click Calculate  » Graph....
3. Select multipoint (p.55)
4. Enter the static reservoir pressure.
5. Enter the reservoir temperature.
6. Enter up to 4 test rates and associated test pressures.
7. Press the Plot IPR or Plot fit button and the coefficients A and B will be computed.
8. Select OK

User Guide
51
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 69/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Backpressure Data
Rawlins and Schellhardt developed the Backpressure equation in 1935.

Data required 
If you select Backpressure equation (p.365) as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion
Properties tab, the following parameters are displayed:
C
Constant (intercept at log flow rate = 1.0)
n
Inverse Slope. For pure laminar flow n=1 and 0.5 for completely turbulent flow. n is limited
to 0.5<n<1
Calculate/Graph button
Click this to compute the required parameters C and n from multi-rate test (p.55) data. At
least three data sets must be supplied.

4-point test 
To run a Back Pressure 4-point test, do the following:
1. On the Vertical Completion Properties tab, select Backpressure IPR.
2. Select Calculate  » Graph..
3. Select multipoint (p.55).
4. Enter the static reservoir pressure.
5. Enter the reservoir temperature.
6. Enter up to 4 test rates and associated test pressures.
7. Click Plot IPR or Plot fit. The coefficients C and n will be computed.
8. Click OK.

Pseudo Steady State Equation / Darcy Data

The Pseudo steady-state equation (p.365) assumes that the fluid is single phase, that laminar flow
exists, and that the fluid is (essentially) incompressible. The equation is based on single phase flow,
therefore you are prompted to select the basis for the equation; either Liquid or Gas.
 A Vogel correction is available for liquid flow below the bubble point. For gas systems, you can choose
to use gas pseudo pressure or a pressure squared approximate (only reliable for low pressure
systems).

Data required 
If you select Pseudo Steady-State as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties tab, the
following parameters are displayed:

Basis of IPR calculation

Specify whether the calculations are to be performed on a Liquid or Gas basis. Your selection changes
the following parameter choices.

User Guide
52 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 70/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Use Vogel below bubble point

 Apply the equation for calculating the productivity above the bubble point and the Vogel
relationship to calculate the IPR curve below the bubble point.

Note: This check box is available only if you selected Liquid as the IPR Basis.

Use pseudo pressure method

Note: This check box is available only if you selected Gas as the IPR Basis.

Reservoir Thickness
 Average formation thickness.

Wellbore Diameter 
Diameter of the wellbore (drilled hole) outside of the casing and cement. The default is 6 inches.

Permeability 
This is the average formation permeability. Typical values (p.529).

Reservoir Size/Shape
Take into account the effect of the shape of the reservoir (and the position of the well relative to
boundaries), by way of a shape factor. The default is a circular reservoir shape (shape factor 31.62).
Drainage Radius
Radius of external boundary of drainage area. Default 2,000 feet. Typical values (p.530).
Shape factor 
Identify the physical location of a well in relationship to the reservoir boundaries. Default
31.62 circular reservoir, see figure below.
Reservoir Area
 Area of the reservoir. Typical values (p.530).

User Guide
53
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 71/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.1. Shape Factors

See Earlougher (1977) (p.543) for reference.

Skin
Skin value has two components, a Mechanical (constant) term and a rate dependent term. (For 
example, if the rate is 20 mmscf/d, the constant skin is 3, and the rate dependent skin is 0.1/mmscf/

User Guide
54
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 72/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

d, the total skin would be 5). Both mechanical and rate dependent skin terms can be entered or 
calculated (from completion description).

Mechanical Skin
Enter Skin
Dimensionless constant skin factor 
Calculate skin
Model the completion in detail and thus compute the skin factor using completion options
(p.59). If the skin is computed, sensitivity cannot be performed directly on the skin value,
but sensitivities can be performed on any completion description parameter (for example
shots per foot, perforation depth, and so on).

Rate Dependent Skin

Enter Skin
Dimensionless Rate dependent skin factor 
Calculate
Calculate the rate dependent skin terms for all the components specified in the completion
options (p.59) description.

Forchheimer Equation Data

Data required 
If you select Forchheimer's equation (p.364) as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion
Properties tab, the following parameters are displayed:
F (turb)
Turbulent coefficient, this must be => 0
A (lam)
Laminar coefficient, this must be => 0
Calculate/Graph button
The required par ameters can be computed from multi-rate test (p.55) data.

Multi-rate
In addition to the standard IPR equations, test data can be utilized so that the inflow can be matched
to actual measured data. A minimum of three data points is required. Two types of multi-rate test are
available:

Multipoint (default)
 A 'flow-after-flow' test sequence. Static pressure is taken as a constant throughout the test
period. The flowrate (Q) and corresponding flowing bottom hole pressure (Pwf) are required.
These are entered into the spreadsheet.
Isochronal
This type of test is normally performed in reservoirs with low permeability where the time
taken to reach stabilized flow conditions is unacceptably long (such as low permeability

User Guide
55 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 73/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

sands). Isochronal testing is performed by periods of flowing followed by shutting-in of a well

(normally with increasing rate). The wellbore flowing pressure is recorded during each flow
period at a specific time (for example if the time is 4 hours, then the test is referred to as a
4-hour isochronal test). Due to the long stabilization time normally associated with the
isochronal test, reservoir conditions need not return to the original static pressure. Hence a

different
(Pwf) andstatic reservoir
static pressure
reservoir is recorded.
pressure (Pws) are The flowrate
required. (Q),are
These flowing bottom
entered intohole
the pressure
spreadsheet.
Once the test data has been entered it can be plotted using either;
Plot IPR
plots the actual IPR to be used, with the test data superimposed.
Plot Fit
plots the log log fit, with the test data superimposed.
The IPR constants (for example PI, A and B, C and n, and so on) will be computed and displayed in
the Fitted constants section.
Select the Chart » Print option to print or export the plot.

Hydraulic fracturing 
The Hydraulic Fracture IPR type uses a digitized, constant rate, finite-conductivity, closed square,
fractured well type-curve to calculate the effect of a vertically drilled well that has been hydraulically
fractured. These type curves were taken from Schlumberger's FracCADE program. The well is
assumed to be in the center of a square reservoir with an aspect ratio of 1:1.
The type curves used in the calculation are taken from Reservoir Stimulation 2 nd Edition by
Econimides and Nolte, Chapter 8 by Hai-Zui Meng and SPE paper 16435 and were best suited for 
tight gas wells. Type curves are generated using single-phase fluid, two-dimensional finite difference
simulators for some ranges of system properties (permeability, porosity, fluid viscosity, total system
compressibility) and the characteristic length of the system, fracture half-length. These are then used
to compute Dimensionless time (valid range: 10e-5 - 10e3), Dimensionless wellbore pressure, and
Dimensionless fracture conductivity (valid range 0.1 - 500).

Data required 
To set up hydraulical fracture, select Hydraulic Fracture (p.386) as the IPR Model on the Vertical
Completion Properties tab. The following parameters are displayed:
Basis of IPR calculation
Specify whether the calculations are to be performed on a Liquid or Gas basis.

Use Vogel below bubble point

 Apply a type-curve equation for calculating the productivity above the bubble point, but the
Vogel relationship to calculate the IPR curve below the bubble point. This is not
recommended if the water cut exceeds 60%.

Note: This check box is available only if you selected Liquid as the IPR Basis.

User Guide
56 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 74/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Reservoir Permeability:
 Average formation permeability. For a gas well, this is gas permeability. For an oil well, this
is total liquid permeability. The default is infinity. Typical values (p.529).
Reservoir Thickness:

 Average formation thickness. The default is infinity.

Reservoir Radius
Radius of external boundary of drainage area. The default is 2,000 feet. Typical values
(p.530).
Wellbore Diameter 
Diameter of the wellbore (drilled hole) outside of the casing and cement. The default is 6
inches.
Fracture Half Length
The length of the fracture extending out in one direction from the wellbore. That is, half the
total facture length.
Fracture Permeability
The effective permeability to the primary fluid of the fracture proppant used in fracturing the
reservoir 
Fracture Width
The average fracture width of a fracture in a hydraulically fractured reservoir 

Transient model check box 

Select the Transient model check box to model a well that has not reached pseudo steady state
conditions. This displays the following additional parameters:
Time
Producing time during the transient period in which the inflow performance is calculated
Porosity
 Amount of pore space in the producing formation as a percentage of total bulk volume.
Porosity = Pore volume/Bulk volume.
Total Compressibility
Total compressibility of the reservoir system
See also other IPR methods (p.360)

References

Some additional references for the model are given below:

1. Nolte, K.G. (1991) "Fracture Design and Validation With Uncertainty and Model Limitation" JPT,
September 1991.
2. Elbel, Jack (1992) "Evaluation of Apparent Fracture Length Indicated from Transient Tests"
Journal of Canadian Petroleum Technology, December,1992.
3. Cinco-Ley, H., Samaniego, F. and Dominguez, N. (1978) "Transient Pressure Behavior for a Well
with a Finite-Conductivity Vertical Fracture," SPEJ, Aug. 1978, pp. 253-264.

User Guide
57 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 75/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4. Meng, H-Z, Brown, K.E. (1987) Coupling of Production Forecasting, Fracture Geometry
Requirements and Treatment Scheduling in the Optimum Hydraulic Fracture Design, SPE 16435.
5. Cinco-Ley, H., Ramey H.J., Samaniego, F. and Rodriquez F. (1987) "Behavior of Wells with Low-
Conductivity Vertical Fracture," SPE 16776.

Transient IPR Data

Data required 
If you select Transient (p.370) as the IPR Model on the Vertical Completion Properties tab, the
following parameters are displayed:

Basis of IPR calculation

Specify whether the calculation are to be performed on a Liquid or Gas basis. Your selection changes
the following parameter choices.
Use Vogel below bubble point
 Apply a type-curve equation for calculating the productivity above the bubble point and the
Vogel relationship to calculate the IPR curve below the bubble point. The Vogel correction
is not recommended if the water cut exceeds 60%.

Note: This check box is available only if you selected Liquid as the IPR Basis.

Use pseudo pressure method

Using (Pres2 - Pbhp2) for the delta P term in the pseudo steady state equation for Gas is
correct only for low pressures (< ~ 2,000 psia).
 A more accurate way is to use (MPres - MPbhp) instead where MP is the pseudo pressure
(which itself is a function of pressure, Z factor and viscosity). This is more valid over the entire
range of pressures.

Note: This check box is available only if you selected Gas as the IPR Basis.

Permeability and other Parameters

To plot the IPR, click Plot IPR. Enter the following parameters:
Reservoir Permeability
 Average formation permeability. The default is infinity. Typical values (p.527).
Reservoir Thickness

 Average formation thickness. The default is infinity.

Wellbore Diameter 
The default is 6 inches.
Drainage Radius
Radius of external boundary of drainage area. The default is 2,000 feet. Typical values
(p.530)

User Guide
58 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 76/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Time
Duration of the drawdown period in hours.
Porosity
 Average porosity of the reservoir rock.

Total Compressibility
Saturation weighted compressibility of the entire reservoir-liquid system
(ct  = coSo  + cwSw  + cf  )

Skin parameters
Skin value has two components, a Mechanical (constant) term and a rate dependent term (for 
example if the rate is 20 mmscf/d and the constant skin is 3, and the rate dependent skin is 0.1/mmscf/
d, then the total skin would be 5). Both mechanical and rate dependent skin terms can be entered or 
calculated (from completion description).

Mechanical Skin.
Choose from the following:
Enter Skin
Dimensionless constant skin factor.
Calculate
Model the completion in detail and thus compute the skin factor using completion options
(p.59). If the skin is computed then sensitivity cannot be performed directly on the skin
value, but sensitivities can be performed on any completion description parameter (for 
example shots per foot, perforation depth and so on).

Rate Dependent Skin.

Choose from the following:

Enter Skin
Dimensionless Rate dependent skin factor.
Calculate
Calculate the rate dependent skin terms for all the components specified in the completion
options (p.59) description.

Completion Options
Both the Pseudo Steady State (p.52) and the Transient (p.370) IPRs use a skin factor to determine
the flow into the well. PIPESIM allows you to enter a skin factor, or to calculate it using Completion
Options. To use Completion Options, first select one or both of the Calculate radio buttons in the
Mechanical Skin and Rate Dependent Skin boxes.

Skin factor 
The skin factor is calculated by summing contributions from five different components:

User Guide
59
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 77/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Damaged Zone Skin

models the effect of reduced (or improved) permeability in a zone around the well. The
diameter and permeability of the damaged zone must be supplied, otherwise they will default
to the well bore diameter and the formation permeability, and the damaged zone skin will be
zero.
Partial Penetration / Deviation Skin
models geometric effects, such as partial penetration of the reservoir layer and deviation of 
the well from vertical. If the open interval is equal to the reservoir thickness and the well is
vertical (0 degrees deviation) then the partial penetration / deviation skin will be zero.
Gravel Pack Skin
models the effect of a gravel pack in the well bore, between a screen and the reservoir. Also,
the pressure drop contribution from the gravel pack is calculated and reported in the output
and system plot files.
Perforation Skin
models the effects of perforations. A compacted zone around the perforations is included.
Frac Pack Skin
models a well that has been fractured.
The Skin factor can be either negative (enhanced inflow) or positive (reduced inflow).

Completion models
In Completion Options you can select one of five completion models. Skin components appropriate
to each completion model are calculated, as detailed in Vertical Well mechanical skin factor 
calculation (p.377). You can choose to turn off any component of the skin.

User Guide
60 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 78/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Completion Damaged Partial Gravel Perforation Frac

model Zone Skin Penetraion / Pack Skin Pack
Deviation Skin Skin
Skin

Open Hole Assumes the well is not Yes Yes

lined or cemented
Open Hole  Assumes the well bore is Yes Yes Yes
Gravel Pack Open Hole, with the
addition of a gravel pack
Perforated Assumes the well is lined Yes Yes Yes
or cemented, and
perforated
Gravel Packed  Assumes the well is lined Yes Yes Yes Yes
and Perforated or cemented, and

perforated,
addition of awith the pack
gravel
Frac Pack Assumes the well is lined Yes Yes Yes Yes
or cemented, perforated
and has been fractured.
The data entered in the Completion Options dialog is passed to the engines to calculate the IPR
during simulation. An approximate value of the skin used during the simulation can be determined by
clicking on the Calculate Skin button. This value may not be exact, since some of the skin calculations
may depend on fluid properties which are only calculated during the simulation.

User Guide
61
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 79/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.2. Open Hole Completion

User Guide
62 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 80/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.3. Open Hole Gravel Pack Completion

User Guide
63
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 81/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.4. Perforated Completion

User Guide
64
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 82/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 1.5. Gravel Packed and Perforated Completion

Figure 1.6. Frac Pack Completion

Multilayer Reservoir IPR
 A multilayer reservoir model is easy to construct. If the fluids from multiple layers are NOT
commingled, the individual layers can be treated as two separate wells and modeled in the Network
model connected at the wellhead. Otherwise the Well Performance module can be used to model
the commingled flow.

User Guide
65 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 83/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 Any number of reservoir intervals (layers) can be added to the model. The layers can be either stacked
on top of each other (that is with common flowing bottom hole pressure) or separated by a length of 
conduit (such as tubing or casing) if required.

Note:  As of release 2008.1, multi-layer injection well models can be simulated in PIPESIM.

Layers
 A completion icon represents each layer:

Therefore, if required, each layer can have a different Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) and
also a different fluid model.

Tubing strings
at different or connectors
elevations. maystring
If a tubing be used to separate
is used, layers.
elevational This
and ensures
frictional the layers
pressure are are
drops positioned
calculated between the layers, and each layer has a different production pressure (PWF).

User Guide
66 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 84/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Care should be taken when defining the dimensions of the tubing between the layers. Each tubing
object will have to be defined independently. It is only important to ensure that the relative distance
from top to bottom of each icon (that is between each completion) is correct. Therefore, for example,
each tubing icon can be assumed to start from a depth reference of zero. Alternatively the TVDs and
MDs at the tubing/layer junctions can be made to match, so each deeper tubing object would be made
to start at the deepest point of the adjoining shallower tubing.
Make sure also that the correct ambient temperature(s) for each tubing is specified.
By default PIPESIM allows back flow (that is reverse flow) into (or, in an injection well, out of) any
layer. To block back flow in any layer, the appropriate keyword can be set (LAYER INJECT = NO
(p.659)) by placing an EKT (p.84) upstream of the completion in question.

Tubing Tool
Placing a tubing object in the model allows modeling of vertical or deviated flow (production or 
injection) in a well bore. Heat transfer (p.90) can be modeled by either entering or computing an

User Guide
67 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 85/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) or using the Ramey Model (p.72). The tubing object is a
connection (p.32) object, so must be placed between two node (p.32) objects.
Normally only one tubing object is required for a well model. The exception is when multiple
completions are modeled.
The tubing can be defined as either of the following types of model:
• simple (p.68) model — simplified interface
• detailed (p.70) model
Data entered under the simple model can be converted to a detailed model using the Convert to
detailed model button at any time.
Use the detailed profile model if any of the following situations apply:
• The well is highly deviated
• It has more than four changes in tubing size
• A geothermal gradient is known

• The overall heat transfer coefficient is not the same as the default (0.2 Btu/hr/ft2), or needs to vary
through the depth of the tubing
• More than one piece of downhole equipment needs to be modeled. That is, there are multiple gas
lift injection points.

Note: If different data is entered in both the simple and detailed models, PIPESIM uses the data in
the Preferred Tubing model that was selected when the Tubing Tool dialog was closed.

See also: Coiled Tubing/Velocity String (p.77)

Simple Profile Model 

The tubing (p.67) object, once added to the model (p.32), requires the following information:

User Guide
68 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 86/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Perforations
This data determines the extent of the tubing modeled. That is, the MD/TVD is taken as the fluid inflow
point. Enter the following parameters:
MD (Measured depth)
total length of the tubing to the perforations. This will always be equal to, or greater than, the
TVD
TVD
true vertical depth
Reservoir Temperature
fluid temperature

User Guide
69
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 87/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Tubing sections

Note: Up to four tubing items can be defined. If more are required, use the detailed model (p.70)
profile.

Enter the following parameters for each section:

From MD
start MD for this tubing's section. This is computed automatically from the initial MD or from
the last set tubing depth, that is the "to MD column".
To MD
end MD for this tubing's section. This MUST always be entered.
ID
inner diameter of the tubing section.

Convert to Detailed model 

The data entered into the simple model can be exported to the detailed (p.70) model using the
Convert to detailed model button.

Note:  Any data already entered under the detailed model is overwritten.

Summary table
Summary table (p.73)

Detailed profile model 

To configure a tubing (p.67) object, once added to the model (p.32), double-click the tubing, select
Detailed Model, and use the following tabs.

Deviation Survey Tab

Set two of the MD, TVD and angle for at least two data points. Compute the third using the
Calculate button. (Default = compute angle). The wellbore profile can be copied from any other 
spreadsheet application. If the well profile is straight, the deviation survey can be omitted.

Geothermal Survey Tab

Enter ambient temperatures at various depths (the depths can be either based on MD or TVD). If the
Input U value radio button is selected, also enter the overall heat transfer coefficient values (U-
values) at the various depths. The minimum data you must enter is at the well head and bottom hole.
If you want the U-values to be calculated, select the Calculate U Value radio button; the U Value
column is greyed-out so that you cannot enter any values. Click Heat Transfer Properties to enter 
the Tubing Heat Transfer Properties (p.72) for the heat transfer calculation.

User Guide
70 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 88/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Tubing Configurations Tab

Up to 200 changes of tubing configuration can be modeled. The data entered here determine the
extent of the tubing modeled. That is, the bottom of the last tubing section is taken as the fluid inflow
point.
The parameters are as follows:
Bottom MD
Measured Depth of the bottom of the tubing.
ID
tubing inside diameter, See also tubing tables (p.518)
Wall Thickness
tubing thickness, default 0.5 inches 12.7 mm. See also tubing tables (p.518)
Roughness
absolute pipe roughness, default 0.001 inches, 0.0254 mm. See also Roughness tables
(p.528)
Casing ID
casing ID is only required if the flow type is set to " Annular" or "Tubing+Annulus" flow or the
 Alhanati (p.209) instability check is to be made. See also Casing tables (p.518).
Flow Type
flow path up the tubing. Select one of the following options:
• Tubing (default)
• Annulus or  
• Tubing+Annulus.

The label is optional, but allows key points in the profile to be highlighted in the output report.
Downhole Equipment Tab
Select the type, position (in terms of its MD), properties and optional label of any downhole equipment.
Click Properties to configure each item of equipment, as follows:
• Gas Lift Injection Properties (p.75) button
• ESP Properties (p.216) button
• PCP Properties (p.169) button
• Rod Pump Properties (p.218)
• Choke Properties (p.404), button
• SSSV (p.404). Enter the bean ID using the Properties button.
• Separator Properties (p.106) button
• Keyword Tool Properties (p.84) button
• Injector Properties (p.92) button

User Guide
71
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 89/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Gas lift valves

Click G/L Valve system (p.75) to enter Gas lift valves.

Note: Using Gas lift injection points is different from adding Gas Lift valves. The valve option takes
into account the physics of the gas lift system, whereas the injection point assumes that the amount
of gas supplied can always be injected. See Gas Lift system (p.190) for more details.

Wellbore Heat Transfer 

Various input data can be entered in the Tubing Heat Transfer Properties dialog to compute the
overall heat transfer coefficient (p.443).
To open this dialog, open a detailed tubing model, select the Geothermal Survey tab and click Heat
Transfer Properties.

Ground Properties
The parameters are as follows:
Thermal Conductivity
The ground/rock thermal conductivity (default = 1.5 BTU/hr/ft/F).
Specific Heat Capacity
The ground/rock specific heat capacity (default = 0.2 BTU/lb/F).
Density
The ground/rock density (default = 140 lb/ft3)

Wellbore Properties
The parameters are as follows:

Production/Injection Time
The time the well has been producing/injecting (default = 168 hr).
Tubing Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the tubing material (default = 35 BTU/hr/ft/F).
Completion Fluid Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the completion fluid in the annular space between the tubing and
the casing (default = 3.2 BTU/hr/ft/F).
Casing Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the casing material (default = 35 BTU/hr/ft/F).

Casing Thickness
The thickness of casing.
Cement Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the cement between the casing and the rock/ground (default = 2
BTU/hr/ft/F).

User Guide
72 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 90/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Cement Thickness
The thickness of cement.

Figure 1.7. Typical Wellbore

Summary tubing table

To view this table, double-click a tubing object and click Summary Table in the dialog. The dialog
has the following three sections:

Configuration summary 
There is just one parameter, as follows:
Spreadsheet
shows a summary of the nodes that will be used to model the well and any equipment or ID
changes in the tubing. The data cannot be changed here.

User Guide
73
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 91/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Options
The parameters are as follows:
Distance between nodes
to speed up the calculations, increase the distance. To make the calculation more accurate,

decrease it. (Default =1,000 ft).

Refresh
update the spreadsheet after the node distance has been changed.

Schematic 
This shows a schematic of the well with any equipment placement noted.

Gas Lift Properties

To open this dialog, double-click a tubing object. Select one of the following tubing models:
• simple tubing model (p.68): Set the Artificial Lift method to Gas Lift, then click Properties under 

Artificial Lift.
• detailed tubing model (p.70) On the Downhole Equipment tab, add Gas Lift Injection.

Properties of the lift gas

The flow rate of the injected lift gas can be specified directly, or calculated to give specified values of 
the stock tank GLR of the produced fluid. Select from the following options:
Injection Gas Rate:
The actual (fixed) amount of lift gas to be injected. PIPESIM will always inject this amount at
the specified depth regardless of whether or not the gas injection systems (that is the casing
head pressure or gas lift valve) can deliver this amount.

Set GLR to ...:

The injection rate will be calculated so that the stock tank gas lift ratio of the tubing fluid
downstream of the injection point is equal to this value. Note, if this value is less than the
gas lift ratio of the tubing fluid upstream of the injection, then gas will actually be removed.
Increase GLR by ...
The injection rate will be calculated so that the stock tank gas lift ratio of the tubing fluid is
increased by an amount equal to this value.

Sensitivity of the gas lift quantity 

To perform sensitivity of the gas lift quantity, use the artificial lift operation (p.190).

Surface temperature
the temperature of the lift gas at the surface. This is used to compute the lift gas temperature
at the injection point. If the temperature is omitted, the lift gas temperature is assumed to be
the same as the production fluid temperature.

Injection gas
The following injection gas properties depend on the fluid model:

User Guide
74
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 92/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Blackoil fluid
Specify the gas specific gravity. If this is omitted, the specific gravity of the gas from the
production fluid is used (default 0.64).
Compositional fluid:

Specify the composition of the injection gas fluid.

Optional data
This data does not affect the amount of gas that can be passed through the gas lift point. The data
allows further calculations to be performed. For example, if the Valve Port Diameter is provided, the
pressure drop across the valve and the Joule-Thomson temperature change are calculated. This data
is also needed if the Alhanati instability (p.209) check is required — see OPTIONS (p.538).
Valve Port Diameter 
The operating gas lift valve port (orifice) diameter.
Surface injection pressure
The gas lift injection surface pressure (upstream of the surface injection choke).

Set Gas Lift Injection point/points

The Gas Lift Injection points do not take into account the gas lift system. It is assumed that the quantity
of lift gas requested is fully injected into the production string at the specified depth(s) and that this
takes no account of the available injection pressure or valve details. You can specify different injection
depths and injection rates at each depth. To allow the program to calculate the injection depth, based
on the available injection pressure, use the Gas Lift valves (p.75) method.
PIPESIM offers the following options for setting the gas lift injection points.
If the depth(s) of injection and injection rate(s) are known, do the following:
1. Create a tubing object and double-click it to edit it.
2. In simple profile enter the gas lift depth and the gas lift pr operties.
3. In detailed profile set the Gas Lift injection points in the Downhole equipment tab and enter the
gas lift properties .

Gas Lift Valves

The actual gas lift valve depths are specified. For normal PIPESIM operations, gas is injected at the
specified rate at the deepest possible valve depth (taking into account the available injection
pressure). For the Gas Lift Diagnostics operation only, the actual gas throughput for each valve is
calculated based on the injection pressure, production pressure, valve details and valve status. For 
this operation, details of the gas lift system are required (valve size, Ptro and so on). The valve
throttling response is modeled (based on the bellows load rate of the valve).
 Allows gas lift valves to be selected from a database and placed in the tubing string.

Installed Design

Spreadsheet 
This is a list of installed valves:

User Guide
75 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 93/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Valve MD
the depth of the valve
Valve Choke size
(optional)

 All other data is populated from the database when a valve is added by using the Add button.

Note: To expand the spreadsheet and to see available buttons, select Edit Valve Details (only used
for Gas Lift Diagnostics) check box.

Add (p.77)... (Valve Lookup)

add a valve from the database to the installed valve table. The valve will be added to the
bottom of the current list.
Edit Selected Valve
replace selected valve with the selected entry from the database. You can also double click
the cell under model or Port size that corresponds to the required depth.
Remove Selected Valve
remove the selected valve
Remove All Valves
remove all valves

Note: Take care with this option.

Gas Lift System Properties

Available Injection Pressure

the available injection operating pressure
Injection Gas Rate
the specified injection gas rate for normal PIPESIM operations. (For the Diagnostics
operation only, this is the maximum amount of gas that can be injected through all valves).
Surface Injection Temperature
the temperature of the lift gas at the surface. This will then compute the lift gas temperature
at the injection point. If the temperature is omitted then the lift gas temperature will be
assumed to be the same as the production fluid temperature.
Minimum Valve Injection DP
a minimum differential between injection and production pressures to allow injection at a
valve depth.
Max Allowable Injection TVD
maximum possible injection depth (TVD). Normally the packer depth.

User Guide
76 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 94/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Gas specific gravity

the specific gravity of the lift gas. If omitted then the specific gravity of the gas from the
production strung will be used (default 0.64)

Valve database

Valve Database (p.170)

The database contains a list of the current valves available. To add your own valves to the database,
use Data » New/Edit Gas Lift Valve...
Spreadsheet
list all the valves in the database that match the criteria defined by the filter. A valve can be
selected by selecting the appropriate row.
Add valve
add the selected valve to the installed design table.

Filter 
Use this to apply a filter to the listed valves.
Manufacturer 
valve manufacturer filter 
Type
Valve type filter 
• IPO
• PPO
• PPS

• Orifice
• Dummy
Size filter 
Valve outer diameter 
Series filter 
series type
Refresh
update the spreadsheet listing by applying the filters

Remedial Coiled Tubing / Velocity String 

This option allows the modeling of a remedial coiled tubing string inserted inside the tubing. You enter 
the coiled tubing Outside Diameter and its injection gas rate (normally nitrogen). The PIPESIM model
then simulates an annular flow path between the coiled tubing string and the tubing specified in the
Tubing Configurations window.
Gas is injected into the produced fluid (at the depth of the coiled string) at the user specified gas
injection rate. You can also optionally enter the coiled tubing surface injection pressure (and coiled
tubing ID). PIPESIM will then calculate whether the injection pressure is sufficient to inject the

User Guide
77 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 95/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

specified gas rate or not. If the pressure is not sufficient, then a warning message is written to the
output and summary files, however, the specified gas rate will still be injected. Therefore, PIPESIM
will not calculate the coiled tubing injection gas rate; it is user specified.
The remedial coiled tubing description in PIPESIM has no association (or functionality) with Gas Lift
Design routines. Therefore PIPESIM does not perform coiled tubing gas lift design. The gas lift
mandrels and valves will be assumed to be installed in the tubing specified in Tubing
Configurations window.
To model coiled tubing, do the following:
1. Double-click the tubing object. Select Detailed Model.
2. Select the Remedial Coiled Tubing option on the tubing's Downhole Equipment tab.
3. Properties
• Bottom MD:
• OD
• Injection
4. Injection Gas Rate
5. GLR
• Surface Injection Gas Temperature
• Gas specific Gravity = 0.967 for N2
6. Coiled Tubing Pressure Drop Calculation (optional)
• Coiled Tubing ID
• Surface Injection Gas Pressure
7. To model a velocity string, set the gas injection rate to 0.

Tubing and Pipeline Tables

Equipment/Tubing sizing OR physical property sensitivity (1 parameter)

To size tubing or a piece of equipment, perform the following basic steps:
1. Build the required model, pipeline tools (p.81) or well (p.42).
2. Include one of the following:
• tubing/flowline/equipment to be sized
• the physical property to vary
3. Select the Pressure/Temperature profile (p.174) operation.
4. Select the sensitivity parameter.
5. Enter the data for the sensitivity parameter.
6. Run (p.172) the operation.
7. Save the model (p.33).

User Guide
78 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 96/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Equipment/Tubing sizing OR physical property sensitivity (multiple parameters)

To size tubing or a piece of equipment with multiple sensitivity parameters, perform the following
basic steps:
1. Build the required model, (p.42) pipeline tools (p.81) or well (p.42).

2. Include one of the following:

• tubing/flowline/equipment to be sized
• the physical property to vary
3. Select the System Analysis (p.173) operation.
4. Select the multiple sensitivity option.
5. Select the x-axis parameter.
6. Enter the data for the x-axis parameters.
7. Select the multiple sensitivity parameters.
8. Enter the data for the sensitivity parameters.
9. Decide whether the sensitivity parameters are permuted or change in step.
10.Run (p.172) the operation.
11.Save the model (p.33).

Nodal Analysis Point

This defines where the system is to be broken into two for the Nodal Analysis (p.177) operation.
Nodal analysis breaks the system into two parts around a particular (solution) point and then
computes the inflow to and outflow from that point. The solution node is defined as the location where
the pressure differential upstream (inflow) and downstream (outflow) of the node is zero. This is
represented graphically by the intersection point of the inflow and outflow performance curves; this
is the operating point. The Nodal Analysis point must be connected between two objects.
Nodal Analysis is normally performed at the following locations:
Bottom hole
Place the Nodal Analysis point between the completion and the tubing.
Well head - upstream of any wellhead equipment
Place the Nodal Analysis point between the tubing and the equipment.
Well head - downstream of any wellhead equipment.
Place the Nodal Analysis point between the equipment and the following object (flowline,
riser, and so on).
Riser base
Place the Nodal Analysis point between the flowline and the riser.
See also: Connecting objects (p.32)

Injections Wells
Besides standard production wells, you can model the following injections wells in PIPESIM:
To model an injection well, do the following:

User Guide
79
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 97/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1. Define the well (that is, its flowline, tubing, completion, fluid model, and so on), as for a production
well.
2. Add a source (p.108) to the start of the system.
3. Set the well injectivity using the Well PI option in the Well completion dialog.

4. Define the operation. Remember that inlet conditions are now at the surface, and outlet conditions
at the completion or reservoir.
In the network module (p.38), injection wells are modeled explicitly using the Injection Well icon.

Injection Performance
Perform the following basic steps to build an injection well model:
1. Select the units (p.147) set of your pref erence.
2. Add a source object at the inlet.
3.  Add (p.32) the necessary components (p.42) to the model (tubing, choke, and so on) and defined
the necessary data.
4. Determine the completion of the well, one of the following:
• Vertical (p.49)
• Horizontal (p.43)
5. Define the fluid specification (black oil (p.460), compositional (p.127) or steam (p.146)). Water 
injection systems can be modeled by black oil or compositional.
6. (Optional) Calibrate the fluid (p.460) .
7. Define the flow correlation to use.
8. Save the model (p.33).
Once the basic model has been developed, a number of operations can be performed, or the well
model can be utilized in additional PIPESIM modules.

Operations
• Correlation matching (p.111)
• Pressure/Temperature profile (p.174)
• Physical property sensitivity - 1 parameter (p.78)
• Physical property sensitivity - Multiple parameters (p.79)
• Equipment/flowline sizing - 1 parameter (p.78)
• Equipment/flowline sizing - Multiple parameters (p.79)
• Nodal Analysis (p.177)

Multiple Completion Well 

Model multiple completions by setting the following properties to different values for each layer:
• Static pressure
• Temperature

User Guide
80 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 98/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Depth
• IPR specification
• Fluid model
The IPR for each individual layer can be specified by using any of the standard completion (p.360)
options. Similarly the fluid description for each layer can be specified using the standard black oil
(p.460) or compositional (p.127) fluid description.
 A multiple completion model is defined by adding the required number of completions to the model
and connecting with the tubing (p.67) object, (the length of each tubing string should be set to reflect
the depth of the completions). If the layers are stacked, then they can be connected using the
connector object rather than by the tubing object as the connector object has zero length.
When performing Nodal Analysis (p.177) on multiple completions the composite IPR curve will be
created (and shown) for the inflow performance. The individual layer IPR curves can however, be
displayed using the plot utility.

Note:  As of release 2008.1, multi-layer injection well models can be simulated in PIPESIM.

Liquid Loading

Implementation
The functional form of Turner’s Equation is implemented in PIPESIM and you have the ability to
specify a correction factor (E). The default correction factor is 1.2, corresponding to Turner’s original
model. You can specify E factors suggested by any of the authors listed in the table (p.359), or input
your own E factor between 0.1-10. This is done using the ELIQLOADING subcode of the OPTIONS
(p.568) maincode.
You can control what velocity ratio

v t  v t 
- or  - is reported using the LLVELOCITY subcode of the OPTIONS (p.568) maincode.
v m  v  g 

Inclination Angle
There is a critical pipe angle where the droplets fall back onto a liquid film on the lower section of the
pipe instead of falling back to the bottom of the well. Thus, the stable rate would depend on liquid film
characteristics rather than a force balance on a droplet. This my indicate that the liquid loading
equations are valid for vertical wells and should not be used beyond a certain angle. You can select
a maximum pipe angle to restrict v t  calculation for vertical or near vertical section of well using the

LLANGLE subcode of the OPTIONS (p.568) maincode.

Pipeline tools

Pipeline and facilities specific operations

The operations specific to pipeline and facilities are the following:
• Pressure Temperature Profile (p.174)

User Guide
81
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 99/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Flow correlation comparison (p.175)

• Systems Analysis (p.173)
Once the basic model has been developed, the following operations can be performed, or the model
can be utilized in additional PIPESIM modules.

• Correlation matching (p.111)

• Pressure/Temperature profile (p.174)
• Physical property sensitivity - 1 parameter (p.78)
• Physical property sensitivity - Multiple parameters (p.79)
• Equipment/flowline sizing - 1 parameter (p.78)
• Equipment/flowline sizing - Multiple parameters (p.79)
• Multiphase booster design (p.92)
See also Hot Keys (p.22), Main toolbar (p.24), Well Performance (p.42), Network (p.33) components,
case studies (p.245) and How to add objects (p.32).

Pipeline and facilities model

Perform the following basic steps to build a pipeline and facilities model:
1. Select the units (p.147) set of your preference.
2. Add a source to the model.
3.  Add (p.32) the necessary components to the model (flowline, equipment, and so on.) and defined
the necessary data.
4. Set heat transfer (p.90) options for each flowline.
5. Define the fluid specification (black oil (p.460) or compositional (p.127)).

6. (Optional) Calibrate the fluid (p.460).

7. Define suitable Horizontal correlations (p.147) and vertical correlations (p.147).
8. Save the model (p.33).

Compressor Details
Either centrifugal or reciprocating compressors can be modeled. The basic compressor model uses
centrifugal compressor equations to determine the relationship between inlet pressure and
temperature, outlet pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, and efficiency. It is also possible
to use user-defined compressor curves (p.164) to describe the relationship between differential
pressure, flowrate, and eff iciency for a range of compressor speeds. Reciprocating compressors only
work off user entered performance curves (p.163). If compressor curves are used the compressor 
speed and number of stages become additional factors.
Double-click the compressor to open its Properties tab. Enter at least one of the following
parameters:
Discharge Pressur e
Pressure at the compressor outlet (default 20,000 psia). This is not allowed in Network
(p.33) models.

User Guide
82 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 100/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Pressure Differential
Pressure increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the compressor. The default is
10,000 psia.
Pressure Ratio

Discharge pressure / suction pressure ratio. (Pout/Pin) The default is 1,000.

Power (shaft power) (default unlimited).
Power of the compressor.
Route
Select one of the following options: (see also Reciprocating Compressor (p.84))
• Adiabatic — compressor follows an adiabatic (no heat transfer) compression process
(the default). This is available for blackoil modeling and compositional modeling.
• Polytropic — compressor follows a polytropic compression process. This is available for 
black oil modeling and compositional modeling. This is the default for the black oil model.

• process.—This
Mollier  compressor follows
is available an isoentropic
for compositional (no change
models only, itinisentropy) compression
their default.
Efficiency (default 100%).
Efficiency of the compressor.
Honor Stonewall limit
If this is set, the compressor will honor the stonewall.
The remaining quantities are calculated using centrifugal compressor equations. If more than one
value is supplied, the parameter which leads to the smallest compressor differential pressure is used,
and all other supplied parameters are discarded.
See also: How to add objects (p.32)

User Curves
Select the User Curves check box to specify that a compressor curve is to be used. This displays
the parameters listed below:
Select
Select the compressor curve to use from the database (p.164).
Compressor type:
Specify Centrifugal or Reciprocating.
Speed

If a compressor
supplied curve is
curve against itssupplied,
specifiedthe speed
speed. can
The also be specified.
adjustment This is
is made using used
the to adjust
so called the
affinity
or fan laws, which state that "capacity is directly proportional to speed, head is proportional
to square of speed, and power is proportional to cube of speed". See Data Entry (p.162) for 
entering curve data. If a reciprocating compressor is selected, a variable speed device may
be used and this requires the minimum and maximum operating speed.

User Guide
83
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 101/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Reciprocating Compressor Details

 Adding a new Reciprocating Compressor to the PIPESIM database

To add a new reciprocating compressor to the database:
1. Select Data » New Reciprocating Compressor (only available in the single-branch menu).
2. Set the Abs. Min. Suction Pressure to zero and the Abs. Maximum Capacity to a value equal
to or less than the maximum flowrate on the suction pressure curves.

3. Add at least two Suction Pressure versus FlowRate performance curves (p.163) for a range of 
discharge pressures covering all likely eventualities. These two curves can be identical if required

 Adding a Reciprocating Compressor to a PIPESIM-Net Model 

The compressor must exist in its own PIPESIM-Net branch. That is, no other piping or equipment can
be present.
To add a compressor to a model, do the following:
1. Double-click on the compressor icon and select User Curves.
2. Choose the required reciprocating compressor from the PIPESIM database and enter the
operating speed.
3. Leave all other compressor parameters (Discharge Pressure, Pressure Differential, and so on)
blank.

Note: If the model has two or more reciprocating compressors in series (for example, field
compressors followed by a plant compressor), any downstream compressor must have a greater 
capacity than the upstream compressor. (Even if only fractionally greater, for example 10.00 mmscf/
d followed by 10.01 mmscf/d.

Engine Keyword Tool

Placing an Engine Keyword Tool (EKT) in the model allows access to the PIPESIM Input Language
(p.555). This is a powerful input language that gives direct access to the calculation engine via the
GUI, reducing the need for you to embark on the more complex Expert mode, or Keyword mode.
Expert mode is where keywords are entered directly into a text file and the calculation engine
processes the contents of the file to produce results.
The EKT can be used in the following situations:

User Guide
84
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 102/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• to access advanced features

• to access new features that do not have an entry mechanism in the GUI yet.
See also adding keywords at the start of the model (p.555).

Expander Details
The basic expander model uses centrifugal expander equations to determine the relationship
between inlet pressure and temperature, outlet pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, and
efficiency. Built in, or user-developed expander curves can be used to describe the relationship
between differential pressure, flowrate, and efficiency for a range of expander speeds. If expander 
curves are used, therefore, the expander speed and number of stages become additional factors.
Enter at least one of the following parameters:
Discharge Pressure
Pressure at the expander outlet (not allowed in Network (p.33) models). (The default is 20
psia.)
Pressure Differential
Pressure increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the expander. (The default is
10,000 psia.)
Pressure Ratio
Inlet pressure / discharge pressure ratio.(Pin/Pout). (The default is 1,000.)
Power 
Shaft power, the power of the expander. (The default is unlimited.)
Route
Adiabatic (p.428)

Polytropic (p.428)
default for black oil model
Mollier (p.428)
default for compositional models
Efficiency
Efficiency of the expander (default =100%).
The remaining quantities are calculated using centrifugal expander equations. If more than one value
is supplied, the parameter which leads to the smallest expander differential pressure is used, and all
other supplied parameters are discarded.

See also keywords (p.620)

User Curves
Select the User Curves check box to specify that an expander curve is to be used. This displays the
parameters listed below:
Select
Select the expander curve to use from the database (p.164).

User Guide
85 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 103/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

% Speed
If an expander curve is supplied, the % speed may also be specified. This is used to adjust
the supplied curve against its specified speed. The adjustment is done using the so called
affinity or fan laws, which state that" capacity is directly proportional to speed, head is
proportional to square of speed, and power is proportional to cube of speed". See Data Entry
(p.162) for entering curve data.
Flowline Details
Placing a flowline in the model allows modeling of horizontal or near-horizontal flow (up or downhill).
Heat transfer (p.90) can be modeled by entering or computing an overall heat transfer coefficient
(U value).
Each flowline has fixed characteristics in terms of inner diameter, outer diameter, roughness, and so
on. If any of these dimensions changes along the pipeline length, add an additional flowline object to
the model.
Double-click the flowline to view its Properties tab. The flowline's profile (distance vs. elevation) can
be defined by either a simple (p.86) or detailed (p.87) model. Specify which to use, using the
Preferred Pipe Description list. The simple model is often used when an initial model is being
developed and the exact profile of the flowline is unknown. When additional data becomes available,
you can switch to the detailed model.

Simple model 

For a simple model, provide the following information:

Rate of Undulations
 An artificial factor that can be used to automatically introduce some undulations into the
flowline to reflect terrain effects. The value entered is the total change in elevation for every
1,000 units (feet, m, and so on). Thus, a rate of undulations of 10 on a flowline 1,000 m long
would have a peak of 5 m at 500 m along the flowline. This is different to the manner in which
this was handled in the PIPESIM Suite. To model a totally flat flowline, set the rate to 0.

Default = 10.
Horizontal Distance
the horizontal distance covered by the complete flowline, NOT the length of the pipeline!
Elevation Differ ence
the change in elevation between the start (source end for a single branch model) and the
end of the flowline object. Enter a negative value for a downhill flowline, a positive value for 
an uphill one. Thus the elevation change is relative to the object, not from some datum.

User Guide
86 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 104/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Inner Diameter (ID)

the flowline inner diameter for the complete flowline. If this value changes significantly part
way along the flowline, add a second flowline object.
Wall Thickness

the wall thickness,

significantly excluding
part way any
along the coatings
flowline, forathe
add complete
second flowline.
flowline object.If Default
this value changes
= 0.5 inches,
12.7 mm.
Roughness
the absolute pipe roughness for the complete flowline. Typical values (p.528). If this value
changes significantly part way along the flowline, add a second flowline object. Default =
0.001 inches, 0.0254 mm
Ambient Temperature
the surrounding ambient temperature for the complete flowline. If this value changes
significantly part way along the flowline, add a second flowline object.

Once the flowline details have been entered its profile can be plotted using the Schematic button.
Detailed model 

For a detailed model, provide the following information:

Distance / Elevation
node points detailing the flowline profile. This can be cut and pasted from another 
spreadsheet application. PIPESIM uses the difference in elevation between each point.
Therefore the datum is not important.
Ambient Temperature profile
this is optional except at the first and last nodes, which must have a temperature defined.
U Value

this is optional except at the first and last nodes, which must have a U value specified. If the
option to calculate the U value was selected, this column will show "calc".
Inner diameter (ID)
flowline inner diameter for the complete flowline. If this value changes significantly part way
along the flowline then a second flowline object should be added.

User Guide
87 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 105/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Wall Thickness
wall thickness, excluding any coatings for the complete flowline. If this value changes
significantly part way along the flowline then a second flowline object should be added.
Default = 0.001 inches, 0.0254 mm
Roughness
absolute pipe roughness for the complete flowline. Typical values (p.528). If this value
changes significantly part way along the flowline then a second flowline object should be
added. Default = 0.001 inches, 0.0254 mm.
Label
text field that can be used to identify key points in the flowline. These will then appear in the
main output file.
Once the flowline details have been entered its profile can be plotted using the Schematic button.

Flowline Properties
Use Setup   Flowline Properties.. to display, edit and sort flowline details in a model. The following
parameters»can be edited using this view:
Distance
horizontal distance of the flowline. This cannot be changed if the detailed profile model has
been used to define the flowline.
Elevation Difference (+ve for uphill, -ve for down hill).
this cannot be changed if the detailed profile model has been used to define the flowline.
ID
Inside Diameter 
Wall Thickness
pipe wall thickness
Roughness
pipe roughness
Ambient Temperature
surrounding ambient temperature. This cannot be changed if the detailed profile model has
been used to define the flowline
Use Detailed Profile
If this is set, the flowline has been defined in detail and the Distance, elevation difference
and ambient temp cannot be changed here.
Other data associated with a flowline can be edited by selecting the required flowline and using the
Edit... button. This displays the normal data entry screens for a flowline.

Heat Exchanger Details

 Adding (p.32) a heat exchanger in the model allows a fluid temperature and/or pressure change to
be modeled. Double-click the Heat Exchanger to view the options.

User Guide
88 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 106/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Temperature Change
To model a temperature change, do the following:
1. Specify the temperature effects of the heat exchanger on the flowing fluid.

Note: The heating or cooling media itself is not modeled.

2. Select the parameter to use from the following and enter a value for it:
Discharge Temperature
a fixed flowing fluid outlet temperature
Temperature differential
temperature increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the heat exchanger 
Duty
enthalpy change across the exchanger (positive values mean that heat is added to the fluid)

Pressure Change
To model a pressure change, do the following:
1. Specify the pressure effects of the heat exchanger on the flowing fluid.
2. Select the parameter to use from the following and enter a value for it:
Discharge Pressure
a fixed flowing fluid discharge (outlet pressure)
Pressure Drop
pressure decrease (negative) across the heat exchanger 
See also: How to add objects (p.32)

Equipment
 Adding an equipment item to the model allows simulation of a generic unit operation, in which the
pressure and/or temperature of the stream are modified.
To configure the equipment, double-click it to view its Properties tab.

Route
Specify the thermodynamic mode of operation of the equipment. This is used to calculate the fluid
outlet temperature. The options are:
Isenthalpic

Constant enthalpy (the default)

Isentropic
Constant entropy
Isothermal
Constant temperature

User Guide
89
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 107/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

For instance, to simulate chokes and the Joule-Thomson cooling across pressure reduction valves,
the most appropriate choice is isenthalpic.

Temperature Change
Use this to specify the temperature effects of the equipment on the flowing fluid.

Note: The heating or cooling media itself is not modeled.

Select one of the following and enter a data value:

Discharge Temperature
a fixed flowing fluid outlet temperature
Temperature differential
temperature increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the equipment
Duty

enthalpy change across the equipment (positive values mean that heat is added to the fluid)
Pressure Change
Use this to specify the pressure effects of the equipment on the flowing fluid.
Select one of the following and enter a data value:
Discharge Pressure
a fixed flowing fluid discharge (outlet pressure)
Pressure Drop
pressure decrease (negative) across the equipment

See also: How to add objects (p.32)

Heat Transfer 
Heat transfer between the fluid and surroundings occurs, depending upon the temperature gradient.
To configure this, right-click on a flowline and select Data, then select the Heat Transfer tab.
There are two options for modeling the heat transfer:
• Input U value (p.90) — you enter an overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) based upon the
pipe outside diameter.
• Calculate U value (p.91) — the heat transfer coefficient is calculated from entered pipe and
conductivity data.

Input U value
You can select the most appropriate U value, or use a default value for an insulated, coated or bare
flowline.

Note: These values only apply when the simple view (p.86) is used. When the detailed view (p.87)
is selected, the U values are entered directly into the detailed view spreadsheet. The U value is based

User Guide
90 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 108/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

on the pipe outside diameter and reported in the output file. To allow the value to be reported at a
different reference point, use the HEAT HTCRD (p.665) keyword through the EKT (p.84).

In addition the Inside Film Coefficient (IFC) can either be included in the overall U value, or calculated
separately and added to the U value.
Calculate U value
Detailed heat transfer input and output information can be obtained by selecting Setup » Define
Output and then selecting the heat transfer options in the Define output (p.150) dialog.
Enter the following information to compute the overall Heat Transfer coefficient:

Pipe coatings
Up to 26 pipe coatings can be added in the table. For each pipe section, specify the following:
• K (Thermal conductivity) of the material. Typical values (p.528)

• Thickness of the pipe coating.

• Description - for reference purposes only.
Pipe overall outside Diameter 
This is automatically computed from data supplied.

Pipe conductivity 
The default is 35 Bth/hr/ft/F Typical values (p.528)

 Ambient fluid 
Specify either air or water depending on whether the system is onshore or offshore.
Ambient median
For a pipe that is exposed to different media along its length, use two (or more) pipe sections.
Select Air or Water.
Velocity
 Average velocity of the surrounding median. (Default = 0.1 ft/s)

Pipe burial data

Burial
The burial depth of the flowline from the pipe's center line. Enter a positive value for buried
pipe and negative for a pipe elevated above the ground. Enter 0 for a half-buried pipe. The
default value is -2000 mm. More examples (p.674)
Ground conductivity
This is for flowlines only.
Status
This changes, based on the entries above.

User Guide
91
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 109/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Injection Point
Placing an injection point in the model allows a side stream to be modeled.
Double-click the injection point and specify the following :
Fluid

fluid to be injected. Select the radio button for one of the following:
• Black Oil (p.460)
• Compositional (p.127)
• PVT File (p.135)
• MFL File (p.139)
Temperature
temperature of the incoming fluid at the injection point
Rate
incoming liquid/mass/gas rate (this can be entered at stock tank or flowing conditions using
the "@" button).
In a network model a stream removed at the separator can be reinjected using the re-injection tool
(p.641).

Important Notes
Note the following:
• The injected fluid type must be consistent with the main fluid type set in the model.
• The injection fluid toolbox can be used anywhere within the model; at the surface, or in the tubing
as a downhole object.

Multiphase Boosters
Multiphase boosters can be used where the fluid contains both liquid and gas phases. A number of 
models for booster performance are available, based on the different types of booster available on
the market:
• Generic Multiphase Booster (p.92)
• Twin Screw Multiphase Booster 
• Nuovo Pignone (p.94)
• User defined (p.95)
• Generic (p.94)

• Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster 

• Framo 2009 (p.95)
• Framo 1999 (p.98)

Generic Multiphase Booster 

The generic multiphase booster module is based on splitting the multiphase fluid in its constituent
liquid and gaseous phases at booster suction. Conventional pump theory is used to calculate the

User Guide
92 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 110/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

shaft power required to raise the pressure of the liquid phase and conventional compressor theory is
used to calculate the shaft power required to raise the pressure of the gaseous phase. The total shaft
power required by the multiphase booster is the sum of the two computed shaft powers. The use of 
the generic multiphase booster module is envisaged for preliminary checks only and can be used to
benchmark the multiphase booster power requirement.

 As a rule, using the generic booster module with realistic values for pump efficiency and compressor 
efficiency, a 'best case' estimate for multiphase boosting power is obtained. That is, using a
specifically designed multiphase booster, its power requirement will be higher than that calculated
using the generic booster module (up to 100% higher is possible). Realistic values for pump and
compressor efficiency are considered to be 75% for initial screening purposes.

Data Entry 
Double-click the Multiphase booster to open its Properties tab. Enter one or more of the following
parameters:
Discharge Pressure
discharge pressure from multiphase pump (default 20,000 psia)
Pressure Differential
pressure differential across multiphase pump (default 10,000 psia)
Pressure Ratio
the multiphase pump pressure ratio is the absolute discharge pressure divided by the
absolute suction pressure (pressure ratio must be between 0 and 5)
Power 
power available for pump (default unlimited)
Pump Efficiency
Efficiency of the pump. The default is 100%.
Compressor Efficiency
Efficiency of the compressor. The default is 100%.
When differential pressure, pressure ratio, or discharge pressure is specified, the program calculates
the required power for multiphase boosting. Alternatively, when power is specified the program
calculates the differential pressure (or pressure ratio or discharge pressure) that can be developed
by the booster. When more than one variable is specified, the program determines the "most limiting
specification" during the course of the simulation, and recalculates the other parameters.
 As the generic booster is modeled as a parallel pump/compressor, you can define pump and
compressor efficiency. Pump efficiency and compressor efficiency are percentage values; the
defaults are 100%. Typical efficiency values (p.441)
The output provided using the generic multiphase booster option includes the calculated total
power requirement, as well as its constituent shares of compression power and pumping power. See
also MPUMP keyword (p.633).

Twin Screw Boosters

 After adding a Multiphase booster, double-click it to open the Multiphase Booster dialog. In the
Properties tab, select a multiphase booster type from the list .

User Guide
93
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 111/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The following twin screw multiphase boosters are available:

Generic Twin Screw Multiphase Booster 

In essence, this option provides the same functionality and input (p.93) as the generic type multiphase
booster, but rather than assuming a parallel pump/compressor process, actual twin screw multiphase
booster performance data is used to predict pump performance.
Based on actual pump operating conditions, the program selects a suitable pump from the generic
database available in PIPESIM and calculates performance accordingly. Note that, using the generic
twin screw multiphase booster option, you do NOT specify a pump model, but leave it to the
program to select a suitable pump for the operating conditions. If different operating conditions need
to be investigated, the program may select a different pump for each of these; if you want to investigate
the performance of one specific model under all these operating conditions, use one of the modeling
options below.
Based on the calculations performed under this option, the main parameters characterizing the
multiphase booster operating point are provided in the output reports or plots. These include booster 
speed (as a % of nominal speed), total volumetric flow rate at booster suction, gas volume fraction
(GVF) at booster suction, booster differential pressure, and booster power requirement. In addition,
the program suggests which pump to select from the generic pump database for a more detailed
investigation.

Twin Screw Multiphase Booster 

This option is based on nominal capacity data only, rather than offering a detailed model booster from
vendor catalogues or similar. This approach provides sufficient detail for you to make a first
assessment, does not require you to fully know all of the booster models available for use. It lets you
progress your studies without requiring detailed vendor information. If you wish to simulate a specific
vendor model, use the user defined curve.
The generic database contains performance data for seven different twin screw multiphase booster 
models. Rather than asking the program to select a suitable pump for investigated operating
conditions, you can preselect one of these seven boosters and assess its performance under different
operating conditions. This lets you, for example, study the effect of the same booster under different
operating conditions (for example, later in field life with lower reservoir pressure), or study the effect
of changes to pump operations (for example, the effect of changes in pump speed). Unlike the Generic
Twin Screw Multiphase Booster (p.94) option, this option therefore allows you to explore the operating
envelope of a specific pump model.
The seven different twin screw multiphase boosters available from the generic database in PIPESIM
are characterized by their theoretical flow rate at 100% speed, typically referred to as 'booster 
capacity' or 'nominal capacity'. It is the flow rate of the selected booster when operated at 100% speed
and zero differential pressure (that is no internal leakage). The seven nominal capacities available
are:
• 100 m3/h
• 250 m3/h
• 500 m3/h
• 700 m3/h
• 1000 m3/h

User Guide
94
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 112/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• 1400 m3/h
• 2000 m3/h
Select a booster from the Nominal Booster list.
In the % speed box, you can also specify booster speed as a percentage of nominal speed; the speed
range a specific booster model can operate at is typically from 50% to 110% of nominal booster speed.
Based on the calculations performed under this option, the main parameters characterizing the
multiphase booster operating point are provided in the output reports or plots. These include booster 
speed (in % of nominal speed), total volumetric flow rate at booster suction, GVF at booster suction,
booster differential pressure and booster power requirement. PIPESIM also gives the option of 
downloading the simulation output onto a multiphase pump process data sheet. This allows
multiphase pump operating conditions to be communicated and further information to be obtained
directly from the vendors.
Note the following:
• Performance curves in the PIPESIM generic database are provided for different values of booster 

speed, suction
conditions pressure
for which and GVF at suction.
the performance curve isWhere actual
supplied, the conditions do not exactly
program interpolates match the
as appropriate.
• Performance curves in the PIPESIM generic database are valid for a liquid viscosity of 6 cSt. For 
viscosities different from this, the program incorporates a module to make the required corrections.

Vendor Twin Screw Multiphase Booster 

Offering the same functionality and input (p.93) as the Twin Screw Multiphase Booster (p.94) option,
you can input this data as a user defined booster performance. Thus this entered data will allow
you to model a booster specifically of interest and determine the effects of changing operating
parameters on system and booster performance.
This option may be of specific interest when you need to assess the suitability of a multiphase pump
of which performance data is well known. This could be when you have received a technical proposal
from a vendor, or when a booster has already enter ed field operation, but you want to explore the
effects of changing operating conditions or booster operations for that specific pump and system
where the booster is placed in.
Obtain the booster data file from the vendor. Enter the location of the file in the Full Path of Vendor 
File box.
In the % speed box, you can also specify booster speed as a percentage of nominal speed; the speed
range a specific booster model can operate at is typically from 50% to 110% of nominal booster speed.

Note: Schlumberger does not supply any vendor data file, but please contact us for more details.
See also Vendor Performance Curve Format. (p.100)

Framo 2009 Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster 

See also Multiphase Boosting Technology (p.431), FRAMO 2009 (Optional) (p.623).
The Framo 2009 pump model supersedes the earlier 1999 model (p.98). You can select the Framo
2009 Multiphase Booster from the list in the Multiphase Booster dialog box.

User Guide
95 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 113/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Pump performance is defined by pump data files provided by Framo (p.544). The pumps are
classified based on their nominal capacity and maximum pressure differential achievable. The
nominal capacity refers to the total volumetric flowrate (gas & liquid) at suction conditions and is thus
dependent on suction pressure and fluid properties. The quickest way to determine the pump
requirements is to first model the system using a generic multiphase pump (p.92) based on expected

operating conditions and inspect the summary or output file to determine the total volumetric flowrates
at the suction.
The following pumps are available as part of the standard Framo catalog:

Pump Impeller Diameter Nominal Capacity Maximum DP

mm in 3 3 BBL/d bar psi
m /h m / day
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-250/180 310 12.2 250 6000 37739 180 2611
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-400/180 310 12.2 400 9600 60382 180 2611
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-500/45 310 12.2 500 12000 75478 45 653

FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-500/180 310 12.2 500 12000 75478 180 2611
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-600/120 310 12.2 600 14400 90573 120 1740
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-700/45 310 12.2 700 16800 105669 45 653
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-800/120 310 12.2 800 19200 120764 120 1740
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-900/45 310 12.2 900 21600 135860 45 653
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-1100/45 310 12.2 1100 26400 166051 45 653
FRAMO Helico-Axial 310-1100/120 310 12.2 1100 26400 166051 120 1740
FRAMO Helico-Axial 360-1200/38 360 14.2 1200 28800 181146 38 551
FRAMO Helico-Axial 360-1500/38 360 14.2 1500 36000 226433 38 551
FRAMO Helico-Axial 360-1800/38 360 14.2 1800 43200 271719 38 551

Note: The numbers in the pump name refer to impeller diameter (mm); nominal capacity (m3/hr);
Max. dP (bar).

New files can be added if they become available, as follows:

1. Add any new file to the Framo pump directory (for a default installation this is C:\Program Files
\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Data\framo09).
2. Update the index of pump files to reference the new file; see the file pipesim_framo.xml in the
above directory for more details.
Modeling the Pump
 All types of multiphase boosters allow standard operating constraints to be defined. The user may
enter any combination of the following parameters or none at all. Note that the default values for all
parameters are unrealistically high; this ensures that each parameter will not be the limit on pump
performance, unless the user supplies a lower, more realistic value. If none of the parameters is

User Guide
96 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 114/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

specified, the limit of pump performance will usually be the speed, and which will in this case be 100%;
or otherwise the DP limit for the specific pump model.
• Discharge pressure: Pressure at the pump outlet. Not allowed in Network models and generally
not advisable to specify. The default is 20,000 psia.
• Pressure differential: Pressure increase across the pump. The default is 10,000 psia.
• Pressure ratio (Pout/Pin): Discharge pressure / suction pressure ratio. The default is 1,000 .
• Power (shaft power): Power available for the pump. The default is unlimited , though it may be
constrained by the selected pump model.
For example, when differential pressure is specified, the program will calculate the required power 
for multiphase boosting, or alternatively when power is specified the program will calculate the
differential pressure that can be developed by the pump. When both values are specified, the program
will determine the "most limiting specification" during the course of the simulation, and recalculate
the other parameter. When none of the two operating parameters are specified, the program will
calculate the differential pressure that can be developed by the selected pump for the prevailing
suction conditions.
There are several operating parameters specific to the Framo 2009 Multiphase booster which may
be optionally supplied. These include:
• Tuning factor: This is a linear multiplier on calculated pump differential pressure used to match
field operating conditions. Allowable range is from 0.7 to 1.5.
• Number of pumps in parallel: Used to simulate multiple identical pumps operating in parallel (equal
flow split between pumps). Allowable range is from 1 to 7.
• Speed Limit: Allows the user to specify a maximum speed limit for the pump. Allowable range is
from 20% to 100%.
• Flow in recirculation: Allows the user to specify the quantity of flow in recirculation.

It
theshould
amountbeofnoted that if the required
fluid recirculated throughflowrate through
this pump the pump
to achieve is less than
the minimum rate the minimum required
is automatically added.
Output
Based on the calculations performed, parameters characterizing the multiphase pump operating point
are provided in the summary and output reports and available as system plot variables. These include:
• Pump speed
• Total volumetric flow rate at pump suction
• GVF at pump suction
• Pump differential pressure

• Power requirement
• Fraction of the flow in recirculation (if applicable)
• Minimum flowrate (with zero recirculation)
 Additionally, the limiting constraint will be reported in the output report.
If Simulated Operating Conditions Performance Map is selected, a performance map file is
created for each case. These files can be viewed using PsPlot. The files are named "pump_n.pfm",
where "pump" is the pump model name, "n" is the case number, and ".pfm" is the file extension. The

User Guide
97 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 115/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

file created by the first case can be plotted by right-clicking on the Multiphase Booster icon in the
model view, and selecting the option "Booster map". If you want to plot files from subsequent cases,
you should select the desired file from PsPlot's file > open menu.

Note: The pump name should be unique, otherwise plot files will over write each other. Alternatively
the user can rename the pump for each scenario to see the booster map for each case/scenario.

 A performance map is valid for a given set of operating conditions, including:

• Gas volume fraction
• Suction pressure
• Liquid density
• Liquid viscosity
 A typical performance map is shown below.

The operating point is displayed on the map. Several scenarios are illustrated.
• A. Pump is operating unconstrained. Pump speed is 100%.
• B. Pump is limited by a speed constraint. Since the operating point falls to the left of the minimum
flowrate line, some fluid is being recirculated.

• C. Pump is limited by a constraint on pressure differential. Pump speed is reduced.

• D. Pump is limited by power available. Pump speed is reduced.

Framo 1999 Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster 

The Framo 1999 model has now been superseded by the 2009 model (p.95).
You can select the Framo 1999 Multiphase Booster from the list in the Multiphase Booster dialog
box.

User Guide
98 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 116/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

When choosing the helico axial multiphase booster, you can enter the pump driver type, pump
parameters and pump operating conditions, as detailed below.
You can select one of three drive types from the dropdown-menu in the dialog box
Hydraulic Drive

characterizes
onshore Framo hydraulically driven multiphase pump, usable subsea and topsides/

Electrical Air cooled drive

characterizes Framo E-motor driven multiphase pump, usable topsides/onshore only
Electrical Oil cooled drive
characterizes Framo E-motor driven multiphase pump, usable subsea and topsides/onshore
To define the size of the pump and number of stages, enter the following pump parameters:
Flowrate Parameter (FQ)
The pump flow parameter determines the size of the multiphase pump relative to a reference
pump; FQ=1 denotes a pump equal in size to the reference pump. The range of values for 
FQ is 0.1 to infinity, values FQ>1 typically indicate that more than one pump is in parallel
operation. The default value for FQ is 1.0.
Head Parameter (FZ)
The pump head parameter determines the number of stages inside the multiphase pump
relative to a reference pump; FZ=1 denotes a pump with a number of stages equal to the
maximum number of stages in the reference pump. The range of values for FZ is 0 to 1.0.
The default value for FZ is 1.0.
Based on the values for FQ and FZ, the program will calculate the required booster speed for the
prevailing operating conditions. Booster speed is shown as pump speed parameter FN, being the
speed expressed as a fraction of the pump maximum continuous speed. FN is recommended to have
values within the range of 0.50 - 0.85.
 A value for FN significantly larger than 0.85 means that the pump is running at an unnecessary high
speed because the actual multiphase flow rate is higher than the flow rate recommended for the
selected pump. It will not be harmful to run with FN>0.85, but there will be no extra margin to further 
increase speed should operating conditions require it. Therefore, for initial screening purposes, a
maximum value of FN = 0.85 is rather prudent.
 A value for FN smaller than 0.50 means that the pump is running at an unnecessary low speed
because the actual multiphase flow rate is lower than the flow rate recommended for the selected
pump.
The differential pressure developed by the booster is proportional to pump head, which is dependent

on the
the number
booster of stages
maximum and pump
continuous speed.
speed, With pump
changes speed
to pump targeted
head to be
are mainly between 50by
implemented and 85% of 
changing
the number of stages within a pump. The number of stages is reflected in pump head parameter FZ;
the larger the value of FZ, the higher the number of stages.
The differential pressure developed by a single multiphase pump is set to be no greater than 70 bar,
the maximum available differential pressure for the multiphase booster.
Whereas the selection of pump driver type is straightforward, the selection of a suitable pump flow
rate parameter FQ and pump head parameter FZ is somewhat more complicated. For this reason,

User Guide
99
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 117/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

you have the option to omit suggested values for FQ and FZ in the first instance, upon which the
program (once a simulation has been run) will recommend values for FQ and FZ. If FQ and FZ are
entered by the user, the program will perform the simulation on the basis of the pump model as defined
by those parameters.
For pump operating conditions, you can enter any of the following values, or a combination of these:
Pressure Differential
pressure differential across multiphase pump
Power 
power available for pump
When differential pressure is specified, the program will calculate the required power for multiphase
boosting, or alternatively when power is specified the program will calculate the differential pressure
that can be developed by the booster. When both values are specified, the program will determine
the "most limiting specification" during the course of the simulation, and recalculate the other 
parameter. When none of the two operating parameters are specified, the program will calculate the
differential pressure that can be developed by the selected booster for the prevailing suction
conditions and associated shaft power requirement; the thus calculated operating point will be on the
'best efficiency line' as shown in the user guide.
Based on the calculations performed under the option 'helico-axial multiphase booster', main
parameters characterizing the multiphase booster operating point are provided to the output reports
or plots, and include booster speed parameter, total volumetric flow rate at booster suction, GVF at
booster suction, booster differential pressure and booster power requirement. In addition, PIPESIM
has the option to download the simulation output onto a multiphase pump process data sheet. This
will therefore allow multiphase pump operating conditions to be communicated and further information
to be obtained by the user directly from the vendors. See also FMPUMP (p.623) keyword.

Vendor Performance Curve Format for Twin Screw Multiphase Pumps

PIPESIM allows you to model the behavior of twin screw multiphase pumps by defining a set of 
performance curves. These curves specify volumetric rate/dP performance and associated power 
requirement to account for variations in pump speed, suction pressure and GVF at suction conditions.
The following sensitivities are suggested:
Gas Volume Fraction
0%, 20%, 50%, 70%, 85%, 95%
Speed
50%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 100%
Suction pressure
1 bara, 10 bara, 50 bara
The first line of the file must be:

Booster Performance Data

The second line of the file should be the vendor name.

The file then contains sets of curve data. The first line of the curve data should contain the pump
model, nominal flow rate in m3/h, the GVF, the speed in % and the suction pressure all in the correct

User Guide
100 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 118/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

order. This is followed by data lines giving the points on the curves and should contain the pump
differential pressure (bar), volumetric flowrate (m3/h), and the power (kW).

Model NomQv(m3/hr) GVF Speed(%max) Psuction(bar)

dP(bar) Qvol(m3/hr) Power
" " "
" " "

 At the end of the file a capital END must be present.

Typical Booster Performance Data File

Booster Performance Data

NUOVO_PIGONE
PSP250 2000 0 100 1
0 2001 150
10 1907 706
20 1842 1262
30 1787 1817
40
50 1735
1684 2373
2929
60 1633 3485
70 1582 4041
PSP250 2000 20 100 1
0 2001 134
10 1997 702
20 1991 1259
30 1979 1815
40 1960 2371
50 1930 2927
60 1911 3483
70 1892 4039
...
END

Notes:
1. The data should always be separated by at least once character space.
2. Comment lines (beginning with a "!") and blank lines can be used to make the table easier to read.
They will be ignored by the program.
3. The Model name should contain at least one non numeric character to allow the program to
determine where each set of curve data begins and ends.
4. The maximum number of different nominal flow rates (NomQv) is 10.
5. The maximum number of different GVF values is 10.
6. The maximum number of different speed values is 10.
7. The maximum number of different suction pressure values is 10.
8. There must be one curve for each combination of nominal flow rate, GVF, speed and suction
pressure.
9. There must be at least two points on each curve.

User Guide
101
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 119/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

10.The total number of curve points must not exceed 10000.

11.There should be no stationary points on the curves, that is, for each curve the dP values should
increase, the Qvol values should decrease and the Power values should increase.

Flowrate Operator Details

Only use the Flowrate Operator in a single branch model, not in the network module.
 A flowrate operator is a rate change device that can increase or decrease the fluid flowrate at that
point in the system. All fluid properties remain the same as those upstream of the object. The flowrate
units (for the adder) are the same as those specified for the source flowrate (that is liquid or gas), as
set by an operation. For example, if the operation sets the flowrate as 1,000 STB/d then the adder 
will add x STB/d.
Double-click the Flowrate Operator to set the following properties:
Adder 

values > 0 apply a rate increase, < 0 apply a rate decrease

Multiplier 
values > 1 apply a rate increase, < 1 apply a rate decrease.

Note: This feature cannot be used when the feed flowrate is computed.

Riser Details
Placing a riser in the model allows the modelling of vertically or near-vertical flow (up, down or 
inclined). Heat transfer (p.90) is modeled by either entering or computing an overall heat transfer 
coefficient (U value).

Note: The direction of the riser on the screen has no effect on the flow direction. If the riser is defined
as going downhill, the elevation difference MUST be set to a negative (-ve) value. To model a riser 
going uphill, the elevation difference must be set to a positive (+ve) value. Take care to ensure that
the correct sign is used, as the definition of up or downhill depends on your starting point!

User Guide
102 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 120/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 A riser can be defined by either a simple (p.103) or detailed (p.104) profile.

Simple profile
Provide the following information:
Horizontal distance
the horizontal distance covered by the complete riser, NOT the length of the riser!
Elevation difference
the change in elevation between the start (source end for a single branch model) and the
end of the riser. Enter a negative value for a downhill riser and positive for an uphill one.
Inner diameter (ID)
the riser inner diameter for the complete riser. If this value changes significantly part way
along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Wall Thickness
the wall thickness, excluding any coatings for the complete riser. If this value changes
significantly part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Roughness
the absolute pipe roughness for the complete riser. Typical values (p.528). If this value
changes significantly part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.

User Guide
103
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 121/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Ambient temperature
the surrounding ambient temperature for the complete riser. If this value changes significantly
part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Once the riser details have been entered, its profile can be plotted using the Schematic button.

Detailed profile
Provide the following information:
Distance / Elevation
Node points detailing the riser profile. This can be cut and pasted from another spreadsheet
application.
Ambient temperature profile (optional), at the point specified.
First and last nodes MUST have a temperature defined.
Heat transfer profile (optional).
First and last nodes MUST have a U value specified defined. If the option to calculate the U
value has been invoked then this column will show "calc".
Inner diameter (ID)
the riser inner diameter for the complete riser. If this value changes significantly part way
along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Wall Thickness
the wall thickness, excluding any coatings for the complete riser. If this value changes
significantly part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Roughness
the absolute pipe roughness for the complete riser. Typical values (p.528). If this value
changes significantly part way along the riser then a second riser object should be added.
Label
 A text field that can be used to identify key points in the riser. These will then appear in the
main output file.
Once the riser details have been entered, its profile can be plotted using the Schematic button.

Gas lift in the riser 

PIPESIM can be used to model the common situation of gas lifting at the riser base.This is becoming
a common technique in the industry.
 As the riser object does not have a location to enter the gas lift location or the gas lift quantity, you
may insert a tubing to "represent" the riser. By doing this the gas injection location and quantity can
be specified.
In the tubing dialog, set the parameters as follows:
1. wellhead TVD to 0 - represents the top of the riser 
2. riser height in the (TVD) perforations field
3. Artificial lift to single injection point
4. gas lift injection point

User Guide
104
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 122/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5. gas injection quantity (under the single G'L valve button) or a sensitivity variable in one of the
operations
6. Riser diameter (using tubing configuration)
7. Ambient temperature at the top and base of the riser (using the Ambient Temperature field on
the Tubing dialog, Properties tab).
8. For clarity the objects identified can be changed to, say, "Riser 1" from "Tubing 1".

Note: If the artificial lift operation is to be used then in addition to the above the "normal" tubing, must
be replaced with a riser object (this is due to the artificial lift dialog assuming that gas lift will be
allocated to the first tubing after the completion ) . Other operations allow the required tubing object
to be set and do not need this change.

Report Tool Details

Placing a report tool in a single branch model gives additional reporting of the conditions at that point
in the model. To do this, click the Report Tool icon on the main toolbar, then click on the model.
Double-click the Report Tool object to open its Properties tab. There is a check box for each report
item available, as listed below. Select the box for each item you want to report on.
Flow Map
This applies to multiphase flow regions only. If this box is ticked, a high resolution map is
produced, showing the multiphase flow regimes plotted against superficial liquid and gas
velocities. Note that the map is scaled so that the operating point is always inside it. To display
a map, select Reports » Flow Regime Map and select it in the list of available maps. The
list shows all available maps for the case that has been run.
Phase Split
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output
file, showing the constituents of each phase.
Stock Tank Fluid Properties
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various fluid properties such
as gas and liquid volumetric flowrate at stock tank conditions.
Flowing Fluid Properties
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various fluid properties such
as gas and liquid volumetric flowrate at flowing conditions.
Cumulative Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing properties, such as liquid

holdup, where the cumulative value may be of interest

Multiphase Flow Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various multiphase fluid flow
values such as superficial gas and liquid velocities.
Slugging Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various slug values such as
slug lengths and frequencies.

User Guide
105 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 123/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Sphere Generated Liquid Volume

If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various sphere generated
liquid values.
Heat Transfer Input Values

If this box the

Typically, is ticked, a table
following is printed
are printed: in the
Pipe andoutput file,Thicknesses
Coating showing heatand
transfer input data.
Thermal
Conductivities, Soil Thermal Conductivity, Burial Depth, Ambient Fluid Velocity, and Ambient
Temperature.
Heat Transfer Output Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file showing heat transfer output data.
Typically, the following information is printed: Distance, Fluid Temperature, Fluid Enthalpy,
and Heat Transfer Coefficients.
Composition Details
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output
file showing some compositional data such as water specific gravity.
Phase Envelope
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, the fluid's phase envelope is
automatically computed and stored in the branch's plot file. In network cases, the file that
contains the phase envelope will be noted in the output file.

Separator Details
Placing a separator in the model removes up to 100% of the gas, water or liquid (oil plus water) phase.
 A flash is performed to determine the quantity of each phase at the separator inlet. Double-click the
separator and set the following properties:
Type
Liquid, Gas or Water separator.
Efficiency
The efficiency or efficiency fraction refers to the amount of that material removed.
For example, a 90% efficient water separator removes 90% of the water. From that point onward only
flow of the remaining fluids will be modeled.

Note: To remove both gas and water place two separators in the model.

See also: How to add objects (p.32)

Track all streams from separator 

 A stream can only be removed from the system by the separator. The removed fluid is normally lost
to the model, but it can be reinjected into the network by using the reinjection tool (p.641). All the
fluid removed at the separator is reinjected. (To only reinject a percentage of the removed fluid then
the multiplier/added (p.102) object should be used in the separated branch.
The following are required;
• The branch that contains the separator of the fluid stream to reinject

User Guide
106 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 124/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• The reinjection temperature. If this is omitted then the separator temperature is used
• An estimate of the fluids flowrate (required)

Pump Details
The basic pump model uses centrifugal pump equations to determine the relationship between inlet
pressure and temperature, outlet pressure and temperature, flowrate, shaft power, hydraulic power 
and efficiency. Built in or user-developed pump curves can be used to describe the relationship
between differential pressure, flowrate, and efficiency for a range of pump speeds. If pump curves
are used, therefore, the pump speed and number of stages become additional factors.
Enter at least one of the following parameters:
Discharge pressure
Pressure at the pump outlet. Not allowed in Network (p.33) models. The default is 20,000
psia.
Pressure differential
Pressure increase (positive) or decrease (negative) across the pump. The default is 10,000
psi.
Pressure ratio (Pout/Pin)
Discharge pressure / suction pressure ratio. The default is 1,000.
Power (shaft power)
Power of the pump. The default is unlimited.
Efficiency
Efficiency of the pump. The default is 100%.

User Pumps

Viscosity Correction
 Available for user-suplied pumps. Pump curve correction for viscosity effect using the TURZO
method (p.468). Because viscosity degrades head, flow rate, and efficiency, usually more
power is needed to lift the same amount of fluid. To apply viscosity correction using another 
method, use the engine keywords (p.638).

User Curves
Select User Curves to use a performance curve for the pump. See data entry (p.162) for details of 
how to enter pump curve data.
Speed
If a pump curve is supplied, the speed can also be specified. This is used to adjust the
supplied curve against its specified speed. The adjustment is made using the so called affinity
or fan laws, which state that "capacity is directly proportional to speed, head is proportional
to square of speed, and power is proportional to cube of speed".
Stages
Number of stages of the pump.

User Guide
107 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 125/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The remaining quantities will then be calculated using centrifugal pump equations. If more than one
value is supplied, then the parameter which leads to the smallest pump differential pressure will be
used, and all other supplied parameters will be discarded.
The main pump equations used are as follows: Hydraulic Power = Flowrate x Differential Pressure
Hydraulic Power = Shaft Power x Efficiency
See also keywords (p.638).

Source
The generic source object is a means by which you can specify explicit upstream boundary conditions
of pressure and temperature in a given model. By its nature, the source component is generic and
must be placed upstream of the first component in any model. Examples of where a source
component can be used to emulate input boundary flow conditions include:
• Wellhead conditions in a subsea production flowline system.
• Export flow conditions from an offshore platform.
• Production well test conditions at a down hole gauge.

Note: The generic source object can be used in place of a well performance model or horizontal well
performance model in cases where reservoir inflow is a fixed value relationship. More details
(p.108).

Source, Sink and Boundary Conditions

In order to solve the system, boundary conditions must be provided at the source or sink. This means
setting values for the following:
• Pressure

• Flowrate
• Temperature - always required at a source and always computed at the sink.
In a single branch model, the boundary conditions are: Inlet pressure, Outlet pressure, Flowrate and
Inlet temperature. Of these the inlet temperature and two of the others must be set. Set these either 
by using the source dialog or from the operation that is being performed.
The Source dialog requires the following:

Properties
Pressure
Required, but can be overwritten by the operation (p.172).
Temperature
Required, but can be overwritten by the operation.

Fluid model
This is used to set local fluid data that overrides the global setting, that is:
• Water cut
• GOR

User Guide
108 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 126/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Example
In the single branch mode there is no sink object. The outlet of the last object (furthest from a source
object) is defined as the sink point. For example, a model with a vertical completion tubing, choke
and flowline, will have the following;
Inlet pressure
Static reservoir pressure
Outlet pressure
Pressure at the end of the flowline
Flowrate
Flowrate (liquid, gas or mass) at the model's source.

Note: The flowrate may be different at the model's sink due to a rate change device added
to the model (for example, an adder (p.102), multiplier (p.102), side stream injection (p.92),
and so on).

 Any of the above values can be computed. For example:

• Set: static reservoir pressure and outlet pressure. PIPESIM computes the maximum flowrate that
can be obtained.
• Set: static reservoir pressure and flowrate. PIPESIM computes the outlet pressure. (This is the
fastest option)
• Set: static flowrate and outlet pressure. PIPESIM computes the static reservoir pressure by using
the IPR after the bottom hole flowing pressure has been determined.

Inlet Pressure

This is the pressure that exists at the inlet to the first object in the model. This table shows examples:
In a model with: The inlet pressure is:
Vertical Completion - Tubing - Choke the static reservoir pressure
Source - Flowline the pressure inlet to the flowline
Source - Tubing - Vertical completion the well head pressure (this is an injection well)
Horizontal Completion - Tubing the "toe" pressure

Outlet Pressure
This is the pressure that exists at the end of the last object in the model. This table shows examples:

In a model with: The outlet pressure is:

Vertical Completion - Tubing - Choke - Flowline at the top of the riser 
- Riser 
Vertical Completion - Tubing - Choke downstream of the choke
Source - Flowline at the end of the flowline

User Guide
109
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 127/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

In a model with: The outlet pressure is:

Source - Tubing - Vertical Completion the static reservoir pressure (this is an injection
well)

Flowrate
This is the flowrate at the inlet to the first object in the model. The inlet conditions (pressure and
temperature) that the flowrate pertains to can be entered. The flowrate at the model outlet can differ 
from that at the inlet if any of the following are used in the model:
• Separator  
• Flowrate Operator 
• Injection point

1.3 Flow Correlations

Select flow correlations using Setup » Flow Correlations... Make the following selections for vertical
and horizontal correlation from either those supplied as standard or from a User Defined Correlations
(p.606).
For more information about flow correlations, refer to Horizontal Multiphase Flow Correlation
(p.339) and Vertical Horizontal Multiphase Flow Correlations (p.343).

1.3.1 Selecting a flow correlation

Source
This defines the source of the correlation for either the vertical or horizontal correlation. Options are:
bja
The code for the correlation has been developed by Schlumberger and has been extensively
tested. (default)
tulsa
The code for the correlation was developed by Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects (TUFFP).
This is the original library of empirical correlations developed in 1989. The code is usually of 
academic quality and may give errors. This library is included mainly for benchmarking
purposes. It is not recommended for general use.
OLGA-S 2000
The OLGAS-2000 steady-state model developed by SINTEF/SPT. ( Only available if the
OLGAS 2–phase or 3–phase option has been purchased.)
Tulsa 3-Phase Flow Correlation
Latest unified mechanistic model developed by the Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects
(TUFFP). It is available for general use.
LEDA
The Leda steady-state model developed by SINTEF/Kongsberg. (It is only available when
the LEDA 2–phase or 3–phase option has been purchased.)

User Guide
110 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 128/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

See also User Defined Correlations (p.606)

Correlation
The available correlations depend on the "source" selected.

The Flow Correlation

correlations Comparison
with an option of using(p.175) operation
measured allows
data. The Datausers to compare
Matching various
(p.175) flow has been
operation
specifically developed to assist with this task of determining the most suitable flow correlation from
well test data and calculating the friction and holdup multipliers to achieve a best match.

Options Control
This allows to control globally in conjunction with the flow correlation selected at each branch level,
which flow correlation is used in the network.
When you select:
• Use local branch options: PIPESIM will use whatever setting is at the branch level (locally defined
flow correlation or network global flow correlation - see also the flow correlation window accessible
by right clicking on any branch or in the single branch viewer window)
• Use network options: PIPESIM will use the network globally defined flow correlation for all
branches. This is achieved with an override statement in the network engine file.
• Apply network options to all branches: PIPESIM will override in all branches the flow correlation
settings by the network global setting. WARNING: You will loose ANY local flow correlation
defined in any branch.

1.3.2 Defining User Flow Correlations

PIPESIM lets you define your own multiphase flow correlations and implement them directly. See
User Defined correlations (p.606) for further details on how to create your own flow correlation DLL.

Tuning flow correlations

Flow correlations can be adjusted (tuned) by using friction and hold up factors.

Data matching
If measured pressure data is available, the Data matching (p.175) operation can be used to calculate
friction and holdup factors automatically.

Flow Correlation comparison

The Flow correlation comparison (p.175) operation can be used to compare different flow correlations
with measured data. Unlike the Data matching (p.175) operation it does not try to tune any
parameters, so will be quicker to run.

Suggested correlations
If no production data are available, Schlumberger have found the following to give satisfactory results
based on previous studies using field data:

User Guide
111
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 129/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Single phase system

Moody (p.349)
Vertical oil well
Hagedorn and Brown (p.345)

Highly deviated oil well

Hagedorn and Brown (p.345) or Duns and Ros (p.344) or OLGA-S (p.345)
Gas/condensate well
Hagedorn and Brown (p.345)
Oil pipelines
Oliemans (p.342)
Gas/condensate pipelines
BJA Correlation (p.339)

Correlation Vertical and

Predominantly Highly
Deviated Vertical Gas/ Oil
Condensate Pipelines Gas/
CondensatePipelines
Vertical Oil Oil Wells Wells (p.343) (p.339) (p.339)
Wells (p.343) (p.343)
Duns and Ros yes yes yes yes yes
Orkiszewski yes no yes no no
Hagedorn and yes no yes no no
Brown
Beggs and Brill yes yes yes yes yes
Revised

Beggs and Brill yes yes yes yes yes

Original
Mukherjee and yes yes yes yes yes
Brill
Govier, Aziz and yes yes yes yes yes
Forgasi
NoSlip yes yes yes yes yes
OLGAS yes yes yes yes yes
 Ansari yes no yes no no

BJA for 
Condensates no no yes no yes

 AGA and no no no no yes

Flanigan
Oliemans no no no yes yes
Gray no no yes no no
Gray Modified no no yes no no

User Guide
112 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 130/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Xiao no no no yes yes

LEDA yes yes yes yes yes
TUFFP yes yes yes yes yes

1.3.3 Flow Regime Number and Flow Pattern

The following flow regimes (patterns) are available for plotting:
• gas-liquid
• oil-water  

Gas-Liquid
The following table shows the current gas-liquid regimes:

Flow Regime Flow Map Number  

'Undefined' '? ' -1

'Smooth' 'Sm' 00
'Stratified' 'St' 01
'Annular' 'A ' 02
'Slug' 'Sl' 03
'Bubble' 'B ' 04
'Segregated' 'Sg' 05
'Transition' 'T ' 06
'Intermittent' 'I ' 07
'Distributed' 'D ' 08
'Strat. Smooth' 'Ss' 09
'Strat. Wavy' 'Sw' 10
'Strat. Dispersed' 'Sd' 11
'Annular Disp. ' 'Ad' 12
'Intermit./Slug ' 'Is' 13
'Churn' 'C ' 14
'Dispersed Bubble' 'Db' 15

'Single Phase' 'Sp' 16

'Mist' 'M ' 17
'Liquid' 'L ' 18
'Gas' 'G ' 19
'Dense Phase' 'De' 20
'Annular Mist' 'Am' 21

User Guide
113
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 131/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Flow Regime Flow Map Number  

'Two Phase ' '2 ' 22
'Wave ' 'W ' 23
'Dispersed ' 'Dp' 24
'Plug ' 'P ' 25
'Tr. Bubble/Slug' 'Tb' 26
'Tr. Froth/Slug' 'Tf' 27
'Heading' 'H ' 28
'Oil ' 'O ' 29
'Oil/Water ' 'Ow' 30
'Water/Oil ' 'Wo' 31
'Water ' 'Wa' 32

'Froth ' 'F ' 33

'Strat. 3-phase ' 'S3' 34
'Bubbly' 'B ' 35

Oil-Water 
The following table shows the current oil-water regimes:

Flow Regime Flow Map Number  

'Undefined' '? ' -1
'Stratified' 'St' 00
'Strat. liq. film in slug flow' 'Sf' 01
'Oil/Water' 'Ow' 02
'Water/Oil' 'Wo' 03
'Water' 'Wa' 04
'Oil' 'O ' 05
'Emulsion' 'Em' 06

1.3.4 Configuration File for user specified flow correlations

The userdll.dat is a text file that contains PIPESIM installation configuration information. For a
standard PIPESIM installation, the file can be edited by selecting Setup » Preferences  » Choose
Paths and selecting “edit” next to the userdll path. If you want to select flow correlation(s) from the
Setup » Flow Correlations menu, you must edit the dll to define the flow correlation(s). Each dll
requires a section starting with:

[UserDLL_32_X]

User Guide
114
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 132/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

where 'X' can be 1, 2, 3, ... 20. This number must be unique within this userdll.dat file. Each section
contains lines that start with the strings 'filename=', ”title=', psname=', 'epname=', 'linktype=',
'eptype=', 'mpflow title =', 'options=' , and so on.
The general syntax is as follows:

'01' 'FILENAME', req, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &

'02' 'EPNAME', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'03' 'PSNAME', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'04' 'EPTYPE', opt, chr1, str, BUS01, NUS01, 4, pcnone, &
'05' 'LINKTYPE', opt, int1, str, 1, 2000, 2, pcnone, &
'06' 'SDESCRIPTION', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'07' 'LDESCRIPTION', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'07' 'TITLE', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, &
'08' 'OPTIONS', opt, pres, str, 0, 0, 0, pcnone, /

The EPTYPE can be

'MPFLOW', '1', &

'HMPFLOW', '2', &
'VMPFLOW', '3', &
'SLUG', '0', &
'OTHER', '0', &
'ETC', '0', &

'EQUIPMENT', '4'
filename =
Filename when no path is provided. The assumption is that the file exists in same directory
as the PIPESIM executables. Filenames must conform to MS DOS 8.3 naming limits. Do not
use long names, special characters, or embedded spaces. In the near future, 'long' names
will be supported.
Title or LDESCRIPTION =
The DLL that you can access from the Setup » Flow Correlations menu.
psname =
The SLB internal identifier for this selection. To specify a user equipment DLL routine, enter 
a unique string within the user dll for flow correlation and any engine options.
EPNAME =
The actual name of the subroutine or entry point exported from the DLL. It is case-sensitive.
EPNAME can be up to 40 characters long, and must obey the ANSI FORTRAN-77 standard.
For example, it must be composed of uppercase alphabetical and decimal digits and it must

User Guide
115 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 133/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

start with a letter of the alphabet. You can code the routines in any language, but you must
compile the routines to present a Microsoft FORTRAN-compatible calling linkage.
In the userdll.dat file, you can enter the same EPNAME many times on different lines with
various options and titles.
EPTYPE =
 An integer that describes the job that the routine performs. It also controls where and why
the PIPESIM engine calls it. Valid TYPES are:
1 — Multiphase Flow correlation, valid for both vertical and horizontal flow
2 — Multiphase Flow correlation, valid for vertical flow
3 — Multiphase Flow correlation, valid for horizontal flow
LINKTYPE =
 An integer that specifies the LINKAGE of the routine. The LINKAGE comprises the exact
number, type, meaning, and order of the arguments or formal parameters declared by the
routine, the direction of the data for each argument (IN to or OUT of the routine), the Units
of the data (if any), and its valid range. The following LINKAGE values are valid:
21 (Compaq) and 1021 (Intel) — Three phase model
22 (Compaq) and 1022 (Intel) — Two phase model
SDESCRIPTION =
 A character string that describes the correlation or job performed by the routine.
OPTIONS =
Keyword(s) for the PIPESIM engine or for the particular correlation. This text must be passed
to the engine as-is, enclosed in quotes, as the value of the OPTIONS= keyword.
The engine recognizes the following options:

+SLUG SRTCA only. Selects artificial slug model

+DP SRTCA only. Adds slug pressure drop; requires SLUG
+3PHASE SRTCA only. Selects 3-phase model
+WOD SRTCA only. Adds water-oil dispersion; requires 3PHASE
+DISP Same as WOD
+G Specifies the correlation that handles single-phase gas
+L Specifies the correlation that handles single-phase liquid
+OW Specifies the correlation that handles oil & water with no gas
+WO Same as +OW
+EMULn Specifies whether the emulsion model used is from PIPESIM
or from a user-provided dll that is based on the value of n.
• n=0 corresponds to the default model supplied in the
user DLL.

User Guide
116 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 134/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• n=1 corresponds to the model that you selected in the

PIPESIM GUI. (The supplied liquid emulsion viscosity
in the linkage 21 specification “overrides” any liquid
viscosity used internally in the user DLL.)
• n=k (where k>1) corresponds to any further models
supplied in the user DLL.
+EXTRAINx.x! The extra input as “!” separated values. All extra input should
yy!z be converted already to eng units and parsed in an array of 
200 real and passed to the user dll as is. Any enumeration
should be converted to a number. The extra input are written
in the same order as provided by the get_extra_inputs
function.
olga_key LIBOLGAS only. This keyword activates olga-specific call to
Set_Vendor_Key, which is required for olga release 4.13, nov
2004.

N.B. All unrecognized strings will be silently ignored.

 As an example:

[UserDll_32_9]
title = User-defined 3P
ident = 3P_Demo_UFC
filename = UFC3P_Demo.dll
Copyright = $3-Phase_demo_UFC 32-bit DLL
ep1 = 3P_Demo_UFC, UFC_3P, 1021, 1, Joe Bloggs Demo BBR Correlation,+G +L +
OW +EXTRAIN1!200!30000!50 +EMUL0

1.4 Fluid modeling

In a network model different fluid descriptions cannot be used. That is, the model must be either black
oil, compositional or steam. However, each source can have its own fluid properties or use shared
(common) data. Changes to the common (shared) data will results in all sources using that data being
changed.

1.4.1 Modeling systems

You can model the following systems in PIPESIM:

Water Systems
Water systems can be modeled by specifying the fluid model as either:
Black Oil (p.122)
Set the water cut to 100% and specify the water S.G. All other properties will be ignored
Compositional (p.128)
Select the water component to water and set its molar rate to 1.

User Guide
117 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 135/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Gas Condensate Systems

Gas Condensate systems can be modeled by specifying the fluid model as either:
Black Oil (p.122)
Set the (oil/gas ration) OGR or (liquid/gas ratio) LGR, Gas S.G, watercut, water S.G. and API
Compositional (p.128)
Select the required components and set their molar rates.
See also: Gas Condensate IPR (p.360)

Dry Gas Systems

Dry Gas systems can be modeled by specifying the fluid model as either:
Black Oil (p.122)
Set the (liquid/gas ratio) LGR = 0, Gas S.G, watercut (to model a 2–phase system) , water 
S.G.

Compositional (p.128)
Select the required components and set their molar rates.
See also: Gas IPR (p.360).
Fluids can be defined as follows:
• Black oil data — for black oil fluids
• Compositional data — for compositional fluids
• Stream
• PVT file — this can contain table information, for table fluids, or compositional information, for 
compositional fluids, or both
• MFL file — this is a Multiflash file for Multiflash compositional fluids

Black Oil Compositional data PVT file MFL file

data
Menu Setup » Setup » Compositional Setup » PVT File... Setup »
Black Oil... Template...  Setup » MFL File...
Compositional... (the
network default)
Black Oil Fluid Yes
Compositional Yes Yes — if the file contains Yes
Fluid compositional data
Table Fluid Yes — if the file contains
property tables

Table fluids are not suitable for mixing.

PVT files that contain compositional information can also be imported into PIPESIM and used as
Compositional data.

User Guide
118 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 136/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1.4.2 Managing Multiple Fluid Models

Fluids can be defined as follows:
• Black oil data — for black oil fluids
• Compositional data — for compositional fluids
• Steam
• PVT file — this can contain table information, for table fluids, or compositional information, for 
compositional fluids, or both
• MFL file — this is a Multiflash file for Multiflash compositional fluids

Black Oil Compositional data PVT file MFL file

data
Menu Setup » Setup » Compositional Setup » PVT File... Setup »
Black Oil... Template...  Setup » MFL File...
Compositional... (the
network default)
Black Oil Fluid Yes
Compositional Yes Yes — if the file contains Yes
Fluid compositional data
Table Fluid Yes — if the file contains
property tables

Table fluids are not suitable for mixing.

PVT files that contain compositional information can also be imported into PIPESIM and used as
Compositional data.

Precedence of Fluids when Multiple Fluids Defined

In a network, fluids can be defined at the
• network level (Setup » Black Oil)
• well or source level (Setup » Fluid Models or right-click the well or source and select Fluid
Models)
• equipment level
The following table shows which value PIPESIM uses when fluids are defined at the different levels:

Network Level Well or Source Level Equipment Level Fluid Definition Used
Defined Defined Defined Equipment Level
Defined Defined Not defined Well or Source Level
Defined Not defined Defined Equipment Level
Defined Not defined Not defined Network Level

User Guide
119
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 137/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note:
• Injection points and gas lift injection points always use locally defined fluids.
• Multi-layered wells always use the default setting, unless a local fluid model is defined at the
completion level. (The fluid model cannot be defined at the network level.)

Local Fluid Data

Fluid data must be defined for each well, source or injection point in a simulation model. The fluid
type (black oil, compositional, or table fluid) must be the same as the default fluid (p.119) type for the
simulation model. A local fluid can be set to be the same as the default fluid, or can be locally defined.
To edit the local fluid:
1. Right-click on the source/completion icon.
2. In the menu displayed, select the Fluid Model option.
3. Set Use locally defined fluid model and click Edit to set the fluid properties.
 Alternatively, in a network model, select Setup » Fluid Models.... To edit a fluid, double-click its row.

Local overrides
For black oil or compositional fluids, once a local fluid has been defined, the surface phase ratios can
be changed without editing the fluid properties
To set the phase ratios:
1. Right-click on the source / completion icon.
2. In the menu displayed, select the Fluid Model option and select Override fluid model
parameters .
3. Enter the data.
 Alternatively, in network models, select Setup » Fluid Models....
This allows access to the watercut and GOR/GLR/OGR/LGR entry fields. Data entered here overrides
the local or default fluid data. This is especially useful for multi-zone wells or networked wells that
have the same [default] fluid properties but different watercut, and so on. For compositional fluids,
the composition will be modified to give the correct phase ratios, in a similar manner to GLR matching.

1.4.3 Black Oil Fluid Modeling

Introduction
Fluid properties can be predicted by blackoil correlations, which have been developed by correlating
gas/oil ratios for live crudes with various properties, such as oil and gas gravities. The selected
correlation is used to predict the quantity of gas dissolved in the oil at a particular pressure and
temperature.
The black oil correlations have been developed specifically for crude oil/gas/water systems and are
therefore most useful in predicting the phase behavior of crude oil well streams. When used in

User Guide
120 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 138/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

conjunction with the calibration options, the black oil correlations can produce accurate phase
behavior data from a minimum of input data. They are particularly convenient in gas lift studies where
the effects of varying GLR and water cut are under investigation. However, if the accurate phase
behavior prediction of light hydrocarbon systems is important, it is recommended that the more
rigorous compositional model is employed.

The Black Oil fluid description can be used for the following fluid types:
• Water  
• Dry Gas
• Condensate (not recommended)
• Volatile Oil (not recommended)

Black Oil Data Sets

 A name and optional description/comment must be entered for each black oil data set. A data set
consists on all the black oil properties including viscosity, coning data, calibration data, and so on.

PIPESIM also allows black oil data sets to be stored externally (p.148) [to the model in a database],
if required, so that it can be shared between sources in a single model, different models and different
users or groups, etc.

Note: The external database base is used only as a data storage system to allow data to be
transferred. It should be regarded as allows the black oil data set to be imported and exported. The
actual (black oil) data for a source is stored locally with the source. For example the database could
be located on a LAN and the model on a PC. When the PC is disconnected from the LAN the model
will still run as the black oil data for the sources is stored within the model. Thus, if the database set
is changed the local source data is not affected.

Exporting a data set

To export a data set to the database:
1. Select Setup » Black Oil.
2. In the Black Oil properties dialog, set the required data, include and viscosity or calibration data.
3. Provide the data set with a name and description.
4. Click the Export button. A confirmation dialog appears.
The data set can now be shared.

Importing a data set

To import a data set, for a source, from the database for a Network model:
1. Select the source (or sources). To make multiple selections, hold down the Shift key while
selecting the objects.
2. Right-click and select the Fluid Model option from the menu displayed.
3. Deselect the Use Default Black Oil set option.
4. Click Import.

User Guide
121
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 139/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5. Select the name of the fluid to import, take a copy of, the data from the database to the local
source. It does not point to the data set in the database. That is, if the data in the database is
changed, the black oil data for the selected source is not changed.

Black Oil Options

To access these options, select Setup » Black Oil.
Keyword Reference. (p.686)

Stock Tank Properties

On the Black Oil Properties tab, enter the data at stock tank conditions (p.145) for the following
parameters:
Watercut
The % of the liquid phase that is water (default 0%)
GOR/GLR

Gas oil/liquid ratio for oil systems (default not set).

OGR/LGR
Oil/liquid ratio for gas systems (default not set).
Gas S.G.
Gas specific gravity (default 0.64)
Water S.G
Water specific gravity (default 1.02)
API/DOD
 API/Dead oil density (default 30 API and 54.68 lb/ft3)
See also Database Sets (p.121), Calibration Data at Bubble Point (p.123), Solution Gas Correlations
(p.462), Coning (p.467), Viscosity data (p.469), Advanced Calibration Data (p.124), Contaminates
(p.126) and Thermal Data (p.126).

Calibrate a Fluid to match lab data

The method to use to model (and calibrate) the fluid will depend upon the fluid type (oil or gas) and
the data available. Most oil systems are modeled using the black oil correlations whereas gas-
condensate and gas systems are normally modeled using the more rigorous compositional (p.127)
model.

Black Oil Calibration

To calibrate the black oil defined fluids, perform the following basic steps:
1. Select a units (p.147) set.
2. Enter the basic fluid data.
3. Enter the Bubble Point data.
4. Either OFVF, density or Compressibility above the bubble point.

User Guide
122 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 140/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5. Either OFVF or density and Live oil viscosity, Gas viscosity and Gas Z factor at or below the bubble
point.
6. (Optional) Enter the Advanced calibration data.
7. Run the operation.

8. Save the model (p.33)

In a network model the calibration data is "mixed" at junctions to provide average calibration data for 
the resulting stream.
Calibration on Black Oil data is limited to 1 data point per property. After entering the basic Black oil
data (API, GOR, viscosity, and so on) by using Setup » Black oil, enter the following:
• Bubble point data (required for calibration).
• One of the following:
• Either OFVF, density or Compressibility above the bubble point.
• Either OFVF, density and Live oil viscosity, Gas viscosity and Gas Z factor at or below the
bubble point.
 A calibration factor (p.684) is then computed for each property. The effect of the measured data can
be further examined by plotting the PVT data.

Correlations
See the Technical Description (p.460).

Bubble point calibration data

To access these options, select Setup » Black oil.

Note: If you want the following options to appear on the Black Oil Properties tab in the dialog, set
the Calibration option, under the Advanced Calibration data tab to No Calibration.

The oil saturated gas content at a known temperature and pressure (for example at reservoir 
conditions) should be entered to allow calibration of the black oil model. Such calibration will
significantly improve the accuracy of the predicted gas/liquid ratios. If the calibration data is omitted
the program will calibrate the correlation on the basis of oil and gas gravity alone and there will be a
consequent loss in accuracy.
Sat. Gas
Quantity of gas which will dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given pressure and
temperature
Pressure
Pressure at which the above applies
Temperature
Temperature at which the above applies

User Guide
123
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 141/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Advanced Calibration Data

Select Setup » Black oil and select the Advanced Calibration Data tab. The following options are
available:

No Calibration
No (advanced) calibration data is available for the fluid. The bubble point information can however 
be entered.

Single Point Calibr ation

In many cases, actual measured values for some properties show a slight variance when compared
with the value calculated by the blackoil model. In this situation it is useful to "calibrate" the property
using the measured point. PIPESIM can use the known data for the property to calculate a "calibration
constant" Kc;
Kc = Measured Property @(P,T)/Calculated Property @(P,T)
This calibration constant is then used to modify all subsequent calculations of the property in question,
that is: Calibrated value = Kc (Predicted value)
If you select Single Point Calibration the following properties can be calibrated:

 Above Bubble Point 

Select the property in the list and enter data for it. The options are:
• Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF) (p.460) . This is the ratio of the liquid volume at stock-tank
conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
• Density
• Compress. — the Gas Z (compressibility) (p.475)

 At Bubble point 

Enter the oil saturated gas content at a known temperature and pressure (for example at reservoir 
conditions) to allow calibration of the black oil model. The required correlation (p.460) can also be
selected.
Sat. Gas
Quantity of gas which will dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given pressure and
temperature.

 At or Below the Bubble point 

Select the property in the list and enter data for it. The required correlation (p.460) can also be
selected. The options are:
• Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF) (p.460) — The ratio of the liquid volume at stock-tank
conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
• Live oil viscosity (p.471)
• Gas viscosity (p.478)
• Gas Z (compressibility) (p.475)

User Guide
124
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 142/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Plot PVT Data

These two buttons produce plots of properties as a function of pressure versus temperature:
@ Laboratory conditions - GOR = GSAT
sets the GOR to that defined by the Saturation Gas value under the Bubble Point data

section on the main Black Oil dialog.

@ Reservoir conditions
uses the GOR as defined by the GOR value on the main Black Oil dialog.

Generate tables
If you select this check box, the output file (*.out) will contain tables of the properties as a function of 
pressure and temperature.

Multi Point Calibration

The black oil correlations will be tuned so that the correlation goes through ALL the data points. Note:
This is not a best fit method - all points will be fitted exactly. Any outlying data MUST be smoothed
before entering into PIPESIM.
Temperature
The temperature at which the properties apply. All other data is assumed to be at this
temperature. The blackoil correlations will then be used to calculate fluid properties at
different temperatures.

Below the Bubble point 

Enter the property at various pressures. The required correlation (p.460) can also be selected.
1. Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF) (p.123). The ratio of the liquid volume at stock-tank
conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
2. Solution Gas (p.123) Quantity of gas which will dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given
pressure
3. Density
4. Live oil viscosity (p.471)
5. Gas Z (compressibility) (p.475)
6. Gas viscosity (p.478)

 At Bubble Point 

1. Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF) (p.123). The ratio of the liquid volume at stock-tank
conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
2. Solution Gas (p.123) Quantity of gas which will dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given
pressure
3. Density
4. Live oil viscosity (p.471)
5. Gas Z (compressibility) (p.475)
6. Gas viscosity (p.478)

User Guide
125 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 143/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 Above Bubble Point 

Select Density or Oil formation volume factor (OFVF) (p.123) (the ratio of the liquid volume at stock-
tank conditions to that at reservoir conditions), then enter the following properties at various
pressures:

• Oil formation volume factor (OFVF) (p.460) . This is the ratio of the liquid volume at stock-tank
conditions to that at reservoir conditions.
• Density
• Live oil viscosity (p.471)
• Gas Z (compressibility) (p.475)
• Gas viscosity (p.478)
In the Correlation (p.123) list, select the correlation to use for each property.

Plot PVT Data

This produces a plot of properties as a function of pressure versus temperature.
Plot Calibration Data Points Only
Displays a plot of the calibration data.
@ Laboratory Conditions- GOR = GSAT.
This sets the GOR to that as defined by the Saturation Gas value under the Bubble Point
data section on the main Black Oil dialog.
@ Reservoir Conditions
Uses the GOR as defined under the GOR value on the main Black Oil dialog.

Generate tables

The output file (*.out) will contain tables of the properties as a function of pressure and temperature.
More details (p.684).

Gas Phase Contaminants

This allows gas phase contaminants (CO2, H2S, N2, H2 and CO) to be tracked through the system.
Enter the mole fraction of each contaminant (<1) of the gas phase at stock-tank conditions. The default
for each contaminant is 0.
Contaminants are used to imporeve the accuracy of the compressibility (z) factor and may be used
for corrosion calculations and optimization constraints. For more information, see deWaard Corrison
Model (p.353).

Black Oil Thermal Data

To set up Black Oil thermal data, do the following:
1. Select Setup » Black Oil....
2. On the Thermal Data tab, enter the following thermal properties for the three phases (gas, oil
and water) of the black oil fluid:

User Guide
126 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 144/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Specific Heat Capacity

• Thermal Conductivity
3. Select the Black Oil Enthalpy Calculation method (p.479) to use. Currently, there are two options:
• 1983 Method — original method implemented in PIPESIM.
• 2009 Method — for this option, you are asked to supply a Specific Latent Heat of 
Vaporisation .

1.4.4 Compositional Fluid Modeling

PIPESIM allows full compositional modeling of the fluid by accessing a PVT modeling package. This
uses a compositional interface as an alternative to the blackoil model (p.460).
Compositional fluid modeling is generally regarded as more accurate, but also more expensive in
terms of runtime than black oil fluid modeling. It is justified for problems involving volatile fluids which
need rigorous heat transfer calculations and more accurate phase fractions.

Compositional Template
Multiple fluids can be used in both network and single branch simulations. For example, in a network
model each source or well can have a separate fluid. In a single branch model, an injection fluid can
be different from the fluid in the branch. At the same time, PIPESIM allows users to select a variety
of fluid packages, components, thermodynamic and transport models, to describe compositional
fluids. However, it is important that there is some consistency between all the fluids used in a model,
to ensure they can be mixed. The Compositional Template imposes a consistent global set of 
properties on all fluids in the model.
Creating a compositional fluid is therefore a two stage process, as follows:
1. Define (or update) the compositional template by selecting Setup » Compositional Template.
2. Specify the composition (p.134).

Creating a compositional template

To build a compositional model, do the following:
1. Select the compositional package (p.128).
2. Select library components (p.128).
3. (Optional) Define any petroleum fractions (p.129).
4. Select the compositional property models (p.132).
 Alternatively, import (p.128) a template from an existing PVT file. The template ensures the following:
• the same package is used for all fluids
• the total number of components used by all fluids is less than the limit for the package
• the thermodynamic and transport models are consistent for all fluids

Updating the compositional template

When adding a new fluid to the model, you must first check that it is compatible with the template. If 
the fluid contains components that are not already in the template, they must be added to it, as follows:

User Guide
127 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 145/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1. Select library components (p.128).

2. Define any petroleum fractions (p.129).
 Any new component added to the template will be added to all the existing fluids, but with zero moles.

Importing a compositional template

To import a template from an existing PVT file, click the Import button. There are three options when
importing a template:
• Imports only Component List, Petroleum Fractions and Property Models. This option removes any
components already in the template and changes all template compositional property models
(p.132) (EoS, Viscosity etc.)
• Merge with existing template Component List and Petroleum Fraction. This options adds any new
components in the file to the template. It does not remove any existing components from the
template, and it does not affect the template compositional property models (p.132).
• Imports only Property Models information. This option only changes the template compositional
property models (p.132) (Equations of State, viscosity, and so on.)

Note: If you only import the property information and the property is not selected in the dialog
box, the property for the item that is selected is altered.

Phase Behavior Package

PIPESIM currently has access to the following compositional packages:
• SIS Flash (from Schlumberger) (This has been deprecated . Please use E300 instead.)
• E300 (from Schlumberger)
• DBR (from Schlumberger)
• REFPROP v8.0 (from The National Institute of Standards and Technology, United States)
• GERG-2008 (from Ruhr-Universitat Bochum)
• Multiflash (from InfoChem)
• SIEP SPPTS (Shell users only)
The E300 flash package is the same PVT package that is used by Schlumberger Reservoir Simulation
products such as ECLIPSE Compositional, PVTi, VFPi and so on.
See also: Viscosity (p.469), Binary Interaction Parameters (p.133), Emulsions (p.132), Equation of 
State (p.489), Technical Description (p.127)

Selecting Components
Three types of component are available: aqueous, library components and petroleum fractions
(p.129). However, note that the maximum number of components allowed is as follows:
• 50 for Multiflash
• 50 for E300 flash
• 50 for DBR flash

User Guide
128 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 146/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• 20 for REFPROP and GERG-2008 flashes. This excludes water, which can be added to make 21
in total
• 49 for the SPPTS package
To change components, select Setup » Compositional Template and then select the Component

Selection tab.
To select the library components, click on each required component in the list, then on Add>>. This
adds the selected components into one of the Selected Components lists on the right hand side of 
the window. All but the aqueous components will appear in the Hydrocarbons list. (Aqueous
components are displayed in blue.)
To define a Petroleum fraction (p.129), specify its name and relevant characterization parameters.
Once the petroleum fraction data has been entered, it MUST be added to the component list. To do
this, click Add to Composition>>.
To remove an unwanted component from the spreadsheet lists, do the following:
1. Click on the row number to the left of the component name in the spreadsheet. This highlights the

whole row.
2. Click <<Delete .

Petroleum Fractions
Oil systems contain in reality many thousands of pure components, consisting of a spectrum of 
molecules with different carbon numbers and exponentially increasing numbers of different isomers
of each. It would be impossible to model the behavior of such systems by explicitly defining the amount
of each of these molecules, both because of the excessive computing power needed and the fact
that laboratory reports could not possibly supply all this information. Luckily, since the alkane
hydrocarbons are non-polar and therefore mutually relatively ideal, lumping them together in the form
of a number of 'pseudo-components' results in fairly accurate phase behavior and physical property

predictions.
Petroleum fractions are normally defined by splitting off sections of a laboratory distillation of the C7+
mixture. Curves of boiling point, density and molecular weight are produced from which the properties
of the individual pseudo-components may be derived. The default characterization parameters are
boiling point (BP), the molecular weight (MW) and the specific gravity (SG). The maximum value
allowed for the specific gravity in PIPESIM is 1.3.
There is an alternate specification for users, with additional information in the form of critical
temperature (TC), critical pressure (PC) and an acentric factor.

Petroleum Fraction data entry 

Select Setup » Compositional and, on the Petroleum Fractions tab, enter the following information:

Note: You can enter a maximum of  50 Petroleum fractions. Some properties may not be applicable
to a PVT package.

Name
 A name to describe the petroleum fraction, for example C7+.

User Guide
129
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 147/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Property data

For Multiflash
The minimum data that must be entered are either 
• M.W. and S.G.
• M.W. and B.P.
• B.P. and S.G.
• T.C., P.C. and Acentric Factor 

For SIS Flash

The minimum data that must be entered are either 
• M.W. and S.G.
• M.W. and B.P.

For SPPTS 
The minimum data that must be entered are either 
• M.W. and S.G.
• M.W. and B.P.
• B.P. and S.G.

For E300 and DBR 

The minimum data that must be entered is
• M.W.

For REFPROP and GERG-2008 

Petroleum fractions cannot be entered

Input and Calculated Data

The input and calculation availability of all property data is summarized in the following table:
• I = Input only
• C = Calculated (These read-only properties are disabled for input and highlighted in grey. The
calculated values display if button “Calculate properties” is performed.)
• N = Non-applicable (highlighted in grey)
• I, C = Calculated if not input

Multiflash SIEP SPPTS DBR Eclipse 300 SIS

Name I I I I I
B.P. I, C I C C I
M.W. I, C I I I I
S.G. I, C I I, C C I

User Guide
130 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 148/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

T.C. I, C I I, C I, C I
P.C. I, C I I, C I, C I
Liq. Visc. N N C I, C I
V.C. N N C I, C I
Ac. factor  I I I, C I, C I
Volume Shift N N C I, C I
Ref. Dens. N N C C I
Ref. Temp. N N C C I
Watson K N N C C I
Omega A N N I, C I, C I
Omega B N N I, C I, C I

 Add to composition >>

When the petroleum fraction is added it is initially displayed in red. This shows that not enough data
has been entered. When sufficient data has been added, the row reverts to black. After defining the
petroleum fraction, you MUST add it to the main component list by selecting the row and clicking
Add to Compositions>>. Petroleum fractions that have been added to the main component slate
are shown in green. Next set its composition by using the Component Selection tab.

Delete
Click this to delete the selected row(s).

Calculate properties
Once the minimum data has been entered then all properties not entered and marked as “C” in the
table above can be computed (if required) using the Calculate properties button. However, before
this can be done the petroleum fractions MUST be added to the main component list and its
composition set. That is, the petroleum fraction must be displayed in green and have a molar rate
defined.

Note: This option is only available for the Multiflash, DBR, and Eclipse 300 PVT packages.

Note: When you import a file and calculate petroleum fraction properties, the properties are updated
and the petroleum fractions are changed. If you import the original file again, a new set of the original
petroleum fractions are imported. The original petroleum fractions are different than the calculated
ones.

Recalculate properties
Before recalculating some properties, you MUST remove the values to be computed from the
spreadsheet. This can be easily done by selecting a group of cells and using Ctrl-X.

User Guide
131
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 149/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Compositional Property Models

Compositional thermodynamic and transport properties are determined by using the following models
and parameters:
• Equation of State models (p.489) and Binary interaction parameter (p.133) used to calculate the
following:
• fugacity, to determine the phases present and the composition of the phases
• density
• enthalpy
• entropy
• Viscosity models (p.469)
• Surface Tension models
• Thermal Conductivity models

Model scope
Use of the same set of models and parameters for all fluids in a network or single branch simulation
is recommended, as this allows the fluids to be mixed correctly. For back-compatibility, you can define
a different model for each fluid. This facility is also useful if a network is made up of several disjoint
sub-networks, where the fluids may be characterized differently. If different property models are used
for different fluids, results may be unpredictable when these fluids mix. PIPESIM chooses the property
models corresponding to the fluid with the most mass to model the mixture fluid.
To set the scope of the compositional property models, select Setup » Compositional Template
and use the Property Models tab.
If the scope is set to global, the template property models are used for all fluids. If the scope is set to
local, individual property models can be set for each fluid in the Compositional Template
Properties dialog.

Emulsion Viscosities
Three mixing rules have been implemented for the liquid viscosity. These are only valid for the
Multiflash PVT package.
Select one of the following options :
• Inversion method (p.133)
• Volume ratio (p.133)
• Woelflin (p.133)

Note: CUTOFF can be defined by you but is typically set to 60% (default)
How to Set the Cut off 
Cutoff can be set for 
• Black Oil — Use Setup »  Black Oil . On the Viscosity Data tab, enter the Watercut Cutoff 
Method in the User Specified field.

User Guide
132 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 150/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Compositional — Use Setup »  Compositional. For the name, enter WCut. For the comment,
enter *EMULSION and the percent. Enter the word EMULSION in all uppercase. Do not enter the
percent sign. For example, “*EMULSION 60” means a 60% water cut..
See also: Package (p.128), Viscosity (p.469), Binary Interaction Parameters (p.133), Equation of 
State (p.489)

Inversion method (Set to oil viscosity)

1. Use Oil viscosity at water cut less than or equal to CUTOFF
2. Use Water viscosity at water cut greater than or equal to CUTOFF

Volume ratio of oil and water viscosities

(
μ L  = μ o  1 −
wcut 
100 )+ μ w  ×
wcut 
100
Eq. 1.1

Woelflin

1. Use Woelflin correlation at watercut less than or equal to CUTOFF. The correlation is defined as
follows:

μ L  = μ o (1.0 + 0.00123 × wcut  )

2.2
Eq. 1.2

2. Use Water viscosity at watercut greater than CUTOFF.

BIP (Binary Interaction Parameter) Set 

Select the Binary Interaction Parameters to use: Select or choose
• OilGas1 (only available for Multiflash)
• OilGas2 (only available for Multiflash)

• OilGas3 (only available for Multiflash)

• OilGas4 (only available for Multiflash)
• SIS Flash default (only available for SIS)
• E300 Flash default (only available for E300)
• DBR Flash default (only available for DBR)
• REFPROP default (only available for REFPROP)
• GERG-2008 default (only available for GERG-2008)
• User BIPs (p.134).

Note: User BIPs are not available under SIEP SPPTS, REFPROP or GERG-2008.

Binary interaction parameters (BIPs) are adjustable factors, which are used to alter the predictions
from a model until the predictions match experimental data as closely as possible. BIPs are usually
generated by fitting experimental VLE or LLE data to the model in question. BIPs apply between pairs
of components, although the fitting procedure may be based on both binary and multi-component
phase equilibrium information.

User Guide
133
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 151/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

For Multiflash
The interaction parameters in OILGAS1 were from the correlation recommended by Nishumi et al.
They correlated parameters between all the light gases and hydrocarbons up to Decane. However,
when these were used in the prediction of hydrate dissociation temperatures for systems containing
a significant amount of condensate or crude, it became apparent that neither the bubble or dew points
nor the hydrate dissociation temperatures were being predicted accurately.
 After further investigation new correlations contained in OILGAS2 based on BIPs recommended by
Whitson for Methane with heavy hydrocarbons were introduced. The new correlations provide heavy
hydrocarbon interaction parameters for Ethane to Pentane, all of which were previously set to zero.
For systems containing Methane and alkanes up to C10 there is no major difference between
OILGAS1 and OILGAS2 BIP sets, but after C10 OILGAS1 parameters decrease rapidly in value,
reaching negative values after C16. In contrast, the values of OILGAS2 parameters continue to
increase gently with increasing carbon number.
OILGAS3 and OILGAS4 were later introduced and the only difference is in the parameters for MEG/
alkanes for the RKSA-info (hydrate) model. The newer parameters predict a lower (correct) solubility
for MEG in heavy hydrocarbons but are less accurate for the solubility of hydrocarbons in MEG. We
would generally recommend the use of the latest parameters, OILGAS4.
How to...: Setup » Compositional  » Options
See also: Package (p.128), Viscosity (p.469), user-defined BIPs (p.134), Emulsions (p.132),
Equations of State (p.489)

User Defined BIPs

If you have interaction parameters available and wish to supplement or overwrite those used, you
can do this by selecting the User BIPs option.
1. After selecting the components, select User BIPs as the BIP Set

2. and then Load BIPs.

This will load the default BIP (p.133) set for all the components that have been defined in the main
component list. These values can then be modified accordingly. The modified values will then be
used providing that the BIP Set is set to User BIPs.

Note: You must make sure that the BIPs you supply conform to the model definition used.

Note: Not available under SIEP SPPTS, REFPROP, or GERG-2008.

Specifying the Composition

Once the component list has been selected and added in the Compositional Template (p.127), you
can enter the desired composition for each component.
The Aqueous list contains the aqueous components. Typically their input units are per volume of 
stock-tank gas (for gas systems) or per volume of stock-tank liquid (for oil systems). In order to use
the watercut matching (p.139) option, the water MUST be expressed on a mole basis.

User Guide
134
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 152/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The Hydrocarbons list contains the oil and gas components, whose composition is normally
specified in mole percent (water-free). As the mole rates are added the total number of moles is
computed and displayed automatically.

Normalize

 After entering the composition, you can normalize the total number of mole (to 1.0) by clicking
Normalize . If the aqueous components have been entered on a volume or mass basis, they are first
converted to a Mole basis and then normalized. Once a component set has been normalized, it cannot
be reversed.

Importing the Composition

 A composition can be imported from the following file types: PVT, PTT, and PVO. The data in the
imported file overwrites the existing fluid. Any component in the imported file that is not in the
Compositional Template (p.127) is added to it. The thermodynamic or transport models in the
imported file are not imported.
Note: When importing a PVO file, select the units in which the file was written. The default is metric.

Export Property Table

 Assuming a component list with an associated composition has been specified, a PVT property table
can be generated. This can be given to other PIPESIM users or used in different models.
Temperature and Pressure points
The Pressure and Temperature grid points at which to create the file. The number of 
temperate and pressure points can be different. The minimum grid size is 1 x 1.
Reset to Defaults
Reset the default temperature and pressure points.
Clear All
Remove all temperature and pressure points.
Export Property Table
The PVT file is created on a series of Pressure and Temperature grid points. The file is
created after you are prompted for a file name and location. It is recommended that you use
the .pvt file extension.
Care should be taken when creating (and using PVT files) to ensure that the selected Pressure and
Temperature points span the range of operating values and are correctly spaced around phase
boundaries. A check using the rigorous (p.144) option is recommended.

Saving and Restoring Data

Compositional input data can be stored in the PIPESIM model or exported to a *.PVT file.
Compositional data from a previous session may be restored by using the Import button to load it
from the relevant *.PVT file. To prevent you from accidentally overwriting the original *.PVT file, the
File Name must be entered manually. However, it should be noted that not all PVT files can be
imported in the PIPESIM Compositional GUI, only those generated by PIPESIM, or third party PVT
packages (Multiflash, PVTi, SPPTS) whose equation of states are available in the PIPESIM GUI.

User Guide
135 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 153/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Graphing the Results

The generated .PVT file is stored in PsPlot format, the standard plotting utility used by PIPESIM. All
the physical properties generated can be viewed by a separate PsPlot task.

Phase Envelope
To determine a fluid phase envelope, do the following:
1. Select Setup » Compositional.
2. In the Compositional tab, enter the components, including any petroleum fractions and their 
composition.
3. In the Compositional tab, click Phase Envelope.
4. The phase envelope is displayed (automatically) if appropriate, showing the following:
• Dew line
• Bubble line

• Critical point
• Hydrate lines (p.500) — Multiflash only
• Ice line (p.502) — Multiflash only
• Water or aqueous line — Multiflash only
For the hydrocarbon lines, which include the dew and bubble lines, PIPESIM uses a two-phase stream
to perform the phase envelope. In other words, if a given compositional fluid contains aqueous
components (water, methanol, and so on), PIPESIM removes all those aqueous components from
the original fluid and only uses the remaining subset fluid to perform and display the hydrocarbon
lines. However, when Multiflash MFL files are used to perform the phase envelope, the aqueous
components are not removed from the stream. Hence, for the same compositional fluid the
hydrocarbon lines may be different depending whether the MFL file is used or not.
In addition to the above phase plot lines, when using the MFL files, the phase envelope can also
display (if appropriate).
• Wax line (p.502)
•  Asphaltene locus (p.499)
For phase envelopes generated using the Multiflash PVT package, the maximum pressure plotted is
initially set to 300 bars f or the hydrocarbon lines and 400 bars for the water and solids (hydrates, ice,
and wax) lines. These values will, if necessary, automatically increase up to 1000 bars for the
hydrocarbon lines and 1200 bars for the water and solids lines.
The quality lines (p.137) can also be added.
The phase envelope can also be superimposed over the flowline temperature or pressure profile.
See how (p.236).

Comment 
You can add a comment line to the fluid definition.
For a phase envelope created with Multiflash, the extent of the pressure (Y) axis can be set by using
the following keyword placed in the comment line:

User Guide
136 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 154/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

**penv_pmult=n

where n is a factor. The pressure axis is then plotted to a value of n times the phase envelope
cricondenbar value.

Search
This allows the component database to be searched and sorted. To locate a specific component,
enter either its name or formula.

Show Quality lines on a Phase Envelope

To show quality lines on a phase envelope, do the following:
1. Define your composition using Setup » Compositional and the Compositional tab. Include any
Petroleum Fractions.
2. Select the Phase Envelope tab.
3. Enter the quality lines that you want to view.
4. Click Phase Envelope.

Quality Lines
To add quality lines to phase envelope plots:
1. Select Setup » Compositional » Phase Envelope.
2. Go to the Phase Envelope tab and specify the quality line percentages that you want to see on
the phase envelope.
3. Press the Phase Envelope button.

Note:
1. Selecting the Phase Envelope button from the Component Selection tab will NOT produce
quality lines.
2. This option is not available for SIS flash.
3. The behavior of this option is different for the Multiflash package.
• For Multiflash, two lines are plotted for each percentage value entered, one corresponding to
the gas quality and the other to the liquid quality. For example, in a Multiflash case, if the 10%
line is selected, a 10% gas quality line and a 10% liquid (90% gas) quality line are plotted
together. For Multiflash, the first Quality Line Percentage should always be 0.00%, which will
plot both the bubble line (0% gas) and the dew line (0% liquid / 100% gas).

• For all the other flash packages, bubble and dew lines are always plotted, but only the gas
quality lines are plotted.
Therefore, to plot quality lines at 10% intervals, for Multiflash select (0,10,20,30,40,50), for all other 
packages select (10,20,30,40,50,60,70,80,90).

User Guide
137 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 155/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Flash/Separation
Flash/separation allows a single point flash of the current composition to be performed, or a multi
stage separation.
Do the following:

1. Select Setup » Compositional » Flash Separation.

2. Select the Flash type and enter the (PT) conditions, press the Perform Flash button. The results
are displayed in a spreadsheet that can be copied (CTRL-C) and pasted (CTRL-V) to other 
applications.

Multi-Stage Separation
Multi stage separation allows the input of pressure and temperature conditions at multi stage liquid-
vapor separation levels with a final gas separation stage used to flush out any remaining liquid in the
gas stream. Each separator operates at 100% efficiency, that is the two exit streams from each stage
are pure liquid and vapor.
1. Input the conditions (pressure and temperature) for each of the stages as well as for the final gas
separation stage. By clicking on Perform Flash, the component mole fraction (in percentages)
and fluid properties of the specified liquid stage are displayed. To get the properties of the fluid at
the final exit streams (liquid and gas), enter a liquid stage of 0 before clicking on Perform Flash
or enter a liquid stage of 1 to n, click on Perform flash then click on Final stage. After a flash has
been performed, you can also get a specific stage (gas, liquid or final) by clicking on the
appropriate button as described below.
• By entering the liquid stage number (1, 2, ....n) and clicking on Liquid stage, the mole fraction
and fluid properties for the liquid stage exit stream are displayed. Note that a liquid stage of 0
is not valid at this point and is allowed only when performing the flash to indicate the final stage.
• By clicking on Gas stage, the mole fraction and fluid properties for the gas stage exit stream

are displayed.
• Clicking on Final stage displays the mole fraction and fluid properties for final gas and final
liquid exit streams.

User Guide
138 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 156/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

GLR Matching
Tune the composition to match a specified water cut and gas/oil ratio.
1. Select Setup » Compositional » GLR.
2. Enter all of the following:
• Water cut (percentage of the liquid phase that is water) of the fluid. Water MUST be included
in the component list and expressed in a mole basis if this is set to anything other than 0%.
• GLR/GOR/LGR/OGR of the fluid.
• Pressure and Temperature at which the above conditions apply. Default is stock-tank
conditions.
3. Press Perform Calculation to compute the molar flow rates of the composition to match those
conditions if this is possible. If the conditions cannot be meet then an error message is displayed.
This is displayed in the calculated column.
4. To update the main composition, press the Update Composition list button after the new
composition has been computed.

Salinity (Salt) Analysis

One of the components in the database is a "salt component". This is used to represent a salt pseudo-
component, based on sodium chloride equivalence, for use in calculating freezing point depression
or hydrate inhibition. Define the salinity content of the water. To carry out such calculations you need
to provide the amount of salt in the stream. Often the data for the salt, brine or formation/production
water ion analysis will not be available. The Salt calculator can assist.
The water content of the stream MUST be defined. The Salt component can either be added from
the component list or will be automatically added when the salt quantity has been computed.
To define the salt, select Setup » Compositional  » Salinity Analysis. The salt can be defined in
the following ways:
• Ion Analysis
a. Density (SG) of solution
• Salt Analysis table
• Total amount of dissolved solid (TDS)
a. Density (SG) of solution
b. Total dissolved solid
 After entering the required data, click the Calculate button. This computes the salt quantity and adds
that amount to the component list.
Salt quantity is always in mole units.

Compositional using MFL file

To use an MFL file, select Setup » MFL file. This opens a dialog with the following fields and buttons:

User Guide
139
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 157/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Select MFL File

Should either contain the full path and name of an previously created MFL file or can be blank
if an MFL file is intended to be created by selecting Create New.
Browse

Locate and select a previously created MFL file.

Create New
 Allows you to define this fluid using InfoChem's MultiFlash GUI. The MultiFlash GUI will be
launched from which the component list, component quantities, equation of state, transport
property, wax, asphaltene, hydrate or combined solid models can be selected.
Edit
Enables you to edit an MFL file that has been selected and is displayed in the field above.
The MultiFlash GUI is launched and displays the component and model selection in the MFL
file to be edited. These can then be modified as required.
Phase Envelope

Plots the phase envelope of the fluid selected in the file field. Once an MFL file has been
created, edited, or selected after browsing to it, the phase envelope can be plotted. The
hydrocarbon phase envelope and any other requested phase as selected in the MFL file, will
be plotted.

Fluid Property Table (External PVT Tables)

PIPESIM supports all PVT packages shown in the PIPESIM GUI.
Use this option when the PVT data is obtained from a 3rd party PVT simulator, for example, Hysys,
PVTSim, Multiflash, GUTS, DBR Solids, ScaleChem, PVTSim, and OLGA. A data file is written by
the PVT simulator and stored externally to PIPESIM in an ASCII file. When properties are required
at a specific pressure and temperature (PT) the data file will be interrogated, and interpolation (or 
extrapolation) used to find the properties at the required PT point.
Table files generated by a 3rd party PVT packages, which contain EOS that are not available in the
PIPESIM GUI, generally contain pressure-temperature grid points and their transport properties data
(holdup, gas and liquid density, viscosity, thermal conductivity, and so on), but no information on the
actual composition of the fluid or the EOS used to generate them. Therefore, they cannot be imported
in the PIPESIM Compositional GUI.
External PVT tables can also be created from within PIPESIM GUI using one of three available
packages (Multiflash, SIS Flash or SPPTS). However, these ones can be imported back in the
PIPESIM GUI and can be useful when, for example, a number of wells have the same composition
and the data can be exported from one well and imported into another.
In network mode the property data within the PVT table will be ignored but the composition will be
extracted and the in-line flashing method used.

Solids Modeling

Solids are modeled in the following ways:

User Guide
140 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 158/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Sand is modeled for its effects on erosion. (Refer to Erosion and Corrosion Options (p.153).)
Sand inventory is traced in the model. (Refer to Sand Modeling (p.141).)
• Wax is modeled for its deposition behavior. (Refer to Wax Deposition (p.182).)
• Wax, Asphaltene, and Scale are modeled for their appearance in the fluid. (Refer to Solids
 Appearance (p.142).)
See also Scale Predictions (p.142).

Sand Modeling
In PIPESIM, the purpose of sand modelling is to predict its erosion effect. Sand has no effect on
pressure drop, heat transfer calculations, or on overall fluid mass balance across the network. Sand
is assumed to be transported at the fluid mean velocity. There is no separate modeling of sand
velocity, sand deposition, or accumulation in low velocity pipe bends or sumps. Fluid density,
viscosity, and other transport properties, are not affected by sand rate.
In a single-branch model, specify the sand rate using Setup » Erosion & Corrosion Properties.
For more information, refer to Erosion and Corrosion Options (p.153). The sand rate applies to the
whole branch. (At present, there is no support for different sand rates from individual reservoirs or 
completions).
In a network model, specify the sand rate in each source branch by double-click the branch to bring
up its individual window. Then select Setup » Erosion & Corrison Properties and enter the desired
sand rate for the branch. The network solution keeps track of sand inventory in each branch and
mixes it into downstream branches at network junctions. Thus, the erosion effects of the sand in link
and sink branches are accounted for correctly. (Sand rate can in fact be entered for any branch in
the network. PIPESIM makes no attempt to restrict you to source branches. However, any sand rates
that you enter for link and sink branches are ignored by the network solver. PIPESIM uses the
calculated mixed values.)
Sand is assumed to be present in the liquid phase of the fluid for the purpose of separator modeling.

Wax Deposition Modeling

PIPESIM can model the deposition of solid wax on the inside surface of the pipe system.

Note: This is distinct and separate from modeling the solids appearance in the fluid. See Solids
 Appearance (p.142).

Wax deposition reduces the pipe internal diameter, and therefore affects the fluid velocity and system
pressure drop. The wax deposit causes a change in the heat transfer characteristics of the pipe
system, which affects the fluid temperature. PIPESIM models both effects.
Wax deposition is strictly a transient effect. PIPESIM is a steady-state simulator and cannot not
perform a rigorous wax deposition simulation. Nevertheless, wax deposition typically occurs over a
timescale of weeks or months, so a series of steady-state timesteps is a good approximation to real
system behavior. This is what PIPESIM does. See Operations  » Wax Deposition. (Wax Deposition
(p.182)) This operation allows a series of timesteps to be performed for modeling the buildup of wax
in the system and its effect on pressure drop, deliverability, and temperature.

User Guide
141
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 159/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Wax deposition can also be modeled as an effect caused by other system sensitivity variables. If 
sufficient wax deposition data is available (see Setup » Wax Properties), a rate of wax deposition
is also available at any point in the system. This information can be viewed in the system and profile
plots along with any other result variables as a function of selected sensitivity data. For example, you
could use the operation Pressure / Temperature profile (p.174) to sensitize on system inlet
temperature, and to view the effect of this on the profile of wax deposition rate.
Deposition of wax has no effect on fluid composition, fluid transport properties, or on overall mass
balance in the system.
See also Solids Modeling. (p.140)

Solids Appearance
The phase behavior of fluids can result in the formation of one or more solid phases. PIPESIM does
not simulate the flow and transport of solids in any rigorous manner, which is comparable to the
support of 2- and 3-phase fluids with flow correlations. However, the formation of solids — such as
Wax, Asphaltene, and Scale in the bulk fluid — can be modeled and predicted using the PVT tables
that are written by third-party programs, such as the Schlumberger product DBR Solids and OLI's
ScaleChem. This modeling is confined to the appearance of the solid phase in the bulk fluid and
does not model the deposition of the solid on the pipe or tubing walls.
Third-party programs write a PVT table file in a PIPESIM enhanced PVT file format. That file contains
fluid phase behavior and transport properties on a grid of pressures and temperatures. Additional
properties in the file describe the solids phases that the third-party programs model. The exact nature
of the solids phase(s) and the properties associated with them depend exclusively on third-party
programs. Because PIPESIM deals with solids phases in a generalized manner, updates to the third-
party programs that write the enhanced PVT files should be compatible with existing PIPESIM
functionality.
Once the PVT files are created, PIPESIM accesses those files when specific pressure-temperature
data is needed. For more information, refer to Fluid Property Table (External PVT Tables) (p.140).

Note: Because PVT files contain fluid phase behavior and transport properties, solids appearance
modeling cannot be combined with other methods of fluid PVT modeling, such as Black oil or 
Compositional fluids.

To view the additional solids data in the PVT tables, use the profile plot. For example, if you model
Wax and Scale results, wax and scale appearance temperatures are available in the fluid-temperature
profile plot by setting the x-axis to temperature and the y-axis to pressure. If you want to view solids
appearance in the fluid, plot the solid phase's Mass Fraction data.
See also Scale Prediction (p.142) and Solids Modeling. (p.140)

Scale Prediction
Prediction of scale formation may be performed by using a PVT file (p.140) generated by OLI's
ScaleChem (http://www.olisystems.com/oliscale.htm) program (purchased separately). No extra
license for PIPESIM is required.
To use the PVT file, select Setup »  PVT file and browse to the PVT file generated by ScaleChem.

User Guide
142 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 160/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The PVT file contains tables of all fluid phases and transport properties required for thermo-hydraulic
calculations. Additionally, this file contains detailed water chemistry information that enables PIPESIM
to determine the occurrence, type, location, and severity of scale formation. Various profile properties
related to scale formation are reported, including:
• Total scale concentration
• Individual scale species concentrations
• Mass ratio of individual scale species
• Pre-Scale Index
• Post-Scale Index
Scaling tendencies are reported by ScaleChem in two forms: the pre-scale index and the post-scale
index. The pre-scale index is based on a condition where everything remains in solution (no solid
phases are allowed to form). The pre-scale index values can be greater than 1.0 (supersaturated).
The post-scale index (more commonly used) represents equilibrium conditions. If the water is
saturated (the scale species precipitates), then the post-scale index is 1. The post-scale index is also
useful for understanding the potential risk of scaling based on the degree of undersaturation, that is,
how close the post-scale index is to 1.
These properties may be viewed in profile plots and tables.
To view phase appearance lines on the same plot as the production profile, select temperature as
the x-axis and pressure as the y-axis. Each scale species will be described by either a phase
“appearance” line, a phase “disappearance” line, or both. Moving from the left side of the plot to the
right (from low to high temperature at a constant pressure):
• If a phase appearance line is encountered first, then solids will exist only at temperatures above
this line until (and if) a phase disappearance line is encountered. This behavior is typical for 
CaCO3 and CaSO4.
• If a phase disappearance line is encountered first, then solids exist only at temperatures below
this line. This behavior is typical for BaSO4.
ScaleChem PVT files may be used for corrosion prediction (p.353). OLI’s Corrosion Analyzer may
be used for more detailed corrosion analysis.

Validating contents of PVT file

To view information contained in the PVT file, double-click the file to open it in PSPlot. The variables
in the PVT file can be viewed graphically as a function of pressure and temperature. The composition
of the fluid used to generate the PVT file is recorded in the comments section in the header of the
PVT file. This file can be viewed in a text editor. To view the contents of the PVT file in a tabular 
format, under Setup » Define Output, select “Fluid Property Tables”. When you run a simulation, all

fluid properties are written to an output file.

See also
• Example files: Case Studies/Well Design and Performance/ScaleChem
• Fluid Properties Tables Files (External PVT Tables) (p.140)
• Solids Appearance (p.142)

User Guide
143
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 161/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Compositional Flashing
More details. (p.127)
Compositional Flashing determines the way in which physical properties are computed. The balance
is between speed and accuracy.

Note: This is only valid for compositional models.

Select Setup » Flashing to open the Compositional Flashing tab.

Temperature Energy Balance / Physical Properties

The following methods are available for calculating compositional fluid physical properties:
Always Interpolate (fast)
This option uses interpolation between physical properties determined by in a predefined grid
of temperature and pressure points. This grid can be modified from the compositional menu.

(default)
Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolate elsewhere
This is a compromise between speed and accuracy, which assumes that properties will
change more rapidly when close to a phase boundary. Interpolation is performed whenever 
the grid points comprising a rectangle all show the presence of the same phases. For 
example if all 4 points in the rectangle have some oil, some gas, and no water, then we
assume the rectangle lies entirely within the 2-phase region of the hydrocarbon phase
envelope, so interpolation is appropriate. If however one, two or three of the points have no
oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon dew point line crosses the rectangle, so a rigorous flash is
required.
Always Rigorous Flash (slow)
Interpolation never occurs: properties are obtained by flashing at the required pressure and
temperature. This is the slowest but most accurate method.
These apply in the following sections:
Temperature Energy Balance (TH)
These values are used to maintain the temperature/enthalpy/entropy balance of the fluid.
Physical properties (PP)
These are the values required to perform the multiphase fluid flow and heat transfer 
calculations. They include phase volume fractions, densities, viscosities, heat capacities, and
surface tension.

Note the following:

• In most simulations, for every PP flash that is performed, there are about 5 to 10 TH flashes. Thus,
these (TH flashes) clearly have the greatest effect on speed and run time. The inaccuracies of TH
interpolated flashes are usually minimal.
• The speed impact of each choice obviously depends on the composition, and the phase behavior 
in the PT region of interest. As a rough guide, taking the base case as interpolation, swapping just

User Guide
144
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 162/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

the PP flashes to "rigorous" will multiply your run time by about 4. With TH flashes also "rigorous",
run time will probably increase at least 20 fold. Use of the 'compromise' choices will be faster.
• For those requiring more accuracy, we have found the "most useful" settings (that is the greatest
increase in accuracy for the smallest effect on performance) to be the following:
• PP= Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolation elsewhere
• TH= Always Interpolate.

In-line flashing (default)

These are PVT tables that built (in memory) when the simulation is underway. There are three options
to this method, as follows:
Interpolation
In order to maximize the speed of the simulation not all requested PT points are flashed, A
pressure/temperature grid is defined and only these points are created. For points not lying
exactly on a grid point, four-point interpolation is used. The default grid points can be changed
using the compositional option (p.135). The fastest but least accurate method.
Interpolate when close to phase boundary
The above table is used except where 1 or more of the four-points used for the interpolation
is in a different phase. In this case a full flash is performed and the data point added to the
table. This will improve accuracy, but at the cost of speed
Rigorous
a full flash is always performed. Very accurate, but slow!
More details (p.144)
In a Network model each source can have a different composition assigned to it, the streams are
mixed at junctions. These mixer streams are then reported for all branches in the output file. Additional

information onthe
and selecting thecompositional
fluid propertiesreporting
can be reported
options. by adding the report tool (p.105) object to a model
The compositional interface takes advantage of concepts and terminology specific to petroleum
engineers, providing an easy to use front-end to a complex multiphase flash packages. It allows the
following:
• compositions to be specified (including petroleum fractions),
• PVT tables to be generated
• phase envelopes (with water and hydrate prediction) to be generated
• compositions to be exported and imported
• PVT Data matching

Stock tank Conditions

Stock tank conditions are defined as:

Pressure Temperature
14.7 psia 60 F

User Guide
145 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 163/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1 bara 15.5 C

Flowing Conditions
Flowing conditions are defined at the actual in-situ flowing pressure (P) and temperature (T).

Examples
Flowing gas flowrate
the gas flowrate at stock-tank conditions (mmscf/d), this rate does not include the dissolved
gas and therefore its value increases along the flow system due to pressure losses. If the
outlet pressure is set to 14.7 psia, then the profile will eventually converge to the stock-tank
gas rate (3).
Flowing gas volume flowrate
the gas volume flowrate at in-situ flowing pressure (P) and temperature (T) (mmcf/d). This
rate has lower values than those of (1).
Stock Tank gas flowrate
the gas flowrate at stock-tank conditions (mmscf/d), this is the total gas (free + dissolved)
which remains constant throughout the flow system.

Steam
For steam systems (production and injection) PIPESIM uses “ASTEM97 - IAPWS IF97 Properties of 
Water and Steam for Industrial Use," Copyright Edward D. Throm (C) 2005.
When modeling steam systems the pressure and quality or temperature are required. If the quality is
not provided, superheated (quality =100%) or sub-cooled (quality=0%) then the temperature is
required.
Steam systems can be modeled in both single branch and network models using engine
keywords. These can be specified from the Pipesim GUI as described below. However:

Note: Because the GUI does not understand steam as a fluid model choice, it will require you to
specify a valid fluid model, either as Black Oil, or Compositional. The steam keywords will override
this, so the choice is not really relevant when the model is working.

Single branch steam

1. To model steam in a single branch PIPESIM model, go to Setup » Engine Options in the single
branch view of the steam source branch, and specify the following keywords, for example:.

STEAM
INLET QUALITY = 0.5

The inlet steam quality needs to be specified, if not, the engine will assume it to be either 0.0 or 1.0
depending on the pressure and temperature at the inlet.
2. Make sure you have a black oil fluid specified, with a GLR of zero and a watercut of 100%.correctly.
3. Mass flow rates must be used with steam. Any operation that specifies a flowrate, or sets a flowrate
limit, must do so with a mass rate, not a gas or liquid rate.

User Guide
146 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 164/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

When steam quality is provided, it will be used with the lnlet pressure to calculate the resulting steam
temperature and enthalpy; Any inlet temperature you specify will be ignored.
If quality is not provided, enthalpy will be used instead. If Enthalpy is not provided, the system will be
flashed at the specified inlet pressure and temperature, and as a result will be 100% liquid or 100%
vapour at the system inlet.

Network model steam

1. To model steam sources in a network model. go to Setup » Engine Options in the network view,
and enter the following data for example in the lower section of the window:

SETUP COMP = STEAM

SOURCE NAME = SS1 QUALITY = 0.8

2. Enter the quality for all the steam sources. If the quality is not entered, it will be determined from
the temperature and pressure given for that source. If it is entered the source will be considered
saturated at that pressure and the temperature will be adjusted accordingly.

Note: Steam is considered as a third thermodynamic model (after blackoil and compositional). At
present only one thermodynamic model is allowed per network, so steam systems have to be modeled
as a separate network from the hydrocarbon production or injection networks.

1.5 Options
1.5.1 Common Options

Project Data
Use Setup » Project Data to enter any of the following optional information on the PIPESIM project:
• Project
• User  
• Job
• Manager  
• Company
• Work order  
• Client
• Remarks
The project title will be displayed on all reports.

Units
These are the default units of measurement for the main engineering quantities which appear as a
first choice for input data. The units can be in one of the predefined data sets "Engineering" or "SI".
 Alternatively, you can specify a customized set of units by selecting the Custom option.

User Guide
147 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 165/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The current selected data set can also be set so that it is the default when a new model is created.
See how... (p.148)
Some custom data sets are provided. These include Canadian, Mexican and SI unit sets. These can
be imported from the "PIPESIM/data" directory.

Selecting a units set

To select the unit set, do the following:
1. Select Setup » Units.... On the Set Units tab, do one of the following;
• Select Eng to use engineering units.
• Select SI.
• Select Custom and define the unit set for each property.
2. If required, click Set as Default. This makes this unit set the default used when any new model
is opened. Existing models will retain the unit that they were saved with.

Custom units
 A custom data set can also be saved to a data file (*.umf) for use by other users or models. A custom
set is, by default, based on the Eng. data set. However, it can be based on the SI set if you first import
the SI set (SI.umf file). Set the required units and provide a data set name, then click Export to be
prompted for a file name and location.
The More Units>> button allows more control over the units selected.

Choose Paths

Note: Only change these entries if advised to by Schlumberger.

To change the path of any tool used, do the following:

1. Select Setup » Preferences  » Choose Paths.... Alternatively Expert » Display »
Preferences  » Choose Paths...
2. Change the file and full path of any the following:
Editor 
can be changed to use your preferred text editor 
Single branch calculation engine
can be changed if a new engine is provided by Schlumberger 
Network calculation engine
can be changed if a new engine is provided by Schlumberger.
Plot
plot utility to use
Database
database location. Note: If this is changed, close and restart PIPESIM so the changes
take effect.

User Guide
148 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 166/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

USERDLL
Location of the USERDLL.dat file. This is used to edit/specify to PIPESIM the
characteristics of USER defined correlations. Changing this may remove some
correlations from PIPESIM. Only for expert Users.

Note: If this is changed, close and restart PIPESIM so the changes take effect.

Heat Transfer Options

To set up the Heat Transfer options, select Setup » Heat Transfer Options.

Pipe Burial Method

You can select the model to be used for pipeline heat transfer calculations. The calculations take into
consideration the burial configuration of the pipe (fully buried, partially buried, or fully exposed) and
give different U-value results based on the model selected. The options available, in decreasing order 
of accuracy, are the following:
• 2009 Method (p.454)
• 2000 Method (p.456)
• 1983 Method (p.455)
The three options give identical results for a fully exposed pipeline. However, for a fully buried pipe
or partially buried pipe they give different results. The 2009 Method is recommended for use and is
the current default. See Further details (p.443).
 Also see heat transfer. (p.90)

Inside Film Coefficient Method

You
You can
can specify
choose the insidethe
between filmKaminsky
coefficientmodel
calculation model
(p.449) to be
and the usedcombined
Kreith during heat loss calculations.
Reynolds number 
model (p.446)

U Value Multiplier 
You can specify a multiplier for user enter U-values in heat loss calculations. This is particularly useful
when performing a temperature match in the Data Matching Operation.

Hydrate Sub-Cooling Calculation

This switch turns on the calculation and reporting of the hydrate formation temperature. The maximum
amount of sub-cooling (Hydrate formation temperature - Fluid Temperature) is reported for each
branch of a network. This can help to determine where the hydrate problem starts in the flowline.
You can plot the following:
• Fluid Temperature versus Distance
• Hydrate Formation Temperature versus Distance
• Degrees of Subcooling versus Distance
You can display all of the plots on the same plot.

User Guide
149
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 167/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The maximum amount of sub-cooling in a branch is calculated and reported to the system plot file.

Note: This calculation may increase runtime significantly.

Engine Options
To set these options, select Setup » Engine Options. The parameters are as follows:
Segments per pipe length and Maximum Segment Length
These data fields allow you to set the initial maximum segment length either as a length
quantity, or as a division factor of each section. If both are specified, the smaller will be taken.
The segment may be further subdivided by the program, as required, so as to obtain a
converged solution.
Additional Short Segments Either Side of Each Node
In the output file, node pressure and temperature values are tabulated against the segment
average value of all other quantities. To prevent misleading output caused by large segments,
the length of the segment on either side of each node is limited to 1 ft. It is possible to disable
this feature by unchecking the check box.
Iteration Estimate
This data field allows you to provide an estimated inlet pressure or an estimated mass flow
rate. For further information see ITERN Iteration Data (Optional) (p.580).
Additional engine keywords
This data field allows you to provide additional engine keywords for the PIPESIM single
branch or network engine.

PIPESIM Network Option Control

Select Setup » Define Output and select the Output Control tab. The parameters are as follows:
Use local branch options
If this option is selected engine will use corresponding values specified for each local branch.
Use network options (in addition to local branch options)
If this option is selected it allows you to add output options defined for network to options
defined for each local branch
Apply network options to all branches
This overrides specific options defined on branch level with values defined for network.

Output Options
More details. (p.583)

Define Output
To change the options, select Setup » Define Output.
Options that apply to the data reported in the main output file for a single branch (*.out) are as follows:

User Guide
150 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 168/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Primary Output Page(s)

Primary Output Page(s) typically contain the following information for each node : Distance,
Elevation, Horizontal Angle, Vertical Deviation, Pressure, Temperature, Mean Velocity,
elevational and Frictional Pressure Drop, Liquid Flowrate, Free Gas Flowrate, Liquid and
Gas Densities, Slug Number and Flow Pattern.
Auxiliary Output Page(s)
 Auxiliary Output Page(s) typically contain the following information for each node : Distance,
Elevation, Pipe ID, Superficial Liquid and Gas Velocities, Liquid and Gas Mass Flowrates,
Liquid and Gas Viscosities, Reynolds Number, Liquid Volume Fraction, Liquid Holdup
Fraction, Enthalpy, Iteration Number, Flash/Table Interpolation Diagnostics.
Well Inflow Performance Data
The well Inflow performance data output page contains the well inflow performance
relationship input and derived values used to model the relationship between well drawdown
and flowrate. This page only applies to models containing a completion.
System Profile
Primary Output Page(s) typically contain the following information for each node : Distance,
Elevation, Section Length, Total Length, Ambient Temperature, Input U, and Fluid Data File.
Echo Input Fluid Properties
Fluid Property Pages contain the fluid property input data and some calculated properties at
stock tank conditions.
Echo Engine Batch Language
Prints out the input keywords at the top of the output file.
Segment Data in Primary Output
 A "section" of the model is defined as the thing between two nodes. Sections are further 
divided
Primaryinto "segments"
Output Page by for calculation
checking purposes. Segment data can be included in the
this box.
Heat Transfer Input Data
The Heat Transfer Input Data Page(s) typically contain the following information for each
node: Pipe and Coating Thicknesses and Thermal Conductivities, Soil Thermal Conductivity,
Burial Depth, Ambient Fluid Velocity, and Ambient Temperature.
Heat Transfer Output Data
The Heat Transfer Output Data Page(s) typically contain the following information for each
node: Distance, Fluid Temperature, Fluid Enthalpy, Temperature Gradients, and Heat
Transfer Coefficients.

Slug Output Pages

Slug Output Page(s) typically contain the following information for each node : Distance,
Elevation, Pipe ID, Slug Lengths and Frequencies, Slug Number and Flow Pattern.
Iteration Progress Log
This prints the log of iterations for iterative models only, that is those where the calculated
variable is inlet pressure or flowrate.

User Guide
151
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 169/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Wax Page(s)
Create specific pages for the wax operation.
Fluid property tables
Create an output file (*.out) that contains tables of the properties as a function of pressure

and temperature for compositional fluids ONLY. Blackoil fluids (p.123) are controlled under 
Setup » Blackoil. See also TPRINT Tabular Data Print Options (p.694).
No Cases to Print (Single branch mode only)
Determines the number of cases to print full results for in a single branch sensitivity case. By
default full results are only printed f or the 1st case.
Plot File Format
Determines the format of the created plot file.
PS-PLOT
PIPESIM's graphical post-processor (Default)

Lotus compatible
Lotus formatted file
Excel compatible
Excel formatted file
Excel compatible (packed).
Excel formatted file that is compacted.
Neutral
standard ASCII text file.
Report Tool Output Goes To

When a report tool is placed in the model, its results are written to the output file (*.out). The
section of the output file that the report goes to can be selected, the default is Dedicated .

Export data to EXCEL

From the calculation engine, the basic [plot] data can be written to an Microsoft Excel formatted file
by specifying one of the Excel options for the Plot File Format under the Setup » Define Output.
This creates an Excel data file with the extension .csv. See Setup/Define Output (p.150).
From the GUI:
1. From the network module (after a simulation) the field results can be exported to Excel using
Reports » Report Tool.
2. In the Report Tool, select the required field data and click the Excel button. If Excel is located on
the PC, this step opens an interface (p.240) to Excel.
From PsPlot, use the Excel button (p.240) on the Data tab.

Produce a custom report

The standard reports (full output and summary files) have been designed to provide commonly
reported results after a simulation. However ther e will be situations where you only require a subset

User Guide
152 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 170/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

of the information or some data that is not available in the standard report. In this case the custom
report feature can be utilized.
Custom reports are invoked by using the PIPESIM Input Language (PIL) using the additional EKT
(p.555).

Note: The EKT (p.84) (spanner tool) can not be used for this operation.

The sub-command CUSTOM (p.583) of the PRINT (p.583) keyword is required to create custom
reports. The keyword PRINT CUSTOM requires a list of variables to print to the custom report, these
can be determined using the PLOT SYNTAX (p.590) keyword. The codes returned from this list can
then be used as argument on the PRINT CUSTOM command.

Example 1
To obtain a list of available custom report variable, use the additional EKT option, add PLOT SYNTAX
and run the model. The output file contains a list of variables and codes for "Profile plot file, SPOT &
CUSTOM reports".

Example 2 
To produce a custom report with "Horizontal distance", "Total distance" and "Elevation". In the output
file locate the codes for the required properties, in this case A, Band C. Using the additional EKT
(p.555) option, add PRINT CUSTOM = (A,B,C) (the PLOT SYNTAX can be left if required) and run
the model. The output file contains a custom report section with the variables required.

View tabular results

Tabular (text) results files are created, from the calculation engine, in standard ASCII format (*.out
and *.sum) and can be viewed by any text editor.
You can change this to use a preferred text editor using the Choose Path option (p.148).

Erosion and Corrosion Options

The erosion and corrosion options are used to calculate the following:
• erosion and corrosion rates
• erosional velocity limit
These are reported per-node in the Auxiliary Output page of the main output file, and in the profile
plot file. The maxima for the case are reported in the system plot file. The erosional velocity is the
maximum fluid velocity as recommended by the chosen correlation. The erosional velocity appears
in the Auxiliary Output page as a ratio with the fluid mean velocity, so values of 1 or greater indicate

the need for attention.

To set the options, select Setup » Erosion & Corrosion Properties.

Erosion
Erosion can occur in solids-free fluids, but is usually caused by entrained solids (sand). The rate of 
sand production is the main determinant of erosion rate. Sand production rate is specified per-branch
in a network model. Sand produced in source or well branches will be tracked across manifolds and
mixed along with fluids, so an accurate erosion rate will be calculated without the need for you to

User Guide
153
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 171/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

specify the sand rate in link branches. Sand is assumed to follow liquid production when a separator 
is modeled.
The following erosion models are available:
• API 14 E

• Salama
API 14 E
The API 14 E model comes from the American Petroleum Institute, Recommended Practice, number 
14 E. This is a solids-free model which will calculate an erosion velocity only (no erosion rate). The
erosion velocity V  e  is calculated with the formula

K 
V  e  = 0.5 Eq. 1.3
 ρ 

where  ρ  is the fluid mean density and K  is an empirical constant. K  has dimensions of 
0.5

( )
mass  . Its default value in engineering units is 100, this corresponds to 122 in SI units.
(length  × time 2)
Salama
The Salama model was published in Journal of Energy Resources Technology, Vol 122, June 2000,
"An Alternative to API 14 E Erosional Velocity Limits for Sand Laden Fluids", by Mamdouh M. Salama.
This models erosion rate and erosional velocity.
The parameters required for the model are as follows:
Acceptable Erosion rate
rate of erosion that is deemed 'acceptable'. This is used to calculate the erosional velocity.
Erosional velocity appears as a ratio with fluid mean velocity in the Auxiliary output page.
The default is 0.1 mm/year.
Sand production ratio
a measure of sand production rate, as a ratio with liquid rate. Units are Parts Per Million, by
volume, against stock-tank liquid rate. If sand production ratio is zero, erosion rate will not
be calculated.
Sand Grain Size
mean size of the sand grains. The default 0.25 mm.
Geometry Constant

this is the geometry dependent constant Sm. The default is 5.5

Efficiency
a multiplier used to match field data. The default is1.
The equations in Salama's paper use a sand rate in Kg/day. This is obtained from the supplied volume
ratio using Salama's 'typical value' for sand density, 2650 kg/m 3.
See also EROSION (p.617).

User Guide
154
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 172/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Corrosion
The de Waard (1995) corrosion model (p.538) calculates a corrosion rate caused by the presence
of CO2 dissolved in water. Concentrations of CO 2 and water are obtained from the fluid property
definitions, (black oil, compositional, ScaleChem generated PVT files). If CO2 is absent from the fluid
and no liquid water phase is present, the corrosion rate is zero.
The parameters required for the model are:
Efficiency
multiplier C c  to correct for inhibitor efficiency, or to match field data.

Actual pH
if supplied, this value is used instead of the calculated one.
See also CORROSION (p.616) and deWaard (1995) Corrosion Model (p.353).

Engine Preferences
To change the engine preferences, select Setup » Preferences  » Engine. The dialog this opens
has two tabs, Engine Preferences and Advanced.

Engine Preferences tab

The following Preference settings affect the running of the calculation engine and apply to PIPESIM,
every time that it is started.

Run Plot tool with single branch engine  Allows the plot utility to be run and display results
graphically as the calculation engine is running. The
default is on.

Run engine minimized Runs

If you the
wantengine
to seeinthe
a minimized
progress state.
of the The default is on.
simulation,
deselect this option or maximize the PIPESIM engine
window.

Add unit descriptors to the engine files When the data is written to the engine file, the units of 
each property are added. The default is off.

Run engine via batch file Running the engine via a batch file allows the window
to be kept open if the engine fails, so any error 
messages can be viewed. This also allows license
errors to be identified. The default is on.

Advanced tab
To change these, select the Advanced tab.

 Additional Single Branch Engine Command Line Parameters

The following are command line arguments for the single branch engine:

User Guide
155 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 173/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

-vx Controls screen output levels. The default = -v1

-b Do not issue dialog box when simulation has finished

 Additional Network Engine Command Line Parameters

The following are command line arguments for the Network engine:

-vx Controls screen output levels. The default = -v1

-b Do not issue dialog box when simulation has finished.

-c Creates well performance curves.

-r Restart but do not keep branches skipped in the restart file permanently skipped. This option

has to be used ONLY with the run button in the toolbar .

Note: Use of the restart button , overrides this option and keeps all branches skipped in
the restart file permanently skipped. See Restart Model (p.189) .

1.5.2 Network Options

Speed up the calculation engine

The engine calculations are optimized for speed at compilation time. However, there are some

features
(p.511) that can be used to improve performance. See also Addressing Network speed issues.
Screen output: By default a large amount of information is written to the calculation engine window
during a simulation this, although useful in gauging the progress of the simulation, you may want to
disable it if the solution is slow. By adding the command line switch -v1, very little screen output will
occur and the simulation will run faster. This is the default option.
Estimates
By default the engines use internally set default estimates. Changing these to better match
the conditions of the system improves the convergence and so the speed.
Restart

Running a network
also speed model byIfusing
up the solution. the Restart
the model feature,aaslotopposed
has changed to the a
(for example, Run
welloption, should
was added,
or a branch or node has been re-activated), then the use of the restart facility may actually
slow down the simulation! See more (p.189).
Other techniques that can be used to speed up the overall simulation time are as follows:
• Run the model from a local hard disk rather than a network drive.
• Run PIPESIM locally rather than from a network installation (LAN).

User Guide
156 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 174/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Try to split the model into smaller networks, which can be solved independently, before linking
them all together. (This helps in troubleshooting the model.)
• When first building the model, leave out equipment such as compressors and separators, then
build them in one at a time. (Again this helps troubleshooting.)
• When using a compressor or pump, define it initially with a Delta P rather than with a power or 
user curve. It can be changed as required later. Also avoid defining a compressor by ischarge
pressure, as this can have the effect of over constraining a system.
• Try to avoid unnecessary nodes in a network, as this increases the computing time required to
solve it.
• Avoid dangling or redundant branches.
• If the sinks are flowrate specified, and are appearing consistently at atmospheric pressure (see
messages in engine window), try changing the boundary condition to an outlet pressure to see
what flowrate can be achieved.
• If minor changes (such as flowrates, pipe dimensions, and so on) have been made to a network,
use the Restart function. However, if structural changes (such as new pipes, wells deleted, inactive
branches reactivated and so on) have occurred, run the model from scratch, or use the -r Restart
option. See Restart Model (p.189).
• Before using the restart function, make a backup of the restart file (*p00.rst) in the model folder.
If the model fails to solve, the saved restart file can be used to make another attempt.
• Under normal circumstances, the default user estimates are satisfactory. However, if the model
has particularly extreme flowrates and or pressures, these should be entered in the User 
estimates dialog box.
• When first attempting to solve a large network, increase the convergence tolerance to 5% and
check the validity of the results. If necessary, the tolerance can later be reduced and the model
restarted.
• If a branch appears to be behaving strangely, or is ill conditioned, split it into smaller segments.
This aids troubleshooting and improves continuity along the branch.
• If the program crashes part way through an iteration with "file open" or "macopen" errors, this is
due to the processor running out of memory. Simply restart the model; the program will start from
where it left off. Use the PIPESIM toolbar Restart button in this case.
• Try to avoid having long flowlines and risers in the same branch.

Network Iterations
To configure Network iterations, select Setup » Iterations. The parameters are as follows:

Tolerance
The tolerance to converge the network model to. (Default 1%). A network has converged
when the pressure balance and mass balance at each node is within the specified tolerance.
The calculated pressure at each branch entering and leaving a node is averaged.
Max Iterations
The maximum number of iterations in which to try and determine a solution. The simulation
will stop after this number of iterations unless the tolerance has been met. (Default 100)

User Guide
157 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 175/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Background information
The network module uses a GNET algorithm to solve all networks. Reaching a solution involves
continually estimating and refining a matrix of results for each branch while simultaneously taking into
consideration the many sources of discontinuity within the network. These sources of discontinuity
include, dead wells, two phase vertical flow, critical flow, phase changes and flow regime boundaries.

Note: If there is no convergence after completing the specified number of iterations and the last
iteration performed is not the best solution, the solver performs another iteration to calculate the best
solution from all the iterations. The best iteration is based on where the maximum pressure and flow
rate residual errors are the lowest. PIPESIM publishes the data from the best iteration to the network
report. When there is no convergence, the report tool displays a warning message that the model did
not converge and it lists the tolerance that was achieved.

By default the tolerance for PIPESIM simulations is 1%. Mathematically this means that the simulation
will terminate when all of the root mean square errors for pressure and flowrate at nodes are less
than 1%. If you decrease this value then you are forcing the solver to do more calculations and
produce more accurate results. It should be noted, that for long chains of branches this error may
become cumulative, resulting in a much larger overall error across the network
By default the solver will complete a maximum of 100 iterations per simulation. If after 100 iterations
no solution meeting the required tolerance has been found then solver will stop and display existing
results. If you find that a particular system is not converging then, generally, it is best to relax the
tolerance rather than increase the maximum number of iterations.
The solver makes use of convergence techniques that are tuned to suit each individual problem.
These routines are based on well accepted mathematical theorems but modified to allow for the
discontinuities that might be generated by different flow correlations, as well as those originating from
the problem specification. However, as a result of the inherent difficulties associated with sources of 

discontinuity, you may

not at all. In these find that some
circumstances, the network simulations
table shown below isconverge slowly,
a guide to or insatisfactory
obtaining some rare cases,
convergence:

Problem Cause Solution

Oscillates about the solution Machine accuracy or other  Relax tolerance if intermediate
but does not converge limitation results is sufficiently accurate
Slow reduction in error  Discontinuity in chosen flow Use the results from a NOSLIP run
followed by a large increase correlation, not already as estimates for the simulation using
followed by slow reduction, trapped with the solver. the original correlation
and so on
 Alternating forward and Too many non-return valves Remove all non-return valves, except
reverse flow predicted in network in lines where reverse flow is
guaranteed.

User Guide
158 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 176/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Fluid Models
This dialog allows fluid models in a network model to be displayed, edited and sorted in a spreadsheet
type display. This allows you to view what fluid properties are used by all network wells or sources
without having to drill down to the individual fluid model screens.

Setup Fluid Models

The screen allows display and editing of black oil fluid models. If the network is using compositional
fluid models, the screen only allows viewing of fluid models being used and selection of either Global
or Local fluid models for sources.
The following can be edited:
Default / Local
Select whether to use the default (global) fluid model or the local fluid model defined for the
well / source.
Override Wcut/GOR
Select the check box to allow override of the fluid model water cut and gas fraction (GOR/
GLR/OGR/LGR).

Local fluid models

You can edit the following only for local fluid models:
Water Cut
fluid model water cut value.
GOR
fluid model gas fraction value, can be GOR, GLR, OGR or LGR.
Gas SG

stock tank gas specific gravity.

Water SG
stock tank water specific gravity.
Oil Gravity
stock (dead) oil density or API.
Dead Oil Visc
the dead oil viscosity correlation to use. Alternatively, specify User's Data.
Visc 1 & Visc 2
Two dead oil viscosity values. These values are read only if a dead oil viscosity correlation
is selected. If User's Data is selected, these two values are user specified.
Temp 1 & Temp 2
Two temperature values at which to define the dead oil viscosity values.

User Guide
159
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 177/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: If you attempt to edit a Global fluid model parameter from this screen, the Global fluid
model dialog boxes open. This is because changing the Global fluid model parameters affects all
other sources that are using the Global fluid.

1.5.3 View Options

To change these options, select View » Options. This opens the View Options dialog, which has
the following tabs.

View Properties tab

This controls background color and grid lines.

Background Color 
Double-click the color box to change the color. The default is white.

Grid Lines
The parameters are the following:
Draw Grid
turn the back ground grid on and off 
Horizontal spacing
distance between the horizontal grid lines (inn pixels) if the background grid is displayed.
Default =50.
Vertical spacing
distance between the vertical grid lines (in pixels) if the background grid is displayed. Default
=50.
Color 
Color of the grid line, if displayed. Double click the color box to change. Default light gray.

Objects tab

Identifiers
The options for object identifiers are as follows:
Leave Display unchanged
default
Show all identifiers
shows all object identifiers on the schematic
Hide all identifiers
Remove all object identifiers from the schematic

User Guide
160 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 178/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Tool Tip Options

You can switch off Tool tips. This is useful on a large model as having these enabled slows model
navigation.
Activate on mouse move

default
Activate on mouse click

Switch off 

Red box
Draw red box around incomplete objects
The red box warns the user that a parameter is incomplete. The default = on.

General Tab
This tab appears on most dialogs which show object properties.
Activate/Deactivate
turn the object off (that is remove it from the simulation)

Identifier 
The parameters are as follows:
Text box
the object's identifier. This cannot be more that 16 characters, must be unique and must not
contain any of the following characters: .\/[]{}<>|=?'" or spaces.
Bounding rectangle

this places a rectangle around the name

Show identifier 
this displays the object's identifier 
Back Color 
color of the bounding rectangle

Position
Screen coordinates of the object. The limits are as follows:
Top left
X= -2,101 Y= 2,089
Top right
X= 2,064 Y=2,084
Bottom left
X= -2,101 Y= -2,089

User Guide
161
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 179/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Bottom right:
X=2,064 Y=-2,0898

Viewing a large model

When the model is too large to fit on the screen, zooming out can change the view. To use the zoom
out feature, select View » Zoom Out or press Shift+X. This reduces the size of the objects
accordingly.
• To Zoom out to the maximum extent, use Shift+F or View » Zoom Full View.
• To Zoom in, use Shift+Z or View » Zoom In.
• To restore the original (default) view setting, use Shift+R or View » Restore View.

Viewing flowline data

To view the flowline descriptions for all flowlines, select Setup » Flowline Properties.... The data

displayed here can be changed. If the flowline has been defined using the detailed profile, the data
is grayed out.

1.6 Database
1.6.1 New ESP/Pump/Compressor Curve
The user curves are used to determine the performance of the device. The data is stored in an external
 Access database.
To define a new curve, do the following:

1. Set
fromthe
andevice type:
existing one.
ESP, Generic Pump or Compressor . The new device can be based on data

2. Enter the new manufacturer's name.

3. Enter the new model reference.
The defined curve can then be used in the ESP (p.212), pump (p.107), compressor (p.82), or 
expander (p.85) objects to define the performance. At this stage the actual operating speed, number 
of stages, and so on, can also be set.

ESP
For an ESP enter the following:
1. The ESP diameter 
2. Minimum allowable flowrate
3. Maximum allowable flowrate
4. Base speed that the curves are based upon, typically 60 Hz
5. Base stages that the curves are based upon, typically 1
6. Allowed stages. The stages that are recommended.

User Guide
162 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 180/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

7. Press Next to enter the curve data in terms of Flow rate, Head and Efficiency.

Generic Pump
For a Generic Pump enter the following:

1. Minimum allowable flowrate

2. Maximum allowable flowrate
3. Base speed that the curves are based upon, typically 60 Hz
4. Base stages that the curves are based upon, typically 1
5. Allowed stages. The stages that are recommended.
6. Press Next to enter the curve data in terms of Flow rate, Head and Efficiency.

Compressor/Expander 
For a Compressor/Expander enter the following:

1. Minimum allowable flowrate

2. Maximum allowable flowrate
3. % design speed that the curves are based upon, typically 100
4. The curves should be entered for a single stage device. Press Next to enter the curve data in
terms of rate, Head and Efficiency. Note the units.
5. Once the curve data has been defined, the device's performance curve can be displayed (and
printed).

New Reciprocating Compressor Curve

The user curves are used to determine the performance of the device. The date is stored in an external
 Access database. To define a new curve, do the following:
1. Enter the new manufacturer's name. The new device can be based on data from an existing one.
2. Enter the new model reference.
3. Enter the following:
• Base Speed
• Absolute Minimum Suction Pressure
• Absolute Maximum Suction Pressure
• Absolute Maximum Capacity

• Stages
• Interstage Temperature. The curves should be entered for a single stage device.
4. Press Next to enter the curve data in terms of Flowrate, Suction Pressure and Efficiency or Power 
for various Discharge Pressures, at least two are required. The Discharge Pressure you must
supply is the one at which the data for the associated curve is valid for. If the curve is valid for a
range of Discharge Pressures, then supply the compressor's maximum discharge pressure. Note
the units.

User Guide
163
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 181/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Once the curve data has been defined, the device's performance curve can be displayed (and
printed).
The defined curves can then be used within the compressor (p.82) object. Set the User curves option
and the compressor type to Reciprocating to define the performance. At this stage, the actual
operating speed and or minimum and maximum operating speeds can also be set.

User Curves
User curves allow the user to enter basic data to represent the following elements:
• Multiphase Booster 

ESP and Pumps

The ESP or pump is defined as curve that represents its performance over a range of operating
conditions. The following data are required:
• Manufacturer 
• Model
• Diameter (ESP only) - used only when a search is performed to locate items that fall within certain
ranges
• Min flowrate - minimum recommended flowrate. The performance curve can be constructed
outside of this range. Warning messages show where the operating point is outside this limit.
• Max flow rate - maximum recommended flowrate. The performance curve can be constructed
outside of this range. Warning messages show where the operating point is outside this limit.
• Base speed at which the performance curve is defined. This can be changed for the simulation.
• Base stages at which the performance curve is defined. This can be changed for the simulation.
• Allowed stages: The number of stages that can be used for this particular item.
• Performance curve
• Flow Rate - flow rate in flowing conditions (not stock tank)
• Head -
• Power - the power requirements
• The defined curve can also be viewed and printed.
The ESP (p.217) or curve can then be used in the simulation.

Compressors
The compressor is defined as a curve that represents its performance over a range of operating
conditions. The following data are required:
Manufacturer 
a new curve can be based on an existing model.
Model

User Guide
164
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 182/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Min flowrate
minimum recommended flowrate. The performance curve can be constructed outside of this
range. Warning messages will be provided where the operating point is outside this limit.
Max flow rate

maximum recommended
range. Warning flowrate.
messages The performance
will be provided curve
where the can bepoint
operating constructed outside
is outside of this
this limit.
Base Speed
speed at which the performance curve is defined. This can be changed for the simulation.
Performance curve
 A set (minimum of 3 points) of data comprising the following:
Flow Rate
flow rate in flowing (actual) conditions (not stock tank)
Head

compressor head.
Efficiency
adiabatic efficiency of the compressor.
The defined curve can also be viewed and printed.
The Compressor (p.82) curve can then be used in the simulation.
See also keywords (p.612)

Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESP) Selection

To simulate an ESP, PIPESIM maintains a database of manufacturers and models from which you
can select. For each model the diameter, minimum and maximum flowrate and base speed are
provided. A plot of the ESP's performance is also available. If the required ESP is not in the database,
you can easily enter the basic data required for it into the database using Data » New ESP/Pump/
Compressor . See Data/NewESP-Pump-Compressor Curve (p.162).

Overview of the Steps

1. To open the Tubing dialog box, double-click the tubing.
2. In the Artificial Lift section, select ESP for the lift type.
3. Click Properties .
4. Select the appropriate manufacturer and model.

5. To select a pump or add your data to the ESP Selection, click Advanced Select and enter your 
information.
6. Update the Design Data section and the Calculation Options section as necessary.
7. To change data on the Performance Table, click the Performance Table tab and enter the
appropriate information.
8. Click OK to save your changes.
9. To view the curves, click Standard Curves tab or Variable Speed Curves tab.

User Guide
165 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 183/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

You can export the data or print the curve.

Selection
When modeling an ESP, it is important that the correct size (expected design flowrate and physical
size) ESP is used. A search facility is available, based on these two parameters, to select the
appropriate ESP from the database. The search can, if required, be restricted to a particular 
manufacturer. Pumps that meet the design criteria will be listed.

Stage-by-stage modeling
Stage-by-stage modeling is selected by selecting the checkbox next to the calculate button.
 Alternatively by inserting Engine Keywords (PUMP STAGECALCS) (p.638) into the model, using the
EKT (p.84).

Install a Pump
Once the ESP manufacturer and model (p.212) has been selected from the database of common
ESP's (p.216) some parameters can be altered. The performance curves for each model are
(normally) based on a Speed of 60Hz and 1 stage.
Design data
Speed
The actual operating speed of the ESP
Stages
The actual number of stags of the ESP
Head factor 
 Allows the efficiency to be factored (default = 1)

Calculation Options
Viscosity Correction
 Allow a viscosity correction factor to be applied to take account of changes to the fluid
viscosity by the pressure and temperature.
Gas Separator present
 Allow a gas separator to be added (automatically) with an efficiency: Separator efficiency -
efficiency of an installed gas separator (default = 100% if installed)
Performance table
The data used to predict the performance of the ESP
Standard Curves
The standard performance curves for the ESP - can be printed/exported
Variable Speed Curves
Variable speed curves at 30 - 90 Hz.- can be printed/exported

ESP Design
The ESP option is selected from the Artificial Lift. To design an ESP the following stages are required:

User Guide
166 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 184/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Select a Pump (p.213)

Select a Motor (p.212)
Select a Cable (p.217)
The ESP should then be installed, added into the tubing, at the required depth. This can either be
performed manually or by using the Install button. Installing automatically removes any existing ESPs
in the tubing. However, any gas lift values or injections points are not removed.
See also: ESP [Reda] web site

ESP System Components: Cable

Cable Selection can be determined after a Pump and motor have been selected.
1. Motor/Cable Selection tab
2. Cable Selection
3. Select Cable
Cable Length
The length of the cable, can be modified
NP Current @ Design Frequency
The [Name Plate] Current at the design frequency. Cannot be changed.
Computed values

Selected Cable

Cable length

Voltage drop

Downhole voltage
Surface voltage

Total System KVA

Design Report
Display a report that details all the selected components of the ESP system.

Errors
Occasionally a pump may not be able to be determined and a Convergence error will be reported.
There could be a number of reasons for such an error and the user is advised to view the output

report.
Common problems:
1. The system cannot reach the outlet pressure specified. Try increasing the outlet pressure.

1.6.2 New PCP Curve

User defined curves are used to determine the performance of the device. Data is stored in an external
 Access database. (Setup Preferences  Choose paths)

User Guide
167 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 185/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

To define a new PCP curve, use one of the following methods:

• Create a new curve (p.168) by entering the information in the PCP Selection window.
• Select a PCP from the catalog (p.168) and edit the data.

Creating a New Curve

To create a PCP curve, do the following:
1. Select Data » New/Edit PCP.
2. Enter the new Manufacturer name.
3. Enter the new Model name.
4. Enter the Diameter.
5. Enter the Nominal Rate.
6. Enter the Base Speed.
7. Click Next .
8. On the Performance Table dialog box, enter the Head, Flowrate, Power, and Torque data for the
curve.
9. To view the standard curve, click Next.
10.If the variable speed curves were calculated, click Next to view them.
Once the curve data has been defined, you can display, export, or print the device's performance
curve at base speed or at variable speeds (when available). You can use the data within a PCP object.

Selecting a PCP from the Catalog

To select a PCP from the catalog and edit the information, do the following:
1. Select Data » New/Edit PCP.
2. Click Select PCP from Catalog.
3. When asked whether to continue because switching to the catalog will reset all unsaved data,
click Yes.
4. To edit the information on the page, click Copy to User Defined PCP.
5. Enter your changes.
6. Click Next.
7. Edit the information in the performance table, as necessary.
8. To view the curve, click Next.
Once the curve data has been defined, you can display, export, or print the device's performance
curve at base speed or at variable speeds (when available). You can use the data within a PCP object.

Standard PCP Curves

When entering the data for standard curves, enter the basic data.

User Guide
168 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 186/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PCP
The PCP requires a curve that represents its performance over a range of operating conditions. The
following information is required:
• Manufacturer 

• Model
• Diameter  
• Nominal Rate — maximum flowrate through a PCP at a specified speed and zero pressure
differential
• Base speed — testing catalog speed from the manufacturer. Users can input any different working
speed (normally in the range of 50–500 RPM), and PIPESIM calibrates the performance curves
correspondingly.
• Rod Diameter — used for top drive PCPs
• Performance curve
• Flow Rate — flow rate in flowing conditions (not stock tank)
• Head — increased pressure head in feet or meter 
• Power — the power requirements
• Torque — tendency of a force to rotate the PCP (moment of force)
• The defined curve can also be viewed, exported, and printed.

Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP) Selection

To simulate a PCP, PIPESIM maintains a database of manufacturers and models from which you
can select. If the required PCP is not in the database, you can enter the required data into the
database using Data » New / Edit PCP. See how... (p.167)

Overview of the Steps

1. To open the Tubing dialog box, double-click the tubing.
2. In the Artificial Lift section, select PCP for the lift type.
3. Click Properties .
4. Select the appropriate manufacturer.
5. Update the Design Data fields as necessary.
6. To edit the data on the PCP Selection and Performance Table tab, click Select PCP from
Catalog.

7. To save the model that you defined, change the name of the manufacturer and the model and
click Save.
8. On the Performance Table tab, update the data as necessary.
9. To see the standard curves, click the Standard Curves tab. You can export or print the data from
this tab.
10.To see the variable speed curves, click the Variable Speed Curves tab. You can export or print
the data from this tab.

User Guide
169
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 187/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

11.Click OK.

Selecting a Pump
Once the PCP manufacturer and model have been selected from the database of common PCPs,
you can alter some of the parameters. Typically, the performance curves for each model are based
on a Speed of 100 RPM.
PCP Design Data
The following parameters must be specified.
Speed
The speed at which the PCP is expected to run.
Top Drive
Specifies whether the drive is a top-drive or a bottom-drive. This is used for torque
calculations.
Rod Diameter 
Specifies the rod diameter (top drive only.)
Head Factor 
 Allows the pump head to be adjusted to better match field performance data or account for 
wear. The default is 1.

Calculation Option
Viscosity Correction
 Allows a viscosity correction factor to be applied to account for reduced slippage.
Gas Separator present

 Allows a gas separator to be modeled.

Separator Efficiency (%)
Specifies efficiency of the gas separator. The default is 100%.

Errors
If the PCP is modeled outside its intended operating range, warning or error messages will be
reported. For more details, please view the output report. (Reports » Output file)

1.6.3 Gas Lift Valve List

The database contains a list of available valves . You can add valves to this.
To add a valve to the database, do the following:
1. Select Data » New/Edit Gas Lift Valve....
2. The Gas Lift Valve database opens, for checking or editing. Click Add and enter values for the
following parameters :
• Manufacturer — the valve maker 
• Series — the valve series or model name (for example BK-1 valve)

User Guide
170 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 188/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Port Size — the diameter of the valve port

• Type — the valve type - IPO, PPO-N, PPO-S, Orifice or Dummy valve
• Outer Diameter — the valve outside diameter - valves are either 1" or 1 1/2"
• Port Area — the cross sectional area of the port
• Bellows Area — the cross sectional area of the bellows
• Discharge Coefficient — a discharge coefficient for the Thornhill Craver equation, used to
calculate valve gas throughput (given injection and production pressure)
• DP [Delta P] to fully Open — this is only needed for Diagnostics operation if the throttling
behavior of the valve is to be modeled. It is the difference between the production pressure
when the valve is fully open to fully closed (for a fixed injection pressure).
• Inactive — if this is Yes, the valve is not available for a new design
3. Save the new valve.

Note: To edit an entry, select it and click Edit.

1.6.4 Flow Control Valves

Down hole Flow Control Valves (FCVs) allow 'intelligent' or 'smart' wells to be modeled. The
methodology implemented provides a simple way of modelling single branch (that is non multilateral)
intelligent wells where the FCVs are located close to the reservoir.
FCVs can restrict the completion flowrate through the system, but they are only available for vertical
completions. By default, a completion does not have an FCV associated with it.
The purpose of an FCV is to provide a restriction to fluid flow, thereby reducing the productivity or 
injectivity of a given
there is nothing completion.
stopping They
you from are useful
adding one toinaasingle-completion
model containing multiple
model) tocompletions (although
distribute flow from
or to each completion in the desired manner.
 An FCV is very similar to a choke. Like a choke, it can be modeled as a fixed-size orifice, in which
form it presents a restriction to flow that results in a pressure drop that increases as flowrate increases.
Unlike a choke however, a maximum flowrate can also be specified: this is applied to the completion,
and if necessary the choke bean diameter is reduced to honour the limit. The choke diameter and
flowrate limit can be applied separately or together. If both are supplied, they are treated as maximum
limits.

How to add an FCV to a completion

To add an FCV to a vertical completion, do the following:
1. Select the Flow Control Valve check box in the Completion dialog.
2. Click the FCV Properties button.
3. The Flow Control Valve dialog opens.
4. Select Generic valve or Specific valve and enter values as described below:

User Guide
171
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 189/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Generic valve
Specify the Equivalent Choke Area, Gas and Liquid Flow Coefficients, and choice of Gas
Choke Equation method. The choke area can be omitted if a Maximum Flowrate is specified
(see below). If it is present, the FCV is modeled with that choke area, but if the resulting
flowrate exceeds the limit, the area is reduced to honor the limit.
Specific Valve
Choose from the list of available valves.To add a new valve to the database, use Data »
New/Edit Flow Control Valve Data. Select the required Manufacturer , Valve Type, and
Part Number . Many of the Specific Valves are multi-position devices: they allow the effective
choke area to be selected from a range of pre-installed fixed chokes. If a flowrate limit is
supplied, the simulation will select the choke position required to honor the limit. Since the
choke area cannot be calculated to match the limit exactly, this will usually result in the
flowrate being lower than the limit. The valve position must be specified. The FCV will be
modeled with the corresponding choke area, but if the resulting flowrate exceeds the limit, a
lower position number will be used. Valve positions are numbered in order of increasing
choke size, starting with position zero, which usually specifies a diameter of zero to allow the
valve to be shut. An FCV may have up to 30 positions.

1.7 Operations
1.7.1 Common Operations

Check model
 Allows all the data inputs and connectivity to be checked and verified before any simulation is
performed. No lone nodes are allowed in a single branch model. Any errors or omissions will be
reported.
To check a model, select Operations  » Check Model.

Run Model
The Run Model option validates the system, creates the necessary engine input files, and then runs
the model.
To use Run Model, do one of the following:
• Click the Run Model button in any of the operating mode dialog boxes that are accessed using
the Operations Menu.

• Select Operations  » Run Model .

• Click the Run model button on the toolbar.

User Guide
172 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 190/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Abort Run
This allows a simulation to be stopped immediately. This kills the engine process. However, if the
engine is being run via a batch file (p.155) this will only kill the batch process, not the engine. In this
circumstance, use Terminate Run (p.173).

To stop a simulation, select Operations  » Abort Run.

Terminate Run
This operation terminates a simulation in a tidy manner. A message is sent to the engine, which
terminates at the next convenient point.
Terminating the run using this method allows the engine to delete temporary files it has created.
Simply closing the simulation window or aborting the run (p.173) does not clean up these files, which
may eventually clutter up the hard disk.
To stop a simulation cleanly, select Operations  » Terminate Run.

1.7.2 Single Branch

System Analysis
Use the System Analysis operation to determine the performance of a given system for varying
operating conditions on a case-by-case basis. An example is Pressure or Temperature Profiles where
performance is evaluated on a point-by-point basis.

How to perform a System Analysis

To perform a system analysis, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. (p.32)
2. Select Operations  » System Analysis.
3. Set the Calculated Variable to Inlet Pressure (p.109), Outlet Pressure (p.109), Flowrate (p.110) or 
User Variable (p.188). If an unselected variable has an adjacent data-entry box, enter its value(s)
4. Choose the X-axis variable: this is a two stage process. First, choose the desired model
Object, by clicking on the down-arrowhead in the topmost combo-box in the X-Axis Values
column (just underneath the Range... button), and selecting one. Repeat this for the next lower 
combo box to choose a Sensitivity variable name. Check the units revealed in the next box, and
adjust if desired.
5. Add the desired values of the X-axis into the spreadsheet cells for the X-axis. To enter a range of 
values with a starting value, end value and incriment, use the “Range...” button.
6. (Optional) Select sensitivity variables (p.188) by repeating steps 4 and 5 for the columns marked
Sens Var 1, Sens Var 2, etc.
7. If one or more sensitivity variables are defined, choose how they should be combined with the X-
axis, by selecting a radio button in the Sensitivity Variables box at top right of the dialog. There
are three choices:
• Permuted against each other runs a case for every combination of X-axis and all sensitivity
variables. This produces a plot with most lines (and takes the longest time to run).

User Guide
173
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 191/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Change in step with Sens Var 1 runs a case for every combination of X-axis and Sens var 
1, with the remaining sensitivity variables following Sens var 1 in step. This produces a plot
with the number of lines equal to the number of Sens var 1 values.
• Change in step with X-axis runs a case for every X-axis variable value, with all sensitivity
variables following the X-axis in step. This produces a plot with just one line (and takes the
least time to run).
8. Select the Active check box for each sensitivity variable you want to use in this simulation.
9. Click Run Model.

Pressure/Temperature profile
Pressure or temperature profiles can be generated as a function of distance along the system. Both
temperature and pressure profiles are generated on a node-by-node basis for the system.
Perform the following basic steps to determine the pressure or temperature profile along the system:
1. Build the required model, pipeline tools (p.81) or well (p.42).

2. Select Operations  » Pressure/Temperature profile.

3. Determine the boundary condition to compute.
4. (Optional) Select and enter any sensitivity parameters.
5. Run (p.172) the operation.
6. Save the model (p.33).
The operation can be run in any of the following modes:
• Calculate inlet pressure (p.109) given outlet pressure and flow rate
• Calculate outlet pressure (p.109) given inlet pressure and flow rate

• Calculate flowrate (p.110) given inlet pressure and outlet pressure

• Calculate the value of a User Variable (p.188) given inlet pressure, outlet pressure and flow rate

How to perform a pressure or temperature profile

To perform a pressure or temperature profile, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. (p.32)
2. Select Operations  » Pressure/Temperature profile.
3. Select the property to calculate: inlet pressure (p.109), outlet pressure (p.109), flow rate (p.110),
or User Variable (p.188).
4. (Optional) Select sensitivity variable (p.188) and supply values for it.
5. Select the desired initial default profile plot. You may have either a pressure or temperature profile,
plotted against either total distance or elevation. This selection affects only the initial view of the
profile plot; once the operation is complete the plot may be changed to display any desired profile.

Note: If unified multiphase models are to be compared for all inclination angles, select “horizontal”
and change the swap angle to 90 degrees from horizontal. (Setup Flow Correlations)

User Guide
174
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 192/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

6. Click Run Model.

Flow correlation comparison

Use this operation to match test data against each multiphase flow correlation for a particular system,
to determine the most suitable correlation for each system model.

How to perform a flow correlation match

To perform a flow correlation match, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. (p.32)
2. Select Operations  » Flow Correlation Comparison.
3. Select the property to compute, inlet pressure (p.109), outlet pressure (p.109) or flowrate
(p.110). If the inlet pressure is the same as the pressure entered in a source object (completion
(p.360) or source (p.108)) it can be omitted.
4. Enter the measured data: pressure and/or temperature.

5. Select the type of correlation to examine; Horizontal or vertical.

6. Select the multiphase flow correlations to examine.
7. Click Run Model.
See also Other Variable (p.188).

Adjusting parameters to match measured data

 A better match can be achieved by automatically adjusting parameters (p.175) (such as flow
correlation factors).

Data matching
This option allows you to select parameters that will be automatically adjusted to match measur ed
data for a particular system.
See also User Variable (p.188) which can be used to select a single parameter that will be
automatically adjusted to match the boundary conditions.

How to perform a data match

To perform a data match, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. See how... (p.32)
2. Add and save measured pressure
{P  } Eq. 1.4
M  
and temperature
{T  M  } Eq. 1.5
data for your model. For tubing, data can be added using the Data menu. For flowlines and risers,
measured data can be added to the properties tab of the detailed view.
3. From the toolbar, select Operations  » Data matching.
4. Select up to five of the following parameters:

User Guide
175 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 193/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• U-value multiplier: multiplies all user defined u-values. It can only be selected if measured
temperature data is supplied.
• Vertical flow correlation friction factor. This can only be selected if measured pressure data is
supplied.
• Vertical flow correlation holdup factor. This can only be selected if measured pressure data is
supplied.
• Horizontal flow correlation friction factor. This can only be selected if measured pressure data
is supplied.
• Horizontal flow correlation holdup factor. This can only be selected if measured pressure data
is supplied.
5. Set limits for each parameter selected. Do not use extreme values, as these may cause
convergence problems. Suggested limits are as follows:
• 0.01 < U-value multiplier < 100
• 0.1 < Friction factor < 10
• 0.1 < Holdup factor < 2
6. (Optional) Select Flow Correlations. If flow correlations are not specified here, Data matching is
performed with the flow correlations specified using Setup » Flow Correlations.
7. Select the property to compute, inlet pressure (p.109), outlet pressure (p.109), or flowrate
(p.110). If the inlet pressure is the same as the pressure entered in a source object (completion
(p.360), source (p.108)), it can be omitted.
8. Select weight factors. If both pressure and temperature data have been specified then use the
weight factors w P  and w T   to set the relative importance of the pressure and temperature error 
terms. PIPESIM will minimize the total error term RMS  = w P  ⋅ RMS P  + w T   ⋅ RMS T  , where the
pressure error term is given by:
1 2
RMS P  = ⋅ Σ( P  − P M  ) Eq. 1.6
n P 
and the temperature error term is given by:
1 2
RMS T   = ⋅ Σ(T   − T  M  ) Eq. 1.7
n T  

9. Run (p.172) the model. The optimizer performs a number of PIPESIM runs, until it has minimized
the RMS  value. The accuracy of the optimization and the number of iterations allowed can be
controlled by using the OPTIMIZE (p.708) keyword, which can be entered using the Engine
Options (p.150) dialog.
For each set of flow correlations selected, two sets of results will be tabulated, an Initial run using
default parameters, and an Optimized run, using fitted parameters. The pressure, temperature
and total RMS values will be displayed.
10.Select the run that gives the best fit, by clicking on the run number in the left hand column. Then
click on the Save Selected Results. This updates the parameters in your model.

User Guide
176 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 194/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The run with the smallest RMS gives the best fit, but it is worth considering how far the
multipliers have been changed from their default value (1). A flow correlation where the multipliers
are close to 1 may be a better model than one where extreme values are needed to give a good
fit.

See also the OPTIMIZE (p.708) keyword.

Nodal Analysis
Nodal (or system) analysis in PIPESIM is defined as solving the total-producing-system by placing
nodes at the reservoir sand-face, the well tubing, the flowline and the separator.
 A node is classified as functional when a pressure differential exists across it. In nodal analysis, the
producing system is divided into two halves at the solution node. The solution node is defined as the
location where the pressure differential upstream (inflow) and downstream (outflow) of the node is
zero. This is represented graphically as the intersection points of the inflow and outflow performance
curves. Solution nodes can be judiciously selected to show the effect of certain variables such as
inflow performance, perforation density, tubing IDs, flowline IDs and separator pressures.
The solution node can be placed between any two objects, that is bottom hole (between completion
and tubing), wellhead (between tubing and choke), riser base (between flowline and riser), and so
on. Use the Nodal Analysis point (p.79) for this.

How to perform a Nodal Analysis

To perform a Nodal Analysis, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.32)
2. Build the well performance model (p.42)
3. Determine the Nodal Analysis point and insert the Nodal Analysis point (p.79) object into the model

(this is a node type object)

4. Select Operations  » Nodal Analysis.
5. Determine the inflow and outflow parameters.
6. Once in the Nodal Analysis Data screen, set the outlet pressure (p.109) and the maximum
flowrate (p.110) that the well will attain (this is to limit the outflow curves).
7. Set any limits (optional) using the Limits (p.178) button. Limit the extent of the resulting plot.
8. Select the Inflow and outflow sensitivity object and variables (p.188) and enter the data.
9. Run (p.172) the model.
10.Save the model (p.33).
11.Select Reports » Nodal Analysis to view the Nodal Analysis report.

Note: If a gas system is being modeled then the liquid loading (p.81) point, for each outflow curve,
will automatically be displayed.

User Guide
177 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 195/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Nodal Analysis Limits

Sets limits on the resulting Nodal Analysis plot.
• The maximum flowrate to be used (optional). This always applies to the outflow curves, and
optionally to the inflow curves, see below. If left blank, the outflow curves will extend to the
maximum AOFP of the inflow curves or to the Maximum Pressure limit (see below).
• Number of points on each inflow curve. Default = 20, maximum 200
• Number of points on each outflow curve. Default = 20, maximum 200.
• Rate Limit option for the inflow curves: these can either obey the maximum flowrate, or be allowed
to extend to the AOFP (the rate where the curve meets the X-axis).
• Pressure limit option for the outflow curves: these can either be limited to the Maximum Pressure
(see below), or be allowed to extend to the flowrate limit.
• Maximum pressure for outflow curves. If supplied, the outflow curves will extend to this pressure,
or the maximum rate, whichever gives the smallest curve. If left blank, a default value will be
assumed, this will be calculated at run-time to be the highest pressure on any of the inflow curves,
plus 50%. Either way, the pressure limit option (see above) can be used to make the limit be
ignored.

Operating Points
The intersection of one inflow curve and one outflow curve is known as an Operating Point.
 As of PIPESIM release 2010.1, the nodal analysis operation generates the operating points and
displays them on the plot.
While it is possible to infer the system flowrate geometrically from the line intersections alone, it is
more accurate and far safer to calculate the flowrate by simulating the system end-to-end, which
PIPESIM is well designed to do. The resulting pressure and flow rate is displayed on the Nodal
 Analysis graph as an Operating Point (usually a small circle marker). This explicit calculation ensures
the inflow and outflow fluid properties and temperature are identical, thus eliminating the possibility
of a mismatch and consequent error in answer interpretation.
Operating points are generated for each permutation from the lists of inflow and outflow sensitivity
variables. However, it is possible to set up the sensitivities so that some combinations are invalid,
and these do not result in operating points being generated and displayed. For example, if you set
both inflow and outflow sensitivity to the fluid watercut, most of the permutations will be invalid,
because the fluid at the intersection cannot have 2 different values for watercut. With Operating point
generation enabled, the valid intersections are clearly distinguishable from the invalid ones: operating
points will only be generated for "valid" combinations.
Sometimes it will happen that the displayed operating point does not coincide with the geometric
intersection. The cause of this will always be that the outflow fluid properties or temperature do not
match that of the operating point. The fact that the mismatch is evident should be regarded as a
feature, not a bug, and should alert the user to a problem or condition that requires particular caution
and attention.
With operating point generation enabled, the profile plot file will contain valid profile plots for each
operating point: these can be viewed by selecting Reports » Profile Plot. If you do not want operating
points to be generated, use the OPPOINTS= subcode of NAPLOT. (p.694)

User Guide
178 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 196/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Display Liquid Loading Point

The liquid loading point (p.359), for a gas system, is automatically displayed when a Nodal Analysis
(p.177) plot is requested. The liquid loading point will be displayed for all outflow curves.
The liquid loading point of a given tubing string is the point at which the reservoir energy is not capable
of overcoming the frictional and hydrostatic losses of the given tubing string as a function of wellhead
pressure. Liquid loading in a tubing string is identified when the corresponding Tubing Performance
Curve (TPC) slope approaches zero.
However, in low rate shallow gas wells with high LGRs, it becomes difficult to identify the "minimum
rate to lift liquids" in a given TPC plot. The Turner et al correlation can be used to identify the minimum
gas producing rate that is required to keep a well unloaded. This minima will, of course, be
approaching the "unstable flow point" of a given tubing configuration.

Horizontal length
Optimum Horizontal Well Length analysis accurately predicts the hydraulic wellbore performance in
the completion. It is an integral part of PIPESIM's reservoir-to-surface analysis.
The technique subdivides the horizontal completion into vertical cross-sections and treats flow
independently from other cross-sections. This multiple source concept leads to a pressure gradient
from the blind-end (toe) to the producing-end (heel), which, if neglected, results in over-predicting
deliverability. The reduced drawdown at the toe results in the production leveling-off as a function of 
well length. It can be shown that drilling beyond an optimum length would yield no significant additional
production.
Several Inflow Performance Relationships are available. These are solved with the wellbore pressure
drop equations to yield the changing production rate along the well length.

How to perform a Horizontal length optimization

To perform a Horizontal length optimization, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.32). This must include a horizontal well completion.
2. Select Operations  » Optimum Horizontal Well Length.
3. Set the outlet pressure and the completion lengths to examine.
4. Click Run Model.

Reservoir tables
The reservoir simulator interface allows you to create tabular performance data, to a file, for input into
a reservoir simulation model.
It is often necessary, for the purpose of reservoir simulation, to generate VFP curves for input to a
reservoir simulator program. The VFP curves supply the simulator with the necessary data to define
bottom hole pressure and tubing head pressures as a function of various parameters such as flow
rate, GOR or GLR (where applicable), watercut, surface pressure and the injection gas rate. Further 
choices of input parameters are available through the Expert mode. The effects of variations of up to
five parameters can be investigated and reported. Tabular data is then created in a format specific
to the reservoir simulator selected.

User Guide
179
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 197/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The reservoir simulator interface allows you to write tabular well performance data (in the form of 
bottom hole pressures) to a file for input into a reservoir simulation model. Currently, the following
reservoir simulators are supported:
• ECLIPSE
• PORES
• VIP
• COMP4
• MoRes (Shell's In-house simulator)
 All combinations of the variables input by you will be used to generate the tables.
You may wish to model networks in their reservoir simulator, by generating VFP curves items of well
tubing, flowline or riser. This may not result in an accurate model of the surface network as
temperatures at network connections will not be modeled correctly.
It is not recommended to generate system plots after running this operation. For system plots, system
analysis operation should be performed instead of reservoir tables.

How to create reservoir look-up tables

To create reservoir look-up tables, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.32). This should include a completion and tubing.
2. Build the well performance model (p.42).
3. Select Operations  » Reservoir tables.
4. Enter the data for the sensitivity variables.
5. Select the reservoir simulator.
6. Select well type if the model does not have any completion. Otherwise, injection well is selected
by PIPESIM if the model has a generic source or production well is selected if the model has no
generic source. The well type cannot be changed by the user when the model has a completion..
7. For ECLIPSE simulator, you can set the following additional options
a. For production wells, you can check the “additional temperature table” box to generate a
temperature VFP table in addition to the pressure VFP table.
b. If you would like to specify an elevation to be written in the VFP table, enter the user-specified
bottom hole datum depth in “User BH Datum Depth” input area. The input value cannot be
negative. (The default value in output VFP table is the total elevation change from inlet to outlet
if this area is left empty)
8. Enter the required data.
9. Click Run Model.
10.Save the model (p.33).
The resulting ASCII file can be used directly by the reservoir simulator. The file contains the data in
the required format with the following file names:
• For ECLIPSE simulator, the files are named <filename>.VFP<PROD|INJ>.<BHP|
TEMP>.<tabnum>.txt, where <filename> is the base model name, <PROD|INJ> indicates

User Guide
180 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 198/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Production or Injection well, <BHP|TEMP> indicates BHP or Temperature VFP table, and
<tabnum> is the table number to be included in ECLIPSE file.
• For other simulators, the files are named <filename>.t<tabnum>, where <filename> is the base
model name and <tabnum> is a two-digit table number.

Well Performance Curves

This operation creates a well [head] performance curve file. This file can be utilized in the network
model to represent the well's performance using the wells offline (p.39) option. This enables the
network to be solved faster.

How to create a well performance curve

To create a well performance curve, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.32).
2. Select Operations  » Well Performance Curves.

3. (Optional) Select
variable has to beup tobefore
set five sensitivity variables
the network (p.188). The actual value to use for each sensitivity
simulation.
4. Click Run Model.
 An ASCII file of <model name>.pwi is created in the model directory. This file can be utilized by the
well curves (p.39) feature in the Network module.

Gas Lift rate vs Casing head pressure

This operation calculates the gas lift injection rate and resulting production flowrate as a function of 
casing head pressure (that is, injection pressure).
The Gas lift injection rate and production rates are calculated over a user-specified range of casing
head pressures.
defined The
as the gas liftoperation assumes
injection point in thethe operating
tubing valve is an orifice and the injection depth is
description.
The result of this operation identifies the relationship between gas lift injection rate and casing head
pressure. This may be particularly useful for wells where the method of gas lift rate control may be
by adjustment of casing head pressure.
The resulting performance curve may also be used by ProdMan to provide casing head pressure
boundary conditions for gas lift allocation and optimization.

How to perform a Casing Head Pressure analysis

To perform a Casing Head Pressure analysis, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. (p.32)
2. Select Operations  » Gas Lift Rate vs Casing Head Pressure.
3. Enter the following data in the dialog:
• Tubing
System Outlet Pressure
pressure downstream of the last object in the model.

User Guide
181
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 199/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Gas Lift
Max Available Gas Rate
maximum quantity of lift gas that you want to inject.
Gas Temperature

lift gas temperature at the casing head

Orifice Diameter 
orifice diameter of the gas lift valve.
Cv
Cv of the gas lift valve
• Casing Head pressure
Min. Casing Head Pressure
minimum casing head pressure to use to determine the well's flowrate
Max Casing Head Pressure
maximum casing head pressure to use to determine the well's flowrate
Step Size
The flowr ate is computed from the minimum casing head pressure to the maximum
casing head pressure, in increments of this value.
4. Click Run Model.

Effect of gas lift rate on a well 

To analyze the effects of gas lift rate on the casing head pressure for a well, work through the following
basic steps:
1. Build the well performance model (p.42).
2. Ensure that the gas lift depth and gas lift quantity has been set.
3. Select Operations  » Gas Lift Rate vs Casing Head Pressure.
4. Enter the required parameters.
5. Run (p.172) the operation.
6. Save the model (p.33).

Artificial Lift System Performance curves

The Artificial Lift Performance operation analyzes the effects of artificially lifting the well (by gas
lift, ESP lift, or PCP lift). PIPESIM generates lift performance curves of gas lift injection rate, ESP
speed versus gross liquid flowrate, or PCP speed versus gross liquid flowrate from the standard
system model data. The performance curves can also be created with sensitivity analysis on various
parameters, such as wellhead pressure, watercut, tubing ID, and flowline ID. More details (p.190).

Wax Deposition
To access this area, select Setup » Wax Properties.

User Guide
182 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 200/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The following proprietary methods are available:

• Schlumberger DBR singlephase Method (p.187) - available to anyone using an additional license
• Schlumberger DBR multiphase Method (p.187) - available to anyone using an additional license
• Shell Method (p.184) - only available to Shell companies
• BP Method (p.185) - only available to BP companies
Wax Deposition Limits
These set limits for the wax deposition calculations. To access this area, select Operations  » Wax
Deposition and click Limits.

General 
The following options are available:
Start/Restart time
The starting/restarting time
Reporting interval
The interval between reporting steps. This can be set independently of the timestep size to
allow a number of timesteps to occur with no reported output, if desired. The timestep size
will be adjusted to ensure that one ends at each report interval, in order to allow the report
to be written.

Termination Mode
The simulation will finish when the first stopping criterion is met. The stopping criteria may be any of 
the following:
End time

The finish time for the simulation, if no other stopping criterion is met
Maximum Pig DP / Maximum Wax Volume
The maximum delta pressure available to push a wax removal scraper pig through the line.
The simulation will terminate early when sufficient wax has deposited to cause the specified
DP to occur.
Maximum Wax Thickness
 An upper limit in the thickness of the wax deposit anywhere in the system
Minimum Production
 A lower limit for system stock-tank liquid/gas/mass rate

Maximum System DP
 An upper limit on the Delta Pressure between system inlet and outlet

Timestep Calculation criteria

There is just one parameter currently:
Step size
The time step size

User Guide
183
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 201/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Shell Wax Method

Wax Properties Setup

To access this area, select Setup » Wax Properties and select Shell. The dialog allows you to
change data for prediction of wax in the model.

Wax Properties - required 

Density
Wax density (Must be supplied if the max. wax plug DP/max. volume stopping option is used.
Reasonable value: 55 lb/ft3)
Thermal Conductivity
Wax thermal conductivity. (Reasonable value: 0.15 Btu/hr/ft2/F)
 Yield Strength
The yield strength of the deposited wax. (Reasonable value: 0.3 psi).

CWDT (critical wax deposition temperature)

 A table of pressures and deposition temperatures may be supplied.
Rate model #
Deposition rate model number. Currently there is only one rate model, number 1.
Modeling Parameters
 A table of modelling parameters temperatures, coefficients A and B may be supplied.

Wax Deposition Limits

Sets limits for the wax deposition calculations.

General 
The following options are available:
Start/Restart time
The starting/restarting time.
Reporting interval
The interval between reporting steps. This can be set independently of the timestep size to
allow a number of timesteps to occur with no reported output, if desired. The timestep size
will be adjusted to ensure that one ends at each report interval, in order to allow the report
to be written.

Termination Mode
The simulation will finish when the first stopping criteria is met. The stopping criteria may be any of 
the following:
End time
The finish time for the simulation, if no other stopping criteria is met.

User Guide
184
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 202/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Maximum Pig DP / Maximum Wax Volume

The maximum delta pressure available to push a wax removal scraper pig through the line.
The simulation will terminate early when sufficient wax has deposited to cause the specified
DP to occur.
Maximum Wax Thickness
 An upper limit in the thickness of the wax deposit anywhere in the system
Minimum Production
 A lower limit for system stock-tank liquid/gas/mass rate.
Maximum System DP
 An upper limit on the Delta Pressure between system inlet and outlet.

Timestep Calculation criteria

Minimum step
The minimum time step size.
Relaxation parameter 
The relaxation factor for automated timestep adjustment. Must be a real number between 0
and 1 — higher values favour the new value, lower the old.
Step size
The time step size.
DP Factor 
Fraction of the pressure drop change allowed with the new timestep.
Minimum Dx
The minimum allowable increase in wax ID.
Set Dx
The maximum increase in wax ID.
HTC limit
Controls the application of the Heat Transfer Coefficient limit on the timestep size.

BP Wax Method

Wax Properties Setup

To access this area, select Setup » Wax Properties and select BP. This dialog allows you to change
or input data for prediction of wax in the model.

Wax Properties - required 

Conductivity multiplier 

 Yield Strength
Wax thermal conductivity. (Reasonable value: 0.15 Btu/hr/ft2/F)

User Guide
185 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 203/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Properties Filename
File that contains the wax properties data - *.thm file.
Diffusion Coefficient Method
Diffusion coefficient method. Can be:

• Wilke-Chang
• Hayduk-Minhas
• User-supplied (with a diffusion coefficient multiplier).
Diffusion Coefficient Multiplier 
Molecular Diffusion coefficient multiplier (number between 0.1 to 1).
Oil Fraction in Wax
Oil fraction in the wax (number between 0 and 1).
Roughness Multiplier 
Roughness multiplier (number between 0 and 1).
Shear Multiplier 
Shear reduction multiplier (number between 0 and 1) to simulate wax stripping.

Wax Deposition Limits

Sets limits for the wax deposition calculations.

General 
The following options are available:
Start/Restart time
The starting/restarting time.
Reporting interval
The interval between reporting steps. This can be set independently of the timestep size to
allow a number of timesteps to occur with no reported output, if desired. The timestep size
will be adjusted to ensure that one ends at each report interval, in order to allow the report
to be written.

Termination Mode
The simulation will finish when the first stopping criteria is met. The stopping criteria may be any of 
the following:
End time
The finish time for the simulation, if no other stopping criteria is met.
Maximum Pig DP / Maximum Wax Volume
The maximum delta pressure available to push a wax removal scraper pig through the line.
The simulation will terminate early when sufficient wax has deposited to cause the specified
DP to occur.

User Guide
186 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 204/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Maximum Wax Thickness

 An upper limit in the thickness of the wax deposit anywhere in the system
Minimum Production
 A lower limit for system stock-tank liquid/gas/mass rate.

Maximum System DP
 An upper limit on the Delta Pressure between system inlet and outlet.

Timestep Calculation criteria

Step size
The time step size.

Schlumberger DBR Wax Methods

Two methods are available; a single phase and a multi-phase method.
Schlumberger DBR wax deposition model (p.509)

Wax Properties Setup

To access this area, select Setup » Wax Properties and select Schlumberger . The dialog allows
you to change or input data for prediction of wax in the model.
• File that contains the wax properties data,- *.DBRWax file. This file is generated using a third party
package DRR Solids version 4.1 and above.
• Properties are read from the data file and can be viewed using a text editor. Properties can be
over written by entering values in the dialog. The use of multipliers can be switched on or off by
selecting the tick box.

Wax Properties Sensitivity 

It is possible to sensitize on some of the wax property variables when using the DBR wax deposition
models. For both single-phase and multiphase models, the following properties are available for 
sensitivity:

Sensitivity variable Acceptable range (min, max)

Shear reduction multiplier [–10 : 10]
Molecular diffusion multiplier [–10 : 10]
Oil fraction in wax [0 : 0.99]
Wax surface roughness [1E-8 : 0.99999] cm or [3.933701E-9 : 0.3937] inch

Wax thermal conductivity [0 : 10] W/m/K or [0 : 5.78035] BTU/hr/ft/F

For all the sensitivity variables given above, the default value used in the code is the one specified
in the .DBRWAX property file.
For the multiphase DBR wax deposition model, it is possible to sensitize on extra properties which
are:

Sensitivity variable Acceptable range (min, max)

User Guide
187 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 205/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Shear stress coefficient [-5 : 5]

Shear factor coefficient for porosity [-5 : 5]
Temperature factor coefficient for oil fraction [-5 : 5]
Liquid holdup coefficient [0 : 5]

Wax Deposition Limits

This dialog sets limits for the wax deposition calculations
Limits (p.183)

Sensitivity variables
One of the application's strongest benefits is its ability to perform sensitivity studies on a single or a
number of variables at a time.
To perform sensitivity:
1. Select the appropriate operation, (P/T profile, system analysis, and so on.)
2. From the component row, use the drop down list to select the object that the sensitivity is to be
performed on, that is System data, completion, flowline, and so on. The list of objects displayed
here will reflect the names of each individual object in the model.
3. From the variable row, select the variable from the chosen object, that is rate, well PI, flowline ID,
and so on. The list of variables displayed here will reflect the object chosen in step 2.
4. From the units row, select the units for the variable.
5. Enter the date for the variables from row 1. If a set of data is equally spaced, that is 5, 10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 35, then the Range button can be used. In this example enter, the start and end value and
the step size for example 0, 35, step 5 and press Apply.

6. To disable the data in a column, that is perform the operation but ignore a particular sensitivity
variable, then deactivate the Active check box for the required column.
7. Repeat the above process for all the required sensitivity variables.

User variable
In an operation, if you wish to specify all three of inlet pressure (p.109), outlet pressure (p.109) and
flowrate (p.110), you must also tell the engine how to achieve the specified outlet pressure. This is
done by defining the User Variable. This is similar to a sensitivity variable (p.188), but instead of 
requiring you to provide a series of values for it, its value is calculated as part of the simulation.
You must choose an object and a variable , whose value will have an effect on the system outlet

pressure.
chosen asFor
theexample, in a
object, and production
the well model,
Bean Diameter as thea variable.
choke positioned at and
Any object the wellhead could
any variable bebe
can
chosen, as long as you consider it will have an effect on the system outlet pressure.
You must specify the allowable maximum and minimum values for the variable, and the
proportionality relationship (that is, whether an increase in the variable's value causes an increase
or a decrease in outlet pressure). If  Direct is selected, the outlet pressure is assumed to be directly
proportional to the variable, and will increase with it; for example, the choke bean diameter would
behave like this. If Inverse is selected, the outlet pressure is assumed to be inversely proportional to

User Guide
188 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 206/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

the variable, and will decrease when the variable is increased. An example of this might be the
watercut of a black oil fluid in a production well: as watercut increases, the well's static DP increases
and hence its outlet pressure decreases.
Sometimes, depending on the choice of object and variable, the proportionality relationship can be
difficult to predict. For example if Tubing Inside Diameter is used in an oil production well, you would
expect outlet pressure to increase as diameter is increased, when starting from a small diameter 
value. However, once the diameter exceeds a certain critical value, the well will probably start to suffer 
from excessive liquid holdup, causing the outlet pressure to decrease. In this situation the simulation
may have two solutions, one with a small ID, another with a much larger ID. The choice of 
proportionality relationship allows you to pick the solution you want. However, also in this situation,
the simulation may have no solution; this will happen if the specified outlet pressure is too big.

1.7.3 Network Operations

Restart Model
This is only available in the Network module. See also Engine preferences (p.155), Speed up the
calculation engine (p.156) and Addressing Network speed issues. (p.511)

Note: The model can be restarted in the following ways:

• Use the Restart button .

• Use the Run button and set the networ k engine advanced Command Line Parameters (see
Engine preferences (p.155)) as follows:

• -r : Restart but do not keep branches skipped in the restart file permanently skipped.
• -R : Restart but permanently skip all branches skipped in the restart file (this is the default
PIPESIM behavior)
When a Network simulation finishes, the final solution results are stored in a restart file. If the model

is restarted (as opposed to rerun), these final results are used as the starting point for the run,
instead of the initial estimates (p.41).
The default restart function in PIPESIM restarts the model by keeping all skipped branches
permanently skipped. So if the user has deactivated a branch, run the model, and reactivated the

branch again before using the Restart button , the deactivated branch remains deactivated.
Running a network model by using Restart , as opposed to Run, should also speed up the solution.
However, the follow limitations apply:
• If the model has changed significantly (for example, a well was added, or a branch or node was
de- or re-activated), the use of Restart may actually slow down the simulation. In addition, the user 
should pay attention to the restart option used (-r or -R).

User Guide
189
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 207/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• If minor changes have been made to a network (for example, a flowrate or pipe dimension change),
Restart should provide a faster convergence than a normal run.
• If the program crashes part way through an iteration, or the model does not solve in the allowed
number of iterations, or the run is terminated prematurely by user intervention or other system
error, the Restart function can be useful. The model can simply be restarted and the program will
start from where it left off. Use the Restart button on the PIPESIM toolbar in this case.

Well Optimization
This section provides information on the gas lift optimization functionality of PIPESIM.
This functionality allows an oil field to be optimized in terms of day-to-day oil production for gas lifted
wells. In addition well, manifold and field constraints can be taken into account.
Please select Help » Well Opt. Help for further information.

1.8 Artificial Lift analysis

Perform the following basic steps to analyze the effects of artificial lift on a well:
1. Build the well performance model (p.42).
2. Ensure that the gas lift or ESP lift depth has been set.
3. Select Operations » Artificial Lift Performance.
4. Select the sensitivity parameters.
5. Run (p.172) the operation.
6. Save the model (p.33).

1.8.1 How to create artificial lift performance curves

To create an artificial lift performance curve, do the following:
1. Create and save your model (p.32): include a tubing object and one or more artificial lift points
( Injection points (p.75), gas lift valves (p.75) or ESP (p.212)).
2. Select Operations  » Artificial Lift Performance.
3. Set the outlet pressure (p.109).
4. (Optional) Select sensitivity variables (p.188).
5. Select the Artificial lift method, Gas or ESP, and set the appropriate data.
6. Run (p.172) the model.

1.8.2 General Gas Lift

This is the process of raising or lifting fluid from a well by injecting gas down the well through the
tubing, casing, annulus, or riser. Injected gas aerates the fluid to make it exert less pressure than the
formation does; the resulting higher formation pressure forces the fluid out of the wellbore. Gas may
be injected continuously or intermittently, depending on the producing characteristics of the well and
the arrangement of the gas lift equipment.

User Guide
190 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 208/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: PIPESIM models the continuous injection process only. For details on Artificial Lift, see the
web site.

PIPESIM has two methods for modeling gas lift systems:

Gas Lift injection points
this uses fixed injection depths and injection rates. It is assumed that the quantity of lift gas
requested is fully injected into the production string at the specified depth(s) and takes no
account of the available injection gas pressure.
Gas Lift Valve System
the actual gas lift valve depths are specified. For normal PIPESIM operations, gas is injected
at the specified rate at the deepest possible valve depth (taking into account the available
injection pressure). For the Gas Lift Diagnostics operation only, the actual gas throughput
for each valve is calculated, based on the injection pressure, production pressure, valve
details, and valve status For this operation, details of the gas lift system are required (valve
size, Ptro, and so on). The valve throttling response (based on the bellows load rate of the
valve) is modeled.
PIPESIM allows the following modes of operation:
• Deepest Injection Point (p.191)
• Lift Gas Response (p.193)
• Bracketing (p.192)
• Gas Lift Design (p.194)
• Gas Lift Diagnostics (p.207)

Gas Lift Operations - Deepest Injection Point

This operation computes the Deepest Injection Point [DIP] and the expected production rate, based
on the data entered. To run it, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Deepest Injection Point.
Set the Outlet Pressure to the pressure downstream of the last object in the model.
The input parameters are as follows:
Injection Gas Rate
injection gas rate
Injection Gas Surface Pressure
gas injection pressure at the surface
Injection Gas Surface Temperature
gas injection temperature at the surface
Injection Gas Specific Gravity
specific gravity of gas
Minimum Valve Injection DP
pressure drop across the valve

User Guide
191
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 209/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Max Allowable Injection TVD

a limit on the depth at which injection can occur 
Annular Gas Pressure Design Gradient Method (p.211)
Choose from the following options:

• Use static gradient — the default

• Use Rigorous Friction and Elevation DP
Gas Injection Depth
Choose from the following options:
• Optimum Depth of injection — gas injection can occur at any depth in the wellbore
• Injection at Valve Depths only — gas injection is restricted to the specified valve/mandrel depths
only, as defined in the model tubing description.
Use the buttons as follows:
• Calculate computes the liquid flow rate, pressure profile and the Deepest Injection Point.
• Copy copies the pressure profile to the clipboard.
• Print prints the pressure profile.
• Summary File displays the PIPESIM standard summary file.
• Output File displays the PIPESIM standard output file.

Gas Lift Operations - Bracketing

This operation computes the Deepest Injection point [DIP] and the expected production rate, based
on the data entered for a minimum and maximum set of conditions. (Normally the minimum and
maximum set of production rate conditions, now and at some time in the future).

The minimum and maximum conditions are used to compute the flowing pressure profiles for the two
cases, and therefore the deepest possible injection depths for the two sets of conditions.
The flowing pressure profiles are computed from the given outlet pressure and flow rates (and GLR
and Watercut). Unlike the other Gas Lift operations, here the model reservoir pressure and IPR are
not used to determine the flowing pressures or flow rates.

To run the operation, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Bracketing .

Set the Outlet Pressure to the pressure downstream of the last object in the model.
The input parameters are as follows:
Injection Gas Surface Pressure
gas injection pressure at the surface
Injection Gas Surface Temperature
gas injection temperature at the surface
Injection Gas Specific Gravity
specific gravity of gas

User Guide
192 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 210/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Minimum Valve Injection DP

pressure drop across the valve
Max Allowable Injection TVD
a limit on the depth at which injection can occur 

Annular Gas Pressure Design Gradient Method (p.211)

There are two options: Use Static Gradient (the default) and Use Rigorous Friction and
Elevation DP
The Bracketing Input section shows the minimum and maximum data for:
• Q: Liquid Flow rate
• GLR or Gas Injection rate [Qgi]
• WCUT: Water cut
Use the buttons as follows:
• Calculate computes pressure profiles and the Deepest Injection Points for the two cases.
• Copy copies the pressure profile to the clipboard.
• Print prints the pressure profile.
• Summary File displays the standard summary file.
• Output File displays the standard output file.

Gas Lift Operations - Lift Gas Response Curves

This operation computes the response of the gas lift system to changes in any variable. You can
select a range of gas lift rates and a set of sensitivity values. The resulting gas lift response curves
show how the production rate and possible gas injection depth vary as a function of injection rate and
the sensitivity parameter.
Use this operation to investigate how the well responds to various parameters before proceeding with
a gas lift design.

To run the operation, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Lift Gas Response.

The parameters are as follows:

Outlet Pressure
pressure downstream of the last object in the model.
Minimum Valve Injection DP
pressure drop across the valve.
Injection Gas Surface Temperature
gas injection temperature at the surface.
Max Allowable Injection TVD
a limit on the depth at which injection can occur 
Inj Gas SG
injection gas specific gravity

User Guide
193
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 211/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Annular Gas Pressure Design Gradient Method (p.211)

There are two options: Use static gradient (default) and Use Rigorous Friction &
Elevation DP.
Sensitivity Data

Perform sensitivity on any parameter in the model

Gas Injection Depth
Choose from the following options:
• Optimum Depth of injection — gas injection can occur at any depth in the wellbore
• Injection at Valve Depths only — gas injection is restricted to the specified valve/
mandrel depths only, as defined in the model tubing description
Injection Gas rate
a range of injection gas rates
Use the buttons as follows:

• Run Model computes the liquid production rate, and the (deepest) injection depths for the
specified range of gas injection rates and sensitivity parameters.
• System Plot displays the system plot.
• Summary File displays the PIPESIM standard summary file.
• Output File displays the PIPESIM standard output file.

Gas Lift Design

The Gas Lift Design (GLD) feature allows detailed design of the location and type of valves to insert
into the tubing to maximize the potential of the well. A gas lift design can be conducted for the
following:
• An existing mandrel spacing (Current Spacing )
• To create a new mandrel spacing (New Spacing )

Data Entry
To run the operation, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design. This opens a dialog with
the following tabs:
• Design Control (p.195)
• Design Parameters (p.200)
• Safety Factors (Design Bias) (p.201)
Project Data Gas Lift Design - Summary (p.205) (this is only displayed after a successful design has
been created).

Gas Lift Design

To perform a Gas Lift Design, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. See how... (p.32)
2. Select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design.

User Guide
194
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 212/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3. Set the required data (p.194).

4. Select Perform Design.... A redesign can be performed after the design has been created.

Design Control
To set the following parameters, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design and select the
Design Control tab.

Design Spacing 
Select from the following options:
New Spacing
calculate a new mandrel spacing for the well as part of the gas lift design and overwrite
(without prompting) any existing valve settings.
Current Spacing:
use the existing mandrel spacing as defined in the PIPESIM model and calculate appropriate
valve parameters.

Design Method 
The three following design methods are available (two for IPO design and one for PPO design):

User Guide
195 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 213/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Uses a user specified fixed surface close (injection) pressure drop between valves.

User Guide
196 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 214/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Uses a calculated surface close (injection) pressure drop between valves (with user specified

minimum).

User Guide
197 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 215/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Uses a transfer gradient based on user entered Surface Offset and Operating Valve DP values.
Normally used for design with production pressure operated (PPO) valves.

Surface offset 
Either a percentage of the difference between the operating production (wellhead) pressure and the
surface injection pressure, or a DP value (added to the wellhead pressure). The transfer gradient
used for design is then a straight line drawn between the surface offset and the operating valve DP
(at the operating valve location). .

Operating Valve DP 

The difference between the injection pressure and the production pressure at the operating valve
location.

User Guide
198 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 216/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Top Valve Location

This is used as the basis for spacing the top unloading valve. The options are as follows:
Assume Liquid to Surface
 Assumes that liquid is present in the wellbore to the surface.
Assume Liquid NOT to Surface
 Assumes that a liquid level exists, based on the static bottom hole pressure and static
gradient.
Well Absorbs Fluid
If this check box is selected, this assumes that the reservoir can readily absorb fluid from the
wellbore, thus maintaining a constant tubing liquid level during unloading. If it is not selected,
it is assumed that the reservoir cannot absorb any fluid which is unloaded from the annulus
to the tubing.

Valve Selection Filter 

You
and can select the port
the minimum valvediameter
manufacturer,
for the type of valve
design. The to assume,
filter valve
selects size (nominal
the appropriate OD),from
valve valvethe
series,
gas
lift valve database. The appropriate valve parameters (port/bellows dimensions and so on.) will be
used for the design. You can enter new valves into the PIPESIM database if required. Note that the
type of valve selected (IPO or PPO) determines the default safety factors and calculation of open /
close points.

Unloading Temperature
You can select whether to use the expected final production temperature, the ambient (geothermal)
temperature, the injection gas temperature or the calculated unloading production temperature for 
the valve test rack pressure determination. You can select a different option for the top valve and for 
other valves. You can make a first pass for design based on one of these temperature profiles and
then edit the temperature values for any of the valves on the design summary screen and recalculate
the test rack pressures (using the Re-Design (p.205) option).

Max. Allowable Inj. TVD

This depth (true vertical) is taken as the maximum depth for valve placement in the spacing
calculations. Normally this should be about 100 ft above packer depth.

Production Pressure Curve

Select a flowing production pressure curve to use for the design, one of the following:
Production Pressure Model

uses the objective

the target injection flowing
gas ratepressure
injectedgradient calculated
at the operating withlocation
valve the PIPESIM model, assuming
(default).
Equilibrium curve
calculates and uses an equilibrium curve based on the target gas injection rate in the model.
The equilibrium curve is a curve of the expected flowing pressure at any depth, assuming
gas lift is being injected at that depth at the target gas injection rate.
Perform Design (p.204)

User Guide
199
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 217/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Gas Lift Design - Summary (p.205)

Note: The summary is only displayed after a successful design has been created.

Design Parameters
To set these parameters, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design and select the Design
Parameters tab. The parameters are as follows:
Kickoff Pressure
Maximum possible injection pressure to kick off the well. Used for top valve placement only.
Operating Injection Pressure
The maximum available injection pressure to be used for the design calculation.
Unloading Production Pressure
Minimum possible production (wellhead) pressure during unloading. Used for placement of 
top valve only.
Operating Production
The expected production (wellhead) pressure. Used to calculate the production pressure
curve.
Target Inj. Gas Flowrate
The target injection gas flowrate for design. Used to calculate the production pressure curve
and operating valve sizing. Note that the effect of gas injection flowrate on well performance
can be investigated with the PIPESIM model using the Lift Gas Response Curves operation.
This should give you an understanding of the gas lift performance of the well and enable
determination of the optimum target gas injection flowrate.
Inj. Gas Surface Temperature
The surface temperature of the injection gas. Used to determine the injection gas temperature
profile.
Inj Gas Specific Gravity
Injection gas specific gravity. Used to determine injection gas pressure profile.
Min Unloading Liq rate:
The design includes calculation of the unloading liquid and gas injection rates for the
unloading valves. You can specify the minimum unloading liquid rates for unloading.
Unloading Gradient
Gradient of the well fluid for unloading and spacing calculation.
Minimum Valve Spacing
Minimum distance for valve spacing (TVD). Valves will not be placed deeper if they are
spaced closer than this value.
Minimum Valve Inj DP
Minimum difference between injection and production pressure required for valve placement.
Valves will not be placed deeper if the pressure difference is less than this value.

User Guide
200 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 218/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Solution Point Rate/Fixed rate

Use either a specified liquid production flowrate or a specified reservoir pressure in the
calculation of the Production Pressure Curve (the remaining property will be computed).
Reservoir Pressure

Static reservoir pressure used in the model. (The liquid production rate is calculated).
Liquid Production Rate
The desired liquid production rate. (The reservoir pressure and inflow is ignored).
Bracketing
Select Enable bracketing Options to view the following options, which control the
bracketing interval for placement of bracketing valves:

Note: The type of bracketing valves depends on the type of operating valve.

• Max TVD — the maximum depth for bracketing valves

• Spacing — distance for bracketing valve spacing (TVD)
Annular Gas Pressure Design Gradient Method (p.211)
Select one of the following:
• Use static gradient — the default
• Use Rigorous Friction and Elevation DP

Safety Factors (Design Bias)

To set the following parameters, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design then select the
Safety Factors (Design Bias) tab:

Surface Close Pressure Drop Between Valves

[IPO valves only] Safety factor normally used for Injection Pressure Operated (IPO) valves
only. Surface close (injection) pressure drop for each successive valve down hole to ensure
valve above closes. For IPO Surface Close method a fixed value is used for all valves. For 
Pt Min/Max method it is the minimum value since the design process will calculate this value.
Default value for injection pressure operated valves is 15 psi.

Note: PPO Design does not use this safety factor.

Locating DP at Valve Location

Safety factor normally used for both injection pressure operated and production pressure
operated valves. This is an offset from the injection pressure line to the start of the transfer 
(unloading) line at each valve location. Default value for injection pressure operated valves
is 50 psi. and default for production pressure operated valves is 100 psi.

User Guide
201
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 219/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Transfer Factor 
[IPO valves only] Safety factor normally used for injection pressure operated valves only.
This is an offset from the production pressure line to the start of the transfer line (transfer 
point) at each valve location This can be entered as a percentage of the difference between
the production pressure and injection pressure at each valve location or as a percentage of 
the production pressure. Default value is zero.

Note: PPO Design does not use this safety factor (the transfer gradient is itself a transfer 
safety factor).

User Guide
202 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 220/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Place Orifice at operating valve location

Select this check box to use an orifice in the operating valve location. You can then edit the
default Discharge Coefficient for Orifice (used for gas throughput calculations).
Subtract delta P from Ptro at Operating Valve Location
If the operating valve is an IPO or PPO valve, you can elect to subtract a delta P from the
calculated Ptro value for this valve (flag the valve). This causes an additional injection
pressure drop at this valve during unloading. Default value is zero.
Place IPO valve at Operating valve location
[PPO Design only] For a PPO design, you can opt to place an IPO valve in the operating
valve location.

User Guide
203
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 221/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Project Data
Data that relates to the current project. This will be displayed on the Gas Lift Design report.

Perform Design
 After selecting Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Design, enter data on the Design Control (p.195) ,
Design Parameters (p.200) and Safety Factors (p.201) tabs. The data are used to design the gas lift
system; see minimum data set (p.204).
When all data is present, click the Perform Design button. The following calculations are performed
using the design data and selected design method:
• The objective production pressure curve is generated.
• The mandrel depths are calculated for New Spacing. For Current Spacing, the specified mandrel
depths (in the tubing description) are used.
• The valve port sizes are calculated. The valve port size is selected to pass the unloading gas rate
for the unloading valves and the target gas rate for the operating valve. If no unloading calculations
are possible (no inflow means that the well does not flow), the minimum port size for the series is
selected by default.
• The unloading injection gas requirement and unloading liquid rates are calculated (by nodal
simulation) for each valve station. Also, the maximum possible gas throughput for each valve is
calculated.
• The valve open pressures, close pressures and test rack open pressures (Ptro) are calculated.
The depth of the operating valve is determined when any of the following conditions is met:
• the position of the next unloading valve would be closer than the minimum valve spacing criterion
• the injection pressure minus the production pressure is less than the Minimum Valve Injection DP
• the Maximum Allowable Injection TVD is reached.
If the Bracketing option was selected, bracketing valves are placed below the operating valve down
to the specified max TVD at the specified bracketing spacing. If the operating valve is either an orifice,
a flagged valve, or an IPO valve in a PPO design, the bracketing mandrels are assumed to contain
dummy valves.
When the design calculations are complete, a summary sheet (p.205) is displayed. On this some
valve data can be changed and a re-design (p.205) performed if required.
The standard Gas Lift design graph (Pressure versus Depth plot) and report can also be displayed
and printed.
Once the design has been verified, it can be transferred to the well model using the Install Design
button.

Minimum Data Set

The minimum data set required to perform a gas lift design is the following:
• Target Injection Gas Flowrate
• Injection Gas Surface Temperature
• Injection Gas Specific Gravity

User Guide
204
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 222/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Operating Prod. Pressure (Flowing tubing head pressure).

• Available Injection Pressure.
In addition, a well model is required, This must contain at least a completion (reservoir), tubing icons,
and a valid fluid model.

Perform Re-Design
You can edit certain parameters in the Gas Lift Design summary sheet (p.205) and perform a
redesign of the gas lift system.
You can edit the following fields:
• Valve Depth (if the Edit Depth check box is selected).
• Valve Model and Port size (if the Edit Valve check box is selected).
• Valve Temperature (if the Edit Temp check box is selected).
To change the valve model and/or port size:
1. Double-click the valve to change out.
2. The gas lift valve (p.75) database opens. You can filter for certain types of valves using the
Filter parameters on the right hand side.
3. Double click the required valve. It is placed in the summary field.
 After changing any parameter, click on the Perform Re-Design button to recalculate the design
parameters to reflect the changes.

Note: Only the parameter which has its check box selected remains unaltered. Any other parameters
may be changed by the design process. It is therefore recommended that you change only one
parameter at a time and then perform a redesign.

In this way you can modify the initial gas lift design, for example in the following ways:
1. Reset the valve temperatures for each valve and recalculate test rack pressures.
2. Manually reset the design mandrel depths.
3. Replace the operating valve with an orifice valve or other valve.
4. Replace unnecessary valves with dummy valves.
5. Manually re-size upper valves (port sizes) to user preferred port sizes.
The standard Gas Lift Design graph (Pressure - Depth plot) can also be displayed and printed.
Once the design has been verified, transfer it to the well model using the Install Design button.

See also: Perform Design (p.204)

Gas Lift Design - Summary
This summary screen is displayed after the Perform Design operation is successfully executed. Use
it allows to review and/or change the design, or perform a Re-Design (p.205) or a diagnostic.

User Guide
205 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 223/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Proposed design

Valves and design parameters

This table lists the proposed valves and their design parameters, as follows:
• Valve depth (MD or TVD).
• Valve series
• Port Size - the valve port size is selected to pass the unloading gas rate for the unloading valves
and the target gas rate for the operating valve. If no unloading calculations are possible (no inflow
- well does not flow), then the minimum port size for the series is selected by default.
• Ptro - test rack open pressure.
• Open Pressure at Surface (for IPO design only).
• Close Pressure at Surface (for IPO design only).
• Pdome - Valve dome pressure at depth (for PPO design only).
• Open Pressure at Depth (for PPO design only).
• Gas Rate (Unloading) - injection gas rate required to unload the well to the transfer point (Not
calculated if no inflow from the reservoir).
• Unloading Liquid Rate - calculated liquid unloading rate at the transfer point. (Not calculated if no
inflow from the reservoir).
• Max Valve Throughput - maximum rate that can be passed through the valve given the injection
pressure, production pressure and port size.
• Valve Temperature - Valve temperature used for Petro calibration.
• Injection Pressure Drop - surface close injection pressure drop between valves.
• Cd - discharge coefficient (from the valve database).
• Valve Choke (optional) - can be used if chokes are placed in valve ports.

Buttons
The following buttons are available:

 Add (Valve Lookup)

To add a valve from the database to the design valve table, click Add.(Valve Lookup) .. (p.77). The
valve will be added to the bottom of the current list.
To add [change out] a valve at a particular depth:
1. Select the Edit Valve check box.
2. Double click the cell under Valve Series or Port Size that corresponds to the required depth.

Edit Selected Valve

Use this to edit the selected valve. (This is only possible if the Edit Valve check box is selected.)

Remove Selected Valve

Use this to remove the selected valve. (This is only possible if the Edit Valve check box is selected.)

User Guide
206 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 224/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Perform Re-Design
Use this to change some parameters and perform a Re-Design of the system.
Re-Design is only possible if one of the following parameters is edited in the summary screen:
• Valve Depth ( the Edit Depth check box must be selected)
• Valve Series or Port size (the Edit Valve check box must be selected)
• Valve Temperature (the Edit Temp check box must be selected)

Graph
Click Graph... to display the traditional Gas Lift Design graph (Pressure versus Depth plot). This can
also be printed

Report 
Click Report... to produce a Gas lift Design report. This can be printed.

Install Design
Click Install Design to install the proposed design in the current tubing description. This overwrites
any gas lift valves already in place for this well.

Target Operating Injection Pressure

This is computed from the design. It can be used, or modified, for the diagnostics operation.

Run Diagnostics
Performs gas lift diagnostics (p.207) on the current gas lift valve system with the operating injection
pressure specified.

Gas Lift Diagnostics

This operation performs a simulation of the gas lift system. It calculates (simulates) the status and
actual throughput for each valve, based on the simulated injection and production pressures. To run
it, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Diagnostics.
The valve status can be closed, throttling or fully open. The valve performance characteristics take
into account the throttling response of the valves. The throttling response is based on the bellows
load rate of the particular valves.
The diagnostic simulation is iterative. The throughput of each valve depends on the simulated
injection and production pressures (in addition to valve characteristics). However, the simulated
production pressure itself depends on the throughput of each valve. Therefore the system is solved
iteratively.
The assumed conditions for the diagnostic simulation are as follows:
• The operating injection pressure, taken from the design result.
• The operating production pressure, taken from the design input.
• The operating reservoir pressure, taken from the design input.
• The valve positions and parameters, taken from the design summary.

User Guide
207 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 225/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 All other model parameters are as defined in the model.

The diagnostic results are displayed graphically on a pressure-depth plot. The valve status is shown
on the left hand well schematic as red if closed or green if open (or throttling). To view the valve
details, place the cursor over a valve on the well schematic.
Gas Lift Diagnostics calculates the injection rate and the maximum injection rate for the valves by
using the Thornhill-Craver equation. Total gas lift rates are shown in the Rates section below the well
schematic. This shows the following:
• Measured — the target gas injection rate
• Calc — the value calculated when Diagnostics is run
• %Max — the ratio of the calculated flow rate to the maximum flow rate, expressed as a percentage
To view the detailed results in tabular form, click Data Sheet... .

Gas Lift Diagnostics

This operation determines which valve or valves a gas lift system is lifting from. It creates a well

performance curve. To use this feature a Gas Lift (p.194) system must have been installed.
How to create a well performance curve
To create a well performance curve, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. See how... (p.32)
2. Select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift diagnostics.
3. Enter the required data (p.200).
4. Run (p.194) the diagnostics.

Gas Lift Diagnostics Data

The following parameters are required by the Diagnostics operation:
Outlet Pressure
system outlet pressure (usually wellhead pressure).
Operating Injection Pressure
actual injection pressure.
Target Gas Lift Rate
estimated (measured) gas lift injection rate. This value will be calculated by the diagnostics
routine (based on the injection pressure, production pressure and valve status).
Surface Injection Temperature
surface temperature of the injection gas. Used to determine the injection gas temperature
profile.
Gas Specific Gravity
injection gas specific gravity. Used to determine injection gas pressure profile.
To set these parameters, select Artificial Lift » Gas Lift » Gas Lift Diagnostics.

User Guide
208 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 226/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Gas Lift Theoretical background

Gas lift is a method of lifting fluid by using relatively high pressure (250 psi minimum) gas as the lifting
method through a mechanical process.
Gas lift is particularly applicable for lifting wells where high-pressure gas is available. Gas

compressors
Since the costmay have been installed
of compression for gas
far exceeds the injection or high-pressure
cost of downhole gas wells may
gas lift equipment, be nearby.
always consider 
gas lift when an adequate volume of high-pressure gas is available for wells requiring artificial lift.
Gas lift is accomplished by one of the following methods:

Continuous flow
In continuous flow a continuous volume of high pressure gas is introduced into the eductor tube to
aerate or lighten the fluid column until reduction of the bottom-hole pressure allows a sufficient
differential across the sand face, causing the well to produce the desired rate of flow. This requires
the following:
• a flow valve that permits the deepest possible one point injection of available gas lift pressure
• a valve that acts as a changing or variable orifice to regulate gas injected at the surface depending
upon tubing pressure.
This method is used in wells with a high productivity index and a reasonably high bottom-hole pressure
relative to well depth. In this type of well, fluid production can range from 200-20,000 B/d through
normal size tubing strings. On casing flow it is possible to lift in excess of 80,000 B/d. The internal
diameter (ID) of the pipe governs the amount of flow, provided the well productivity index, bottom-
hole pressure, gas volume and pressure, and the mechanical conditions are ideal.
Smaller volumes can be efficient using continuous flow where small 'macaroni' tubing is used. As low
as 25 B/d may be produced efficiently through 1-in. tubing by continuous flow.

Intermittent flow
Intermittent flow involves expansion of a high pressure gas ascending to a low-pressure outlet. A
valve with a large port permits complete volume and pressure expansion control of gas entering into
the tubing. This either regulates lift of the accumulated fluid head above the valve with a maximum
velocity to minimize slippage, or controls liquid fall back, fully ejecting it to the tank with minimum gas.
Intermittent lift is generally used in conjunction with a surface time cycle controller (intermitter). It is
used on wells with relatively low fluid volumes, or wells that present high or low PI with low bottom-
hole pressure. In intermittent lift, gas is injected at regular intervals by the intermitter with regulated
cycling to coincide with fluid fill-in rate from the producing formation into the well bore. The multipoint
injection gas through more than one lift valve may also accomplish intermittent lift.

Gas lift instability

Unstable operational conditions may occur in a continuous gas lift well because the characteristics
of the system mean that small perturbations can degenerate into huge oscillations in the flow
parameters. Therefore, a clearly defined mechanism is required to show the relative importance of 
the different factors involved, to help to assure stable flow conditions at the design phase, or to decide
what to do to stabilize an unstable gas lift well.

User Guide
209
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 227/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Unified instability criteria were developed by Alhanati et al. (1993) for continuous gas lift wells to
overcome drawbacks in previous developments. The unified criteria can be used for all possible flow
regimes for the gas-lift valve and surface gas injection choke. The unified criteria were developed
using a number of simplifying assumptions, so are not highly accurate or applicable to every type of 
instability experienced in a gas lift installation. However, they cover a number of common cases

encountered in the industry and certainly indicate what can be done to improve operating instability.
For the Alhanati factors to be computed, the well model must have the following:
• Well IPR (p.360) modeled by the PI (p.361) method
• Casing inside diameter (p.67) is set. The simple (p.68) or detailed (p.70) tubing model can be
used.
• Valve Port Diameter (p.74) set. The operating Gas Lift Valve Port (Orifice) Diameter.
• Surface injection pressure (p.74) set. This is the gas lift injection surface pressure, upstream of 
the surface injection choke (which must be set higher than the internally calculated casing head
pressure).
• To ensure accurate results from the Alhanati instability check, the model should be developed
only to the well head.

Note: The factors will not be computed if data is missing or incorrect.

From this data the well model automatically calculates the steady state casing and tubing pressures.
The Gas Lift perfor mance curve should then be developed as normal; the Alhanati factors C1 and
C2 are automatically generated. For stable gas lift operations, both these factors must be greater 
than zero.
To view the Alhanati factors (C1 and C2) graphically (using the system plot), select:
• X-axis: Total Injection Gas
• Left Y-axis: Alhanati Criterion 1.
• Right Y-axis (p.233): Alhanati Criterion 2. For stable gas lift operations, both these factors must
be greater than zero.
If the graphical display is empty, this implies that one or more of the above data items is missing/
incorrect.

Assumptions of the Alhanati model

The model assumes:
• Constant pressure at the gas injection manifold, which is upstream of the surface injection choke

• Adiabatic flow through the choke.

In the unified criteria, two sets of criteria were defined, namely C1 and C2, and both must be greater 
than zero for stable gas lift operation.

( )
C 2 = F  1
γ ν 

μ ν 
+
γ ν 

F  c 
Eq. 1.8

where

User Guide
210 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 228/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

(q fo  + q Go ) ⋅ At  P co 

F  3 = ⋅ Eq. 1.9
( p f   − p G ) ⋅ g  q fo 

(ZT  )c 
μ  = Eq. 1.10
ch  (ZT  )m 
Nomenclature

Cross sectional area of tubing 2

At  in 

 g   Acceleration due to gravity 2

ft   / s 

P co  Steady state casing pressure psia 

P  g 

P f  

q fo  Steady state reservoir fluids flow rate stbd 

q Go  Steady state injected gas flow rate mmscf  

γ  Gas expansion factor 

T   Temperature ° F  
Z   gas compressibility factor 

subscripts
ν  gas lift valve
ch  gas injection choke
t  tubing
c  casing
m  manifold

Annular Gas Pressure Design Method

PIPESIM can calculate

space is defined as the the pressure
space drop
between thecaused by gas friction
outer diameter of the through annular
tubing (ID+2* space.
wall Annular 
thickness) and
the Casing ID. You must specify the annular dimension in the Tubing dialog (p.67).

Note: The Casing ID must be bigger than the outside of the tubing diameter and a Casing ID must
be given for all depths shallower than the Maximum Allowable Injection TVD.

This calculation is available in the following Gas Lift Operations:

User Guide
211
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 229/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Deepest Injection Point (p.191)

• Bracketing (p.192)
• Lift Gas Response Curves (p.193)
• Gas Lift Design (p.200)

Note: The default is for PIPESIM to use the static annulus gas gradient rather than calculate the
pressure drop. The Annulus Gas Pressure Design option you select applies to all four operations.
For instance, if you select the Use Rigorous Friction and Elevation DP in the Deepest Injection
dialog, this is adopted for the other three operations.

1.8.3 Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESP)

General
The electric submersible pump (ESP) is perhaps the most versatile of the artificial lift methods. The
ESP comprises a down hole pump, electric power cable, motor and surface controls. In a typical
application, the down hole pump is suspended on a tubing string hung on the wellhead and is
submerged in the well fluid. The pump is close-coupled to a submersible electric motor that receives
power through the power cable and surface controls.
ESPs are used to produce a variety of fluids and the gas, chemicals and contaminants commonly
found in these fluids. Aggressive fluids can be produced with special materials and coatings. Sand
and similar abrasive contaminants can be produced with acceptable pump life by using modified
pumps and operation procedures.
ESPs usually do not require storage enclosures, foundation pads, or guard fences. An ESP can be
operated in a deviated or directionally drilled well, although the recommended operating position is
in a vertical section of the well.
The ESP has the broadest producing range of any artificial lift method ranging from 100 b/d of total
fluid up to 90,000 b/d.
ESPs are currently operated in wells with bottom hole temperatures up to 350 degree Fahrenheit.
Operation at elevated ambient temperatures require special components in the motor and power 
cables of sustained operation at high temperatures, and have efficiently lifted fluids in wells deeper 
than 12,000 ft. System efficiency ranges from 18 to 68%, depending on fluid volume, net lift and pump
type.

ESP System Components: Motor 

The ESP system's prime mover is the submersible motor. The motor is a two-pole, three-phase,
squirrel-cage induction type. Motors run at a nominal speed of 3,500 rev/min in 60-Hz operation.
Motors are filled with a highly refined mineral oil that provides dielectrical strength, bearing lubrication
and thermal conductivity. The design and operation voltage of these motors can be as low as 230
volt or as high as 4,000 volt. Amperage requirement may be from 17 to 110 amps. The required
horsepower is achieved by simply increasing the length of the motor section. The motor is made up
of rotors, usually about 12 to 18 inches (300-460 mm) in length that are mounted on a shaft and
located in the electrical field (stator) mounted within the steel housing. The larger single motor 
assemblies will approach 33 feet (10 m) in length and will be rated up to 400 horsepower, while

User Guide
212 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 230/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

tandem motors will approach 90 feet (27.5 m) in length and will have a rating up to 750 horsepower.
The rotor is also composed of a group of electromagnets in a cylinder with the poles facing the stator 
poles. The speed at which the stator field rotates is the synchronous speed, and can be computed
from the equation:
120 f  
v  = M   Eq. 1.11
Where: v  is speed in rev/min, f   is frequency in cycles/sec and M  is number of magnetic poles.
The number of poles the stator contains is determined by the manufacturer. Therefore to change the
speed of the stator magnetic field, the frequency will have to change.
Heat generated by the motor is transferred to the well fluid as it flows past the motor housing. Because
the motor relies on the flow of well fluid for cooling, a standard ESP should never be set at or below
the well perforations or producing interval, unless the motor is shrouded.
Motors are manufactured in four different diameters (series) 3.75, 4.56, 5.40 and 7.8 in. Thus motors
can be used in casing as small as 4.5 in. 60-Hz horsepower capabilities range from a low of 7.5 hp
in 3.75-in series to a high of 1,000 hp in the 7.38-in series.
Motor construction may be single section or several "tandems" bolted together to reach a specific
horsepower. Motors are selected on the basis of the maximum diameter that can be run easily in a
given casing size.

ESP System Components: Pumps

The ESP is a multistage centrifugal pump. Each stage of a submersible pump consists of a rotating
impeller and a stationary diffuser. The pressure-energy change is accomplished as the liquid being
pumped surrounds the impeller. As the impeller rotates it imparts two rotating motion components to
the liquid: one is in a radial direction outward from the center of the impeller (centrifugal force), the
other motion moves in a direction tangential to the outside diameter of the impeller. The resultant of 

these two components

fluid production. is the actual
The number direction
of stages of flow.
determines The
the type
total of stage
design headused determines
generated the motor 
and the rate of 
horsepower required. The design falls into one of two general categories: the smaller flow pumps are
generally of radial flow design. As the pumps reach design flows of approximately 1,900 B/D,the
design change to a mixed flow.
The impellers are of a fully enclosed curved vane design, whose maximum efficiency is a function of 
the impeller design and type and whose operating efficiency is a function of the percent of design
capacity at which the pump is operated. The mathematical relationship between head, capacity,
efficiency and brake horse power is expressed as:

q v Hγ 
Power  = Eq. 1.12
η 

Where: q v  is the volume flow rate, H  is the head, γ  is the fluid specific gravity and η  is the pump
efficiency
The discharge rate of a submersible centrifugal pump depends on the rotational speed (rpm), size of 
the impeller, impeller design, number of stages, the dynamic head against which the pump is
operating and the physical properties of the fluid being pumped. The total dynamic head of the pump
is the product of the number of stages and the head generated by each stage.

User Guide
213
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 231/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

"Bolt-on" design makes it possible to vary the capacity and total head of a pump by using more than
one pump section. However, large-capacity pumps typically have integrated head and bases.

Pump Selection
Select Artificial Lift » ESP » ESP Design and use the Pump Selection tab . The tab has two
sections, Pump Design Data and Pump Parameters. Select a pump based on certain design criteria.
Pump Design data
Design Production rate
Desired flowrate through the pump in stock-tank units. The actual flowing quantity will be
computed.
Design Outlet Pressure
the required outlet pressure of the PIPESIM model when the pump is installed. It is
recommended to only model the well, and no associated flowline or riser, while designing
the ESP system. In this case the outlet pressure would then be the wellhead pressure

Static Reservoir Pressure

Taken from the PIPESIM model or can be entered
Water cut
Taken from the PIPESIM model or can be entered.
GOR (or GLR)
Taken from the PIPESIM model or can be entered
Pump Depth
The depth at which the pump is to be installed. This is taken from the PIPESIM model if a
pump is already installed or can be entered.
Casing ID
The casing size that the pump has to fit into. Usually 3.38 to 11.25 in.
Design Frequency
The frequency/speed that the pump is expected to run at.
Gas Separator Efficiency
The efficiency of the gas separator if installed.
Head factor 
 Allows the pump efficiency to be factored (default = 1).
Viscosity Correction
 All pump performance curves are based on water systems, this option will correct for oil
viscosity.
Select Pump
Will use the available data to select suitable pumps from the database. The pump intake
conditions will first be computed. The resulting pump list can be sorted by efficiency or 
Maximum flowrate by selecting the column header. The Manufactures to select from can be
filtered. Errors in the simulation (p.218).

User Guide
214
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 232/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Pump parameters
Calculate
Calculate pump performance at the conditions specified. Errors in the simulation (p.218)
Stage-by-stage

Perform the stage calculations on a stage-by-stage basis. Default = stage-by-stage.

Selected Pump
The pump selected, by the user, from the design data
No. of Stages required
The computed number of stages for this pump under these conditions.
Pump efficiency @ Design rate
The efficiency of the pump at the design production rate
Pump power required
The power required for this pump to deliver the required flowrate.
Pump intake pressure
The computed pump intake pressure.
Pump discharge pressure
The computed pump discharge pressure.
Head required
The computed pump head required
Liquid density
The computed liquid density at the pump intake

Free gas fraction at inlet conditions

The computed gas fraction.
Pump performance plot
plot performance curves at different speeds
Pump curves
plot standard performance curves
Install pump
Install the pump into the tubing of model. This will replace any existing ESP but not gas lift
valves.

See also: Select a Motor (p.212), Select a Cable (p.217)

Motor Selection
This can only be performed after a pump has been selected.
Select Artificial Lift » ESP » ESP Design and use the Motor/Cable Selection tab.

User Guide
215 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 233/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Name of the selected Pump

Selected from the Pump tab.
No. of stages
Computed.

Pump efficiency
Computed
Pump power required
Computed.
Select Motor 
The resulting motor list can be sorted by power, voltage, current, etc. by selecting the column
header. Errors (p.212).
Various parameters associated with the motor will be computed and displayed at both 60Hz and the
initially entered Design Frequency.

NP [Name Plate] Power 

NP [Name Plate] Voltage
NP [Name Plate] Current
See also: Select a Pump (p.213), Select a Cable (p.217)

ESP Database
To simulate an ESP, PIPESIM maintains a database of manufacturers and models from which the
user can select. For each model the diameter, minimum and maximum flowrate and base speed are
provided. A plot of the ESP's performance is also available. If the required ESP is not in the database,
you can easily enter the basic data required for it into the database using Data » New ESP/Pump/
Compressor . See Data/NewESP-Pump-Compressor (p.218).

Selection
When modeling an ESP, it is important that the correct size (expected design flowrate and physical
size) ESP is used. A search facility is available, based on these two parameters, to select the
appropriate ESP from the database. The search can, if required, be restricted to a particular 
manufacturer. Pumps that meet the design criteria will be listed.

Stage-by-stage modeling
Stage-by-stage modeling is selected by selecting the checkbox next to the calculate button.

 Alternatively
EKT (p.84). by inserting Engine Keywords (PUMP STAGECALCS) (p.638) into the model, using the

Install a Pump
Once the ESP manufacturer and model (p.212) has been selected from the database of common
ESP's (p.216) some parameters can be altered. The performance curves for each model are
(normally) based on a Speed of 60Hz and 1 stage.

User Guide
216 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 234/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Design data
Speed
The actual operating speed of the ESP
Stages

The actual number of stages of the ESP

Head factor 
 Allows the efficiency to be factored (default = 1)

Calculation Options
Viscosity Correction
 Allow a viscosity correction factor to be applied to take account of changes to the fluid
viscosity by the pressure and temperature.
Gas Separator present
 Allow a gas separator to be added (automatically) with an efficiency: Separator efficiency -
efficiency of an installed gas separator (default = 100% if installed)
Performance table
The data used to predict the performance of the ESP
Standard Curves
The standard performance curves f or the ESP - can be printed/exported
Variable Speed Curves
Variable speed curves at 30 - 90 Hz.- can be printed/exported

ESP Design
The ESP option is selected from the Artificial Lift menu. To design an ESP the following stages are
required:
Select a Pump (p.213)
Select a Motor (p.212)
Select a Cable (p.217)
The ESP should then be installed, added into the tubing, at the required depth. This can either be
performed manually or by using the Install button. Installing automatically removes any existing ESPs
in the tubing. However, any gas lift values or injections points are not removed.
See also: ESP [Reda] web site

ESP System Components: Cable

Cable Selection can be determined after a Pump and motor have been selected.
1. Motor/Cable Selection tab
2. Cable Selection
3. Select Cable

User Guide
217 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 235/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Cable Length
The length of the cable, can be modified
NP Current @ Design Frequency
The [Name Plate] Current at the design frequency. Cannot be changed.

Computed values
Selected Cable

Cable length

Voltage drop

Downhole voltage

Surface voltage

Total System KVA

Design Report
Display a report that details all the selected components of the ESP system.

Errors
Occasionally a pump may not be able to be determined and a Convergence error will be reported.
There could be a number of reasons for such an error and the user is advised to view the output
report.
Common problems:
1. The system cannot reach the outlet pressure specified. Try increasing the outlet pressure.

ESP Design
To select an ESP, do the following:
1. Create and save your model. (A well model need not be created in order to select an ESP, but if 
it is, the data entered will be used.) See how... (p.32)
2. From the toolbar, select Artificial Lift » ESP » ESP design
3. Set the required data (p.217)

ESP / Compressor / Pump data entry

The supplied ESP database may not always contain the most up to date ESP data or details of the
exact ESP you are using. To ensure that the latest data can be utilized, PIPESIM allows you to enter 
your own ESP performance data. See how... (p.162)
 As compressors and pumps are typically custom made, there is no database for these.

1.8.4 Rod Pump Module

Design (p.221)

User Guide
218 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 236/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Diagnostics (p.222)
Options (p.226)
New / Edit RP Data (p.224)
New / Edit Pumping Unit (p.225)

About the Rod Pump Module

Use this module to manage rod pump lifted production wells. The rod pump module offers options in
equipment selection and design control specification so you can conduct various optimal design
scenario studies. You also can perform a design study based on your experience and assumptions.
For diagnostics, the combination of neural network technology and comprehensive analysis provides
you with more detailed and rigorous diagnostics analysis.
The module comprises the following main parts:
• Equipment Database
• Rod Pump Design
• Rod Pump Diagnostics with Dynamometer Card

Limitations
The following items are current rod pump limitations:
• The well model should be PI or Vogel.
• The well must not be a gas well and it should have a Liquid IPR.
• The model must have a single vertical completion; it cannot be a multilayer model.
• The fluid model must be BlackOil.
• The bubble point pressure must be specified.
• The well must have at least one tubing section defined.

Equipment Database
The equipment database in the RP module includes Pumping Unit data, Rod data, and Pump data.
You can browse the data in the database. You can add, modify, or delete any equipment data that
you entered.

Rod Pump Design and Optimization

The Rod Pump Design module uses the following design methods:
• Specify target flowrate

• Specify pump intake pressure

• Specify dynamic fluid level.
The Rod Pump Design module provides the following design options:
• Specify or select a motor 
• Specify or select a stroke
• Specify or select stroke frequency

User Guide
219
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 237/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Specify or select plunger size

• Specify or select a rod string
• Specify or select a heavy rod

Rod Pump Diagnostics with Dynamometer Card

This module provides the following types of diagnostic analysis based on the dynamometer card data:
• Plunger Operation Condition
• Stress Analysis of Rod String Torque Plots and Pumping Unit
• Balance Condition
• Multiple Dyno. curves at various sections of rod string
The module offers the following diagnostic options:
• Specify or calculate damping factor 
• Use the built-in dyno. card formats. (There are four types supported.)

Getting Started
The rod pump design/diagnostics model is an independently developed module that plugs into
PIPESIM. Well and fluid data defined in PIPESIM is transferred to the rod pump module and vice-
versa.
Reservoir Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR)
PIPESIM transfers the specified IPR to the Rod Pump module.
Well data
PIPESIM transfers well basic data — such as reservoir static pressure, reservoir temperature
and tubing configurations — to the Rod Pump module.
Specific data for rod pump
The data required for Rod Pump Design — such as production flowrate and dynamic fluid
level — must be specified in the Rod Pump module.
Unit System
PIPESIM transfers any specified units to the Rod Pump module.
Project Save and Import
PIPESIM saves all parameters and data information specified in Rod Pump in the .bps project
file.

RP Operation Menu
To access the Rod Pump module, select Artificial Lift » Rod Pump. The following options are
available:
• Design
• Diagnostics
• Options

User Guide
220 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 238/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Browse/Edit RP Data
• Browse Pumping Unit

Design...
The RP Design dialog box has the following tabs available:
• Well Information
• Equipment Selection
• Design Control
Well Information
The following image shows the properties on the Well Information tab.

Equipment Selection
Here are a few key points when specifying equipment:
• You should specify the crank rotation direction.
• The stroke depends on pumping unit.
• You can select a different motor for Pumping Unit.
• The speed depends on motor.
The following image shows the properties on the Equipment Selection tab.

User Guide
221
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 239/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Simulated Design Results (that is Pressure Profiles)

The following image graphically shows the simulated results.

Diagnostics...
To input data, the RP Diagnostics dialog box has the following tabs available:

User Guide
222 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 240/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Prod. Data
• Equipment
• Rod String
• Fluid Data
• Tubing
• Dyno. Card
Prod. Data
The following image shows the properties on the Prod. Data tab.

Equipment
• You should specify crank type and the rotation direction.
• You can specify master weights and auxiliary weights and counterweight positions respectively.
The following image shows the properties on the Equipment tab.

User Guide
223
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 241/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Reading / Loading Dynamometer Card

The following image shows the properties on the Dyno.Card tab.

Simulated Diagnostics Results

The following image graphically shows the simulated diagnostic results.

Browse/Edit RP Data...
The following image shows the Browse/Edit RP Data dialog box.

User Guide
224
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 242/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Browse Pumping Unit...

The following image shows the Browse Pumping Unit dialog box.

User Guide
225 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 243/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Components and Options

This section covers the Rod Pump Components and Data Information.

General Data

Reservoir Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR)

You can use the Rod Pump module for vertical well completion only. Before running RP, you must
provide well completion information so the required IPR curve can be calculated. The productivity
analysis is the basis of the diagnostic and design study. To get more accurate results,
• For new completion wells, ensure that a proper PI is specified.
• For existing wells, ensure that the IPR matches current production conditions.

Note: Only Productivity Index (PI) and Vogel IPR's are supported.

Basic parameters
The basic Rod Pump parameters refer to the parameters specified in PIPESIM — such as well
completion data, tubing data and fluid property (PVT) data. Once you specify these parameters in
PIPESIM, the values are transferred to the Rod Pump module automatically. With the exception of 
well completion data, you can modify the data during the Rod Pump design and Rod Pump diagnostics
study. When you exit the Rod Pump GUI, you have the option to save the changes that you made to
the PIPESIM well model.

User Guide
226 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 244/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Rod Pump Parameters

Rod Pump parameters refer to the data required by the Rod Pump module. The parameters can be
categorized into the following groups:
• Rod Pump equipment data — static characteristic data of the motor, rod string and plunger. You
can add your own/local data to this database.
• Production data — the equipment configuration data and the related test data. Before executing
Rod Pump Design or Rod Pump Diagnostics study, ensure that you specified the data based on
the existing well operating condition.

Note: If any of the required data is missing, the Rod Pump model will not run.

Dynamometer Card (Dyno.Card) Data

The dyno.card data measured at the surface is required data for the Rod Pump Diagnostics study.
The surface dyno.card is the relationship curve of rod loading vs. rod displacement. You can get this
information from the dynamometer; however, the data file typically contains dyno.card data of more
than 10 wells. You must find the dyno.card for the current well and save it in the Rod Pump format
so the Rod Pump module can read it.
There are four commonly used dyno.card formats that can be read in the Rod Pump module. If the
dyno.card format cannot be read by Rod Pump, convert the format to one of the Rod Pump readable
formats.

Units
The unit system in the Rod Pump module is consistent with the units in PIPESIM. For example, if you
change the unit of each variable in PIPESIM, and then set it as default, the changes are transferred
to Rod Pump automatically.

Rod Pump Design

Overview
There are two types of sucker rod pump systems:
• Beam Pump system
• PC Pump system
The Beam Pump is the most popular artificial lift method because of its simple structure, flexibility
and longevity. It has three main parts: pumping unit, sucker rod, and pump. The motor transfers high
speed rotation movement to the reducing gear box. After a two-level speed down using three shafts,
the rotation movement is transferred to the up and down swing of the beam using a crank connection
rod. This movement drives the pump plunger to perform a reciprocal movement using the rod to lift
fluid (mainly oil) from the bottom hole to the surface.
The pump unit is the main surface equipment of the rod pump system. The beam-balanced pumping
unit transforms the circle movement of the crank to the up and down swing of the horse head using
the connection rod between the beam and crank. Structurally, the process can be divided into two
types: conventional and forward-established. In the oil fields, the conventional type is the most popular 
pumping unit. Its main characteristic is a support between the horse head and crank connection rod.

User Guide
227 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 245/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The time for the up and down stroke is the same. Rod Pump is used mainly for conventional pumping
system.
The pump is the main part of the rod pump system. It consists of a pump barrel (outer barrel and
sleeve), a plunger and a valve (traveling valve and standing valve). Sometimes, the traveling valve
is called a discharge valve and the standing valve is called an intake valve. Based on the different
structure, the pump can be divide into two group, the tubing pump and the rod pump.
 A polished rod links the steel cable on the horse head with the down hole sucker rod. The polished
rod also helps seal the wellhead together with the sealing box. Polished rods are available in two
different types: a common type and one that has a larger ID on one side. On the common type rod,
you can change the position of the two sides when one side becomes worn; however, if one side has
a larger ID, you cannot switch the sides. The larger ID provides better connectivity.

Introduction of Rod Pump Optimization and Design

The sucker rod pump system is a very complex system that has several components — such as a
motor with a reducing gear box that drives the pumping unit system, a sucker rod, a down hole pump
and tubing, and so on. The optimization and design in Rod Pump includes the optimization of the
swabbing parameters — such as pump diameter, stroke, and frequency of stroke — and the selection
of the swabbing equipment — such as the structure of the rod. Diversity in the optimization target
with various influence factors and the continuity of the changing of design parameters results in a
complex design process.

Selection of Swabbing Parameters

You can specify the combination of the rod and swabbing parameters, or you can let the designer 
select the parameters automatically. If all the parameters are specified by the designer, Rod Pump
calculates the production condition based on that data. That is, it uses PIPESIM-RP as a tool to predict
the designed scenarios based on experience or other factors.

Note: Sometimes specifying the strike and frequency of stroke is done because these two
parameters of the actual rod pump system are not standard. Another reason is because this design
method also fits the requirement of sand control.

Selection of Design Methods

There are three design methods in Rod Pump:
• Specify the flowrate — used to meet the requirement of the production allocation of each well
• Specify the intake pressure
• Specify the dynamic fluid level for the well with high GOR — used to improve the pump volumetric

efficiency which affects the whole system efficiency

These methods are based on the principle of equivalent intensity, which re-designs the rod, pump,
and pump depth without taking into account of the current rod pump system. The rod material can
be redesigned as either a common rod or a weighted rod. The optimized solution ensures the stress
percentages on the top side of each rod section are equal.

User Guide
228 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 246/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Rod Pump Diagnostics

Introduction
The diagnostic technology of the rod pump system that was proposed by S.G.Gibbs and A.B.Neily
is based on the principle of treating the rod as a downhole dynamic signals conduct line and the pump
as a transmission device. The working condition of the pump (loading change on the plunger) is
transmitted to surface via rod in forms of a stress wave that is received by the dynamometer. By
building the wave equation with a damping coefficient, the dyno.card of each cross section of the rod
and pump can be deduced. The whole well working condition can be analyzed and judged.
The traditional pump dyno.card recognition method is to use a numerical value to represent dyno.card
according to a particular specification. Experience shows that the simple specification cannot classify
the dyno.card properly. In the RP module, an NN (Neural Network) method is introduced. It contains
a three level neural network technology for the dyno.card diagnostic.
Because of the complexity of the rod pump system, the use of the dyno.card to recognize the pump
working condition is not enough. You also need a good understanding of loading the rod and the
balance of the pump unit. Comprehensive analysis is added in the Rod Pump diagnostic module by
adding the neural network technology. This method produces a more rigorous and comprehensive
 judgment of the working condition of the well.

Operations
This information is related to Rod Pump general operations, optimized design, working condition, and
the diagnostic equipment database.

Rod Pump Database Configuration

The data in Rod Pump database contain the equipment parameters that refer to the static
performance data of the motor, rod string, and pump. You may add your equipment data to the Rod
Pump database.
parameters in theWhen you finish adding the new data, we recommend that you do not change the
database.

Open Project
Before running the Rod Pump module, you must build a new project or open an existing project in
PIPESIM.

Basis Input Data in PIPESIM

For Rod Pump module, the following data should be specified in PIPESIM:
• Well completion data (well productivity)

• Tubing data (only for vertical well completion)

• PVT data (only for black oil including P b)

RP Application from PIPESIM Drop-down Menu

The Artificial Lift » Rod Pump menu has the following operations:
• Design

User Guide
229
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 247/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Diagnostics
• New/Edit RP data
• New/Edit Pumping Unit

Optimization Design
For an old production well, if you do not need to change the pumping unit, choose an existing pumping
unit and production manufacturer. For a new production well or for an old well that requires a change
in pumping unit, select a model type, and then simulate it to check whether this pumping unit is suitable
for the studied well. The model serial number and manufacturer for new pumping units may need to
be added to the equipment database.

Selection of Pumping Unit

Selection of Motor 
You can specify the motor type or you can let the model select one that matches the selected pumping
unit.

Selection of Pump
You can specify a particular pump diameter, or you can let the model select the most suitable pump
diameter. If you specify a new pump diameter, you must add it to the equipment database.

Selection of Stroke
You can specify stroke, or you can let the model select. The optimal stroke is selected from the various
stroke combinations available in equipment database.

Selection of Pumping Speed

You can specify the pumping speed or you can let the model simulate one. If the optimal simulated
speed from the model is not selected from various speed combinations in the equipment database,
you must specify the speed.

Selection of Rod String

You can specify a rod combination, or you can let the model select one. A rod combination includes
rod length, rod diameter, rod elasticity / tensile strength Grade, and the principles of the rod strength
for automatic rod design. If you specify a new rod diameter, enter it into the equipment database.

Specify Pump Depth

No matter what type of design method you select, you must specify a suitable pump depth. You can
determine the depth from the well production performance curve and pressure profile or from the
corresponding profiles.

Select Design Criteria

The following design principles are available:
• Specified production
• Specified pump inlet pressure

User Guide
230 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 248/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Specified dynamic liquid level

Once the design principle is chosen, input the specified parameters to continue the design.

Operation Diagnostics

Input Liquid Level or Pump Inlet Pressure

Pump inlet pressure is a compulsory input parameter for diagnostics study. You can input the
parameter directly, or you can input the dynamic liquid level and let the model calculate the pump
inlet pressure.

Input Rod String Information

The operation diagnostic is only applicable to old production wells. The rod string information is
required for the rod combination when the well was in production.

Select Well Dynamometer Card

The well dynamometer card is a required parameter in diagnostic study. You must specify a set of 
actual tested dynamometer card data.

Specify Damping Coefficients to obtain Pattern

When applying wave equation to solve a pump performance curve, the magnitude of the damping
coefficients of the rod influences the calculation results. In the module, it offers the following choices:
• module to automatically calculate damping coefficients
• user specified / input damping coefficients

Database

View Equipment Parameter 

To view the equipment database, use the Artificial Lift » Rod Pump » Browse Pumping Unit
menu. The database contains equipment values that can be plotted.

Delete Equipment
Deletes the selected equipment model from the application.

Add New Equipment

 Adds a new model type for the existing equipment. You must specify a new diameter for rod plunger 
and rod pump. When adding a new pump, ensure that the pump stroke combination and the crank
radius combination are equal.

1.9 Reports
1.9.1 Plotting
 After a simulation has been completed, the results can be viewed graphically using the plot utility,
PsPlot.

User Guide
231
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 249/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Single branch plots

Results are (by default) plotted dynamically as the simulation runs. This feature can be enabled or 
disabled using Setup » Preferences  » Engine and selecting Run Plot tool with Single Branch
engine.

In addition the following plot types are available from the main toolbar:
• System plot — displays data as a result of changing some model parameter.
• Profile plot — displays data in terms of distance from the model's inlet.

Network plots
PsPlot can also be accessed using the Report menu or directly fr om the main toolbar. Select the
branches that you want to plot, then select the Report option. The results from the selected branches
will be concatenated.

PsPlot
The following list shows what you can do with PsPlot:
• Plot a 2nd Y-Axis (p.233)
• Print or Copy the plot (p.233)
• Close/minimize the plot utility (p.233)
• Export the data to Microsoft Excel (p.233)
• Remove/Add the background grid (p.233)
• Copy the graph to another application (p.233)
• Change the axis or title description (p.234)

• Change the legend description (p.234)

• Change the values on the axis (p.234)
• List/Disable lines (p.234)
• Scale the axes (p.234)
• Change the color display mode (p.235)
• Change the appearance of a line (p.235)
• Sort data (p.235)
• Zoom in & out (p.235)
• Specify Landscape or Portrait plots (p.236)
• Open a new or additional plot file (p.236)
• Remove of change the legend location (p.236)
• Superimpose the phase envelop on to a temperature / pressure profile (p.236)
• Translate plot labels and titles (p.237)

User Guide
232 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 250/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Plot a 2nd Y-Axis

Do the following:
1. Select the Series menu option.
2. Select the property to plot on the Right Y Axis from the list.

Note: The X Axis remains the same for both Y Axes.

Print or copy the plot

To print, do the following:
1. Select File » Print.
2. To preview the plot before printing, or to change any print options, select File » Print Preview.
To copy, select Edit » Copy to Clipboard.
The plot will be available using the clipboard in other applications that support copy-and-paste.

Close/minimize the plot utility

To Close the PLOT utility, do one of the following:
• Select the close button (top right of the dialog) or 
• Select File » Exit.
To Minimize the PLOT utility select the minimize button (top right of the dialog).

Exporting graphical data to Excel

Select File » Export Data to Excel. An Excel data file name is requested and Excel loads (providing
it is installed on the PC) and is populated with the data.
Remove / Add the background grid
Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Chart, Axis, Ticks tab. Select the required Axis and then the
Grid Border button.
3. Change the Visible check box to display or hide the grid lines (for that axis).
Changes are dynamic that is the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as they are made without
the dialog having to be closed.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Copy the graph to another application

Do the following:
1. Load the required graph and select Edit » Copy to Clipboard.

User Guide
233
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 251/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2. The plot will now be available using the clipboard in other applications that support copy-and-
paste.

Change the axis or title description

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Chart, Axis tab and Title. Select the Axis to change from the
Axis radio button and enter the new axis title, angle, style, and so on.
Changes are dynamic that is the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as they are made without
the dialog having to be closed.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Change the legend description

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Chart, Series tab.
3. Highlight the legend title to change and select title. Enter the new title.
Changes are dynamic. That is, the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as changes are made
without the dialog having to be closed.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Change the values on the axis

Select the Series menu. Select the property to plot on the Right X Axis from the list. Select the property
to plot on the Left Y Axis from the list.

List/Disable lines
Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup, then choose Chart and its Series tab.
2. Select the check box for each line you want to plot.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Scale the axes

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Chart Axis tab and scales.
3. Select the Axis to change from the radio buttons and disable Automatic.

User Guide
234
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 252/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4. Set the maximum and minimum values using the Change button or set to automatic.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Change the color display mode

On the Display menu, select one of the following available options:
• Color by Series Data - Graph lines are colored according to which Data Series they belong (the
default).
• Color by Axes Data - Graph lines are colored according to which axes they belong to (with Data
Series differentiated by marker symbol and line style).
• Color by File - Graph lines are colored according to which file they belong (with Data Series
differentiated by marker symbol and line style).

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Change the appearance of a line

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. Select the Series tab and then the required Data Series from the drop down list
3. Select the Format tab and then the Color button to change the line color or the Border button to
change the line pattern.
4. Select the Point tab and then the Style Combo to change the style of the marker at each data
point.

Changes are dynamic. That is, the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as changes are made
without the dialog having to be closed.

Note: Changes to the first five colors and marker styles ARE saved in the registry between sessions.

Sort data
Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Sort Values.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the required sorting option.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Zoom in or out
Do the following:

User Guide
235 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 253/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Zoom in
On the graph area, place the pointer at the top left position of the area to zoom in to. Select
and hold down the left mouse button and drag the resulting box to the required size.
Default size

On
andthe
holdgraph,
downplace themouse
the left pointerbutton
at the and
bottom
dragright
theposition
resultingofbox.
the area to zoom
The plot out to.toSelect
will revert its
default size.
Zoom out
There is no automatic zoom out feature. Scale (p.234) the x- and y-axis limit to achieve this.

Specify Landscape or Portrait plots

To do this, on the Print preview dialog, select the required paper orientation.

Open a new or additional plot file

When a new plot file is to be opened, the existing plot file can be handled in the following ways:
• Retained — to retain the existing plot and add the data to it, select File » Append.
• Removed — to remove the existing file, select File » Open.
Opened files can be temporarily made non-active by using Files » Files List.

Remove or change the legend location

Do the following:
1. Select Edit » Advanced Plot Setup.
2. In the resulting dialog, select the Legend tab.

3. Select Visible to show or hide the legend

4. Select the required position of the legend.
Changes are dynamic that is the effect of a change can be seen on the plot as they are made without
the dialog having to be closed.

Note: These settings are NOT saved between sessions.

Superimpose the phase envelope on to a temperature / pressure profile

To undertake this task, the model must be compositional (p.127). Do the following:
1. Set the point in the system where you want to create the phase envelope. To do this, add a report
tool (p.105) to the model and select Phase Envelope. The phase envelope will be created at this
point in the system
2. Run the model. This will normally be a Pressure/Temper ature operation (p.174).
3. Select and display the profile plot, using Reports » Profile Plot.
4. Using the Series menu, select Temperature as the X-Axis and Pressure as the Y-axis.
The phase envelope will be superimposed on the plot.

User Guide
236 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 254/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Translate plot labels and titles

Load Dictionary:
• Use the supplied label translation dictionary template (PsPlotDict.txt) to create a translation
dictionary, with translation of each label on the same line separated by a comma ','.

• (A usable example is provided for Russian in the file PsPlotDictRus.txt)

• Select File » Dictionary to browse for the translation dictionary file and open it.
• The Dictionary option will remain selected until you cleared it.
Clear Dictionary:
• To clear the dictionary, select File » Dictionary and select Cancel
 A dictionary cannot be loaded unless it is based on the template and in the correct format.

1.9.2 Report Tool Details

Placing a report tool in a single branch model gives additional reporting of the conditions at that point
in the model. To do this, click the Report Tool icon on the main toolbar, then click on the model.
Double-click the Report Tool object to open its Properties tab. There is a check box for each report
item available, as listed below. Select the box for each item you want to report on.
Flow Map
This applies to multiphase flow regions only. If this box is ticked, a high resolution map is
produced, showing the multiphase flow regimes plotted against superficial liquid and gas
velocities. Note that the map is scaled so that the operating point is always inside it. To display
a map, select Reports » Flow Regime Map and select it in the list of available maps. The
list shows all available maps for the case that has been run.
Phase Split
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output
file, showing the constituents of each phase.
Stock Tank Fluid Properties
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various fluid properties such
as gas and liquid volumetric flowrate at stock tank conditions.
Flowing Fluid Properties
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various fluid properties such
as gas and liquid volumetric flowrate at flowing conditions.
Cumulative Values

If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing properties, such as liquid
holdup, where the cumulative value may be of interest
Multiphase Flow Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various multiphase fluid flow
values such as superficial gas and liquid velocities.

User Guide
237 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 255/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Slugging Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various slug values such as
slug lengths and frequencies.
Sphere Generated Liquid Volume

If this values.
liquid box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing various sphere generated
Heat Transfer Input Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file, showing heat transfer input data.
Typically, the following are printed: Pipe and Coating Thicknesses and Thermal
Conductivities, Soil Thermal Conductivity, Burial Depth, Ambient Fluid Velocity, and Ambient
Temperature.
Heat Transfer Output Values
If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output file showing heat transfer output data.
Typically, the following information is printed: Distance, Fluid Temperature, Fluid Enthalpy,
and Heat Transfer Coefficients.
Composition Details
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, a table is printed in the output
file showing some compositional data such as water specific gravity.
Phase Envelope
This applies to compositional cases only. If this box is ticked, the fluid's phase envelope is
automatically computed and stored in the branch's plot file. In network cases, the file that
contains the phase envelope will be noted in the output file.

1.9.3 Network Report Tool

To use the report tool, select Reports » Report Tool (or click the report tool icon directly at the top
of the menu bar) after a successful network simulation completes. Its primary function is to provide
a report of the computed data in a network simulation. However, it can be also used for single branch
analysis. The report includes a node report (single point properties) and a branch report (distributed
properties), and they can switch by selecting “Node” or “Branch” in group “Type”.
Note: If there is no convergence after completing the specified number of iterations and the last
iteration performed is not the best solution, the solver performs another iteration to calculate the best
solution from all the iterations. The best iteration is based on where the maximum pressure and flow
rate residual errors are the lowest. PIPESIM publishes the data from the best iteration to the network
report. When there is no convergence, the report tool displays a warning message that the model did
not converge and it lists the tolerance that was achieved.
 All properties for node report are listed below:
Name, Type, Upstream, Downstream, Temperature, Pressure, ST Gas Flowrate (Stock-tank Gas
Flowrate), ST Liq Flowrate (Stock-tank Liquid Flowrate), ST GLR (Stock-tank Gas Liquid Ratio), ST
Water Cut (Stock-tank Water Cut), Mass Flowrate, Flowing Gas Flowrate (Gas Flowrate at flowing
condition), Flowing Liq Flowrate (Liquid Flowrate at flowing condition), Flowing Water Cut (water cut
at flowing condition), Mean Vel (Mean Velocity), Liq Vel (Liquid Velocity), Gas Vel (Gas Velocity),
Erosion Vel (Erosion Velocity), EVR (Erosion Velocity Ratio).

User Guide
238 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 256/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The meanings of columns “Name”, “Type”, “Upstream”, and “Downstream” are described as
below:

Name Type Upstream Downstream

SOURCE: source or production well None None
Object label SINK: sink or injection well None None
JUNCTION : junction node None None
Type of downstream
INLET: branch inlet None
equipment
Type of upstream
Branch label OUTLET: branch outlet None
equipment
INTERNAL: node between any two Type of upstream Type of downstream
neighboring equipments in a branch equipment equipment

Note: Branch internal nodes in branch “bname” are named as “bname-Node[i]” with index i ascending
from upstream to downstream.
 All properties for branch report are listed below:
Name, Type, Power (Equipment power (if applicable) ), DT (Temperature drop), DP (Pressure drop),
Max Press (Maximum Pressure), Max Mean Vel (Maximum Mean Velocity), Max Liq Vel (Maximum
Liquid Velocity), Max Gas Vel (Maximum Gas Velocity), Max Eros Vel (Maximum Erosion Velocity),
Max EVR (Maximum Erosion Velocity Ratio).
Note: Equipment in branch “bname” is named as “bname-Equip[i]” with index i ascending from
upstream to downstream.
The following custom report operations can be applied to the displayed data:

Operation Description
Remove all the data in the report. The underlying data file (*.pnsx) is not removed and
Clear 
can be restored using the Restore button.
Delete highlighted rows in the report. The underlying data file (*.pnsx) is not removed
Delete
and can be restored using the Restore button.
Restore Restore all rows to the report which are removed previously.
Print Print the current custom report.
Plot Plot the report data (if applicable).
Sort Sort report rows with respect to user specified properties.
Filters Filter the report to display row data only with specified types or ranges.
Config Configure report to determine what columns are displayed.
Excel Export to an Excel spreadsheet.
Close Close the report
Load report files. To load results from a previous simulation, browse to its results file
Browse
(*.pnsx). The name of the file is displayed in the adjacent dropdown box.

User Guide
239
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 257/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: Users can also single click a node or branch object in a network model to add the corresponding
results in the report spreadsheet.

Exporting to Excel
In addition to the copy and paste features of spreadsheets in PIPESIM, the Network Report Tool can
also export data to Microsoft Excel. When you click the Excel button above, an Export to Excel
dialog asks for the following information:
Excel File
 All the data viewed in the Report tool will be exported to the specified Microsoft Excel file.
The Excel file must exist already.
Worksheet
The worksheet, within the Excel file, to export the data to.
Start Row
The row in the Excel spreadsheet where the first data item will be placed. The default is row

1.
Start Column
The column in the Excel spreadsheet where the first data item will be placed. The default is
column A.

1.10 Expert Mode

The PIPESIM calculation engines are keyword (p.555) driven, with the keywords normally written by
the GUI. However, you can gain access to the keywords using the following methods:
• Engine keyword tool (p.84)

• Expert Mode

1.10.1 Expert Mode

Expert Mode allows the following;

Calculation engine
The calculation engine to be driven directly using keyword (p.555) input files. This could be when,
for example, new features are available in the calculation engine but not yet in the Graphical Interface
The keyword input file can either be created, from scratch, using a text editor or from a model already
developed in the GUI. See how (p.241) (Only recommended for single branch models).

Network models
 A number of Network models can be run in batch mode. This could be to run a set of case studies
over night for example.

Single branch models

 A number of Single branch models can be run in batch mode, but note the following:

User Guide
240 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 258/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Models must have been run once already using the GUI
• The operational data used for the last run in the GUI will be used.
• Models in the same directory may have file sharing problems and therefore not run
• You may want to turn off the automatic dynamic plotting (p.155) of results if multiple single branch
models are to be run.

1.10.2 How to work in Expert mode

Do the following:
1. Create your basic model(s).
2. Use File » Export Files to export the models to files. This creates:
• For a Network model: a *.tnt and associated *.pst files
• For a single branch model: a *.psm file
3. Select Expert » Display and select the above *.tnt or *.psm files by using the Browse button.
Select the Select check box for each model, or click Select All.
4. Edit the relevant text file(s) by clicking Edit.
5. Run the model by clicking Run .
6. To view results, click Output File, Summary, System Plot, or Profile Plot.

1.10.3 Batch mode

This Expert mode method can also be used to batch run models developed in the GUI.

How to batch run a number of models, using Expert Mode

To batch run a number of models, do the following:
1. Create your basic model using the GUI.
2. Use File » Export Files to export the models to files. This creates:
• For a Network model: a *.tnt and associated *.pst files
• For a single branch model: a *.psm file
3. Select Expert...  » Display and select the above *.tnt or *.psm files by using the Browse button.
Select the Select check box for each model, or click Select All.
4. Click Run.

5. To view results, click Output File, Summary, System Plot, or Profile Plot.

1.10.4 Run Multiple Models

To run multiple models, use the Expert Mode feature.
Do the following:
1. Use File » Export Files to export the models to files. This creates:

User Guide
241
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 259/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• For a Network model: a *.tnt and associated *.pst files

• For a single branch model: a *.psm file
2. Select Expert » Display to enter Expert mode.
3. Select the above file (*.tnt or *.psm) using the Browse button and check the Select box, or click
Select All
4. Select Edit to modify the engine keyword file, if necessary.
5. You may want to turn off the automatic dynamic plotting (p.155) of results if multiple single branch
models are to be run.
6. Click Run to run all the selected models.
7. To view results, click Output File, Summary, System Plot or Profile Plot.
Batch Mode (p.241).

1.10.5 Expert Data Entry

Select
check box to activate the chosen model. When the run option is selected all models that have
been selected will be run.
Engine Files
 A list of the engine files available for running, *.psm for single branch and *.tnt for network
models. Engine input files are created either manually or using the File » Export Files
command.
Browse
locate the required engine files.

Run
Run all the selected models, providing the Selection only option is on.

Note: These are run in silent mode (minimized and no completion dialog displayed).

Edit
edit the selected engine file using a text editor and modify the engine keywords. See also
the keyword list (p.555)
Output File
view the selected models output file after a simulation.
Summary
view the selected models summary file after a simulation.
System Plot
view the selected models system plot after a simulation.
Profile Plot
view the selected models profile plot after a simulation.

User Guide
242 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 260/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Options
Preferences
• Select the path of the engine: Choose Paths (p.148)
• Set preferences: Engine Preferences (p.155). You may want to turn off the automatic
dynamic plotting (p.155) of results if multiple single branch models are to be run.
•  Advanced (p.155)
Select All
Select all models in the list
Deselect All
deselect all models in the list
Selection Only
Only run selected models. Default = on.

User Guide
243
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 261/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Case studies 2
The following case studies are described in detail:
• Condensate Pipeline (p.245)
• Oil Well Performance Analysis (p.262)
• Gas Well Perf ormance Analysis (p.286)
• Looped Gas Gathering Network (p.306)
• User Pump (p.316)
• Field Data Matching (p.324)
• Liquid Loading Analysis (p.329)
• Ramey Heat Transfer Model (p.331)
Summary of features and cases studies:

Case Study Module

Gas Network Network Analysis (p.33)
Loop (Folders) Network Analysis (p.33)
Loop Network (p.306) Network Analysis (p.33)
Small Network Network Analysis (p.33)
Water Inj. Net Network Analysis (p.33)
Water Reinjection Network Analysis (p.33)
Gas Lift (p.194) Performance Open Link (p.731)
Production Network Open Link (p.731)
Template Open Link (p.731)
Condensate Pipeline (p.245) Pipeline Tools (p.81)
Riser (p.102) and Flowline (p.86) Pipeline Tools (p.81)
Surface facilities Pipeline Tools (p.81)

Case studies
244
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 262/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Wax Deposition (p.182) Pipeline Tools (p.81)

Pump (p.316) User Equipment (p.597)
UserPump (p.316) User Equipment (p.597)
Bottom Hole Nodal Analysis (p.177) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
Compositional (p.127) Nodal Analysis (p.177) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
ESP (p.212) Design Well Design and Performance (p.42)
ESP (p.212) Lift Well Design and Performance (p.42)
Flow Correlation Match (p.175) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
FracPack (p.59) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
Gas Lift Design (p.194) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
Gas Lift (p.194) Performance Well Design and Performance (p.42)
Horizontal Well Performance (p.657) Well Design and Performance (p.42)

Injection Well Well Design and Performance (p.42)

Multilayer Well (p.65) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
Multiphase Booster (p.92) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
P and T Profiles (p.174) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
PCP Lift (p.426) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
Qgi vs CHP Curve (p.181) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
Reservoir VFP Tables (p.179) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
System Analysis (p.173) Well Design and Performance (p.42)
Wellhead Nodal Analysis (p.177) Well Design and Performance (p.42)

2.1 Condensate Pipeline Case Study

The offshore frontier poses some of the gr eatest technical challenges facing the oil and gas industry,
particularly as we venture into ever deeper waters and more remote locations. Development costs
can be substantial and many new production systems must be designed to accommodate subsea
multiphase flow across long distances to be economically viable.
Managing costs over extended distances introduces a number of complex risks and reliability
becomes a key concern due to high intervention costs and potential for downtime. Characterizing
and managing these risks requires detailed multidisciplinary engineering analysis and has led to the

emergence of a new field called flow assurance.

Design of subsea tiebacks requires multiphase flow simulation to assure that fluids will be safely and
economically transported from the bottom of the wells all the way to the downstream processing plant.
Four flow assurance issues are discussed in this task, including hydrates, heat loss, erosion, and
liquid slugging.
This case study involves the f ollowing tasks:
• Develop a Compositional PVT Model (p.246)

Case studies
245 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 263/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Construct the Model (p.247)

• Size the Subsea Tieback (p.250)
• Select Tieback Insulation Thickness (p.253)
• Determine the Methanol Requirement (p.253)
• Screen for Severe Riser Slugging (p.256)
• Size a Slug Catcher (p.261)

2.1.1 Flow Assurance Considerations for Subsea Tieback Design

In this case study, a client plans to produce four condensate wells into a subsea manifold through a
subsea tieback and up a riser to a platform. The oil and gas will be separated, with the oil pumped to
shore and the gas compressed to shore.
Figure 2.1. Subsea Tieback 

Task 1: Developing a Compositional PVT Model

In this section, you develop a compositional PVT model based on the data in the tables that follow.

Component Moles
Carbon Dioxide 3
Methane 72
Ethane 6
Propane 3
Isobutane 1
Butane 1
Isopentane 1
Pentane 0.5

Case studies
246 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 264/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Component Moles
Hexane 0.5
Table 2.1: Pure Hydrocarbon Components

Name Boiling Point (degF) Molecular Weight Specific Gravity Moles

C7+ 214 115 .0683 12
Table 2.2: Petroleum Fractions

Component Volume ratio (%bbl/bbl)

Water 10
Table 2.3: Aqueous Component 

To develop a Compositional PVT model:

1. Open the Setup » Compositional Template menu.
2. Choose PIPESIM as PVT Framework .
3. Choose Multiflash as PVT Package.
4. To enter the pure components noted in the preceding tables, select the pure hydrocarbon
components from the component database.

Note: Make multiple selections by holding down the Ctrl key.

5. After selecting all pure hydrocarbon components, click Add >>.

6. Select the Petroleum Fractions tab and characterize the petroleum fraction C7+ by entering these
parameters:
• Petroleum fraction name
• BP
• MW
• SG in Row 1
7. Highlight the row by clicking Row 1 and click Add to composition >>.
8. Return to the Component Selection tab to see that petroleum fraction displays in the component
list table on the right.
9. Click the Property Model tab and check the radio button Use Template Models for all fluids .
10.Select SRK Equation of State and Pedersen viscosity model. Leave all other options as default.
11.Select Setup » Compositional Local Default and add mole fractions for all library and pseudo
components, as shown in the above tables.
12.To generate the hydrocarbon phase envelope, click Phase Envelope.

Task 2: Constructing the Model

In this section, you construct the subsea tieback model.

Case studies
247 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 265/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

To construct the model:

1. Using the Single Branch toolbar, insert the objects shown in the figure below.

2. Specify each object based on the data provided in the tables that follow.

Note: To enter the detailed heat transfer data in the flowline and riser, select the Heat Transfer 
tab and click Calculate U value. Ensure that your Riser Elevation survey matches that shown
below.

Manifold Data
Temperature 176 degF
Pressure 1,500 psia

Subsea Tieback Data

Rate of undulations 0'/1000 feet (not hilly)
Horizontal Distance 6 miles
Elevational difference 0 feet (horizontal)
 Available IDs 9,10,11 inches
Heat Transfer 
 Ambient temperature 38 degF
Pipe thermal conductivity 35 Btu/hr/ft/degF
Insulation thermal conductivity 0.15 Btu/hr/ft/degF
Insulation thicknesses available 0.50 in + 0.25 in increments
 Ambient fluid water 
 Ambient fluid velocity 1.5 ft/sec
Burial depth Leave it blank (Elevated above ground)

Case studies
248 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 266/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Subsea Tieback Data

Ground conductivity 1.5 Btu/hr/ft/degF

Riser (use detailed profile)

Horizontal Distance 0 feet (vertical pipe)
Elevational difference 1,600 feet
 Available IDs 9,10,11 inches
Heat Transfer 
 Ambient temperature @ riser base 38 degF
 Ambient temperature @ 1,200 feet 42 degF
 Ambient temperature @ 800 feet 48 degF
 Ambient temperature @ 400 feet 56 degF

 Ambient temperature @ topsides 68 degF

Pipe thermal conductivity 35 Btu/hr/ft/degF
Insulation thermal conductivity 0.15 Btu/hr/ft/degF
Insulation thickness 0.50 in (plus additional 0.25 in increments if required)
 Ambient fluid water 
 Ambient fluid velocity 1.5 ft/sec

Case studies
249
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 267/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Task 3: Sizing the Subsea Tieback

You will now determine the required ID for the subsea tieback, such that the separator pressure for 
the maximum expected rate is no less than 400 psia.
The expected production rate is 14,000 STBD. The system will be designed to accommodate between
8,000 STBD (turndown case) and 16,000 STBD, should the wells produce more than expected.
The riser must be the same ID as the tieback, and you must not exceed the erosional velocity.
To size the subsea tieback:
1. From the Setup » Flow Correlations menu, make the following selections:
• Vertical Flow Correlation = Hagedorn Brown (Duns & Ros map)
• Horizontal Flow Correlation = Beggs-Brill Revised
2. Perform a System analysis with the minimum, maximum, and expected flow rates as the X-axis
variable and the available IDs for the flowline and riser as Change in Step (with Sensitivity variable
1) sensitivity variables.
3. Determine the minimum flowline ID that satisfies the separator pressure requirement (400 psia)
for the maximum flow rate.
4. Change the Y-axis to display Erosional Velocity Ratio Maximum.
5. Verify that the selected flowline ID does not exceed an erosional velocity ratio of 1.0 for the
expected flow rate.

Case studies
250 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 268/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Property Value
Pipeline and Riser ID 10 inch
Max. erosional velocity ratio for selected ID 0.825
Min. Separator pressure for selected ID 947 osua
Max. separator pressure for selected ID 1,265 psia
Table 2.4: Results

2.1.2 Hydrates
Gas hydrates are crystalline compounds with a snow-like consistency that occur when small gas
molecules come into contact with water at below a certain temperature. Hydrate formation
temperature increases with increasing pressure, therefore, hydrates risk increases at higher 
pressures and lower temperatures. When hydrates form inside the pipeline, the flow can be blocked
by hydrate plugs.
Hydrate forming molecules most commonly include methane, ethane, propane, carbon dioxide, and
hydrogen sulfide.
Three hydrate crystal structures have been identified - Structures I, II, and H. The properties of 
Structures I and II hydrates are well defined. Structure H hydrates are relatively new, and their 
properties are less well defined.
Hydrates can very easily form downstream of a choke where fluid temperature can drop into the
hydrate formation region due to Joule-Thompson cooling effects.
The Hydrate curve (below), shows a typical gas hydrate curve which is very useful for subsea pipeline
design and operations. On the left side of the curve is the hydrate formation region. When pressure
and temperature are in this region, water and gas will start to form hydrate.
Many factors impact the hydrate curve, including fluid composition, water salinity and presence of 
hydrate inhibitors.

Note: Generating Hydrate curves requires the PIPESIM Multiflash Hydrate Package.

Case studies
251
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 269/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.2. Hydrate curve

Hydrate Mitigation Strategies in PIPESIM

Two common strategies available in PIPESIM to mitigate hydrates formation are thermal insulation
and chemical inhibitors. Thermal insulation carries a higher upfront capital cost whereas chemical
inhibition carries a higher operational cost.
Thermal insulation
Heat transfer between the fluid and surroundings occurs, depending upon the temperature gradient.
There are two options for modeling the heat transfer in PIPESIM – Input U value and Calculate U
value.
Input U value is an overall heat transfer coefficient (U value) based upon the pipe outside diameter 
is entered.
Calculate U value includes the following information, which can be entered to compute the overall
Heat Transfer coefficient.
• Pipe coatings
• Thickness of the pipe coat.
• K (Thermal conductivity) of the material
• Pipe conductivity
• Ambient fluid (Air or Water)
• Ambient Fluid Velocity

• Pipe burial Depth

• Ground conductivity (for flowlines only)
Chemical Inhibitors
Thermodynamic inhibitors can be used to shift the hydrate curve towards the left, thereby lowering
the hydrate formation temperature. Examples of inhibitors include methanol and ethylene glycol.
Kinetic and anti-agglomerate inhibitors comprise a category known as Low Dosage Hydrate Inhibitors
(LDHIs). These inhibitors do not lower the hydrate formation temperature; instead, they help prevent

Case studies
252 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 270/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

the nucleation and agglomeration of hydrates to avoid blockage formation. The effects of these types
of inhibitors cannot be modeled with PIPESIM.

Task 4: Selecting Tieback Insulation Thickness

Using the tieback/riser ID selected above, determine the thickness of the insulation required for both
the flowline and the riser, such that the temperature of the fluid does not cross the hydrate curve for 
all possible flow rates.
To select tieback insulation thickness:
1. Double-click on the Report tool and ensure that Phase Envelope is selected.
2. Select Operations  » Pressure/Temperature profile.
3. Specify Separator (outlet) pressure as the calculated variable and the three design flow rates
as the sensitivity variables.
4. Use the Series menu on the resulting plot to change the X-axis to Temperature and the Y-axis
to Pressure to display the phase envelope.
5. Observe the production path on the phase envelope and its proximity to the hydrate curve.
6. If required, perform successive runs while increasing the insulation thickness of both the flowline
and riser by 0.25 inch increments until sufficient.

Property Value
Req. Insulation thickness 1 in
Table 2.5: Results

Task 5: Determining the Methanol Requirement

 Assume the flowline and riser have been insulated but they are under-insulated with only 0.25 inch
of insulation. In this section, you determine the required injection volume of methanol to ensure that
hydrates do not form.
To determine the methanol requirement:

Case studies
253
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 271/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1. Insert an injector just downstream of the source, as shown in the figure below.

2. Specify Methanol as Injector Fluid.

3. (Use injection temp. = 68 degF). To do this:
a. Select Setup » Compositional Template.
b. Add Methanol to the listed of added components.
c. Double-click the Injector  and choose Edit Composition.
d. Specify a composition of 100% Methanol.
e. Specify Injection Temperature and any injection rate .

4. Select Setup » Heat Transfer Options, and verify that Enable Hydrate Sub-Cooling
Calculation is selected.
5. Select Operations  » System Analysis.
a. Specify a liquid rate of 8,000 BPD and select calculated variable as the outlet pressure.
b. For the X-axis variable, select the Injector as the object and Rate as the Variable.
c. Select Range and enter a range of 200 to 600 BPD in increments of 50 BPD.
d. Uncheck the active status on all sensitivity variables with defined values.
e. Run the model.
6. On the resulting plot, change the Y-axis to display Maximum Hydrate Subcooling Temperature.
7. From the plot, determine the required Methanol injection rate, such that the flowing temperature
is always above the stable hydrate temperature.

Note:  A Positive Hydrate Sub-cooling in the output file indicates the fluid temperature is below
the hydrate stability temperature.

Case studies
254
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 272/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Property Value
Req. Methanol Injection Volume (bbl/d) 523
Table 2.6: Results

2.1.3 Severe Riser Slugging

Severe slugging in risers can occur in a multiphase transport system consisting of a long flowline
followed by a riser. Severe slugging is a transient phenomenon that can be split into four steps, as
shown in the next figure, The four slugging steps.

Step 1: Slug formation corresponds to an increase of the pressure in bottom of the riser. The liquid
level does not reach the top of the riser. During this period, the liquid is no longer supported
by the gas and begins to fall, resulting in blockage to the riser entrance and pipeline
pressure buildup, until the liquid level in the riser reaches to the top.
Step 2: In slug production, the liquid level reaches the riser outlet, and the liquid slug begins to be
produced until gas reaches the riser base.
Step 3: In bubble penetration, gas is again supplied to the riser, so the hydrostatic pressure
decreases. As a result, the gas flow rate increases.
Step 4: This corresponds to gas blowdown. When the gas produced at the riser bottom reaches
the top, the pressure is minimal and the liquid is no longer gas-lifted. The liquid level falls
and a new cycle begins.

Figure 2.3. The four slugging steps

Case studies
255 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 273/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PIPESIM does not rigorously model severe slugging associated with risers, as this is a transient
phenomena, but it does report a dimensionless indicator of the likelihood of this occurring (PI-SS
number in PIPESIM output file).
Severe slugging is most prevalent in cases in which a long flowline precedes a riser, especially for 
cases in which the flowline inclination angle is negative going into the riser.
In cases of severe slugging, the slug catcher must be able to receive a volume of liquid at least equal
to the volume of the riser. However, severe slugging can be mitigated by topsides choking or riser 
base gas lift including self-lifting mechanisms.
PI-SS Indicator (Severe-Slugging Group)

where,

Z = Gas compressibility factor 

R = Gas universal constant
T = Temperature (K)
M = Molecular weight of gas
WG = Gas mass flow rate (kg/s)
WL = Liquid mass flow rate (kg/s)
g =Acceleration due to gravity (m/s 2)
LF = Flowline length (m)

= Average flowline gas holdup

Severe slugging is expected when the Pots’ number is equal to, or less than, unity. Pots’ model can
be used to determine the onset of severe slugging, but the model cannot predict how long the severe
slugs will be and how fast severe slugs will be produced into the separator.
The PI-SS indicator is available as part of the PRIMARY output in PIPESIM.

Task 6: Screening for Severe Riser Slugging

To screen for severe riser slugging:
1. Deactivate the methanol injector and reset the insulation thickness to that determined to prevent

hydrate formation.
2. Under Setup » Define Output, select three cases to print. This reports the full output of each
sensitivity value with the Report tool selections appended to the bottom of each sensitivity output.
3. Perform a System analysis with an inlet pressure of 1,500, outlet pressure calculated and liquid
rates of 8,000; 14,000 and 16,000 BPD.
4. To check for severe slugging:

Case studies
256 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 274/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

a. Configure the Y-axis of the System analysis plot to display the PI-SS number. This represents
the maximum value of the PI-SS number along the flowline.
b. View the Output report by selecting Reports > Output File, to determine the prevalent flow
regime at the riser base for the different rates.

Severe Slugging 8,000 stb/d 14,000 stb/d 16,000 stb/day

PI-SS number at riser base 1.01 1.266 1.332
Flow pattern at riser base Intermittent Intermittent Intermittent
Table 2.7: Results

2.1.4 Slug Catcher Sizing

PIPESIM is frequently used to estimate the capacity requirements for slug catchers. More detailed
analysis is typically performed with transient simulators such as OLGA. For offshore platforms, you
must balance the high cost of added weight to the platform with the potential of a large slug
overwhelming the liquids handling capacity and shutting down the entire system.
There are three typical scenarios to consider in the sizing of slug catchers for this type of system:
• Hydrodynamic slugging
• Pigging
• Ramp-up

Hydrodynamic Slugging
Most multiphase production systems will experience hydrodynamic slugging. Designing systems
simply to avoid hydrodynamic slugging, such as larger pipe ID, is not a common practice. Because
hydrodynamic slugs grow as they progress through the pipe, long pipelines can produce very large
hydrodynamic slugs.
PIPESIM calculates the mean slug length as a function of distance traveled by using the SSB or 
Norris Correlations. A continuous intermittent flow regime is required for this to occur. A probabilistic
model (again, based on Prudhoe Bay field data) is applied to calculate the largest slug out of 10, 100
and 1,000 occurrences. The 1/1000 slug length is often used to determine slug catcher volume
requirement.
The slug output from PIPESIM yields the length and frequency for the selected slug size correlation:
• Mean slug length (distribution is assumed skewed log normal)
• 1 in 1,000 slug length and frequency
• 1 in 100 slug length and frequency
• 1 in 10 slug length and frequency
The preceding probabilities represent various levels of confidence regarding the maximum slug size.
For example, a 1 in thousand slug length of 50 meters indicates there is only 0.1% probability of the
maximum slug length exceeding 50 meters.
Symbols that can be included in the slug output have the following meanings:

Case studies
257 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 275/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

0.0 Flow is not in a slugging regime (as calculated by the relevant flow map correlation at spot
report) and, thus, no hydrodynamic slugs are required.
N/A The slug length calculated using the chosen slugging correlation is negative and, therefore,
slug size is indeterminate at this point in the flowline.

It should be noted that the slug size data output is only printed if SLUG is specified in the
Windows menu option Define Output.

Figure 2.4. Define Output menu options

 Alternatively, you can insert the Report tool and check Slugging values and Sphere-generated Liquid
Volume values, as shown in the next figure.

Case studies
258 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 276/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.5. Selecting report properties

Pigging
In multiphase flow in horizontal and upwards inclined pipe, the gas travels faster than the liquid due
to lower density and lower viscosity. This is called slippage. Multiphase flow correlations predict the
‘slip-ratio’ which depends on many factors, such as fluid properties, pipe diameter and flow regime.
In steady-state flow, the gas travels faster, so it will slip past the liquid and occupy less pipe volume.
This gives rise to a higher liquid volume fraction than if the gas traveled at the same velocity, resulting
in ‘liquid holdup,’ as illustrated in the Liquid Holdup figure, below.
Figure 2.6. Liquid Holdup

Case studies
259
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 277/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

During a pigging operation, a solid object the diameter of the pipeline is sent through the line to push
out liquids and debris. As a pipeline is pigged (see next figure), a volume of liquid builds up ahead of 
the pig and is expelled into the slug catcher as the pig approaches the exit.
PIPESIM considers that the pig travels at the mean fluid velocity and, thus, the volume of liquid that
collects ahead of the pig is a function the degree of slip between the gas and liquid phases (such as
magnitude of liquid holdup). PIPESIM reports this volume as the sphere generated liquid volume
(SGLV). The slip ratio (SR) is also reported, which is the average speed of the fluid divided by the
speed of the liquid.
The volume of liquid expelled at the receiving terminal as a result of pigging can be estimated using
steady-state analysis as a first order approximation.
Figure 2.7. Pigging operation

Ramp-up
When the flow rate into a pipeline increases, the overall liquid holdup typically decreases because
the gas can more efficiently sweep out the liquid phase. When a sudden rate increase (ramp-up)
occurs, the liquid volume in the pipeline is accelerated resulting in a surge.
 A ramp-up operation is illustrated in the next figure. The size of the surge is influenced by the
sensitivity of liquid holdup with respect to the overall flow rate. A simple material balance approach
can be applied to estimate the volume of the associated surge.
For more details, see Cunliffe's method (p.355).

Case studies
260 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 278/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.8. Ramp-up operation

Evaluating Each Scenario

For a more detailed analysis of slug catcher sizing, you should also consider the drainage rates of 
the primary separator and slug catcher. Hydrodynamic slugs and pig-generated slugs typically occur 
over a short duration (minutes), while the surge created by a ramp-up operation can be a long duration
(hours/days).

Task 7: Sizing a Slug Catcher 

In this section, you screen for severe slugging and determine the required size of the slug catcher 
based on the largest of the following criteria, multiplied by a safety factor of 1.2.
Consider these criteria:
• Hydrodynamic slugging, which is the requirement to handle the largest slugs envisaged, chosen
to be statistically the 1/1000 population slug size. This is determined by using the SSB or Norris
Correlations.
• The requirement to handle liquid swept in front of a pig.
• Transient effects, such as the requirement to handle the liquid slug generated when the production
flow is ramped up from 8,000 to 16,000 STB/D, such as Ramp-up surge.

Note: For the purposes of sizing a slug-catcher, it is assumed that severe riser slugging can be
mitigated with topsides choking or riser-based gas lift.

To size the slug catcher:

1. In the Report tool, verify that slugging values and sphere generated liquid volume are selected.
2. Re-run the System analysis configured in the previous .
3. For each sensitivity value, scroll down and read the reported 1/1000 slug volume and the Total
Sphere Generated Liquid Volume So Far.

Case studies
261
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 279/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4. For the ramp-up case, calculate the difference in total liquid holdup, as this will be the surge
volume. You must convert from ft3 > bbl. The conversion factor is 5.615 ft3/bbl.

Note: The surge associated with ramp-up occurs over a much longer time period than the other 
cases. The ramp-up volume does not consider the drainage rate of the separator or the duration
of the ramp-up. See Cunliffe's method (p.355) for information on how to calculate the ramp-up
duration.

5. Inspect the output file and observe the flow regimes along the profile for each case.
6. Based on the results in the table below, select a slug catcher size that will be able to handle the
largest slug volume for all conditions.

Slug Catcher Sizing 8,000 stb/d 14,000 stb/d 16,000 stb/d

1/1000 slug volume (bbl) 165 181 215
Sphere generated liquid volume (bbl) 465 435 427

Ramp-up volume (bbl) 962 – 799 = 163

Design volume for slug catcher (bbl) (use 20% safety 465 * 1.2 = 558
factor)
Table 2.8: Results

2.2 Oil Well Performance Analysis Case Study

This module examines a producing oil well located in the North Sea. You analyze the performance
of this well using NODAL analysis, calibrate black oil fluid (low GOR) using laboratory data, and match
flow correlations with pressure survey data.

You willaalso
gas at lateranalyze the behavior
stage when the well of
is the well to
unable with increased
flow water cut and find an opportunity to inject
naturally.
This case involves the following tasks:
• Build the Well Model (p.263)
• Perform NODAL Analysis (p.266)
• Perform a Pressure/Temperature Profile (p.267)
• Calibrate PVT Data (p.270)
• Match Flow Correlations (p.274)
• Match Inflow Performance (p.277)
• Conduct a Water Cut Sensitivity Analysis (p.278) Analysis
• Evaluate Gas Lift Performance (p.279)
• Work with Multiple Completions (p.280)
• Modeling a Flow Control Valve (p.286)

Case studies
262 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 280/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2.2.1 NODAL Analysis

NODAL analysis is used to evaluate the performance of an oil well. It involves specifying a nodal
point, usually at the bottomhole or wellhead, and dividing the producing system into two parts - the
inflow and the outflow. This is represented graphically in the next figure, Intersection points of the
inflow and outflow performance curves .
The solution node is defined as the location where the pressure differential upstream (inflow) and
downstream (outflow) of the node is zero.
Solution nodes can be judiciously selected to isolate the effect of certain variables. For example, if 
the node is taken at the bottomhole, factors that affect the inflow performance, such as skin factor,
can be analyzed independently of variables that affect the outflow, such as tubing diameter or 
separator pressure.
Figure 2.9. Intersection points of the inflow and outflow performance curves

Getting Started
Before beginning an oil well performance analysis:
1. Select File » New » Well Performance Analysis.
2. From Setup » Units, set the engineering units.

Task 1: Building the Well Model

Model building refers to setting up all objects, from the source to the sink, and defining the properties
of these objects. You can select PIPESIM single branch objects using either the Tool menu or the
toolbar at the top of PIPESIM window.
To build the well model:
1. Select a Vertical Completion object from the single branch toolbar, and place it in the Single
Branch flow diagram.
2. Select a Boundary Node and place it in the flow diagram.

Case studies
263
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 281/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3. Select a Tubing object and connect VertWell_1 to the End Node S1 by clicking and dragging
from VertWell_1 completion to the End Node S1.

Note: The red outlines on VertWell_1 and Tubing_1 indicate that essential input data are missing.

4. Double-click on the completion and enter the properties listed in the table.

Completion model Well PI

Use Vogel? Yes

Case studies
264
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 282/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Completion model Well PI

Reservoir Pressure 3,600 psia
Reservoir Temperature 200 degF
Liq. Productivity Index 8 stb/d/psi
Table 2.9: Reservoir and Inflow Data
5. Double-click on the tubing object and enter the tubing properties based on data listed in the table.

Measured Depth (ft) True Vertical Depth (ft)

0 0
1,000 1,000
2,500 2,450
5,000 4,850
7,500 7,200
9.000 8,550
Table 2.10: Deviation Data

Measured Depth (ft) Ambient Temp. (degF)

0 50
9,000 200
Table 2.11: Geothermal Gradient 

Bottom MD (ft) Internal Diameter (inches)

8,600 3.958
9,000 6.184
Table 2.12: Tubing Data
6. Specify an Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient = 5 btu/hr/ft 2/F (override the default value).

Note: You can use the overall heat transfer coefficient to calculate total heat transfer through the
pipe wall. The overall heat transfer coefficient depends on the fluids and their properties on both
sides of the wall, as well as the properties of the wall and the transmission surface.

7. Click the Summary table button to observe the configuration summary.

8. Set the Distance between nodes to 100 ft.

9. Select Setup »  Black Oil.
10.Enter the fluid properties, as shown in the table. Assume default PVT correlations and no
calibration data.

Water Cut 10 %

Case studies
265 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 283/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

GOR 500 scf/stb

Gas SG 0.8
Water SG 1.05
Oil API 36 ºAPI
Table 2.13: Black Oil PVT Data

Note: The fluid physical properties are calculated over the range of pressures and temperatures
encountered by the fluid. These physical properties are subsequently used by multiphase flow
correlations to determine the phases present, the flow regime, and the pressure losses in single and
multiphase flow regions. The heat transfer calculations use the fluid thermal properties.

11.From the Setup » Flow Correlation, ensure that the Hagedorn-Brown correlation is selected for 
vertical flow and the Beggs-Brill Revised correlation is selected for horizontal flow.

There Select
Note: is the correlation
no universal rule for that is best
selecting a suited for the
multiphase fluid
flow and operating
correlation that isconditions of operating
good for all interest.
scenarios. Refer to the Flow Correlation (p.337) topic for information on the applicability of flow
correlations

12.Save the model as CaseStudy1_Oil_Well.bps.

Task 2: Performing NODAL Analysis

In this section, you perform a NODAL analysis operation for a given outlet (wellhead) pressure to
determine the operating point (intersection) and the absolute open flow potential (AOFP) of the well.
To do this, add a NODAL analysis point at the bottomhole to divide the system into two parts. Part A
extends from reservoir to the bottomhole, while Part B runs from the bottomhole to the wellhead.
To perform a NODAL analysis:
1. Select a NODAL analysis point from the toolbar and drop it near the completion.
2. Click on the tubing and drag its bottom tip over to the NODAL analysis point.
3. Insert a connector to link the completion with the NODAL analysis point.

Case studies
266 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 284/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4. Select Operations  » NODAL Analysis.

5. Enter an Outlet Pressure (Boundary Condition) of 300 psia.
6. Leave Inflow Sensitivity and Outflow Sensitivity empty.

Note: PIPESIM has implemented several modifications in Nodal Analysis calculation. The most
significant is displaying the intersection point on the nodal plot. As a result, you do not depend on

reading
There isfrom the plot
no need and the solution
to specify/change pointsof
number are calculated
points withand
for inflow theoutflow
values presented in Data
curve unless tab.
you wish
to use those data for further processing. The PIPESIM engine automatically determines the
number of points and their spacing for both inflow and outflow curves.

7. Run the model.

8. Inspect the plot and select the Data tab to get these answers.

(Outlet) Wellhead Pressure 300 psia

Operating Point Flow rate 8,510 stb/d
Operating Point BHP 2,536 psia
 AOFP 21,290 stb/d
Table 2.14: Results

Task 3: Performing a Pressure/Temperature Profile

The Pressure/Temperature profile calculates pressure and temperature on a node-by-node basis for 
the system. The results are plotted for pressure or temperature as a function of distance/elevation
along the flow path.

Case studies
267 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 285/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

To estimate bottomhole flowing conditions:

1. Run Operations  » Pressure / Temperature Profile.
2. Enter the Outlet (Tubing head) pressure of 300 psia.
3. Specify the liquid rate as the calculated variable.
4. Leave Sensitivity Data empty.

Note: Inlet and outlet pressure always reference the boundaries of the system. In this particular 
case, inlet pressure is the reservoir pressure, while the outlet pressure corresponds to wellhead
pressure. The inlet pressure is specified at the completion or source level, whereas the outlet
pressure is always specified manually within the operation.

5. Run the model.

Note: PIPESIM generates a Profile plot for every valid combination of inflow-outflow cases.
Because of this, there is no need to run a separate Pressure Temperature Profile operation.

6. Inspect the plot and summary output report to determine answers.

Wellhead Pressure 300 psia

Production Rate 8,518 stb/d
Flowing BHP 2,535 psia
Flowing WHT 134 degF
Depth at which gas appears 7,200 ft
Table 2.15: Results

2.2.2 Fluid Calibration

Fluid properties (also known as PVT properties) are predicted by correlations developed by fitting
experimental fluid data with mathematical models. Various correlations have been developed over 
the years based on experimental data sets covering a range of fluid properties.
The PIPESIM help system describes the range of fluid properties used to develop each correlation,
which helps you select the most appropriate correlation for the fluid at hand. The default correlations
in PIPESIM are based on the overall accuracy of the correlations as applied to a broad range of fluids.
To increase the accuracy of fluid property calculations, PIPESIM provides functionality to match PVT
fluid properties with laboratory data. Calibration of these properties can greatly increase the accuracy

of the correlations over the range of pressures and temperatures for the system being modeled.
For example, calibration of the bubblepoint pressure can result in the initial appearance of gas at a
depth of perhaps a thousand feet higher or lower than an uncalibrated model. This results in a
significantly different mixture fluid density and, thus, a much different elevational pressure gradient.
Likewise, calibration of the fluid viscosity can drastically improve the calculation of the frictional
pressure gradient, especially in heavy oils and emulsions.

Case studies
268 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 286/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

If the calibration data is omitted, PIPESIM calibrates on the basis of oil and gas gravity alone, resulting
in a loss of accuracy.
 After the calibration is performed, a calibration factor calculated as ratio of measured value to the
value calculated by selected correlation.
There are two calibration options available in PIPESIM:
• Single Point calibration
• Multi-Point calibration

Single Point Calibration

In many cases, actual measured values for some properties show a slight variance from calculated
values. When this occurs, it is useful to calibrate the property using the measured point. PIPESIM
can use the known data for the property to calculate a calibration constant Kc;
Kc = Measured Property @(P,T)/Calculated Property @(P,T)
This calibration constant is used to modify all subsequent calculations of the property in question,
that is:
Calibrated value = Kc (Predicted value)

Multi-Point Calibration
In multi-point calibration, black oil correlations are tuned so that the correlation honors all data points
as shown in the next figure.
Figure 2.10. Correlation running through all data points

 A calibration factor is calculated for every measurement point, and a plot is generated for the Pressure
vs. Calibration factor, as shown in the next figure.

Case studies
269
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 287/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.11. Pressure vs. Calibration factor 

Note: This is not a best fit method, as all points are fitted exactly. Any outlying data should be
smoothed before entering it into PIPESIM.

Task 4: Calibrating PVT Data

To calibrate PVT data:
1. From Setup » Black Oil, select the Viscosity Data tab.
2. Enter the following calibration data:
3. Under Dead Oil Viscosity, select User’s 2 Data points as the correlation.
4. Enter the following measurements:

Property Temperature (degF) Value

Viscosity 200 1.5 cp
60 10 cp
Table 2.16: Dead Oil Viscosity Measureents
5. For Live Oil Viscosity, ensure that the Chew and Connally correlation is selected.
6. For the Emulsion Viscosity Method, select the Brinkman 1952 correlation.
7. For the Undersaturated Oil Viscosity, select the Bergman-Sutton correlation.
8. Select the Advanced Calibration Data tab and click Single-Point Calibration.
9. Enter the measured data to calibrate the PVT model.

Range Property Value Pressure (psia) Temp (degF)

P > Pb OFVF 1.18 3,000 200
P = Pb Sat. Gas 500 scf/stb 2,100 200
P <= Pb OFVF 1.22 2,100 200
Live Oil Viscosity 1.1 cp 2,100 200
Gas viscosity 0.029 cp 2,100 200

Case studies
270 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 288/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Range Property Value Pressure (psia) Temp (degF)

Gas Z factor 0.8 2,100 200
Table 2.17: PVT Calibration Data
10.Select the following PVT correlations:

Property Correlation
Saturated gas Lasater  
OFVF at / below bubblepoint Standing
Live oil viscosity Chew and Connally
Gas Z Standing

Property Correlation
Saturated gas Lasater  

OFVF at/below bubblepoint Standing

Live oil viscosity Chew and Connally
Gas Z Standing
11.From the Advanced Calibration Data tab, select Plot PVT Data (Laboratory Conditions GOR =
GSAT) to generate a plot of the PVT properties for various pressures and temperatures.
12.Select Series and change the y-axis to Oil Formation Volume Factor .
13.Verify that the predicted values match the calibration points.

14.Repeat steps 12 and 13 for Oil viscosity and Gas viscosity to ensure the predicted values are
correct.

Case studies
271
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 289/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: Dead Oil conditions are at 14.7 psia.

Notice that the predicted oil viscosity value at a temperature of 60 degF and 14.7 psia is 10.0 P,
consistent with the laboratory dead oil data.
15.Now that the fluid model is calibrated, re-run the Pressure-Temperature Profile.
16.Determine the flowing bottomhole pressure, flowing wellhead temperature, and production rate
for the given wellhead pressure.
17.Compare your answers to the uncalibrated model results from 2.15 (p.268).
18.Inspect the plot and summary output to determine answers.

Wellhead Pressure Calibrated Uncalibrated

Production Rate 7,808 stb/d 8,518 stb/d
Flowing BHP 2,624 psia 2,535 psia
Flowing WHT 129 defF 134 degF
Depth where gas appears 6,730 ft 7,200 ft
Table 2.18: Results

Note:
The quantity defined by PIPESIM as 'stock tank' GOR is actually the produced GOR, a dynamic
property. The solution gas GOR calibration, an intrinsic property, is specific to the reservoir oil at
reservoir conditions and is obtained through laboratory experiments.
The solution gas liberated at standard conditions is called the associated gas. Produced gas can also
include a contribution from the gas cap, otherwise known as free gas. In other words:
Produced gas = associated (solution) gas + free gas

Case studies
272 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 290/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

If free gas is produced, the produced GOR will be higher than the solution GOR and, therefore, the
calculated bubblepoint based on the specified produced GOR will be higher than that defined by the
solution GOR calibration point.

2.2.3 Pressure/Temperature Matching

The pressure distribution of the fluid as it flows though the tubing is very important in production
engineering tasks such as selecting tubing sizes, forecasting well productivity, and designing artificial
lift installations.
Pressure distribution along particular tubing can be obtained from actual measurements taken with
pressure gauges using wireline/slickline at different depths in the well while it is flowing at a constant
rate. The result of this measurement is a plot of fluid pressure along tubing versus vertical depth,
called a Flowing Gradient survey (FGS) and shown in the next figure.
Figure 2.12. Flowing Gradient Survey 

When an FGS is available, it is always best to compare different multiphase flow correlations with the
FGS, to determine the one that best matches the FGS.
 Additionally, the correlation can be tuned to more accurately match the data. Optimization routines
in PIPESIM allow the PIPESIM Single Branch engine to calculate optimal values of parameters to
match measured pressure and/or temperature data.
The match is performed by tuning parameters, such as friction and hold-up factor multiplier for 
pressure matching, and a U-factor multiplier for temperature matching. After the model is tuned, you
should validate it against test data measured at different conditions.

Case studies
273
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 291/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: WARNING: Avoid using large tuning factors. The recommended tuning range of friction and
holdup factor multipliers are +/- 15% (such as 0.85 - 1.15). If it needs > -/+ 15% to match the actual
measured data, you should review the data again. Large adjustments in friction and holdup factors
could also be due to poor fluid characterizations.

Task 5: Matching Flow Correlations

 An FGS is available for this well. In this section, you use the measured data to select the most
appropriate vertical flow correlation.
1. Select Data » Load/Add Measured Data.
2. Click New.
3. Enter the test data, as shown.

4. Click Save Changes.

Case studies
274
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 292/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5. Go to Operations  » Data Matching and enter the range of calibration factors, as shown in the
figure.

Note: You can uncheck the calibration factor for horizontal flow as there is no horizontal flow in
this model.

6. Click the Flow Correlation tab and select some of the vertical multiphase flow correlations, as
shown below.

Case studies
275 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 293/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

7. Go to the Run tab and specify the given Outlet Pressure (Wellhead) and Liquid Rate.
8. Select Inlet Pressure as the calculated variable and click Run model.

9. View the results in Data Matching window to determine which flow correlation agrees most
closely with the measured data.
10.Select the best correlation and click Save Selected Results to update the model with this
correlation and the matched values for the friction factor, holdup factor, and U-Value multipliers.

Case studies
276 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 294/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: Weighting factors are used to set the relative importance of the pressure and temperature
error terms if both pressure and temperature data have been specified.

Wellhead Pressure 300 psia

Best Vertical Correlation TUFFP-2Phase

Flowing BHP 2,681 psia
Head Factor Multiplier 1.0059
Friction Factor Multiplier 0.93035
U Factor Multiplier 0.7907
Table 2.19: Results

Task 6: Matching Inflow Performance

It is known from a pressure gradient survey that this particular well can flow 6,500 bbl/d of liquid
against 300 psia of wellhead pressure. Using the correct flow correlation from the previous , run the
Pressure/Temperature profile to determine how much this well can produce for the same boundary
conditions.
If the calculated flow rate is different from measured flow rate (6,500 bbl/d), it is time to determine the
Productivity Index (PI) that matches the test data.
In this section, you also determine the absolute open flow potential (AOFP) of the well with the new
PI, given a reservoir pressure known to be 3,600 psia.

Note: The Productivity Index (PI)is expected to be in the range from 5 to10 stb/d/psi.

To perform the IPR matching:

1. Select Operations  » Pressure/Temperature Profile.
2. Enter the Outlet Pressure and the Liquid Rate.
3. Select the User variable as the calculated variable and click Define.
4. Select Object VertWell_1 and the Variable Productivity Index.
5. Enter the expected range of PI and click OK.

Case studies
277 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 295/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

6. Run the model and review the PsPlot for calculated Liquid PI.

Note: IMPORTANT: Update the PI for the completion with the matched value.

Matched PI 6.669126
Table 2.20: Results

2.2.4 Well Performance Analysis

 After you define the well and fluids descriptions and match them to generate an accurate model for 
the well, several simulation operations can be performed to evaluate a variety of operating scenarios.

Task 7: Conducting a Water Cut Sensitivity Analysis

 After an initial design has been made, it is important to evaluate how the system will respond to
changing operating conditions. Increase in water production in the late life of oil and gas fields is
inevitable, whether because of water injection or water coning.

Using thewater
possible wellhead pressure
cut this and
well will reservoir pressure from the previous , determine the highest
produce.

Note: Change the completion PI in the well model from the previous .

There are two methods available to solve this problem – Method A: System analysis and Method B:
NODAL analysis.

Case studies
278 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 296/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Method A — System Analysis

To run a System analysis:
1. Select Operations  » System Analysis and enter the Outlet Pressure.
2. Calculate the liquid rate.
3. For the X-axis variable, select Fluid Data.
4. Enter the water cut values of 30 to 70% in increments of 5%.
5. Leave Sensitivity Variable 1 empty.
6. Run the model to generate a plot of calculated liquid rate vs. water cut.
7. Interpolate to identify the limiting water cut at which the production rate continues to be calculated.

Note: You may need to rerun the model using finer sensitivity values for the water cut.

Method B — NODAL Analysis

To run a NODAL analysis:

1. Select Operations  » NODAL Analysis
2. Enter the Outlet Pressure.
3. Leave Inflow Sensitivity empty.
4. Enter the water cut values of 30 to 70% in increments of 5%.
5. Click the Limits button and change the number of outflow points to display to 50.
6. Run the model to generate the NODAL analysis plot.
7. Identify the lowest water cut for which there is no solution point.

Note: You may need to rerun the model using finer sensitivity values for the water cut.

Critical Water Cut 53.4%

Table 2.21: Results

Task 8: Evaluating Gas Lift Performance

The basic principle behind gas lift injection in oil wells is to lower the density of the produced fluid in
the tubing. This results in a reduction of the elevational component of the pressure gradient above
the point of injection and a lower bottomhole pressure. Lowering the bottomhole pressure increases
reservoir drawdown and, thus, production rate.
In this section, you examine how this well responds to gas lift by introducing a Gas Lift Injection point
at 8,000 feet MD in the tubing equipment.
You have two tasks to accomplish:
• Determine how the well responds to gas lift when the water cut is 10% and 60%.
• Determine the liquid production rates as a function of the gas lift rate and water cut.

Case studies
279
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 297/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Wellhead Pressure (psia) 300

Injection Gas SG 0.6
Injection Gas Surface Temp (degF) 100
Table 2.22: Gas Lift Data

To evaluate gas lift performance:

1. Double-click on Tubing and select the Downhole Equipment tab.
2. Under Equipment, select Gas Lift Injection and specify a depth of 8000 ft. MD.
3. Click Properties .
4. Enter a default gas lift rate of 1 mmscf/d.
5. Go to Operations  » Artificial Lift Performance and enter the Outlet Pressure.
6. For Sensitivity Data, enter water cut values of 10% and 60%.
7. For the Gas Lift Injection Rate:
a. Select Range.
b. Enter a start value of 1.0.
c. Enter an end value of 10.0.
d. Enter increments of 0.5.
8. Run the model to generate a plot of calculated liquid rate vs. gas lift rate for different water cuts.
9. Inspect the plot and summary output to determine answers.

Gas Lift Rate (mmscf/d) Liq. Prod. Rate (stb/d) @ 10% Liq. Prod. Rate (stb/d) @ 60%
Wcut Wcut

1 7,918 5,364
2 8,800 6,349
4 9,649 7,122
6 10,101 7,400
10 10,485 6,846
Table 2.23: Results

Task 9: Working with Multiple Completions

Log analysis shows that a shallow gas zone exists at a TVD of 7,500 feet. As an alternative to gas
lift injection, you can investigate the benefits of perforating this zone and self lifting the well.

Case studies
280 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 298/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.13. Shallow zone at 7,500 feet 

Defining a Second Completion

To define a second completion:
1. Insert a second vertical completion below the NODAL analysis point.
2. Connect to the original completion using a separate tubing model, as shown below.

3. Modify the upper tubing string to extend only to the top of the upper perforations.
a. Modify the Deviation survey such that it will extend to only 7,200 feet TVD.

Case studies
281
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 299/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

b. Modify the Geothermal survey such that the ambient temperature at an MD of 7,500 feet is
180 degF.
c. In the Tubing Configurations tab, specify a bottom MD of 7,500 feet and a tubing ID of 3.958
inches.
d. In the Downhole Equipment tab, remove the gas lift injection.
e. Click OK to close the menu.
4. Double-click on the lower tubing string to define its properties,
a. In the Deviation Survey tab, define the lower tubing string profile, as shown.

Case studies
282 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 300/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

b. In the Geothermal Survey tab, specify temperatures of 180 degF at 7,500 feet and 200 degF
at 9,000 feet.
c. Specify the U value as 5 Btu/hr/ft2/F.

d. In the Tubing Configuration tab, specify a tubing ID of 3.958 inches to a depth of 8,600 feet
MD and 6.184 inches to a depth of 9,000 feet.
e. Click OK to close the menu.
5. With no test data at hand, model the reservoir performance of the upper zone using the pseudo-
steady state Darcy equation. Specify the upper completion using the following data:

Model Pseudo-steady state

Basis of IPR Calculation Gas
Use Pseudo-pressures? yes
Reservoir pressure 3,000 psia
Reservoir Temperature 180 degF
Thickness 5 feet
Permeability 20 md
Mechanical Skin 0

Case studies
283
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 301/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Model Pseudo-steady state

Rate Dependant Skin 0
Table 2.24: Reservoir Properties — Upper Gas Zone
6. Select the Fluid model tab within the completion dialog and enter the following:
a. Use a locally-defined fluid model with an OGR of 0 STB/mmscfd and a WGR of 0 (all gas).
b. Specify a gas gravity of 0.67.
c. Leave all other properties and correlations at their default settings.

Note: The fluid data used for a well/source is defined by a default, local data set or an override
value [for water cut and/or GOR/GLR/OGR/LGR]. If there are multiple fluids present in the
system with different intrinsic properties, define the main fluid as the default and all others as
local fluids.

7. To analyze the effect of perforating the upper zone (compared with gas lift injection), run a
Pressure/Temperature Profile for the 60% water cut case.
a. From Setup » Black Oil, set the water cut to 60%.

Note: This water cut affects only the lower zone because the lower zone uses the default fluid
model, while the upper zone is defined with a local fluid model.

b. Select Operations  » Pressure/Temperature Profile.

c. Specify the Outlet Pressure as 300 psia.
d. Specify the Mass Rate as the Calculated Variable.
e. Run the model. f. Inspect the output file to determine the results.

Wellhead Pressure 300 psia

Liquid Rate (stb/d) 6,885
Gas Rate (upper zone) (mmscfd) 4.161
Table 2.25: Results

2.2.5 Flow Control Valve

 A downhole flow control valve (FCV) allows you to model so-called 'intelligent' or 'smart' wells. The
methodology implemented provides a simple way of modeling single branch (non-multilateral)
intelligent wells in which FCVs are located close to the reservoir.
 An FCV can restrict the completion flow rate through the system; however, they are available only
for vertical completions. The purpose of an FCV is to provide a restriction to fluid flow, thereby
reducing the productivity (or injectivity) of a given completion. They are useful in a model containing
multiple completions.
 An FCV is very similar to a choke. Like a choke, it can be modeled as a fixed-size orifice, in which
form it presents a restriction to flow resulting in a pressure drop that increases as flow rate increases.

Case studies
284
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 302/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Unlike a choke however, a maximum flow rate can also be specified. This is applied to the completion
and, if necessary, the choke bean diameter is reduced to honor the limit. The choke diameter and
flow rate limit can be applied separately or together. If they are both supplied, they are treated as
maximum limits.
 As shown in next figure, the Flow Control Valve dialog uses radio buttons to present a choice between
a Generic valve and a Specific valve.
Figure 2.14. Flow Control Valve properties

 A generic valve is specified with its Equivalent Choke Area, Gas and Liquid Flow Coefficients, and
choice of Gas Choke Equation method. The choke area can be omitted if a Maximum Rate Through
Valve is specified. If it is present, the FCV is modeled with that choke area but, if the resulting flow
rate exceeds the limit, the area is reduced to honor the limit.

Case studies
285 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 303/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

You must choose a specific valve from the list of available valves provided in the PIPESIM database.
Many of the specific valves are multi-position devices, as they allow you to select the effective choke
area from a range of pre-installed fixed chokes.
If a flow rate limit is supplied, the simulation selects the choke position required to honor the limit.
Because the choke area cannot be calculated to match the limit exactly, this usually results in the
flow rate being lower than the limit.
The valve position can be specified or omitted. If specified, the FCV is modeled with the corresponding
choke area, but if the resulting flow rate exceeds the limit, a lower position number is used.
Valve positions are numbered in order of increasing choke size, starting with position zero. This
position usually specifies a diameter of zero to allow the valve to be shut. An FCV can have as many
as 30 positions.

Task 10: Modeling a Flow Control Valve

 A formation integrity test indicates you should not flow more than 2 mmscfd of gas from the upper 
formation. To make sure, install the FCV in the upper completion.
To model a flow control valve:
1. Double-click on the upper completion and check Flow Control Valve.
2. In the FCV Properties window, set the Maximum Rate through Valve to 2 mmscfd.
3. Leave Equivalent Choke Area empty.
4. Select Operations  » Pressure Temperature Profile. Ensure that the Liquid Rate is the
calculated variable and the outlet pressure is set to 300 psia.
5. Run the model and view the output file for Bean Size. Required Bean Size: 0.046 in2
6. (Optional) Select any Specific Valve to sensitize on FCV and generate a plot liquid flow rate vs.
FCV position.

Note: TIP: Select SLB : TRFC-HN-AIS value and use System Analysis and mass flow rate.

2.3 Gas Well Performance Analysis Case Study

 A gas well has been drilled for which Drill Stem Test (DST) and compositional fluid data are available.
In this section, you will model the performance of this well.
In this case study, you will perform the following tasks:
• Create a Compositional Fluid Model for a Gas Well (p.291)

• Calculate Gas Well Deliverability (p.294)

• Calibrate the Inflow Model Using Multipoint Test Data (p.297)
• Select a Tubing Size (p.299)
• Model a Flowline and Choke (p.302)
• Predict Future Production Rates (p.303)
• Determine a Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading (p.305)

Case studies
286 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 304/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2.3.1 Compositional Fluid Modeling

PIPESIM offers fully compositional fluid modeling as an alternative to the Black Oil model.
Compositional fluid modeling is generally regarded as more accurate, especially for wet gas,
condensate and volatile oil systems. However, detailed compositional data is less frequently available
to the production engineer.
PIPESIM currently has access to two compositional PVT Frameworks that provide several PVT flash
packages.
Original PIPESIM PVT Framework:
• SIS Flash, now deprecated.
• Multiflash, a third-party compositional package (InfoChem).
New PVT Toolbox Framework (available after PIPESIM 2010.1):
• Eclipse 300 Flash, a new interface to ECLIPSE two-phase flash, allowing additional Equation of 
States. This is the same Equation of State package used by other GeoQuest products, such as
ECLIPSE Compositional, PVTi, VFPi, and others.
• DBR Flash, two-phase flash developed by the Schlumberger DBR Technology Center. It has a
more extensive component library than ECLIPSE Flash.
• NIST Refprop Flash, two-phase flash using HelmHoltz Equation of State.
• GERG 2008, two-phase flash using HelmHoltz Equation of State.

Equations of State (EoS)

Equations of State describe the pressure, volume and temperature (PVT) behavior of pure
components and mixtures. Most thermodynamic and transport properties are derived from the
Equation of State. They are a function of pressure and temperature.

One of the simplest Equations of State for this purpose is the ideal gas law, PV=nRT, which is roughly
accurate for gases at low pressures and high temperatures.

Note: The Black Oil model uses this equation along with a compressibility factor (z) to account for 
non-ideal behavior.

However, this equation becomes increasingly inaccurate at higher pressures and temperatures, and
it fails to predict condensation from a gas to a liquid. As a result, much more accurate Equations of 
State have been developed for gases and liquids.
The Equations of State available in PIPESIM include:

SIS Flash • 2-Parameter Peng-Robinson

• 3-Parameter Peng-Robinson
• 2-Parameter Peng-Robinson (advanced)
• 3-Parameter Peng-Robinson (advanced).
Multiflash • Standard Peng-Robinson
• Advanced Peng-Robinson

Case studies
287 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 305/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Standard Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK)

• Advanced Soave-Redlich-Kwong (SRK)
• Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling (BWRS)
• Association (CPA).
DBR Flash • Peng-Robinson (with/without Volume Shift)
• Soave-Redlich-Kwong (with/without Volume Shift Correction).
ECLIPSE 300 Flash • Peng-Robinson (with/without Volume Shift + Accentric Factor Correction)
• Soave-Redlich-Kwong (with/without Volume Shift Correction).
NIST Refprop • HelmHoltz Equation of State
Flash
GERG 2008 • HelmHoltz Equation of State

Viscosity

Compositional fluid models also use Viscosity models based on corresponding state theory. Available
Viscosity models include:
• Pederson (default)
• Lohrenz-Bray-Clark (LBC)
• Aasberg-Petersen
Comparative testing has shown the Pedersen method to be the most widely applicable and accurate
for oil and gas viscosity predictions. Multiflash uses the Pedersen method as the default viscosity
model, though an option is available to choose the LBC model for backward compatibility.
The choice you make of the Equation of State has a large effect on the viscosities predicted by these
methods. The LBC method is more sensitive to the Equation of State effects than the Pedersen
method.
Figure 2.15. Selecting the default viscosity option

Binary Interaction Parameter (BIP) Set

Binary interaction parameters (BIPs) are adjustable factors used to alter the predictions from a model
until the predictions match experimental data as closely as possible.

Case studies
288 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 306/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

BIPs are usually generated by fitting experimental VLE or LLE data to the model in question. BIPs
apply between pairs of components, although the fitting procedure can be based on both binary and
multi-component phase equilibrium information.
Figure 2.16. Selecting a BIP in the Compositional Properties window 

Emulsion Viscosities
 An emulsion is a mixture of two immiscible liquid phases. One phase (the dispersed phase) is carried
as droplets in the other (the continuous phase). In oil/water systems at low water cuts, oil is usually
the continuous phase.
 As water cut is increased, there comes a point at which phase inversion occurs, and water becomes
the continuous phase. This is the Critical Water cut of Phase Inversion, otherwise called the cutoff,
which occurs typically between 55% and 70% water cut. The viscosity of the mixture is usually highest
at, and just below, the cutoff.

Emulsion viscosities can be many times higher than the viscosity of either phase alone.
Three mixing rules have been implemented that are identical to the options currently available in the
Black Oil section.
You can choose any of these options:
• Set to oil viscosity
• Volume ratio of oil and water viscosities
• Woelflin, which uses Woelflin correlation at water cut less than, or equal to, CUTOFF, and water 
viscosity at water cut greater than CUTOFF.

Case studies
289
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 307/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.17. Mixing Options

Flashing Options
Flash calculations are an integral part of all reservoir and process engineering calculations. They are
required whenever it is desirable to know the amounts (in moles) of hydrocarbon liquid and gas
coexisting in a reservoir or a vessel at a given pressure and temperature.
These calculations are also performed to determine the composition of the existing hydrocarbon
phases.
Given the overall composition of a hydrocarbon system at a specified pressure and temperature, flash
calculations can determine four factors:
• Moles of the gas phase
• Moles of the liquid phase
• Composition of the liquid phase
• Composition of the gas phase
The compositional module uses inline flashing (PVT tables built in memory) as the default mode of 
compositional simulation. For inline flashing, PIPESIM has three options – Interpolation, Interpolation
when close to phase boundary, and Rigorous.

Interpolation To maximize the speed of the simulation, not all requested P/T points are
flashed. A pressure/temperature grid is defined and only these points are
created.
For points not lying exactly on a grid point, four-point interpolation is used. The
default grid points can be changed via the compositional option.
This is the fastest, but least accurate, method.

Interpolation In a case where one or more of the four points used for the interpolation is in a
when close to a different phase, a full flash is performed and the data point added to the table.
Phase Boundary This will improve accuracy, but at the cost of speed.
Rigorous A full flash is always performed. Very accurate, but slow!

Case studies
290 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 308/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.18. Flashing options

Task 1: Creating a Compositional Fluid Model for a Gas Well

To create a compositional fluid model:
1. Start with a new PIPESIM case – Well Performance Analysis.
2. Open the Compositional Fluid Template menu by selecting Setup » Compositional Template.
3. Choose PVT Framework as PIPESIM and select Multiflash as PVT Package.

Note: Schlumberger employees select PVT Toolbox Framework, E300 Flash Package. Your 
results will be slightly different.

4. Click the Component Selection tab.

5. Add following library components by selecting the desired components from the list and click Add
>>.

Methane Butane
Ethane Isopentane
Propane Pentane

Case studies
291
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 309/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Isobutane Hexane
Table 2.26: Components
6. Add the C7+ pseudo-component:
a. Select the Petroleum Fractions tab.
b. Enter the pseudo-component name and data.
c. Highlight the row number for the pseudo-component and click Add to Composition.

C7+ BP 214 degF

C7+ MW 115
C7+ SG 0.683
Table 2.27: Pseudo-Component Stock Tank Properties
7. Leave Property Models as default.
8. Open the Compositional (Local Default) menu by selecting Setup » Compositional (local
default).
9. Under the Component Selection tab, you will notice all the components pre-defined in step-4
above. Add the mole fraction to these components.

Methane 78
Ethane 8
Propane 3.5
Isobutane 1.2
Butane 1.5

Isopentane 0.8
Pentane 0.5
Hexane 0.5
C7+
Table 2.28: Componistion (%)
10.To determine the water content at saturation at reservoir conditions:
a. Go back to the Compositional Template UI and add Water as additional component.
b. Now come back to Compositional (Local default) UI and add an arbitrary amount of water,
such as 20 moles, to the composition.
c. Select the Flash/Separation tab.
d. Click the PT button and enter the reservoir pressure and temperature, 4,600 psia and 280
degF, respectively.
e. Perform a flash and read the water content for the vapor fraction from the screen.

Case studies
292 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 310/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The hydrocarbon vapor components will be normalized to include the mole fraction of 
water.

f. Copy and paste (Ctrl + C and Ctrl + V) the water and the normalized hydrocarbon composition
back into the compositional editor main screen.

Note: Water can be carried along with the gas in the vapor phase or entrained in the gas in
droplet form. There exists at any temperature and pressure a maximum amount of water vapor 
that a gas is able to hold. A gas is completely saturated when it contains the maximum amount
of water vapor for the given pressure and temperature conditions. Keeping the volume and
pressure constant on water vapor-saturated gas, water will condense out at lower 
temperatures because the capacity of the gas to hold water is less. The same is true if the
volume and temperature are kept constant, but the pressure is allowed to increase.

11.Click Phase Envelope to generate a phase envelope using the water-saturated composition.
12.From the main Component Selection tab, click Export, name the composition sat_gas and click
Save.
13.Select Setup » Flow Correlations and choose Gray Modified for the vertical flow correlation.
14.Select File » Save As and save the model as GasWell.bps .

Case studies
293
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 311/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2.3.2 Gas Well Deliverability

Based on the analysis for flow data obtained from a large number of gas wells, Rawlins and
Schellhardt (1936) presented a relationship between the gas flow rate and pressure drawdown that
can be expressed as:

Q SC  = C ( p R2  − p w2f  )2

Where

Q SC  = gas rate (mmscf/d)

 p R  = average reservoirpressure (PSIA)

 p wf   = flowing bottomholepressure

C = flow coefficient (mmscf/day/psi2)

n = non-Darcy exponent
The exponent n is intended to account for the additional pressure drop caused by the high-velocity
gas flow, such as turbulence. Depending on the flowing conditions, the exponent n can vary from 1.0
for completely laminar flow to 0.5 for fully turbulent flow.
The performance coefficient C in above equation is included to account for:
• Reservoir rock properties
• Fluid properties
• Reservoir flow geometry
This equation is commonly called the deliverability or back-pressure equation. If you can determine
the coefficients of the equation - n and C - you can calculate the gas flow rate Qsc at any bottomhole
flow pressure pwf  and construct the IPR curve.
There are essentially three types of deliverability tests:
• Conventional deliverability (back-pressure) test
• Isochronal test
• Modified isochronal test
Essentially, these tests consist of flowing wells at multiple rates and measuring the bottomhole flowing
pressure as a function of time. When the recorded data are properly analyzed, it is possible to
determine the flow potential and establish the inflow performance relationships of the gas well.

2.3.3 Task 2: Calculating Gas Well Deliverability

In this section, you construct the simple physical well model shown below and perform a simulation
to calculate deliverability.
1. Using the Single Branch toolbar, insert a vertical completion, tubing, and NODAL analysis point,
as shown in the figure.

Case studies
294
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 312/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2. Edit the reservoir and tubing data according to the data in the table.

Static Pres 4,600 psia

Reservoir Temp. 280 degF
Gas PI 1 x 10-6 mmscf/d/psi2
Table 2.29: Reservoir Data

Mid perf TVD 11,000 feet

Mid perf MD 11,000 feet

 Ambient temp 30 degF
EOT MD 10,950 feet
Tubing ID 3.476 inches
Casing ID 8.681 inches
Table 2.30: Tubing Data

The vertical completion properties for Well_1 are shown in the figure below, followed by an
example of tubing properties for a simple model.

Case studies
295 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 313/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3. Select Operations  » Pressure/Temperature Profile Operation.

a. Select the Gas Rate as the calculated variable.
b. Specify an Outlet Pressure of 800 psia and click Run. The flow rate displays below the plot.
You can read the bottomhole flowing pressure on the plot.
4. On the Plot menu, select Series.

Case studies
296 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 314/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5. Change the Y-axis to Temperature . You can read the bottomhole and wellhead temperatures on
the plot.

Pres = 4,600 psia, Tres = 280 degF

% H2O @ saturation 1.8549
Po = 800 psia
QG 18.21 mmscfd
Pwf  1,716 psia
BHT 237 degF
WHT 169 degF
Table 2.31: Results

Task 3: Calibrating the Inflow Model Using Multipoint Test Data

In this section,
producing you use the back-pressure
at a pseudo-steady state. Usingequation for inflow
a multipoint performance
well test, the C andrelationship
n parametersfor are
a gas well
calculated.
1. Double-click Completion .
2. Choose the Back Pressure Equation from the drop-down menu.
3. Click Calculate/Graph and enter the test data listed in the table.

QGas (mmscf/d) Pwf (psia)

9.7 3,000
11.9 2,500
14.3 1,800
Table 2.32: Multiple Test Data
4. Click Plot IPR.

Case studies
297 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 315/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: To position data points, right-click and drag on a plot. To zoom in, click and drag a window
across the data points towards the lower right.To zoom out, click and drag a window towards the
upper-left.

5. Rerun the Pressure/Temperature Profile operation to determine the following:

• Gas flow rate
• Bottomhole flowing pressure
• Bottomhole flowing temperature
• Wellhead temperature
6. Inspect the profile plot and summary file to determine the results.

Back Pressure Equation

Parameter C 7.9793682e-007
Parameter n 1
Po = 800 psia
QG 14.97 mmscfd
Pwf  1,548 psia
Tbh (degF) 233 degF
Twh (degF) 165 degF
Table 2.33: Results

2.3.4 Erosion Prediction

Erosion has been long recognized as a potential source of problems in oil and gas production
systems. Erosion can occur in solids-free fluids but, usually, it is caused by entrained solids (sand).
Two erosion models are available in PIPESIM – API 14 E and Salama.
Figure 2.19. Selecting erosion options

Case studies
298 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 316/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

API 14 E
The API 14 E model comes from the American Petroleum Institute, Recommended Practice, number 
14 E. This is a solids-free model which calculates only an erosion velocity (no erosion rate). The
erosion velocity Ve is calculated with the formula:

V   = C 
 p m 

Where pm is the fluid mean density and C is an empirical constant. C has dimensions of (mass/
(length*time2)) 0.5. Its default value in engineering units is 100, which corresponds to 122 in SI units.
The current practice for eliminating erosional problems in piping systems is to limit the flow velocity
to that calculated by this correlation.

Salama
The Salama model was published in Journal of Energy Resources Technology, Vol 122, June 2000,
" An Alternative to API 14 E Erosional Velocity Limits for Sand Laden Fluids," by Mamdouh M. Salama.
This model calculates erosion rate and erosional velocity. The parameters required for the model are
 Acceptable Erosion rate, Sand production ratio, Sand Grain Size, Geometry Constant and Efficiency.
The equations in Salama's paper use a sand rate in Kg/day. This is obtained from the supplied volume
ratio using Salama's 'typical value' for sand density - 2650 kg/m 3.

Task 4: Selecting a Tubing Size

In this section, you perform a NODAL analysis to select an optimum tubing size. The available tubing
sizes have IDs of 2.992 inches, 3.958 inches, 4.892 inches, and 6.184 inches.
Your final decision will be based on these criteria:

• Flow rate (High)

• Erosional velocity ratio (<1).
• Cost (Generally increases with size)
To select a tubing size:
1. Ensure that the model includes a NODAL analysis object located between the tubing and the
completion.
2. Select Operations  » NODAL analysis.
a. Enter 800 psia as the Outlet Pressure.
b. Enter the tubing IDs as the Outflow Sensitivity.
c. Run the model and observe the outflow curves.

Case studies
299
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 317/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3. Another way to analyze the effect of the tubing ID, is to perform a Pressure/Temperature profile.
a. Select Operations  » Pressure/Temperature Profile.
b. Enter the tubing size as the sensitivity.
c. Specify the flow rate as the calculated variable and run the model.
d. From the profile plot, change the X-axis to Erosional Velocity Ratio (EVR = actual velocity /
 API 14e limit) by selecting the Series option from the toolbar. This lets you determine the
maximum erosional velocity ratio.

Po = 800 psia
QG 15.39 mmscfd
Pwf  1,370 psia
BHT 229 degF
WHT 163 degF
Well-head, Selected Tubing

Max Erosional velocity ratio 0.7657

Table 2.34: Results

2.3.5 Choke Modeling

Wellhead chokes are used to limit production rates to meet surface constraints, protect surface
equipment from slugging, avoid sand problems due to high drawdown, and control flow rate to avoid

Case studies
300 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 318/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

water or gas coning. Placing a choke at the wellhead increases the wellhead pressure and, thus, the
flowing bottomhole pressure which reduces production rate.
Pressure drop across wellhead chokes is usually very significant, and various choke flow models are
available for critical (sonic) and sub-critical flow as shown in the next figure.

Figure 2.20. Gas fraction in the fluid and flow regimes

Sound waves and pressure waves are both mechanical waves. When the fluid flow velocity in a choke
reaches the traveling velocity of sound in the fluid under the in situ condition, the flow is called sonic
flow. Under sonic flow conditions, the pressure wave downstream of the choke cannot go upstream
through the choke because the medium (fluid) is traveling in the opposite direction at the same
velocity. As a result, a pressure discontinuity exists at the choke, which means that the downstream
pressure does not affect the upstream pressure.
Because of the pressure discontinuity at the choke, any change in the downstream pressure cannot
be detected from the upstream pressure gauge. Any change in the upstream pressure cannot be
detected from the downstream pressure gauge either. This sonic flow provides a unique choke feature
that stabilizes the well production rate and separation operation conditions.

Case studies
301
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 319/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Whether a sonic flow exists at a choke depends on a downstream-to-upstream pressure ratio. If this
pressure ratio is less than a critical pressure ratio, sonic (critical) flow exists. If this pressure ratio is
greater than, or equal to, the critical pressure ratio, sub-sonic (sub-critical) flow exists.
The critical pressure ratio is about 0.55 for natural gas, and a similar constant is used for oil flow.
In some wells, chokes are installed in the lower section of tubing strings. This choke arrangement
reduces wellhead pressure and enhances oil production rate as a result of gas expansion in the tubing
string. For gas wells, a downhole choke can reduce the risk of gas hydrates. A major disadvantage
of using downhole chokes is that replacing a choke is costly.

Task 5: Modeling a Flowline and Choke

In this section, you add a horizontal flow line and a choke to the model. You use the gas rate calculated
in the previous to determine the choke bean size that results in a manifold (end of flowline) pressure
of 710 psia.
To model a flowline and choke:
1. Ensure the tubing ID is set to 3.958 inches.
2. Insert a choke at the wellhead and reconnect the tubing to the choke.
3. Select the mechanistic model for both critical and sub-critical flow.

Note: TIP: You can enter any choke size you wish, but it will be overridden by the sensitivity
variable.

4. Insert a flowline downstream of the choke and connect it to a node representing the manifold.
5. Specify the flowline using the data in the table.

Flow-line length 300 feet

Flow-line ID 6 inches
Pipe Roughness 0.001 inches
Wall thickness 0.5 inches
 Ambient Temp 60 degF

6. Select Operations  » Pressure Temperature Profile.

Case studies
302 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 320/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

a. Select User Variable as calculated and input a choke size. A good estimate is a size between
1 inch and 3 inches.
b. Set the Outlet Pressure to 710 psia.
c. Specify the gas flow rate calculated in the previous .

d. Run the model and see the PsPlot for the choke size.
7. Enter the resulting choke size into the choke model.
8. Re-run the Pressure/Temperature profile with outlet pressure as the calculated variable to verify
that the calculated wellhead pressure is 800 psia.
9. Inspect the output file to determine individual pressure drops for the reservoir, tubing, choke and
flow line.

P = 710 psia
o
Choke size
Pressure losses across system
Δ P Reservoir 
Δ P Tubing
Δ P Choke
Δ P Flow-line
Table 2.35: Results

Task 6: Predicting Future Production Rates

In this section, you use System analysis to calculate the gas rate as a function of reservoir pressure.
To predict future production rates:
1. Right-click and choose Active to deactivate the choke and flowline. These objects should be
highlighted in red to indicate they are inactive.
2. Select Operations  » System Analysis.

Case studies
303
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 321/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3. Choose Gas Rate as the calculated variable.

4. Set the wellhead pressure to 800 psia.
5. Use Reservoir (Static) Pressure as the X-axis variable and set these values:
• 4,600 psia
• 4,300 psia
• 3,800 psia
• 3,400 psia
6. Run the model and view the resultant plot.

Reservoir Pressure (psia Gas Rate (mmscfd)

4600 8.051
4200 10.272
3800 12.723
3400 15.387
Table 2.36: Results

2.3.6 Liquid Loading

Gas wells usually produce natural gas-carrying liquid water and/or condensate in the form of mist.
 As the gas flow velocity in the well drops because of reservoir pressure depletion, the carrying
capacity of the gas decreases. When the gas velocity drops to a critical level, liquids begin to
accumulate in the well (liquid loading).
This increases the bottomhole pressure, which reduces the gas production rate. A low gas production
rate will cause gas velocity to drop further and, eventually, the well will cease producing.

Turner Droplet Model

In predominantly gas wells operating in the annular-mist flow regime, liquids flow as individual
particles (droplets) in the gas core and as a liquid film along the tubing wall.
By analyzing a large database of producing gas wells, Turner found that a force balance performed
on a droplet could predict whether the liquids would flow upwards (drag forces) or downwards
(gravitational forces). If the gas velocity is above a critical velocity, the drag force lifts the droplet,
otherwise the droplet falls and liquid loading occurs. This is illustrated in next figure.

Case studies
304
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 322/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.21. Turner Droplet model 

When the drag is equal to weight, the gas velocity is at critical. Theoretically, at the critical velocity,
the droplet would be suspended in the gas stream, moving neither upward nor downward. Below the
critical velocity, the droplet falls and liquids accumulate in the wellbore.
In practice, the critical gas velocity is generally defined as the minimum gas velocity in the tubing
string required to move droplets upward.

The general form of Turner's equation is given by:

where

Liquid loading calculations are performed in every operation and are available for review in output
files and plot reports. Review the output file to determine if the well is under liquid loading.
 A value of Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio in excess of 1 indicates loading.
The NODAL analysis plot will report the Liquid Loading Gas Rate when the X-axis is configured to
display gas rate. For every point on the outflow curve, the value of Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is
calculated and the critical gas rate is calculated at a point where liquid loading velocity ratio is equal
to 1.

Note: The reported value comes from interpolation of the outflow curve between two points, one with
a velocity ratio below 1 and another with a velocity ratio above 1. Therefore, the accuracy of the results
depends on the number of points on the outflow curve.

Task 7: Determining a Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading

To determine the Critical Gas Rate:

Case studies
305 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 323/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1. Select Operations  » NODAL analysis.

2. Select Limits and change these settings:
• Number of points on each inflow curve = 100
• Number of points on each outflow curve = 200
• Inflow curves to extend to the AOFP
• Outflow curves limited to the pressure range of the inflow curves
3. Set the outlet pressure to 800 psia and run the model.
4. Plot the Pressure at NA point vs. Stock Tank Gas Rate. Note the stock tank gas rate on the Data
tab. The reported critical gas rate is 2.099 mmscfd

Note: The reported critical gas rate refers to the outflow curve, which you can validate by
performing a Pressure/Temperature Profile operation at the same conditions (flow rate and outlet
pressure).

5. Perform a Pressure/Temperature Profile operation to calculate inlet pressure at the given critical
gas rate corresponding to outflow outlet pressure of 800 psia.
6. View the output file to see if the Maximum Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is close to 1, which is
consistent with the results of the NODAL analysis.

2.4 Looped Gas Gathering Network Case Study

In this case study, you must model the network as a complete system to account for the interaction
of wells producing in a common gathering system. The wellhead pressure and, by extension, the
deliverability of any particular well is influenced by the backpressure imposed by the production
system.
Modeling the network as a whole allows the engineer to determine the effects of such actions as
adding new wells, adding compression, looping flowlines and changing the separator pressure.
In this case study, you learn how to build a gathering network and perform a network simulation to
evaluate the deliverability of the complete system. This case study involves the following tasks:
• Build a Model of a Network (p.313)
• Perform a Network Simulation (p.313)

2.4.1 Model a Gathering Network

Network models are constructed using the network module and solved using its calculation engine.
The basic stages involved in developing a network model are:
1. Build a model of the field, including all wells and flowlines.
2. Specify the boundary conditions.
3. Run the model.

Case studies
306 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 324/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Boundary Conditions
To solve the network model, you must enter the correct number of boundary conditions. Boundary
nodes are those that have only one connecting branch, such as a production well, injection well,
source or sink.

The number
Freedom, of boundary
determined conditions required for a model is determined by the model’s Degrees of 
as follows:
Degrees of Freedom = number of wells (production and injection) + number of sources + number of 
sinks
For example, a 3 production well system producing fluid to a single delivery point has 4 degrees of 
freedom (3+1), regardless of the network configuration between the well and the sink.
Each boundary can be specified in terms of Pressure OR Flow rate OR Pressure/Flow rate (PQ)
curve.
 Additionally, the following conditions must be satisfied:
• The number of pressure, flow rate or PQ specifications must equal the degrees of freedom of the
model.
• At least 1 pressure must be specified.
• At each source (production well & source) the fluid temperature must be set.

Solution Criteria
 A network has converged when the pressure balance and mass balance at each node are within the
specified tolerance. The calculated pressure at each branch entering and leaving a node is averaged,
and the tolerance of each pressure is calculated from the equation:
P  − Pave .
Ptol  =
Pave . x100 %
If all Ptol values are within the specified network tolerance, that node has passed the pressure
convergence test. This is repeated for each node.
The total mass flow rate into and the total mass flow rate out of a node are averaged. The tolerance
is calculated from the equation:
(Total mass flow rate in ) − (Total mass flow rate average )
Ptol  =
Total mass flowrate average x 100 %
If the Ftol value is within the specified network tolerance, that node has passed the mass
convergence test. This is repeated for each node.
The network has converged when all of the foregoing conditions are satisfied.

2.4.2 Task 1: Building a Model of a Network

In this case study, your goal is to establish the deliverability of a production network. The network
connects three producing gas wells in a looped gathering system and delivers commingled product
to a single delivery point.
Getting Started

Case studies
307 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 325/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1. Open PIPESIM and go to File » New » Network to create a new network model.

2. Go to File » Save As to save the model in your training directory, such as c:\training\pn01.bpn.
Building the Model
Using the engineering data available at the end of this case study, build a model of a network.
To build the model:
1. Click Production Well to place Well_1 in the work area, as shown.

2. 2. Double-click on Well_1 to reveal the components, as shown below.

3. Double-click on the vertical completion to enter the inflow performance data.

4. Enter a gas PI of 0.0004 mmscf/d/psi2 and a reservoir temperature of 130 degF.

Note: You will enter the reservoir pressure later when the network boundary conditions are
specified. For now, enter any value you wish for reservoir pressure.

5. Double-click on the tubing and select Simple Model as the preferred tubing model.
6. Define vertical tubing with a wellhead datum MD of 0 feet and mid perforations TVD and MD of 
4,500 feet.
7. The ambient temperatures are 130 degF at mid-perforations and 60 degF at the wellhead. The
tubing has an I.D. of 2.4 inches.

Note: Essential data fields are shown in a red outline; if the fields are not outlined, data entry is

optional.
8. Close the view of Well_1 by clicking at the upper-right corner of the window, or by selecting File »
Close to return to the network view.
9. Copy the data to Well_2 and Well_3.
a. Select Well_1.

Case studies
308 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 326/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

b. Using the commands Edit » Copy and Edit » Paste (or Ctrl + C and Ctrl + V), create two
copies of the well.

Note: By default, the names of the copied wells will be Well_2 and Well_3 and contain the
same input data as Well_1.

10.Position the new wells, as shown.

11.Modify the data of Well_3.

a. Double-click on Well_3 and modify the completion and tubing data.
b. For the vertical completion, enter a gas PI of 0.0005 mmscf/d/psi2 and a reservoir temperature
of 140 F.
c. Define vertical tubing with a wellhead TVD of 0 and mid-perforations TVD and MD of 4,900
feet.
d. The ambient temperatures are 140 degF at the mid-perforation depth and 60 degF at the
surface. The tubing has an I.D. of 2.4 inches.
e. Close the view of Well_3 to return to the network view.
12.Specify the composition of each production well. This step defines the compositions at the
production wells. Well_1 and Well_2 are producing from the same zone and, thus, are assumed
to have the same composition. Well_3 has a composition that is different than that shown in the
data section at the end of the case study. The most efficient way to define the compositions is to
set the more prevalent composition (that for Wells_1 and Well_2) as the global composition, then
specify the composition of Well_3 as a local composition.

Note: The composition data of all wells is provided at the end of this in Summary data.

a. Save the current network model.

b. Define the global template of all components used in the network model.
1. Select Setup » Compositional Template menu.
2. Add all library components (Hydrocarbon as well as aqueous components).

Case studies
309
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 327/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

c. Under the Petroleum Fraction tab, specify the name and properties of the petroleum fraction
and add it to the list of template components.
d. Select Setup » Compositional (Network Default) and enter the mole fraction for all
components to define global composition (Well_1 and Well_2).

Note: By default, the network global composition applies to all sources/wells in the network
model. This can be checked by viewing the network fluid summary under  Setup » Fluid
Models. To define a different composition for any particular source/well, you must set it locally.

e. Define the local composition for Well_3:

1. Right-click on Well_3.
2. Choose Fluid Model.
f. Select Use locally defined fluid model and click Edit.
g. Choose Local Compositional and click Edit Composition.

h. Enter the composition of Well_3.

13.Connect the network together.
a. Insert a sink and some junction nodes.

Note: Holding down the Shift key while placing junction nodes allows for multiple insertions.
Be sure to release the Shift key before the final insertion.

The network should now look like this:

b. Use the Branch button to connect J_1 to J_2. To do this:

1. Click the Branch object.
2. Hold down the left mouse button over J_1 and drag the cursor to J_2.
3. Release the mouse button. A connected branch is shown in the figure.

Case studies
310 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 328/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

14.Double-click on the arrow in the center of B1 to enter data for that branch.
a. Double-click on the flowline to enter the following data:

Rate of Undulations 10/1000

Horizontal distance 30,000 feet
Elevation difference 0 feet
Inner Diameter 6 inches
Wall Thickness 0.5 inches
Roughness 0.001 inches
 Ambient Temperature 60 degF
b. Close the B1 window to return to the network view.
15.As the looped gathering lines are all identical, the data for branch B1 can be used to define the
other looped gathering lines.

a. Select B1. Click the arrow in the middle of the branch and copy/paste B1 to create B2, B3, and
B4.
b. To connect a pasted branch:
1. Click the arrow in the middle of the new branch. You will see that highlight boxes display
at either end of the branch.
2. Move the cursor over the right-hand, highlight box. The cursor changes to an up arrow. Use
this end of the branch to drag and drop onto a junction node.

c. Position the new branches.

d. Connect the wells to the adjacent junction node and connect J_4 to the sink.

Case studies
311
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 329/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

16.Double-click on branch B5 and insert the following objects in the left-to-right order shown in the
figure:

• Liquid separator with an efficiency of 100%

• Compressor with a pressure differential of +400 psi and an efficiency of 70%
• After-cooler (heat exchanger) with an outlet temperature of 120 degF and ∆P of 15 psi
• Flowline with the following properties:

Rate of undulations 10/1000

Horizontal distance 10,000 feet
Elevation difference 0 feet
Inner Diameter 8 inches
Wall Thickness 0.5 inches
Roughness 0.001 inches
 Ambient Temperature 60 degF
a. Click Connector to join the equipment together.
b. Close the Single Branch window.
17.Select Setup » Flow Correlations menu and choose Beggs-Brill Revised as the global vertical
and horizontal multiphase flow correlations.
18.In the Options Control tab of the Flow Correlations menu:

a. Select Use network options.

b. Click Apply network options to all branches.
19.Select Setup » Erosion and Corrosion Options and choose the deWaard Corrosion model.

Note: This model calculates a corrosion rate caused by the presence of CO2 dissolved in water.
Concentrations of CO2 and water are obtained from the fluid property definitions, (black oil or 

Case studies
312 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 330/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

compositional). The corrosion rate will be zero if CO2 or the liquid water phase is absent from the
fluid.

20.In the Options Control tab of the Erosion and Corrosion Options menu:
a. Select Use network options.
b. Click Apply network options to all branches.
21.Save the model as gas_network.

2.4.3 Task 2: Performing a Network Simulation

To perform a network simulation:
1. Select Setup » Boundary Conditions and specify these boundary conditions:

Node Pressure
Well_1 2,900 psia
Well_2 2,900 psia
Well_3 3,100 psia
Sink_1 800 psia

 All flow rates are calculated by the network solver.

Note:  Any pressure specification defined in the single branch model must be re-specified in the
network model. However, the boundary pressures specified in the Network view will update the
pressures defined in the single branch model for use in single branch operations.

2. Open the Setup » Iterations menu to set the network tolerance to 1%.

3. Save the model.
4. Click Run.
5. When the network has solved, you should see the message: Gas_networkbpn01 – Finished OK.
When this message displays, click OK.
6. Click Report Tool. What is the gas production rate at the sink? 42.28 mmscfd.

Note: More comprehensive reporting is available by clicking Summary File.

7. Hold down the Shift key and select the flow route from Well_3, branch B3 and branch B5.
8. Click Profile Plot. You should obtain the pressure profile for these three branches, and the effect
of the compressor at J_4 on the system pressure should look similar to the figure below.

Case studies
313
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 331/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

9. Select Series and change the Y-axis to Corrosion Rate to observe the calculated corrosion rate.
Maximum Corrosion Rate in network = 44.902 mm/year 

10.Determine the field production rate in the event of a compressor shutdown. Assuming a bypass
line exists around the compressor, deactivate the compressor object and rerun. Gas production
rate at the Sink: 38.26 mmscfd

Note: Edit the legend and title on PsPlot to improve the graphical presentation.

Looped Gathering Network Data

The tables that follow contain the data for task 3.
Figure 2.22. Network layout 

Well_1 and Well_2 Well_3

Gas PI 0.0004 mmscf/d/psi2 0.0005 mmscf/d/psi2
Wellhead TVD 0 0
Mid Perforations TVD 4,500 feet 4,900 feet

Case studies
314
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 332/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Well_1 and Well_2 Well_3

Mid Perforations MD 4,500 feet 4,900 feet
Tubing I.D. 2.4 inch 2.4 inch
Wellhead Ambient Temperature 60 degF 60 degF
Mid Perforations Ambient Temperature 130 degF 140 degF
Table 2.37: Completion and Tubing Data

Component Moles
Carbon Dioxide 3
Methane 72
Ethane 6
Propane 3
Isobutane 1
Butane 1
Isopentane 1
Pentane 0.5
Hexane 0.5
Table 2.38: Pure Hydrocarbon Components (Well_1 and Well_2)

Name Boiling Point (degF) Mocecular Weight Specific Gravity Moles

C7+ 214 115 0.683 12
Table 2.39: Petroleum Fraction (Well_1 and Well_2)

Component Volume ratio (%bbl/bbl)

Water 10
Table 2.40: Aqueous Component (Well_1 and Well_2)

Component Moles
Carbon Dioxide 2
Methane 71
Ethane 7

Propane 4
Isobutane 1.5
Butane 1.5
Isopentane 1.5
Pentane 0.5

Case studies
315 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 333/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Component Moles
Hexane 0.5
Table 2.41: Pure Hydrocarbon Components (Well_3)

Name Boiling Point (degF) Molecular Weight Specific Gravity Moles

C7+ 214 115 0.683 10.5
Table 2.42: Petroleum Fraction (Well_3)

Component Volume ratio (%bbl/bbl)

Water 5
Table 2.43: Aqueous Component (Well_3)

Rate of undulations 10/1000

Horizontal distance 30,000 feet
Elevation difference 0 feet
Inner diameter 6 inch
Wall thickness 0.5 inch
Roughness 0.001 inch
 Ambient temperature 60 degF
Overall heat transfer coefficient 0.2 Btu/hr/ft2/degF
Table 2.44: Data for Looped Gathering Lines (B1, B2, B3, and B4)

2.5 User Equipment DLL Case Study - User Pump

 A 32-bit DLL, compatible with PIPESIM, is to be produced to model a piece of user equipment, in this
case a pump. This case study involves the following tasks:
• Write a DLL to define a piece of equipment for use with PIPESIM (p.316).
• Build a single branch model and use the DLL (p.319).
• Run the model and verify that the DLL worked (p.321)

2.5.1 Task 1. Write a DLL to define a piece of equipment for use with
PIPESIM

Introduction
The DLL can be written in any programming language. Examples are provided in Fortran and C++
together with the necessary library and header files. Also provided are READ ME's for Fortran and
C++ code. For a standard installation of PIPESIM, the following files are provided.

Case studies
316 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 334/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools Visual Fortran Project

\User Equipment\Fortran_Code\UserPump.vfproj
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools Fortran code
\User Equipment\Fortran_Code\UserPump.f90

C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools

\User Equipment\C++_Code\UserPump.vcproj Visual C++ Fortran Project
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools C++ code
\User Equipment\C++_Code\UserPump.cpp
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools PIPESIM include file for Fortran
\User Equipment\libs\fluidman.i
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools PIPESIM header file for C++
\User Equipment\libs\fluidman.h
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools PIPESIM fluid manager library
\User Equipment\libs\fluidman.lib

C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools READ ME for Fortran code

\User Equipment\Fortran_Code\READ.ME
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools READ ME for C++ code
\User Equipment\C++_Code\READ.ME
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Case Studies\User  Example case using user supplied
Equipment\UserPump.BPS DLL
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Case Studies\User  Example case for comparison with
Equipment\Pump.bps UserPump.bps

How to write a DLL

The PIPESIM simulators are written in Fortran and can call an external routine using the following
interface:

interface
subroutine equipment(op1,op2,istream,ostream,omsg,rcode)
character*(*) , intent(in ) ::op1
character*(*) , intent(in ) ::op2
type(fman_stream_type), intent(in ) :: istream
type(fman_stream_type), intent(out) :: ostream
character*(*), intent(out) :: omsg
integer , intent(out) :: rcode
end subroutine equipment
end interface

The first two arguments are options provided by the user, through the PIPESIM GUI, and passed via
the PIPESIM simulators to the user DLL. The first option is intended to be a global option, perhaps
specified by the author of the DLL, while the second option is a local option, specified by the user of 
the DLL. The difference between these two arguments will become more apparent in the section on
Engine keyword tool (p.320). Arguments three and four define, respectively, the fluid input to, and
output from, the equipment. PIPESIM fluid properties are stored in a type called ‘fman_stream_type’.
The definition of this type is provided by an include file (fluidman.i for Fortran) or header file (fluidman.h

Case studies
317 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 335/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

for C++). Argument five is an error message. This will be displayed by PIPESIM if argument six is
non-zero.
 Any name can be used for the routine.

Note: The routine is called pump in the example code UserPump.f90 and UserPump.cpp.

Note on Fortran
If the dll needs to read from or write to a file, then care must be taken since Fortran I/O unit numbers
will be shared with PIPESIM. The following guidelines are recommended:
• Use unit numbers greater than 100.
• Use the INQUIRE statement to make sure the unit is not already opened.
• Close all units on exit from the DLL.

Note on C/C++
If the DLL is written in C or C++, then extra arguments are required after each character argument,
because the Fortran compiler passes the address of the character string and its length. Therefore
the C++ declaration is:

void equipment(char * op1, long lenop1,

char * op2, long lenop2,
fman_stream_type & istream,
fman_stream_type & ostream,
char * omsg, long lenomsg,
long & rcode)

The input character arrays will not be null terminated.

PIPESIM flash
The fman_stream_type contains fluid data that is input to the flash, (for example, pressure,
temperature, compositional handle, compositional type), and data output from the flash (for example
phase splits, densities, viscosities). Two flash routines are provided with the following interfaces:

interface
subroutine fman_stream_flowing(stream, rcode)
use fluidman_types
type(fman_stream_type) :: stream
integer, intent(out) :: rcode
end subroutine fman_stream_flowing
subroutine fman_stream_st(stream, rcode)
use fluidman_types
type(fman_stream_type) :: stream
integer, intent(out) :: rcode
end subroutine fman_stream_st
end interface

Case studies
318 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 336/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: c_fman_stream_flowing is merely a wrapper to fman_stream_flowing and is intended to be

used by C/C++ applications.

These two routines can be used to perform three types of flash:

• a PT-flash at user defined pressure (P) and temperature (T). To perform a PT flash at a given
pressure (P) and temperature (T) on an fman_stream_type called stream, set the stream values:
• stream%ipres=P
• stream%itemp=T
• stream%ienth = r4undef (i.e. undefined)
and call the PIPESIM routine fman_stream_flowing.
• a PH-flash at user defined pressure and enthalpy (H). To perform a PH flash at a given pressure
(P) and enthalpy (H) on an fman_stream_type called stream, set the stream values:
• stream%ipres=P
• stream%itemp=r4undef (i.e. undefined)
• stream%ienth =H
• a stock tank flash at atmospheric pressure and 60oF. To perform a stock tank flash call the routine
fman_stream_st.

Note:  A PH flash is used in the example code UserPump.f90 and UserPump.cpp.

Results are stored in the stream. For example, stream%ptdl contains the liquid density calculated by
either a PT flash or a PH flash; stream%stdl contains the stock tank liquid density calculated by the

stock tank flash (See fluidman.i

fman_stream_flowing and fluidman.h for more
and c_fman_stream_flowing details).
are given Examples of calling
in UserPump.f90 and UserPump.cpp
respectively. An example of calling fman_stream_st is not provided since calling this routine should
not be necessary; the stock tank conditions of the outlet stream will be the same as those of the input
conditions (unless the equipment changes the fluid).

Exporting routines
The DLL export (and preprocessor) commands for these compilers are given in the example files
UserPump.f90 and UserPump.cpp.

Build the DLL

PIPESIM is compiled using Intel Visual Fortran. We have tested the example projects by compiling
and building with Intel Visual Fortran 9.1 and Microsoft Visual C++ 2005. The built DLL will be put in
the following directory for a standard installation of PIPESIM:
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools\User Equipment\Programs.

2.5.2 Task 2. Build a single branch model and use the DLL
There are three steps to using the equipment DLL in PIPESIM:

Case studies
319
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 337/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Place the built DLL in the PIPESIM programs directory (p.320).

• Inform PIPESIM of the equipment DLL and its entry points (p.320).
• Build a single branch model with an Engine Keyword Tool to represent the piece of equipment
(p.320).

Place the built DLL in the PIPESIM programs directory

You must place the DLL in the PIPESIM programs directory. For a standard installation of PIPESIM
this is:
C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Programs

Inform PIPESIM of the equipment DLL and its entry points

In the UserPump.bps example case, the DLL information has been put in Setup » Engine
Options:
You must specify the maincode userdll and values for all of its subcodes. The subcodes have the
following meanings:
• filename specifies the name of the DLL.
• epname (entry point name) specifies the entry point of the DLL, the actual name of the routine as
exported from the DLL.
• psname (PIPESIM name) specifies the internal PIPESIM name of the routine. The psname's must
be unique. Check that other DLLs specified in the userdll.dat file (located in C:\Program Files
\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\data for a standard installation of PIPESIM - look for ep_ident) do not
use the same psname's.
• linktype specifies the DLL linkage type. This must be 24.
• eptype (entry point type) specifies the type entry point for the DLL. Note that it must be
equipment to distinguish it from flow correlations.
• options specifies the string that will be sent as the first argument to the routine. (This is a global
option, perhaps specified by the author of the DLL).

Build a single branch model with an Engine Keyword Tool to represent the piece
of equipment
The only way of using this equipment piece is by inserting an “Engine keyword tool” into the branch,
as shown in the UserPump.bps example case:
Use this tool to add the following data:

equipment name=value options=“op2”

Where:
• Value must be one of the psname values given with the userdll maincode (see Inform PIPESIM
of the equipment DLL and its entry points (p.320))
• The string “op2” is passed as the 2nd argument to the particular DLL routine linked to value. In
the UserPump.bps example provided, “dp=1000” (represents a pressure differential across of 
1000 psia across the equipment piece) is passed to routine pump in DLL UserPump.dll:

Case studies
320 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 338/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The author of the DLL should make sure the users know what options (if any) are allowed.

Note on Network models

The user DLL can also be used with network models. The user DLL information can again be added
using Setup » Engine Options. It can be added either at the bottom or the top of the tnt file.

2.5.3 Task 3. Run the model and verify that the DLL worked
Perform the following steps to verify that the DLL worked:

1. Run the UserPump.bps model by clicking

2. View the profile plots.
The following profile plots should be obtained for pressure vs total distance:

Case studies
321
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 339/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

and fluid enthalpy vs total distance:

It is clear from the

plots that the DLL is working as intended, since a pressure differential of 1000 psia at a constant
enthalpy of about 25 BTU/lb is applied across the equipment.

Case studies
322 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 340/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 An example case entitled Pump.bps is provided, for comparison with UserPump.bps. This case is
identical to UserPump.bps except that the Engine Keyword Tool representing the user defined pump
(DLL) is replaced by a standard PIPESIM pump:

Similarly, a pressure differential of 1000 psia is applied across the 100% efficient (i.e. at constant
enthalpy) pump:

Case studies
323
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 341/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Perform the following steps:

1. Run the Pump.bps model by clicking on the

2. View the profile plots.
You should get plots of pressure vs total distance and fluid enthalpy vs total distance similar to those
obtained in the UserPump.bps example case.

2.6 Field Data Matching Case Study

Field data matching is important in building an accurate model. PIPESIM lets you perform fluid
properties matching, IPR matching, flow correlation matching, temperature matching, equipment
settings, and so on. The aim of such matching is to eliminate uncertainties based on measured data

Case studies
324
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 342/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

or operating conditions and create a model that follows field measurement. This case study involves
the following tasks:
• IPR matching (p.326).
• Optimize Flow Correlation and U Value (p.327).

• Validate Match (p.328)

• Determine Choke Settings (p.329)
For this demo, we use the standard P and T profile that will be modified to illustrate the purpose of 
this case study.

2.6.1 Measured Data

Flowing gradient Survey @ Liquid Rate 15000:

S. No. Depth (MD) Pressure (Psia) Temperature (F)

1 0 785 145
2 3000 1355
3 5000 1838
4 7500 2550
5 10000 3186
6 11600 (mid Perf.) 3600

Static Pressure measured at mid-perforation is 4224 psia. Temperature = 210 F.

Flowline:

S. No. Depth (MD) Pressure (Psia) Temperature (F)

1 0 785
2 1250 775
3 2500 760

Riser:

S. No. Depth (MD) Pressure (Psia) Temperature (F)

1 0 760
2 80 750 143

Multi-Rate Test Data:

Test Point Flow Rate (STB/Day) Tubing Head Pressure Water Cut (%) GOR (scf/STB)
(psia)
1 15000 750 0 892
2 12000 880 0 892

Case studies
325 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 343/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Test Point Flow Rate (STB/Day) Tubing Head Pressure Water Cut (%) GOR (scf/STB)
(psia)
3 9000 984 0 892
4 6000 1070 0 892

2.6.2 Model Setup

Do the following:
1. Build the Model. For this case, use the case study P & T Profiles.bps. For a standard installation
of PIPESIM, this can be found in C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Case Studies\Well
Design and Performance.
2. Modify the flowline element by setting Rate of Undulations to 0.
3. Double click a Tubing object to open the Tubing dialog. Select Detailed Model from the
Preferred Tubing Model list and click OK. This changes the tubing profile to Detailed mode.

2.6.3 Task 1. IPR matching

IPR matching can be performed by performing simulation across completion using measured
pressure data at mid-perforation. The objective is to look for the uncertain variable and tune it to get
the best IPR match. The IPR model in this case is ‘Well PI’ and, once the Static Reservoir Pressure
is available, the only uncertain parameter is Productivity Index. You will use the Pseudo General
Iterative Method (p.188) to get the correct value of PI.
Do the following:
1. Update Static Reservoir Pressure and Temperature in the model.
2. Deactivate physical objects downstream of the completion (in this case the tubing object) by
selecting
becomes the equipment
unchecked anditem(s), right-clicking
the deactivated and pressing
equipment Active. from
item changes The tick
bluenext to the Active
to red.
3. Select Operations  » Pressure/Temperature Profile and enter the known values for Inlet
Pressure, Outlet Pressure (set as measured pressure at mid-perforation – 3600 psia) and liquid
rate (measured test rate – 15000 STB/day).
4. Set User Variable (p.188) as the calculated parameter and define Productivity Index to be the
user variable.
5. Set a valid minimum and maximum range for Productivity Index (for this case we use the range
from 1 STB/day/psi to 30 STB/day/psi). Set Proportionality Relationship to ‘Direct’.
6. Run the operation. (Be sure to remove the data set used for sensitivity analysis on Water Cut
(these data were used in the standard P&T; model) and view the plot of pressure vs elevation.
Note that the calculated liquid PI (expected value of PI in this case should be 24.04029 STB/Day/
Psi).
7. Double-click the completion object and update the value of Productivity Index (PI).

Case studies
326 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 344/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2.6.4 Task 2. Optimizing Flow Correlation & Heat Transfer Coefficient

Do we need to optimize? Before proceeding with optimization, we would like to see how the simulated
result compares to measured data. Re-activate all the components of the model and perform
simulation (Pressure / Temperature profile) to calculate outlet pressure for a liquid rate of 15000 STB/
day and make a note of Outlet pressure and temperature. In this case we obtain:
• Outlet pressure of 703 psia (this gives 47 psia lower than measured value of 750 psia, i.e. 6%
error)
• Outlet temperature of 154 F (again 11 F higher than the measured temperature of 154 F, i.e. 8%
error).
To correct these errors, we need to tune the model using the optimization routine (read on). PIPESIM
optimization routines allow the single branch engine to calculate optimal values of parameters to
match measured pressure and/or temperature data.
You can perform any of the following:
• Pressure Match
• Temperature Match
• Simultaneous Match for Pressure and Temperature
The matching is performed by tuning parameters like friction and holdup factor for Pressure matching
and U-factor for Temperature matching. See optimize (p.708) for further details.

Load Measured Data

Measured data must be set up to use the optimizer. Measured data for Flowline and Riser can be
directly entered into their respective interfaces. Measured data can only be entered using a detailed
profile for flowline and riser:
• Open Flowline/Riser interface – set Preferred Pipe Description to Detailed View.
• Enter  Measured Pressure and Measured Temperature and click OK.
Enter measured data for tubing into the database, as follows:
1. Select Data » Load/Add Measured Data.
2. Select New and enter the Well Name, Survey Date and the measured data (Pressures and
Temperatures at various measured depths).
3. Click Save Changes.

Setup Optimizer Options

Do the following:
1. Select Operations  » Data Matching and click the Parameters tab. Ensure that the Calibrate
check buttons are ticked for U-value multiplier, Vertical flow friction factor, and Vertical flow holdup
factor. Enter the following Min and Max values:

Min Max
U-value multiplier 0.5 10

Case studies
327 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 345/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Min Max
Vertical flow friction factor 0.7 1.3
Vertical flow holdup factor 0.7 1.3
Horizontal flow friction factor 0.7 1.3
Horizontal flow holdup factor 0.7 1.3
2. On the Flow Correlations tab, select suitable horizontal and vertical flow correlations. For this
case we will use following correlations:

Vertical Flow Correlations Horizontal Flow Correlations

 Ansari Beggs & Brill Revised
Duns & Ros Mukherjee & Brill
Hagerdorn & Brown
3. On the Run tab, select Outlet Pressure as calculated variable (under Operation Run Data) and
enter the given Flowrate (15000 STB/Day). Click Run model. (Set the RMS weight factors for the
pressure and temperature to 1 to give equal weighting to P & T match).

Select flow correlation parameters and U factor 

Do the following:
1. Review the table of results. It shows two cases for each combination of Horizontal and Vertical
flow correlations, an initial and the optimized value. The u-value multiplier (U), vertical friction
factor (VF), vertical holdup factor (VH), horizontal friction factor (VF) and horizontal holdup factor 
(VH) are all listed before (Initial) and after the optimization (Optimized) along with the root-mean-
square errors in the pressure (P) and temperature (T) match and the total RMS error (Total).

2. We shouldthat
we notice be selecting the combination
the optimized combinationthat gives the &lowest
of Hagedorn Browntotal RMS error.
(Vertical In this and
Correlation) example,
Beggs
& Brill Revised (Horizontal Correlation) is the best option, with the lowest RMS error.
3. Select Optimized HBR + BBR and click Save Selected Results.
4. Go back to the model and select Setup » Flow Correlations. You will see that the optimized flow
correlation results have been applied to the model. The friction factor and holdup factor have also
been updated in the model.
5. Select Setup » Heat Transfer Options. You will see that the optimized U-value multiplier has
also been applied to the model. Now all u-values listed in the models (Tubing, Flowline and Riser)
will be multiplied by the U-value multiplier.
The model is now ready for use.

2.6.5 Task 3. Validate Match

Once the model is tuned, validate it against test data measured at different conditions. We will use a
Multi-rate test data for validation.
Do the following:

Case studies
328 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 346/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1. Select Operations  » Pressure/Temperature Profile to calculate Outlet Pressure for known

liquid rates. (Use Liquid Rate as the Sensitivity Variable).
2. Run the operation and review the result. Compare the simulated result with the measured data
and see the difference:

Case No. Flow rate (STB/ THP – (psia) Measured THP – (psia) Measured Difference (%)
Day)
1 6000 1070 1057 1.21
2 9000 984 976 0.81
3 12000 880 875 0.57
4 15000 750 750 0.00

This confirms a valid match.

2.6.6 Task 4. Determine Choke Settings

The well above will be connected to a common surface facility operating at 400 psia. To avoid a back-
pressure effect on other wells connected to the system, the well must be choked back to give final
delivery pressure of 400 psia, delivering a flowrate of 15000 STB/d. Do the following:
1. Modify the model to add a choke object at the wellhead. Set the bean diameter to any value (say
0.5 inches).
2. Perform a Pressure/Temperature Profile operation with known values for Inlet Pressure, Outlet
Pressure (400 psia) and liquid rate (15000 STB/day).
3. Set User Variable as the calculated parameter and define Choke Bean Size as the user variable.
4. Set a valid minimum and maximum range for choke size (for this case we use the range from 0
in to 2 in). Proportionality Relationship should be set to Direct.
5. Run the model and view the results. Viewing the pressure versus elevation plot indicates the choke
bean size as 1.6455 inches.
Set the new choke size and perform a Pressure/Temperature Profile operation with known values
for Inlet Pressure, Outlet Pressure (400 psia) and request the liquid rate to be calculated. You will get
the expected value of 15000 STB/d for liquid rate. The well is now ready to produce to the common
facility without any back-pressure effect on other wells.

2.7 Liquid Loading Analysis Case Study

Field data matching is an important exercise to build an accurate model. PIPESIM allows user to
perform fluid properties matching, IPR matching, flow correlation matching, temperature matching,
equipment settings, and so on. The objective of such matching is to eliminate uncertainties based on
measured data, operating conditions and create a model that follows field measurement. This case
study involves the following tasks:
• Set up Liquid Loading Model (p.330).
• Control Liquid Loading Options in PIPESIM (p.330).

Case studies
329
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 347/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

•  Analyze Well for Liquid Loading (p.330)

• Determine Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading (p.331)

2.7.1 Task 1. Set up the Liquid Loading Model

Liquid Loading is performed in PIPESIM by default. The default model is Turner's Model, but the user 
can to select different models through engine keywords. See Liquid Loading (p.359) for further 
details. In this exercise we use the Coleman (1991) model.
Do the following:
1. Build the well model. Open the standard case study file ‘Compositional Nodal Analysis.bps’, which
for a standard installation of PIPESIM is located in C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM
\Case Studies\Well Design and Performance.
2. Set up the Coleman Liquid Loading Model and other parameters:
• Pick the value of correction (Efficiency) factor for Coleman Liquid Loading Model from the table
(p.359) (this value is 1.0).
• Select Setup » Engine Options and, in the space provided for Additional engine
keywords, enter the following:

OPTION ELIQLOADING = 1.0

This picks Coleman's model.

2.7.2 Task 2. Control Liquid Loading Options in PIPESIM

You have the option of controlling Liquid Loading Calculations for every liquid loading model selected.
This is done using engine keywords. The parameters to control are:

• Implementation and reporting of Liquid loading Velocity Ratio (p.81).

• Inclination angle (p.81) to prevent liquid loading calculations.
The user should add the following engine keywords:

OPTION LLVELOCITY = GAS

OPTION LLANGLE = 30

The first option reports Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio as Terminal Settling Velocity/Gas Velocity.
The second option prevents calculation of Liquid Loading for a Pipe angle up to 30 degrees from
horizontal.

2.7.3 Task 3. Analyze Well for Liquid Loading

Liquid loading calculations are performed in every operation and are available for review through
output and plot reports. Do the following:
1. Select Pressure » Temperature Profile and calculate the Gas Rate for an outlet pressure of 450
psia.

Case studies
330 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 348/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2. Review the output file and plots to see whether the well is under liquid loading. A Liquid Loading
Velocity Ratio in excess of 1 indicates loading.
The result indicates the value for Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio much less than 1 at every node in
tubing; this indicates the well is free from Liquid Loading. (The auxiliary report should show no
calculation performed for the flowline section due to option control set for inclination angle.)

2.7.4 Task 4. Determine Critical Gas Rate to Prevent Well Loading

 A Nodal Analysis plot reports Liquid Loading Gas Rate by default. For every point on the outflow
curve, the value of Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is calculated and the critical gas rate (p.359) is
calculated at a point where Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is 1. The reported value comes from
interpolation of the outflow curve between two points, one with a velocity ratio below 1 and another 
with a velocity ratio above 1. The accuracy of the result therefore depends on the number of 
points on the outflow curve.
Do the following:
1. Add a Nodal Analysis Point between the tubing and completion.
2. Select Operations  » Nodal Analysis and add the following settings:
• Number of points on each inflow curve = 100
• Number of points on each outflow curve = 200
• Allow the inflow curves to extend to the AOFP
• Limit the outflow curves to lie within the pressure range of the inflow curves
3. View the NA plot. Plot the Pressure at NA point versus Stock Tank Gas Rate. Make a note of the
stock tank gas rate under the Data tab. The reported critical gas rate is 2.0835 mmscfd
4. The reported critical gas rate refers to the outflow curve. This can be validated by performing

Operations  » Pressure/Temperature
pressure). Perform Profile
the operation to calculate at the
inlet same conditions
pressure at the given(flowrate andrate
critical gas outlet
(2.0835
mmscfd) corresponding to outflow outlet pressure of 450 psia. Viewing the output file should reveal
that the Maximum Liquid Loading Velocity Ratio is close to 1. This is consistent with the Nodal
 Analysis result.

2.8 Ramey Heat Transfer Model Case Study

Heat transfer between a well and its surroundings varies with time - the well exchanges energy with
the formation, heating it up (or cooling it down), until the formation is at the same temperature as the
well. This case study helps user in implementing detailed steady state heat transfer in the wellbore
using the Ramey model (p.72). This case study involves the following tasks:
• Set up Ramey Heat Transfer Properties (p.332).
• Set up Detailed Heat Transfer for the Tubing (p.332).
• Run Model and View Results (p.334)

Case studies
331
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 349/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2.8.1 Task 1. Set up Ramey Heat Transfer Properties

Modeling wellbore heat transfer using the Ramey model requires setting up ground thermal properties
and other parameters like time and heat transfer reference diameter. This can be done using engine
keywords as follows:

1. Build a well model. Perform the following steps:

• Open a standard case study such as ‘Bottom Hole Nodal Analysis.bps'. In a standard
installation of PIPESIM, this can be found under C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM
\Case Studies\Well Design and Performance.
• Double-click the tubing object and set the Preferred Tubing Model to Detailed Model.
• On the Tubing Configurations tab, enter the following data:

Bottom ID Wall Roughness Casing ID Flow Label

MD (ft) (inches) Thickness (inches) (inches) Type
(inches)

11000 3.958 0.5 0.001 8.681 Tubing Upper

Section 
11600 8.681 0.5 0.001 Tubing Lower  
Section
2. Set up Ramey Heat Transfer Properties. Perform the following steps:
• On the Geothermal Survey tab, select the Calculate U Value radio button, click Heat
Transfer Properties and enter the following ground data:

Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Density lb/ft3) Production/Injection

(BTU/hr/ft/F) Capacity (BTU/lb/F) Time (hrs)

2.2 0.24 126 500

• Select Setup » Engine Options and, in the Additional engine keywords box , enter the
following:

HEAT HTCRD = 11.741

The second line refers to the time the well has been operating. Typically, with a value in excess of 
168 hours (one week), the surrounding rock should reach steady state heat transfer.

2.8.2 Task 2. Set up Detailed Heat Transfer for the Tubing

The next step is to define detailed heat transfer properties for the tubing, including pipe and coatings
information. Looking at a typical wellbore (Figure 1), it is apparent that the upper section (from the
bottom of the tubing to the surface) has got several layers of materials separating the flowing wellbore
fluid from the surrounding rock/ground. These include:
• Tubing material
• Annulus filled with completion fluid/gas
• Casing material

Case studies
332 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 350/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 2.23. Typical Wellbore

Similarly, the lower section (from tubing shoe down to mid-perforation) has the following layers of 
material separating flowing fluid with the surrounding rock:
• Casing material
• Cement behind casing
These layers act as thermal coatings between the flowing fluid and surrounding rock. Enter the
following information in the Wellbore properties section of the Tubing Heat Transfer Properties
dialog:
Tubing Completion Casing Casing Cement Cement
Thermal Fluid Thermal Thermal Thickness Thermal Thickness
Conductivity Conductivity Conductivity (ft) Conductivity (ft)
(BTU/hr/ft/F) (BTU/hr/ft/F) (BTU/hr/ft/F) (BTU/hr/ft/F)
35 3.25 35 0.78 2 0.75

Case studies
333
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 351/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2.8.3 Task 3. Run the Model and View Results

Do the following:
1. Select Setup » Define Output and select Heat Transfer Input Data and Heat Transfer Output
Data. Click OK.
2. Run the model and view the heat transfer input and output data in the output file.

Case studies
334
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 352/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Support and Contact 3

Information

3.1 Support
Schlumberger Information Solutions (SIS) provides a variety of options for receiving support:

3.1.1 SIS web and phone support

If you have a problem that cannot be resolved using PIPESIM Help, you can send a support request
via the Schlumberger Information Solutions Support Web page.

3.1.2 On-site support

Schlumberger Information Solutions (SIS) supplements the standard maintenance agreement by
offering extended on-site support worldwide. This enhanced level of support includes on-site
assistance, installation, troubleshooting and maintenance services of licensed SIS software. Contact
the help desk or refer to your licensing agreement for more information.

3.1.3 SIS Education

 A large number of training courses are offered at various SIS locations, or on-site for groups or 
individuals upon request. These training courses can help you increase the value you are receiving
from your SIS software products. The courses can also act as a form of preventive maintenance as
you learn to achieve smoother and more trouble-free performance with the products. See the SIS
Training Web site for more information.

3.1.4 See Also:

How to reach us (p.336)

Support and Contact Information

335 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 353/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3.2 How To Reach Us

The Schlumberger Information Solutions (SIS) Support Portal — https://support.slb.com —
provides a single, online location for all your support needs. Within the Support Portal you can quickly
search a vast knowledge base for the answers you need, participate with your peers in discussion

forums, and receive the latest news about SIS products and services.
 All support requests are entered into the SIS Customer Care Center incident tracking system, where
they are resolved by local support staff. For those times when you need to speak with a support
specialist, contact numbers are provided for your local support center.
Avocet is a product line of Schlumberger Information Solutions (SIS). For more information about
SIS, please go to our Web site at http://www.sis.slb.com

Support and Contact Information

336 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 354/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Technical Description 4
4.1 Flow Modeling
4.1.1 Flow Correlations

Flow Regimes

Flow Regimes Classification for Vertical Two Phase Flow

The general problem of predicting the pressure drop for the simultaneous flow of gas and liquid is
complex.
The problem consists of being able to predict the variation of pressure with elevation along the length
of the flow string for known conditions of flow. Multiphase vertical flow can be categorized into four 

different
flow and flow
mist configurations
flow. or flow regimes, consisting of bubble flow, slug flow, slug-mist transition
 A typical example of bubble flow is the liberation of solution gas from an undersaturated oil at and
above the point in the flow string where its bubble point pressure is reached.
In slug flow, both the gas and liquid phases significantly contribute to the pressure gradient. the gas
phase exists as large bubbles almost filling the pipe and separated by slugs of liquid. In transition
flow, the liquid slugs between the gas bubbles essentially disappear, and at some point the liquid
phases becomes discontinuous and the phase becomes continuous.
The pressure losses in transition flow are partly a result of the liquid phase, but are more the result
of the gas phase. Mist flow is characterized by a continuous gas phase with liquid occurring as
entrained droplets in the gas stream and as a liquid film wetting the pipe walls. A typical example of 
mist flow is the flow of gas and condensate in a gas condensate well.
PIPESIM Vertical Flow correlations

Bubble Slug Churn Annular/Mist

Technical Description
337 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 355/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Flow Regimes Classification for Horizontal Two Phase Flow

Prediction of liquid holdup is less critical for pressure loss calculations in horizontal flow than for 
inclined or vertical flow, although several correlations will require a holdup value for calculating the
density terms used in the friction and acceleration pressure drop components. The acceleration
pressure drop is usually minor and is often ignored in design calculations; however, PIPESIM includes
them.
 As in the vertical flow, the two-phase horizontal flow can be divided into the following flow regimes:
Stratified Flow (smooth, wavy), Intermittent Flow (plug and slug) and Distributed Flow (bubble and
mist).
PIPESIM Horizontal Flow correlations

Stratified Flow Smooth

Wavy

Intermittent Slug
Flow

Technical Description
338 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 356/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Elongated bubble/
Plug

Distributed Annular/Mist and

Bubble

Dispersed Bubble

Horizontal Multiphase Flow Correlations

Setup » Flow Correlations
See also: Flow regimes (p.337), Selecting correlations (p.110) , SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options
(p.604)
The flow correlations available are affected by the Moody friction Factor calculation method option.
By default, PIPESIM uses the explicit Moody friction factor calculation method (see the Sonnad and
Goudar paper (p.552)) .
The following horizontal multiphase flow correlations are available:

Baker Jardine (BJA) Correlation

Baker Jardine (p.539) (now Schlumberger) has developed a correlation for two phase flow in gas-
condensate pipelines with a no-slip liquid volume fraction of lower than 0.1. This model represents
no major advance in theory, but rather a consolidation of various existing mechanistic models,
combined with a modest amount of theoretical development and field data testing. The model uses
the Taitel Dukler flow regime map and a modified set of the Taitel Dukler momentum balance to
predict liquid holdup. The pressure loss calculation procedure is similar in approach to that proposed
by Oliemans, but accounts for the increased interfacial shear resulting from the liquid surface
roughness. The BJA correlation is used for pressure loss and holdup with flow regime determined by
the Taitel Dukler correlation. The BJA correlation has been developed Schlumberger specifically for 
applications involving low liquid/gas ratios, for example gas/condensate pipelines. Note: The BJA
correlation is identical to the BPS correlation documented in PIPESIM Release 2.1 and earlier.
The BJA correlation is not recommended for systems having a non-slip liquid volume fraction greater 
than 0.1 (Ref. Appendix B for some background information on the BJA correlation).
 A revised BJA holdup correlation (BJA2) has been developed to overcome occasional erratic behavior 
at low flow rates. Refer to the correlation description in Appendix B for full details. Note full details of 
the BJA correlations were published in the Oil and Gas Journal (May 1987) at the 3rd International
Conference on Multi-Phase Flow, and copies of the paper can be obtained from Schlumberger.

Technical Description
339
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 357/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Beggs and Brill Original

ORIGINAL: The original Beggs and Brill (p.539) correlation is used for pressure loss and either the
BBO or the BJA correlation is used to calculate holdup. Flow regime is determined by either the Beggs
and Brill or Taitel Dukler correlation. The Beggs and Brill correlation was developed following a study
of two-phase flow in horizontal and inclined pipes. The correlation is based upon a flow regime map
which is first determined as if the flow was horizontal. A horizontal holdup is then calculated by
correlations, and this holdup is corrected for the angle of inclination. The test system included two 90
ft long acrylic pipes, winched to a variable elevation in the middle, so as to model incline flow both
upwards and downwards at angles of up to 90°.

Beggs and Brill Revised

REVISED: As above except that the revised version of the Beggs and Brill correlation is used, with
rough pipe friction factors, holdup limits and corrective constants as proposed by Palmer (p.550) and
Payne (p.550). The following enhancements to the original method are used; (1) an extra flow regime
of froth flow is considered which assumes a no-slip holdup, (2) the friction factor is changed from the
standard smooth pipe model, to utilize a single phase friction factor based on the average fluid
velocity.
Dukler (AGA) and Flanigan
1. The AGA and Flanigan correlation was developed for horizontal and inclined two phase flow of 
gas-condensate gathering systems. The Taitel Dukler flow regime map is used which considers
five flow regimes, stratified smooth, stratified wavy, intermittent, annular dispersed liquid, and
dispersed bubble. The Dukler (p.542) equation is used to calculate the frictional pressure loss
and holdup, and the Flanigan (p.543) equation is used to calculate the elevational pressure
differential.
2. As above but with liquid holdup calculated according to the Eaton (p.543) correlation. The Eaton
liquid holdup correlation is based on a study performed on 2 in. and 4 in. steel pipe using water 
and natural gasranged
measurements as test from
fluids..006
Test- 0.732.
pressures ranged from 305 to 865 psia and liquid holdup

Mukherjee and Brill

The Mukherjee and Brill (p.548) correlation is used for Pressure loss, Holdup and Flow Map. Note:
selection of alternative flow maps and/or holdups will cause unpredictable results. The Mukherjee
and Brill correlation was developed following a study of pressure drop behavior in two-phase inclined
flow. The test facility consisted of a U-Shaped pipe that was inclinable +/-90º. Each leg of the U section
was 56 ft with 22 ft entrance lengths and a 32 ft test sections on both sides. Fluids were air, kerosene
and lube oil with liquid viscosities ranging from .9 to 75 cp. Approximately 1000 pressure drop
measurements and 1500 liquid holdup measurements were obtained from a broad range of oil and
gas flows.
For bubble and slug flow, a no-slip friction factor calculated from the Moody diagram was found
adequate for friction head loss calculations. In downhill stratified flow, the friction pressure gradient
is calculated based on a momentum balance equation for either phase assuming a smooth gas-liquid
interface. For annular-mist flow, a friction factor correlation was presented that is a function of holdup
ratio and no-slip Moody friction factor. Results agreed well with the experimental data and correlations
were further verified with Prudhoe Bay and North Sea data.

Technical Description
340 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 358/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Minami and Brill

The Minami and Brill correlation calculates liquid holdup though does not predict flow regime or 
pressure gradient. The experimental holdup data was obtained by passing spheres through a 1,333
ft long 3 steel horizontal pipe and measuring the liquid volumes removed. Holdup measurements
ranged from .001 to .44. Fluids used in the experiment included air, kerosene and water with the liquid
viscosities ranging from .6 cp to 2 cp.
Two correlations were proposed. The first (BRIMIN1) is valid for all ranges of liquid holdup; the second
(BRIMIN2) is strictly for wet gas pipelines (holdup < .35).
The Minami and Brill (p.548) holdup correlations can be used with any correlation except Mukherjee
and Brill and No Slip. To activate the Minami and Brill correlation, enter the appropriate engine
keyword under Setup » Engine Options (for example, hcorr holdup = brimin1)

NOSLIP Correlation
The NOSLIP correlation assumes homogeneous flow with no slip between the phases. Fluid
properties are taken as the average of the gas and liquid phases and friction factors are calculated

using the single

will cause phase MOODY
unpredictable results. correlation. Note: selection of alternative flow maps and/or holdups

OLGA-S 2000 2-phase / OLGA-S 2000 3-phase

The OLGA-S mechanistic models are applicable for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid
properties. The 2-phase Bendiksen (p.539) model considers gas-liquid flow, whereas the 3-phase
model considers gas-oil-water flow.
This model employs separate continuity equations for gas, liquid bulk and liquid droplets, which are
coupled through interphase mass transfer. Two momentum equations are solved: one applied to the
combined balance for the gas and liquid droplets, if present, and a separate momentum equation for 
the liquid film. OLGA-S considers four flow regimes: stratified, annular, slug and dispersed bubble
flow; and uses a unique minimum slip criteria to predict flow regime transitions.
The OLGA 2-Phase model uses the liquid viscosity model defined within the PIPESIM fluid property
definition. The 3-Phase model uses the Pal and Rhodes emulsion correlation to calculate liquid
viscosity based on the oil and water viscosities defined with the PIPESIM fluid model definition; liquid
viscosity options defined with the PIPESIM fluid model are ignored.
OLGA-S is based in large part on data from the SINTEF multiphase flow laboratory near Trondheim,
Norway. The test facilities were designed to operate at conditions that approximated field conditions.
The test loop is 800 m long and 8 inches in diameter. Operating pressures between 20 and 90 barg
were studied. Gas superficial velocities of up to 13 m/s, and liquid superficial velocities of up to 4 m/
s were obtained. In order to simulate the range of viscosities and surface tensions experienced in
field applications, different hydrocarbon liquids were used (naptha, diesel, and lube oil). Nitrogen was
used as the gas. Pipeline inclination angles between 1° were studied in addition to flow up or down
a hill section ahead of a 50m high vertical riser. Over 10,000 experiments were run on this test loop
during an eight year period. The facility was run in both steady state and transient modes.

LEDA
The Leda Point Model (PM) (http://www.kongsberg.com/ledaflow) is a mechanistic model applicable
for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid properties. The 2-phase model considers gas-liquid
flow whereas the 3-phase model considers gas-oil-water flow.

Technical Description
341
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 359/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The 3-phase Leda PM considers 9 fields in the mass (continuity) equations (oil, gas, water, oil in gas
and water, gas in oil and water, water in oil and gas). Separate momentum equations are solved for 
oil, gas and water.
The 2-phase Leda PM considers 4 fields in the mass (continuity) equations (liquid, gas, liquid in gas
and gas in liquid. Separate momentum equations are solved for gas and liquid phases. The flow
regimes predicted by LedaPM are stratified smooth flow, stratified wavy flow, slug flow, annular and
bubbly flow. The Leda 2-phase model uses the liquid viscosity associated with the fluid model defined
in PIPESIM. The Leda 3-phase model assumes that the liquid viscosity is equal to that of the
continuous phase; liquid viscosity options defined with the PIPESIM fluid model are ignored. The
continuous phase is determined by the Brauner-Ullman (p.540) inversion criteria.
The Leda Point Model is the steady-state version of the transient model developed by SINTEF in
collaboration with Total and ConocoPhillips and commercialized by Kongsberg. The model has been
calibrated against data collected at the SINTEF Multiphase Flow Laboratory near Trondheim Norway.
Over 10,000 experimental data points have been collected for single-phase, two-phase (oil-water,
water-gas) and three-phase (oil-water-gas) flow. Pipe diameters ranging from 4-12” were used at
pressures up to 90 barg. The models have been validated with field data supplied by ConocoPhillips
and Total.
Oliemans
The Oliemans correlation was developed following the study of large diameter condensate pipelines.
The flow regime is predicted using the Taitel Dukler flow regime map, and a simple model, which
obeyed the correct single phase flow limits was introduced to predict the pressure drop. The model
was based on a limited amount of data from a 30-in, 100-km pipeline operating at pressures of 100
barg or higher. The Oliemans (p.549) pressure loss correlation can be used with the Eaton, BJA1,
BJA2, BRIMIN1 or BRIMIN2 holdup correlations.

Xiao

The
It wasXiao comprehensive
developed mechanistic
for gas-liquid model
two-phase was
flow developedand
in horizontal as part
nearofhorizontal
the TUFFP researchThe
pipelines. program.
model
first predicts the existing flow pattern, and then calculates flow characteristics, primarily liquid holdup
and pressure drop, for the stratified, intermittent, annular, or dispersed bubble flow patterns. The
model was tested against a pipeline data bank. The data bank included large diameter field data
culled from the AGA multiphase pipeline data bank, and laboratory data published in literature. Data
included both black oil and compositional fluid systems. A new correlation was proposed which
predicts the internal friction factor under stratified flow.

TUFFP Unified Mechanistic Model (2-phase and 3-phase)

The TUFFP Unified Mechanistic Model is the collective result of many research projects performed
by the Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects (TUFFP) research consortium. The model determines
flow pattern transitions, pressure gradient, liquid holdup and slug characteristics. A 2-phase version
is available for gas-liquid flow [Zhang et.al, development (p.553) and validation (p.553)] and a 3-
phase version is available for gas-oil-water pipe flow [Zhang and Sarica (p.554)]. The model is valid
for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid proper ties.
The principle concept underlying the model is the premise that slug flow shares transition boundaries
with all the other flow patterns. The flow pattern transition from slug flow to stratified and/or annular 
flow is predicted by solving the momentum equations for slug flow. The entire film zone is treated as

Technical Description
342 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 360/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

the control volume and the momentum exchange between the slug body and the film zone is
introduced into the combined momentum equation. This approach differs from traditional methods of 
using separate models for each transition. The advantage of a single hydrodynamic model is that the
flow pattern transitions, slug characteristics, liquid holdup and pressure gradient are implicitly related.
The 3-phase model contains separate momentum balances for the gas, oil and water phases. The
model determines whether the oil and water phases are separated or fully mixed. If the phases are
separated, individual phase viscosities are used. If the phases are fully mixed, the liquid viscosity can
be determined either by the method within the TUFFP model (emul default option) or overridden (emul
override option) by the liquid viscosity method defined with the PIPESIM fluid model, which is useful
when rheology data are available. In the latter case, for black oil fluid models, selecting the Brinkman
emulsion viscosity method with the Brauner-Ullman watercut cutoff method will replicate the method
used within the TUFFP model. For the 2-phase (gas-liquid) model, the liquid viscosity from PIPESIM
is always used, so the emulsion options defined in the PIPESIM fluid definition always apply.
The closure relationships included in the model are based on focused experimental research
programs at University of Tulsa and elsewhere. As new and improved closure relationships become
available, the TUFFP Unified Model is updated and validated.

Note: The TUFFP Unified 2-Phase Model v 2007.1 is available in PIPESIM. However, this version
does not converge under certain flow conditions. This problem was fixed in 2011. Use version 2011
(or later).

Vertical Multiphase Flow Correlations

Setup » Flow Correlations
See also: Flow regimes (p.337), Selecting correlations (p.110), Suggested flow correlation (p.111),
SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (p.604)

The flow correlations

By default, available
PIPESIM uses are affected
the explicit Moody by the Moody
friction friction Factor
factor calculation calculation
method method
("Explicit option.
Reformulation
of the Colebrook-White Equation for turbulent Flow friction Factor calculation" by J. Sonnad and C.
Goudar, Ind. Eng. Chem. Res, 2007, 46, pp. 2593-2600).
The following vertical multiphase flow correlations are available:

Ansari
The Ansari mechanistic model was developed as part of the Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects
(TUFFP) research program. A comprehensive model was formulated to predict flow patterns and the
flow characteristics of the predicted flow patterns for upward two-phase flow. The comprehensive
mechanistic model is composed of a model for flow pattern prediction and a set of independent models

for predicting
by using holdup well
the TUFFP and pressure
databankdrop
that in
is bubble,
composedslug,
of and
1775annular flows.with
well cases, The371
model was evaluated
of them from
Prudhoe Bay data.

Beggs and Brill Original

ORIGINAL: The Original Beggs and Brill (p.539) correlation is used for pressure loss and holdup.
Flow regime is determined by either the Beggs and Brill or Taitel Dukler correlation. The Beggs and
Brill correlation was developed following a study of two-phase flow in horizontal and inclined pipes.

Technical Description
343
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 361/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The correlation is based upon a flow regime map which is first determined as if the flow was horizontal.
 A horizontal holdup is then calculated by correlations, and this holdup is corrected for the angle of 
inclination. The test system included two 90 ft long acrylic pipes, winched to a variable elevation in
the middle, so as to model incline flow both upwards and downwards at angles of up to 90°.

Beggs and Brill Revised

REVISED: As above except that the revised version of the Beggs and Brill correlation is used, with
rough pipe friction factors, holdup limiters and corrective constants as proposed by Palmer (p.550)
and Payne (p.550). The following enhancements to the original method are used; (1) an extra flow
regime of froth flow is considered which assumes a no-slip holdup, (2) the friction factor is changed
from the standard smooth pipe model, to utilize a single phase friction factor based on the average
fluid velocity.

Brill and Minami

The Brill and Minami (p.548) Holdup correlations can be used with any flow map correlations except
Mukerjee and Brill and No Slip.

Duns and Ros

The Duns and Ros correlation is used for pressure loss and holdup with flow regime determination
by either the Duns and Ros (p.543) or the Taitel (p.553) Dukler (p.542) correlations. The Duns and
Ros correlation was developed for vertical flow of gas and liquid mixtures in wells. Equations were
developed for each of three flow regions, (I) bubble, plug and part of froth flow regimes, (II) remainder 
of froth flow and slug flow regimes, (III) mist flow regime. These regions have low, intermediate and
high gas throughputs respectively. Each flow region has a different holdup correlation. The equations
were based on extensive experimental work using oil and air mixtures.

Govier and Aziz

The correlation of  Aziz, Govier, and Forgasi (p.539) is used for pressure loss, holdup, and flow
regime. The Govier, Aziz and Fogarasi correlation was developed following a study of pressure drop
in wells producing gas and condensate. Actual field pressure drop versus flowrate data from 102
wells with gas-liquid ratios ranging from 3,900 to 1,170,000 scf/bbl were analyzed in detail. The phase
conditions in the well bore were determined by standard flash calculations. Pressure-gradient data
for flow under single-phase conditions were compar ed with conventional predictions, and found
generally to confirm them. For the test in which two-phase conditions were predicted throughout the
well bore, the field data were compared with several wholly empirical prediction methods, with a
previously proposed method, and with a new prediction method partly based on the mechanics of 
flow. The new prediction method incorporates an empirical estimate of the distribution of the liquid
phase between that flowing as a film on the wall and that entrained in the gas core. It employs separate
momentum equations for the gas-liquid mixture in the core and for the total contents of the pipe.

Gray
The Gray Vertical Flow correlation is used for pressure loss and holdup. This correlation was
developed by H E Gray of Shell Oil Company for vertical flow in gas and condensate systems which
are predominantly gas phase. Flow is treated as single phase, and dropped out water or condensate
is assumed to adher e to the pipe wall. It is considered applicable for vertical flow cases where the
velocity is below 50 ft/s, the tube size is below 3.5 in, the condensate ratio is below 50 bbl/mmscf,
and the water ratio is below 5 bbl/mmscf.

Technical Description
344
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 362/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Gray Modified
 As above, but with the following modifications: (1) Actual Reynolds number used (Gray Original
assumed Reynolds number to always be 1 million), and (2) Pseudo-roughness is constrained to be
less than the pipe radius.

Hagedorn and Brown

The correlation of Hagedorn and Brown (p.545) is used for pressure loss and holdup. While the
Hagedorn and Brown correlation does not predict flow pattern, the flow pattern as predicted by
Orkiszewski is reported. The Duns and Ros flow pattern prediction can also be reported. Neither of 
these flow pattern prediction methods affects any of the calculations. The Hagedorn and Brown
correlation was developed following an experimental study of pressure gradients occurring during
continuous two-phase flow in small diameter vertical conduits. A 1,500 ft experimental well was used
to study flow through 1 in., 1.25 in., and 1.5 in. nominal size tubing. Air was the gas phase and four 
different liquids were used: water and crude oils with viscosities of about 10, 30 and 110 cp. Liquid
holdup was not directly measured, rather a pseudo liquid-holdup value was determined that matched
measured pressure gradients.
Further work by Brill and Hagedorn have led to two modifications: (1) If the Griffith and Wallis criteria
predicted the occurrence of bubble flow, the Griffith bubble-flow method should be used to predict
pressure gradient, and (2) If the predicted liquid holdup is less than the no-slip liquid holdup, then the
no-slip liquid holdup is used.
 All of the correlations involve only dimensionless groups, which is a condition usually sought for in
similarity analysis but not always achieved.

Mukherjee and Brill

The Mukerjee and Brill (p.548) correlation is used for Pressure loss, Holdup and flow map. Note:
selection of alternative flow maps and/or holdups will cause unpredictable results. The Mukherjee
and Brill correlation was developed following a study of pressure drop behavior in two-phase inclined
flow. For bubble and slug flow, a no-slip friction factor calculated from the Moody diagram was found
adequate for friction head loss calculations. In downhill stratified flow, the friction pressure gradient
is calculated based on a momentum balance equation for either phase assuming a smooth gas-liquid
interface. For annular-mist flow, a friction factor correlation was presented that is a function of holdup
ratio and no-slip Moody friction factor. Results agreed well with the experimental data and correlations
were further verified with Prudhoe Bay and North Sea data.

NOSLIP Correlation
The NOSLIP correlation assumes homogeneous flow with no slip between the phases. Fluid
properties are taken as the average of the gas and liquid phases and friction factors are calculated
using the single phase MOODY correlation. Note: selection of alternative flow maps and/or holdups
will cause unpredictable results.
OLGA-S 2000 2-phase/ OLGA-S 2000
The OLGA-S mechanistic models are applicable for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid
properties. The 2-phase Bendiksen (p.539) model considers gas-liquid flow, whereas the 3-phase
model considers gas-oil-water flow.
This model employs separate continuity equations for gas, liquid bulk and liquid droplets, which are
coupled through interphase mass transfer. Two momentum equations are solved: one applied to the

Technical Description
345 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 363/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

combined balance for the gas and liquid droplets, if present, and a separate momentum equation for 
the liquid film. OLGA-S considers four flow regimes: stratified, annular, slug and dispersed bubble
flow; and uses a unique minimum slip criteria to predict flow regime transitions.
The OLGA 2-Phase model uses the liquid viscosity model defined within the PIPESIM fluid property
definition. The 3-Phase model uses the Pal and Rhodes emulsion correlation to calculate liquid
viscosity based on the oil and water viscosities defined with the PIPESIM fluid model definition; liquid
viscosity options defined with the PIPESIM fluid model are ignored.
OLGA-S is based in large part on data from the SINTEF multiphase flow laboratory near Trondheim,
Norway. The test facilities were designed to operate at conditions that approximated field conditions.
The test loop is 800 m long and 8 inches in diameter. Operating pressures between 20 and 90 barg
were studied. Gas superficial velocities of up to 13 m/s, and liquid superficial velocities of up to 4 m/
s were obtained. In order to simulate the range of viscosities and surface tensions experienced in
field applications, different hydrocarbon liquids were used (naptha, diesel, and lube oil). Nitrogen was
used as the gas. Pipeline inclination angles between 1° were studied in addition to flow up or down
a hill section ahead of a 50m high vertical riser. Over 10,000 experiments were run on this test loop
during an eight year period. The facility was run in both steady state and transient modes.

LEDA
The Leda Point Model (PM) (http://www.kongsberg.com/ledaflow) is a mechanistic model applicable
for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid properties. The 2-phase model considers gas-liquid
flow whereas the 3-phase model considers gas-oil-water flow.
The 3-phase Leda PM considers 9 fields in the mass (continuity) equations (oil, gas, water, oil in gas
and water, gas in oil and water, water in oil and gas). Separate momentum equations are solved for 
oil, gas and water.
The 2-phase Leda PM considers 4 fields in the mass (continuity) equations (liquid, gas, liquid in gas
and gas in liquid. Separate momentum equations are solved for gas and liquid phases. The flow
regimes predicted by LedaPM are stratified smooth flow, stratified wavy flow, slug flow, annular and
bubbly flow. The Leda 2-phase model uses the liquid viscosity associated with the fluid model defined
in PIPESIM. The Leda 3-phase model assumes that the liquid viscosity is equal to that of the
continuous phase; liquid viscosity options defined with the PIPESIM fluid model are ignored. The
continuous phase is determined by the Brauner-Ullman (p.540) inversion criteria.
The Leda Point Model is the steady-state version of the transient model developed by SINTEF in
collaboration with Total and ConocoPhillips and commercialized by Kongsberg. The model has been
calibrated against data collected at the SINTEF Multiphase Flow Laboratory near Trondheim Norway.
Over 10,000 experimental data points have been collected for single-phase, two-phase (oil-water,
water-gas) and three-phase (oil-water-gas) flow. Pipe diameters ranging from 4-12” were used at
pressures up to 90 barg. The models have been validated with field data supplied by ConocoPhillips
and Total.

Orkiszewski
The Orkiszewski (p.549) correlation is used for pressure loss, holdup, and flow regime. The
Orkiszewski correlation was developed for the prediction of two phase pressure drops in vertical pipe.
Four flow regimes were considered, bubble, slug, annular-slug transition, and annular mist. The
method can accurately predict, to within 10%, the two phase pressure drops in naturally flowing and
gas lifted production wells over a wide range of well conditions. The precision of the method was
verified when its predicted values were compared against 148 measured pressure drops. Unlike most

Technical Description
346 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 364/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

other methods, liquid holdup is derived from observed physical phenomena, and is adjusted for angle
of deviation.

TUFFP Unified Mechanistic Model (2-phase and 3-phase)

The TUFFP Unified Mechanistic Model is the collective result of many research projects performed
by the Tulsa University Fluid Flow Projects (TUFFP) research consortium. The model determines
flow pattern transitions, pressure gradient, liquid holdup and slug characteristics. A 2-phase version
is available for gas-liquid flow Zhang et.al, development (p.553) and validation (p.553)] and a 3-
phase version is available for gas-oil-water pipe flow [Zhang and Sarica (p.554)]. The model is valid
for all inclination angles, pipe diameters and fluid properties.
The principle concept underlying the model is the premise that slug flow shares transition boundaries
with all the other flow patterns. The flow pattern transition from slug flow to stratified and/or annular 
flow is predicted by solving the momentum equations for slug flow. The entire film zone is treated as
the control volume and the momentum exchange between the slug body and the film zone is
introduced into the combined momentum equation. This approach differs from traditional methods of 
using separate models for each transition. The advantage of a single hydrodynamic model is that the
flow pattern transitions, slug characteristics, liquid holdup and pressure gradient are implicitly related.
The 3-phase model contains separate momentum balances for the gas, oil and water phases. The
model determines whether the oil and water phases are separated or fully mixed. If the phases are
separated, individual phase viscosities are used. If the phases are fully mixed, the liquid viscosity can
be determined either by the method within the TUFFP model (emul default option) or overridden (emul
override option) by the liquid viscosity method defined with the PIPESIM fluid model, which is useful
when rheology data are available. In the latter case, for black oil fluid models, selecting the Brinkman
emulsion viscosity method with the Brauner-Ullman watercut cutoff method will replicate the method
used within the TUFFP model. For the 2-phase (gas-liquid) model, the liquid viscosity from PIPESIM
is always used, so the emulsion options defined in the PIPESIM fluid definition always apply.
The closure relationships included in the model are based on focused experimental research
programs at University of Tulsa and elsewhere. As new and improved closure relationships become
available, the TUFFP Unified Model is updated and validated.

Note: The TUFFP Unified 2-Phase Model v 2007.1 is available in PIPESIM. However, this version
does not converge under certain flow conditions. This problem was fixed in 2011. Use version 2011
(or later).

Friction and Holdup factors

These two factors can be used to adjust the friction and holdup prediction of a particular flow
correlation. By default these factors are 1.

 A linear relationship is used for the friction pressure drop. Setting the friction factor to 0.5, for example,
will mean that the friction element of pressure drop computed by the correlation will be halved.

 A non-linear relationship is used to calculate the liquid holdup H  L  from the value predicted by the
correlation H  Lc :

H  L  = f  H   ⋅ H  Lc  + (1 − f  H  ) ⋅ H  Lc 

2
Eq. 4.1

Technical Description
347 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 365/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

This ensures that the liquid holdup is sensible 0 ≤ H  L  ≤ 1 when 0 ≤ f  H   ≤ 2.

Note: In old versions of PIPESIM a linear holdup factor was used, but this can result in liquid holdups
of 1 even when gas is flowing.

These factors are often used as calibration factors when a good match to field data cannot be obtained
by any other method. Changing these factors will affect the results and should be undertaken with
care.

Single Phase Flow Correlations

See also: Selecting correlations (p.110), SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (p.604)
The steady-state pressure gradient in single phase sections is given by the equation:

dp 
dL 
=
dp 
dL 
( )elev .
+ ( dL 
dp 
) fric .
+ ( dL 
dp 
)
acc .
Eq. 4.2

where elevation, friction and acceleration components of the pressure drop are:

( dL 
dp 
) elev .
= − ρg sin θ  Eq. 4.3

2
fρv 
( )
dp 
dL  fric .
= −
2D 
Eq. 4.4

( dL 
dp 
) acc .
= − ρv 
dv 
dL 
Eq. 4.5

where

f   is the friction factor  dimensionless 

 ρ  is the fluid density 3
lb  /  ft 

v  is the fluid velocity ft  / s 

 g  is the gravitational acceleration 2
ft  / s 

θ  is the angle of the pipe to the horizontal degrees 

D  is the pipe diameter  ft 

L  is the length of the pipe ft 

Throughout, the accelerational term for single phase flow is negligible and is assumed to be zero.
There are a number of different ways of calculating the friction factor, which usually depends on the
Reynolds number:
ρvD 
Re = Eq. 4.6
μ 

Technical Description
348 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 366/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

where:

μ  is the fluid viscosity lb  /  ft  ⋅ s 

Moody (default for liquid or gas)

See Sonnad and Goudar paper (p.552) and Moody paper (p.548) for more technical details.

For laminar flow (Re < 2000) 64

f  Lam  =
Re
For turbulent flow (Re > 4000) 1
1/2
= a  ln ( q c  + δ )
f  Turb 

For transition flow (2000 ≤ Re ≤ 4000) (Re − Remin )( f  Turb  − f  Lam  )

f   = + f  Lam 
(Remax − Remin )
where:

f  Turb  is the Moody friction factor 

Re is the Reynolds Number 

a 2
is
ln (10)
ϵ  is the pipe roughness
D is the pipe diameter  
b is ϵ  / D 
3.7
c 
is ( ln5.02
(10)
)Re
s is bc + ln (c)
q s  / (s +1)
is s 

z 
is ln ( g q  )
is bc  + ln c 
g 
( )
q 

is ( )z 
δ  g 
 g  + 1

The friction factor is interpolated in the transition region (2000 < Re < 4000). The limits for the transition
zone and the interpolation method can be reset by the user.

Technical Description
349
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 367/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The various friction factor calculation methods available are:

Friction Factor  Approximation used Equation

Calculation method
EXPLICIT or SONNAD Sonnad 2007 linear  1 c 
1/2 = a  ln q  + δ 
approximation (default) f  Turb  ( )
 APPROXIMATE or  Moody 1947 6 1/3
MOODY approximation
f  Turb  = 0.0055 1 + 20000
ϵ 
+(
D  Re
10
)
IMPLICIT or ITERATIVE Colebrook-White 1 2 ϵ  18.7
equation (Moody chart)
f  Turb 
1/2
= 1.74 − 2log10
( D 
+
Re f  Turb 
1/2
)
AGA (for gas)
The AGA friction factor is the same as the Moody friction factor at high and low Reynolds numbers,
but differs in between:

For laminar flow (Re < 1000) 64

f   =
Re
For transition flow

(1000 < Re < 4

c 2 3.7D 
ϵ 
(
1 c 1
)  /  log ( 3.7ϵ D ) )
10
1
f  
1/2
= 2c 1log
10 ( Re c 1 1/2
2 c 
2
f   )
c  1

For turbulent flow 1 3.7D  2 ϵ 

f  1/2 = 2log10 ϵ  = 1.74 − 2log10 D 
(Re >4
c 2 3.7D 
(
ϵ 
1 c 1
) (
 /  log 3.7D  )
10 ϵ 
) ( ) ( )
c 
1

where:

c 1 = 0.98 is the drag factor 

0.15 is a constant
c 2 = 10

Cullender and Smith (for gas)

The total pressure drop can be calculated from

dp   p down  − p up 

=
dL  L 
where:

Technical Description
350 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 368/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2 2
2
 p down  − a 
 p up  =
b 
where:
2 ¯2
25 f q  T   Z   (b  − 1)
2

a 2 = vG  G 
5
0.0375(12D )

b  = exp ( 0.0375 γ G L 

¯T  Z  
G 
)
f   is the Moody friction factor dimensionless
L  is the pipe length ft 

 p down  is the downstream pressure psi 

 p up  is the upstream pressure psi 

q vG  is the stock tank gas volume flow rate scf   / day 

¯T   is the average temperature ° R 

Z  G  is the gas compressibility factor dimensionless

γ G  is the gas specific gravity dimensionless

Other friction pressure drops for gas

The friction pressure drop can be calculated from
 p down  − p up 
( dL 
dp 
) fric .
=
L 

where:
¯T  Z   L  2 a 4 1/ a 3
2 2
 p up  − p down  =
5280
G 
( )(p s 
T  s 
1
a 1
⋅
q vG 
η 
⋅
γ G 
(12D )a 5 )
where:

L  is the pipe length ft 

 p down  is the downstream pressure psi 

 p up  is the upstream pressure psi 

 p s  is the stock tank pressure psi 

Technical Description
351
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 369/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

q vG  is the stock tank gas volume flow rate scf   / day 

¯T   is the average temperature ° R 

T  s  is the stock tank temperature ° R 

Z  G  is the gas compressibility factor dimensionless

γ G  is the gas specific gravity dimensionless

η  is a flow efficiency factor dimensionless

and the constants are given by

a 1 a 3 a 4 a 5

Panhandle A 435.87 0.5394 0.4604 2.618

Panhandle B 737.00 0.5100 0.4900 2.530
Weymouth 433.50 0.5000 0.5000 2.667

Hazen-Williams (for liquid water)

The friction pressure drop can be calculated from:
1.85

( )
dp 
dL  fric .
=
0.015 ρ m 
144(12D )
4.87 ⋅ ( )
q vL 
c 
Eq. 4.7

where:

c  is the pipe condition factor 

q vL  is the liquid volume flow rate bbl  / day 

3
 ρ m  is the mixture density lb  /  ft 

Swap Angle
The multiphase flow correlations used to predict the pressure loss and holdup are split into two
categories: vertical and horizontal. Each category lists the correlations that are appropriate for that
type of flow.
By default the selected vertical correlation is used in the situation where the tubing/pipe is within 45
degrees of the vertical, up or down. Outside this range the selected horizontal correlation is used.
This angle can be changed.

Technical Description
352 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 370/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

deWaard (1995) Corrosion Model

The de Waard model (p.542) predicts the corrosion rate of carbon steel in the presence of water and
CO2. The model was developed primarily for use in predicting corrosion rates in pipelines where
CO2 is present in a vapor phase. The model has not been validated at high pressures where CO 2 is
entirely in the liquid phase. Corrosion rate is calculated as a function of:
• Temperature
• Pressure

• Mol% CO2
• Wt% Glycol (Multiflash and ScaleChem only)
• Liquid velocity
• Pipe Diameter 
• pH
The model accounts for the flow-independent kinetics of the corrosion reaction as well as the flow-
dependent mass transfer of dissolved CO2 using a resistance model. Additionally, effects of protective
scale at high temperatures are considered in addition to glycol inhibition.

Note: The equations that follow are based on the de Waard 1995 model (p.542). This model is a
revision to the de Waard 1991 model (p.542). Some of the equations below appear only in the original
paper].

General Equation

Technical Description
353
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 371/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

CcFsFg 
Vcor  =
1 1 Eq. 4.8
+
Vr  Vm 

CO Partial Pressure/Fugacity
2

(mole  % CO 2 * P total )

 pCO 2 = Eq. 4.9
100

1.4
log ( f  CO 2) = log ( pCO 2) + (.0031 − )P 
t  + 273

Reaction Rate term (Vr)

1119
log (Vr ) = 4.93 − + 0.58log ( fCO 2) − .34( pH  act  − pH  CO 2) Eq. 4.10
T  

pH
By default, the correlation assumes that the actual pH of the water is affected strictly by the presence
of CO2. However, the user may specify the actual pH of a water sample that accounts for the additional
presence of electrolytes and dissolved FeCO 3 liberated from the pipe wall. Since pH is dependent
on pressure and temperature, care must be taken when specifying this value. If a ScaleChem
generated PVT file is used, the actual pH is taken from the ScaleChem fluid description.

 pH  CO 2 = 3.82 + .00384t  − 0.5log ( fCO 2) Eq. 4.11

 pHact  = assumed to equal  pHco 2 unless user specified or ScaleChem PVT file is used

Mass Transfer rate term (Vm)

0.8
U  L 
Vm  = 2.45 0.2
fCO 2 Eq. 4.12
d 

Effect of Temperature (protective scale)

2400
Ts  = Eq. 4.13
6.7 + 0.44log ( fCO 2)

(if T > Ts)

1 1
log (Fs ) = 2400 − Eq. 4.14
T   Ts 
Else,
Fs  = 1 Eq. 4.15

Technical Description
354
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 372/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Glycol Reduction Effect

log F   g  = 1.6 log (W   % ) − 2 Eq. 4.16

Where W% is the weight percent of water in a water-glycol mixture (100% water results in a factor of 
1.0). The Glycol component is only available when using Multiflash (MEG or DEG) or with ScaleChem
(MEG).

Variable Units Description Default Acceptable Variable

Input Range Source
Vcor  (mm/yr) corrosion rate calc
T  temperature pipesim

t  temperature pipesim

 pCO2  atm partial pressure of CO2 calc

fCO2  atm, fugacity of CO2 calc
mol%CO2  — mol % CO2 (comp, BO, pipesim
ScaleChem PVT file)
P total  atm pressure pipesim
 pHact  — actual pH of the system pHco2 1.0–10.0 user spec
 pHCO2  — pH of dissolved CO2 in pure water calc
UL m/s liquid velocity pipesim
d  m/s pipe diameter pipesim
W% fraction Weight percent water in a water- 100 pipesim
glycol mixture
Ts Vcor inversion temperature calc

Fs — scaling factor calc

Cc  — multiplier to correct for inhibitor  1 0.1–10.0 user spec
efficiency or match to field data

Cunliffe's Method for Ramp Up Surge

Cunliffe's Method is used to predict the liquid surge rate due to an overall gas rate change for 
condensate pipelines. This method is particularly useful for estimating liquid handling capacity for 
ramp-up (increasing gas rate) cases. As the gas rate increases, the total liquid holdup in the line will
drop owing to less slippage between the gas and liquid phases. The liquid residing in the line is
therefore accelerated to the equilibrium velocity at the final gas rate and thus expelled at a rate higher 
than the final equilibrium liquid rate for the duration of the transition period. The transition period is
assumed to be equal to the residence time at the final gas rate, that is, the time it takes the liquid to
travel from one end of the line to the other.

Technical Description
355 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 373/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The average liquid rate during the transition period can be determined as follows:

(H  L  Ti 
− H  L 
Tf  
)
q L  = q L  +
T   i  t r 

q L  = q G  ( LGR out )

t  i 

H  L 
Tf  
t r  =
q L 
i 

where:

liquid rate during the transition period

q L 
T  

initial liquid rate

q L 
i 

total liquid holdup volume in line - initial gas rate

q G  = H  L 
i  T  

total liquid holdup volume in line - final gas rate

H  L 
Tf  

LGR out  liquid/gas ratio at outlet pressure (assumed constant)

t r  liquid residence time (at final flowrate)

Note: The total liquid holdup volume in the line is provided in the summary output report. Cunliffe
tested this method with field measurements for a 67 mi. 20 in. pipeline with an average operating
pressure of 1300 psig and an LGR of 65 bbl/MMscf. He found that the change in condensate flow
rate can be predicted to within 15% using this method.

Reference: Cunliffe, R.: "Prediction of Condensate Flow Rates in Large Diameter High Pressure Wet
Gas Pipelines", APEA Journal (1978), 171-177.

Liquid by Sphere

The liquid holdup throughout the pipe will be divided into two notional fractions, that is . the 'moving'
and the 'static'. Since the liquid normally flows slower than the gas, the division will normally result in
a positive value for both of these volumes. (If the pipe goes downhill the liquid often flows faster, so
the 'static' will be negative in these sections, but this does not affect the equation.) If the fluid's phase
split is assumed to be constant throughout the pipe, the size of the slug that issues when sphered
can be calculated using the following formula:

Technical Description
356 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 374/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

SLV  
SGLV   = Eq. 4.17
(TPV   − MLV  )MLV  + SLV  
where:
SGLV   is Sphere Generated Liquid Volume

SLV  is Static Liquid Volume in pipe

MLV  is Moving Liquid Volume in pipe
TPV  is Total Pipeline Volume

Note: SLV  + MLV   = Total pipeline holdup, which PIPESIM calculates and writes to the summary
output.

The explanation for this formula is as follows. The slug of liquid starts to issue from the pipe when
the pipe is full of liquid from its exit, back along to the position of the sphere. The liquid in the slug
comprises 2 notional fractions: firstly, the entire SLV in the pipe, and secondly, that portion of the
MLV that lies between the sphere and the outlet. Now: the volume available for the SLV to occupy in
the pipe is TPV - MLV. Dividing this into SLV gives us the position of the sphere in the pipe as a value
between 0 and 1, where 0 is the outlet. Multiplying the MLV by this gives us the portion of the MLV
that is entrained in the slug, so adding this to the SLV gives the total slug volume.
The liquid holdup is calculated from the integration of the predicted holdup from the selected
Multiphase Flow Correlation (MFC) along the entire pipeline length. The pipeline is simulated in
segments, each of which has a length and cross sectional area, which multiplied together yield its
volume. The MFC calculates a value for holdup in the range 0 to 1, so this multiplied by the segment
volume gives holdup for the segment. The holdups for all the pipe segments are added together to
yield the pipeline total holdup as reported in the summary file.
When a sphere is introduced into the line, it will gather in front of itself a liquid slug made from "all
the liquid that is flowing slower than the mean fluid flowrate in the pipeline at any given point". Thus
the crucial value that determines Sphere Generated Liquid Volume (SGLV) is the Slip Ratio (SR),
which is the average speed of the fluid divided by the speed of the liquid. If the liquid and gas move
at the same speed, the slip ratio will be 1, that is there is 'no slip' between the phases. In this situation
the sphere will not collect any liquid, so the SGLV will be zero. Normally the liquid flows slower than
the gas, that is the slip ratio is greater than 1, so "some" of the liquid in the pipeline will collect in front
of the sphere to form the SGLV. The only way that "all" of the liquid in the pipeline will collect to form
the SGLV, is if the liquid velocity is zero, i.e.. the slip ratio is infinite. This cannot happen in a steady-
state reality, so the SGLV is always smaller than the total liquid holdup.
One complicating factor is that the slug of liquid swept up by the sphere will begin to emerge from
the end of the pipe some considerable time before the sphere itself emerges. This slug will be
composed of the liquid that the sphere collected on its way, plus the normal liquid production of the
system. This total volume is the figure required to size the slug catcher, which is why we report it as
"Volume by sphere".
To determine the sizes of terrain slugs or slugs from start up it is necessary to use a dynamic
multiphase flow simulator such as LEDA or OLGA. More details. (p.643)

Technical Description
357 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 375/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PI-SS (Severe-Slugging Group)

PI-SS (severe-slugging group) is the ratio between the pressure buildup rates of gas phase and that
of liquid phase in a flowline, when followed by a riser:
ZRT  

Πss  = M  G  W  G  Eq. 4.18

 gL  < α GF   > W  L 

where

Z   Gas compressibility factor 

R  = 8314 J  / K  ⋅ kmol  Gas constant
T   Temperature K 

M  G  Molecular weight of gas (kg/kmol)

W  G  Gas mass flow rate kg  / s 

W  L  Liquid mass flow rate kg  / s 

2  Acceleration due to gravity

 g  = 9.81m  / s 

L  Flowline length m 

< α GL  >  Average flowline gas holdup

This expression is with assumptions of no mass transfer between the phases  ρ L  ≫ ρ G , and the
liquid fall back in the riser is neglected.
This PI-SS expression is based upon a correlation developed at Koninklijke Shell-Laboratorium (see
Pots and Bromilow (p.550) 1985) to quantify the likelihood of severe riser slugging, that is . when
Πss  < 1.0.
For severe slugging to occur, at least two conditions must be in evidence:
1. the flowline gas flow must be completely inhibited during slug buildup (that is due to a partly
declining flowline or the presence of flowline undulations ) .
2. the rate of hydrostatic pressure buildup in the riser due to the growth of the slug must exceed the
rate of gas pressure buildup in the flowline.

Under such conditions, the riser becomes filled with liquid before the gas pressure can drive the liquid
slug out of the line.

In PIPESIM if the value of Πss  is less than one at the riser base and the flow regime (as predicted by
the Taitel-Dukler correlation) is stratified (or wavy stratified), then severe riser slugging is possible.
Conversely, Πss  values significantly greater than one indicate that severe riser slugging is not likely.

Technical Description
358 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 376/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The PI-SS number (Πss ) can also be used to estimate slug size. As a rule of thumb the slug length
will be approximately equal to the riser height divided by Πss :

Slug Length = Riser Length / Πss 

Hence PI-SS values (Πss ) less than unity imply slug lengths greater than the riser height. PI-SS is
calculated at each node in the flowline (while PISS=ON) using averaged holdup data

Liquid Loading

Critical Unloading Velocity

The critical unloading velocity is defined as the minimum gas velocity required to lift liquid droplets
out of a gas well. Lower flowing gas velocities will result in liquid loading in the well. The critical
unloading velocity is predicted by Turner’s Equation.
0.25

N σ ( ρ L  − ρ G ) Eq. 4.19

v t  =
(C D 25 ρ G 0.5)
where

is the gas phase density 3

 ρ  g  lb  /  ft 
3
 ρ L  is the liquid phase density lb  /  ft 

σ  is the interfacial tension dynes  / cm 

v  is the terminal velocity of liquid droplet ft  / s 

t 
θ  is pipe angle from vertical °
C D  is the drag coefficient dimensionless

N   is a constant dimensionless

The values of N  and C D  are given in the following table for Turner's model and various others:

Model N C
D

Turner (1969) 1.56 0.44

Coleman (1991) 1.3 0.44
Nossier II (2000) 1.482 0.2
Li (2002) 0.724 1.0

Combining N  and C D , and discounting Turner's "built-in" 20% "correction factor" gives a constant of 
1.593. The correction factor is split out into the E term below.

Technical Description
359
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 377/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Turner's Equation (General)

Turner's Equation (Even More General Form):
0.25
1.593E σ ( ρ L  − ρ G )
v t  = Eq. 4.20
0.5
 ρ G 
Where E  is the correction (efficiency) factor. The values of E  for Turner's model and various others
are given in the following table:

Model E
Turner (1969) 1.2
Coleman (1991) 1.0
Nossier II (2000) 1.391
Li (2002) 0.454

Critical Gas Rate

The critical gas rate is the minimum gas rate required to prevent liquid loading.

4.1.2 Inflow performance relationships (IPRs)

Inflow Performance Relationships for Vertical Completions

Inflow performance relationships (IPRs) have been developed to model the flow of fluids from the
reservoir, through the formation, and into the well. They are expressed in terms of the well static (or 
reservoir) pressure P ws , the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure P wf  , and flowrate Q . Typically,
volume flow rates are proportional to the pressure drawdown:
Q V   ∝ ( P ws  − P wf  ) Eq. 4.21

For liquid IPRs the stock tank liquid rate is roughly proportional to the volume flow rate at well
conditions, and this form of the equation is used:

Q L  ∝ ( P ws  − P wf  ) Eq. 4.22

For gas IPRs the stock tank flow rates are roughly proportional to the volume flow rate at reservoir 
conditions times the average reservoir pressure:

(P ws  + P wf  ) 2 2 Eq. 4.23

Q G  ∝ Q v  ⋅ 2 ∝ ( P ws  − P wf   )
See also Completion Options (p.59), Multilayer reservoir IPR (p.65)
PIPESIM offers a comprehensive list of IPR options, for both oil and gas reservoirs, as follows:

IPR Oil reservoirs Gas and Gas Multi-rate

Condensate test (p.55)
Reservoirs

Technical Description
360 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 378/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Backpressure Equation (p.365) Yes Yes

Fetkovich (p.363) Yes Yes
Hydraulically fractured (p.56) Yes Yes
IPR Table (p.375) Yes
Jones / Forchheimer (p.364) Yes Yes Yes
Pseudo Steady State Equation / Darcy Yes Yes
(p.365)
Transient (p.370) Yes Yes
Vogel (p.362) Yes
Well PI (Productivity Index) (p.361) Yes Yes Yes

The Well PI (p.361), Pseudo Steady State (p.365) and Transient (p.370) liquid IPRs can be
combined with a Vogel (p.362) IPR to model flow at pressures below the bubble point; see bubble
point correction (p.376) .

Productivity Index (PI)

PI is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the Inflow Performance Relationship
(p.360) (IPR) for a completion. It can be regarded as a simplified version of the pseudo-steady state
(p.365) or transient (p.370) IPRs.

Liquid PI 
The (straight line) productivity index relationship for liquid reservoirs is perhaps the simplest and most
widely used IPR equation. It states that rate is directly proportional to pressure drawdown between
the bottom hole and the reservoir.

Q L  = J  L  ⋅ ( p ws  − p wf  ) Eq. 4.24

where:

Q L  is the stock-tank oil rate

 p ws  is the well static (or reservoir) pressure

 p wf   is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure

J  L  is the liquid productivity index.

Below bubble point correction

The liquid PI equation can be combined with a Vogel equation (p.362) to model inflows when the
bottom hole pressure is below the bubble point, see, Bubble point correction. (p.376)

Gas PI 
For gas reservoir s a non-linear relationship is used:

Technical Description
361
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 379/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

( )
2 2
Q G  = J  G  ⋅  p ws  − p wf   Eq. 4.25

where:

Q  is the stock-tank gas rate

G 

 p ws  is the well static (or reservoir) pressure

 p wf   is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure

J  G  is the gas productivity index

Vogel's Equation
Vogel's (1968) (p.553) equation is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the Inflow
Performance
wells. Vogel'sRelationship
equation is a(p.360)
best-fit(IPR) for a completion.
approximation It wassimulated
of numerous developed to model
well saturated oil
performance
calculations. Vogel's work considers only the effect of rock and fluid properties on saturated systems.
The Vogel relation does not account for high-velocity-flow effects that may exist in high-rate wells,
see the Fetkovich equation (p.363).
Vogel's equation is:
2

(
Q  = Q max 1 − (1 − C ) ( ) ( ))
p wf  
 p ws 
− C 
p wf  
 p ws 
Eq. 4.26

Where

Q  is the liquid flow rate (STB/D or m3/d)

Q max is the absolute open hole flow potential, that is the liquid flow rate when the bottom hole
pressure is zero

 p wf   is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure (psia or bara)

 p ws  is the well static (or reservoir) pressure (psia or bara)

C  is the Vogel coefficient.

The Vogel equation has the following properties:

Q  = Q max at  p wf   = 0

Q  = 0 at  p wf   = p ws 

Technical Description
362 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 380/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

∂ Q  Q max ⋅ (1 + C ) at  p wf   = p ws 

Productivity index = −
∂ p wf    p ws 

Fetkovich's Equation
Fetkovich's equation is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the Inflow
Performance Relationship (p.360) (IPR) for a completion. The Fetkovich equation is a development
of the Vogel equation (p.362) to take account of high velocity effects.
2 n 

(
Q  = Q max 1 − ( ))
P wf  

P ws 
Eq. 4.27

Where

Q  is the liquid flow rate (STB/D or m 3/d)

Q max is the absolute open hole flow potential, that is the liquid flow rate when the bottom hole
pressure is zero

 p wf   is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure (psia or bara)

 p ws  is the well static (or reservoir) pressure (psia or bara)

n  is the Fetkovich exponent.

Technical Description
363
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 381/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Jones' Equation
Jones' equation (p.545) is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the Inflow
Performance Relationship (p.360) (IPR) for a completion. It is similar to the PI (p.361) method but
contains an extra term to model turbulence.

Jones equation for gas inflow 

The Jones equation for gas reser voirs is :
2 2 2
P ws  − P wf   = AQ G  + BQ G  Eq. 4.28

where

Q G  is the stock-tank gas rate

 p ws  is the well static (or reservoir) pressure

 p wf   is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure

A ≥ 0 is the turbulence coefficient

B  ≥ 0 is the laminar coefficient

In the case when A = 0 the Jones equation is the same as the gas PI (p.361) equation with
productivity index J  G  = 1 / B . Values of B  > 0.05 (psi2/MMscf/d) indicate low permeability or the
presence of skin damage .

Jones equation for liquid inflow 

Jones proposed the equation for gas flow, but it can also be used to model oil wells. However the
Fetkovich equation (p.363) can also be used for saturated oil wells and is the recommended method
for IPRs in reservoirs producing below the bubble point.
The Jones equation for liquid reservoirs is :
2
P ws  − P wf   = AQ L  + BQ L  Eq. 4.29

where

Q L  is the stock-tank oil rate

In the case when A = 0 the Jones equation is the same as the liquid PI (p.361) equation with
productivity index J  L  = 1 / B 

Forchheimer Equation
Forchheimer1901 (p.544) gave an equation for non-Darcy flow in the reservoir, which is essentially
the same as the Jones equation (p.364) for liquid inflow.

Technical Description
364
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 382/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Back Pressure Equation

The Back Pressure Equation is one of a number of methods that can be used to specify the Inflow
Performance Relationship (p.360) (IPR) for a completion.
The Back Pressure Equation was developed by Rawlins and Schellhardt (1935) (p.551) after testing
582 wells. The equation is typically applied to gas wells although its application to oil wells has also
been proven. If correlations already exist for oil wells, use the Back Pressure Equation on gas wells
only. The equation has the following form:
2 n 
( )
2
Q G  = C  ⋅ P ws  − P wf   Eq. 4.30

where

Q G  is the gas flow rate (MMscf/d) (m3/d),

 p ws  is the well static (or reservoir) pressure (psia) (bara)

 p wf   is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure (psia) (bara)

C  is the back pressure constant (MMscf/d/(psia2)n) (m3/d/(bar 2) n)

n  is the dimensionless back pressure exponent

The back pressure exponent, n , which ranges between 0.5 and 1.0, accounts for high velocity flow
(turbulence). When n  = 1 the back pressure equation is the same as the gas PI (p.361) equation.
The back pressure constant, C , represents reservoir rock and fluid properties, flow geometry and
transient effects.
The parameters C  and n  must be obtained by multi-rate testing (p.55) of the well. Since
2 2
(
log Q G  = log C  + n  ⋅ log P ws  − P wf   ) Eq. 4.31

2 2
 A plot of flow rate Q G  versus  p ws  − p  on a log-log scale will give a line with slope n and intercept
wf  
C . To avoid unit conversion problems when obtaining the parameters, check that the slope has a
value between 0.5 and 1.0. If n is less than 0.5, this implies that the reservoir stabilization conditions
are slow, or that liquid has accumulated in the wellbore (in gas condensate wells). The value of n can
be greater than 1.0 if liquid is removed from the well during testing, or by removing drilling or 
stimulation fluids. Also, changes in well capacity during isochronal testing will cause a wider scatter 
of data points. This might be the result of liquid accumulation or cleaning of the wells.

Pseudo Steady State Equation / Darcy Equation

The pseudo steady state IPR (p.360) equation (PSS), is derived from the equation for single phase
Darcy flow into a well. A number of versions of the equation can be used (some require keywords
(p.648)):
• for liquid flow the PSS is written in terms of the stock tank liquid (p.368) flow rate

Technical Description
365 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 383/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• this can be optionally combined with a Vogel formula for pressures below the bubble point
(p.368).
• the liquid flow can be modelled using a two phase version of the radial flow equations for oil
and water (p.368)
• for gas flow the PSS is written in terms of the stock tank gas (p.369) flow rate
• a version using the gas pseudo pressure (p.370) (more accurate for high pressure systems).
• the PSS expressed in terms of reservoir flow (p.366) rates can be used for either liquid or gas
flow.
• the liquid flow can be modelled using a two phase version of the reservoir flow equations for 
oil and water (p.367)

Reservoir flow 
The pseudo steady state equation, like the transient IPR (p.370), is calculated by solving the radial,
single phase, Darcy flow into a well. It applies for relatively long times, after the well has passed
through the transient stage. The solution is given by Dake 1978 (p.542):

Q R Φ = M  Φ ⋅ T   ⋅ (P ws  − P wf  ) Eq. 4.32

where the PSS transmissibility term is defined by:

2 πkh 
T   =

C 1 ln ( )
r e 
r w 
− 0.75 + S 
Eq. 4.33

Here:

Q R Φ is the volume flow rate at reservoir  RB  / d  or 

conditions of phase Φ MCF  / d 

M  Φ is the mobility of phase Φ 1 / cp 

 p ws  is the average reservoir pressure psia 

 p wf   is the bottom hole pressure psia 

k  is the formation permeability mD 

h  is the formation thickness ft 

r w  is the wellbore radius ft 

r e  is the drainage radius ft 

S  is the skin

Technical Description
366 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 384/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

C 1 is a conversion factor depending

on the flow units
2 −3 If the flow is in RB  / d 
14.7 ⋅ 0.3048 ⋅ 5.61458 ⋅ 10
C 1 = −10
= 2 π  ⋅ 141.2
86400 ⋅ 10
2 If the flow is in
14.7 ⋅ 0.3048
C 1 = −10 MCF  / d 
86400 ⋅ 10

¯
Note: The constant 0.75 comes from using the average reservoir pressure  p ws  = p . A similar formula

can be derived using the pressure at the drainage radius  p ws  = p (r e ), but the value 0.75 is replaced
by 0.5.

The phase mobility is defined in terms of the phase relative permeability and viscosity:

k r Φ
M  Φ = Eq. 4.34
μ Φ

k r Φ is the relative permeability for phase Φ

μ Φ is the viscosity of phase Φ at reservoir conditions cp 

For single phase flow the relative permeability is k r Φ = 1, and the inflow equation simplifies to :
1
Q R Φ = ⋅ T   ⋅ ( P ws  − P wf  ) Eq. 4.35
μ Φ

This version of the PSS IPR can be used for liquid or gas inflow.
For multiphase inflow, the total inflow can be written as the sum of the phase inflows:
Q R  = Q RO  + Q RW   + Q RG  Eq. 4.36

This can be rearranged to give:

Q  = M   ⋅ T   ⋅ (P  − P  ) Eq. 4.37

R  ws  wf  
Where the total mobility is defined by

M   = M  O  + M  W   + M  G  Eq. 4.38

Oil and water flow 

 A two phase version of the multiphase inflow equation can be used to model liquid inflow.

Technical Description
367 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 385/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Q RL  = ( k rO 
μ O 
+
k rW  
μ W  
) ⋅ T   ⋅ ( P ws  − P wf  ) Eq. 4.39

The relative permeabilities can be determined from permeability tables (p.403).

Injection
The reservoir injection flow equation is similar to the PSS production IPR:

Q R  = M  I   ⋅ T   ⋅ ( P wf   − P ws ) Eq. 4.40

Here however, the mobility term represents the mobility of the fluid in the reservoir, rather than that
of the injection fluid, and must be specified. In production, the fluid being produced is the same as
that moving through the reservoir. In injection systems the two fluids may be different. For example,
we would expect different flow rates if gas is injected into a liquid filled reservoir or a gas filled
reservoir. If the injection fluid does differ from the reservoir fluid, then the injection mobility will change
with time, as the reservoir fluid changes.

Stock tank liquid flow 

The pseudo steady state equation can be expressed in stock tank flow rates. For liquid flow, the stock
tank flow rate Q L  = Q R  / B L  is given by

2 πkh ( p ws  − p wf  )
Q L  =
C 1 μ L  B L  ln ( ) r e 
r w 
− 0.75 + S 
Eq. 4.41

Q L  is the liquid flowrate STB  / d 

B L  is the liquid volume formation factor  RB  / STB 

μ L  is the liquid viscosity at reservoir conditions cp 

Below bubble point correction

The pseudo steady state equation can be combined with a Vogel equation (p.362) to model inflows
when the bottom hole pressure is below the bubble point, see, Bubble point correction. (p.376)

Oil and water flow 

The two phase version (p.367) of the reservoir liquid flow equation can also be written in terms of 
stock tank liquid flow rate:

Q L  = Q R  / B L  = Q RO  / B L  + Q RW   / B L  Eq. 4.42

Technical Description
368 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 386/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Stock tank gas flow 

This pseudo steady state equation can be expressed in stock tank flow rates. For gas flow, the
formation volume factor can be expressed in terms of pressure and temperature
V   ZRT   P s 
B G  = = ⋅ . The reservoir pressure is taken to be the average pressure in the
V  s  P  Z  s RT  s 
 p ws  + p wf  
reservoir: P  = , which gives a stock tank flow rate Q G  = Q R  / B G :
2
2 πkh ( p ws  − p wf  )
2 2

Q G  =

C 2 μ G TZ   ln ( ) r e 

r w 
− 0.75 + S  + DQ G 
Eq. 4.43

• The quadratic term in pressure arises from a combination of the pressure difference and the
reservoir average pressure term

( p  ) = ( p  ) ( )
2 2
ws 
− p wf   ws 
− p wf   ⋅  p ws  + p wf   .

• The constant term arises from a combination of the conversion factor and stock tank properties

2C 1Z  s P 
s 
C 2 = .
T  s 

• The skin has been modified to include a flow rate dependent term.

Q G  is the gas flowrate MSCF  / d 

B G  is the gas volume formation factor  CF  / SCF  

μ G  is the gas viscosity at reservoir conditions cp 

S  is the constant skin

DQ  is the near wellbore turbulence factor or rate

dependent skin

T   is the reservoir temperature o 

R 

Z   is the reservoir compressibility factor 

P s  is the stock tank pressure 14.7 psi 

T  s  is the stock tank temperature 519.67 R 

o 

Technical Description
369
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 387/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Z  s  is the stock tank compressibility factor  1

2 2 is a constant, arising from conversion factors

2 ⋅ 14.7 ⋅ 0.3048
C 2 = −10
= 2 π  ⋅ 1422 and stock tank properties
86400 ⋅ 10 ⋅ 519.67

Gas pseudo pressure

Dake 1978 (p.542) gives another version of the Pseudo steady state IPR for gas inflow, that is more
accurate for large drawdowns, based on work by Al-Hussainy et al (p.538):

2 πkh m ( p ws ) − m ( p wf  )

Q G  =
C 2T   ln ( )
r e 
r w 
− 0.75 + S  + DQ G 
Eq. 4.44

Here the gas pseudo pressure is given by:

m ( p ) = 2 ∫  p 
μ G Z  
d p  Eq. 4.45

Transient IPR
The transient IPR (p.360) equation, is derived from the equation for single phase Darcy flow into a
well. A number of versions of the equation can be used (some require keywords (p.663)):
• for liquid flow the transient IPR is written in terms of the stock tank liquid (p.373) flow rate
• this can be optionally combined with a Vogel formula for pressures below the bubble point
(p.373).
• the liquid flow can be modelled using a two phase version of the radial flow equations for oil
and water (p.373)
• for gas flow the transient IPR is written in terms of the stock tank gas (p.374) flow rate
• a version using the gas pseudo pressure (p.375) (more accurate for high pressure systems).
• the transient IPR expressed in terms of reservoir flow (p.370) rates can be used for either liquid
or gas flow.
• the liquid flow can be modelled using a two phase version of the reservoir flow equations for 
oil and water (p.372)

Reservoir flow 
The transient IPR, like the pseudo steady state IPR (p.365), is calculated by solving the radial, single
phase, Darcy flow into the well. It applies for relatively small times, before the well has reached the
pseudo steady state. A similarity solution is given by Dake 1978 (p.542):

Q R Φ = M  Φ ⋅ T   ⋅ (P ws  − P wf  ) Eq. 4.46

where the transient IPR transmissibility is defined by:

Technical Description
370 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 388/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2 πkh 
T   =
1 4kt  Eq. 4.47
C 1 ln ( 2
) + S 
2 C  γθμCr 
0 w 

is the volume flow RB  / d  or MCF  / d 

Q R Φ rate at reservoir 
conditions of phase
Φ

M  Φ is the mobility of  1 / cp 

phase Φ

 p ws  is the average  psia 

reservoir pressure

 p wf   is the bottom hole  psia 

pressure

t  time hours 

k  is the formation mD 

permeability

h  is the formation ft 

thickness

r w  is the wellbore ft 

radius

S  is the skin

θ  is the reservoir 
porosity

C  is the total 1 /  psi 

compressibility of 
the reservoir and
the reservoir fluids

γ  is a constant equal γ  = e 0.5772 = 1.781

to the exponential
of Euler's constant

is a conversion 2 −3
C 0 14.7 ⋅ 0.3048 ⋅ 10
factor  C 0 = −10
10 ⋅ 3600

C 1 is a conversion
factor depending
on the flow units

Technical Description
371
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 389/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2 −3 If the flow is in
14.7 ⋅ 0.3048 ⋅ 5.61458 ⋅ 10
C 1 = −10
= 2 π  ⋅ 141.2 RB  / d 
86400 ⋅ 10

2 If the flow is in
14.7 ⋅ 0.3048
C 1 = −10 MCF  / d 
86400 ⋅ 10

The transient IPR equation can be written in similar terms to the pseudo steady state IPR (p.365) by
defining a radius
2 4kt 
r  = Eq. 4.48
C 0 γθμC 

2 πkh 
T   =
r  Eq. 4.49
C 1 ln ( ) + S 
r w 
The phase mobility is defined in terms of the phase relative permeability and viscosity:

k r Φ
M  Φ = Eq. 4.50
μ Φ

k r Φ is the relative permeability for phase Φ

μ Φ is the viscosity of phase Φ at reservoir conditions cp 

For single phase flow the relative permeability is k r Φ = 1, and the inflow equation simplifies to :

1
Q R Φ = ⋅ T   ⋅ ( P ws  − P wf  ) Eq. 4.51
μ Φ

This version of the transient IPR can be used for liquid or gas inflow.
For multiphase inflow, the total inflow can be written as the sum of the phase inflows:

Q R  = Q RO  + Q RW   + Q RG  Eq. 4.52

This can be rearranged to give:

Q R  = M   ⋅ T   ⋅ (P ws  − P wf  ) Eq. 4.53

Where the total mobility is defined by

M   = M  O  + M  W   + M  G  Eq. 4.54

Oil and water flow 

 A two phase version of the multiphase inflow equation can be used to model liquid inflow.

Technical Description
372 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 390/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Q RL  = ( k rO 
μ O 
+
k rW  
μ W  
) ⋅ T   ⋅ ( P ws  − P wf  ) Eq. 4.55

The relative permeabilities can be determined from permeability tables (p.403).

Stock tank liquid flow 

This transient IPR equation can be expressed in stock tank flow rates. For liquid flow, the stock tank
flow rate Q L  = Q R  / B L  is given by

2 πkh ( p ws  − p wf  )
Q L  =
1 4kt  Eq. 4.56
C 1 μ L  B L  ln ( 2
) + S 
2 C  γθ μ  Cr 
0 L  w 

Q L  is the liquid flowrate STB  / d 

B L  is the liquid volume formation factor  RB  / STB 

μ L  is the liquid viscosity cp 

The equation can be written using base 10 logarithms, since

4 x  4 x  4
ln = ln 10 ⋅ log = 2.302 ⋅ (log x  + log ) = 2.302 ⋅ (log x  − 3.23):
C 0 γ  C 0 γ  C 0 γ 

2 πkh ( p ws  − p wf  )
Q  =
L 
1.151 ⋅ C 1 μ L  B L  log ( kt  ) − 3.23 + S  Eq. 4.57
2 1.151
θ μ L  Cr w 

Below bubble point correction

The transient IPR equation can be combined with a Vogel equation (p.362) to model inflows when
the bottom hole pressure is below the bubble point, see, Bubble point correction. (p.376)

Oil and water flow 

The two phase version (p.372) of the reservoir liquid flow equation can also be written in terms of 
stock tank liquid flow rate:

Q L  = Q R  / B L  = Q RO  / B L  + Q RW   / B L  Eq. 4.58

Technical Description
373
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 391/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Stock tank gas flow 

V   ZRT   P s 

This transient IPR equation can be expressed in stock tank f B G  = = ⋅ low rates.
V  s  P  Z  s RT  s 
For gas flow, the formation volume factor can be expressed in terms of pressure and temperature: .
 p ws  + p wf  
The reservoir pressure is taken to be the average pressure in the reservoir: P  = , which
2
gives a stock tank flow rate Q G  = Q R  / B G :
2 2
2 πkh ( p ws  − p wf  )
Q G  =
1 4kt  Eq. 4.59
C 2 μ G TZ   ln ( 2 ) + S  + DQ G 
2 C 0 γθ μ G r w 

• The quadratic term in pressure arises from a combination of the pressure difference and the
2 2

( )
average pressure term  p ws  − p wf  =  p  − p  ⋅  p  + p  .
( ) ( )
ws  wf   ws  wf  

• The constant term arises from a combination of the conversion factor and stock tank properties
2C 1Z  s P 
s 
C 2 = .
T  s 

• The skin has been modified to include a flow rate dependent term.

Q G  is the gas flowrate MSCF  / d 

B G  is the gas volume formation factor  CF  / SCF  

μ G  is the gas viscosity cp 

S  is the constant skin

DQ  is the near wellbore turbulence factor or rate

dependent skin

T   is the reservoir temperature o 

R 

Z   is the reservoir compressibility factor 

P s  is the stock tank pressure 14.7 psi 

T  s  is the stock tank temperature

o 
519.67 R 

Z  s  is the stock tank compressibility factor  1

Technical Description
374
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 392/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

C 2 is a constant, arising from conversion factors For MSCF  / d :

and stock tank properties 2
2 ⋅ 14.7 ⋅ 0.3048
2

C 2 = −10
= 2 π  ⋅ 1422
86400 ⋅ 10 ⋅ 519.67

The equation can also be written using base 10 logarithms:

2 2
2 πkh ( p ws  − p wf  )
Q G  =
kt  S  + DQ G  Eq. 4.60
1.151 ⋅ C 2 μ G TZ   ln ( 2 −
) 3.23 +
θ μ G r w  1.151

Gas pseudo pressure

Dake 1978 (p.542) gives another version of the Pseudo steady state IPR for gas inflow, that is more
accurate for large drawdowns, based on work by Al-Hussainy et al (p.538):

2 πkh m ( p ws ) − m ( p wf  )

Q G  =
1 4kt  Eq. 4.61
C 2T   ln ( 2
) + S  + DQ G 
2 C  γθ μ  r 
0 G  w 

Here the gas pseudo pressure is given by:

m ( p ) = 2 ∫  p 
μ G Z  
d p  Eq. 4.62

Time to pseudo steady state solution

 According to Dake 1978 (p.542), the solution to the well inflow equations changes from transient to
pseudo steady state (p.365) when the dimensionless time t DA is given by

kt 
t DA = > 0.1 Eq. 4.63
C 0 θμCA
2
Writing A = π r e  , where r e  is the drainage radius of the reservoir, the time when the pseudo steady
state (p.365) solution becomes applicable is
2
θμCr e 
t  pss  = (0.1 ⋅ π  ⋅ C 0) ⋅ Eq. 4.64
k 

 A warning will be issued if the time t  exceeds this value.

Data File
Enter an IPR in table form (Flowrate versus Pressure) rather than using an IPR (p.360) equation.
This feature is currently only available by using an EKT (p.84) or in expert mode (p.240).
Place the EKT (Spanner icon) between the completion and the tubing and enter the IFPTAB
(p.654) data.

Technical Description
375 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 393/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Example:

! n liq pwf gor wcut

ifptab 0 0 3000 986 0
ifptab 0 1000 2990 986 2.0
ifptab 0 2699 2920 1096 2.2
ifptab
ifptab 0
0 6329
7288 2800
2600 2540
2980 2.8
3.9
ifptab 0 8082 2400 3370 5.6
ifptab 0 8805 2003 3770 8.0
ifptab execute

Note: The GOR and water cut values are optional.

 All IPR data associated with the completion will be ignored.

Bubble Point Correction

The Productivity Index (p.361), Pseudo steady state (p.365) and Transient (p.370) IPRs for liquid
inflow can be modified to use a form of Vogel's equation (p.362) below the bubble point
( p wf   < p bp ). This allows the effects of gas break-out to be modelled.
2

(
Q  − Q bp  = Q max 1 − (1 − C ) ( ) ( ))
p wf  

 p bp 
− C 
p wf  

 p bp 
Eq. 4.65

Where

Q  is the liquid flow rate (STB/D or m3/d)

Q bp  is the flow at the bubble point flow

Q bp  P bp  is the absolute open hole flow potential, that is the liquid flow rate when
Q max = ⋅ the bottom hole pressure is zero
1 + C  P ws  − P bp 

 p bp  is the bubble point pressure (psia or bara)

 p wf   is the well flowing (or bottom hole) pressure (psia or bara)

 p ws  is the well static (or reservoir) pressure (psia or bara)

C  is the Vogel coefficient.

The Vogel equation has been shifted to match a linear IPR above the bubble point:

Q  = Q bp  at  p wf   = p bp 

Technical Description
376 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 394/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

∂ Q  Q max ⋅ (1 + C ) Q bp  at  p wf   = p bp 

Productivity index = − = −
∂ p wf    p bp   p ws  − p bp 

This correction only works if the bubble point pressure is less than the static (reservoir) pressure,
 p bp  < p ws .

Vertical Well Skin Factor 

The skin factor S  is used in the pseudo steady state (p.365) and transient (p.370) IPRs to represent
friction caused by damage to the formation close to the well (mechanical skin) and the effects of high
flow (dynamic skin).

S  = S M   + D  ⋅ Q  Eq. 4.66

Mechanical skin factor 

The pseudo steady state (p.365) and transient (p.370) IPRs are derived from Darcy's equation for a
homogenous reservoir with a vertical completion. The mechanical skin can be used to represent
friction terms arising from any departure from this idealized model. The mechanical skin has a number 
of separate components:

S M   = S  pp  + S θ  + S d  + S  g  + S  p  + S f   Eq. 4.67

Different components are used in different completion types:

Open Open hole Perforated Gravel Packed & Frac Pack

hole gravel pack Perforated

S  pp  partial penetration Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

(p.380)

Technical Description
377 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 395/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

S θ  deviation (p.380) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

S d  damaged zone (p.381) Yes Yes Yes Yes

S  g  gravel pack (p.381) Yes Yes Included in S f  

S  p  perforated well (p.382) Yes Yes Included in S f  

S f   frac pack (p.386) Yes

Dynamic skin factor 

The pseudo steady state (p.365) and transient (p.370) IPRs are derived from Darcy's equation for a
homogenous reservoir with a vertical completion. The dynamic skin can be used to represent friction
terms arising from turbulence in the flow entering the well. The dynamic skin has a number of separate
components:

D  = D d  + D r  + D  + D c  + D f   Eq. 4.68

 g 

Different components are used in different completion types:

Open hole Open hole Perforated Gravel Packed & Frac

gravel pack Perforated Pack

D d  damaged zone Yes Yes Yes Yes

D r  reservoir Yes Yes Yes Yes

D  gravel pack screen Yes

s 
D  g  gravel pack Yes

D c  crushed zone Yes Yes

D f   frac pack Yes

Formulas for these skin components can be found in Golan and Whitson (1986) (p.544). The
damaged zone, reservoir and gravel pack screen dynamic skins all use the same formula D G  for gas
flow and the same formula for liquid flow D L  :

D G (r w , r d , β d )

D d  = { D L  (r w , r d , β d )
Eq. 4.69

D G (r d , r r , β r )

D r  = {
D L  (r d , r r , β r )
Eq. 4.70

Technical Description
378 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 396/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

D G (r s , r w , β s )

D s  = { D L  (r s , r w , β s )
Eq. 4.71

The general gas flow dynamic skin term is given by:

k  ⋅ h  ⋅ γ G 
D G (r in , r out , β ) = 2.222 ⋅ 10
−18
⋅ β  ⋅ 2
h c  ⋅ μ G 
⋅
( 1
r in 
−
1
r out  ) Eq. 4.72

The general liquid flow dynamic skin term is given by:

k  ⋅ h  ⋅ ρ L  ⋅ B L 
D L  (r in , r out , β ) = 1.635 ⋅ 10
−16
⋅ β  ⋅ 2
h c  ⋅ μ L 
⋅
( 1
r in 
−
1
r out  ) Eq. 4.73

The gravel pack dynamic skin for gas flow is given by:

−13
k  ⋅ h  ⋅ γ G  ⋅ L   pack 
D  g  = 2.45 ⋅ 10 ⋅ β  g  ⋅ (2r  p )4 ⋅ n  p 2 ⋅ μ G  Eq. 4.74

The gravel pack dynamic skin for liquid flow is given by:

k  ⋅ h  ⋅ ρ L  ⋅ B L  ⋅ L 
−11  pack 
D  g  = 1.8 ⋅ 10 ⋅ β  g  ⋅ 4
Eq. 4.75
(2r  p ) 2
⋅ n  p  ⋅ μ L 

The crushed zone dynamic skin for gas flow is given by:

−15
k  ⋅ h  ⋅ γ G 
D c  = 3.84 ⋅ 10 ⋅ β c  ⋅ L  2 ⋅ n 2 ⋅ r  ⋅ μ  Eq. 4.76
 p   p   p  G 

The crushed zone dynamic skin for liquid flow is given by:

D c  = 0 Eq. 4.77

The frac pack dynamic skin is given as the sum of the tunnel and annulus terms:
D f   = D t  + D a  Eq. 4.78

The frac pack dynamic skin annulus term uses the same general formula as used for the damaged
zone, reservoir and gravel pack screens:

D G (r s , r c , β s )

D a  =
{ D L  (r s , r c , β s )
Eq. 4.79

The frac pack dynamic skin tunnel term for gas flow:

Technical Description
379
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 397/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

−18
k  ⋅ h  ⋅ γ G  ⋅ L  tun 
D t  = 2.222 ⋅ 10 ⋅ β s  ⋅ 4 ⋅ 4

( )
r  p 
12
⋅
2
den shot  ⋅ μ G 
Eq. 4.80

The frac pack dynamic skin tunnel term for liquid flow:
k  ⋅ h  ⋅ ρ L  ⋅ B L  ⋅ L 
−16 tun 
D t  = 1.635 ⋅ 10 ⋅ β s  ⋅ 4. 4 Eq. 4.81
( )
r  p 
12
⋅
2
den shot  ⋅ μ L 

Partial Penetration Skin

Brons and Marting (p.540) (1961) (quoted in Golan and Whitson (p.544)) expressed the effect of 
partial penetration and limited entry as a skin factor :

k r 
S  pp  = ( L h  − 1 ln ) ( h 
r w  k z  ) − Y   Eq. 4.82

with
2 3 L 
Y   = 2.948 − 7.363 X   + 11.45 X   − 4.675 X   and  X   =
h 

h  Reservoir Thickness

r w  Wellbore Radius

k r  Reservoir Permeability

k z  Completion Vertical Permeability

L  Completion Open Interval or Perforated Interval

The skin factor is dimensionless. The equation for the skin factor involves ratios of permeability and
ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g. md) are used for all permeability terms, and the
same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Deviation Skin
Cinco et al. (p.541) (1975) approximate the pseudo-skin factor caused by the slant of a well as :
′ 2.06 ′ 1.865

S θ  = − ( ) ( )
41
θ 
−
θ 
57
log 10 ( h 
100r w  k z 
k r 
) Eq. 4.83

′
θ  is measured in degrees:

Technical Description
380 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 398/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

k z 
tan ( θ  ′ ) = ⋅ tan( θ ) Eq. 4.84
k r 

h  Reservoir Thickness

r w  Wellbore Radius

k r  Reservoir Permeability

k z  Completion Vertical Permeability

0 < θ  < 75 deviation from vertical in degrees

o 

The skin factor is dimensionless. The equation for the skin factor involves ratios of permeability and
ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g. md) are used for all permeability terms, and the
same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Damaged Zone Skin

The effect of formation damage on productivity was treated analytically by Muskat (p.549) (1937).
Hawkins (p.545) (1956) translated the Muskat Model of a near wellbore altered permeability into the
following expression for the skin factor :

S d  = ( )
k r 

k a 
− 1 ln ( d  )
a 

d w 
Eq. 4.85

d a  Damaged Zone Diameter 

d w  Wellbore Diameter 

k r  Reservoir Permeability

k a  Damaged Zone Permeability

The skin factor is dimensionless. The equation for the skin factor involves ratios of permeability and
ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g. md) are used for all permeability terms, and the
same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Gravel Pack Skin

Two different formula are used in PIPESIM. The skin factor is dimensionless. The equations for the
skin factor involves ratios of permeability and ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g. md)
are used for all permeability terms, and the same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Technical Description
381
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 399/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Open hole gravel pack skin

 Assuming a radial flow through formation and gravel, the contribution to the skin is expressed as:

S  g  =
k r 
k 
 g 
⋅ ln ( ) r ev 
r 
s 
Eq. 4.86

r ev  Reservoir Drainage Radius

r s  Screen Radius

k r  Reservoir Permeability

k  g  Gravel Permeability

Compare this with the Annulus skin (p.388) for a Frac Pack.

Gravel pack skin
 Applying Darcy's law for linear flow in packed perforations for the steady state skin term due to gravel
pack gives :
′
k r  h  ⋅ l t 
S  g  = 2 ⋅ ⋅ 2
Eq. 4.87
k  g  n  ⋅ r  p 

where
′
l t  = l t  + r ic  − r s 

h  Reservoir Thickness

l t  Tunnel Length

r ic  Casing Internal Radius

r  p  Perforation Radius

Compare this with the Gravel skin (p.388) for a Frac Pack.

Perforated Well Skin

McLeod Model 
McLeod (p.382) (1983) used a model of a “horizontal microwell” with formation damage around it as
an analogy to a perforation surrounded by a crushed zone. He quantified the effect of the crushed
zone as the following skin factor :
Compacted or crushed zone

Technical Description
382 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 400/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

S  p  =
1
n  p  ⋅ L 
⋅
h 
l  p 
⋅ ( k r 
k c 
−
k r 
k a 
) ⋅ ln ( d  )
c 

d  p 
Eq. 4.88

where:

h  Reservoir Thickness
L  Completion Open Interval or Perforated Interval

n  p  Perforation Density

l  p  Depth of Penetration (or perforation length)

d c  Compacted Zone Diameter 

Perforation Diameter 
d  p 

k r  Reservoir Permeability

k c  Compacted Zone Permeability

k a  Damaged Zone Permeability

Karakas Model 

Karakas and Tariq (p.546) (1991) have developed a semi analytical solution for the calculation of 
the perforation skin effect. Depending on the size of the damaged zone and the length of the
perforation , the well radius and the perforation length, or their modified value are used in the model .
The thickness of the damaged zone is :
1
l a  = (d  − d w ) Eq. 4.89
2 a 
For perforation sitting inside the damaged zone :
′
r w  = r w 
′
l w  = l w 
} if l  p  ≤ l a  Eq. 4.90

For perforations extending beyond the damaged zone

Technical Description
383
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 401/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

′
r w  = r w  + 1 − ( ) k a 
k r 
l a 

if l  p  > l a  Eq. 4.91

′
k a 
l  = l  − 1 − l 

( )
 p   p  k r  a 

r w  Wellbore Radius (d w  / 2)

′
r w  Wellbore Radius or modified Wellbore Radius
′
}
l  p  Perforation Length or modified Perforation Length

The perforation skin effect is divided into the following components :

Horizontal Component of the skin

′

( )
S h  = ln r w  Eq. 4.92
′
r wc 

where
′ ′ ′
r wc  = α ( φ ) r w  + l  p  Eq. 4.93

φ Phase Angle
α ( φ ) Function of phase angle φ (see table 4.1 (p.385))

Well bore skin

′
r w 
S w  = c 1exp c 2 Eq. 4.94
(l  p ′ + r w ′ )
with
c 1 = c 1( φ ) and c 2 = c 2( φ ) Functions of the phase angle φ (see table 4.1 (p.385))

Vertical skin
A B −1 B 
S v  = 10 H  n  R n  Eq. 4.95

with

1 k r 
H  n  = ′
n  p l  p  k z 

R n  =
n  p d  p 
4 (
1+
k z 
k r 
)
Technical Description
384
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 402/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

A = a 1( φ ) × log 10 R n  + a 2( φ )

B  = b 1( φ )R n  + b 2( φ )

a 1( φ ), a 2( φ ), b 1( φ ) and b 2( φ ) functions of phase angle φ (see table 4.1 (p.385))

The equation 4.95 (p.384) is valid for H  n  ≤ 10 and R n  ≥ 0.01

Crushed zone effect 

S ck  =
1
′
n  p l  p 
( )
k r 
k c 
− 1 ln ( d  )
c 

d  p 
Eq. 4.96

The combined skin effect caused by perforations added to the crushed zone effects is given by :
′
S t  = S h  + S w  + S v  + S ck  Eq. 4.97

If the perforations go beyond the damaged zone, the total perforation skin is the sum of these four 
contributions :
′
S t  = S t  for l p   > l a  Eq. 4.98

Damaged zone effect 

For perforations within damaged zone, the skin caused by the combined effects of perforations and
damage is :

S t  = ( )( )
k r 

k a 
− 1 ln
d a 

d w 
+
k r 

k a 
(S t ′ + S x )   ≤ l a 
for l  p 

Eq. 4.99
d a 
S x  = S x (r ) and  r  =
d w  + 2l  p 

r  Ratio of the damaged zone diameter over the penetration zone diameter 

S x (r ) function of r (see table 4.2 (p.386))

φ (degre) 45 60 90 120 180 360 (0)

α  0.860 0.813 0.726 0.648 0.500 0.250

a 1 − 1.788 − 1.898 − 1.905 − 2.018 − 2.025 − 2.091

a 2 0.2398 0.1023 0.1038 0.0634 0.0943 0.0453

b 1 1.1915 1.3654 1.5674 1.6136 3.0373 5.1313

b 2 1.6392 1.6490 1.6935 1.7770 1.8115 1.8672

Technical Description
385 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 403/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

−5 −4 −3 −3 −2 −1
c 1 4.6 × 10 3.0 × 10 1.9 × 10 6.6 × 10 2.6 × 10 1.6 × 10

c 2 8.791 7.509 6.155 5.320 4.532 2.675

Table 4.1: Karakas and Tariq Skin Correlation Coefficients

r  = d a  / (d w  + 2l  p ) S x 

18.0 0.000
10.0 − 0.001
2.0 − 0.002
1.5 − 0.024
1.2 − 0.085
Table 4.2: Skin caused by boundary effect, 180 degree phasing 

Frac Pack Skin

The Frac Pack Skin is calculated only in association with a case hole gravel pack. If the gravel pack
is not defined the Frac Pack Skin is 0.
Pucknell and Mason (p.551) (1992) give a r eview of the contributions to the skin in a cased hole
gravel pack completion.

S f   = S hf   + S ff   + S cf   + S an  + S tg 

S hf   Hydraulic fracture (p.386)

S ff   Fracture face skin (p.387)

S  Choke fracture skin (p.388)
cf  

S an   Annulus skin (p.388)

S tg  Tunnel gravel skin (p.388)

The skin factor is dimensionless. The equations for the skin factor involves ratios of permeability and
ratios of length. It is assumed the same units (e.g. md) are used for all permeability terms, and the
same units are used for all lengths (e.g. feet).

Hydraulic fracture
The following model is also applied in IPR Model “Hydraulic Fracture”.
Hydraulic fracture is characterized by its length, capacity or conductivity and related equivalent skin
effect. Prats (p.550) (1961) introduced the concept of effective wellbore radius, providing pressure
profiles in a fractured reservoir as functions of the fracture half-length and a relative capacity. He
provided a graph relating the effective well radius and the capacity. Cinco-Ley et al. (p.541) (1978,
1981a) (see also Economides et al. (p.543) 1994) introduced the fracture conductivity instead, which

Technical Description
386 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 404/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

is proportional to the inverse of the capacity, and provided an alternative graph relating the fracture
conductivity to the skin. The following correlations are derived from Cinco-Ley and Samaniego graph.
Dimensionless fracture conductivity:

k  p  ⋅ w  f  
F  cd  = k r  ⋅ x f   Eq. 4.100

Pseudo-skin factor for a well with a finite-conductivity vertical fracture

− 0.7205 + ln ( F  cd ) + 1.6368

{
if F  cd  < 1

S hf   = 3.0386 − 2.349exp ( − 0.511F  cd  )

′ −0.909
if   1 ≤ F  cd  < 1000 Eq. 4.101

0.692 if F  cd  ≥ 1000

and the hydraulic skin is given by:

x 
S hf   = ′ − ln
( )
S hf   f   Eq. 4.102
r w 

x f   Fracture Half Length

w f   Fracture Width

k r  Reservoir Permeability

k  p  Proppant Permeability

r w  Wellbore Radius

Damaged hydraulic fracture performance can deviate substantially from undamaged fracture. Two
types of damage are considered: fracture face (p.387) and choke fracture (p.388).

Fracture Face Skin

Cinco-Ley and Samaniego (p.541) (1981b) quantified the damage that may develop on the fracture
face, by a skin effect of the form

π  w af   k r 
= 2 ⋅ −1
( )
S ff   ⋅ Eq. 4.103
x f   k af  

w af   Depth of Damage (normal to the fracture face) is very thin (0.2 ft or less)

k af   Frac Face Damage Permeability

Technical Description
387 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 405/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Choke Fracture Skin

Damage at the connection between the fracture and a well is referred to as a choke. Different to the
fracture face skin, the damaged zone is within the fracture. Romero et al. (p.551) (2002) express the
extra pressure drop in the fracture in term of a skin effect:

S cf   = π  ⋅ x  ⋅ k  − k 
( )
cf   r  r 
Eq. 4.104
x f   k cf   k  p 

x cf   Choke Length

k cf   Frac Choke Permeability

 Annulus Skin
Between the casing internal radius and the screen outer radius, assuming a radial flow through the
gravel the contribution to the skin is expressed as:

S an  =
k r 
⋅ ln ( d  )
ic 
Eq. 4.105
k  g  d s 

d ic  Casing Internal Diameter 

d s  Screen Diameter 

k  g  Gravel Permeability

Gravel Skin in tunnel 

If a perforation is not defined, a default perforation diameter and a default perforation density are set
(equal to 0.5 inches and 4 shots/ft respectively) for the calculation of the Frac Pack Skin. If the
perforation tunnels through the casing and cement, where the most significant pressure drops usually
occur, the skin component is:

k r  l t 
S tg  = 2 ⋅ ⋅ 2
Eq. 4.106
k  g  n  p  ⋅ r  p 

l t  Tunnel length

n  p  Perforation Density

r  p  Perforation radius

Technical Description
388 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 406/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Inflow Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions

Theory
The main purpose of drilling horizontal wells is to enhance production. There are also many
circumstances that lead to drilling horizontal wells (Cooper, 1988):
Thin reservoirs
The increased area of contact of the horizontal well with the reservoir is reflected by the
productivity index (PI). Typically, the PI for a horizontal well may be increased by a factor of 
4 when compared to a vertical well penetrating the same reservoir.
Heterogeneous reservoirs
When irregular reservoirs exist, the horizontal well can effectively intersect isolated
productive zones which might otherwise be missed. A horizontal well can also intersect
vertical natural fractures in a reservoir.
Reduce water/gas coning
 A horizontal well provides minimum pressure drawdown, which delays the onset of water/
gas breakthrough. Even though the production per unit well length is small, the long well
length provides high production rates.
Vertical permeability
If the ratio of vertical permeability to horizontal permeability is a high, a horizontal well may
produce more economically than a vertical well.

Pressure Drop

Effect of Pressure Drop on Productivity 

In reservoir engineering calculations, the horizontal wellbore is treated as an infinite conductivity
fracture, that is the pressure drop along the well length is negligible. However, in practice, there is a
pressure drop from the toe (tip-end) of the horizontal wellbore to the heel (producing-end) so as to
maintain fluid flow within the wellbore (see Figure 1).
Dikken (1989), Folefac (1991) and Joshi (1991) have recently addressed the effect of wellbore
pressure gradient on horizontal well production performance.

Technical Description
389
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 407/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.1. Along-hole pressure gradient of a horizontal well (Joshi, 1991)

Dikken (p.542) (1990) and Folefac (p.543) (1991) contend that the assumption of constant pressure
wellbore is reasonable for single phase laminar flow but is no longer valid when turbulent or 
multiphase flow occurs. Folefac (1991) showed that a typical well with the following properties:  ρ o  =
800 kg/m3; μ  = 1.0 cp; d = 0.1968 m; and Q = 5000 RB/d gives a N  RE  of 4000 which is well above
the turbulence transition limit of 2000. In most practical situations, Dikken (1990) asserts that
horizontal wells will exhibit non-laminar flow. In addition, the pressure drop will be even greater when
multiphase flow exists.
Joshi (p.546) (1991), thus, asked the question: What is the magnitude of the wellbore pressure drop
as compared to pressure drop from the reservoir to the wellbore? If the wellbore pressure drop is
significant as compared to the reservoir drawdown, then the reservoir drawdown, and consequently,
the production rate along the well length will change. Thus, there is a strong interaction between the
wellbore and the reservoir. The reservoir flow and wellbore equations must be solved simultaneously
as shown in Figure 2.

Technical Description
390 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 408/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.2. Schematic of reservoir and flow relationship (Joshi, 1991)

The coupled equations were solved by Dikken (1990) analytically by simplified boundary conditions,
notably, no inflow from the toe-end. Folefac (1991) used a Black Oil type model that involved a finite
volume technique.
Folefac (1991) concluded that the well length, wellbore diameter and perforated interval had the most
profound effect on the level of pressure drop in the wellbore. Folefac (1991) pointed out that the
wellbore pressure profile is non-linear with respect to the well length. This is because the mixture
momentum equation has a non-linear term in velocity, the friction force. This in turn will result in an
uneven drawdown in the reservoir that is otherwise considered homogenous.
Furthermore, Folefac (1991) showed that as the wellbore radius increased from 64.5 mm (2.5") to
114.3 mm (4.5"), the rate at which pressure dropped along the wellbore became nearly constant. This
is mainly due to the turbulent flow being converted to laminar flow by drilling a larger size hole.
Joshi (1991) mentions other situations where wellbore pressure drop is considerable:
• High flowrates of light oil (10,000 to 30,000 RB/d)
• High viscous crudes (heavy oils and tar sands)
• Long well lengths
The wellbore pressure drop effects well deliverability and in turn influences well completion and well
profile design. The need to accurately calculate well flowrates and wellbore pressures is therefore,
essential.
Joshi (1991) lists a few remedies to minimize high wellbore pressure drops:
• Drilling a larger diameter hole would dramatically reduce the pressure drop. The reason being that
for single phase flow, D P a 1/d5. For example, Joshi (1991), states " for a given production rate,
by increasing the well diameter twofold, the pressure drop can be reduced at least thirty-two fold".
• Varying the shot density of a cemented hole or the slot size of a slotted liner would control
production rates and minimize pressure drop along the wellbore

Technical Description
391
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 409/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Gravel packs are used in high permeability reservoirs. If the well is completed with a slotted liner,
the slots should be placed as far apart as possible. Joshi (1991) states that "this will let the gravel
pack act as a choke and facilitate maintaining minimum pressure drop across the well length".
Therefore, by selecting the appropriate well geometry, hole size and length, wellbore pressure drops
can be minimized.

Single Phase Pressure Drop

 Assuming that the horizontal wellbore can be treated as a horizontal pipe, the single phase flow
pressure drop calculation for oil flow can be written as follows:

Δ p  = (1.14644 × 10
−5
) fρq 2 L 5 Eq. 4.107
D 

where,
Δ p  is pressure drop, psia
f   is Moody's friction factor, dimensionless
 ρ  fluid density, gm/cc
q  is flowrate at reservoir conditions, RB/d
L  is horizontal length, ft
D  is internal diameter of pipe, inches
For gas flow, however, the pressure drop calculations are more complex. This is due to friction which
could change the temperature of the gas as it travels through the wellbore. Moreover, density and
viscosity are strong functions of gas pressure and temperature. This would result in a changing
pressure drop per foot length of a well along the entire well length. The Weymouth equation for dry
gas is the simplest equation to estimate pressure drop in a horizontal pipe

( )
2 2 16
3
 p 1 − p 2 D 
Eq. 4.108
q  g  = 15320
γ  g TZL 

where
q  g  is gas flowrate, scfd

 p 1 is pipe inlet pressure, psia

 p 2 is pipe outlet pressure, psia

L  is pipe length, miles

T  is average temperature, oR
Z  is average gas compressibility factor 
D  is pipe diameter, in

γ  g  gas specific gravity

Technical Description
392 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 410/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 Also, several multiphase correlations (Brill, 1988) are applicable for a single phase flow of either oil
or gas.

Multiphase Pressure Drop

There is very little discussion on multiphase pressure drop in horizontal wells. Folefac (1991) studied
the effect of two phase flow (hydrocarbon liquid and water are treated as one phase with identical
velocity but averaged properties). The pressure drop along the horizontal wellbore was similar to that
for single phase flow. However, the pressure drop was higher than for single phase flow for the same
volume of fluid intake.
For a horizontal pipe, numerous multiphase flow correlations have been discussed by Brill (p.540)
(1988). Slip velocities between phases make these equations more complex than single phase flow
equations. In general, Joshi (1991) states that, "different multiphase correlations may give different
values of the pressure drop". The various correlations should be compared with actual pressure drop
data. However, measuring the pressure at both ends of a horizontal well and calibrating the data is
very difficult. There is a definite need for further study on multiphase flow in horizontal wells.

Inflow Production Profiles

Horizontal wellbore pressure drops also depend upon the type of fluid inflow profiles. Figure 3 shows
some horizontal well fluid inflow profiles. On the basis of well boundary condition and reservoir 
heterogeneity, several profiles are possible. Joshi (1991) examined the effect of different fluid entry
profiles on the wellbore pressure drop. Depending on the type of profile, Joshi concluded that the
total pressure drop varied from 6 psi to 14.5 psi but it was not large enough to effect the wellhead
pressure.

Technical Description
393
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 411/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.3. Horizontal Well Inflow Profiles (Joshi, 1991)

Steady-State Productivity
The simplest form of horizontal well productivity calculations are the steady-state analytical solutions
which assume that the pressure at any point in the reservoir is constant over time. According to Joshi
(1991), even though very few reservoirs operate under steady-state conditions, steady state solutions
are widely used because:
 Analytical derivation is easy.

Technical Description
394
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 412/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The concepts of expanding drainage boundary over time, effective wellbore radius and shape factors
allows the conversion to either transient or pseudo-steady state results to be quite straightforward.
Steady-state mathematical results can be verified experimentally.
Giger (1984), Economides (1989), Mukherjee (1988) and numerous others have developed solutions
to predict steady-state productivity. Most are similar in form to the equation given by Joshi (1988)
who simplified the 3-D Laplace equation (Δp=0) by coupling two 2-D problems. This was based on
the assumption that a horizontal well drains an ellipsoidal volume around the wellbore of length L as
shown below.

Figure 4.4. Horizontal Well Drainage Pattern

For isotropic reservoirs k h  = k v 

k h  h Δ p 
q h  =

( )
2 2
a  + a  − ( L  / 2) Eq. 4.109
141.2 μ o B o  ln
L  / 2
+
( )
h 
L 
ln
h 
2r w 
and
0.5
4

a  = ( )
L 
2
0.5 + 0.25+ ( )
2r eh 
L 
Eq. 4.110

where

q h  is the flowrate STB  / d 

a  is half the major axis of the drainage ellipse ft 

Δ p  is the pressure drop psi 

L  is the horizontal well length ft 
h  is reservoir height ft 

r w  is the wellbore radius ft 

r eh  is the drainage radius of horizontal well ft 

Technical Description
395 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 413/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

μ o  is the oil viscosity cp 

B o  is the oil volume formation factor  RB  / STB 

k h  is the horizontal permeability mD 

If the length of the horizontal well is significantly longer than the reservoir height, that is L >> h, then
the second term in the denominator of the 4.109 (p.395) equation is negligible and the solution
simplifies to

k h  h Δ p 
q h  =
4r eh  Eq. 4.111
141.2 μ o B o ln
L 
Muskat (p.549) (1937) suggested a simple transformation to account for permeability anisotropy. An
effective permeability, k  , is defined as
eff  

k eff   = k v k h  Eq. 4.112

To account for vertical anisotropy, the reservoir thickness can be modified as follows

k h 
h  = h  Eq. 4.113
k v 

In addition, the influence of well eccentricity (distance from the center of the reservoir in the vertical
plane) was also implemented. Thus, equation 4.109 (p.395) was transformed as follows

k  h Δ p 
q h  = h 

( ( ))
2 2
a  + a  − ( L  / 2) 2 h  h  Eq. 4.114
141.2 μ o B o  ln + β  ln
L  / 2 L  2r w 
where

k h 
β  = Eq. 4.115
k v 

Productivity comparisons of a horizontal well to that of a vertical well can easily be made by using
the 4.114 (p.396) equation. In converting the productivity of a horizontal well into that of an equivalent
vertical well, an effective wellbore radius can be calculated, rw,eff 
r  = r  exp ( − S )
w ,eff   w 
Eq. 4.116

The effective wellbore radius is defined as the theoretical well radius which will match the production
rate. Joshi (1991) assumed equal drainage volumes, r eh  = r ev , and equal productivity indices,
J  h  = J  v  to give the following for an anisotropic reservoir 

Technical Description
396 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 414/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

( L 2 )
r 
r w ,eff   = 2 βh  Eq. 4.117
1−(
2a  )
L  βh  L 
a  1 + +
r w 

In this way, controlling parameters like well length, permeability and formation thickness can be used
to screen potential candidates for further simulation studies.
Renard (p.551) (1990) studied the effect of formation damage around the wellbore and modified the
steady-state equation to include skin. Renard (1990) concluded that due to the lower productivity
index per unit length in horizontal wells, the effect of skin damage is not as pronounced as it is in
vertical wells. Celier et al. (p.540) (1989) came to the same conclusion with respect to the effect of 
non-Darcy flow.

Pseudo-Steady State Productivity

It is often desirable to calculate productivity from a reservoir with unique boundary conditions, such

as a gas cap or state

pseudo-steady bottom water drive,
equations finite drainage
are employed. area, well location,
Pseudo-steady state or and so on.state
depletion In these instances
begins when
the pressure disturbance created by the well is felt at the boundary of the well drainage area

Pseudo-Steady State Productivity 

Dake (p.542) (1978) and Golan (p.544) (1986) describe the pseudo-steady state flow of an ideal
fluid (liquid) in a closed circular drainage area. Rearranging the equation gives the familiar vertical
well productivity
khΔp 
q v  =
2.2458 A Eq. 4.118
141.2 μ o B o  ln ( 2
) + S  + S m  + Dq v 
C  r 
A w 
where

q v  is the flowrate STB  / d 

Δ p  is the pressure drop between the reservoir and the wellbore psi 

S m  is the mechanical skin factor due to drilling and completion related well damage

S  is the total skin due to perforations, partial penetration and stimulation

C A is the shape factor 

Dq v  is the near wellbore turbulence factor or rate dependent skin

μ o  is the oil viscosity cp 

B o  is the oil volume formation factor  RB  / STB 

k  is the formation permeability mD 

Technical Description
397 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 415/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

h  is the formation thickness ft 

A is the drainage area 2
ft 

r w  is the wellbore radius ft 

r eh  is the drainage radius ft 

The above equation can be reduced to the following single-phase pseudo-steady state equation for 
oil flow (assuming S  = 0, S m  = 0 and Dq v  = 0),

kh Δ p 
q v  =
141.2 μ o B o  ln ( )
r eh 
r w 
− 0.75
Eq. 4.119

The equation is for a vertical well which is located in the center of a circular drainage area. Fetkovich
(p.543) (1985) wrote the shape factor in terms of an equivalent skin. This skin was expressed by
choosing a reference shape factor of a well at the center of circular drainage area

C Aref  
S CA = ln Eq. 4.120
C A

The horizontal well shape factor depends on the following:

• drainage area shape,
• well penetration.

L  k v 
dimensionless well length, L  D  = 2h 
( )
•
k h 

L  is the length of the horizontal well ft 

h  is the formation thickness ft 

k v  is the vertical permeability mD 

k h  is the horizontal permeability mD 

Joshi (p.546) (1991) explains that the well performance approaches a fully penetrating infinite-
conductivity fracture when the horizontal well length is sufficiently long, i. e. L  D  > 10.
Babu (p.539) (1989), Goode (p.544) (1989) and Mutalik (p.549) (1988) have developed methods
to calculate pseudo-steady state productivity for single phase flow in horizontal wells. Shape factors
were used to arbitrarily locate the well within a rectangular bounded drainage area and the reservoir 
was bounded in all directions. Mutalik's model assumed the horizontal well as an infinite conductivity
well (i.e. the wellbore pressure drop is negligible). Babu's model assumed uniform-flux boundary
condition. Goode's model used an approximate infinite conductivity solution where the constant

Technical Description
398 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 416/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

wellbore pressure is estimated by averaging the pressure values of the uniform-flux solution along
the well length. Goode (1989) also considered the effects of completion type on productivity. Their 
model allowed for cased completion, selectively perforated completion, external casing packers to
selectively isolate the wellbore and slotted liner completion with selectively isolating zones.
Babu (1989) developed a physical model consisting of a well drilled in a box-shaped drainage volume,
parallel to the y direction (see figure 4.5 (p.399)).

Figure 4.5. Babu and Odeh physical model 

The derived pseudo-steady productivity equation is

−3
7.08 × 10 b k x k z Δ p 
q h  =
( )
A1 Eq. 4.121
μ o B o  ln + ln C H   − 0.75 + S R 
r w 

where

b  is extension of the drainage volume in the direction along the well axis Oy ft  

S R  is the skin factor due to partial penetration

C H   is the geometric shape factor defined by Babu (1989)

k x  is the permeability along the x-axis mD 

k z  is the permeability along the z-axis mD 

2
A1 is the drainage area in the vertical plane ft 

r w  is wellbore radius ft 

Technical Description
399
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 417/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The equation 4.121 (p.399) is derived from a very complex general solution. It requires the calculation
of C H   and S R . The geometric shape factor accounts effect of permeability anisotropy, well location
and relative dimensions of the drainage volume. The skin accounts for the restricted entry associated
with the well length. Babu (1989) reported an error of less than 3% when compared to the more
rigorous solution.

Solution Gas-Drive IPR

Cheng (1990), Joshi (1991) and Bendakhlia (1989) have studied the inflow performance relationship
(IPR) for solution gas-drive reservoirs. Bendakhlia followed the same approach used by Vogel for 
vertical wells and developed the following equation:
2 n 
q 0
q 0,max
= 1 − V   ( ) p wf  
 p R 
( )
− 1 − V  
p wf  
 p R 
Eq. 4.122

The equation can be used under the assumptions of Vogel's original IPR correlation. The parameter 
V  and n  were correlated as a function of recovery factor.
Horizontal Gas Wells
The preceding sections have dealt with oil flow. However, horizontal wells are also appropriate for 
gas reservoirs. For example, in high-permeability gas reservoirs wellbore turbulence limits the
deliverability of a vertical well. The most effective way, according to Joshi (p.546) (1991), to reduce
gas velocity around the wellbore is to reduce the amount of gas production per unit well length which
can be accomplished by horizontal wells. Joshi (1991) describes two methods for the relationship
between pressur e and flowrate.
The gas flowrate is proportional to the pressure square terms.

 Al-Hussainy et the
proportional to al. (p.538) (1966) defined
pseudo-pressures a pseudo-pressure
which is defined as m(p). The gas flowrate is directly
 p 

m ( p ) = ∫ 
 p 
0
2 pdp 
μ ( p )z ( p )
Eq. 4.123

 A comparison of the two methods was done by Joshi (1991). Below reservoir pressures of 2500 psia,
either method can be employed. However, above 2500 psia, the pseudo-pressure should be used.

Steady state gas flow equation

The steady-state equation for gas flow is
−4 2 2

7.027 × 10 k h  h   p e  − p wf  

q h  = ( )
( )
r eh  Eq. 4.124
μZT  ln ′
r w 

where

Technical Description
400 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 418/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

q h  is the gas flowrate mmscf   / d 

 p e  is the pressure at external radius psia 

 p wf   is the wellbore flowing pressure psia 

k h  is the horizontal permeability mD 

h  is the reservoir height ft 

r eh  is the drainage radius ft 

′ is the effective wellbore radius ft 

r w 

μ  is the average viscosity cp 

Z   is the average compressibility factor 
o 
T   is the reservoir temperature R 

Pseudo steady state gas fl ow equation

The pseudo-steady state gas flow equation can be written as follows (Joshi, 1991)
2 2
−4
(
7.027 × 10 kh   p r  − p wf   )
q h  =
r eh  Eq. 4.125
μZT   ln − 0.75 + S  + S m  + S ca  − C  + Dq h 
r w 

where

2.222 × 10
−15
( γ G k a hβ )
D  = 2 Eq. 4.126
μ  pwf  r w h  p 

In equation 4.126 (p.401), the high velocity flow coefficient is given by:
10 −1.1045
β  = 2.73 × 10 k a  Eq. 4.127

where

q h  is the gas flowrate mmscf   / d 

 p r  is the average reservoir pressure psia 

 p wf   is the wellbore flowing pressure psia 

S  is the negative skin factor due to horizontal well (or well stimulation)

S m  is the mechanical skin damage

Technical Description
401
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 419/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

S ca  is the shape related skin factor 

C  is the shape factor conversion constant

k  is the permeability mD 

h  is the reservoir height ft 

r eh  is the drainage radius ft 

r w  is the wellbore radius ft 

μ  is the average viscosity cp 

Z   is the average compressibility factor 
T   is the reservoir temperature o 
R 

μ  pwf   is the gas viscosity at well flowing conditions cp 

β  is the high velocity flow coefficient 1 /  ft 

γ G  is the gas specific gravity dimensionless

h  p  is the perforated interval ft 

k a  is the permeability in the near wellbore region mD 

The equation 4.125 (p.401) is based upon circular drainage area as a reference area. In this equation,
Dq h  is the turbulence term, also called turbulence skin, or rate dependent skin factor . (see Joshi

(p.546) (1991),
for the extra Brown drop
pressure (p.540) (1984)
in the nearand Golanregion
wellbore and Whitson (p.544)
due to high gas(1986)).
velocity.This
Thisterm
termaccounts
was
neglected when dealing with oil flow. In addition, the term makes the solution of 4.125 (p.401) iterative.
The equation 4.127 (p.401) is given in Golan and Whitson (p.544) (1986)

Conclusions
The following can be concluded from this review:
The assumption of constant pressure drop in the wellbore is no longer valid, especially for long well
lengths and when turbulent/multiphase flow occurs.
More realistic production geometries are being used in the existing models to calculate horizontal
well productivity.
Existing models need to be verified and validated with actual field data. The absence of case studies
in the literature is indicative of the 'tight-hole' status of most horizontal well projects.

Distributed Productivity Index Method

Technical Description
402 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 420/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

for liquid reservoirs

Q  = J  ( P ws  − P wf  ) L  Eq. 4.128

for gas reservoirs

2 2

Q  = J   P ws  − P wf   L 

( )
where J  is the distributed productivity index.
Eq. 4.129

Oil / Water Relative Permeability tables

 A table of oil and water relative permeabilities as functions of water saturation (k ro (S wat ), k rw (S wat ))
can be defined in conjunction with the Pseudo Steady-State (p.365) or Tranisent (p.370) liquid IPRs
for vertical completions or the Steady State (p.394) or Pseudo-Steady State (p.397) liquid IPRs for 
horizontal completions.
If the reservoir water saturation is known, the water cut of the fluid flowing into the well can be
calculated:
Q w  k rw (S wat ) / μ w 
WCUT   = 100 ⋅ = 100 ⋅ Eq. 4.130
Q o  + Q w  k ro (S wat ) / μ o  + k rw (S wat ) / μ w 

 Alternatively, if the water cut is known, the water saturation can be found by solving the same equation
for the water saturation, S wat .

The oil and water inflows can then calculated separately using the relevant liquid IPR equation and
summed to give the liquid flow rate.

Keywords
Data is entered, in keyword mode, using the additional engine keyword feature (p.555). Use the
PERMTAB (p.661) keyword to define the table. Use the LAYER keyword to define the reservoir water 
saturation, if required.
See also other IPR methods (p.360)

Coning
In order to simulate gas and/or water breakthrough from the reservoir, flowrate-dependent values of 
GOR and watercut may be entered. In a homogeneous reservoir, analysis of the radial flow behavior 
of reservoir fluids moving towards a producing well shows that the rate dependent phenomenon of 
coning may be important. The effect of increasing fluid velocity and energy loss in the vicinity of a
well leads to the local distortion of a gas-oil contact or a water-oil contact. The gas and water in the
vicinity of the producing wellbore can therefore flow towards the perforation. The relative permeability
to oil in the pore spaces around the wellbore decreases as gas and water saturation increase. The
local saturations can be significantly different from the bulk average saturations (at distances such
as a few hundred meters from the wellbore). The prediction of coning is important since it leads to
decisions regarding:
• Preferred initial completions

Technical Description
403
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 421/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Estimation of cone arrival time at a producing well

• Prediction of fluid production rates after cone arrival
• Design of preferred well spacing

4.1.3 Chokes, Valves and Fittings

Choke
 A choke is a mechanical device that limits the flow rate through the pipe. The fluid velocity increases
through the constriction and for compressible fluids can reach the sonic velocity. As the pressure
difference across the choke increases the flow velocity increases too. At the point the velocity
becomes sonic, the flow is said to be critical, and is independent of the down stream pressure. See
Brill and Mukerjee (p.548) (1999) for a detailed description of flow through chokes and restrictions.

Technical Description
404
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 422/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.6. Typical flow-pressure relationship for a choke

The choke is modeled by splitting the flow into two regimes:

flow is subcritical P  < P  < P up  q  < q crit 

crit  down 

flow is critical 0 < P down  < P up  q  = q crit 

where

is the upstream pressure 2 2

P up  psi or  lbf   / in  N  / m 
2 2
P down  is the downstream pressure psi or  lbf   / in  N  / m 

is the critical (downstream) pressure psi or  lbf   in 2 N   m 2
P crit  /  / 
q  is the flow rate lb  / s kg  / s 

q crit  is the critical flow rate lb  / s kg  / s 

The choke performance is determined by the following:

1. The choke geometry and fluid properties

2. The subcritical flow correlation

3. The critical pressure ratio
4. The critical flow correlation

Choke geometry
The main choke parameters are:

Technical Description
405 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 423/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

d up  upstream diameter  in 

d bean  constriction (bean) diameter  in 

c v  flow coefficient (used in the Ashford & Pierce (p.407) correlation)

c vL  liquid flow coefficient (used in the Mechanistic (p.409) correlation)

c vG  gas flow coefficient (used in the Mechanistic (p.409) correlation)

c d  discharge coefficient (used for calculating the flow coefficients)

The flow coefficients can either be specified or calculated from the discharge coefficient:

c d 
c v  = 4
Eq. 4.131
1 − δ 
where:

d bean  is the diameter ratio dimensionless

δ  =
d up 

Subcritical flow correlations

There are essentially two subcritical flow models used in PIPESIM, the Mechanistic (p.409)
correlation and Ashford and Pierce (p.407) (1975) correlation . A third correlation API-14B (p.410)
is a modification of the Mechanistic correlation

Critical pressure ratio

For single phase liquids, the sonic velocity is high and flow is always subcritical. For single phase gas
flow and multiphase flow, the critical pressure is given by

P crit  = C PR  ⋅ P up  Eq. 4.132

The value of the critical pressure ratio C PR  can be set by the user or calculated (p.410).

Critical flow correlations

 A critical flow correlation can be used to set the critical flow rate q crit . There is a danger that this will
not match the subcritical flow at the critical pressure ratio. PIPESIM therefore adjusts the subcritical
flow correlation to ensure the flow is correct at the critical pressure. To do this it first calculates the
subcritical flow at the critical pressure:

q lim = q sub ( P up , P down ) evaluated at P down  = P crit 

Technical Description
406 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 424/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The choke downstream pressure is then calculated from the subcritical correlation using the upstream
pressure and a scaled flow rate (q lim/  q crit  )q . This matching can be turned off, in which case the critical
flow correlation is ignored when calculating the pressure drop, although it is used for reporting
purposes.

One of twelve correlations of four distinct types can be selected for the critical flow:
1. Mechanistic (p.411), API-14B (p.411)
2.  Ashford Pierce (p.411), A-P Tulsa, Poettmann-Beck (p.411)
3. Omana (p.411)
4.  Achong (p.412), Baxendale (p.412), Gilbert (p.412), Pilehvari (p.412), Ros (p.412), User 
defined (p.412)

Engine keywords
See Choke keyword (p.608)

Choke Subcritical Flow Correlations

Two subcritical flow correlations, Ashford-Pierce (p.407) and Mechanistic (p.409) are available. A
third, API 14B (p.410) is a version of the mechanistic correlation.

Ashford-Pierce
 Ashford-Pierce (1975) (p.538) give the following equation for oil flow rate through a choke:
2
c 1c v (64d bean ) 1 − ε  + R L  (1 − ε  ) / k 
k 
γ o  + c 3 γ G R s  + F  wo γ w 
1 Eq. 4.133
q o  = ⋅ P up  ⋅ −1/ γ 
⋅ ⋅
c 2 1 + R L  ε  B o  + F  wo  γ o  + c 3 γ G R  + F  wo γ w 

where
B o  is the oil formation factor volume factor  bbl  / STB 

c 1 = 3.51 is a constant

c 2 = 198.6 is a constant

c 3 = 0.000217 is a constant

c v  is the flow coefficient

d bean  is the bean diameter  1 / 6 4 in 

γ  − 1 dimensionless
k  =
γ 

F  wo  is the upstream water to oil ratio

Technical Description
407 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 425/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

P up  is the upstream pressure

P down  is the downstream pressure

q o  is the oil flow rate at standard conditions bbl  / d 

R s  is the upstream gas oil ratio scf   / STB 

R  is the gas oil ratio at standard conditions scf   / STB 

T  up Z  up ( R  − R s ) is the upstream gas liquid ratio dimensionless

R L  =
198.6 P up 

P down  is the pressure ratio dimensionless

ε  =
P up 

C  p  is the ratio of specific heats dimensionless

γ  =
C V  

γ o  is the upstream oil specific gravity dimensionless

γ G  is the upstream gas specific gravity dimensionless

γ w  is the upstream water specific gravity dimensionless

The Ashford and Pierce formula is based on the following assumptions:

• polytropic expansion of gas-liquid mixture
• equal gas and liquid velocities at the throat
• incompressible liquid phase
• liquid dispersed in a continuous gas phase
• negligible friction losses
Recommended values for the flow coefficient c v  are:

diameter in 1/64 in d 
bean 

8 0.125 1.2
12 0.1875 1.2
20 0.3125 0.976
24 0.375 0.96
32 0.5 0.95

Technical Description
408 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 426/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Mechanistic Correlation
The pressure drop across the choke is given by the weighted average of the liquid and gas phase
pressure drops:

ΔP  = λ L  ⋅ Δ p L  + λ G  ⋅ Δ p G  Eq. 4.134

The liquid phase pressure drop is given by Bernouilli's equation:

2
 ρ n 
Δ p L  =
(
2 ⋅ c  c  ⋅ Z  
vL  L 
v 
) Eq. 4.135

The gas phase pressure drop is given by Bernouilli's equation:

2
 ρ n 

( )
v 
Δ p G  = Eq. 4.136
2 ⋅ c 
c vG  ⋅ Z  
G 

q  is the mixture velocity through ft  / s m  / s 

v  = the choke
Abean  ⋅ ρ 
n 

q  is the mass flow rate lb  / s kg  / s 

2 is the choke area at the 2 2
π  ⋅ d bean  ft  m 
Abean  = constriction
4
is the no-slip density 3 3
 ρ n  = λ L  ⋅ ρ L  + λ G  ⋅ ρ G  lb  /  ft  kg  / m 

λ L  and λ G  are the liquid and gas phase

flowing fractions
are the liquid and gas phase 3 3
 ρ L  and  ρ G  lb  /  ft  kg  / m 
densities

Z  L  = 1 and are the liquid and gas

compressibilities
4
0.41 + 0.35 δ  ΔP 
Z  G  = 1 − ⋅
γ  P up 

c  is a conversion factor for  c  = 144 ⋅ g  c  = 1

engineering units 2
lb  / ( ft  ⋅ s  ) / psi 
Total pressure drop for the two-phase system is therefore:
2
 ρ n  ⋅ v  λ L  λ G 
ΔP  = ⋅ 2
+ 2 Eq. 4.137
2 ⋅ c 
(c vL  ⋅ Z  L  ) (c vG  ⋅ Z  G )

Technical Description
409
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 427/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

API 14-B Formulation

The API 14-B formulation is similar to the mechanistic formulation, with the addition of the following
assumptions:
1. Liquid flow through the choke is incompressible. The discharge coefficient is constant with a value
of 
c vL  = 0.85.

2. Subcritical gas flow through the choke is adiabatic and compressible. The discharge coefficient
is constant with a value of 
c vG  = 0.9.

Choke Critical Pressure Ratio

The critical pressure ratio C PR  is used to determine the downstream pressure when critical flow occurs

in the choke. You can set a value of C PR  or it can be calculated, either from the single-phase gas
formula (used with the Mechanistic subcritical flow correlation) or using the Ashford and Pierce
formula (used with the Ashford and Pierce subcritical flow correlation).

Single phase gas critical pressure ratio

For a single phase gas flow, the critical pressure is given as a function of the specific heat ratio:
γ 
2 γ −1
C PR  = Eq. 4.138
γ  + 1

The value of γ  = C P  / C V   is calculated by the program, but can be overridden by the user. For diatomic

gases (for example air) γ  ≈ 1.4 and C PR  = 0.53

Ashford and Pierce critical pressure ratio

∂ q o 
 Ashford-Pierce (1975) (p.538) give the critical flow condition = 0 at ε  = C PR . 4.133 (p.407) for 
∂ ε 
q o  and simplifying gives:

1 − ε  + R L  (1 − ε  ) / k 
k 
∂
−1/ γ 
=0 Eq. 4.139
∂ ε  1 + R L  ε 

This can be manipulated to give an equation for  ε  = C PR :

γ 
−1/ γ  2
2R L  − γ +1
(1 + R L  ε  ) =
γ 
⋅ ε  ⋅ (1 − ε  + R L  ⋅ (1 − ε  ) / k )
k  Eq. 4.140

Technical Description
410 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 428/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Choke Critical Flow Correlations

The following choke correlations are available:

Ashford and Pierce / Sachdeva / Poetmann-Beck

The Ashford-Pierce (1975) (p.538) critical flow can be obtained by evaluating 4.133 (p.407) at
ε  = C PR , determined from 4.140 (p.410). The stock tank critical oil flow rate takes the form:
2
c 1c v (64d bean ) 1 − ε  + R L  (1 − ε 
k 
) / k  γ o  + c 3 γ  g R s  + F  wo γ w 
1 Eq. 4.141
q o  = ⋅ P up  ⋅ −1/ γ 
⋅ ⋅
c 2 1 + R L  ε  B o  + F  wo  γ o  + c 3 γ  g R  + F  wo γ w 

The Sachdeva (p.538) critical flow correlation takes a similar form:

2 R L  + 0.76 1
q o  = 0.858c v (64d bean ) ⋅ P up  ⋅ ⋅
R L  + 0.56 B o  + F  wo 
Eq. 4.142
⋅ 1
2 −1
(62.4( γ o  + c 3 γ  g R  + F  wo γ w )) + (62.4( γ o  + c 3 γ  g R s  + F  wo γ w ))

The Poetmann-Beck (p.550) critical flow correlation takes a similar form:

R L  + 0.766 1  ρ L  + R L  ρ G 

q o  = 88992 ⋅ 9273.6 ⋅ 0.4513 ⋅ Abean  ⋅ P up  ⋅ ⋅
R L  + 0.5663 5.61 ρ L  + 0.0765 γ G R  3 Eq. 4.143
ρ  + R L  ρ G
2 L 

Mechanistic / API14B

The
valuecritical
of themass flow drop:
pressure rate can be found by inverting the 4.137 (p.409) and evaluating it at the critical

2 g  ⋅ ρ n  ⋅ ΔP 

q  = Abean 
λ L  λ G  Eq. 4.144
c 1 ⋅ 2
+ 2
(c vL  ⋅ Z  L  ) (c vG  ⋅ Z  G )
ΔP  = (1 − C PR  ) P up  Eq. 4.145

The API14B critical flow uses the mechanistic critical flow formula, with c vL  = 0.85 and c vG  = 0.9

Omana Correlation
The Omana (p.549) correlation gives a formula for the stock tank critical liquid flow rate:
−0.657
⋅ (1 + R L  )
−3 −1.245 1.545 1.8 −3.49 3.19
q L  = 1.953 × 10 ⋅ σ L  ⋅ ρ L  ⋅ d bean  ⋅ ρ G  ⋅ P up  Eq. 4.146

where:

Technical Description
411
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 429/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

σ  surface tension at upstream conditions (dynes/cm)

Gilbert, Ros, Baxendall, Achong, Pilehvari and User defined correlations

The equations proposed by Gilbert, Ros, Baxendall, Archong and Pilehvari (Ghassan (p.544)) for 
stock tank critical liquid flow are all of the form:
c  1/ e 
P up  ⋅ (64d bean )
q L  = Eq. 4.147
b 
a  ⋅ GLR 

where
GLR  - producing gas liquid ratio (scf/STB)
a , b , c  - empirical coefficient given below

Correlation a b c e  
 Achong 3.82 0.650 1.88 1
Baxendall 9.56 0.546 1.93 1
Gilbert 10 0.546 1.89 1
Pilehvari 46.67 0.313 2.11 1
Ros 17.4 0.5 2.00 1

Users can also define their own parameters for this formula by using engine keywords (p.608). For 
example:

CHOKE CCORR=USER a=0.1 b=0.546 c=1.89 e=1.0 ADJUSTSC dbean = 3

Keywords can be entered in the GUI by replacing the choke with an Engine Keyword Tool (p.84).

Flow Control Valves Mechanistic Theory

PIPESIM's mechanistic choke equation is based on the theory for subcritical flow (see Brill and
Mukherjee, 1969).

Subcritical flow
The mass flow rate is given in terms of the pressure drop as follows:

2 gρ ns ΔP 
Q sc  = 12 Abean  f  L  f  G  Eq. 4.148
2
+ 2
(Z  L  c L  ) (Z  G c G )
where:

f  L  and f  G  are the liquid and gas phase fraction

Technical Description
412 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 430/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

c L  and c G  are the liquid and gas flow coefficient

Abean  is the choke cross-section

ΔP  is the pressure drop, which is given by:

ΔP  = f  L  ΔP L  + f  G ΔP G  Eq. 4.149

and
2
ΔP L  =
( 1
2 g ρ ns  )( q 
12Z  L  c L  Abean )
Eq. 4.150

2
ΔP G  =
( 1
2 g ρ ns  )( q 
12Z  L  c L  Abean )
Eq. 4.151

where

Z  L  = 1 is the liquid compressibility factor 

Z  G  = Z  G (k , DP , P up ) is the gas compressibility factor 

 ρ ns  = f  L  ρ L  + f  G  ρ G  is the no slip density

Critical flow
The critical mass flow is given by the subcritical correlation evaluated at the critical pressure drop:

ΔP crit  = P up (1 − C PR ) Eq. 4.152

where C PR  is the critical pressure ratio.

Fittings
The pressure drop across a fitting is given by the Crane Technical Paper 410 (p.541):
2
 ρ  ⋅ v 
ΔP  = K  ⋅ Eq. 4.153
2 ⋅ c 

K  is a dimensionless friction factor or resistance

v  is the fluid velocity ft  / s m  / s 
 ρ  is the fluid density 3 3
lb  /  ft  kg  / m 
2
c  is a conversion factor for engineering units c  = 144 ⋅ g  lb  / ( ft  ⋅ s  ) / psi  c  = 1

Technical Description
413
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 431/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The velocity of the fluid in the fitting depends on the internal diameter of the fitting where the velocity
is measured. If the fitting has two internal diameters, d 1 and d 2, the velocities are related by:
2 2
 ρ 1 ⋅ π  ⋅ d 1 ⋅ v 1  ρ 2 ⋅ π  ⋅ d 2 ⋅ v 2
Eq. 4.154
= = q 
4 4
For incompressible fluids the density can be taken as constant and the velocities are inversely
proportional to the square of the diameters. Therefore the pressure drop can be written in terms of 
either velocity:
2 2
 ρ  ⋅ v 1  ρ  ⋅ v 2
Eq. 4.155
ΔP  = K 1 ⋅ = K 2 ⋅
2 ⋅ c  2 ⋅ c 
The fitting resistances are related by:
1
K 2 = 4 ⋅ K 1 Eq. 4.156
δ 
and δ  = d 1 / d 2 is the ratio of the internal diameters.

Comparison with the choke model

The fitting can be modeled as a choke (p.404) using a mechanistic sub-critical (p.409) liquid flow
correlation. The choke diameter is taken as the minimum diameter of the fitting d 1 and the flow
coefficient is calculated from the fitting resistance at d 1:

1
c v  = Eq. 4.157
K 1
Resistance calculation
The fitting resistance K  can be specified by the user. Since it is a function of the internal diameter,
d , this value must also be specified to allow the velocity to be calculated correctly.
The fitting resistance can also be calculated by PIPESIM using formulae from the Crane Technical
Paper 410 (p.541). The resistance is a function of the fitting type, the pipe nominal diameter, d N   the
internal diameter, d 2 and the diameter of any constriction, d 1. These Crane Technical Paper 410
(p.541) formula can be written as:

K 1 = a 1 ⋅ f  T  (d N  ) + a 2 ⋅ 0.5 ⋅ 1 − δ 2 + a 3 ⋅ (1 − δ 2)2

( ) Eq. 4.158

The first term a 1 ⋅ f  T   represents friction due to the shape of the pipe fitting, the second term
a 2 ⋅ 0.5 ⋅ (1 − δ  ) is the resistance due to sudden contraction through any constriction in the fitting
2

Technical Description
414
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 432/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2 2
and the third term a 3 ⋅ (1 − δ  ) is the resistance due to sudden expansion after a constriction. The

constants a 1, a 2 and a 3 depend on the fitting type and are given by:

Fitting
a1 a2 a3
Check Swing Valve Conventional 100 0 0
Check Swing Valve Clearway 50 0 0
Standard 90 degree Elbow 30 0 0
Standard 45 degree Elbow 16 0 0
Standard 90 degree Short Radius Elbow 14 0 0
Standard 90 degree Long Radius Elbow 12 0 0
Tee - Flow through run 20 0 0
Tee - Flow through branch 60 0 0
Check Lift Globe Valve 600 δ δ 
Globe Valve Conventional 340 δ δ 
 Angle Valve Conventional 150 δ δ 
Globe Valve Y-Pattern 55 δ δ 
Check Lift Angle Valve 55 δ δ 

Gate Valve θ  < 45

o  8 θ  θ 
1.6 ⋅ sin 2.6 ⋅ sin
2 2
o 
Gate Valve 45 < θ  < 180
o  8 θ  1
sin 2
Ball Valve θ  < 45
o  3 θ  θ 
1.6 ⋅ sin 2.6 ⋅ sin
2 2
o 
Ball Valve 45 < θ  < 180
o  3 θ  1
sin
2

The friction factor  f  T  , depends on the nominal size of the pipe:

Nominal size d N (inch) f

T

1/2 .027
3/4 .025
1 .023
1 1/4 .022
1 1/2 .021

Technical Description
415 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 433/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2 .019
2 1/12, 3 .018
4 .017
5 .016
6 .015
8 - 10 .014
12 - 16 .013
18 - 24 .012

4.1.4 Compressors, Pumps and Expanders

Centrifugal Pumps and Compressors

Centrifugal pumps and compressors are described by curves of head and efficiency as functions of 
the flow rate for a given speed:
Head (q , N  c ) = Head c (q ) Eq. 4.159
η (q , Nc ) = η c (q ) Eq. 4.160

where:

Head  is the head ft  ⋅ lbf   / lb Nm  / kg 

Technical Description
416 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 434/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

η  is the efficiency, expressed as a fraction, 0 < η  ≤ 1

q  is the flow rate lb  / s kg  / s 
Nc  is the compressor speed for the curve

The fan laws can be used to determine the head and efficiency for speeds N  that differ from the curve
speed :
2
Head (q , N  ) =
N  
Nc 
( )
Head c 
q 
N  / Nc 
( ) Eq. 4.161

η (q , N  ) = η c  ( N  / q Nc ) Eq. 4.162

The change in pressure of the fluid and the power needed to run the pump or compressor can be
determined from the head and efficiency:

ΔP  = P out  − P in  = c 1 ⋅ Head  ⋅ ρ  Eq. 4.163

c 2 ⋅ q  ⋅ Head 
Power  = Eq. 4.164
η 
where

 ρ ( P in , T  in ) + ρ ( P out , T  out ) is the average density 3 3

lb  /  ft  kg  / m 
 ρ  =
2
is the suction pressure 2 2
P in  psi or  lbf   / in  N  / m 

is the discharge pressure 2 2

P out  psi or  lbf   / in  N  / m 

T  in  is the suction temperature o 

R  K 

T  out  is the discharge temperature o 

R  K 

Power  is the power required by the pump hp W  

or compressor 
is a conversion factor for  2
c 1
engineering units
1 in 
144 ft  ( )
c 2 is a conversion factor for  1 hp 
engineering units
550 ft  ⋅ lbf   / s 
The outlet temperature depends on how much of the pump energy is transferred to the fluid. Three
different models can be used:

Technical Description
417 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 435/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

(( ) )
Adiabatic Route: γ  −1
T  in  P out 
γ 
ΔT   = T  out  − T  in  = ⋅ −1 Eq. 4.165
η  P in 

Polytropic Route: n  −1

(( ) )
ΔT   = T  out  − T  in  = T  in  ⋅ P out  n 
−1 Eq. 4.166
P in 

Mollier Route (Isentropic): S ( P  , T   ) = S ( P  , T   ) Eq. 4.167

out  out  in  in 

where

γ ( P in , T  in ) + γ ( P out , T  out ) is the average value of  γ 
γ  =
2
is the ratio of specific heats
γ  = C  p 
C V  

n ( P in , T  in ) + n ( P out , T  out ) is the average value of n 
n  =
2
n  γ  is the polytropic coefficient
= η  ⋅
n  − 1 γ  − 1
S  is the specific entropy BTU   J  
lb  ⋅ F   kg  ⋅ K 
o 

Note that:
• Only a fraction η  of the power is converted to head. When using the adiabatic route, the energy
that is not converted to head is assumed to be converted to fluid heat. The usual adiabatic
temperature increase is multiplied by a factor 1 /  η  ≥ 1.
n 
• The polytropic route PV   = constant  can be used to model constant pressure (n  = 0) , constant
temperature (n  = 1) , constant enthalpy (n  = γ ) and constant volume (n  = ∞ ) changes as well as
intermediate routes. PIPESIM uses a value of n  that is a function of the efficiency ( η ) and the
specific heat ratio ( γ ). This value can only be used when η  > ( γ  − 1) /  γ .
• In the special case when the efficiency η  = 1, the polytropic coefficient equals the specific heat
ratio n  = γ  and the polytropic and adiabatic formulas are the same.
• The Mollier Route can only be used in compositional models, the PIPESIM blackoil model does
not calculate entropy.

Engine keywords
See compressor keywords (p.615).

Technical Description
418 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 436/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Reciprocating Compressor Operation

This graph shows how the reciprocating compressor will operate for various field deliverabilities:

Note the following:

1. If the field deliverability falls below the minimum compressor flowrate, recycle mode will be
invoked. Due to the low pressure operation in this region, it may be necessary to add a reverse
block to the branch containing the compressor.
2. If the field deliverability falls below the minimum suction pressure of the compressor, no solution
is possible.

Note: This occurrence may be identified using FPT with an event conditional on the minimum
rate through the compressor. To limit the flowrate through a compressor, place a choke in the
branch upstream and specify a maximum gas constraint in FPT.

3. Always run the network model in Wells Offline mode, with no reverse blocks set.

Electrical Submersible Pumps (ESP)

General
The electric submersible pump (ESP) is perhaps the most versatile of the artificial lift methods. The
ESP comprises a down hole pump, electric power cable, motor and surface controls. In a typical
application, the down hole pump is suspended on a tubing string hung on the wellhead and is
submerged in the well fluid. The pump is close-coupled to a submersible electric motor that receives
power through the power cable and surface controls.
ESPs are used to produce a variety of fluids and the gas, chemicals and contaminants commonly
found in these fluids. Aggressive fluids can be produced with special materials and coatings. Sand

Technical Description
419
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 437/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

and similar abrasive contaminants can be produced with acceptable pump life by using modified
pumps and operation procedures.
ESPs usually do not require storage enclosures, foundation pads, or guard fences. An ESP can be
operated in a deviated or directionally drilled well, although the recommended operating position is
in a vertical section of the well.
The ESP has the broadest producing range of any artificial lift method ranging from 100 b/d of total
fluid up to 90,000 b/d.
ESPs are currently operated in wells with bottom hole temperatures up to 350 degree Fahrenheit.
Operation at elevated ambient temperatures require special components in the motor and power 
cables of sustained operation at high temperatures, and have efficiently lifted fluids in wells deeper 
than 12,000 ft. System efficiency ranges from 18 to 68%, depending on fluid volume, net lift and pump
type.

ESP System Components: Motor 

The ESP system's prime mover is the submersible motor. The motor is a two-pole, three-phase,
squirrel-cage induction type. Motors run at a nominal speed of 3,500 rev/min in 60-Hz operation.
Motors are filled with a highly refined mineral oil that provides dielectrical strength, bearing lubrication
and thermal conductivity. The design and operation voltage of these motors can be as low as 230
volt or as high as 4,000 volt. Amperage requirement may be from 17 to 110 amps. The required
horsepower is achieved by simply increasing the length of the motor section. The motor is made up
of rotors, usually about 12 to 18 inches (300-460 mm) in length that are mounted on a shaft and
located in the electrical field (stator) mounted within the steel housing. The larger single motor 
assemblies will approach 33 feet (10 m) in length and will be rated up to 400 horsepower, while
tandem motors will approach 90 feet (27.5 m) in length and will have a rating up to 750 horsepower.
The rotor is also composed of a group of electromagnets in a cylinder with the poles facing the stator 
poles. The speed at which the stator field rotates is the synchronous speed, and can be computed
from the equation:
120 f  
v  = Eq. 4.168
M  
Where: v  is speed in rev/min, f   is frequency in cycles/sec and M  is number of magnetic poles.
The number of poles the stator contains is determined by the manufacturer. Therefore to change the
speed of the stator magnetic field, the frequency will have to change.
Heat generated by the motor is transferred to the well fluid as it flows past the motor housing. Because
the motor relies on the flow of well fluid for cooling, a standard ESP should never be set at or below
the well perforations or producing interval, unless the motor is shrouded.
Motors are manufactured in four different diameters (series) 3.75, 4.56, 5.40 and 7.8 in. Thus motors
can be used in casing as small as 4.5 in. 60-Hz horsepower capabilities range from a low of 7.5 hp
in 3.75-in series to a high of 1,000 hp in the 7.38-in series.
Motor construction may be single section or several "tandems" bolted together to reach a specific
horsepower. Motors are selected on the basis of the maximum diameter that can be run easily in a
given casing size.

Technical Description
420 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 438/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ESP System Components: Pumps

The ESP is a multistage centrifugal pump. Each stage of a submersible pump consists of a rotating
impeller and a stationary diffuser. The pressure-energy change is accomplished as the liquid being
pumped surrounds the impeller. As the impeller rotates it imparts two rotating motion components to
the liquid: one is in a radial direction outward from the center of the impeller (centrifugal force), the
other motion moves in a direction tangential to the outside diameter of the impeller. The resultant of 
these two components is the actual direction of flow. The type of stage used determines the rate of 
fluid production. The number of stages determines the total design head generated and the motor 
horsepower required. The design falls into one of two general categories: the smaller flow pumps are
generally of radial flow design. As the pumps reach design flows of approximately 1,900 B/D,the
design change to a mixed flow.
The impellers are of a fully enclosed curved vane design, whose maximum efficiency is a function of 
the impeller design and type and whose operating efficiency is a function of the percent of design
capacity at which the pump is operated. The mathematical relationship between head, capacity,
efficiency and brake horse power is expressed as:

Power  = q v Hγ  Eq. 4.169

η 

Where: q v  is the volume flow rate, H  is the head, γ  is the fluid specific gravity and η  is the pump
efficiency
The discharge rate of a submersible centrifugal pump depends on the rotational speed (rpm), size of 
the impeller, impeller design, number of stages, the dynamic head against which the pump is
operating and the physical properties of the fluid being pumped. The total dynamic head of the pump
is the product of the number of stages and the head generated by each stage.
"Bolt-on" design makes it possible to vary the capacity and total head of a pump by using more than
one pump section. However, large-capacity pumps typically have integrated head and bases.

Pump Selection
Select Artificial Lift » ESP » ESP Design and use the Pump Selection tab . The tab has two
sections, Pump Design Data and Pump Parameters. Select a pump based on certain design criteria.

Pump Design data

Design Production rate
Desired flowrate through the pump in stock-tank units. The actual flowing quantity will be
computed.
Design Outlet Pressure
the required outlet pressure of the PIPESIM model when the pump is installed. It is
recommended to only model the well, and no associated flowline or riser, while designing
the ESP system. In this case the outlet pressure would then be the wellhead pressure
Static Reservoir Pressure
Taken from the PIPESIM model or can be entered
Water cut
Taken from the PIPESIM model or can be entered.

Technical Description
421
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 439/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

GOR (or GLR)

Taken from the PIPESIM model or can be entered
Pump Depth
The depth at which the pump is to be installed. This is taken from the PIPESIM model if a

pump is already installed or can be entered.

Casing ID
The casing size that the pump has to fit into. Usually 3.38 to 11.25 in.
Design Frequency
The frequency/speed that the pump is expected to run at.
Gas Separator Efficiency
The efficiency of the gas separator if installed.
Head factor 
 Allows the pump efficiency to be factored (default = 1).
Viscosity Correction
 All pump performance curves are based on water systems, this option will correct for oil
viscosity.
Select Pump
Will use the available data to select suitable pumps from the database. The pump intake
conditions will first be computed. The resulting pump list can be sorted by efficiency or 
Maximum flowrate by selecting the column header. The Manufactures to select from can be
filtered. Errors in the simulation (p.218).

Pump parameters

Calculate
Calculate pump performance at the conditions specified. Errors in the simulation (p.218)
Stage-by-stage
Perform the stage calculations on a stage-by-stage basis. Default = stage-by-stage.
Selected Pump
The pump selected, by the user, from the design data
No. of Stages required
The computed number of stages for this pump under these conditions.
Pump efficiency @ Design rate

The efficiency of the pump at the design production rate

Pump power required
The power required for this pump to deliver the required flowrate.
Pump intake pressure
The computed pump intake pressure.

Technical Description
422 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 440/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Pump discharge pressure

The computed pump discharge pressure.
Head required
The computed pump head required

Liquid density
The computed liquid density at the pump intake
Free gas fraction at inlet conditions
The computed gas fraction.
Pump performance plot
plot performance curves at different speeds
Pump curves
plot standard performance curves
Install pump
Install the pump into the tubing of model. This will replace any existing ESP but not gas lift
valves.
See also: Select a Motor (p.212), Select a Cable (p.217)

Motor Selection
This can only be performed after a pump has been selected.
Select Artificial Lift » ESP » ESP Design and use the Motor/Cable Selection tab.
Name of the selected Pump
Selected from the Pump tab.

No. of stages
Computed.
Pump efficiency
Computed
Pump power required
Computed.
Select Motor 
The resulting motor list can be sorted by power, voltage, current, etc. by selecting the column
header. Errors (p.212).
Various parameters associated with the motor will be computed and displayed at both 60Hz and the
initially entered Design Frequency.
NP [Name Plate] Power 
NP [Name Plate] Voltage
NP [Name Plate] Current
See also: Select a Pump (p.213), Select a Cable (p.217)

Technical Description
423
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 441/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ESP Database
To simulate an ESP, PIPESIM maintains a database of manufacturers and models from which the
user can select. For each model the diameter, minimum and maximum flowrate and base speed are
provided. A plot of the ESP's performance is also available. If the required ESP is not in the database,
you can easily enter the basic data required for it into the database using Data » New ESP/Pump/
Compressor . See Data/NewESP-Pump-Compressor (p.218).

Selection
When modeling an ESP, it is important that the correct size (expected design flowrate and physical
size) ESP is used. A search facility is available, based on these two parameters, to select the
appropriate ESP from the database. The search can, if required, be restricted to a particular 
manufacturer. Pumps that meet the design criteria will be listed.

Stage-by-stage modeling
Stage-by-stage modeling is selected by selecting the checkbox next to the calculate button.
 Alternatively by inserting Engine Keywords (PUMP STAGECALCS) (p.638) into the model, using the
EKT (p.84).
Install a Pump
Once the ESP manufacturer and model (p.212) has been selected from the database of common
ESP's (p.216) some parameters can be altered. The performance curves for each model are
(normally) based on a Speed of 60Hz and 1 stage.

Design data
Speed
The actual operating speed of the ESP

Stages
The actual number of stages of the ESP
Head factor 
 Allows the eff iciency to be f actored (default = 1)

Calculation Options
Viscosity Correction
 Allow a viscosity correction factor to be applied to take account of changes to the fluid
viscosity by the pressure and temperature.
Gas Separator present
 Allow a gas separator to be added (automatically) with an efficiency: Separator efficiency -
efficiency of an installed gas separator (default = 100% if installed)
Performance table
The data used to predict the performance of the ESP
Standard Curves
The standard performance curves for the ESP - can be printed/exported

Technical Description
424
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 442/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Variable Speed Curves

Variable speed curves at 30 - 90 Hz.- can be printed/exported

ESP Design
The ESP option is selected from the Artificial Lift menu. To design an ESP the following stages are
required:
Select a Pump (p.213)
Select a Motor (p.212)
Select a Cable (p.217)
The ESP should then be installed, added into the tubing, at the required depth. This can either be
performed manually or by using the Install button. Installing automatically removes any existing ESPs
in the tubing. However, any gas lift values or injections points are not removed.
See also: ESP [Reda] web site

ESP System Components: Cable

Cable Selection can be determined after a Pump and motor have been selected.
1. Motor/Cable Selection tab
2. Cable Selection
3. Select Cable
Cable Length
The length of the cable, can be modified
NP Current @ Design Frequency
The [Name Plate] Current at the design frequency. Cannot be changed.

Computed values
Selected Cable

Cable length

Voltage drop

Downhole voltage

Surface voltage

Total System KVA

Design Report
Display a report that details all the selected components of the ESP system.

Errors
Occasionally a pump may not be able to be determined and a Convergence error will be reported.
There could be a number of reasons for such an error and the user is advised to view the output
report.

Technical Description
425 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 443/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Common problems:
1. The system cannot reach the outlet pressure specified. Try increasing the outlet pressure.

Progressive Cavity Pump (PCP)

General
Progressive Cavity Pumps (PCP’s) are a special type of rotary positive displacement pump
sometimes referred to as “single-screw pumps”. Unlike ESP’s, PCP performance is based on the
volume of fluid displaced and not on the pressure increase dynamically generated through the pump.
PCP’s are an increasingly common form of artificial lift for low- to moderate-rate wells, especially
onshore and for heavy (solid laden) fluids.
Invented in the late 1920’s by Rene Moineau, PCP’s were not used in the oilfield until the late 1970’s.
Their use is becoming increasingly common for low- to moderate- rate onshore wells, particularly for 
heavy-oil and sand-laden fluids. (See SPE Production Engineering Handbook (p. 0 ).)
PCP systems have several advantages over other lift methods:

• Overall high energy efficiency (typically 55-75%)

• Ability to handle solids
• Ability to tolerate free gas
• No valves or reciprocating parts
• Good resistance to abrasion
• Low internal shear rates (limits fluid emulsification through agitation)
• Relatively lower power costs (prime mover capacity fully utilized)
• Relatively simple installation and operation (low maintenance)
• Low profile surface equipment and noise levels
Limitations of PCP systems include:
• Maximum production rates of approximately 5000 BPD
• The maximum installation depth is about 4,500 ft.
• Maximum operating temperature of approximately 300 º F.
• Corrosive fluids may damage elastomer and result in higher slippage
• Pump stator may sustain permanent damage if run dry even for short periods
• Rod sting and tubing wear can be problematic for directional and horizontal wells (though
downhole drives can be used to avoid this)

Principle of Operation
PCP’s are most commonly driven by surface mounted electrical motors (Figure 4.7 (p.427)), although
downhole electric and hydraulic drive systems are available.
 A PCP is comprised of two helical gears, a steel rotating gear called the rotor (“internal gear”) and a
stationary gear called the stator (“external gear”), which is commonly made of elastomer but may be
steel as well. The rotor is positioned inside the stator and rotates along the longitudinal axis (Figure
4.7 (p.427)):

Technical Description
426 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 444/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.7. PCP Pump Illustration

The volume between the stator and rotor forms a sealed cavity that trap the fluid and as the rotor 
turns this cavity “progresses” the fluid from the inlet to the outlet of the pump. The volume of the cavity
and the rotational speed (N ) determine the flow rate achieved by the pump.
The volume of the cavity may be calculated based on geometric parameters. The volume of the cavity
is defined by the diameter of the rotor (Dr  ) times the stator pitch length ( Ls ) times the eccentricity
(e). The eccentricity is defined as the distance between the centerlines of the major and minor 
diameters of the rotor.
Therefore, the flow rate through the pump can be expressed as:
Q = 4eDr LsN 
In field units, P s , e and D are in feet and N  in revolutions per-minute to give a rate in ft3/min. Multiply
by 256.46 to convert to BPD. (See Bellarby (p. 0 ).) The geometric parameters required for this
calculation vary considerably among vendors and are generally not published.
Hydraulic power can then be calculated by:

Technical Description
427 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 445/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Hhp = 1.7 X 10 -5  Δ PQ

Where ΔP  is the pressure differential across the pump (psi) and Q is rate (BPD).
In practice, the clearance between the rotor and stator are not perfect due mainly to deformation of 
the elastomeric stator as a function of pressure, temperature, and wear. This causes some of the

fluid to slip
stages. backviscosity
Higher into preceding cavities.
fluids exhibit lessSlip increases with increasing pressure and number of 
slip.
For simulation purposes, PCP performance curves are generally used. While the format of 
performance curves varies by vendor, PIPESIM has adopted the format suggested by ISO 15136-1
(2009) (p. 0 ). PIPESIM provides performance curves from several vendors based on reference
conditions (generally water at standard conditions). While catalog performance curves for 
rotodynamic-type pumps (such as ESP’s) are generally consistent with field performance, PCP
performance curves vary considerably based on the operating conditions (pressure and temperature)
as well as the fluid properties. Therefore, the catalog curves available from within PIPESIM should
only be used for preliminary analysis. It is common for PCP’s to undergo “bench tests” to generate
performance curves for specific pumps at intended operating conditions. It is therefore recommended
that these curves be used for more detailed simulation studies.

Viscosity Effects
PIPESIM has the option to apply a viscosity correction to reduce slippage effects for higher viscosity
fluids. The method of Karassik et al. (p. 0 ) is used.

q v 2 (1)
v 1
= Eq. 4.170
q v 1 v 2

Where v = the kinematic viscosity, SSU (Saybold Seconds Universal)

q = the slippage, (BPD)

If the reference fluid is water with kinematic viscosity of about 32 SSU, the equation reduces to:

32 (2)
q s (v 2) = q  Eq. 4.171
v 2 s (curve )

Note: SSU is a viscosity unit that is equal to the measure of the time that 60 cm3 of oil takes to flow
through a calibrated tube at a controlled temperature. This should not be confused with the dynamic
(absolute) viscosity, unit of cp or Pa•s.

Expanders
Expanders are modeled in a similar way to centrifugal compressors (p.416), except they work in
reverse. Fluid flows through the expander and power is extracted. As with compressors, expanders
can be described by curves of head and efficiency as functions of the flow rate for a given speed:

Head (q , N  c ) = Head c (q ) Eq. 4.172

Technical Description
428 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 446/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

η (q , Nc ) = η c (q ) Eq. 4.173

where:

Head  is the head ft  ⋅ lbf   / lb Nm  / kg 

η  is the efficiency, expressed as a fraction, 0 < η  ≤ 1

q  is the flow rate lb  / s kg  / s 
Nc  is the expander speed for the curve

The fan laws can be used to determine the head and efficiency for speeds N  that differ from the curve
speed :
2
Head (q , N  ) =
N  
Nc 
( )
Head c 
q 
N  / Nc 
( ) Eq. 4.174

η (q , N  ) = η c  ( q 

) Eq. 4.175
N  / Nc 
The change in pressure of the fluid and the power needed to run the pump or compressor can be
determined from the head and efficiency:

ΔP  = P in  − P out  = c 1 ⋅ Head  ⋅ ρ  Eq. 4.176

Power  = c 2 ⋅ η  ⋅ q  ⋅ Head  Eq. 4.177

where

 ρ ( P in , T  in ) + ρ ( P out , T  out ) is the average density 3 3

lb  /  ft  kg  / m 
 ρ  =
2
is the suction pressure 2 2
P in  psi or  lbf   / in  N  / m 

is the discharge pressure 2 2

P out  psi or  lbf   / in  N  / m 

T  in  is the suction temperature o 

R  K 

T  out  is the discharge temperature o 

R  K 

Power  is the power extracted by the hp W  

expander 
is a conversion factor for  2
c 1 1 in 
engineering units 144 ft  ( )
c 2 is a conversion factor for  1 hp 
engineering units 550 ft  ⋅ lbf   / s 

The outlet temperature depends on how much of the energy is removed from the fluid. Three different
models can be used:

Technical Description
429
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 447/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

(( ) )
Adiabatic Route: γ  −1
P out 
γ 
ΔT   = T  out  − T  in  = η  ⋅ T  in  ⋅ −1 Eq. 4.178
P in 

Polytropic Route: n  −1

(( ) )
ΔT   = T  out  − T  in  = T  in  ⋅ P out  n 
−1 Eq. 4.179
P in 

Mollier Route (Isoentropic): S ( P  , T   ) = S ( P  , T   ) Eq. 4.180

out  out  in  in 

where

γ ( P in , T  in ) + γ ( P out , T  out ) is the average value of  γ 
γ  =
2
is the ratio of specific heats
γ  = C  p 
C V  

n ( P in , T  in ) + n ( P out , T  out ) is the average value of n 
n  =
2
n  1 γ  is the polytropic coefficient
= ⋅
n  − 1 η  γ  − 1
S  is the specific entropy BTU   J  
lb  ⋅ F   kg  ⋅ K 
o 

Notes:
• Only a fraction η  of the head is converted to power. When using the adiabatic route, the energy
that is not converted to power is assumed to be converted to fluid heat. The usual adiabatic
temperature decrease is multiplied by a factor η  ≤ 1.
n 
• The polytropic route PV   = constant can be used to model constant pressure ( n  = 0), constant
temperature ( n  = 1), constant enthalpy ( n  = γ ) and constant volume ( n  = ∞ ) changes as well
as intermediate routes. PIPESIM uses a value of n that is a function of the efficiency ( η ) and the
specific heat ratio ( γ ). This value can only be used when η  < γ  / ( γ  − 1).

• In the special case when the efficiency η  = 1, the polytropic coefficient equals the specific heat
ratio n  = γ  and the polytropic and adiabatic formulas are the same.
• The Mollier Route can only be used in compositional models; the PIPESIM blackoil model does
not calculate entropy.

Technical Description
430 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 448/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Engine keywords
See expander keywords (p.620)

4.1.5 Multiphase Boosting Technology

Multiphase boosting technology (also referred to as multiphase pumping technology) for the oil and
gas industry has been in development since the early 1980s, and is now rapidly gaining acceptance
as a tool to optimize multiphase production systems (Oxley, Ward and Derks 1999). Particularly for 
the development of satellite fields, multiphase boosting has been recognized as a promising
technology: rather than separation, gas compression, liquid pumping and use of dual flow lines back
to the host facility, multiphase boosting enables the full (non-separated) well stream to be boosted in
a single machine. Besides the thus realized simplification of the production system, the potential cost
reductions could make development of marginal fields economic.
Since 1990, thousands of multiphase boosters have been installed worldwide, with the vast majority
of the installations based onshore or offshore topsides. Over the years, the development of 
multiphase boosting has led to three types of boosters being commercially available:
• twin screw type multiphase boosters
• progressing cavity type multiphase boosters
• helico-axial type multiphase boosters
The first two types mentioned belong to the category of positive displacement type pumps and the
third type to the category of dynamic type pumps.

Traditional approach
1. The incoming fluid is separated into its constituent liquid
and gas phases.
2. The separated liquids are pumped up to the required
pressure and exported via the liquid export line.
3. Separated gas is compressed up to the required
pressure and exported via the gas export line.
Alternative approach
1. The incoming fluid is separated into its constituent liquid
and gas phases.
2. The separated liquids are pumped up to the required
pressure and separated gas is compressed up to the
required pressure.

3. The two phases

multiphase are
export recombined and exported via a
line.

Technical Description
431
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 449/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Multiphase boosting
1. The incoming fluid is directly boosted up to the required
pressure without separation of the gas and liquid
phases.

2. It is exported via a multiphase export line.

Figure 4.8. Multiphase boosting versus Traditional approaches

Multiphase boosters are pumps/compressors that can accommodate fluids composed of 100% liquid
to 100% gas, and anywhere in between. Although commonly referred to as multiphase pumps, the
terminology used in this document is ‘multiphase booster’ to recognize the fact that also 100% gas
can be handled by this equipment (albeit with some restrictions, as outlined in later sections of this
document). The figure above depicts the difference between multiphase boosting technology and the
more traditional technology of separation, pumping and compression.

The rationale for employing multiphase boosters stems from two basic factors:
1. Production Enhancement; accelerated and/or incremental hydrocarbon production as a result of 
lowering the backpressure on the well(s);
2. Pressure Boosting; increasing fluid pressure for transportation over long distances or to move fluid
from low pressure systems to higher pressure systems.
In many cases, there will be a combined effect of the two factors, for example, lowering the
backpressure on a well by use of a multiphase booster provides at same time a higher pressure
available at the inlet to the flowline.
To demonstrate the principle of multiphase boosting, take the example of a well which is connected
using a flowline and riser to the inlet separator on the host facility. See the following diagram.

Technical Description
432 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 450/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.9. Simplified production system

Based on estimates of the pressure drop across the tubing string, and given the production
characteristics of the formation and the IPR of the well, the curve of tubing-head pressure pth against
rate for an individual well can be obtained; this curve is known as the tubing-head pressure (THP)
curve.
Similarly, based on estimates of the pressure drop across flowline and riser, and given the pressure
at the inlet separator of the host facility, the curve of required flowline inlet pressure against rate can
be obtained; this curve is known as the outflow curve.
Figure 3 demonstrates the principle of tubing-head pressure curve and outflow curve; the point of 
intersection of the two curves is the system operating point, i.e. pressure and production rate at the
wellhead.

Figure 4.10. Production system analysis: THP curve and outflow curve

From Figure 3, it can be seen that the system operating point involves a tubing head pressure of 39
bara and production rate of 5 kg/s. We can however also see from the THP curve that the flowing
potential of the well is far greater than the production rate of 5 kg/s, should the back pressure on the
well be lower than the 39 bara. Assuming we could install a booster that allows us to provide a ‘boost’
of 20 [bar] to the well fluids directly downstream of the wellhead, the outflow curve shown in Figure
3 will change to that shown in Figure 4. The new system operating point involves a tubing head
pressure of 24 bara and production rate of 10 kg/s, that is through the boosting of the well stream
production has increased by 100%.

Technical Description
433
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 451/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.11. Production system analysis: the effect of multiphase boosting visualized 

Through the type of analysis outlined in Figure 3 and Figure 4, the effect of multiphase boosting on
production system operating point (tubing head pressure, production rate) can readily be established,
as can be the multiphase booster operating point and power requirement.

Positive Displacement Type

Positive displacement type pumps work on the basis of pressure being added hydrostatically rather 
than dynamically, which results in these pumps being less sensitive to fluid density than dynamic type
pumps. As a result of this, positive displacement type pumps appear to figure higher in surface
applications than dynamic type pumps, because with surface applications fluids tend to show higher 
gas fractions and a greater tendency for density change than in subsea applications (Butler 1999).
 Although initially piston type pumps were also considered for use as multiphase boosters, the
commercial development of positive displacement has concentrated on two types only:
1. twin screw type multiphase booster 
2. progressing cavity type multiphase booster 
The majority of positive displacement type multiphase boosters on the market are of the twin screw
type, with the remainder being of the progressing cavity type. Within the Shell EP Group of Operating
Companies, no progressing cavity type multiphase boosters have been installed thus far. This chapter 
will therefore predominantly address the working principle of twin screw type multiphase boosters,
but mention will be made of the progressing cavity type also.

Technical Description
434
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 452/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Twin Screw Type

The twin screw type booster, also referred to as two-spindle screw pump, works on the basis of liquid
carried between the screw threads of two intermeshing feed screws and displaced axially as the
screws rotate and mesh. In principle, the intermeshing screws form chambers (Karassik et al. 1986),
which are:
• filled with fluid at the pump suction side;
• closed to capture the amount of fluid that has entered the chamber at pump suction;
• transported to the discharge side of the pump;
• opened to the outlet system once the chamber has reached the pump discharge port.
The following figure shows an example of a twin screw type pump.

Figure 4.12. Twin screw type pump

It should be noted that, unlike screw type compressors, the volume of the chambers is not reduced
on its way from pump suction side to pump discharge side, that is there is no in-built compression in
the twin screw type multiphase boosters. Pressure buildup by the twin screw type multiphase booster 
is entirely caused by the fact that a definite amount of fluid is delivered into the outlet system with
every revolution of the feed screws; the pressure developed at pump discharge is thus solely the
result of resistance to flow in the outlet system. However, due to the pressure differential between
pump discharge and pump suction, an internal leakage in the pumping elements results and causes
a pressure gradient across the moving chambers. This internal leakage causes the pump net flow to
be less than its theoretical capacity, as demonstrated in pump performance curves (see the typical
pump performance curves shown below).

Technical Description
435 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 453/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.13. Pump performance curves (typical)

 As can be seen from the typical pump performance curves above, pump flow rate is dependent on
pump differential pressure: the higher the pump differential pressure, the higher the internal leakage,
and thus the lower pump flow rate.
The theoretical capacity of the pump, that is the flow rate if no internal leakage is present, is the flow
rate found for zero pump differential pressure – for the pump represented in the typical pump
performance curves, the theoretical flow rate is 500 m3/h; the difference between theoretical flow rate
and actual flow rate is the internal leakage, also called ‘pump slip’. As an example, for the pump
represented in the typical pump performance curves, GVF=0%, the actual flow rate for pump
differential pressure 40 bar is 400 m3/h , that is pump slip is (500 – 400) = 100 m3/h. Given the relative
insensitivity of flow rate to differential pressure, especially for higher GVF, the twin screw multiphase
booster is sometimes referred to as a ‘constant flow rate’ pump.
 As can also be seen from the typical pump performance curves, pump flow rate is dependent on GVF
also, whereas the effect of GVF on pump shaft power is less pronounced.
Whereas the typical pump performance curves may suggest that an unlimited variety of twin screw
multiphase pumps is available to cover an unlimited amount of (differential pressure / flow rate) -
combinations, in practice however a number of physical limitations applies:
• pump differential pressure is typically limited to 70 bar to avoid excessive deflection of feed screws
and possible contact between rotating screws and stator housing;

Technical Description
436 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 454/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• pump flow rate (total volumetric flow rate at pump suction) at present limited to approximately
2000 m3/h per single pump;
• gas volume fraction at pump suction typically limited to 95% maximum (for GVF>95%, some form
of liquid recirculation is typically required to maintain GVF-suction at 95% maximum) ;

• pump inlet pressure and outlet pressures restricted by casing design pressure and seal design
pressure.

Progressing Cavity Type

The progressing cavity type pump (also known as single-rotor screw pump) operates on the basis of 
an externally threaded screw, also called rotor, turning inside an internally threaded stator (see Figure
7 ). The most simple configuration is the one whereby there is one lead on the rotor and two leads
on the stator, commonly referred to as a 1:2 ratio element profile. Other configurations are also
feasible, provided that the stator has one more lead than the rotor (Mirza 1999).

Figure 4.14. Moyno® progressing cavity pump

 As with the screw type pump, as the rotor rotates within the stator, chambers are formed and filled
with fluid and progress from the suction side of the pump to the discharge side of the pump conveying
the process fluid. The continuous seal line between the rotor and the stator helix keeps the fluid
moving steadily at a fixed flow rate proportional to the pump rotational speed. Application of the
progressing cavity type pump for multiphase boosting has been less widespread than the twin screw
type multiphase booster, and flow rates and differential pressures are typically lower than those
achievable with the twin screw type. Claimed to be the largest progressing cavity type pump for 
multiphase applications is Moyno’s R&M Tri-Phaze® System, capable of transferring multiphase
flows up to 29,000 bbl/day (192 m3/h) at differential pressures up to 300 psi (20.7 bar). Through the
installations of various pumps in series/parallel arrangement, higher flow rates and higher differential
pressures are achievable, however at the expense of complexity (Mirza 1999).
Given their wider operating range and wider established application in the oil and gas industry, the
modeling of positive displacement type multiphase boosters in PIPESIM has been limited to the twin
screw type multiphase booster only.

Technical Description
437 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 455/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Dynamic Type
Dynamic type pumps work on the principle of pressure being raised by adding kinetic energy to the
fluid, which is then converted to pressure. The actual increase in pressure is directly proportional to
the density of the pumped fluid, that is the higher the fluid density, the higher the pressure increase.
Because of this, dynamic type pumps are more sensitive to fluid density than positive displacement
type pumps, and tend therefore to be used in applications with lower maximum gas volume fractions
than positive displacement type pumps, for example in subsea applications.
The commercial development of dynamic type multiphase boosters has concentrated on the helico-
axial type, based on helico-axial hydraulics developed and licensed by Institute François du Petrole
(IFP). For very high gas volume fractions (GVF>95%), there is also the contra-rotating axial (CRA)
machine, originally developed by Framo Engineering AS and Shell.
The design of the helico-axial type pump has further concentrated on the driver mechanism for subsea
use, and led to the availability of electric motor driven units as well as hydraulic turbine driven units.
For onshore or offshore topsides applications, other driver types can also be used.

Helico-Axial Type
The helico-axial type multiphase booster features a number of individual booster stages, each
consisting of an impeller mounted on a single rotating shaft, followed by a fixed diffuser. In essence,
the impeller imparts kinetic energy to the fluid, which is converted to pressure in the diffuser. The
impeller blades have a typical helical shape, and profile of the open type impeller and diffuser blade
arrangement are specifically designed to prevent the separation of the multiphase mixture inside the
pump (de Marolles and de Salis, 1999).
The following figure shows an example of a helico-axial pump stage.

Figure 4.15. Helico-axial pump stage

The boosting capabilities of the helico-axial type booster are a function of GVF-suction and suction
pressure, as well as speed, number of impeller stages and impeller size. See Figure 9. The quoted
flow rates and speed limitation represent present technology status.

Technical Description
438 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 456/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.16. Helico-axial type multiphase booster – Pressure boosting potential 

 As can be seen from Figure 9, the pressure boosting capability drastically reduces for higher GVF.
 Also, for reduced speed or reduced number of stages, the pressure boosting capability will be less
than the maximum shown in Figure 9. For a given pump with given number of stages, speed and
impeller diameter, pump performance curves can be provided as shown in Figure 10. These curves
are valid for given GVF-suction, p-suction and fluid density only; for differing GVF-suction, p-suction and fluid
density, new performance curves will apply.

Figure 4.17. Pump performance curve (typical)

Practical operating limits of the helico-axial type multiphase booster are (Siep-RTS 1998):
• pump differential pressure typically limited to 70 bar 
• pump flow rate (total volumetric flow rate at pump suction) at present limited to approximately
1500 m3/h per single pump;
• gas volume fraction at pump suction typically limited to 95% maximum;
• pump inlet pressure 3.4 bara minimum;
• pump outlet pressure restricted by casing design pressure and seal design pressure.

Technical Description
439
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 457/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Contra-Rotating Axial Type

The CRA operates on the basis of axial compressor theory, but rather than having one rotor and a
set of stator vanes, the CRA employs two contra-rotating rotors. The inner rotor consists of several
stages mounted on the outside of an inner cylinder. The outer rotor consists of several stages on the
inside of a concentric, larger diameter cylinder. See Figure 11.

Figure 4.18. Contra-rotating axial (CRA) compressor 

The exact mechanism underlying pressure buildup inside the CRA compressor have not yet been
fully understood, nor are sufficiently mature design rules available for the scaleup of CRA
performance to larger flow rates.
Flow rates that can be handled by the CRA are of same order of magnitude as for helico-axial type
multiphase booster, however achievable differential pressures (maximum 20 bar) and realized
efficiencies (approximately 25%) are significantly less than what’s achievable with conventional
boosting systems.
Given their wider operating range and wider established application in the oil and gas industry, the
modeling of dynamic type multiphase boosters in PIPESIM has been limited to the helico-axial type
multiphase booster only.

Alternative approach
The alternative approach described in Figure 1 has also been implemented in PIPESIM. This generic
booster splits the fluid into liquid and gas and pumps the liquid and compresses the gas. Efficiency
values for the compressor efficiency have been obtained from field data and are available in the help
system.

Technical Description
440 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 458/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Guide to Multiphase Booster Efficiencies

Tables 1 and 2 gives guidelines on the (pump and compressor) efficiencies to enter in the generic
multiphase booster module, when the generic model is needed to simulate a Helico-Axial Booster 
(p.441) or Twin Screw Booster (p.441).

Helico-Axial
The following table gives guidelines on the efficiencies to enter in the generic multiphase booster 
module to simulate a Helico-Axial multiphase booster.

FLUID GVF (%) APPROXIMATE PUMP APPROXIMATE COMPRESSOR

EFFICIENCY (%) EFFICIENCY (%) (see 2) (p.442)
0 (see 1) (p.442) 10 10-100
10 50 20 -100
20 40 60-100
30 40 80-100
40 30-40 80-100
50 40(50) (see 3) (p.442) 40 (20) (see 3) (p.442)
60 40(50) (see 3) (p.442) 30(20) (see 3) (p.442)
70 30 60
80 30 50
90 20 70
100 10 100
Table 4.3: Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster 

Twin screw
The following table gives guidelines on the efficiencies to enter in the generic multiphase booster 
module to simulate a Twin Screw multiphase booster.

FLUID GVF (%) APPROXIMATE PUMP APPROXIMATE COMPRESSOR

EFFICIENCY (%) EFFICIENCY (%) (see 2) (p.442)
0 5 20 -100
10 30 20 -100
20 30 70 -100

30 30 80 -100
40 30 90
50 40(50) (see 3) (p.442) 40(20) (see 3) (p.442)
60 40 50
70 30 70

Technical Description
441
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 459/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

80 20 60
90 10 30
100 (see 4) (p.442) 10 100
Table 4.4: Twin Screw Multiphase Booster 

See also the Twin screw curve format (p.100) description.

Notes:
1. Helico-Axial multiphase booster not recommended for pure liquid operations.
2. When using fluids with high liquid content the compressor efficiency has little effect as long as the
compressor efficiency is within the range indicated.
3. Two sets of pump and compressor efficiencies are valid for fluids with these gas volume fractions.
4. Twin screw multiphase booster not recommended for pure gas operations

4.2 Heat Transfer Modelling

4.2.1 Energy Equation for Steady-State Flow
PIPESIM uses the first law of thermodynamics to perform a rigorous heat transfer balance on each
pipe segment. The first law of thermodynamics is the mathematical formulation of the principle of 
conservation of energy applied to a process occurring in a closed system (a system of constant mass
m). It equates the total energy change of the system to the sum of the heat added to the system and
the work done by the system. For steady-state flow, it connects the change in properties between the
streams flowing into and out of an arbitrary control volume (pipe segment) with the heat and work
quantities across the boundaries of the control volume (pipe segment). For a multiphase fluid in
steady-state flow, the energy equation is given by:

(
Δ H  +
1 2
)
v  + gz  dm  = ∑ δQ  − δ W  s 
2 m 
Eq. 4.181

where the specific enthalpy:

H   = U  + PV   Eq. 4.182
is a state property of the system since the internal energy U  the pressure P  and the volume V  are
state properties of the system.
It is clear from the left-hand side of equation 4.181 (p.442), that the change in total energy is the sum
of the change in enthalpy energy,
Δ H dm  = Δ (U  + PV  )dm  Eq. 4.183
the change in gravitational potential energy:
ΔE  = Δ ( gz )dm 
P 
Eq. 4.184

and the change in total kinetic energy (based on the mixture velocity v m )

Technical Description
442 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 460/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ΔE K  = Δ ( 12 v  )dm  ≈ 0
2
m 
Eq. 4.185

which is assumed to be negligible.

On the right-hand side of equation 4.181 (p.442), ∑ δQ includes all the heat transferred to the control

volume (pipe segment) and δ W  s  represents the shaft work, that is work transmitted across the
boundaries of the control volume (pipe segment) by a rotating or reciprocating shaft.

4.2.2 Heat Transfer Coefficient

Steady state heat transfer between the fluid inside a pipe (flowline, riser or tubing) and its surroundings
occurs due to the difference between the bulk fluid temperature T  b  and the ambient temperature
T  a . In the case of a flowline or riser, the ambient temperature is the temperature of the ambient fluid
(air or water) moving above the mud line. In the case of a tubing, the ambient temperature is the
ground temperature at a distance far from the well, given by the geothermal gradient at the tubing
depth. The rate at which heat is transferred depends on various thermal resistances such as:
• Inside fluid film (which is used to model heat transfer between a moving fluid and the pipe wall)
• Wax layers on the inside of the pipe wall
• Pipe wall and surrounding layers (for example coatings, fluid filled annuli)
• Ground and surrounding medium (air or sea)
The heat transfer Q  per unit length of pipe can be expressed as:

Q  = UA(T  b  − T  a ) Eq. 4.186

where A = π D o  is a reference area based on the pipe outside diameter and U  is the overall heat
transfer coefficient. The overall heat transfer coefficient can be calculated from the heat transfer 
coefficients for each resistance, which in turn can be found from theoretical heat transfer models. The
method of calculation depends on whether the resistances are in series, parallel, or both.

Resistances in series
For resistances in series, (for example pipe coatings, see Fig 4.19 (p.444)) the temperature
difference can be written as the sum of the temperature differences across each resistance:

T  a  − T  b  = ∑ ΔT  i  Eq. 4.187

i 

Therefore
1 = − A ∑ ΔT   = ∑ 1
U   Q  i  i  i 
Eq. 4.188
h 
i 

Here h i  is the heat transfer coefficient for resistance i  given by:
1 A
= − ΔT  i  Eq. 4.189
h i  Q 

Technical Description
443
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 461/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.19. Pipeline and Layers

Resistances in parallel
For resistances in parallel, (for example partially buried pipes, see Fig 4.20 (p.445)) the overall heat
transfer can be written as the sum of the heat transfer through each resistance:

Q  = ∑ Q i  = ∑ U  i A(T  b  − T  a ) Eq. 4.190

i  i 

Therefore the overall heat transfer coefficient can be found by summing the heat transfer coefficients
for each resistance in parallel:

U   = ∑ U  i  Eq. 4.191

i 

Technical Description
444
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 462/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Figure 4.20. Burial configurations

Heat transfer models

Heat transfer models are required for:
• radial heat transfer between a moving fluid and the pipe wall, see Inside film coefficient (p.446).
• radial heat transfer through a conductive layer (p.450) , such as internal wax layers, the pipe wall
and insulation.
• radial heat transfer through a convective layer (p.452) , such as a fluid filled annulus.
• heat transfer through the ground
• between the pipe and the surface for buried and partially buried horizontal flowlines (p.453)
• radially, between the pipe and the far field geothermal temperature gradient for vertical wells
(p.457)
• heat transfer through the ambient fluid
• between the ground and the ambient fluid for buried and partially buried horizontal flowlines
• between the pipe and the ambient fluid for partially buried and fully exposed horizontal flowlines
• between the pipe and the ambient fluid for fully exposed vertical risers

Technical Description
445 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 463/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note
Heat transfer coefficients are referenced to the pipe outside diameter. To allow the value to be
reported at a different reference point the HEAT HTCRD (p.665) keyword can be used from the EKT
(p.84)

4.2.3 Internal Fluid Film Heat Transfer Coefficient

 A number of inside film coefficient (IFC) correlations are available in the PIPESIM engines. This heat
transfer coefficient accounts for resistance to heat flow between the bulk of the fluid and the inside
of the pipe wall. A Nusselt number correlation is selected depending on whether the flow is laminar,
turbulent or in the transition region.

KREITH8

Note: This is currently the default method in PIPESIM.

First, liquid and gas Reynolds numbers are calculated based on the superficial velocities v SL  and
v SG :

 ρ L  v SL  D 
ReSL  = Eq. 4.192
μ L 

 ρ G v SG D 
ReSG  = Eq. 4.193
μ G 

where  ρ  isgas

liquid and the phase
density, μ  the viscosity, D the pipe diameter and the subscripts L  and G  refer to the
properties.
 A total Reynolds number is then obtained:

ReTOTAL  = ReSL  + ReSG  Eq. 4.194

 A Prandtl number is then calculated using fluid mixture properties:

μ m c  p 
m  Eq. 4.195
Prm  =
k m 

where c  p  is the specific heat capacity, k  the thermal conductivity.

The mixture thermal conductivity is given by:
1
k m  =
H  L  (1 − H  L  ) Eq. 4.196
+
k L  k  g 

amd the mixture heat capacity:

Technical Description
446 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 464/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

C  p  = H  L  C  p 

m  L 
(
+ 1 − H  L  C  p  ) G 
Eq. 4.197

where H is the holdup.

For turbulent flow (ReTOTAL  ≥ 6000 ):

0.7
Nu 1 P 
Turb 
= 0.023ReTOTAL 
0.8
Pr
0.33
( 1+
D 
L 
( ) ) Eq. 4.198

For laminar flow (ReTOTAL  ≤ 2000 ):

2.645
( )( ))
SD  D 
Nu 1 P  ≡ − 0.25ReTOTAL  Pr ln 1 − ; L 
L  ≤ 10
Pr
0.167
ReTOTAL  Pr (
D 
L 
D 

Nu 1 P  = MD  ( D 
− 10 ) SD 
( L D  − 10) LD 
L 
10 < Eq. 4.199
≤ 30
≡ −
1− Nu 1 P  + 30 − 10 Nu 1 P  ;

{
Turb  Nu 1 P  L  − 10
30 D 
1
L 
LD 
Nu 1 P  ≡ 1.86 ReTOTAL  Pr
D 
L 
( ) 3
;
D 
> 30

where the superscripts SD, MD and LD stand for short duct, medium duct and long duct, respectively.

For transition flow (2000 ≤ ReTOTAL  ≤ 6000 ):

(
ln Nu 
1 P Turb  ) (
−ln Nu 
1 P Lam  )
ReTOTAL  (
ln Re
max )−ln (Remin ) Eq. 4.200
Nu 1 P  = Nu  1 P Lam  2000
( )
Note:  As the Reynolds number decreases, the laminar flow Nusselt number is approaches 4. So if 
the Reynolds number is less than 2000, then PIPESIM limits the Reynolds number to a minimum of 
4.

For transition flow (2000 < ReTOTAL  < 6000), PIPESIM uses linear interpolation to find the Nusselt
number:
Reference: Kreith (p.547)

Single Phase General Correlations

If the flow regime is mist, single gas phase or froth then the fluid is considered to be a single phase
gas and the superficial Reynolds number is:

 ρ G v SG D 
ReS  = ReSG  = Eq. 4.201
μ G 

Technical Description
447 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 465/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

and the Prandtl number is:

μ G c  p 
G  Eq. 4.202
Pr = PrG  =
k G 

where  ρ  is the density, μ  the viscosity, v  the velocity, c  p  the specific heat capacity, k  the thermal
conductivity, D the pipe diameter and the subscript SG refers to the superficial gas phase properties.
If the flow regime is otherwise, then the fluid is considered to be a single phase liquid and the Reynolds
number is:

 ρ L  v SL  D 
ReS  = ReSL  = Eq. 4.203
μ L 

and the Prandtl number is:

μ L  c  p L  Eq. 4.204

Pr = Pr L  =
k L 

where the subscript SL  refers to the superficial liquid phase properties.
The following minimum and maximum superficial Reynolds numbers before entering the laminar-
turbulent transition region are defined:

ReS  = 2000 Eq. 4.205

min

ReS  = 6000 Eq. 4.206

max

Sieder and Tate

For turbulent flow (ReS  > ReS  ):

max
0.14
Nu 1 PTurb  =
4/5
0.023ReS  Pr
1/3
( ) μ 
μ W  
Eq. 4.207

For laminar flow (Re ≤ ReS  ):

max
1

( )
D  μ  0.14
Nu 1 PLam  = 1.86ReS  Pr
L  ( ) 3

μ W  
Eq. 4.208

where L is the length of the pipe and the subscript W  refers to water properties. The viscosity μ  is
either the liquid or gas viscosity depending on the flow regime (as described above).
Reference: Sieder and Tate (p.552)

Technical Description
448 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 466/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Single phase Inside Film Coefficient

If the flow regime is mist, single gas phase or froth then the fluid is considered to be a single phase
gas and the Inside Film Coefficient is:

k G Nu 1 P 
Eq. 4.209
h i 1 P  = D 
If the flow regime is otherwise, then the fluid is considered to be a single phase liquid and the inside
film coefficient is:

k L  Nu 1 P 
h i  = Eq. 4.210
1 P  D 

Multiphase Correlations
If the flow is multiphase then the void fraction is given by

Av 
ϕ  = G  Eq. 4.211
Av G  + Av L 

where the cross-sectional area of the pipe:

2
π D 
A= Eq. 4.212
4
The gas-weighted two phase fluid thermal conductivity is defined as:

k 2 P  = ϕk G  + (1 − ϕ )k L  Eq. 4.213

The two phase inside film coefficient for the correlations below (unless otherwise stated) is defined
as:
Nu 2 P k 2 P 
h i  = Eq. 4.214
2 P  D 

Kaminsky
For turbulent flow (Re ≥ 2300 ):

ΔP 2Pf  
h i  = h i  S  Eq. 4.215
2 P  1 P SL  ΔP 1Pf  

The single phase turbulent heat transfer is estimated by the Sieder-Tate correlation (p.448).
For horizontal (i.e. if the pipe angle | β  | < β swap ) stratified flow, the wetting of the pipe wall is
calculated from
S  = πDθ  Eq. 4.216
where θ  is the wetted wall fraction given by Grolman's correlation (p.544) :

Technical Description
449
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 467/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2 0.8

{ }
0.15 0.25

θ  = θ 0 ( )
σ W  
σ 
+
 ρ G  1
 ρ L  + ρ G  cos( β )
{ ρ L  u LS D 
σ 
} u GS 
2
Eq. 4.217
(1 − H  L  )  gD 

in which the minimum wetted wall fraction θ 0 is approximated by:

0.374
θ 0 ≈ 0.624H  L  Eq. 4.218

For all other types of flow, heat transfer it is reasonable to assume that heat transfer is
circumferentially uniform (i.e. S  = 1).
For laminar flow (Re < 2300 ):

(2 − H  L  )h i 1PSL 
h i  = 2 Eq. 4.219
2 P 
3

H  L 
The single phase laminar heat transfer is estimated by the Sieder-Tate correlation (p.448).
Reference: Kaminsky (p.546)

4.2.4 Calculation of Conductive Heat Transfer Coefficients

Brill and Mukherjee (p.540) give a formula for radial heat transfer Q  per unit length of pipe through
a conductive layer:

Q ln (r o  / r i )

ΔT   = T  o  − T  i  = − Eq. 4.220
2 πk 
where
k  is the conductivity of the layer.

r i  is the inner radius of the layer 

r o  is the outer radius of the layer 

T  i  is the temperatures at the inside edge of the layer 

is the temperatures at outside edge of the layer 

T  o 

This equation can be used to calculate the heat transfer coefficient for a conductive layer:
1 A A ln (r o  / r i )
= − ΔT   = ⋅ Eq. 4.221
h  Q  2 π  k 
where

Technical Description
450 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 468/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

A D o  is the radius of the reference area (normally the pipe outside radius)
=
2 π  2

Wax Heat Transfer Coefficient

4.221 (p.450) can be used for heat transfer through a wax layer on the inside wall of the pipe, where

k  = k wax  is the conductivity of the wax layer.

D i  is the inner radius of the wax layer (equal to the pipe inner radius minus the wax
r i  = − r wax  thickness)
2

D i  is the outer radius of the wax layer (equal to the pipe inner radius)
r o  =
2

Pipe wall heat transfer coefficient

4.221 (p.450) can be used for heat transfer through the pipe wall, where

k  = k  pipe  is the conductivity of the pipe wall.

D i  is the inner radius of the pipe

r i  =
2

D o  is the outer radius of the pipe

r o  =
2

Conductive layer heat transfer coefficient

4.221 (p.450) can be used for heat transfer through conductive layers, such as foam insulation or 
cement, where

k  = k n  is the conductivity of the n  th layer 

D ni  is the inner radius of the n  th layer 

r i  =
2

D no  is the outer radius of the n  th layer 

r o  =
2

Technical Description
451
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 469/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4.2.5 Calculation of Convective Heat Transfer Coefficients

Convective heat transfer can occur in a number of places in a well and surface network, across a
fluid filled annulus; between a pipe or surface and the air or sea. Free (or natural) convection occurs
when the bulk fluid is at rest and convection is driven by buoyancy effects alone. Forced convection
occurs when the fluid is moving, which will increase the rate at which heat is transferred.
The heat transfer coefficient for free convection at a wall is given in terms of the Nusselt number 
(Nu ), the fluid conductivity (k ) and a length scale (L  ):
k  ⋅ Nu 
h  = Eq. 4.222
L 
The Nusselt number can be found experimentally, depending on the geometry of the convective
surfaces. It also depends on the fluid properties, which are encapsulated in two dimensionless
numbers, the Prandtl number (Pr ) representing the ratio of velocity and temperature gradients:
c  p μ 
Pr = Eq. 4.223
k 
and the Grashof number representing the ratio of buoyancy to viscous forces:
3 2
L   ρ  βg ΔT  
Gr  = 2
Eq. 4.224
μ 

β  Fluid thermal expansion coefficient K  −1

μ  Fluid dynamic viscosity −1 −1

kg  ⋅ m  ⋅ s 

 ρ  Fluid density −3

kg  ⋅ m 

c  p  Fluid heat capacity W   ⋅ kg −1

k  Fluid thermal conductivity −1 −1

W   ⋅ m  ⋅ s 

Fluid properties are calculated at a film temperature T  film  half way between the wall temperature
and the bulk fluid temperature:
T  film  = (T  wall  + T  f  ) / 2 Eq. 4.225

The wall temperature and bulk fluid temperature are used to calculate the temperature difference in
the formula for the Grashof number:

ΔT   = | T  f   − T  wall  | Eq. 4.226

Because the fluid properties and Grashof numbers are functions of the wall temperatures, the heat
transfer coefficient is also a function of the wall temperatures. The heat loss calculation therefore
needs to be solved iteratively.

Technical Description
452 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 470/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Convection in a fluid filled vertical annulus

PIPESIM can model the heat transfer in a fluid filled annulus by free convection. The heat transfer 
coefficient can be determined from the heat transfer coefficients at the inner and outer walls:
1 1 1
= + Eq. 4.227
h annulus  h inner  h outer 
For vertical pipes (angle  ≥ 45 ° ), the Nusselt number is given by Eckert and Jackson (1950)
(p.543) (quoted in Kreith and Bohn(1997) (p.547)) in terms of the Rayleigh number (Ra ):
0.25 9
Nu  = 0.555Ra  for Ra  ≤ 10 Eq. 4.228
0.4 9
Nu  = 0.021Ra  for Ra  > 10 Eq. 4.229

where
Ra  = Pr Gr  Eq. 4.230
The bulk fluid temperature is assumed to be the average of the annulus wall temperatures:

T  f   = (T  inner  + T  outer ) / 2 Eq. 4.231

Convective Heat transfer through fluid filled annuli can be modeled by the use of the EKT (p.84).
Refer to the Expert Mode Keyword Reference section on fluid coats (p.670).

Convection in a fluid filled horizontal annulus

PIPESIM uses the same equations to calculate the heat transfer for a horizontal fluid annulus as for 
a vertical annulus. except that the Nuuslet number is given by:
0.25
Nu  = 0.53Ra  Eq. 4.232

Fully exposed pipe

For a flowline or riser exposed to the sea or the air, the “ambient” heat transfer coefficient can be
calculated by summing the free and forced convection heat transfer coefficients:

h a  = h  forced  + h  free  Eq. 4.233

For forced convection, the heat transfer coefficient depends on the Reynolds number of the flow

Nu  forced  = (0.4Re )Pr0.4

0.5 0.67
+ 0.06Re Eq. 4.234

4.2.6 Heat Transfer Between a Horizontal Flowline and the Ground Surface

Fully Buried Ground Heat Transfer Coefficient

The fully buried heat transfer coefficient for a flowline is evaluated by determining a conduction shape
factor to account for the geometrical and thermal effects of the burial configuration. Once the shape
factor is known, the ground heat tr ansfer coefficient is calculated f rom:

Technical Description
453
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 471/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

k  g S 
h  g  = Eq. 4.235
R 
where R is a chosen reference length. By default, in PIPESIM, this is the outer radius of the pipe. The
shape factor used differs depending on the partial burial option (p.149) that is selected.

 A pseudo film coefficient is then added in series in order to model the ambient fluid moving above
ground level:
1 1 1
= + Eq. 4.236
h ext  h  g  h a 

2009 Method
The conduction shape factor is obtained from a solution to the steady-state heat conduction equation
(the Laplace equation) with convective boundary conditions on the pipe inside wall and ground
surfaces:

B  p a bur 
S  = 2 2 1

( ) ( )
B  p  B  p  2 Eq. 4.237
cosh α 0 − B  p a bur  α 0 + − 1+
B  g  B  g 

where
α 0 = − cosh
−1
( − Z  
R 
) Eq. 4.238

is a auxiliary geometrical quantity and

2
Z  
a bur  = − sinh α 0 = −1 R 
( )
is a scale factor for bicylindrical coordinates and
Eq. 4.239

U  ipc R 
B  p  = Eq. 4.240
k  g 

is the Biot number of the pipe and

h a R 
B  g  = Eq. 4.241
k  g 

is the Biot number of the ground. U  ipc  is the combined heat transfer coefficient of the inside film, pipe,
coatings (and wax)
1 1 1 1
= + + Eq. 4.242
U  ipc  h i  h wax  h  pipe &layers 

Equation 4.237 (p.454) is not valid when the pipe&layers surface is just touching the ground surface
(Z/R=1). In such a case, the shape factor is calculated from the following asymptotic expression

Technical Description
454
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 472/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

B  p 
S  ∼ 1

(1+
B  p 
B  g 
)( )
1 + 2 B  p 
2 Eq. 4.243

We obtain the ground heat transfer coefficient from:

k  g S 
h  g  = Eq. 4.244
R 

Note: This is the default method in PIPESIM. The shape factor above is accurate to within 2.5% of 
the numerical simulation studies given by Schneider (p.552)

1983 & 2000 Methods

The conduction shape factor is obtained from a solution to the steady-state heat conduction equation
(the Laplace equation) with isothermal boundary conditions on the pipe inside wall and ground
surfaces:
2 π 
S  =
cosh
−1
( Z  
R  pipe &layers  ) Eq. 4.245

Reference: Kreith (p.547)

Partially Buried Ground Heat Transfer Coefficient

To calculate the overall heat transfer coefficient for a partially buried pipeline, buried and exposed
heat transfer
and the groundcoefficients
conduction must be factors
shape calculated
usedand combined
differ in parallel
depending . The method
on the partial of combination
burial option (p.90) that
is selected.

2009 Method
1. A fully exposed pseudo pipe of the same diameter is created and an overall heat transfer 
coefficient (U  exp ) is calculated using the methods described in the sections above.

2. A partially buried conduction shape factor is calculated using the methods described in the
sections above. The shape factor is computed from

Technical Description
455 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 473/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

( )

{
-1
1 − A part 
2 B  p a  part tan
1 + A part 
; − 1 < A part  < 1
B  p  2
π  1 + 1−A

( )
B  g   part 

B  p a  part 
;
S  =
(
π  1 +
B  p 

B  g 
) A part  = 1 Eq. 4.246

2 B  p a  part tanh
-1
( A part  − 1

A part  + 1
) A part  > 1
;
B  p  2
π  1 + B  −1
( )
A part 
 g 

where
−1

A part  = 1 +( B  p 
B  g 
)( cos β 0 + B  p a  part  π  + β 0 − ( ) ) B  p 
B  g 
Eq. 4.247

is an auxiliary geometrical quantity and

2
a  part  = − sin β 0 = 1 −
Z  
R 
( ) Eq. 4.248

is a scale factor for bicylindrical coordinates.

3. The fully buried and fully exposed heat transfer coefficients are then combined in parallel
(according to the fraction of pipe exposed and the fraction of pipe buried) using equation 4.249
(p.457) to give the overall heat transfer coefficient:

Note: This is the default method in PIPESIM.

2000 Method
1. A fully exposed pseudo pipe of the same diameter is created and an overall heat transfer 
coefficient (U  bur  ) is calculated using the methods described in the sections above.

2. A fully buried pseudo pipe (Z=+R) of the same diameter is created and an overall heat transfer 
coefficient (U  exp ) is calculated using the methods described in the sections above.

3. The fully buried and fully exposed heat transfer coefficients are then combined in parallel
(according to the fraction of pipe exposed and buried) to give the overall heat transfer coefficient:

Technical Description
456 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 474/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

(
U   = 1 +
β 0
π 
) U  exp −
β 0
π 
U  bur  Eq. 4.249

where the negative of half of the angle of the exposed arc:

-1 Z  
β 0 = − cos − R 
( ) Eq. 4.250

1983 Method
1. A fully exposed pseudo pipe with diameter corresponding to the exposed surface area is created
and an overall heat transfer coefficient (U  exp ) is calculated using the methods described in the
sections above.
2. A fully buried pseudo pipe with diameter corresponding to the buried surface area is created and
an overall heat transfer coefficient (U  bur  ) is calculated using the methods described in the sections
above.

3. The fully buried and fully exposed heat transfer coefficients are then combined in parallel
(according to the surface areas of pipe exposed and buried) to give the overall heat transfer 
coefficient:

Aexp Abur 
U   = U  exp + U  bur  Eq. 4.251
A A
where the total surface area of the buried pipe:
A = 2 πR  Eq. 4.252
The surface area of the exposed portion of the pipe is:

θ 
Aexp = πR  1 −
( )
bur  Eq. 4.253
2 π 
where the angle of the buried arc:

θ bur  = sin
-1
( Z  
R 
) Eq. 4.254

The surface area of the buried portion of the pipe is:

Abur  = A − Aexp Eq. 4.255

4.2.7 Heat Transfer Between a Vertical Well and the Surrounding Rock

Ramey Model
Heat transfer between a well and its surroundings varies with time: the well exchanges energy with
the formation, heating it up (or cooling it down), until the formation is at the same temperature as the
well.
The Ramey (1962) (p.551) model is an analytical method for determining the ground heat transfer 
coefficient, hg  , given the length of time t a well has been operating. The model assumes that heat

Technical Description
457 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 475/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

transfer in the wellbore is steady-state, whilst heat transfer to the formation is by transient radial
conduction. In his paper, Ramey quotes various solutions for different boundary conditions. He
observed that the solutions eventually converge after about a week. He concluded that a line source
with constant heat flux gives a good asymptotic solution for long times (times greater than one week).
The wellbore (ground) heat transfer coefficient is given by:

2k  g 
h  g  = Eq. 4.256
D f  (t )
where the time function:
2 2
1
f  (t ) = E 1
2
D 
4 αT  
exp ( ) ( )
D 
4 αT  
Eq. 4.257

The exponential integral is given by:

2
2 D  2
D  1 − exp ( − r ) D 
4 αT   Eq. 4.258
E  = d r  − ln − γ 
4 αt 
( ) ∫  4 αt 
( )
1 0 r 
For large values of time t , Ramey uses a series expansion for the exponential integral, which to
leading order gives:

f  (t ) ≈ − ln ( D co 
4 αt 
) −
γ 
2
Eq. 4.259

ground thermal resistance −1 −1

k  g  W m  K 

D  outside diameter of pipe m 

D co  outside diameter of pipe and thermal coatings m 

ground thermal diffusivity 2 −1
k  g  m  s 
α  =
 ρ  g c  g 

ground specific heat capacity −1 −1

c  g  J kg  K 

ground density −3
 ρ  g  kgm 

r  radial distance from the centre of the well m 

γ  ≈ 0.577 Euler-Mascheroni gamma constant dimensionless

In the case of a tubing we see that:

1 1
= Eq. 4.260
h ext  h  g 

and the ambient temperature used in equation 4.256 (p.458) is given by the geothermal temperature
at some radial distance far from the centre of the well.

Technical Description
458 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 476/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: To compute a geothermal gradient and hence a geothermal temperature at a particular well
depth,, PIPESIM requires knowledge of at least two ambient temperatures at two corresponding
measured depths (MD) or true vertical depth (TVD) — usually these are the ambient temperatures
at top and bottom of the tubing.

Reference: "Wellbore Heat Transmission", H.J. Ramey (p.551)

4.3 Fluid Modelling

 A number of fluid and solid phases may be present in oil and gas pipeline. These include:
• Fluids
• Vapour hydrocarbon and water (gas)
• Liquid hydrocarbon (oil)

• Liquid water 
• Other liquids (e.g. liquid CO2)
• Solids
• Hydrate I
• Hydrate II
• Wax
• Asphaltene
• Ice
• Scale
PIPESIM simulates flow of only three fluid phases, oil, gas and water. In fact some flow models only
consider two phases, liquid and gas. Liquid properties are determined by combining the oil and water 
properties.
PIPESIM can be used to model wax precipitation and deposition. Other solid phases cannot be
modelled, although the appearance of hydrates, asphaltene and ice can be predicted. Scale cannot
be modelled or predicted.
Fluid models are used to determine the phase state (e.g. single phase oil, single phase gas, two
phase oil and gas etc) and the phase thermodynamic and transport properties needed for simulation
(e.g. density, enthalpy and viscosity). PIPESIM allows three different types of fluid description:
• Black oil (p.460)  Three phases are allowed, oil, gas and water. The hydrocarbon fluid is made
up of oil and gas. Simple correlations are used to determine how much gas can dissolve in oil and
the phase properties.
• Compositional (p.127)  The number of phases allowed depends on the flash package. Fluid is
made up of components, such as methane, ethane, water etc. Phase state is determined by
minimizing Gibbs energy of the system (the flash). This can be a complicated calculation and is
therefore significantly slower than black oil. PIPESIM can use a number of different flash
packages.

Technical Description
459
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 477/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Fluid Property Table Files (p.502)  Two phase (liquid and gas) properties can be output from
compositional packages in a tabular form that PIPESIM can read.

4.3.1 Black Oil Fluid Modeling

Black oil tank

at stock fluidsconditions,
are modelled
by as three phases,
specifying oil, gas
two ratios, and water.
typically Theoilamount
the gas of each
ratio (GOR) phase
and the is defined
water cut
(WCUT). Properties at pressures and temperatures other than stock tank are determined by
correlations (p.460). Water is assumed to remain in the water phase. The key property for 
determining the phase behaviour of the hydrocarbons is the solution gas—oil ratio (p.462),
R s (P , T  ), which is used to calculate the amount of the gas dissolved in the oil at a given pressure
and temperature:

Stock tank volume of gas dissolved in oil: R  ⋅ V  

s  O 

Stock tank volume of free gas: V  G  = (GOR  − R s ) ⋅ V  O 

 At stock tank conditions R s  = 0. The bubble point pressure (p.466) P b (T  ) can be found by calculating
the pressure at which all the gas is dissolved in the oil R s (P b , T  ) = GOR 

For pressures below the bubble point the oil is saturated (no more gas can dissolve in it at that
pressure and temperature). For pressures above the bubble point, there is no vapour phase and the
oil is undersaturated, since more gas could be dissolved in it if it were available. Above stock tank
pressure P  > P s  the oil contains dissolved gas, and is known as live oil. Oil at stock tank pressure
(or oil with GOR=0) is known as dead oil. Different correlations apply for dead oil, saturated live oil,
and unsaturated live oil properties.
Correlations (p.460) are needed for the fluid properties needed for simulation:
• the oil formation volume factor (p.467) (which is used to determine oil density),
• the gas compressibility (p.475) (to determine the gas density)
• the water density
• the oil viscosity (p.469)
• the gas viscosity (p.478)
• the water viscosity
• the fluid enthalpy (p.479)

• the oil-gas surface tension (p.479)

• the water-gas surface tension (p.479)
Liquid properties (p.503) are calculated by combining the oil and water properties.

Black oil Cor relations

The following black oil correlations are available:

Technical Description
460 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 478/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Solution gas (p.462) and bubble point Lasater (p.465), Standing (p.465), Vasquez and
pressure (p.466) Beggs (p.465), Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt (p.464),
Glasø (p.464), De Ghetto et al (p.463) or Petrosky and
Farshad (p.465).
Oil formation volume factor of saturated Standing (p.467), Vasquez and Beggs (p.467),
systems Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt (p.467)
Oil formation volume factor of  Vasquez and Beggs (p.468)
undersaturated systems
Dead oil viscosity (p.469) Beggs and Robinson, Glasø, Kartoatmodjo, De Ghetto,
Hossain, Petrosky, Elsharkawy or Users data.
Live oil viscosity of saturated systems Chew and Connally, Kartoatmodjo, Khan, De Ghetto,
(p.471) Hossain, Petrosky, Elsharkawy, or Beggs and
Robinson.
Live oil viscosity of undersaturated Vasquez and Beggs, Kouzel, Kartoatmodjo, Khan, De
systems (p.473) Ghetto, Hossain, Petrosky, Elsharkawy, Bergman or 
None.
Viscosity of oil/water mixtures (p.503) Inversion, Volume Ratio, or Woelflin.
Gas viscosity (p.478) Lee et al.
Gas compressibility (p.475) Standing, Hall and Yarborough, or Robinson et al.
Oil-gas surface tension (p.479)
Water-gas surface tension (p.479)

Correlation data
The data points spanned the following ranges :

Lasater (p.547) Standing (p.552) Vasquez and Beggs

(p.468)
Data Correlation was Correlation was based Correlations use data
developed in 1958 on 105 experimentally from more than 600 oil
from 158 determined bubble systems. Approximately
experimental data point pressure of  6,000 measured data
points California oil systems. points were collected.

P b  bubble point 48 to 5,780 130 to 7,000 50 to 5,250

pressure (psia)
T   temperature (°F) 82 to 272 100 to 258 70 to 295
API    API gravity ( °API) 17.9 to 51.1 16.5 to 63.8 16 to 58

γ G  gas specific 0.574 to 1.223 0.59 to 0.95 0.56 to 1.18

gravity

R sb  solution gas at 3 to 2,905 20 to 1,425 20 to 2,070

bubble point

Technical Description
461
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 479/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

pressure (scf/
STB)

Beggs and Robinson Chew and Connally

Data Data from 600 oil systems were used Data from 457 oil systems
to develop correlations for dead and was used to develop
live oil viscosity. 460 dead oil correlation for live oil
observations and 2,073 live oil viscosity
observations were used.

P b  bubble point pressure 50 to 5,250 132 to 5,645

(psia)
T   temperature (°F) 70 to 295 72 to 292
API    API gravity ( °API) 16 to 58

γ G  gas specific gravity

R sb  solution gas at bubble 20 to 2,070 51 to 3,544

point pressure (scf/STB)

Glasø (p.544) developed PVT correlations from analysis of crude oil from the following North Sea
Fields:- Ekofisk Stratfjord Forties Valhall COD 30/7-2A.

Solution Gas-oil Ratio

The solution gas-oil ratio, R s  (scf/STB), can be determined using one of a number of correlations:

• De Ghetto et al (p.463)

• Glasø (p.464)
• Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt (p.464)
• Lasater (p.465)
• Petrosky and Farshad (p.465)
• Standing (p.465)
• Vasquez and Beggs (p.465)
The correlations depend on:

P  pressure (psia)

T   temperature (°F)

API   API gravity ( °API)

γ G  gas specific gravity

Technical Description
462 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 480/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

De Ghetto et al.
De Ghetto et al. give different correlations for the solution gas-oil ratio and the bubble point pressure.
In PIPESIM it is important to use related formula for these two properties to ensure consistency. The
PIPESIM implementation of the solution gas-oil ratio is therefore derived from the De Ghetto et al 
equations for the bubble point pressure.

Extra heavy oil, API < 10 

For extra heavy oil the De Ghetto formula is a modified version of the Standing (p.465) formula:
1.1128
P 
R s (P , T  ) = C  ⋅ γ G  ⋅ Eq. 4.261
10.7025 ⋅ A(T  )
Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

log 10 A = 0.002 ⋅ T   − 0.0142 ⋅ API   Eq. 4.262

C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

Heavy oil, 10 < API < 22.3

For heavy oil the De Ghetto formula is a modified version of the Standing (p.465) formula:
1/0.7885
P 
R s (P , T  ) = C  ⋅ γ G  ⋅ Eq. 4.263
15.7286 ⋅ A(T  )
Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

log 10 A = 0.002 ⋅ T   − 0.0142 ⋅ API   Eq. 4.264

C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

Medium oil, 22.3 < API < 31.1

For medium oil the De Ghetto formula is a modified version of the Kartoatmojdo and Schmidt
(p.464) formula:
C  C 
R s  = C  ⋅ C 1 ⋅ γ G  ⋅ (1 + g corr ) 2
⋅ A(T  ) ⋅ P  4
Eq. 4.265

Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:
API  
log 10 A = C 3 ⋅ Eq. 4.266
T  + 460
If the separator pressure and temperatures are known then a non-zero gas specific gravity correction
factor is used:

 g corr  = 0.1595 ⋅ API  

0.4078 −0.2466
⋅ T  sep  ⋅ log 10 ( P sep 
114.7
) Eq. 4.267

C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

The constants C 1, C 2, C 3 and C 4 :

Technical Description
463
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 481/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4

0.10084 0.2556 7.4576 0.9868

Light oil, 31.1 < API 

For light oil the De Ghetto formula is a modified version of the Standing (p.465) formula:
1/0.7885
P 
R s (P , T  ) = C  ⋅ γ G  ⋅ Eq. 4.268
31.7648 ⋅ A(T  )
Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

log 10 A = 0.0009 ⋅ T   − 0.0148 ⋅ API   Eq. 4.269

C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

Glasø

The Glasø formula for the solution gas-oil ratio is:

1.22549 1.212009 −0.210784
R s  = γ G  ⋅ f  (P ) ⋅ API   ⋅ T   Eq. 4.270

Here:

log10 f  (P ) = 2.887 ⋅ 1 − 1 − 0.397 ⋅ (log10 P  − C ) Eq. 4.271

C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt

The Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt formula for the solution gas-oil ratio:
C  C 
R s  = C  ⋅ C 1 ⋅ γ G  ⋅ (1 + g corr ) 2
⋅ A(T  ) ⋅ P  4
Eq. 4.272

Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:
API  
log 10 A = C 3 ⋅ Eq. 4.273
T  + 460
If the separator pressure and temperatures are known then a non-zero gas specific gravity correction
factor is used:

 g corr  = 0.1595 ⋅ API  

0.4078
⋅ T  sep 
−0.2466
⋅ log 10 ( P sep 
) Eq. 4.274
114.7
C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

The constants C 1, C 2, C 3 and C 4 depend on the oil API density:

C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4

API   < 30 0.05958 0.7972 13.1405 1.0014

Technical Description
464
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 482/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

API   > 30 0.0315 0.7587 11.2895 1.0937

Lasater 
The Lasater formula for the solution gas-oil ratio:

Y  G  γ O 
R s (P , T  ) = C  ⋅ 132755 ⋅ ⋅ Eq. 4.275
(1 − Y  G ) MW  O 

Y  G  = 0.08729793 + 0.37912718 ⋅ ln ( P  ⋅ γ G 

T  + 460
+ 0.769066 ) Eq. 4.276

The oil molecular weight is given by

2 3
MW  O  = 677.3893 − 13.2161 ⋅ API  + 0.024775 ⋅ API   + 0.00067851 ⋅ API   Eq. 4.277

The oil specific gravity is given by

141.5
Eq. 4.278
γ O  = API  + 131.5
C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

Petrosky and Farshad

The Petrosky and Farshad formula for the solution gas-oil ratio is
1
0.8439
γ G  0.5774

R s (P , T  ) = C  ⋅ ( P 
112.727
+ 12.34 ⋅ ) A(T  )
Eq. 4.279

Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:
−5 1.3911 −4 1.541
A(T  ) = 4.561 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T   − 7.916 ⋅ 10 ⋅ API   Eq. 4.280
C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

Standing
The Standing formula for the solution gas-oil ratio used in PIPESIM is:
1/0.83
P 
R s (P , T  ) = C  ⋅ γ G  ⋅ Eq. 4.281
A(T  ) ⋅ 18

Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

log A = 0.00091 ⋅ T   − 0.0125 ⋅ API   Eq. 4.282

10
C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

Vasquez and Beggs

The Vasquez and Beggs formula for the solution gas-oil ratio used in PIPESIM is:

Technical Description
465 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 483/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

C  C 2
R s (P , T  ) = ⋅ γ  g  ⋅ ( P  − 14.7) ⋅ A(T  ) Eq. 4.283
C 1

Here A is a function of the fluid temperature and the oil API density:

log 10 A = C 3 ⋅ API   Eq. 4.284

T  + 460
C  is a calibration (p.466) constant.

The constants C 1, C 2 and C 3 depend on the oil API density:

C 1 C 2 C 3

API   < 30 11.172 1.0937 11.172

API   > 30 10.393 1.187 10.393

Calibration

If a calibration data point is provided, R scal  = R  ( P cal , T  cal ), then the calibration term C  is calculated
s 
to ensure the calibration point is a solution of the relevant solution gas-oil ratio equation. For example,
for the Vasquez and Beggs (p.465) equation, the calibration term will be given by
C  C 
R scal  = ⋅ γ  g  ⋅ ( P cal  − 14.7) 2
⋅ A(T  cal ) Eq. 4.285
C 1

Hence the Vasquez and Beggs (p.465) equation for the solution gas oil ratio can be re-written as:

(
P  − 14.7
)
R s (P , T  ) = R scal  ⋅ C 2 ⋅ A(T  ) Eq. 4.286
P cal  − 14.7 A(T  cal )

It is assumed that the calibration point is a bubble point (p.466), although this will in fact only be the
case if the calibration solution gas-oil ratio R scal  is equal to the fluid GOR.

If no calibration data is provided, PIPESIM uses C  = 1.

Bubble point pressure

The bubble point pressure P b (T  ) is the pressure at which all the free gas is dissolved, i.e. when the
solution gas-oil ratio is equal to the fluid GOR:
R s ( P b , T  ) = R sb  Eq. 4.287

The bubble point can therefore be determined by solving the relevant solution gas-oil ratio (p.462)
equation.

Technical Description
466 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 484/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Oil Formation Volume Factor 

The oil formation volume factor (FVF) is the ratio of the oil volume (at a given pressure and
temperature) to the stock tank oil volume. As pressure increases, two competing processes take
place: gas is dissolved in oil which increases the volume, and the oil is compressed, which decreases
the volume. Below the bubble point, the effect of gas dissolving in oil dominates and the saturated
oil FVF increases with pressure. However at the bubble point pressure, all the available gas has
dissolved in the oil. Therefore above the bubble point pressure the only effect is compressibility and
the undersaturated oil FVF increases with pressure.
Separate correlations are available for the saturated oil FVF (p.467) and undersaturated oil FVF
(p.468).

Oil Formation Volume Factor for Saturated Systems

For saturated systems P  < P b  the oil formation volume factor B ob  (bbl/STB) depends on the solution

gas-oil ratio R s  and the temperature T  .

Standing 
The saturated oil formation volume factor is given by:
1.175
B ob  = 0.972 + 0.000147 F   Eq. 4.288

where the correlating factor is calculated using :

0.5

( )
F   = R s 
γ  g 

γ o 
+ 1.25T   Eq. 4.289

Data used to develop correlation (p.461)

Vasquez and Beggs

The saturated oil formation volume factor is given by:
B ob  = 1 + C 1 R s  + C 2(T   − 60)
API  
γ G  ( )
+ C 3R s (T   − 60)
API  
γ G  ( ) Eq. 4.290

C 1 C 2 C 3

API   < 30 4.677 ⋅ 10−4 1.751 ⋅ 10−4 1.811 ⋅ 10−4

API   > 30 4.67 ⋅ 10−4 1.751 × 10

−5
1.337 × 10
−9

Data used to develop correlation (p.461)

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt 

The saturated oil formation volume factor is given by:

Technical Description
467 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 485/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1.50
B ob  = 0.98496 + 0.0001 F   Eq. 4.291

Where the correlating factor 

0.755 0.25 −1.50
F   = R S  γ  g  γ o  + 0.45T   Eq. 4.292

Oil Formation Volume Factor for Undersaturated Systems

The oil formation volume factor B o  (bbl/STB) for pressures above the bubble point is given by a simple
compressibility law:

B o  = B ob ( R sb ) ⋅ exp λZ  o ( p b  − p ) Eq. 4.293

where Z  o  is the oil compressibility and λ  is a calibration factor (used in mixing different fluids).

Vasquez and Beggs

The Vasquez and Beggs correlation for the oil compressibility is

−5
5 ⋅ R sb  + 17.2 ⋅ T   − 1180 ⋅ γ G  + 12.61 ⋅ API   − 1433
Z  o  = 10 ⋅ Eq. 4.294
P 
Data used to develop correlation (p.461)

TURZO Method
The performance of a rotodynamic (centrifugal or vertical) pump on a viscous liquid differs from the
performance on water, which is the basis for most published curves. Typically, head and rate of flow
decrease as viscosity increases, while power and the net positive suction head required (NPSHR)
increases. Starting torque could be affected.
The following formula is the TURZO equation for viscosity correction:
Q  ⋅ H  
Power  = Eq. 4.295
E 
where
P is power.
Q is the rate.
H is the head.
E is the efficiency.

Q v  = Q  ⋅ f  Q  Eq. 4.296

H  v  = H   ⋅ f  H   Eq. 4.297
E v  = E  ⋅ f  E  Eq. 4.298

where the value of each equation is less than 1.

The viscosity correction is calculated as follows:

Technical Description
468 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 486/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

P v  f  Q  ⋅ f  H  

= Eq. 4.299
P  f  E 

Oil Viscosity
 As pressure increases, two competing processes take place: gas is dissolved in oil which lightens
the oil, reducing its viscosity, and the oil is compressed, which increases the viscosity. Below the
bubble point, the effect of gas dissolving in oil dominates and the saturated viscosity decreases with
pressure. However at the bubble point pressure, all the available gas has dissolved in the oil.
Therefore above the bubble point pressure the only effect is compressibility and the undersaturated
viscosity decreases with pressure.
Three sets of correlations are used to determine the oil viscosity:
1. At stock tank pressure the oil viscosity is given by dead oil viscosity correlations (p.469) as a
function of the flowing fluid temperature μ o (P s , T  ) = μ od (T  ).

2. At pressures
(p.471) below the
as a function of bubble point
the dead the oil viscosity
oil viscosity and theissolution
given by live oilratio
gas-oil viscosity correlations
μ o (P , T  ) = μ ob ( μ od , R s ).

3. At pressures above the bubble point the oil viscosity is given by undersaturated oil viscosity
correlations (p.473), as a function of the bubble point viscosity and the pressure
μ o (P , T  ) = μ ou ( μ ob , P ).

Dead Oil Viscosity

The correlations available for calculating dead oil viscosity are:

Beggs and Robinson

Dead oil viscosity is calculated as follows :
x 
μ od  = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.300
−1.163
where x  = yT  
z 
and  y  = 10 and z  = 3.0324 − 0.02023 ⋅ g API  

Data used to develop correlation (p.461)

Glasø
Dead oil viscosity is calculated as follows :
d 
μ od  = c  log 10( g API  ) Eq. 4.301

where
10 −3.444
c  = 3.141 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T   and d  = 10.313 ⋅ log 10(T  ) − 36.447

Technical Description
469
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 487/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt 

Dead oil viscosity is calculated as follows :
d 
μ od  = c  log 10( g API  ) Eq. 4.302

where
8 −2.8177
c  = 16 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T   and d  = 5.7526 ⋅ log 10(T  ) − 26.9718

De Ghetto et al 
De Ghetto et al. use a combination of four correlations to compute the dead oil viscosity depending
on the value of the API.
For API < 10 (extra heavy oils) the following correlation is used:
x 
μ od  = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.303
 y 

where x  = 10 and  y  = 1.90296 − 0.012619 ⋅ g API   − 0.61748 ⋅ log10 (T  )

For 10 < API < 22.3 (heavy oils) the following correlation is used:
x 
μ od  = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.304
 y 
where x  = 10 and  y  = 2.06492 − 0.0179 ⋅ g API   − 0.70226 ⋅ log 10(T  )

For 22.3 < API < 31.1 (medium oils) the following correlation is used:
d 
μ od  = c  log 10( g API  ) Eq. 4.305

9 −3.556
where c  = 220.15 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T   and d  = 12.5428 ⋅ log (T  ) − 45.7874
10
For API > 31.1 (light oils) the following correlation is used
x 
μ od  = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.306
 y 
where x  = 10 and  y  = 1.67083 − 0.017628 ⋅ g API   − 0.61304 ⋅ log 10(T  )

Petrosky and Farshad 

Dead oil viscosity is calculated as follows:
d 
μ od  = c  log 10( g API  ) Eq. 4.307

7 −2.10255
where c  = 2.3511 ⋅ 10 ⋅ T   and d  = 4.59388 ⋅ log 10(T  ) − 22.82792

Hossain et al 
Hossain et al. correlation for dead oil viscosity is only valid for heavy oils (10 < API < 22.3) and it is
given as follows:

Technical Description
470 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 488/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

A B 
μ od  = 10 ⋅ T   Eq. 4.308

where A = − 0.71523 ⋅ g API   + 22.13766 and B  = 0.269024 ⋅ g API   − 8.268047

Elsharkawy and Alikhan

Elsharkawy and Alikhan dead oil viscosity is only valid in the API range 20-48 and is calculated as
follows:
x 
μ od  = 10 − 1 Eq. 4.309
 y 
where x  = 10 and  y  = 2.16924 − 0.02525 ⋅ g API   − 0.68875 ⋅ log 10(T  )

User's data
If user's data is selected for the dead oil viscosity method, then a curve is fitted through the two
supplied data points ( μ 1, T  1) and ( μ 2, T  2) of the following form:

log ( μ od ) = log ( B ) − C log (T  ) Eq. 4.310

where

log ( ) μ 1

μ 2
C  = Eq. 4.311

log ( ) T  2

T  1
and

B  = μ 1T  1C  = μ 2T  2C  Eq. 4.312

Live Oil Viscosity Correlations

Many of the correlations available for calculating live oil viscosity are of the form
B 
μ ob  = A⋅ μ od  Eq. 4.313

where A and B  are functions of the Solution gas-oil ratio R s :

Correlation A B 
Chew and Data used 0.8 0.518
Connally to develop
correlation
0.2 +
( 0.000852 R s 
10
) 0.482 +
( 0.000777 R s 
10
)
(p.461)
Beggs and Data used −0.515 −0.338
10.715 ⋅ ( R s  + 100) 5.44 ⋅ ( R s  + 150)
Robinson to develop

Technical Description
471
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 489/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

correlation
(p.461)
Elsharkawy −1.12410 −1.06622
1241.932 ⋅ ( R s  + 641.026) 1768.841 ⋅ ( R s  + 1180.335)
and Alikhan
−3 −3
Hossain et al 1 − 1.7188311 ⋅ 10 ⋅ R s  + 1 − 2.052461 ⋅ 10 ⋅ R s  +

−6 2 −6 2
+1.58031 ⋅ 10 ⋅ R s  +3.47559 ⋅ 10 ⋅ R s 

Petrosky and −4 R s  −3 R s 

Farshad 0.1651 + 0.6165 ⋅ 0.9886 ⋅ 10 0.5131 + 0.5109 ⋅ 0.9973 ⋅ 10

Other authors use more complicated formulas:

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt 

Live oil viscosity is calculated as follows:
2
μ ob  = − 0.06821 + 0.9824 F  + 0.0004034F   Eq. 4.314

where
0.43+0.5165⋅ B 
F   = A ⋅ μ od  Eq. 4.315

and
−0.000845 R s 
A = 0.2001 + 0.8428 10 Eq. 4.316

and
−0.00081 R 
B  = 10 s  Eq. 4.317

Khan

Live oil viscosity calculated by Khan is a function of the gas and oil specific gravities ( γ G , γ O ), the
solution gas-oil ratio (R s ), the bubble pressure (P b ), and the flowing pressure (P ). It is given as follows:
 y 
μ ob  = A ⋅ e  Eq. 4.318

where

 y  = ln (0.09) + 0.5 ⋅ ln ( γ G ) − 1 ⋅ ln ( R s ) − 4.5 ⋅ ln T   − 3 ⋅ ln (1 − γ O )

3 460 ( ) Eq. 4.319

and
−0.14 −4(
A=
P 
Pb 
( ) −2.5×10
⋅ e 
P − Pb )
Eq. 4.320

Technical Description
472 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 490/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

De Ghetto et al 
De Ghetto et al. expression of the live oil viscosity is a combination of 4 correlations depending on
the value of oil API.

F A B 
For API 0.5798+0.3432 B  − 0.0335 + −0.00081⋅ R 
μ ob  = 2.3945 + 0.8927F  + A ⋅ μ od  s 
< 10 10
(extra 2 −0.000845⋅ R s 
heavy +0.01567 F   +1.0875 10
oils)
For 10 < μ  = − 0.6311 + 1.078 F   − 0.4731+0.5664 B  0.2478 + −0.00081⋅ R s 
ob  A ⋅ μ od  10
 API <
22.3 2 −0.000845⋅ R s 
(heavy − 0.003653 F   +0.6114 10
oils)
0.3855+0.5664 B 
For
< API < μ ob  = 0.0132 + 0.9821F   −
22.3 A ⋅ μ od  0.2038 + 10−0.00081⋅R s 
31.1 2 −0.000845⋅ R 
(medium − 0.005215 F  
s 
+0.8591 10
oils)
For API B  −0.6487
μ ob  = A⋅ μ od  25.1921 ⋅ ( R s  + 100) 2.7516 ⋅ ( R s
> 31.1
(light
oils)

Undersaturated Oil Viscosity

The correlations available for calculating undersaturated oil viscosity are:

Vasquez and Beggs
Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:
A
μ ou  = μ ob 
( ) p 
 p b 
Eq. 4.321

exp ( − 8.98 × 10  p  − 11.513)

1.187 −5
where A = 2.6 p 

Data used to develop correlation (p.461)

Kouzel 
Undersaturated oil viscosity is derived from the equation:
F  ( p )
10
μ ou  = μ ob  ⋅ Eq. 4.322
F  ( p  )
b 
10

Technical Description
473
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 491/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

p  − 14.7
F  ( p ) =
( )
0.278 Eq. 4.323
1000 A + Bμ od 

Where A and B are parameters entered by the user. Suggested values for A and B are 0.0239 and
0.01638 respectively.

Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt 

Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μ ou  = 1.00081 μ ob  + 0.001127 A( p  − p b ) Eq. 4.324

( ) + 0.038( μ  )
1.8148 1.59
A = − 0.006517 μ ob  ob 

Khan
Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μ ou  = μ ob exp 9.65e −5( p  − p b ) Eq. 4.325

De Ghetto et al 
De Ghetto et al. expression of the undersaturated oil viscosity is a combination of 3 correlations
depending on the value of oil API.
For API < 10 (extra heavy oils) the following correlation is used:

(
μ ou  = μ ob  − 1 −
p 
 p b  )( A
B 
) Eq. 4.326

−2.19 1.055 0.3132 0.0099 g 

where A = 10
( μ od 
)(  p b 
) and B  = 10( )
API  

For 10 < API < 22.3 (heavy oils) the following correlation is used:
μ ou  = 0.9886 μ ob  + 0.002763 A( p  − p b ) Eq. 4.327
1.7933 1.5939
where A = − 0.01153 μ ob  ( ) + 0.03610( μ  ob  )
For API > 22.3 ( medium and light oils) the following correlation is used:

(
μ ou  = μ ob  − 1 −
p  A
 p  B  b 
) Eq. 4.328

( μ  )( p  ) and B  = 10( )

−2.19 1.055 0.3132 −0.00288 g API  
where A = 10 oD  b 

Hossain et al 
Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μ ou  = μ ob  + 0.004481( p  − p b )( A − B ) Eq. 4.329

Technical Description
474
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 492/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

( ) and B  = 0.527737( μ  )
1.068099 1.063547
where A = 0.555955 μ ob  ob 

Petrosky and Farshad 

Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μ ou  = μ ob  + 1.3449E 

−3
( p  − p b )(10A) Eq. 4.330

where A = − 1.0146 + 1.3322 X   − 0.4876 X   − 1.15036X   and X   = log10 ( μ ob )
2 3

Elsharkawy and Alikhan

Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:

μ ou  = μ ob  + A 10
−2.0771
( p  − p b ) Eq. 4.331
1.19279 −0.40712 −0.7941
where A = μ od  ⋅ μ ob  ⋅ p b 

Bergman and Sutton

Undersaturated oil viscosity is calculated as follows:
B 
μ ou  = μ ob exp A( p  − p b ) Eq. 4.332

−4 −5 −7 2
where A = 2.278877 ⋅ 10 − 1.48211 ⋅ 10 ⋅ X   + 6.5698 ⋅ 10 ⋅ X   ,

⋅ X  and X   = log 10( μ ob )

−2
B  = 0.873204 + 2.24623 ⋅ 10

Disabling the calculation of undersaturated oil viscosity 

If you select None as the undersaturated oil viscosity method, then the undersaturated oil viscosity
is assumed to be the same as the saturated live oil viscosity at the same temperature and pressure.

Gas Compressibility
The real gas law is given by  pV   = ZRT  where

 p  pressure
V   volume
R  universal gas constant

T   absolute temperature

Z   gas compressibility factor 

Numerous equations of state have been proposed to predict this Z-factor. Standing and Katz
presented a generalized Z-factor chart for predicting the volumetric behavior of natural gases. To
employ this chart, we require knowledge of the critical properties of the gas (namely, critical pressure
and critical temperature) as a function of the specific gravity. These are given in the black oil model
by Standing (1977) for natural gas and gas-condensate systems:

Technical Description
475 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 493/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Gas Systems
2
T  c  = 168 + 325 γ G  − 12.5 γ G  Eq. 4.333

Gas-Condensate Systems
2
T  c  = 187 + 330 γ G  − 71.5 γ G  Eq. 4.334

2
 p c  = 706 − 51.7 γ G  − 11.1 γ G  Eq. 4.335

where

T  c  critical temperature

 p c  critical pressure

γ G  specific gravity of the gas mixture

This allows us to calculate the reduced temperature and reduced pressure, defined respectively as:
T  
T  c  = Eq. 4.336
T  c 

p 
 p c  = Eq. 4.337
 p c 

Various correlations have been proposed for curve fitting this reduced pressure-reduced temperature
Z-factor chart and are available in PIPESIM:
Hall-Yarborough Z-Factor Correlation (p.476)
Standing Z-Factor Correlation (p.477)
Robinson et al. Z-Factor Correlation (p.477)

Hall-Yarborough Z-Factor Correlation

Gas compressibility (Z-factor) is calculated as follows:
2

Z  = ( 0.06125 p R T  R 
 ρ R 
)
e 
(
x  −1.2 1−T   )
R 
Eq. 4.338

where the reduced density is a root of the following equation:

2 3 4
2 ( ρ  + ρ  + ρ  − ρ  )
R  R  R  R 
F  ( ρ R ) = 0.06125 p r T  R  − 1.2(1 − T  R ) + 2
((1 − ρ  ) − (14.67T   − 9.76T   4.85T   ) ρ  )
3 2 3
Eq. 4.339
R  R  R  R  R 
( )=0
( + 42.4T   ) ρ 
2 3 2.18+2.82T  R 
+ 90.7T  R  − 242.2T  R  R  R 

Technical Description
476 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 494/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

where

where  ρ R  reduced density

 p R  reduced pressure

T  R  reciprocal of the reduced temperature

The method is not recommended for use within a pressure range  p R  = 0, 1 .

Standing Z-Factor Correlation

Gas compressibility (Z-factor) is calculated as follows:
A + (1 − A)
Z  = G 
x  Eq. 4.340
e  B  + FP r 

where the coefficients A to G are given by:

0.5
A = 1.39(T  r  − 0.92) − 0.36T  R  − 0.101

6
0.32 p R 
0.666 2
B  = (0.62 − 0.23T  r ) p R  + − 0.037 p R  +
(T  r  − 0.86) 10
(
9 T  R −1 )

C  = (0.132 − 0.32log (T  R ))

T   +0.1824T   2
D  = 10( )
0.3016 0.49 −
R  R 

The method is not valid for T  R  < 0.92.

Robinson et al. Z-Factor Correlation

Gas compressibility (Z-factor) is calculated as follows:

Z  = 1 + A1 +
A2
T  
+
A3
3
ρ R  + A4 + ( )
A5
T  
2
ρ R  +
A5 A6
 ρ 
D R 
5

R  T  R  D  R 

( () ( ) )
2 Eq. 4.341
+
A7
3
2
ρ R  1 + A8 ρ R  e 
2
(
x  − A  ρ 
8 R  )
T  r 

where

Technical Description
477 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 495/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

0.27 p R 
D  =
T  R 

A1 = 0.310506237

A2 = − 1.4067099

A3 = − 0.57832729

A4 = 0.53530771

A5 = − 0.61232032

A6 = − 0.10488813

A = 0.68157001
7
A8 = 0.68446549

The method is valid within a temperature and pressure range of T  r  = 1.05, 3.0 and
 p r  = 0.2, 3.0 .

Gas Viscosity
Gas viscosity is calculated using the Lee et al (p.547) correlation as follows:
Y  

μ  g  = K  ⋅ exp X  ⋅ ρ  g  Eq. 4.342

where

(7.77 + 0.183 ⋅ γ G ) ⋅ (T  + 460)1.5 −4

K  = ⋅ 10
(122.4 + 373.6 ⋅ γ G  + T  + 460)
1914.5
X   = 2.57 + + 0.275 γ  g 
T  
Y   = 1.11 + 0.04 X  

is the gas viscosity (cp)

μ  g 

γ  g  is the gas specific gravity

 ρ  g  is the gas density (g/cc)

Technical Description
478 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 496/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

T   is the temperature ( o F  )

Surface Tension

Oil-gas Surface Tension

The oil-gas surface tension is given by Baker and Swerdloff (p.539):

σ O  = 37.7 − 0.05 ⋅ (T   − 100) − 0.26 ⋅ API   ⋅

Eq. 4.343
−4 −7 2 −11 3
⋅ 1 − 7.1 ⋅ 10 ⋅ P  + 2.1 ⋅ 10 ⋅ P  + 2.37 ⋅ 10 ⋅ P 

σ O  is the surface tension between the oil and the gas (dynes/cm)

P  is the pressure (psia)

T   is the temperature ( o F  )

API   is the oil API gravity

Water-gas Surface Tension

The water-gas surface tension is given by Katz:

σ W   = 70 − 0.1 ⋅ (T   − 74) − 0.002 ⋅ P  Eq. 4.344

σ W   is the surface tension between the water and the gas (dynes/cm)

P  is the pressure (psia)

T   is the temperature o 

( F  )

Black Oil Enthalpy

Black Oil Fluid Enthalpy Model

The black oil fluid model makes some approximations in the entropy balance based upon the
thermodynamic behavior of typical hydrocarbon fluids. The black oil model is suitable for light, medium
and heavy oil based fluids, particularly if significant quantities of water are present. The black oil model
is fast, simple to use and easy to calibrate. It is also suitable for gas and gas/condensate screening
studies.
There are currently two black oil enthalpy calculation methods available in PIPESIM.

2009 Method 
The enthalpy of the gas phase is given by:

Technical Description
479
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 497/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

H   g  = c  p  T   − η  g c  P  + Δ H  vap  Eq. 4.345

 g   p  g 

The enthalpy of the oil phase is given by:

H  o  = c  p o T   − η o c  p  P  Eq. 4.346

o 

The enthalpy of the water phase is given by:

H  w  = c  p  T   − η w c  P  Eq. 4.347

w   p w 

where the gas, oil and water Joule Thomson coefficients are approximated by (Ref: Alves, Alhanati
and Shoham (p.538):
1 T   ∂ Z  
η  g  = 5.40395
Z   ∂ T   Eq. 4.348
 ρ  c 
 g   p  g 

1
 /
 /
η o  = − 5.40395
Eq. 4.349
 ρ o c 
 p o 

 /
η w  = − 5.40395
Eq. 4.350
 ρ w c 
 p w 

The total enthalpy of the fluid is given by:

H   = H   g w  g  + H  o w o  + H  w w w  Eq. 4.351

where:

H   is the specific enthalpy BTU  / lb 

T   is the flowing temperature o 
F  

P  is the flowing pressure psia 

is the specific heat capacity at constant pressure BTU   lb o F  
c  p  / 
η  is the Joule Thomson coefficient o 

F   / psia 
 ρ  is the flowing density 3
lb  /  ft 

Z   is the gas compressibility factor dimensionless

w  is the flowing mass fraction dimensionless

ΔH  vap  is the latent heat of vaporization BTU  / lb 

Technical Description
480 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 498/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3
1 BTU  /  ft  = 5.40395 psia 

1983 Method 
The enthalpy of the gas phase is given by:

H   g  = c  p  T  + P  (1.619 × 10−10 P  + 1.412 × 10−6) P  − 0.02734 Eq. 4.352
 g 

The enthalpy of the oil phase is given by:

−3
H  o  = c  p  T  + 3.36449 × 10 P  Eq. 4.353
o 

The enthalpy of the water phase is given by:

−3

H  w  = c  p  T  +

w  ( 2.9641 × 10
γ w 
) P  Eq. 4.354

The total enthalpy of the fluid is given by:

H   = H   g m  g  + H  o m o  + H  w m w  Eq. 4.355

where:

m  is the stock tank mass fraction dimensionless

γ  is the stock tank specific gravity dimensionless

Black Oil Mixing

Introduction
Mixing occurs in network models, when two or more streams meet at a junction and in single branch
models where injected fluid, or fluids from multiple completions mix with fluid already in the branch.
The fluid properties of the mixed stream need to be determined.

Stock Tank Oil Properties

Phase ratios (Gas Oil Ratio / Water cut)

The phase ratios for a mixed stream are calculated by adding the individual phase rates of each
stream and then calculating the ratio of the phases. The calculations are at stock tank conditions.

Q vg ,mix 
GOR mix  = Q  Eq. 4.356
vo ,mix 

Q vw ,mix 
WCUT  mix  = Eq. 4.357
Q vw ,mix  + Q 
vo ,mix 

Here:

Technical Description
481
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 499/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

GOR mix  is the gas oil ratio of the mixture

WCUT  mix  is the water cut of the mixture

n  is the stock tank oil volume rate of the combined stream

Q vo ,mix  = ∑ Q vo ,i 
i =1

n  is the stock tank water volume rate of the mixture

Q vw ,mix  = ∑ Q vw ,i 
i =1

n  is the stock tank gas volume rate of the mixture

Q vg ,mix  = ∑ Q vg ,i 
i =1

Q vo ,i  = Q vL  ,i 

× (1 − WCUT  i ) is the stock tank oil volume rate of stream i 

Q vw ,i  = Q vL  × WCUT  i  is the water volume rate of stream i 

,i 

Q vg ,i  = Q vL  ,i  × GOR i  is the stock tank gas volume rate of stream i 
Q vL  = Q vo ,i  + Q vw ,i  is the stock tank liquid volume rate of stream i 
,i 

WCUT  i  is the water cut of stream i 

GOR i  is the gas oil ratio of stream i 

n  is the number of streams in the mixture

Phase densities

The phase
stream densities (and specific gravities) are determined as a volumetric average of the input
densities:
Σ DOD i  × Q vo ,i 
DOD mix  = Eq. 4.358
Q vo ,mix 
ΣGSG i  × Q vg ,i 
GSG mix  = Eq. 4.359
Q vg ,mix 
ΣWSG i  × Q vw ,i 
WSG mix  = Eq. 4.360
Q vw ,mix 

Here:

DOD mix  is the dead oil density of the mixture

GSG mix  is the gas specific gravity of the mixture

WSG mix  is the water specific gravity of the mixture

Technical Description
482 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 500/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

DOD i  is the dead oil density of stream i 

GSG i  is the gas specific gravity of stream i 

WSG i  is the water specific gravity of stream i 

Contaminants
The mole fractions of contaminants for the mixed stream is determined using a gas phase volumetric
average of the individual stream mole fractions:
ΣZ   j ,i  × Q vg ,i 
Z   j ,mix  = Eq. 4.361
Q vg ,mix 

Here:

is the mole fraction of contaminant  j  in the mixture

Z   j ,mix 
Z   j ,i  is the mole fraction of contaminant  j  in stream i 

Thermal Data (Heat Capacity and thermal conductivity)

The phase thermal properties of mixed streams are calculated using mass averages of the phase
properties of the input streams:

ΣCP φ ,i  × Q φ ,i 

CP φ ,mix  = Eq. 4.362
Q φ ,mix 

K φ ,mix  = Σ K  , × Q  ,
φ i  φ i 
Eq. 4.363
Q φ ,mix 
ΣΔH  vap ,i  × Q  g ,i 
ΔH  vap ,mix  = Eq. 4.364
Q  g ,mix 

Here:

φ is the phase, oil φ = O , vapor (gas) φ = G , or water  φ = W  

CP φ ,mix  is the heat capacity of phase φ in the mixture

K φ ,mix  is the thermal conductivity of phase φ in the mixture

ΔH  vap ,mix  is the latent heat of vaporization of the gaseous phase  g  in the mixture

CP φ ,i  is the heat capacity of phase φ in stream i 

K φ ,i  is the thermal conductivity of phase φ in stream i 

Technical Description
483
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 501/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ΔH  vap ,i  is the latent heat of vaporization of the gaseous phase  g  in stream i 

n  is the mass flow rate of phase φ of the mixture

Q φ ,mix  = ∑ Q φ ,i 
i =1

Q φ ,i  is the mass flow rate of phase φ of stream i 

Correlations
Unlike other properties, the choice of correlations used for the combined fluid can not be decided by
averaging. Instead, the selected correlation for the mixed stream is chosen as the one which has the
highest flow rate associated with it for the relevant phase. For example the correlation for mixture Oil
Viscosity is set to be the correlation that has maximum stock tank rate associated with it.
While deciding the correlation for the mixed stream, we have to consider following rules:
• All properties are independent of each other. For example the. choice for mixture dead Oil viscosity
correlation has nothing to do with mixture live Oil viscosity
• Resultant mixture correlation is decided based on associated phase rate (for example, oil if we
are deciding Oil property) ; not based on number of streams using that correlation
• Stock tank flow rates are used at the point of mixing.

Example 1
For an example assume we are mixing 7 flow streams which have different sets of correlations as
tabulated below:

Stream Flow rate (STB/ Dead Oil Viscosity Live Oil Viscosity Under-saturated Oil
day) Viscosity

1 5000 Hossain Kartoatmodjo Vasquez and Beggs

2 2000 Glasso Khan Kouzel
3 4000 Petrosky-Farshad Chew and Connally Kouzel
4 3000 Beggs and Robinson Khan Kouzel
5 6000 Beggs and Robinson Kartoatmodjo Bergman and Sutton
6 8000 Glasso Hossain Bergman and Sutton
7 2000 Beggs and Robinson Elsharkawy Kouzel

The total oil flow for each correlation, and the correlations selected for the combined fluid are tabulated
below:

Stream Flow rate (STB/day) Dead Oil Viscosity

4,5,7 11000 Beggs and Robinson
2,6 10000 Glasso
1 5000 Hossain
3 4000 Petrosky-Farshad

Technical Description
484
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 502/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

combined 30000 Beggs and Robinson

Stream Flow rate (STB/day) Live Oil Viscosity

1,5 11000 Kartoatmodjo

6 8000 Hossain
2,4 5000 Khan
3 4000 Chew and Connally
7 2000 Elsharkawy
combined 30000 Kartoatmodjo

Stream Flow rate (STB/day) Under-saturated Oil Viscosity

5,6 14000 Bergman and Sutton
2,3,4,7 11000 Kouzel

1 5000 Vasquez and Beggs

combined 30000 Bergman and Sutton

Example 2 
Mixing of fluids that use different correlations may produce unexpected results. In the above example,
a 51%-49% mixture of streams 1 and 2 will use the same correlations as stream 1, but a 49%-51%
mixture will use the same correlations as stream 2. So, even though these to mixtures are similar,
their properties may be modelled completely differently. Therefore it is important to select compatible
correlations when modelling networks.

Calibration data
 A number of correlations are calibrated using user supplied data. This section describes how streams
with different calibration data are mixed.

Dead oil viscosity 

Dead oil viscosity (p.469) can be specified using no calibration data; 2–point {(T  1, μ 1), (T  2, μ 2)}
calibration data; or as a User Supplied Table with multipoint calibration data
{(T  1, μ 1), … , (T  n , μ n )}. If none of the streams in a mixture use calibration data, then the mixing is
done by simply determining the mixture correlation, as outlined in Correlations (p.484). If however,
at least one of the input streams uses dead oil viscosity with calibration data then a User Supplied
Table is used for the mixture deadoil viscosity. The table entries are calculated in three steps:

1. The number and value of the temperature points {T  x } in the table are determined:

• If the inlet streams use multipoint calibration, then the mixed stream will use multipoint
calibration. PIPESIM will try to include all the input temperatures in the mixture table, up to a
maximum of 40 points.

Technical Description
485 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 503/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• If the inlet streams only use 2–point calibration data, then the mixed stream will use only two
points. The Temperature will be set to the minimum and maximum temperatures of the input
stream calibration temperatures.

2. The viscosity of each inlet stream μ i (T  x ) is calculated at each temperature in the mixed stream

table.
3. The mixture viscosity is calculated at each point in the stream using the Kendall and Monroe cubic
mixing rule:
3

( Q vo ,i 
)
n 
1/3
μ comb (T  x ) = ∑ ⋅ ( μ i (T  x )) Eq. 4.365
i =1 Q vo ,mix 

Example 3
Streams 1–3, defined in the table below, mix at a junction. All streams use dead oil correlations without
data, so the mixed stream, stream 4, uses the dead oil correlation with the biggest flow, in this case
Beggs and Robinson. Stream 4 then mixes with stream 5 at another junction. Stream 5 uses a
correlation with calibration data. Even though stream 5 has less flow than stream 4, the mixture,
stream 6, will use a User Supplied Table to define its dead oil correlation.

Stream Flow rate (STB/day) Dead Oil Viscosity

1 2000 Beggs and Robinson
2 2500 Chew and Connally
3 1000 Beggs and Robinson
4= 1+2+3 5500 Beggs and Robinson
5 2500 Any correlation with 2–point data, or a User Supplied Table
6 = 4+5 8000 User Supplied Table

Solution Gas Rs

If one or more of the input streams has a single point calibration data, R si ( P ref  ,i , T  ref  ,i ), then the
mixed stream solution gas will also be calibrated using a single point:
1. Determine the correlation (p.484) for the mixed stream.
2. Determine reference pressure and temperature values ( P ref  ,mix , T  ref  ,mix ) for calibrating the mixed
stream viscosity. These are calculated as the mass flow rate average of the input stream reference
pressures and temperatures — for those input streams with calibration data.
3. Determine the solution gas of each stream at the reference pressure and temperature for the
mixed stream R si ( P ref  ,mix , T  ref  ,mix ). For those streams that are undersaturated at
(P ref  ,mix , T  ref  ,mix ) the “potential” solution gas is determined by extrapolation.

Technical Description
486 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 504/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4. The solution gas for the mixed stream is determined as a volume average of all the input stream
solution gas (or potential solution gas) values.

Live oil viscosity 

 A number of steps are needed to determine the live oil viscosity of a mixture:
1. Determine the correlation (p.484) for the mixed stream.

2. Determine reference pressure and temperature values ( P ref  ,mix , T  ref  ,mix ) for calibrating the mixed
stream viscosity. These are calculated as the mass flow rate average of the input stream reference
pressures and temperatures, for those input streams with calibration data. If the mixed stream is
not saturated at the calculated reference pressure and temperature, the reference pressure is
reduced to the saturation pressure
n  Q o ,i 
T  ref  ,mix  = ∑ T  ref  ,i 
1=1 Q o ,mix 

n  Q o ,i 
P ref  ,mix  = MIN   ∑ P ref  ,i , P sat ,mix (T  ref  ,mix )
1=1 Q o ,mix 

3. Determine the input stream viscosities at the mixture reference pressure and temperature

μ o ,i ( P ref  ,mix , T  ref  ,mix ). If an input stream is undersaturated at ( P ref  ,mix , T  ref  ,mix ) then its viscosity
is calculated by first adding more gas so that the stream is saturated. The added gas has a specific
gravity equal to that of the mixture.

Technical Description
487 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 505/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4. The live oil viscosity of the mixture is calculated at ( P ref  ,mix , T  ref  ,mix ) using the 4.365 (p.486)
equation.

5. The live oil correlation can then be calibrated using μ o ,mix ( P ref  ,mix , T  ref  ,mix )

4.3.2 Compositional Fluid Modeling

In compositional fluid models the user can specify a number of components that make up the fluid.
These can be real molecules, such as methane, ethane or water, known as library components or 
pseudo components that represent the properties of several molecules, known as petroleum
fractions. The phase behaviour and thermodynamic properties are determined by an equation of state
(EOS). This equation of state is either a cubic equation (p.489) (this is a modified form of the Van
der Waals equation) or a non-cubic equation (p.492). The number of phases that can be modelled
depends on the flash package:
• Two phase flash. Water is removed from the fluid and the remaining hydrocarbons are flashed
to determine the amount of oil and vapour. This method is used for most compositional flash
packages (and for black oil models). This means that water only appears in the water phase and
does not appear in the vapour phase.
• Three phase flash. If the Multiflash compositional package is used, then a three phase flash is
performed. This means that there is a possibility that water will appear in the vapour phase, and
some components (e.g. water, methanoll) will appear in the aqueous phase.
The three phase flash gives a more accurate model of water behaviour than the two phase flash.
However, there can be problems when the flash produces two non-aqueous liquids — one of these
may be mis-identified as water.
• Multiphase flash. The Multiflash compositional standalone package can be used to model vapour 
and three liquid phases as well as solid phases. Within PIPESIM flow simulations, Multiflash is
only ever used to model two liquid phases. However, it can be used within PIPESIM to plot phase

Technical Description
488 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 506/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

envelopes and to predict whether solid phases (asphaltene, hydrates, wax and ice) would be
present.

Cubic Equations of State

Equations of state (EoS) describe the pressure, volume and temperature (PVT) behavior of pure
components and mixtures. The phase state and most thermodynamic properties (e.g. density,
enthalpy, entropy) are derived from the equation of state. Separate models are used for transport
properties, such as Viscosity (p.469), thermal conductivity and surface tension. PIPESIM can use
both cubic and non-cubic (p.492) Equations of State.
The cubic equation of state can be written as:
nRT   a 
P  = + Eq. 4.366
V   − b  (V   + m  ⋅ b ) ⋅ (V   + m  ⋅ b )
1 2

Where:

P  is the pressure of the fluid

V   is the total volume of the container containing the fluid
a  is a measure of the attraction between particles
b  is the volume excluded from V  by a particle
n  is the number of moles
T   is the temperature
R  is the gas constant

m 1, m 2 constants:

for the Peng-Robinson EOS (m 1, m 2) = (1 + 2, 1 − 2)

for the Soave— Redlich—Kwong EOS (m 1, m 2) = (1, 0)

The EoS is a cubic equation for the volume, as a function of the pressure, temperature and EoS
parameters. It is often written in terms of the compressibility:
PV  
Z  = Eq. 4.367
nRT  

In the special case (m 1, m 2) = (0, 0) the cubic EoS reduces to van der Waals equation, and in the
special case when a  = b  = 0 the cubic EoS reduces to the ideal gas equation.
The parameters a and b are in fact functions of the pressure, temperature, composition, component
properties and the mixing rules. If there is more than one phase present, the composition of each
phase differs and hence each phase has different equation of state parameters. Assuming a quadratic
mixing rule for a and a linear mixing rule for b the parameters for phase φ are given by
2 2 2
n  ⋅ R  ⋅ T   1/2
a φ = ⋅ ΣΣ( Ai  ⋅ A j ) ⋅ (1 − δ ij ) ⋅ x φi  ⋅ x φj  Eq. 4.368
P 

Technical Description
489
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 507/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

n  ⋅ R  ⋅ T  
b φ = ⋅ Σ B i  ⋅ x φi  Eq. 4.369
P 
Where:

x  is the mole fraction of component i  in phase φ

φi 

Ai  is a function of the temperature T  , the component critical pressure P ci  , critical temperature
T  ci  and acentric factor  ω i 

B i  is a function of the component critical pressure P ci  and critical temperature T  ci 

δ ij  is the Binary Interaction Parameter (p.133) between component i  and component  j 

Thermodynamic properties
Thermodynamic properties can be calculated from the equation of state. The method may vary
between flash packages. The following equations are used in SIS flash.
The fugacity coefficient Φ φi  for each component in each phase is used to determine the phase state
and phase split. It is given by:
∞ 

ln Φ φi  =
−1
RT   ∫  V  
RT  
V  
−
∂ P 
∂ n i  ( ) T  ,V  ,n 
d V   − ln
PV  
RT   Eq. 4.370
 j 

The phase density can be found from the phase volume. For a two parameter Equation of State, this
is found by solving the cubic equation. However, this can give poor prediction of the liquid density.
For a three parameter Equation of State, the phase volume is modified by subtracting a volume shift
term:
eos 
V  φ = V  φ − Σ x φi  ⋅ V  si  Eq. 4.371
o 
The phase enthalpy H  φ is calculated from the ideal gas enthalpy: H  φ :
∞ 

H  φ =
o 
H  φ − ∫  ( )
V  
T  
∂ P 
∂ T   V  
− P d V   − RT  + PV   Eq. 4.372

o 
The phase entropy S φ is calculated from the ideal gas entropy: S φ :
∞ 

S φ = S φo  −
∫ 
R  d V   + R  ⋅ ln PV  
V   ( ∂∂T  P  ) V  
− V   RT   Eq. 4.373

o 
The ideal gas enthalpy and entropy are determined from the ideal gas specific heat C  pφ :
T  
o 
H  φ = ∫ T  
ref  
o 
C  pφ dT   Eq. 4.374

Technical Description
490 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 508/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

T   o 

∫ 
C  pφ P 
− R  ⋅ Σ ( x φi  ⋅ ln x φi )
o 
S φ = dT   − R  ⋅ ln Eq. 4.375
T  
ref   T   P ref  

The ideal gas specific heat is calculated by summing the component specific heats
o  o 
C  pφ = Σ C  pi  ⋅ x φi  Eq. 4.376
o 
For library components, the component specific heat C  pi  is a known functions of temperature. For 
user defined petroleum fractions, the component specific heat is calculated as a function of 
temperature and the component molecular weight MW  i , boiling point temperature T  Bi , specific
gravity γ i  and acentric factor  ω i .

SIS Flash / E300 Flash

PIPESIM contains two implementations of the ECLIPSE compositional flash. The first implementation
is based on PVTi code, but only contains the Peng-Robinson equation of state. The second
implementation uses PVTToolbox code and contains both the Peng Robinson and the Soave—
Redlich—Kwong (SRK) equations of state. The ECLIPSE version of the Peng Robinson EoS has an
option correction for the Ai  term for large acentric factors (ECLIPSE PRCORR keyword).

Note: SIS flash has been deprecated . Please use E300 flash instead.

SIS flash name E300 flash name Peneloux Volume Peng Robinson
Shift Correction 1978 Acentric
Factor Correction
2 Paramater Peng Robinson Peng-Robinson
Standard
2 Paramater Peng Robinson Peng-Robinson Yes
3Paramater Peng Robinson Peng-Robinson Yes
Standard
3 Paramater Peng Robinson Peng-Robinson Yes Yes
SRK Yes
SRK

Multiflash

The Multiflash Implemnetation in PIPESIM has the cubic Equations of State, Peng-Robinson and
RKS, along with the Cubic Plus Association (CPA) model, which is an extension of the RKS
(advanced) cubic EoS to handle polar and hydrogen bonding components. The Multiflash
implementation also includes non-cubic EoS (p.492).
EoS names differ from those in the Multiflash GUI.

Technical Description
491
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 509/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Peng Robinson
Peneloux Volume
PIPESIM GUI name Multiflash GUI name 1978 Acentric
Shift Correction
Factor Correction
Peng-Robinson PR (Advanced) Yes

NOT CURRENTLY
 AVAILABLE PR78 (Advanced) Yes

SRK RKS (Advanced) Yes

 Association (CPA-
 Association (CPA) Yes
Infochem)

Versions of the Peng-Robinson and SRK equations of state without the volume shift correction are
available, but are not recommended. Liquid densities predicted by these equations of state can be
poor. In particular the liquid water density is out by about 15%. This causes problems in PIPESIM,
since it can predict water being lighter than oil. This particular problem does not arise in two phase
flashes, where the water properties are not determined by the equation of state. It does occur in 3
phase flashes, such as Multiflash.
Peng Robinson 1978
Multiflash GUI Volume Shift
PIPESIM GUI name Acentric Factor 
name Correction
Correction
Standard Peng-Robinson PR
NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE PR78 Yes
Standard SRK RKS

DBR flash

The DBR flash has both the Peng Robinson and the Soave— Redlich—Kwong equations of state,
with both two and three parameter (volume shift) options:

DBR flash Volume Shift Correction

Peng-Robinson
Peng-Robinson Yes
SRK
SRK Yes

Non-cubic Equations of State

Equations of state (EoS) describe the pressure, volume and temperature (PVT) behavior of pure
components and mixtures. The phase state and most thermodynamic properties (e.g. density,
enthalpy, entropy) are derived from the equation of state. Separate models are used for transport
properties, such as viscosity, conductivity and surface tension.
PIPESIM can use both cubic (p.489) and non-cubic and Equations of State.

Technical Description
492 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 510/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Multiflash

BWRS 
The BWRS is an 11-parameter non-cubic equation. The BWRS equation gives much more accurate
volumetric and thermal property predictions for light gases and hydrocarbons. It should give
reasonable vapor-liquid phase equilibrium predictions, but owing to its complexity, it requires more
computing time than the cubic EOS (e.g SRK or Peng-Robinson). The EoS is similar to a virial
expansion in density:
′ 2 2

P  =
RT  
V  
⋅ n  +
B  C  D  C  γ 
+ 2 + 5 + 5 ⋅ 1 + 2 ⋅ exp
V   V   V   V   V  
( ) ( ) − γ 

V  
2
Eq. 4.377

The BWRS EoS can be used with most of the components that can be used with the cubic EoS.

Note: It does not work with the Hydrogen component or with aqueous components.

CSMA
CSMA is the Multiflash multi-reference fluid corresponding states model. The CSMA model is based
on a collection of very accurate equations of state for a number of common substances. The density,
thermal properties and VLE of each substance are generally reproduced to within the accuracy of 
experimental measurements. The properties of mixtures can be estimated from a model that reduces
to the (accurate) pure component values as the mixture composition approaches each pure
component limit.
 An important application is mixtures containing CO2, H2S and light hydrocarbons. It can only be used
with a limited selection of components (p.497).

Note: It can only be used via an MFL file.

CPA
The CPA (cubic-plus-association) model extends the capabilities of industry-standard cubic
equations of state to polar and hydrogen-bonding components. It is applicable to a wide variety of 
systems of importance to the upstream oil industry such as hydrocarbons, gases, water and hydrate
inhibitors (alcohols and glycols).
The Multiflash CPA model is based on the Infochem RKSA (advanced Redlich-Kwong-Soave)
equation of state. It has the advantage for non-polar substances, because it reduces the RKSA eos
so that all the characterization methods and parameters for standard oil and gas mixtures can be
used. Extra terms in the equation describe polar and associating compounds. The main application
in Multiflash is representing the fluid phases when modeling hydrates and hydrate inhibition. CPA
shows improvements over standard cubic eos for other systems such as acid gases and water.

Note: Salt components are not supported.

The CPA model is the subject of an active research program that is extending its applicability to many
other systems of industrial importance.

Technical Description
493
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 511/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Reference Fluid Thermodynamic and Transport Properties — REFPROP

REFPROP is an acronym for REFerence fluid PROPerties. The flash package provides
thermodynamic and transport properties of industrially important fluids and their mixtures with an
emphasis on refrigerants and hydrocarbons, especially natural gas systems. It is developed by the
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
REFPROP is based on highly accurate single component and mixture models based on the Helmholtz
energy.

NIST recommendation for pure fluids / mixture

For single components, REFPROP has a recommended set of equations of state explicit in Helmholtz
energy. That is, for each single component, a specific equation of state explicit in Helmholtz energy
is chosen. e.g. for carbon dioxide this is Span and Wagner (1996) (p.552) . Mixture calculations
employ a model that applies mixing rules to the Helmholtz energy of the mixture components; it uses
a departure function to account for the departure from ideal mixing.

GERG

Introduction
GERG is an acronym for Groupe Européen de Recherches Gazières, which is supported by the
European natural-gas companies. The European natural-gas companies include E.ON Ruhrgas
(Germany), Enagás (Spain), Gasunie (The Netherlands), Gaz de France (France), Snam Rete Gas
(Italy) and Statoil (Norway).
The flash package, developed at Ruhr-Universitat Bochum, provides thermodynamic and transport
properties of industrially important gases and other mixtures with an emphasis on hydrocarbons and
further components. Lehrstuhl fuer Thermodynamik (Department of Thermodynamics) of Ruhr-
Universitat Bochum, Germany have developed a wide-range equation of state (EOS) for natural
gases and other mixtures that meets the requirements of standard and advanced natural gas
applications.
The first published equation of state by Ruhr-Universitat Bochum covers mixtures consisting of up to
18 components as listed below:

Annotations:
Yellow - natural gas main components
Red - further hydrocarbons
Blue - further components

Technical Description
494
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 512/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

In 2004, the new equation of state was evaluated by the GERG group and then adopted under the
name GERG-2004 equation of state (or GERG-2004 for short) as an international reference equation
of state for natural gases and similar mixtures (GERG standard).

GERG-2008 

In 2008, Ruhr-Universitat Bochum further extended GERG-2004 by including three additional

components n-nonane, n-decane and hydrogen sulfide, making its component list up to 21
components. This expanded equation of state was called GERG-2004 XT08, where "XT08" meant
"eXTension 2008". In 2010, upon the request of the ISO Working Group (ISO TC193 SC1 WG13),
Ruhr-Universitat Bochum simplified the name of GERG-2004 XT08 to GERG-2008, the current
version of GERG.
The GERG-2008 equation of state is under consideration to be adopted as an ISO Standard (ISO
20765-2 and ISO 20765-3) for natural gases. The ISO group ISO TC 193/SC 1/WG 13 is working on
this matter.

Description

Structure
The GERG equation of state is based on a multi-fluid approximation, which is explicit in the reduced
Helmholtz energy α = a/(RT) [α = Alpha in the figures] dependent on the density ρ, the temperature
T and the composition x (mole fractions) of the mixture. The structure of the equations of state is
shown in the following figure:

Figure 4.21. The basic structure of the equations of state GERG-2004 (N = 18) and GERG-2008 (N 
= 21) for natural gases and other mixtures.

Three elements are necessary to set up a multi-fluid approximation:

• Pure substance equations of state for all components
• Reducing functions for density and temperature
• Departure function

Technical Description
495 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 513/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The reducing functions as well as the departure function were developed to describe the behaviour 
of the mixture and contain substance and mixture specific parameters. From the reducing functions,
the reducing values ρr and Tr for the density and the temperature of the mixture are calculated. They
only depend on the mixture composition and turn into the critical properties ρc and Tc, respectively,
for the pure components. The departure function depends on the reduced density δ, the inversely

reduced temperature
sum of binary specificτand
( τ =generalized
Tau in the figures)
departure, and the composition
functions, which canxbe
of developed
the mixture.
forIt single
contains the
binary
mixtures (binary specific) or for a group of binary mixtures (generalized). The following equation
illustrates this summation:

Figure 4.22. The departure function for the mixture in a multi-fluid approximation as a double
summation over all binary specific and generalized departure functions developed for the binary 

subsystems; GERG-2004: N = 18; GERG-2008: N = 21.

The mathematical structure of the part of the binary specific and generalized departure functions that
depends on δ and τ is similar to the structure of pure substance equations of state and is determined
by our method for optimizing the structure of equations of state. Furthermore, the departure functions
contain a factor that only depends on the composition of the mixture. For further details, see the
references given at the end of this description.
In order to obtain a reference equation of state that yields accurate results for various types of natural
gases and other multi-component mixtures over wide ranges of composition, the reducing and
departure functions were developed using only data for binary mixtures. The 18 pure components
covered by GERG-2004 form 153 different binary mixtures, and the 21 pure components covered by
GERG-2008 result in 210 possible binary mixture combinations. Departure functions Δαrij(δ,τ, x) were
developed only for such binary mixtures for which accurate experimental data existed. For binary
mixtures with limited or poor data, no departure functions were developed, and only the parameters
of the reducing functions ρr(x) und Tr(x) were fitted; in case of very poor data, simplified reducing
functions without any fitting were used.
The multi-fluid approximation used enables a simple inclusion of additional components in future
developments. This means that, for example, fitted parameters of the existing equation of state do
not have to be refitted when incorporating new components. This also holds for the departure function
with its optimized structure, which remains unchanged when expanding the model.

Range of Validity and Accuracy 

The entire range of validity of GERG-2008 covers the following temperatures and pressures:
• Normal range: 90 K ≤ T ≤ 450 K, p ≤ 35 MPa
• Extended range: 60 K ≤ T ≤ 700 K, p ≤ 70 MPa
Moreover, the equation can be reasonably extrapolated beyond the extended range, and each
component can basically cover the entire composition range, i.e. (0-100)%.

Technical Description
496 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 514/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

GERG-2008 represents most of the experimental data, including the most accurate measurements
available, to within their uncertainties. The uncertainty values given in the following correspond to the
uncertainties of the most accurate experimental data.
In the gas region, the uncertainties in density and speed of sound are 0.1%, in enthalpy differences
(0.2-0.5)% and in heat capacities (1-2)%. In the liquid region, the uncertainty in density is (0.1-0.5)%,
in enthalpy differences (0.5-1)% and in heat capacities (1-2)%. In the two-phase region, vapour 
pressures are calculated with a total uncertainty of (1-3)%, which corresponds to the uncertainties of 
the experimental VLE data. For mixtures with limited or poor data, the uncertainty values stated above
can be somewhat higher.
These accuracy statements are based on the fact that GERG-2008 represents the corresponding
experimental data to within their experimental uncertainties (with very few exceptions).

References
The comprehensive descriptions of GERG (with the entire numerical information, experimental data
used, quality, range of validity, etc.) are retrievable from the following reference:
Kunz, O., Klimeck, R., Wagner, W., Jaeschke, M. The GERG-2004 wide-range equation of state for 
natural gases and other mixtures. GERG TM15 2007. Fortschr.-Ber. VDI, Reihe 6, Nr. 557, VDI
Verlag, Düsseldorf, 2007; also available as GERG Technical Monograph 15 (2007).
Kunz, O., Wagner, W. The GERG-2008 wide-range equation of state for natural gases and other 
mixtures: An expansion of GERG-2004. To be submitted to J. Chem. Eng. Data (2011).

Note: This GERG Monograph is available for downloaded from the website of GERG - http://
www.gerg.info/publications/tm.htm

Components for Non-Cubic Equations of State

Only library components

GERG-2008 can be used
non-cubic equations for the(p.492).
of states CSMA, NIST recommendation for pure fluid/mixture and

Formula Multiflash (CSMA) REFPROP (NIST recommendation GERG-2008 (GERG-2008)

for pure fluid/mixture)
CH4 Methane methane Methane
C2H6 Ethane ethane Ethane
C3H8 Propane propane Propane
i-C4H10 Isobutane isobutane Isobutane
n-C4H10 Butane butane n-Butane
i-C5H12 Isopentane isopentane Isopentane
n-C5H12 Pentane pentane n-Pentane
n-C6H14 Hexane hexane n-Hexane
n-C7H16 Heptane heptane n-Heptane
n-C8H18 Octane octane n-Octane
n-C9H20 nonane n-Nonane

Technical Description
497 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 515/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

n-C10H22 decane n-Decane

C2H2 Ethylene
C6H12 Cyclohexane
C7H8 Toluene
H2 Hydrogen hydrogen (normal) Hydrogen
He Helium helium Helium
N2 Nitrogen nitrogen Nitrogen
O2 Oxygen oxygen Oxygen
 Ar Argon argon Argon
H2S Hydrogen Sulphide hydrogen sulfide Hydrogen sulphide
CO Carbon Monoxide carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide
CO2 Carbon Dioxide carbon dioxide Carbon dioxide

NH3 Ammonia
Multiflash is a 3–phase flash and allows aqueous components. REFPROP and GERG-2008 allow
water, but are two phase flashes. The water component is therefore removed before the flash
calculation, and water properties are calculated outside the flash.

Formula Multiflash (CSMA) NIST-REFPROP GERG-2008

H2O Water water Water  
C2H5–OH Ethanol

Viscosity Models for Compositional Fluids

Select Setup » Compositional, then on the Property Models tab, select one of the following models
for determining viscosity:
• Pedersen (the default)
• LBC (Lohrenz-Bray-Clark)
• Aasberg-Petersen (only available for E300 and DBR)
• NIST recommendation for pure fluids / mixture (only available for REFPROP and GERG-2008)

Note: Not available under SIEP SPPTS.

Preliminary testing has shown the Pedersen method to be the most widely applicable and accurate
for oil and gas viscosity predictions. Multiflash uses the Pedersen method as the default viscosity
model, though an option is available to choose the LBC model for backward compatibility. The
Pedersen method has been adopted as the default in response to the deficiencies of the LBC method.
The Pedersen method is based on the corresponding state theory, as is the LBC method.
The results for different components are as follows:

Technical Description
498 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 516/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Lower Alkanes
Predicted liquid viscosities using LBC and Pedersen methods have been compared to
experimental data for Methane and Octane as a function of both temperature and pressure
and for Pentane as a function of temperature. For both Methane and Pentane the Pedersen
method predictions show close agreement with experimental data. For Octane, the Pedersen
and LBC methods give comparable results. For the aromatic compound, Ethyl Benzene, the
Pedersen method is not as good as LBC.
Higher Alkanes
The results for higher alkanes Eicosane and Triacontane are mixed: the Pedersen method
is adequate for Eicosane whereas LBC is slightly better than Pedersen for Triacontane. For 
Triacontane both the LBC and Pedersen methods are inadequate. However, in the majority
of cases the higher hydrocarbons should be treated as petroleum fractions rather than as
single named components.
Petroleum Fractions
The LBC method describes viscosity as a function of the fluid critical parameters, acentric

factor and density.

characterization Thepetroleum
of the LBC model is therefore very sensitive to both density and the
fractions.
Water 
The Pedersen method suffers the same drawback as LBC in that it is unable to predict the
temperature dependence of water, a polar molecule. To overcome this problem, the
Pedersen method has been modified especially for water so that it now accurately models
the viscosity of water in the liquid phase. This was achieved by the introduction of a
temperature-dependent correction factor. However the prediction of the viscosity of the gas
phase is also affected, though in only a minor way.
Methanol
Neither the LBC nor Pedersen method can deal with polar components, with the Pedersen
method slightly worse than LBC. This is not surprising, as both methods were developed for 
non-polar components and mixtures. The Pedersen method works best with light alkanes
and petroleum mixtures in the liquid phase. It performs as well or better than the LBC method
in nearly all situations.
The choice of the equation of state has a large effect on the viscosities predicted by both methods.
The LBC method is more sensitive to the equation of state effects than is the Pedersen method.
See also: Package (p.128), Binary Interaction Parameters (p.133), Emulsions (p.503), Equation of 
State (p.489)

Solid Precipitation

Asphaltene Prediction
ONLY AVAILABLE WITH MFL FILES
 Asphaltene formation line is displayed automatically on the phase envelope to enable the
determination of the conditions (temperature and pressure) at which asphaltene appears

Technical Description
499
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 517/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Hydrates
Only available with Multifllash.
Requires additional licensing option.
Hydrate lines are displayed automatically on the phase envelope (p.136) if water is in the component
list and hydrates will form. The amount of water may influence the results of the calculations,
particularly when inhibitors or water-soluble gases are present.

Background 
Natural gas hydrates are solid ice-like compounds of water and light components of natural gas. They
form at temperatures above the ice point and are therefore a serious concern in oil and gas processing
operations. The phase behavior of the systems involving hydrates can be very complex because up
to six phases must normally be considered. The behavior is particularly complex if there is significant
mutual solubility between phases.
The Multiflash hydrate model uses a modification of the SRK equation of state for the fluid phases
plus the van der Waals and Platteeuw model for the hydrate phases. The model can explicitly
represent all the effects of the presence of inhibitors.
Hydrate Inhibitors
Hydrate inhibitors decrease the hydrate formation temperature or increase the hydrate formation
pressure in a given gas mixture. The model includes parameters for the commonly used inhibitors
such as Methanol, and the glycols MEG, DEG and TEG.
 A new mixing rule has been developed for the SRK equation of state to model the inhibitors' effects
on the fluid phases. The treatment of hydrate inhibition has the following features. The model can
represent explicitly all the effects of inhibitors, including the depression of hydrate formation
temperature, the depression of the freezing point of water, the reduction in the vapor pressure of 
water (i.e. the dehydrating effect) and the partitioning of water and inhibitor into the oil, gas and
aqueous phases. The model has been developed using all available data for mixtures of water with
Methanol, MEG, DEG and TEG. This involves simultaneously representing hydrate dissociation
temperatures, depression of freezing point data and vapor-liquid equilibrium data. The solubilities of 
hydrocarbons and light gases in water/inhibitor mixtures have also been represented. There is no
fundamental difference between calculations with and without inhibitors. To investigate the effect of 
an inhibitor it must be added to the list of components in the mixture and the amount must be specified
 just as for any other component. It is not possible to specify the amount of inhibitor in a particular 
phase, only the total amount in the mixture. This is because the inhibitor will be split among the
different phases present at equilibrium with the amount in a particular phase depending on the
ambient conditions and the amounts of other components present in that phase This is exactly what
happens in reality. The amount of inhibitor typically needed would be approximately 35% by mass of 
inhibitor relative to water.

Model features
The main features of the model are:
• The description of the hydrate phase behavior uses a thermodynamically consistent set of models
for all phases.

Technical Description
500 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 518/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• The vapor pressures of pure water are reproduced. The following natural gas hydrate formers are
included: METHANE, ETHANE, PROPANE, ISOBUTANE, BUTANE, NITROGEN, CO2 AND
H2S.
• The thermal properties (enthalpies and entropies) of the hydrates are included, permitting flashes
involving these phases.
• The properties of the hydrates have been fixed by investigating data for natural gas components
in both simple and mixed hydrates to obtain reliable predictions of both structure I and structure
II hydrates.
• The properties of the empty hydrate lattices have been investigated and the most reliable recent
values have been adopted.
• Proper allowance has been made for the solubilities of the gases in water so that the model
parameters are not distorted by this effect. This is particularly important for Carbon Dioxide and
Hydrogen Sulphide, which are relatively soluble in water.
• Correct thermodynamic calculations of the most stable hydrate structure have been made. The
model has been tested on a wide selection of open literature and proprietary experimental data.
In most cases the hydrate dissociation temperature is predicted to within 1 degree Kelvin.
To ensure that reliable results are obtained, it is particularly important to use the correct set of models
and phase descriptors. The hydrates model set contains a complete set of model and phase
specifications.

Hydrate Model Details

The hydrate model set has the following definitions:
FLUID PHASE MODEL
The recommended fluid phase model is the advanced SRK equation of state with the a
parameter fitted to the pure component vapor pressure, the Peneloux density correction and

the INFOCHEMlight
hydrocarbons, mixing rule.
gases, Theand
water required binary
inhibitors areinteraction parameters
available from (BIP) for 
the OILGAS2 BIP data set.
HYDRATE MODELS
The hydrate model consists of lattice parameters for the empty hydrate and parameters
interaction of gas molecules with water in the hydrate. There are different parameter values
for each hydrate structure, HYDRATE I and II. In addition, the hydrate must be associated
with a liquid phase model that is used to obtain the properties of water. It is important that
this is the same model that is used for water as a fluid phase.
PHASES
In most cases, six phase descriptors are required: gas, hydrocarbon liquid, aqueous liquid,
hydrate I, hydrate II and ice. At high pressures and/or low temperatures the `gas' phase may
become liquid-like and a second non-aqueous liquid PD is needed. This is also the case if 
there is a significant amount of CO2 or H2S present. In most practical cases, the gas contains
propane and has a hydrate II stable hydrate structure. Key components are defined to
distinguish between the hydrocarbon and aqueous liquid phases. In principle, hydrate
calculations and phase envelope plotting with Multiflash are no different from flash
calculations and envelope plotting for the fluid phases alone. Multiflash treats fluid and solid
phases the same. It can carry out a full range of flashes for streams with hydrates.

Technical Description
501
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 519/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Ice Prediction
Only available with Multiflash Flash.
Ice is treated as a pure solid phase. The ice formation line is displayed automatically on the phase
envelope if water is in the component list and ice will form.

Wax Prediction
ONLY AVAILABLE WITH MFL FILES
Waxes are complex mixtures of solid hydrocarbons that freeze (solidify) out of crude oils if the
temperature is low enough - below the critical wax deposition temperature. They are mainly formed
from normal paraffins or if isoparaffins and naphthenes are present. The wax formation line is
displayed automatically on the phase envelope to enable the determination of the conditions
(temperature and pressure) at which wax could deposit.
Wax deposition (p.182) can also be modelled.

4.3.3 Fluid Property Table Files

Fluid properties can be pre-calculated for a range of pressure and temperature values and stored in
a table. PIPESIM reads the table and can interpolate it to get properties for any pressure and
temperature. Tables in a format that can be read by PIPESIM can be generated by a range of 
Compositional Fluid Packages, including PIPESIM itself. Table files representing different fluids
cannot be mixed. They are therefore useful in single branch models, but less so in network models,
unless the entire network contains only a single fluid.
The tables contain liquid and gas properties:

Property
Pressure psia kPa  
Temperature F K 
Liquid Volume Fraction % %
Water cut % %
Liquid Density 3 3
lb  /  ft  kg  / m 

Gas Density 3 3
lb  /  ft  kg  / m 

Gas Compressibility
Gas Molecular Weight lb  / lbmol kg /   kgmol 

Liquid Viscosity cP cP  
Gas Viscosity cP cP  
Total Enthalpy BTU  / lbmol kJ  / kgmol 
 
Total Entropy BTU  / (lbmol  ⋅ F  ) kJ  / (kgmol  ⋅ K )
Liquid Heat Capacity BTU  / (lbmol  ⋅ F  ) kJ  / (kgmol  ⋅ K )

Technical Description
502 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 520/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Gas Heat Capacity BTU  / (lbmol  ⋅ F  ) kJ  / (kgmol  ⋅ K )

Liquid Surface Tension dyne  / cm dyne /   cm 
Gas Thermal Conductivity BTU  / (hr  ⋅ ft  ⋅ F  ) W  / (m  ⋅ K )
Oil Thermal Conductivity BTU  / (hr  ⋅ ft  ⋅ F  ) W  / (m  ⋅ K )
Water Thermal Conductivity BTU  / (hr  ⋅ ft  ⋅ F  ) W  / (m  ⋅ K )

The number of phases and the phase volume fractions, can be determined from the liquid fraction
and water cut. However, since only liquid and gas properties are available, these tables are only
suitable for use with two-phase flow models.
The table files also contain the total molecular weight of the fluid, which is independent of the pressure
and temperature. This allows PIPESIM to calculate the liquid molecular weight from the other table
properties. The total molecular weight, liquid molecular weight and gas molecular weight are then
used to convert the molar quantities (enthalpy, entropy and heat capacities) to mass based quantities.
Table files may also contain compositional data. In this case the table data may be ignored and
PIPESIM may use normal compositional flashing.
Internal fluid property tables
PIPESIM can also use property tables to store fluid data in compositional runs. Properties are
interpolated from the table properties and as the simulation progr esses, tables values are filled in
when necessary. This can speed up compositional simulations, although it requires more memory to
store the data. These tables can be used in network simulations with multiple fluids — a new mixture
can be created by mixing the fluid components and a new internal table created for the new fluid.

4.3.4 Liquid Properties

Two
suchphase
as oil flow correlations
and water, model
the two flow
liquid of a liquid
phases needand a gas
to be phase. When
combined there areastwo
and modelled liquid phases,
a single liquid
phase. The oil and water will flow at the same velocity. The liquid density can be simply averaged.
However more complicated models are used for liquid viscosity (p.503) and liquid-gas surface
tension (p.508).

Liquid Viscosity and Oil/Water Emulsions

 An emulsion is a mixture of two immiscible liquid phases. One phase (the dispersed phase) is carried
as droplets in the other (the continuous phase). In Oil/Water systems at low watercuts, oil is usually
the continuous phase. As watercut is increased there comes a point where phase inversion occurs,
and water becomes the continuous phase. This is the Critical Watercut of Phase Inversion ,
otherwise called the
mixture is usually highest at. and
cutoff  It occurs typically
just below the between 55% and
cutoff. Emulsion 70% watercut.
viscosities can beThe viscosity
many of the
times higher 
than the viscosity of either phase alone.

Correlations and methods

The methods available for calculating the oil/water mixture viscosity are:
• Inversion

Technical Description
503
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 521/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• Volume Ratio
• User-supplied Table
In addition a number of emulsion correlations are available:
• Woelflin
• Brinkman
• Vand
• Richardson
• Leviton and Leighton
The cutoff can be entered as a watercut, or calculated using the Brauner and Ullman correlation. The
cutoff is used by all the emulsion correlations and methods, except for the Volume ratio method.

Figure 4.23. Viscosity of oil/water mixtures

Inversion
The inversion method sets the liquid viscosity to the viscosity of the continuous phase. This means
that, at a watercut below or equal to the cutoff, water droplets are carried by a continuous oil phase,
and the mixture assumes the viscosity of the oil. At a watercut above the cut-off value, oil droplets
are carried by a continuous water phase, and the mixture assumes the viscosity of the water.

Volume ratio
The Volume ratio method calculates mixture viscosity as follows:

μ m  = μ o ϕ o  + μ w  ϕ w  Eq. 4.378

where

Technical Description
504
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 522/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

μ o  is oil viscosity

ϕ o  is the volume fraction of oil

μ w  is the water viscosity

ϕ w  is the volume fraction of water 

User-Supplied Table
This method uses a user-supplied table of viscosities or viscosity multipliers against flowing (in situ)
watercut. The table is entered in the dialog revealed by pressing the Setup emulsion table button.
The first watercut value in the table must be zero. The viscosity value at zero watercut is used to
divide into all the others to yield multipliers. Therefore, the viscosity table can be populated with
absolute viscosity values, or with multipliers.
The table is applied to watercuts from zero up to the supplied watercut cutoff value; above this, the
liquid viscosity is set to the water viscosity using a transition region.
Woelflin
The Woelflin correlations assume that the continuous phase changes from oil to water at a given
watercut cutoff point. This means that, at a watercut below or equal to the cutoff value, a water-in-oil
emulsion forms, and the emulsion viscosity is given by the Woelflin correlation. At a watercut above
the cutoff value, oil droplets are carried by a continuous water phase, and the mixture assumes the
viscosity of the water, using a transition region.
In his 1942 paper, Woelflin described 3 types of water-in-oil emulsions, which he labeled loose,
medium and tight. The paper provides tables of viscosity multiplication factors as a function of 
watercut for the 3 types, and a chart showing curves to fit the data. The PIPESIM implementation is
a digitization of the curves.
The viscosity of all 3 emulsion types increases with watercut up to the specified cutoff value, above
which it falls and assumes the value of the water viscosity. It should be noted that all 3 emulsion types
can yield emulsion viscosities many times greater than the oil viscosity. In the case of the tight
emulsion, multiplier values in the region of 100 are readily obtained. In his experiments on tight
emulsions, Woelflin reported that the viscosity of a 60% watercut emulsion could not be determined,
because the mixture was too viscous to flow through the viscometer.
Versions of PIPESIM prior to the 2007.1 release implemented only the loose emulsion correlation,
using a curve-fit as follows:
2.2
(
μ m  = μ o  1 + 0.00123V  W   ) Eq. 4.379

where μ o  is oil viscosity, and ϕ w  is volume fraction of water. This option is retained for backwards
compatibility and is called Pipesim Original Woelflin. It gives very similar answers to the new loose
emulsion option up to a watercut of 60%, but diverges above this.

Technical Description
505 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 523/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Brinkman
The Brinkman correlation calculates elevated emulsion viscosities on either side of the cutoff, using
the formula
−2.5
μ L  = μ c (1 − ϕ d ) Eq. 4.380

where μ c  is the viscosity of the continuous phase and ϕ d  is the volume fraction of the discontinuous
phase.

Vand 
The Vand correlations calculate elevated emulsion viscosities on either side of the cutoff, using the
formula
e 
(k 1 ϕ d )
μ L  = μ c  Eq. 4.381
(1 − k 2 ϕ d )
where μ c  is the viscosity of the continuous phase,

ϕ d  is the volume fraction of the discontinuous phase,

and the coefficients k 1 and k 2 are selected as follows. The Vand coefficients are 2.5 and 0.609; Barnea
and Mizrahi are 2.66 and 1.0; the user-supplied coefficients are entered in the accompanying data
entry boxes.

Richardson
The Richardson correlation calculates elevated emulsion viscosities on either side of the cutoff, using
the formula
e 
μ L  = μ c (k ϕ d ) Eq. 4.382

where μ c  is the viscosity of the continuous phase,

ϕ d  is the volume fraction of the discontinuous phase,

and k  is a user-supplied constant. Separate values of k  can be provided for oil-in-water and water-
in-oil conditions, the default values are 3.8 and 6.6.

Leviton and Leighton

The Leviton and Leighton correlation calculates elevated emulsion viscosities either side of the cutoff,
using the formula
e 
2.5( μ d  + 0.4 μ c )
μ L  = μ c  1.66 3.66 Eq. 4.383
( μ  + μ  )( ϕ  + ϕ 
d  c  d  d 
+ ϕ d  )

Technical Description
506 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 524/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

where μ d  and μ c  are the viscosities of the discontinuous and continuous phases, and ϕ d  is the volume
fraction of the discontinuous phase.

Brauner and Ullman

The Brauner and Ullman correlation can be used to calculate the watercut cutoff value. It uses the
formula
0.4

(( ))
0.6
ρt  μ t 
c  = 1 − 0.4
Eq. 4.384
0.6
1 + ρt  μ t 

where

c  is the cutoff/100

μ o 
μ t  = μ w 

μ o  is the oil viscosity (in cP)

μ w  is the water viscosity (in cP)

 ρ o 
 ρ t  =
 ρ w 

 ρ o  is the oil density (in lb/ft3)

 ρ w  is the water density (in lb/ft3)

See also: Inversion (p.504) and Volume Ratio (p.504).

Limits and Safety factors

Emulsion correlations and methods have the potential to cause difficulty for the calculation engine.
Extremely large viscosities can be predicted, this can cause convergence failure. The discontinuous
behavior around the inversion point (cutoff) can also cause problems, particularly in a network model.
 As a result, a number of limits and safety factors have been introduced, as described below. All of 
these are properties of the model: only one value is held, and it is applied to all fluids in the model.

Maximum cutoff 
 A typical value for the cutoff is between 55% to 70%, and the default is 60%. The Woelflin correlations
are particularly sensitive to high cutoff values, so there is a maximum limit of 70%, which will be
applied silently. The limit may be extended using the keyword MAXCUTOFF= (p.568).

Technical Description
507 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 525/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Transition region above the cutoff 

The Woelflin and user-supplied table methods exhibit pronounced discontinuity about the cutoff. For 
these methods therefore, the discontinuity about the cutoff is smoothed with a transition region,
extending from the cutoff value in the direction of increasing watercut. By default this is 5% wide.
Predicted viscosities in this region are interpolated between the value predicted at the cutoff (the
maximum emulsion viscosity point, with oil the continuous phase) and the value at cutoff plus
transition region width (the viscosity predicted from a continuous water phase). The size of the
transition region can be controlled with the keyword SMOOTHCUTOFF (p.568) =.

Maximum Emulsion Table Multiplier 

The user-supplied and Woelflin correlations are subject to a maximum multiplier limit, default value
100. This can be controlled with the keyword MAXEMULSION (p.568) =.

Maximum liquid viscosity

 As viscosity increases, the resistance to fluid flow also increases. There comes a point where viscosity
is so high that the term 'fluid' ceases to be appropriate, and the prediction of pressure drops due to
fluid flow can be regarded as non physical. The maximum liquid viscosity is by default 1.0E+7 (ten
million) cP, this can be controlled by the keyword MAXLIQVISC (p.568) =.

Liquid-gas Surface Tension

The surface tension between the liquid and gas phase is used in two phase flow correlations, for 
example to calculate bubble velocity. If there are two liquid phases present, the surface tension will
depend on the oil-gas surface tension, the water-gas surface tension, and the water cut.
In black oil models, when there is sufficient oil, it is assumed that the liquid is segregated with the
water below the oil. The gas in therefore only in contact with the oil, and the surface tension is given
by:

σ L  = σ O  WCUT   < 60

If water dominates the liquid then the surface tension is taken as an average of the oil-gas and water-
gas surface tensions:

(
σ L  = σ O  ⋅ 1 −
WCUT  
100 )
+ σ O  ⋅
WCUT   WCUT   > 60
100

σ L  is the surface tension between the oil and the gas (dynes/cm)

σ O  is the surface tension between the oil and the gas (dynes/cm)

σ W   is the surface tension between the water and the gas (dynes/cm)

WCUT   is the water cut (%)

Technical Description
508 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 526/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4.4 Solids Modeling

Solids are modeled in the following ways:

• Sand is modeled for its effects on erosion. (Refer to Erosion and Corrosion Options (p.153).) Sand
inventory is traced in the model. (Refer to Sand Modeling (p.141).)
• Wax is modeled for its deposition behavior. (Refer to Wax Deposition (p.182).)
• Wax, Asphaltene, and Scale are modeled for their appearance in the fluid. (Refer to Solids
 Appearance (p.142).)
See also Scale Predictions (p.142).

4.4.1 PIPESIM-DBR Wax Deposition Models

The DBR wax models are described in Pan et al 2009 (p.550).

Single phase (oil) Wax Deposition Model

The single phase wax model consists of two mechanisms, shear stress effects and molecular 
diffusion. The molecular diffusion mechanism is the same approach taken by many authors (Brown
et al, 1993 (p.540), Singh, 2000 (p.552), Hernandez et al 2004 (p.545) and others). The diffusion
coefficient of each component is calculated with the Hayduk and Minhas (p.545) correlation. The
shear removal effects are modelled using the Venkatesan (2004) (p.553) correlation.
sp  wax  a 
d C i  τ 
(1 − φ ) ⋅ ( d δ 
d t 
)i 
= − D i  ⋅
d T  
⋅
d T  
d r 
− k  ⋅ δ  ⋅
ϕ 
b 
Eq. 4.385

The wax porosity φ is modelled as a function of the shear stress

z 
1
φ = φmax
( 0.5 +
τ 
τ max
) for 
τ 
τ max
> 0.5

Eq. 4.386
τ 
φ = φmax for  < 0.5
τ max

Two Phase (Gas/Oil) Wax Deposition Model

Oil wetting of the wall is one of the primary driving forces for wax deposition. Therefore the flow pattern
contributes to DBR’s
flow patterns. the amount
plan of wax
is to deposited.
account Matzain
for the (p.548)
flow pattern used empirical
through correlations
liquid holdup forfrom
(available varying
the
flow model) and to directly calculate the surface wetting (Grolman, 1996 (p.544)). The new two
phase deposition rate will then be:
tp  sp 

( d δ 
d t 
)
i 
α 
= S  H  
β 
( d δ 
d t 
) i 
Eq. 4.387

where

Technical Description
509
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 527/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1
α  = β  =
2
In doing this, the model is setup to address three phase wax deposition by scaling the deposition rate
by the surface wetting of oil.

Nomenclature
δ  Wax deposition thickness (m)
sp  Single phase wax deposition rate at point i  in the pipe (m/s)
( d δ 
d t 
)
i 

tp  Two phase wax deposition rate at point i  in the pipe (m/s)
( d δ 
d t 
)
i 

2
D i  Diffusion coefficient (m   / s )

C i 
wax  Concentration of wax components

T   Temperature (variable K)

r  radius (variable m)

R  Inner radius of pipe (m)

k  Shear reduction multiplier or parameter 

τ  Shear stress (variable Pa)

τ max Yield stress of wax (Pa)

φ Porosity of wax

φmax Maximum porosity

α  Surface wetted coefficient

β  Liquid holdup coefficient

a  Shear stress coefficient (a=1.9 )

b  Wax porosity coefficient (b=2.3 )

z  Porosity coefficient (z= 1)

S  Surface wetting ratio

Technical Description
510 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 528/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

H   Liquid holdup

4.5 Workflows
4.5.1 Solvers

Tolerance Equations
The tolerance of each pressure is calculated from the equation:

( p  − p av )
tol  = abs  ((  p av  × 100 % ) ) Eq. 4.388

If all tolerance values are within the specified network tolerance then that node has passed the
pressure convergence test. This is repeated for each node. The total mass flowrate into and the total
mass flowrate out of a node ar e averaged.
The tolerance is calculated from the equation:

(Totalmq in  − Tota lmq av )
tol  = abs  ( (Tota lmq av  × 100 % ) ) Eq. 4.389

4.5.2 Addressing Network Speed Issues

This page summarizes a set of settings that can be used to speed up PIPESIM execution times. See
also Speed up the calculation engine (p.156).

In
aregeneral, Performance
taking too long to run,isthe
a trade off between
user can speed
try to adjust theand accuracy.
parameters of When dealing
PIPESIM withmodel
and the models that
in four 
(4) steps:
Step 1 (p.511): Changes to the system, the PIPESIM execution and reporting parameters
Step 2 (p.512): High level changes to the PIPESIM model
Step 3 (p.513): Low Level changes to the PIPESIM model or trade off of accuracy vs. speed
Step 4 (p.515): Revert back to more accurate settings

Step 1: Changes to the system, the PIPESIM execution and reporting parameters
These settings do not modify the model, but try to reduce the workload on your system to get the
result faster.
-v1 switch  Add this switch to the engine. Set this using Setup » Preferences  » Engine then
the Advanced tab. This stops the engine from writing data to the PIPESIM branch
window. This is the default setting from version 1.30 of PIPESIM.
Restart File This uses the results from the previous simulation as estimates for the unknown
variables. This is the equivalent of having the best possible estimates. This is most

Technical Description
511
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 529/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

effective when you are running many similar scenarios with only small variations.
See Restart Model (p.189) for the limitations.
Minimize Minimize the PIPESIM-Net engine window using the minimize button (top right)
window after the engines starts. This lets the computer optimize the updates to the window.
Network Save the model to the local PC rather than to a Network drive. This will remove
potential network delays. Also use a local license file if possible.
-k0 switch Reduce the output to the minimum.

Step 2: High level changes to the PIPESIM model

These settings are high level changes that can be quickly reverted back once you have fine tuned
your model and want to get more accuracy. They involve some trade off of accuracy vs. speed.

Tolerance PIPESIM uses an iterative approach and stops calculation when the iterative error is
less than a given tolerance. Thus, the tolerance has a direct impact on the number of 
iterations and the time taken to have an acceptable result. The default tolerance is
1%. You can put a higher tolerance to get some quick results under Setup »
Iterations. Note that results with tolerance greater than 2% are not recommended.
Moody When the specified phase correlation is the Moody correlation or the Cullender-Smith
friction correlation, PIPESIM will calculate the Moody friction factor using either an iterative
factor  implicit method (Colebrook-White equation (Moody chart)), an explicit method (see
the Sonnad and Goudar paper (p.552)) or a fast explicit or approximate method (see
the Moody paper (p.548)) . The default calculation method for the friction factor is
the explicit method. The Moody friction factor calculation method will also have an
impact on the horizontal and vertical flow correlations as the friction factor used to
compute the pressure gradient in the flow correlations will be evaluated based on the
method specified by the Moody friction factor calculation method. The reader is
referred to Single Phase Flow Correlations (p.348) for more details. The fastest but
less accurate method is the approximate method. To activate it, in the bottom text box
under Setup » Engine options, type the following on two lines:
OVERRIDE
SPHASE MOODYCALC = APPROXIMATE
Segment Pipes are subdivided by PIPESIM in shorter segments to calculate pressure drops.
length More subdivisions of the pipe provide more accurate answers but typically takes more
time. The default number of subdivisions in PIPESIM is 4. You can change it using
Setup » Engine options and the Option Control tab. Set the Segments per pipe
length to 3. Note that if you set this to 2, the simulation may go even faster but the
answers may be less stable. Finally if PIPESIM encounters discontinuities using the
user-suggested subdivision, it will override it, which may ... as a final consequence
slow the simulation.
Extra one PIPESIM reports pressure, temperature, flow, etc. at the middle point of each
foot segment. To be able to report accurate values at the start and end of each node,
segment PIPESIM adds an extra one foot segment at either side of each node. If you are not
interested in the exact values at the beginning and end of each node, or are performing

Technical Description
512 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 530/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

some fine tuning, deactivate that option using Setup » Engine options and selecting
the Option Control tab. Deselect Additional short segments either side of each node
and selecting under Options Control Group, Use network options. Alternatively, in the
bottom text box under Setup » Engine options, type the following on two lines:
OVERRIDE
OPTION EOFS =OFF
Wells Wells offline allow a production well, in a network model, to be modeled using a well
offline performance curve of flowrate versus [outlet] well head pressure - example curve.
These well performance curve(s) are stored in ASCII files and can be created using
a PIPESIM operation or any other suitable Nodal analysis package. This option has
been introduced to reduce the time required to solve large networks. Indeed in a
network model, a significant amount of time is spent computing well bore pressure
losses. In addition, it insures that the well operates in its stable region by providing a
smooth curve. The reader is referred to Well Curves (p.39) for more details. To enable
Wells offline for a specific well, select Setup » Boundary Conditions and select PQ
Curve for that well. Generally the user can set all wells offline by typing on two lines
in the bottom text box under Setup » Engine options
OVERRIDE
SETUP WOLMODE= CREATE?
The user is referred to SETUP keywords (p.715) for the other options for the wells
offline mode.
Flashing Flashes are very expensive in term of performance. PIPESIM can minimize the
settings number of flashes depending on the settings in Setup » Flashing. See Options
Calculations procedure (p.568) for more details. The options available include:

•  Always Interpolate
properties determined by in:athis
(fastest) option uses
predefined gridinterpolation between
of temperature physicalpoints.
and pressure
• Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolation elsewhere: this is
a compromise between speed and accuracy, which assumes that properties will
change more rapidly when close to a phase boundary. Interpolation is performed
whenever the grid points comprising a rectangle all show the presence of the same
phases. For example. if all 4 points in the rectangle have some oil, some gas, and
no water, then we assume the rectangle lies entirely within the 2-phase region of 
the hydrocarbon phase envelope, so interpolation is appropriate. If however one,
two or three of the points have no oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon dew point line
crosses the rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.

•  Always Rigorous Flash (slowest). Interpolation never occurs: properties are

obtained by flashing at the required pressure and temperature. This is the slowest
method but most accurate method.

Step 3: Low Level changes to the PIPESIM model or trade off of accuracy vs. speed
These settings typically involve trade off of speed vs. accuracy and might require some substantial
work to revert once you have fine tuned your model and want to get more accuracy.

Technical Description
513
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 531/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Tolerance PIPESIM uses an iterative approach and stops calculation when the iterative error 
is less than a given tolerance. Thus, the tolerance has a direct impact on the number 
of iterations and the time taken to have an acceptable result. The default tolerance
is 1%. You can put a higher tolerance to get some quick results under Setup »
Iterations. Note that results with tolerance greater than 2% are not recommended.
Boundary Enter flow rates as the fixed inlet boundary condition. This usually solves faster.
conditions
Loops  Avoid loops in the network topology if possible. Loops require extra checks from
PIPESIM to ensure overall consistency (e.g. elevation difference)
Moody When the specified phase correlation is the Moody correlation or the Cullender-Smith
friction correlation, PIPESIM will calculate the Moody friction factor using either an iterative
factor  implicit method (Colebrook-White equation (Moody chart)), an explicit method (see
the Sonnad and Goudar paper (p.552)) or a fast explicit or approximate method
(see the Moody paper (p.548)) . The default calculation method for the friction factor 
is the explicit method. The Moody friction factor calculation method will also have an

impact
computeonthe
thepressure
horizontal and vertical
gradient in theflow
flowcorrelations
correlationsas
willthe
befriction factor
evaluated usedon
based to
the method specified by the Moody friction factor calculation method. See Single
Phase Flow Correlations (p.348) for more details. The fastest but less accurate
method is the approximate method. To activate it, in the bottom text box under 
Setup » Engine options, type the following on two lines:
OVERRIDE
SPHASE MOODYCALC = APPROXIMATE
Segment Pipes are subdivided by PIPESIM in shorter segments to calculate pressure drops.
length More subdivisions of the pipe provide more accurate answers but typically takes
more time. The default number of subdivisions in PIPESIM is 4. You can change it
using Setup » Engine options and the Option Control tab. Set the Segments per 
 pipe length to 3. Note that if you set this to 2, the simulation may go even faster but
the answers may be less stable. Finally if PIPESIM encounters discontinuities using
the user-suggested subdivision, it will override it, which may slow the simulation.
Fluid model In general, blackoil models are faster than compositional.
Flow The native bja package is the fastest. In that package, the No Slip assumption
correlation correlation will be the less realistic but the fastest. 3rd party-based correlations will
be the slowest.
Wells offline Wells offline allow a production well, in a network model, to be modeled using a well
performance curve of flowrate versus [outlet] well head pressure - example curve.
These well performance curve(s) are stored in ASCII files and can be created using
a PIPESIM operation or any other suitable Nodal analysis package. This option has
been introduced to reduce the time required to solve large networks. Indeed in a
network model, a significant amount of time is spent computing well bore pressure
losses. In addition, it ensures that the well operates in its stable region by providing
a smooth curve. The reader is referred to Well Curves (p.39) for more details. To
enable Wells offline for a specific well, select Setup » Boundary Conditions and

Technical Description
514
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 532/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

select PQ Curve for that well. Generally the user can set all wells offline by typing
the following on two lines in the bottom text box under Setup » Engine options
OVERRIDE
SETUP WOLMODE= CREATE?

The user is referred to SETUP keywords (p.715) for the other options for the wells
offline mode.
Flashing Flashes are very expensive in term of performance. PIPESIM can minimize the
settings number of flashes depending on the settings in Setup » Flashing . The reader is
referred to Options Calculations procedure (p.568) for more details. The option
available include:
•  Always Interpolate (fastest): this option uses interpolation between physical
properties determined by in a predefined grid of temperature and pressure points.
• Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envel ope, interpolation elsewhere: this
is a compromise between speed and accuracy, which assumes that properties
will change more rapidly when close to a phase boundary. Interpolation is
performed whenever the grid points comprising a rectangle all show the presence
of the same phases. For example. if all 4 points in the rectangle have some oil,
some gas, and no water, then we assume the rectangle lies entirely within the 2-
phase region of the hydrocarbon phase envelope, so interpolation is appropriate.
If however one, two or three of the points have no oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon
dew point line crosses the rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.
•  Always Rigorous Flash (slowest). Interpolation never occurs: properties are
obtained by flashing at the required pressure and temperature. This is the slowest
but the most accurate method.

Step 4: Revert to more accurate settings

Once your model has been fine tuned, you may want to increase accuracy again by considering the
following:

Tolerance PIPESIM uses an iterative approach and stops calculation when the iterative error 
is less than a given tolerance. Thus, the tolerance has a direct impact on the number 
of iterations and the time taken to have an acceptable result. The default tolerance
is 1%. You can put a lower tolerance to increase accuracy using Setup »
Iterations . Note that results with tolerance less than 0.1% are not recommended
as the time needed for lower tolerance will increase very quickly.
Boundary Enter appropriate boundary conditions.
conditions
Loops Enter appropriate topology with any loop.
Moody When the specified phase correlation is the Moody correlation or the Cullender-
friction Smith correlation, PIPESIM calculates the Moody friction factor using either an
factor  iterative implicit method (Colebrook-White equation (Moody chart)), an explicit
method (see the Sonnad and Goudar paper (p.552)) or a fast explicit or 
approximate method (see the Moody paper (p.548)). The default calculation

Technical Description
515 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 533/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

method for the friction factor is the explicit method. The Moody friction factor 
calculation method will also have an impact on the horizontal and vertical flow
correlations as the friction factor used to compute the pressure gradient in the flow
correlations will be evaluated based on the method specified by the Moody friction
factor calculation method. See Single Phase Flow Correlations (p.348) for more

details. To use a more accurate calculation method for the Moody friction factor,
enter the following on two lines in the bottom text box under Setup » Engine
options:
OVERRIDE
SPHASE MOODYCALC = EXPLICIT
or 
OVERRIDE
MOODYCALC=IMPLICIT
Extra one PIPESIM reports pressure, temperature, flow, etc. at the middle point of each

foot segment segment. To bean

PIPESIM adds able to report
extra accurate
one foot values
segment at the
at either start
side of and
eachend of each
node. If younode,
are
interested in the exact values at the beginning and end of each node you can
activate that option using Setup » Engine options and the Option Control tab by
checking Additional short segments either side of each node and selecting under 
Options Control Group, Use network options. Alternatively, in the bottom text box
under Setup » Engine options, you can enter the following on two lines:
OVERRIDE
OPTION EOFS =ON
Flow Enter the appropriate flow correlation.

correlation
Wells offline Wells offline allow a production well, in a network model, to be modeled using a well
performance curve of flowrate versus [outlet] well head pressure - example curve.
These well performance curve(s) are stored in ASCII files and can be created using
a PIPESIM operation or any other suitable Nodal analysis package. This option has
been introduced to reduce the time required to solve large networks. Indeed in a
network model, a significant amount of time is spent computing well bore pressure
losses. In addition, it insures that the well operates in its stable region by providing
a smooth curve. The reader is referred to Well Curves (p.39) for more details. To
disable Wells offline for a specific well, select Setup> Boundary Conditions and
unselect PQ Curve for that well. Generally the user can set all wells online by typing

the following on two lines in the bottom text box under Setup » Engine options
OVERRIDE
SETUP WOLMODE= OFF
The user is referred to SETUP keywords (p.715) for the other options for the wells
offline mode.
Flashing Flashes are very expensive in term of performance. PIPESIM can minimize the
settings number of flashes depending on the settings in Setup » Flashing. Select Always

Technical Description
516 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 534/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Rigorous Flash (slowest) for most accuracy. See Options Calculations procedure
(p.568) for more details.

4.6 Typical and Default Data

4.6.1 Limits
The following limitations apply to the PIPESIM modules;

General
• Maximum number of components in a stream: 50

Pipeline and facilities

• Maximum number of sources: 1

• Maximum number of sinks: 1

• Maximum number of pipe coatings: 4
• Maximum number of nodes for a pipeline or riser: 101

Well Performance
• Maximum number of completions: 10
• Maximum number of sinks: 1
• Maximum number tubing coatings (using Expert mode) : 10
• Maximum number of nodes for a tubing: 100

• Maximum number of geothermal survey points: 100

• Maximum number of tubing strings: Detailed model = 20, Simple model = 4

Network
• Maximum number of wells / branches: Unlimited.
• Maximum number of nodes: Unlimited.
• Maximum number of PVT files: 500
• Maximum number of compositions: 1,000
• Maximum number of Black Oil compositions: 1,024
• Maximum number of PQ data points: 30

Note:  Although the maximum number of wells, and so on, is unlimited practical limits may apply
depending upon the configuration of the PC used. The limiting factors [for large models] will be
memory and processor speed.

Technical Description
517 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 535/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4.6.2 Tubing and Pipeline Tables

Tubing/Casing Tables

Nominal Weight lb/ OD in ID in WT in

Bore ft
1 1/4in 3.02 1.660 1.278 0.191
1 1/4in 2.3 1.660 1.379 0.140 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90
1 1/4in 2.33 1.660 1.379 0.140
1 1/4in 2.4 1.660 1.379 0.140 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90
1 1/4in 2.1 1.660 1.410 0.125
2 3/8in 7.7 2.375 1.703 0.336
2 3/8in 6.2 2.375 1.853 0.261

2 3/8in 5.8 2.375 1.867 0.254 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105

2 3/8in 5.95 2.375 1.867 0.254 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105
2 3/8in 5.3 2.375 1.939 0.218
2 3/8in 4.6 2.375 1.995 0.190 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105
2 3/8in 4.7 2.375 1.995 0.190 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105
2 3/8in 4 2.375 2.041 0.167 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90
2 7/8in 11 2.875 2.065 0.405
2 7/8in 10.7 2.875 2.091 0.392
2 7/8in 9.5 2.875 2.195 0.340
2 7/8in 8.6 2.875 2.259 0.308 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105
2 7/8in 8.7 2.875 2.259 0.308 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-106
2 7/8in 7.8 2.875 2.323 0.276 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105
2 7/8in 7.9 2.875 2.323 0.276 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-106
2 7/8in 6.4 2.875 2.441 0.217 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105
2 7/8in 6.5 2.875 2.441 0.217 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105
3 1/2in 16.7 3.500 2.480 0.510
3 1/2in 15.8 3.500 2.548 0.476

3 1/2in 12.7 3.500 2.750 0.375 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105

3 1/2in 12.95 3.500 2.750 0.375 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-106
3 1/2in 12.8 3.500 2.764 0.368
3 1/2in 9.2 3.500 2.992 0.254 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105
3 1/2in 9.3 3.500 2.992 0.254 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,P-105
3 1/2in 10.2 3.500 2.992 0.254 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90

Technical Description
518 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 536/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3 1/2in 7.7 3.500 3.068 0.216 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90

4 in 13.4 4.000 3.340 0.330
4 in 11.6 4.000 3.428 0.286
4 in 11 4.000 3.476 0.262 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90
4 in 9.5 4.000 3.548 0.226 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90
4 1/2 in 19.2 4.500 3.640 0.430
4 1/2 in 19.1 4.500 3.626 0.437 Q-125*,V-150*
4 1/2 in 16.6 4.500 3.750 0.375 Q-125*,V-150*
4 1/2 in 15.1 4.500 3.826 0.337 HC-95*,P-110,Q-125,V-150*
4 1/2 in 15.5 4.500 3.826 0.337
4 1/2 in 13.5 4.500 3.920 0.290 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110
4 1/2 in 12.6 4.500 3.958 0.271 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90

4 1/2 in 12.75 4.500 3.958 0.271 H-40,J-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90

4 1/2 in 11.6 4.500 4.000 0.250 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110
4 1/2 in 10.5 4.500 4.052 0.224 J-55,K-55
4 1/2 in 9.5 4.500 4.090 0.205 H-40,J-55,K-55
5 in 24.2 5.000 4.000 0.500 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125
5 in 23.2 5.000 4.044 0.478 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150*
5 in 21.4 5.000 4.126 0.437 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110
5 in 20.8 5.000 4.156 0.422
5 in 20.3 5.000 4.184 0.408
5 in 18 5.000 4.276 0.362 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150*
5 in 15 5.000 4.408 0.296 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,
P110,Q125,V150*
5 in 13 5.000 4.494 0.253 J-55,K-55
5 in 11.5 5.000 4.560 0.220 J-55,K-55
5 1/2in 35 5.500 4.200 0.650 C-90
5 1/2in 26.8 5.500 4.500 0.500 Q-125*,V-150*
5 1/2in 26 5.500 4.548 0.476 C-90

5 1/2in 23 5.500 4.670 0.415 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150*

5 1/2in 20 5.500 4.778 0.361 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150*
5 1/2in 17 5.500 4.892 0.304 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125
5 1/2in 15.5 5.500 4.950 0.275 J-55,K-55
5 1/2in 14 5.500 5.012 0.244 H-40,J-55,K-55
5 1/2in 13 5.500 5.044 0.228

Technical Description
519
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 537/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

6 in 26 6.000 5.132 0.434

6 in 23 6.000 5.240 0.380
6 in 20 6.000 5.352 0.324
6 in 18 6.000 5.424 0.288
6 in 15 6.000 5.675 0.163
6 5/8 in 32 6.625 5.524 0.550 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125*,V150*
6 5/8 in 28 6.625 5.791 0.417 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125*,V150*
6 5/8 in 24 6.625 5.921 0.352 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125*,V150*
6 5/8 in 20 6.625 6.049 0.288 H-40,J-55,K-55
6 5/8 in 17 6.625 6.135 0.245
7 in 42.7 7.000 5.750 0.625 Q125*,V150*
7 in 38 7.000 5.920 0.540 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150*

7 in 35 7.000 6.004 0.498 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150*

7 in 32 7.000 6.094 0.453 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150*
7 in 29 7.000 6.184 0.408 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150*
7 in 26 7.000 6.276 0.362 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110
7 in 23 7.000 6.366 0.317 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*
7 in 20 7.000 6.456 0.272 H-40,J-55,K-55
7 in 17 7.000 6.538 0.231 H-40
7 5/8 in 47.1 7.625 6.375 0.625 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P110,Q125
7 5 /8 i n 45.3 7.625 6.435 0.595 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150*
7 5/8 in 39 7.625 6.625 0.500 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150*
7 5/8 in 33.7 7.625 6.765 0.430 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150*
7 5/8 in 29.7 7.625 6.875 0.375 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150*
7 5/8 in 26.4 7.625 6.969 0.328 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*
7 5/8 in 24 7.625 7.025 0.300 H40
7 5/8 in 20 7.625 7.125 0.250
8 5/8 in 49 8.625 7.511 0.557 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150*
8 5/8 in 44 8.625 7.625 0.500 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*,V150*
8 5/8 in 40 8.625 7.725 0.450 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125*
8 5/8 in 36 8.625 7.825 0.400 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*
8 5/8 in 32 8.625 7.921 0.352 H-40,J-55,K-55
8 5/8 in 28 8.625 8.017 0.304 H-40
8 5/8 in 24 8.625 8.097 0.264 J-55,K-55
9 5/8 in 71.8 9.625 8.125 0.750

Technical Description
520 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 538/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

9 5/8 in 70.3 9.625 8.157 0.734 V150*

9 5/8 in 61.1 9.625 8.375 0.625 HC-95*,Q125*,V150*
9 5/8 in 58.4 9.625 8.435 0.595 HC-95*,Q125*,V150*
9 5 /8 i n 53.5 9.625 8.535 0.545 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125,V150*
9 5/8 in 47 9.625 8.681 0.472 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110,Q125
9 5/8 in 43.5 9.625 8.755 0.435 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P110
9 5/8 in 40 9.625 8.835 0.395 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*
9 5/8 in 36 9.625 8.921 0.352 H-40,J-55,K-55
9 5/8 in 32.3 9.625 9.001 0.312 H-40
9 5/8 in 29.3 9.625 9.063 0.281
10 3/4 in 79.2 10.75 9.282 0.734 Q125*,V150*
0
10 3/4 in 73.2 10.75 9.406 0.672 Q125*,V150*
0
10 3/4 in 71.1 10.75 9.450 0.650 HC-95*,Q125*,V150*
0
10 3/4 in 65.7 10.75 9.560 0.595 HC-95*,P-110,Q125,V150*
0
10 3/4 in 60.7 10.75 9.660 0.545 HC-95*,P-110,Q125,V150
0
10 3/4 in 55.5 10.75 9.760 0.495 L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P-110,Q125*
0

10 3/4 in 51 10.75
0 9.850 0.450 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P-110

10 3/4 in 45.5 10.75 9.950 0.400 H-40,J-55,K-54

0
10 3/4 in 40.5 10.75 10.05 0.350 H-40,J-55,K-55
0 0
10 3/4 in 32.75 10.75 10.19 0.279 H-40
0 2
11 3/4 in 66.7 3.915 11.75 10.65 Q-125*,V-150*
0 6
11 3/4 in 60 3.522 11.75 10.77 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P-110,Q-12
0 2 5
11 3/4 in 54 11.75 10.88 0.435 J-55,K-55
0 0
11 3/4 in 47 11.75 11.00 0.375 J-55,K-55
0 0

Technical Description
521
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 539/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

11 3/4 in 42 11.75 11.08 0.333 H-40

0 4
11 3/4 in 38 11.75 11.15 0.300
0 0

13 3/8 in 100.3 13.37

5 11.90
7 0.734 V-150*
13 3/8 in 98 13.37 11.93 0.719
5 7
13 3/8 in 92.5 13.37 12.03 0.672 Q-125*
5 1
13 3/8 in 86 13.37 12.12 0.625 HC-95*
5 5
13 3/8 in 85 13.37 12.15 0.608
5 9

13 3/8 in 77 13.37 12.27 0.550

5 5
13 3/8 in 71 13.37 12.28 0.547 Q-125*
5 1
13 3/8 in 72 13.37 12.34 0.514 C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,HC-95*,P-110,Q-125
5 7
13 3/8 in 68 13.37 12.41 0.480 J-55,K-55,C-75,L-80,N-80,C-90,C-95,P-110
5 5
13 3/8 in 61 13.37 12.51 0.430 J-55,K-55
5 5
13 3/8 in 54.5 13.37 12.61 0.380 J-55,K-55
5 5
13 3/8 in 48 13.37 12.71 0.330 H-40
5 5
16 in 109 16.00 14.68 0.656
0 8
16 in 84 16.00 15.01 0.495 J-55,K-55
0 0
16 in 75 16.00 15.21 0.393 J-55,K-55
0 4
16 in 65 16.00 15.25 0.375 H-40
0 0
16 in 55 16.00 15.37 0.312
0 6
18 5/8 in 87.5 18.62 17.75 0.435 H-40,J-55,K-55
5 5

Technical Description
522 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 540/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

20 in 133 20.00 18.73 0.635 J-55,K-55

0 0
20 in 106.5 20.00 19.00 0.500 J-55,K-55
0 0

20 in 94 20.00
0 19.12
4 0.438 H-40,J-55,K-55

Pipeline tables

Nominal Bore Schedule OD in ID in Wall Thickness in

1/8in Sch 80 0.406 0.217 0.094
1/8in Sch 40 0.406 0.268 0.069
1/4in Sch 80 0.539 0.303 0.118
1/4in Sch 40 0.539 0.362 0.089
3/8in Sch 80 0.673 0.421 0.126
3/8in Sch 40 0.673 0.492 0.091
1/2in XXS 0.839 0.252 0.293
1/2in Sch 160 0.839 0.461 0.189
1/2in Sch 80 0.839 0.543 0.148
1/2in Sch 40 0.839 0.622 0.108
3/4in XXS 1.051 0.437 0.307
3/4in Sch 160 1.051 0.614 0.219

3/4in Sch 80 1.051 0.744 0.154

3/4in Sch 40 1.051 0.827 0.112
1in XXS 1.315 0.599 0.358
1in Sch 160 1.315 0.815 0.250
1in Sch 80 1.315 0.957 0.179
1in Sch 40 1.315 1.049 0.133
1 1/4in XXS 1.661 0.898 0.382
1 1/4in Sch 160 1.661 1.161 0.250
1 1/4in Sch 80 1.661 1.280 0.191
1 1/4in Sch 40 1.661 1.382 0.140
1 1/2in XXS 1.902 1.102 0.400
1 1/2in Sch 160 1.902 1.339 0.281
1 1/2in Sch 80 1.902 1.500 0.201
1 1/2in Sch 40 1.902 1.610 0.146

Technical Description
523
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 541/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2in XXS 2.375 1.503 0.436

2in Sch 160 2.375 1.687 0.344
2in Sch 80 2.375 1.939 0.218
2in Sch 40 2.375 2.067 0.154
2 1/2in XXS 2.874 1.772 0.551
2 1/2in Sch 160 2.874 2.469 0.374
2 1/2in Sch 80 2.874 2.323 0.276
2 1/2in Sch 40 2.874 2.126 0.203
3in XXS 3.500 2.300 0.600
3in Sch 160 3.500 2.624 0.438
3in Sch 80 3.500 2.900 0.300
3in Sch 40 3.500 3.068 0.216

4in XXS 4.500 2.728 0.886

4in Sch 160 4.500 3.438 0.531
4in Sch 120 4.500 3.622 0.439
4in Sch 80 4.500 3.826 0.337
4in Sch 40 4.500 4.026 0.237
5in XXS 5.563 4.063 0.750
5in Sch 160 5.563 4.311 0.626
5in Sch 120 5.563 4.563 0.500
5in Sch 80 5.563 4.815 0.374
5in Sch 40 5.563 5.047 0.258
6in XXS 6.625 4.897 0.864
6in Sch 160 6.625 5.187 0.719
6in Sch 120 6.625 5.504 0.561
6in Sch 80 6.625 5.761 0.432
6in Sch 40 6.625 6.211 0.280
8in Sch 160 8.626 6.815 0.906
8in XXS 8.626 6.878 0.874
8in Sch 140 8.626 7.004 0.811
8in Sch 120 8.626 7.189 0.719
8in Sch 100 8.626 7.437 0.594
8in Sch 80 8.626 7.626 0.500
8in Sch 60 8.626 7.815 0.406
8in Sch 40 8.626 7.980 0.323

Technical Description
524
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 542/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

8in Sch 30 8.626 8.071 0.278

8in Sch 20 8.626 8.126 0.250
10in Sch 160 10.748 8.496 1.126
10in Sch 140 10.748 8.748 1.000
10in Sch 120 10.748 9.059 0.844
10in Sch 100 10.748 9.311 0.719
10in Sch 80 10.748 9.559 0.594
10in Sch 60 10.748 9.748 0.500
10in Sch 40 10.748 10.020 0.364
10in Sch 30 10.748 10.134 0.307
10in Sch 20 10.748 10.248 0.250
12in Sch 160 12.752 10.126 1.313

12in Sch 140 12.752 10.500 1.126

12in Sch 120 12.752 10.752 1.000
12in Sch 100 12.752 11.063 0.844
12in Sch 80 12.752 11.378 0.687
12in Sch 60 12.752 11.630 0.561
12in Sch 40 12.752 11.941 0.406
12in Sch 30 12.752 12.091 0.331
12in Sch 20 12.752 12.252 0.250
14in Sch 160 14.000 11.189 1.406
14in Sch 140 14.000 11.500 1.250
14in Sch 120 14.000 11.811 1.094
14in Sch 100 14.000 12.126 0.937
14in Sch 80 14.000 12.500 0.750
14in Sch 60 14.000 12.811 0.594
14in Sch 40 14.000 13.122 0.439
14in Sch 30 14.000 13.252 0.374
14in Sch 20 14.000 13.378 0.311
14in Sch 10 14.000 13.500 0.250
16in Sch 160 16.000 12.811 1.594
16in Sch 140 16.000 13.126 1.437
16in Sch 120 16.000 13.563 1.219
16in Sch 100 16.000 13.937 1.031
16in Sch 80 16.000 14.311 0.844

Technical Description
525 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 543/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

16in Sch 60 16.000 14.689 0.656

16in Sch 40 16.000 15.000 0.500
16in Sch 30 16.000 15.252 0.374
16in Sch 20 16.000 15.378 0.311
16in Sch 10 16.000 15.500 0.250
18in Sch 160 18.000 14.437 1.781
18in Sch 140 18.000 14.874 1.563
18in Sch 120 18.000 15.252 1.374
18in Sch 100 18.000 15.689 1.156
18in Sch 80 18.000 16.126 0.937
18in Sch 60 18.000 16.500 0.750
18in Sch 40 18.000 16.878 0.561

18in Sch 30 18.000 17.122 0.439

18in Sch 20 18.000 17.378 0.311
18in Sch 10 18.000 17.500 0.250
20in Sch 160 20.000 16.063 1.969
20in Sch 140 20.000 16.500 1.750
20in Sch 120 20.000 17.000 1.500
20in Sch 100 20.000 16.650 1.675
20in Sch 80 20.000 17.937 1.031
20in Sch 60 20.000 18.378 0.811
20in Sch 40 20.000 18.811 0.594
20in Sch 30 20.000 19.000 0.500
20in Sch 20 20.000 19.252 0.374
20in Sch 10 20.000 19.500 0.250
24in Sch 160 24.000 19.311 2.344
24in Sch 140 24.000 19.874 2.063
24in Sch 120 24.000 20.378 1.811
24in Sch 100 24.000 20.937 1.531
24in Sch 80 24.000 21.563 1.219
24in Sch 60 24.000 22.063 0.969
24in Sch 40 24.000 22.622 0.689
24in Sch 30 24.000 22.878 0.561
24in Sch 20 24.000 23.252 0.374
24in Sch 10 24.000 23.500 0.250

Technical Description
526 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 544/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

30in Sch 30 30.000 28.748 0.626

30in Sch 20 30.000 29.000 0.500
30in Sch 10 30.000 29.378 0.311

4.6.3 Typical Values

Fluid Properties
The table below gives typical values for properties, in Engineering units and data for various oil
locations worldwide.

Default Min Max North North South Middle Far  Australia

Sea America America East East
Black Oil
Properties

Water cut 0 0 100

GOR required 340 -1,100 600-20,000
Gas s.g. 0.64 0.64 - 0.81 0.65 - 0.8
Water s.g. 1.02 1.01 - 1.03 1.01 - 1.05
API 30 38 13 - 56 7-45 32-44 34
Solution Gas Lasater Glaso Lasater  
Correlation
Viscosity
Data

Dead Oil Beggs Beggs and

viscosity and Robinson
Robinson
Viscosity @ 2.247 0.4 -11 5 - 10,000
200F
Viscosity @ 117.8 3.8 - 120 - 10,000
60F 82,000
Heat
capacities
Oil (p.683) 0.45
Gas (p.683) 0.55
Water  1.0
(p.683)

Default values can be changed - click the relevant link.

Technical Description
527 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 545/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Roughness

Material ft. in
Drawn tubing (brass, lead, glass, and the like) 0.000005 0.00006

Commercial steel or wrought iron 0.00015 0.0018

 Asphalted cast iron 0.0004 0.0048
Galvanized iron 0.0005 0.006
Cast iron 0.00085 0.010
Wood stave 0.0006-0.003 0.0072-0.036
Concrete 0.001-0.01 0.012-0.12
Riveted steel 0.003-0.03 0.036-0.36

Thermal Conductivities

Material Density Thermal Conductivity Thermal Conductivity

(kg/m3) Btu/hr/ft/F (W/m/K)
 Anhydrite 0.75
Carbon Steel 7900 28.9 50
Concrete Weight Coat 2000 - 3000 0.81 - 1.15 1.4 - 2.0
Corrosion Coat (Bitumen) - 0.19 0.33
Corrosion Coat (Epoxy) - 0.17 0.30
Corrosion Coat (Polyurathane) - 0.12 0.20
Dolomite 1.0
Ground (Earth) 0.37 - 1.5
Gypsum 0.75
Halite 2.8
Ice 900 1.27 2.2
Lignite 2.0
Limestone 0.54
Line pipe 27 46.7

Mild Steel tubing 26 45

Mud 1500 0.75 - 1.5 1.3 - 2.6
Neoprene Rubber - 0.17 0.3
Plastic coated pipe 20 34.6
Plastic coated tubing 20 34.6
Polyurathane Foam (dry) 30 - 100 0.011 - 0.023 0.02 - 0.04

Technical Description
528 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 546/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Polyurathane Foam (wet) - 0.023 - 0.034 0.4 - 0.6

PVC Foam (dry) 100 - 340 0.023 - 0.025 0.040 - 0.044
Sandstone 1.06
Shale 0.7
Stainless Steel - 8.67 15
Stainless steel (13%) 18 31.14
Stainless steel (15%) 15 26
Syntactic Foam (dry) 500 0.052 0.09
Syntactic foam (wet) - 0.17 0.3
Volcanics 1.6
Wet Sand 1600 1.04 - 1.44 1.8 - 2.5

Thermal Conductivities in W/m/K (Liquids and Gases)

Fluid Default Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature

5oC 20oC 100oC 200oC
 Air 0.024 0.026 0.030 0.037
Crude Oil (p.672) (30 API) 0.138 0.14 0.14 0.12 0.10
Glycol (DEG) 0.26 0.25 0.20 0.14
Natural Gas (p.672) (P=1 0.035 0.030 0.032 0.045 0.062
bara)
Natural Gas (p.672) 0.045 0.045 0.052 0.070
(P=100 bara)
Natural Gas (p.672) 0.071 0.067 0.064 0.074
(P=200 bara)
Natural Gas (p.672) 0.090 0.085 0.076 0.083
(P=300 bara)
Water (p.672) 0.605 0.56 0.59 0.68 0.68

Default values can be changed - click the relevant link.

Permeability

For a gas well, this is gas permeability. For an oil well, this is total liquid permeability.
Typical values are:
• < 1 md : Very low
• 1 - 10 md: Low
• 10 - 50 md: Mediocre
• 50 - 200 md: Average

Technical Description
529
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 547/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• 200 - 500 md: Good

• > 500 md: Excellent

Drainage Radius

Common drainage radii are:

• 40 acres 745 ft (227 m)
• 80 acres 1053 ft (321 m)
• 160 acres 1490 ft (454 m)
• 640 acres 2980 ft (908 m)

Fittings

Model fittings
Fittings (elbows, values and tees) are modeled by the standard practice of utilizing equivalent length.
From the fittings table determine the extra length of pipe that needs to be added to the model to exert
the same pressure drop as the required fitting.

Valves - Equivalent lengths of 100% open valves in feet

Model as a pipe with the required ID and set the equivalent length as indicated in the table below.
For example to model a 3/4 inch angle value add a pipe section of ID 3/4 and a length of 12 feet.

Pipe Size Gate Valve Globe Valve Angle Valve

(Inches) (feet) (feet) (feet)
1/2 .35 17 8

3/4 .50 22 12
1 .6 27 14
1 1/4 .8 38 18
1 1/2 1.0 44 22
2 1.2 53 28
2 1/2 1.4 68 33
3 1.7 80 42
4 2.3 120 53
5 2.8 140 70
6 3.5 170 84
8 4.5 220 120
10 5.7 280 140
12 9 400 190
14 10 450 210

Technical Description
530 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 548/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

16 11 500 240
18 12 550 280
20 14 650 300
22 15 688 335
24 16 750 370

Elbows: Equivalent length of elbows in feet

Model as a pipe with the required ID and set the equivalent length as indicated in the table below.
For example to model a 3/4 standard elbow add a pipe section of ID 3/4 and a length of 2.2 feet.

Pipe Size: St'd elbow Med. sweep elbow Long sweep elbow
Inches feet feet feet
1/2 1.5 1.3 1
3/4 2.2 1.8 1.3
1 2.7 2.3 1.7
1 1/4 3.6 3 2.3
1 1/2 4.5 3.6 2.8
2 5.2 4.6 3.5
2 1/2 6.5 5.5 4.3
3 8 7 5.2
4 11 9 7
5 14 12 9
6 16 14 11
8 21 18 14
10 26 22 17

Tees: Equivalent length of Tees in feet

Model as a pipe with the required ID and set the equivalent length as indicated in the table below.
For example to model a 3/4 inch Tee (straight through) add a pipe section of ID 3/4 and a length of 
1.3 feet

Pipe Size: Tee (straight through) Tee (rt. angle flow)

Inches feet feet

1/2 1 3.2
3/4 1.3 4.5
1 1.7 5.7
1 1/4 2.3 7.5
1 1/2 2.8 9

Technical Description
531
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 549/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

2 3.5 12
2 1/2 4.3 14
3 5.2 16
4 7 22
5 9 27
6 11 33
8 14 43
10 17 53

4.7 Glossary
The PIPESIM help uses the following symbols:

4.7.1 Roman Letters

a  is the major axis of the ft m 
drainage ellipse
2 is the pipe cross- 2 2
π D  ft  m 
A= sectional area
4

hR  is the Biot number dimensionless dimensionless

B  =
k 

is the oil formation bbl  / STBO 

B o  volume factor 

c , C  is the specific heat o 

BTU  / lb  ⋅ F   J  / kg  ⋅ K 
capacity

d , D  is the pipe diameter  ft m 

E  is the specific total BTU  / lb J  / kg 

energy

f   is the friction factor  dimensionless dimensionless

is the frequency Hz  Hz 

F  , R  is the gas/oil ratio dimensionless dimensionless

 g  is the acceleration due = 32.17 ft  s 2 2

to gravity
/  = 9.81m  / s 

Technical Description
532 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 550/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3 2
L   ρ  βg ΔT   is the Grashof number dimensionless dimensionless
Gr  = 2
μ 

h  is the local heat 2 o  2

BTU   h  ⋅ ft  ⋅ F   W   m  ⋅ K 
transfer coefficient /  / 
H   = U  + PV   is the specific BTU  / lb J  / kg 
enthalpy

H  L  is the liquid holdup dimensionless dimensionless

Head  is the head ft  ⋅ lb f   / lb  N   ⋅ m  / kg 

J   is the productivity

index

k  is the thermal BTU  / h  ⋅ ft  ⋅ F  

o  W  / m  ⋅ K 
conductivity 2
2 m 
is the absolute ft 
permeability

L  is the pipe length ft m 

is the horizontal well
length

m  is the mass lb kg  

M   is the molecular  lb  / mol  kg  / kmol 

weight
dimensionless dimensionless
is the number of 
magnetic poles in an
ESP

n  is the polytropic dimensionless dimensionless

coefficient mol mol
is the number of 
moles

N   is the compressor 

speed

hL  is the Nusselt number dimensionless dimensionless

Nu  =
k 

 p , P  is the pressure 2 2

psi or  lbf   / in  N  / m 

Technical Description
533
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 551/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Power  is the power  hp W  

μ c  p  is the Prandtl number dimensionless dimensionless

Pr =
k 

q  is the mass flow rate lb  / s kg  / s 

Q  is the heat transfer  BTU  / h W  

rate
is the average liquid
rate

r  is the radial distance ft m 

from the centre of well

r w  is the wellbore radius ft m 

r eh  is the is the drainage ft m 

radius of a horizontal
well

R  is the pipe radius ft  m 

is the gas constant = 1545.35lb f   ⋅ ft  / lb  − mol  ⋅ R  = 8.314 J  / K  ⋅ mol 
o 

Ra  = Pr Gr  is the Rayleigh dimensionless dimensionless

number 

Re is the Reynolds
number  dimensionless dimensionless

S  is the specific entropy BTU   J  

Q  is the pipe burial lb  ⋅ F  
o  kg  ⋅ K 
S  = shape factor 
2 πk ΔT   dimensionless
dimensionless
is the skin

t  is the well operating h s 

time

T   is the temperature o  o 

F  , R  K 

U   is the specific internal BTU  / lb  J  / kg 

energy 2 o  2
BTU  / h  ⋅ ft  ⋅ F   W  / m  ⋅ K 
is the overall heat
transfer coefficient

v  is the fluid velocity ft  / s m  / s 

Technical Description
534
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 552/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

is the ESP speed rev /min rev / s 

V   is the volume 3 J  / kg 

ft 

wt  is the pipe wall ft m 

thickness
W  s  is the shaft work BTU J    

z  is the vertical ft m 
displacement above a
gravitational datum
level

Z   is the compressibility ft m 

is the pipe burial depth

4.7.2 Greek Letters

θ  is the angle of the pipe to the horizontal

θ bur  = sin ( Z  

-1
R 
) is the angle of the buried arc of a partially
buried pipe

k  is the thermal diffusivity 2 2

α  = ft   / s m   / s 
 ρc  p 

1 ∂ ρ  1 /  o F  , 1 /  o R  1 / K 

β  = − ( )
 ρ  ∂ T   H  
is the volumetric thermal expansion
coefficient

C  p  is the ratio of specific heats dimensionless dimensionless

γ  = is the specific gravity (relative density) dimensionless dimensionless
C V  

γ 

d bean  is the choke diameter ratio dimensionless dimensionless

δ  =
d 
up 

ϵ  is the pipe roughness ft m 

η  is the efficiency, expressed as a fraction,

0 < η  ≤ 1

Technical Description
535 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 553/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Av G  is the void fraction dimensionless dimensionless

ϕ  =
Av G  + Av L 

−3
μ  is the fluid dynamic viscosity cp  = 10 Pa  ⋅ s  Pa  ⋅ s  = kg  / m  ⋅ s 

 ρ  is the density 3 3

lb  /  ft  kg  / m 

3 3
 ρ ns  = λ L  ρ L  + λ G  ρ G  is the no-slip density lb  /  ft  kg  / m 

λ  is the flowing fraction dimensionless dimensionless

σ  is the interfacial (surface) tension dynes  / cm N  / m 

4.7.3 Subscripts
b  bubble point
bulk

c  critical

G  gas phase

L  liquid phase

m  mixture

o  oil
r  reduced

R  reservoir 

s  gas/oil ratio, solution

slip or slippage

v  vaporization or vapor phase

volume or volumetric

w  water 

4.8 Conversion Factors

Common conversion factors used in PIPESIM are tabulated below.

Technical Description
536 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 554/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4.8.1 Length
1 ft  = 0.3048 m  1 m  = 3.28084 ft 

1 ft  = 12 in 

4.8.2 Volume
3 3 3 3
1 ft  = 0.02832 m  1 m  = 35.31467 ft 

3 3
1 barrel  = 5.61458 ft  1 ft  = 0.17811 barrel 

3 3
1 barrel  = 0.15899 m  1 m  = 6.28981 barrel 

4.8.3 Mass
1 lb  = 0.4536 kg  1 kg  = 2.2046 kg 

4.8.4 Time
1 hour  = 3600 s 

1 day  = 86400 s 

4.8.5 Gravity
−2 −2
 g  = 32.18 ft  ⋅ s   g  = 9.81 m  ⋅ s 

2 −1
 g  = 1 / 144 psi  ⋅ ft  ⋅ lb 

4.8.6 Pressure
The engineering units of pressure psi, needs to be treated with care. One psi is one pound-force per 
square inch, or 144 pound force per square foot. A pound force is the force exerted by one pound
−2
weight, which is one pound times the acceleration due to gravity  g  = 32.18 ft  ⋅ s  .

lbf   ft  1
1 psi  = 144 2
= 144 ⋅ g lb  ⋅ 2 ⋅ 2
ft  s  ft 

5 1 bar  = 14.504 psi 

1 bar  = 10 Pa 

1 Atm  = 1.01325 bar  1 Atm  = 14.70 psi 

Technical Description
537 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 555/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

4.8.7 Energy
1 BTU   = 1.055056 kJ   1 kJ   = 0.947817 BTU  
−3 3
1 kJ   = 10 Pa  ⋅ m 

4.8.8 Power  
2 −3 1 hp  = 0.7457 kW  
1 hp  = 550 ⋅ g ft  ⋅ lb  ⋅ s 

4.8.9 Dynamic viscosity

−3
1 cP  = 10 Pa  ⋅ s 

4.8.10 Permeability
−10 Pa  2
1 mD  = 10 ⋅ m 
Atm 

4.9 References

 Aggour "Hydrodynamics and Heat Transfer in

Two-Phase Two-Component Flow",
PhD thesis, University of Manitoba,
Winnepeg, Canada (1978).

 Al-Hussainy, R., Ramey Jr., H. J. and Crawford, P. B. "The Flow of Real Gases Through
Porous Media", JPT (1966) 624-636.

 Alhanati, F. J. S., Schmidt, Z., Doty, D. R. and Lagerlef, D. "Continuous Gas-Lift Instability:
D. Diagnosis, Criteria, and Solutions",
SPE 26554 (1993)

 Alves,I.N., Alhanati, F. J. S. and Shoham,O. "A Unified Model for Predicting

Flowing Temperature Distribution in
Wellbores and Pipelines", SPE 20632
(1992)

 Ashford, F.E. and Pierce, P.E. "Determining Multiphase Pressure

Drops and Flow capacities in Down-
Hole Safety Valves", Journal of 
Petroleum Technology, Paper No.
SPE-5161, (September, 1975).

Technical Description
538 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 556/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 Aziz, K., Govier, G. W. and Forgasi, M. "Pressure Drop in Wells Producing Oil
and Gas," J. Cdn. Pet. Tech. (July-
Sept. 1972) 38-48.

Babu, D. K. and Odeh, A. S. "Productivity of a Horizontal Well",

SPE Reservoir Engineering
(November 1989) 417-421.

Baker, A., Nielsen, K., and Gabb, A. "Pressure Loss, Liquid-Holdup

Calculations Developed," Technology,
Oil & Gas Journal (Mar. 14, 1988).

Baker, O. and Swerdloff, W. "Calculation of Surface Tension - 3";,

Oil & Gas Journal (Dec. 5, 1955) 141.

Beal, C. "The Viscosity of Air, Water, Natural

Gas, Crude Oil and its Associated
Gases at Oil Temperatures and
Pressures", Trans. AIME (1946) 94.

Beggs, H. D. "Gas Processing Operations", OCGI

Publications, (1984), ISBN
0-930972-06-6

Beggs, H. D., and Brill, J. P. "A Study of Two Phase Flow in

Inclined Pipes", J. Pet. Tech. (May
1973) 607-617.

Beggs, H. D. and Robinson, J. R. "Estimating the Viscosity of Crude Oil

Systems", J. Pet. Tech. (Sept. 1975)
1140-1.
Bellarby, Jonathan “Well Completion Design”, Chapter 6,
Elsevier, 2009.

Bendakhlia, H. and Aziz, K. "Inflow Performance Relationships for  

Solution-Gas Drive Horizontal Wells",
SPE paper 19823 presented at the
 Annual Technical Conference and
Exhibition, San Antonio, (October 
1989).

Bendiksen et al. “The Dynamic Two-Fluid Model

OLGA: Theory and Application,” SPE
Production Engineering, 171-180,
May 1991.

Bergman, D. F. and Sutton, R. P. "Undersaturated Oil Viscosity

Correlation for Adverse Conditions",
SPE 103144 (2006).

Technical Description
539
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 557/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Bhatti and Shah "Turbulent and Transition Flow

Convective Heat Transfer in Ducts",
Handbook of Single-Phase
Convective Heat Transfer, ed. Kakac,
Shah, Aung Wiley Interscience, NY
(1987)
Brauner, N. and Ullmann, A. “Modeling of Phase Inversion
Phenomenon in Two-Phase Pipe
Flows,” Int. J. Multiphase Flow, 28,
1177, 2002.

Brill, J. P. et al. "Analysis of Two-Phase Tests in Large

Diameter Flow Lines in Prudhoe Bay
Field", SPEJ (June 1981).

Brill, J. P. and Beggs, D. H. "Two-Phase Flow in Pipes", 6th

Edition,
Oklahoma,University of Tulsa,
(December Tulsa,
1988).

Brill, J.P. and Mukherjee, H. "Multiphase Flow in Wells", SPE

Monograph 17, (1999)

Brons, F. and Marting,V. E. "The Effect of Restricted Fluid Entry on

Well Productivity", Trans., AIME
(1961) 222, 1972.

Brown, T.S., Niesen, V.G., And Erickson, D.P. "Measurement and Predition of  
Kinectics of Paraffin Deposition", SPE
26548, 68th Annua Technical
Conference and Exhibition of SPE
Houston, TX, 3-6 October, 1993.

Brown, K.E. "The Technology of Artificial

Methods", Penwell Publishing
Company, Tulsa, Oklahoma, 1984.

Butler, B. "Success grows in pumping high-gas-

fraction multiphase fluids", Petroleum
Engineer International, July 1999.

Celier, G. C. M. R., Jouault, P. and de Montigny, O. A. M. C. "Zuidwal: A Gas Field Development

With Horizontal Wells", SPE paper 
19826 presented at the Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition
in San Antonio, October 1989.

Cheng, A.M. "Inflow Performance Relationships for  

Solution-Gas-Drive Slanted/
Horizontal Wells", SPE paper 20720

Technical Description
540 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 558/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

presented at the Annual Technical

Conference and Exhibition, New
Orleans, September 1990.

Chew, J. and Conally, C. A. Jr. "A Viscosity Correlation for Gas

Saturated Crude Oils", Trans., AIME
(1974) 23.

Chu and Jones "Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient

Studies in Upward and Downward,
Vertical, Two-Phase, Non-Boiling
Flows", AIChE Symp. Ser., vol. 76,
79-90 (1980).

Cinco, H., Miller, F.G.,and Ramey H.J. "Unsteady-State Pressure Distribution

created By a Directionally Drilled
Well," JPT 5131, (1975)

Cinco, H., Samaniego, V., and Dominguez A. "Transient Pressure Behavior for a
Well With a Finite-Conductivity
Vertical Fracture", SPE 6014, August
1978.

Cinco-Ley, H., and Samaniego, F. "Transient Pressure Analysis for  

Fractured Wells", JPT, 1749 - 1766,
September 1981a.

Cinco-Ley, H., and Samaniego, F. "Transient Pressure Analysis: Finite

Conductivity Fracture Case versus
Damage Fracture Case", SPE Paper 
10179, 1981b.
Colburn "A Method of Correlating Forced
Convection Heat Transfer Data and a
Comparison With Fluid Friction",
Trans. AIChE, 19, 174 (1933)
[reprinted in Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 7, 1359 (1964]..

Cooper, R.E., and Troncoso, J.C. "An Overview of Horizontal Well

Completion Technology", SPE paper 
17582 presented at the International
Meeting on Petroleum Engineering,
Tianjin, China, (November 1988).

Crane Technical Paper 410 "Flow of fluids through valves, fittings

and pipe", 1988, Crane Co.

Technical Description
541
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 559/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Dake, L.P. "Fundamentals of Reservoir  

Engineering", Elsevier Scientific
Publishing Co., New York, (1978).

De Ghetto, G. et al. "Reliability Analysis on PVT

Correlations", SPE 28904 (1994).
De Ghetto, G. et al. "Pressure-Volume-Temperature
Correlations for Heavy and Extra
Heavy Oils", SPE 30316 (1995).

de Marolles, C. abd de Salis, J. "Innovations in multiphase

hydrocarbon operations", www.pump-
zone.com, (1999).

C.de Waard, U. Lotz “Influence of liquid flow velocity on

CO2 corrosion: a semi-empirical
model.” CORROSION/95, Paper No.
128, NACE, 1995.

C.de Waard, U. Lotz, Milliams, D.E “Predictive model for CO2 Corrosion
Engineering in Natural Gas Pipelines”,
Corrosion, Vol. 47, No. 12, Dec. 1991
(976-985).

Dikken, B.J. "Pressure Drop in Horizontal Wells

and its Effect on Production
Performance", JPT (November 1990)
1426-1433.

Dipprey and Sabersky "Heat and Momentum Transfer in

Smooth and Rough Tubes at Various
Prandtl Numbers", Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 6, 329 (1963)

Dittus and Bolter "Heat Transfer in Automobile

Radiators of the Tubular Type",
University of California Pub. Eng., 2,
443 (1930).

Drexel and McAdams "Heat Transfer Coefficients for Air  

Flowing in Round Tubes and Around
Finned Cylinders", NACA ARR No.
4F28, [also Wartime Report W-108
(1945)].

Dukler, E. A., et al. "Gas-Liquid Flow in Pipelines, I.

Research Results", AGA-API Project
NX-28 (May 1969).

Technical Description
542 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 560/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Duns, H., and Ros, N. C. J. "Vertical Flow of Gas and Liquid

Mixtures in Wells", 6th. World Pet.
Congress (1963) 452.

Earlougher, R. C. Jr, "Advances in Well Test Analysis", SPE

Monograph 5, (1977)
Eaton, B. A. "Prediction of Flow Patterns, Liquid
Holdup and Pressure Losses
Occurring During Continuous Two-
Phase Flow in Horizontal Pipelines",
Trans., AIME (1967) 815.

Economides, M.J., Hill, D.A., and Economides, C.E. "Petroleum Production Systems", PTR
Prentice Hall, 1994.

Economides, M.J., McLennan, J.D., Brown, E., and "Performance and Stimulation of 
Roegiers, J.C. Horizontal Wells", World Oil, (July
1989) 69-76.

Eckert, E.R.G. and Jackson, T.W. "Analysis of Turbulent Free

Convection Boundary Layer on a Flat
Plate", NACA Repot 1015 (July 1950)

Elsharkawy, A.M. and Alikhan, A.A. "Models for predicting the viscosity of  
Middle East crude oils", Fuel 78
(1999), 891-903.

Elamvaluthi and Srinivas "Two-Phase Heat Transfer in Two

Component Vertical Flows", Int. J.
Multiphase Flow, vol. 10, no. 2, p.
237-242 (1984).

Fetkovich, M.J. "The Isochronal Testing of Oil Wells",

SPE 4259, (1973).

Fetkovich, M.J. and Vienot, M.E. "Shape Factors, CA, Expressed as a

Skin, sCA", JPT (February 1985)
321-322.

Flanigan, O. "Effect of Uphill Flow on Pressure

Drop in Design of Two-Phase
Gathering Systems", Oil and Gas J.
(March 10, 1958) 56, 132.

Folefac, A. N., Archer, J. S. and Issa, R. I. "Effect of Pressure Drop Along

Horizontal Wellbores on Well
Performance", SPE paper 23094
presented at the Offshore Europe

Technical Description
543
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 561/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Conference held in Aberdeen

(September 1991).

Forchheimer, Ph. "Wasserbevegung durch Boden", Z.

Ver. Deutch. Ing., Vol. 45 (1901) p.
1781 - 1788

Framo Webpage http://www.framoeng.no/pump.php

Friend and Metzner "Turbulent Heat Transfer inside Tubes

and the Analogy among Heat, Mass,
and Momentum Transfer", AIChE J., 4,
393 (1958).

Ghassan, H. A., and Maha, R. A. "Correlations developed to predict

two-phase flow through wellhead
chokes", The Journal of Canadian
Petroleum technology, Volume 30, No
6, 1991
Giger, F. M., Reiss, L. H., and Jourdan, A. P. "The Reservoir Engineering Aspects
of Horizontal Drilling", SPE paper 
13024 presented at the Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition
in Houston, September 1984.

Glasø, O. "Generalized Pressure Volume

Temperature Correlation", J. Pet.
Tech. (May 1980) 785.

Golan, M. and Whitson, C.H. "Well Performance", International

Human Resources Corporation,
Boston, MA (1986).

Goode, P. A. and Wilkinson, D. J. "Inflow Performance of Partially Open

Horizontal Wells", SPE paper 19341
presented at the SPE Eastern
Regional Meeting, Morgantown, WV,
October, (1989).

Gowen and Smith "Turbulent Heat Transfer from Smooth

and Rough Surfaces", Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, 11, 1657 (1968)
Grolman, E. "Gas-Liquid Flow with Low Liquid
Loading in Slightly Inclined Pipes",
Ph.D. Dissertation, U. of Amsterdam,
 Amsterdam, The Netherlands (1994).

Grolman, Commandeur, de Basst and Fortuin "Wavy-to-Slug Flow Transition in

Slightly Inclined Gas-Liquid Pipe

Technical Description
544
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 562/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Flow", AIChE Journal, vol 42. No. 4,

p901 (1996)

Gurley, D. G., Copeland, C. T. and Hendrick, J. L. "Design Plan and Execution of Gravel-
Pack Completion," J. Pet. Tech. (Oct.
1977).

Hagedorn, A. R. and Brown, K. E.: "Experimental Study of Pressure

Gradients Occurring During
Continuous Two-Phase Flow in Small-
Diameter Vertical Conduits", J. Pet.
Tech. (April 1965) 475-484.

Hausen "Neue Gleichungen fur die

Warmeubertragung bei frieier oder 
erzwungener Stromung", Allg.
Warmetchn., 9, 75 (1959).

Hawkins, M. F., Jr. "A Note on the Skin Effect", Trans.

 AIME, 207: 356-357, (1956).

Hayduk, W. and Minhas, B.S. "Correlations for Predictions of  

Molecular Diffusivities in Liquids", The
Canadian Journal of Chemical
Engineering, 60, 295 (1982).

Hernandez, O.C., Hensley, H., Sarica, C., Brill, J.P., Volk, "Improvements in Single-Phase
M., Delle-Case, E. Paraffin Deposition Modeling", SPE
Production and Facilities, 237, (2004).

Hossain, M.S. et al. "Assessment and development of  

Heavy-Oil Viscosity Correlations",
SPE/PS-CIM/CHOA 97907,
PS2005-407.

ISO Standard 15136–1 “Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries

 – Progressing Cavity Pump Systems
for Artificial Lift”, Second Edition,
2009-11-15.

Jones, L.G., Blount, E.M. and Glaze, O.H. "Use of Short Term Multiple Rate Flow
Tests To Predict Performance of Wells
Having
(1976). Turbulence", SPE 6133

Jones, L. G. and Slusser, M. L. "The Estimation of Productivity Loss

Caused by Perforation - Including
Partial Completion and Formation
Damage", SPE paper 4798 (1974).

Technical Description
545 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 563/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Joshi, S. D. "Horizontal Well Technology", Penwell

Publishing Company, Tulsa,
Oklahoma (1991).

Joshi, S. D.: "A Review of Horizontal and Drainhole

Technology", SPE paper 16868
presented at the Rocky Mountain
Regional Meeting in Casper, WY (May
1988).

Kaminsky, R. D. "Estimation of Two-Phase Flow Heat

Transfer in Pipes", J Energy Res Tech,
vol 121, p 75 (1999).

Karakas, M. and Tariq, S,M. "Semianalytical Productivity Models

for Perforated Completions", SPE
18247 (1991).

Karassik, I.J., Messina, J.P., Cooper, P., Heald, C. C. “Pump Handbook,” 3rd edition,
McGraw-Hill Inc., 1991

Karassik, I. J. “Pump Handbook,” 3rd Edition.

McGraw-Hill, New York, 2001.

Karassik, J. et al. "Pump Handbook", 2nd edition,

McGraw-Hill Inc., 1986

Kartoatmodjo, R.S.T. and Schmidt, Z. "New Correlations For Crude Oil

Physical Properties", SPE 23556
(1991).

Katz, D. L. et al. "Handbook of Natural Gas

Engineering", McGraw Hill Book Co.,
Inc., New York (1959).

Kawase and Ulbrecht "Turbulent Heat and Mass Transfer in

Dilute Polymer Solutions", Chem Eng
Sci, 37, 1039 (1982)

Kawase and De "Turbulent Heat and Mass Transfer in

Dilute Polymer Solutions Flowing
Through Rough Tubes", Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, 27, 140 (1984)
Kern, D.Q. and Seaton, R.E. "A Theoretical Analysis of Thermal
Surface Fouling", British Chemical
Engineering, Brit. Chem. Eng. 4, 258
(1959).

Khoze, Dunayev, Sparin "Heat and Mass Transfer in Rising

Two-Phase Flows in Rectangular 

Technical Description
546 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 564/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Channels", Heat Transfer-Sov. Res.,

vol. 8, no. 3, p 87-90, (1976)

King "Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop for  

an Air-Water Mixture Flowing in a
0.737 Inch I.D. Horizontal Tube", MS
Thesis, University of California,
Berkeley,CA, (1952).

Knott et al. "An experimental Study of Heat

Transfer to Nitrogen-Oil Mixtures", Ind.
Eng. Chem., vol. 51, no. 11, p.
1369-1372 (1959).

Kreith, F. and Bohn, M. "Principles of Heat Transfer", 5th

Edition, PWS Publishing Company
(1997).

Kudirka, Grosh, McFadden "Heat Transfer in Two-Phase Flow of  

Gas-Liquid Mixtures", I&EC
Fundamentals, vol 4, no 3, p 339-344
(1965)

Kunz, Klimeck The GERG-2004 wide-range equation

of state for natural gases and other 
mixtures. GERG TM15 2007.
Fortschr.-Ber. VDI, Reihe 6, Nr. 557,
VDI Verlag, Düsseldorf, 2007; also
available as GERG Technical
Monograph 15 (2007).

Kunz, Wagner The GERG-2008 wide-range equation

of state for natural gases and other 
mixtures: An expansion of 
GERG-2004. To be submitted to J.
Chem. Eng. Data (2011).

Lasater, J. A.: "Bubble Point Pressure Correlation",

Trans., AIME (1958) 379.

Lee, A. L., Gonzales. M.H. and Eakin, B.E. "The Viscosity of Natural Gases",
Trans., AIME (1966), 237, 997-1000.

Lockhart, R. W. and Martinelli, R. C. "Proposed Correlation of Data for  

Isothermal Two-phase, Two-
Component Flow in Pipes", Chem.
Eng. Prog. (January 1949) 45, 39.

Martin and Sims "Forced Convection Heat Transfer to

Water with Air Injection in a

Technical Description
547 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 565/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Rectangular Duct", Int. J. Heat Mass

Transfer, vol 14, p 1115-1134, (1971).

Matzain, A. "Multiphase Flow Paraffin Deposition

Modeling", Ph.D. Dissertation, U.
Tulsa, Tulsa, OK (2001).

Matzain, A., Apte, M.S., Zhang, H.-Q., Volk, M., Redus, "Multiphase Flow Wax Deposition
C.L.,Brill, J.P., Creek, J.L. Modeling", Proceedings of ETCE
2001, ETCE2001-17114, 927 (2001).

Matzain, A., Apte, M.S., Zhang, H.-Q., Volk, M., Brill, J.P., "Investigation of Paraffin Deposition
Creek, J.L. During Multiphase Flow in Pipelines
and Wellbores-Part 1: Experiments",
Transactions of the ASME, 124, 180
(2002).

McCain, William D. Jr. "Petroleum Fluids", edition 2..

McLeod, H. O. "The Effect of Perforating Conditions

on Well Performance", JPT (Jan.
1983).

Manabe, R. "A comprehensive heat transfer model

for two phase flow with high pressure
flow pattern validation", University of 
Tulsa, (2001).

Manhane, J. M., Gregory, G. A. and Aziz, K. "A Flow Pattern Map for Gas-Liquid
Flow Pattern in Horizontal Pipes", Int.
J. of Multiphase Flow.
Martinelli "Heat Transfer to Molten Metals",
Trans. ASME, 69, 947 (1947).

Minami, K. and Brill, J. P. "Liquid Holdup in Wet Gas Pipelines",

SPE J. Prod. Eng. (May 1987).

Mirza, K. Z. "Progressing cavity multiphase

pumping systems: expanding the
possibilities", presented at BHR
Conference Multiphase, 1999

Moody, L. "An approximate Formula for Pipe

Friction Factors", Transactions ASME,
vol 69, pp. 1005 (1947)

Mukherjee, H. and Brill, J. P. "Liquid Holdup Correlations for  

Inclined Two-Phase Flow", JPT (May
1983) 1003-1008.

Technical Description
548 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 566/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Mukherjee, H. and Economides, M. J. "A Parametric Comparison of  

Horizontal and Vertical Well
Performance", SPE paper 18303
presented at the Annual Technical
Conference and Exhibition in Houston,
October 1988.
Muskat, M. "The Flow of Homogeneous Fluids
Through Porous Media", I.H.R.D.C.,
Boston (1937).

Mutalik, P. N., Godbole, S. P. and Joshi, S. D. "Effect of Drainage Area Shapes on

Horizontal Well Productivity", SPE
paper 18301 presented at the Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition,
Houston (October 1988).

Norris, L. "Correlation
Slug Lengthsofand
Prudhoe BayIncluding
Holdups Liquid
1981 Large Diameter Flowlines
Tests", Internal Report Exxon
(October 1982).

Nunner "Warmeubergang und Druckabfall in

Rauhen Rohren", VDI-Forschungsheft
445, ser B, 22, 5 (1956) or 786-Atomic
Energy Research Establishment,
Harwell UK

Oliemans, R. V. A. "Two-Phase
TransmissionFlow in Gas-
Pipeline", ASME paper 
76-Pet-25, presented at Pet. Div.
 ASME meeting Mexico City (Sept.
1976).

Oliver and Wright "Pressure Drop and Heat Transfer in

Gas-Liquid Slug Flow in Horizontal
Tubes", Bri. Chem. Eng., vol. 9, no. 9,
p 590-596 (1964)

Omana, R. et al. "Multiphase Flow Through Chokes",

SPE 2682, 1969

Orkiszewski, J. "Predicting Two-Phase Pressure
Drops in Vertical Pipes", J. Pet. Tech.
(June 1967) 829-838.

Technical Description
549
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 567/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Oxley, K. C., Ward, J.M. and Derks, W.G. "How multiphase pumping can make
you money", presented at Facilities
2000 Conference, New Orleans 1999

Palmer, C. M. "Evaluation of Inclined Pipe Two-

Phase Liquid Holdup Correlations
Using Experimental Data", M.S.
Thesis, The University of Tulsa (1975).

Pan, S., Zhu, J., Zhang, D., Razouki, A., Talbot, M, and "Case Studies on Simulation of Wax
Wierzchowski, S. Deposition in Pipelines", IPTC-13420-
PP, 7-9 December 2009

Park, H. Y., Falcone, G. and Teodoriu, C. “Decision Matrix for Liquid Loading in
Gas Wells for Cost/Benefit Analyses of 
Lifting Options,” Journal of Natural
Gas Science and Engineering 1
(2009) 72-83.
Payne, G. A.: "Experimantal Evaluation of Two-
Phase Pressure Loss Correlations for 
Inclined Pipe", M.S. Thesis, The
University of Tulsa (1975).

Poettman, F. H. and Beck, R. L. "New Charts Developed to Predict

Gas-Liquid Flow Through Chokes",
World Oil, March 1963, 95-101

Prandtl, L. "Furhrrer durch die Stomungslehre",

Vieweg, Braunschweig, p 359 (1944)

Petrosky, G.E. Jr. and Farshad, F .F. "Pressure-Volume-Temperature

Correlations for Gulf of Mexico Crude
Oils", SPE 51395 (1998)

Petukhov and Gnielinski Int. Chem. Eng., 16-2, p 359, (1976)

Petukhov and Kirillov "Heat Transfer and Friction in

Turbulent Pipe Flow with Variable
Physical Properties", Adv. Heat
Tranfer, vol. 6, p 505-564 (1970)

Poling, B.E., Prausnitz, J.M. and O'Connell, J.P. "The Properties of Gases and
Liquids", Fifth Edition, McGraw-Hill

Pots, B. F. M., Bromilow, I. G. and Konijn, M. J. W. "Severe Slug Flow on Offshore

Flowline/Riser Systems", SPE paper 
13723, (March 1985).

Prats, M. "Effect of Vertical Fractures on

Reservoir Behavior-Incompressible

Technical Description
550 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 568/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Fluid Case", SPEJ, pp. 105-118, June

1961.

Pucknell, J.K. and Mason J.N.E. "Predicting the Pressure Drop in a

Cased-Hole Gravel Pack Completion",
SPE 24984, 1992.

Ramey, H.J. "Wellbore Heat Transmission", JPT

435 Trans AIME, No. 225 (April 1962)

Ravipudi and Godbold "The Effect of Mass Transfer on Heat

Transfer Rates for Two-Phase Flow in
a Vertical Pipe", Proc. 6th Int. Heat
Transfer Conf.-Toronto, vol. 1, p
505-510, (1978)

Rawlins, E.L. and Schellhardt, M.A, "Backpressure Data on Natural Gas

Wells and Their Application to
Production Practices", Monograph
Series, USBM 7, (1935).

Renard, G. I. and Dupuy, J. M. "Influence of Formation Damage on

the Flow Efficiency of Horizontal
Wells", SPE paper 19414 presented at
the Formation Damage Control
Symposium, Lafayette (February
1990).

Rezkallah and Sims "An Examination of Correlations of  

Mean Heat Transfer Coefficients in
Two-Phase and Two-Component
Flow in Vertical Tubes", AIChE Symp.
Ser., vol. 83, pp. 109-114, 1987.

Romero, D.J., Valko, P.P., and Economides, M.J. "The Optimization Of The Productivity
Index And The Fracture Geometry Of 
 A Stimulated Well With Fracture Face
 And Choke Skins", SPE 73758, 2002.

Sandall et al. "A New Theoretical Formula for  

Turbulent Heat and Mass Transfer 
with Gases or Liquids in Tube Flow",
Can. J. Chem. Eng., 58, 443 (1980)
Shell report SIEP 98-5463 "Satellite multiphase boosting -
Multiphase boosting study", Siep-
RTS, ABB Lummus Global

Technical Description
551
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 569/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Scott, S. L., Shoham, O., and Brill, J. P. "Prediction of Slug Length in

Horizontal Large-Diameter Pipes",
SPE paper 15103 (April 1986).

Schneider, G. E. "An Investigation Into Heat Loss

Characteristics of Buried Pipes",
Journal of Heat Transfer Vol. 107
(pp696-699) (Aug 1985).

Shah "Generalized Prediction of Heat

Transfer during Two Component Gas-
Liquid Flow in Tubes and Other 
Channels", AIChE Symp. Ser., vol. 77,
no. 208, p. 140-151, (1981).

Sieder and Tate "Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop of  

Liquids in Tubes", Ind. Eng. Chem.,
28, 1429 - 1453 (April 1986).
Singh, P. "Gel Deposition on Cold Surfaces", U.
of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Michigan
(2000).

SPE Production Engineering Handbook Volume IV, Chapter 15, Society of  

Petroleum Engineers, 2007.

Sonnad, J. and Goudar, C. "Explicit Reformulation of the

Colebrook-White Equation for 
turbulent Flow friction Factor 
calculation", Ind. Eng. Chem. Res, 46,
pp. 2593-2600, (2007)

Span, R. and Wagner, W. "A New Equation of State for Carbon

Dioxide Covering the Fluid Region
from the Triple-Point Temperature to
1100 K at Pressures up to 800 MPa,"
J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data, 25(6):
1509-1596, 1996.

Standing, M. B. "Volumetric and Phase Behavior of Oil

Field Hydrocarbon Systems", Society
of Petroleum Engineers, (1977) 121.

Standing, M. B. "A General Pressure Volume-

Temperature Correlation for Mixtures
Of California Oils and Greases," Drill.
and Prod. Prac., API (1947) 275.

Standing, M. B. and Katz, D. L. "Volumetric and Density of Natural

Gases", Trans., AIME (1942) 140.

Technical Description
552 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 570/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Taitel, Y. and Dukler, A. E. "A Model for Predicting Flow Regime

Transitions in Horizontal Gas-Liquid
Flow", AICHE J. (vol. 22, no. 1) (Jan.
1976) 47-55.

Vasquez, M., and Beggs, H. D. "Correlations for Fluid Physical

Property Prediction", SPE paper 6719,
presented at the 52nd Annual
Technical Conference and Exhibition
of the Society of Petroleum Engineers,
Denver, Colorado (1977).

Venkatesan, R. "The Deposition and Rheology of  

Organic Gels", U. of Michigan, Ann
 Arbor, Michigan (2004).

Vijay, Aggour, and Sims "A Correlation of Mean Heat Transfer  

Coefficients
Component Flowfor Two-Phase Two-
in a Vertical Tube",
Proc. 7th Int. Heat Transfer Conf., vol.
5, p. 367-372 (1982).

von Karman, "The Analogy Between Fluid Friction

and Heat Transfer", Trans. ASME, 61,
705 (1939).

Vogel, J. V. "Inflow performance relationships for  

solution gas drive wells", Journal Pet.
Tech., SPE 1476, (1968)

Webb "A Critical Evaluation of Analytical

Solutions and Reynolds Analogy
Equations for Turbulent Heat and
Mass Transfer in Short Tubes",
Warme-und Stoffubertrag, 4, 197
(1971).

Woelflin, W. "The Viscosity of Crude-Oil

Emulsions", Drill. and Prod. Prac., API
(1942) 148.

Zhang, H.Q., Wang, Q., Sarica, C., Brill, J.P. "Unified Model for Gas-Liquid Pipe
Flow Via Slug Dynamics - Part 1:
Model Development", ASME Journal
of Energy Resources Technology, Vol.
125 (December 2003) 274.

Zhang, H.-Q., Wang, Q., Sarica, C. and Brill, J.P. "Unified Model for Gas-Liquid Pipe
Flow Via Slug Dynamics - Part 2:
Verification", ASME Journal of Energy

Technical Description
553
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 571/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Resources Technology, Vol.125

(December 2003) 266.

Zhang, H.-Q. and Sarica C. “Unified Modeling of Gas/Oil/Water  

Pipe Flow – Basic Approaches and
Preliminary Validation,” SPE Project
Facilities & Construction 1(2), pp. 1- 7,
2006.

Technical Description
554
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 572/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Keyword Index 5 
Input Files and Input Data Conventions (p.559)
General Data (p.566)
Compositional Data (p.686)
Blackoil Data (p.674)
Heat Transfer Data (p.664)
Flow Correlation Data (p.598)
System and Equipment Data (p.606)
Well Performance Modeling (p.645)
PIPESIM Operations (p.694)
Keyword List
PIPESIM-Net Keywords (p.715)

5.1 Keyword List

 A (p.555) B (p.555) C (p.556) D (p.556) E (p.556) F (p.556) G (p.556) H (p.557) I
(p.557) J (p.557) K (p.557) L (p.557) M (p.557) N (p.558) O (p.558) P (p.558) Q
(p.558) R (p.558) S (p.558) T (p.559) U (p.559) V (p.559) W (p.559) X (p.559) Y
(p.559) Z (p.559)

5.1.1 A
•  ASSIGN (p.707)

5.1.2 B
• BACKPRES (p.656)
• BEGIN (p.593)
• BLACKOIL (p.675)

Keyword Index 
555 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 573/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• BRANCH (p.717)

5.1.3 C
• CASE (p.567)

• CALIBRATE (p.684)
• CHOKE (p.608)
• COMP (p.687)
• COMPCRV (p.612)
• COMPLETION (p.613)
• COMPRESSOR (p.615)
• CONETAB (p.656)
• CONFIG (p.673)
• CONTAMINANTS (p.686)
• CORROSION (p.616)
• CPFLUID (p.683)

5.1.4 DE
• END (p.593)
• ENDCASE (p.593)
• ENDJOB (p.593)
• EROSION (p.617)

• EQUIPMENT (p.618)
• ESP (p.638)
• EXPANDER (p.620)

5.1.5 F
• FETKOVICH (p.647)
• FITTING (p.621)
• FLOWLINE (p.613)
• FMPUMP (p.623)
• FORCHHEIMER (p.662)
• FRACTURE (p.662)
• FRAMO2009 (p.623)

5.1.6 G
• GASLIFT (p.624)

Keyword Index 
556 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 574/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.1.7 H
• HCORR (p.601)
• HEATER (p.624)
• HEADER (p.566)
• HEAT (p.665)
• HORWELL (p.657)
• HVOGEL (p.662)

5.1.8 I
• IFPPSSE (p.648)
• IFPTAB (p.654)
• IFPCRV (p.653)

• INLET (p.582)
• INJGAS (p.630)
• INJFLUID (p.630)
• INJPORT (p.628)
• IPRCRV (p.653)
• ITERN (p.580)

5.1.9 J
• JOB (p.567)
• JONES (p.648)
• JUNCTION (p.724)

5.1.10 K
• KCOAT (p.670)

5.1.11 L
• LAYER (p.659)
• LVIS (p.678)

5.1.12 M
• MPBOOSTER (p.632)
• MPUMP (p.633)
• MULTICASE (p.699)

Keyword Index 
557 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 575/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.1.13 N
• NAPLOT (p.694)
• NAPOINT (p.698)
• NODE (p.635)
• NOPRINT (p.593)
• NSEPARATOR (p.724)

5.1.14 O
• OPTIONS (p.568)
• OPTIMIZE (p.708)

5.1.15 P
• PCP (p.638)
• PERMCRV (p.660)
• PERMTAB (p.661)
• PETROFRAC (p.645)
• PIPE (p.636)
• PLOT (p.590)
• PRINT (p.583)
• PROP (p.677)
• PUMP (p.638)
• PUMPCRV (p.612)
• PUSH (p.595)

5.1.16 Q R
• RATE - Compositional (p.694)
• RATE - Blackoil (p.578)
• REINJECTOR (p.641)
• RISER (p.613)

5.1.17 S
• SEPARATOR (p.642)
• SETUP (p.715)
• SINK (p.722)
• SLUG (p.643)

Keyword Index 
558 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 576/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• SOURCE (p.719)
• SPHASE (p.604)

5.1.18 T
• TABLE (p.705)
• TCOAT (p.669)
• TIME (p.182)
• TPRINT - Compositional (p.694)
• TPRINT - Blackoil (p.684)
• TRANSIENT (p.663)
• TUBING (p.613)

5.1.19 U
• UNITS (p.567)
• USERDLL - Flow Correlations (p.606)
• USERDLL - Equipment (p.597)

5.1.20 V
• VCORR (p.598)
• VOGEL (p.647)

5.1.21 W
• Wax Deposition (p.182)
• WELLHEAD (p.645)
• WELLPI (p.646)
• WCOPTION (p.650)
• WPCURVE (p.647)

5.1.22 XYZ

5.2 Input Files and Input Data Conventions

5.2.1 General
The PIPESIM engine input processor accepts data under a system of main-code and sub-code
keywords. The entir e input data file is checked for syntax errors before program execution begins; if 
any input errors are detected, diagnostics are written to the terminal (for interactive jobs) and to the
Input Data Echo in the main job output, and program execution is halted.

Keyword Index 
559
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 577/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.2.2 Statements
Data is entered in statements. Each statement must begin with a main-code keyword (unless it is a
comment card or a blank line), and is followed by sub-code keywords and equated values appropriate
to the maincode. Statements are usually entered one per line in the file; but if desired, a statement
can be split across multiple lines, or multiple statements can be provided on one line. In all cases
there is a limit of 256 characters per statement, and per line, including spaces.
Statements are composed of printable text characters. Valid characters are those in the 7- or 8-bit
 ASCII set between decimal values 32 (space, [ ]) and 126 (tilde, [~]). Some computers or installations
will generate characters outside this range, due to differences in national language alphabets and
punctuation. Usually this will not cause any problems but this cannot be guaranteed.
(Files containing ASCII codes greater than 128 or less than 32 are often created using a word-
processing program, because these characters are used as formatting instructions to produce a
correctly formatted printed page. For PIPESIM however they are not required and will sometimes
cause the program to generate large numbers of syntax errors. Use of such programs for preparing
input files is best avoided, you should use a text editor instead; alternatively acceptable results may

be obtained by requesting the word-processor to produce ASCII text files as output.)

Upper and lower case can be freely mixed, except where doing so would cause the computer system
to assign a different meaning to the data. All Maincodes and Subcodes described in this document
are case-insensitive, but for example some computer systems are case-sensitive in filenames, so
where these are specified care must be taken to provide the correct case.

5.2.3 Delimiters
There are a number of characters reserved for use as delimiters. In general these can only be used
for the purpose described, however if a reserved delimiter character is required for use in a character 
string, the string can be quoted with apostrophes or double quotes. The delimiters (with ASCII decimal
codes) are:
• [ ] One or more blanks or spaces can be used to delimit main-code and sub-code entries, and to
improve readability in conjunction with other delimiter characters. (ASCII 32)
• [,] A comma (with or without one or more blanks) can also be used to delimit main-code and
subcode entries, but its main use is to delimit data items when a multiple set of values is provided
with parentheses (see below). (ASCII 46)
• [=] An equal's sign is used to separate each subcode from its associated numeric or character 
data. Additional spaces may be inserted either side of the equals to improve readability. Some
subcodes do not require values; if no value is provided the equals must be omitted. (ASCII 61)
• ['] Apostrophes (also known as closing single quotes) can be used in matching pairs to delimit
character data which itself contains delimiter characters, e.g. embedded blanks. (Do not confuse
apostrophe with the opening single quote[`], and do not attempt to match opening and closing
single quotes with one another.) (ASCII 39)
• ["] Double quotes can be used in matching pairs as an alternative to apostrophes in delimiting
character data. This is useful when the character string contains one or more single quotes. (Note
that double quote is itself a single character or keystroke, and is not equivalent to two single
quotes.) (ASCII 34)

Keyword Index 
560 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 578/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• [$] or [!] Either a dollar sign or an exclamation point is used to delimit end-of-line comments from
input data. All characters on the line between the comment delimiter and end-of-line will be
ignored. (ASCII 36 and 33)
• [(] [)] Parentheses are used to enclose Multiple Value Data Sets when 2 or more values are
provided for a subcode. Supplied data values should be separated with commas. (Additional
separators are valid in multiple data sets, see below.) (ASCII 40 and 41)
• [&] The ampersand is used to continue a statement across two or more lines. It is placed as the
last character on a line to specify that the statement continues on the next line. There is no limit
to the number of continuation lines, but the complete statement cannot span more than 256
characters, including spaces. The ampersand should appear between subcodes. Continued lines
can be separated with blank lines, but not with comment lines. (ASCII 38)
• [;] The semicolon is used to separate multiple statements provided on a single line. (ASCII 59)

Examples
RATE LIQUID = 6000 GLR = 400 WCUT = 20
RATE, LIQ=6000, GLR=400, WCUT=20
MULTICASE LIQ = ( 200, 250, 300 ) GLR = ( 95, 105 )
HEADER PROJECT=TEST, USER=J. BLOGGS
HEADER PROJECT=TEST, USER='JOE BLOGGS'
$ This line is a comment and will be ignored
! This line is also a comment
MULTICASE LIQ=(200.250,300) GLR=(95,105) ! This is an end-of-line comment
RATE, LIQ=6000, GLR=400, WCUT=20 $ This is also an end-of-line comment
MULTICASE LIQ=(200.250,300) & ! This statement is continued on the next line
GLR=(95,105)
! the next line contains two statements
RATE, LIQ=6000, GLR=400, WCUT=20 ; MULTICASE
LIQ=(200,250,300) GLR=(95,105)

5.2.4 Abbreviations
Main-code and sub-code keywords can be abbreviated down to the minimum number of letters
required to make them unique in their context. For maincodes the context is all other main-codes;
thus for example the GASLIFT maincode can be abbreviated to G because no other maincode starts
with G, but COMP is an illegal abbreviated maincode because it matches COMPRESSOR,
COMPLETION and COMPOSITION. The context for subcodes is restricted to the set of legal
subcodes for the maincode concerned. If the keyword is abbreviated too much, the input processor 
will generate a syntax error and processing will terminate.

Example
For example the following 2 lines are equivalent:

OPTIONS SEGMENTS=10
OPT S=10

Keyword Index 
561
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 579/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.2.5 Numeric data

Except where noted, all numeric data must be equated to a preceding subcode with an equals sign
[=]. Decimal points are optional, if provided only one is allowed and it must be the period or full stop
character, [.] (ASCII 46). Large and small values may carry an exponent, for example, 1200000 may
be written as 1.2e6 (or 0.12E7, .12e7, 1.2+6, 1.2e+6, 1.2D6, and so on). For example 0.000034 may
be written as 3.4e-5 (or 0.34e-6, and so on). Do not embed spaces or commas in numeric data; they
will be interpreted as delimiters signaling the end of the data item, and the remaining digits will then
cause a syntax error.
Some main-codes allow data to be provided without keywords, in a strict positional order. Usually
this is to allow easy entry of tabular data. Examples are PERMTAB (p.661), CONETAB (p.656),
IFPTAB (p.654).

Example
In the following example, all lines are equivalent:

RATE MASS=224.0
MASS=.224e+3
RATE MASS=224

5.2.6 Units Description

 A Units Description String can accompany numeric data. Such strings are the best way to provide
data in units different to the defaults established with the UNITS statement. The string must contain
no embedded blanks or other recognized delimiters. It can appear after the data to which it refers, or 
between the keyword and the equals. For example:

RATE LIQ = 3000 bbl/day WCUT = 55 % GOR = 300 scf/bbl

RATE LIQ bbl/day = 3000 wcut % = 55 GOR scf/bbl =
300

Multiple value data sets equated to non-symbolic subcodes can also accept unit's description strings
placed outside the parentheses, for example:

PUMPCRV head = (300, 250,200,150,100,50) kj/kg

Symbolic subcodes (eg ?ALPHA, ?BETA on Multicase) will not allow units description strings.
Instead, the description can be placed on the line where the symbol is used, for example:

MULTICASE ?ALPHA=(20,30,40)
PUMP DP = ?ALPHA kg/cm2

5.2.7 Character Input

Character data should be enclosed in a single or double quotes if it contains reserved delimiter 
characters (for example embedded blanks). It must be equated to a sub-code with an [=] sign.

Keyword Index 
562 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 580/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Example
For example:

HCORR PLOSS = BJA HOLOUP = BJA MAP = TD

NODE dist=0 elev = 0 t=100 u=0.8 label = "Station Z' to
J2"

5.2.8 Comment Statements and Blank Lines

 Any information to the right of a comment delimiter [$ or !] is ignored. Lines beginning with a comment
delimiter sign will be ignored completely and can be entered at any location in the input data file.
Blank lines are also ignored and so may be used to improve layout and readability.

Example

$ ~---- THIS LINE WILL BE IGNORED -----

RATE, MASS=224 $ THIS IS AN IN-LINE COMMENT

5.2.9 Multiple Value Data Sets

Some subcodes accept more than one value, and for these an explicit syntax is available using
parentheses. At its simplest the Multiple Value Data Set is a 2 or more values, separated by commas,
and enclosed by parentheses. For example:

MULTICASE LIQ=(200,250,300) GLR=(95,105)

CHOKE dbean = 0.5 ccorr = (pratio, sonicup, flowrate)
DOVCORR uovcorr=table temps=(80,100,120,140)
viscs=(6.5,5,2,1.5)
PRINT CUSTOM=(g3,h3,i3,k1,l1,m4,g4,f4,h11,i11,j11,m11)
PLOT CASE=(+,f7,g7,h7)

Multiple value sets can become very long, and care should be taken to avoid the maximum statement
limit of 256 characters.
 A range of data values can be specified for numeric data, this is a convenient alternative to entering
long strings of explicit values. The syntax is ( start : finish ; iop increment), which specifies a Starting
value, a Finishing value, an Increment Operator, and an Increment Value. The special characters
used are:
colon [:] separates the starting value from the finishing value

semicolon [;] separates the finishing value from the increment operator 

plus [+] the addition operator  

minus [-] the subtraction operator  

asterisk [*] the multiplication operator  

Keyword Index 
563
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 581/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

hash/sharp/number  the enumeration operator.

sign [#]
Note: On computers outside the USA, the hash character will sometimes
display as the national currency symbol. The required ASCII code is 35
decimal.

Examples
Some examples:

Example 1
To specify values from 10 to 100 by repeated addition of 5:

(10:100;+5).

Example 2
To specify values from 10 to 100 in 50 equal-sized steps:

(10:100;#50)

Example 3
To specify values from 10 to 100 by repeated multiplication by 1.5:

(10:100;*1.5)

Example 4
To specify values from 100 to 10 by repeated subtraction of 7:

(100:10;-7)

Example 5
The range syntax can appear many times and be combined with other values, E.g.:

MULTICASE GLR=( 0, 1:1000;*1.5, 1200, 1600, 2000:10000;+1000 )

5.2.10 Input Files

General
The input data may appear in more than one file. At least one file is required, this may contain explicit
references to further files if desired. In addition certain other files, if they exist, will be automatically
read and processed in addition to your main input file.

Keyword Index 
564
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 582/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The main input ('.PSM' or '.PST') file

Conventionally, the main input file has a filename with an extension of '.PSM'. It is specified on the
engine command line or in answer to the engine prompt 'INPUT FILE NAME:'. In fact however any
extension can be chosen, and will be used as specified. Beware however that word-processing
programs can generate files with embedded formatting characters (that the engine will not recognize)
if certain extensions are used, for example .TXT, .DOC. You are advised to use .PSM as the extension
for all PIPESIM keyword main input files.

Note: The PIPESIM Graphical User Interface (GUI) program generates temporary engine keyword
files with the extension .PST. All such files are assumed by it to be volatile, so if you choose to create
files with a .PST extension, they are likely to be overwritten with no warning. Use .PSM instead.

Included files and the INCLUDE statement

Input data can be explicitly split among 2 or more files by use of the INCLUDE statement. INCLUDE
has no subcodes, and the only value allowed is the name of the file to be included. The contents of 
the included file will be processed as though it appeared in the input file instead of the INCLUDE
statement. For example if the file 'oil23.inc' contains the following:

UNITS in=eng
BLACKOIL
PROP gassg=.68 watersg=1.05 api=37.6
PROP psat=600 psia tsat=120 F GSAT=370
RATE wcut=20 GOR=320

This file can be referenced from the main input file by use of an INCLUDE at the appropriate point,
for example:

INCLUDE oil23.inc

The Included file is assumed to reside in the same directory as the main input file; if this is not the
case a path can be provided, such as:

include ..\..\proj-45\common\oil23.inc

Filenames containing spaces and other delimiter characters must be quoted, for example:

INCLUDE "k:\my special projects\pipesim files\my common

files\proj-45\common\oil type 23c.inc"

Included files can themselves contain INCLUDE statements, and such nested includes can go to a
maximum of 10 levels. Take care to ensure such an include nest does not attempt to include a file
that has already been included.
 All Included files should specify a UNITS statement before any numeric data is supplied. Failure to
do this is not an error, but the interpretation of the contents of the included file will then depend on
the units in force in the main input file at the point of the INCLUDE statement. This is an unsafe
situation, and can lead to unforeseen errors, which do not necessarily manifest themselves
immediately. Any UNITS statement in an included file will only affect data in that file, and will not be

Keyword Index 
565 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 583/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

remembered when processing returns to the main input file. Thus an included file cannot be used to
alter units settings in the main input file.

AUTOEXEC.PSM
This is a special include file that, if it exists in the same directory as the main input file, is automatically
included for processing as though an INCLUDE statement referenced it. The file is named after the
MS-DOS control file AUTOEXEC.BAT because of the obvious parallels between them. Note however 
that, while AUTOEXEC.BAT must reside in the root directory of a DOS boot disk to do its job,
 AUTOEXEC.PSM must instead reside in the same directory as the engine main input file. It is
therefore possible to have many different autoexec.psm files in different directories of a computer's
file system.

modelname.U2P or branchname.U2P
The .U2P file is a file whose contents are defined identically to AUTOEXEC.PSM, but whose
applicability is limited to just one main input file name. This is specified by matching the rootnames
of the files. For example if the main input file is called fred.psm, the matching .u2p file is fred.u2p.

5.3 General Data

HEADER (p.566) Job Accounting Header 
JOB (p.567) Job Title
CASE (p.567) Case Title
UNITS (p.567) Input and Output Units
OPTIONS (p.568) Calculation Procedure Options
RATE (p.578) Fluid Flow Rate Data
ITERN (p.580) Iteration Data (Optional)
INLET (p.582) System Inlet Data
PRINT (p.583) Output Printing Options
NOPRINT (p.593) Output Print Suppression Options
PLOT (p.590) Output Plotting Options
BEGIN, END (p.593) Block delimiters
PUSH (p.595) Remote action editing
PLOT FILE DATA (p.596)

EXECUTE (p.596)
USERDLL (p.597) Equipment

5.3.1 HEADER - Job Accounting Header (Required)

Main-code: HEADER
The HEADER card must be the first card in a job and must contain both a PROJECT and USER sub-
code.

Keyword Index 
566 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 584/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PROJECT= Project name (12 characters maximum) which should be entered in quotes if the
string contains delimiters (such as blanks or commas).

USER= User name (12 characters maximum) which should be entered in quotes if the string
contains delimiters (such as blanks or commas).

PASSWORD= Password (12 characters maximum) which should be entered in quotes if the string
contains delimiters (such as blanks or commas).

Example

HEADER PROJ=TEST USER='JOE BLOGGS'

5.3.2 JOB - Job Title (Optional)

Main-code: JOB

JOB Job title (70 characters maximum). Quotes are not required even if the title string includes
delimiters.

5.3.3 CASE - Case Title (Optional)

Main-code: CASE

CASE Case title (70 characters maximum). Quotes are not required even if the title string includes
delimiters.

5.3.4 UNITS - Input and Output Units (Optional)

Main-code: UNITS

INPUT= Specifies the units in the input file

SI Input data in SI units (default).

ENG Input data in engineering units

OUTPUT= Specifies the units in the output file

SI Output data in SI units (default).

ENG Output data in engineering units

 ALL= Specifies the units in both the input and output files.

SI Input data in SI units (default).

ENG Input data in engineering units

Keyword Index 
567 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 585/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The UNITS statement should appear before the input data to which it relates and is therefore usually
placed at the top of the input file after the HEADER statement.
If input data is provided in additional files, viz. AUTOEXEC.PSM, (p.559) branchname .U2P, or files
specified on INCLUDE statements, each file should commence with its own UNITS statement to
ensure the units in the file are not dependent on the position in the main input file where it is processed.
 A UNITS statement in an additional file does not affect the units already established for the main input
file.
The UNITS statement may appear many times in the input file, to ensure the subsequent data has
the desired units system. Please note however it is preferable for each data item to be qualified with
its own units description string.

Example
UNITS INPUT=SI OUTPUT=ENG

5.3.5 OPTIONS Calculation Procedure Options (Optional)

Main-code: OPTIONS

SEGMENTS= The number of  segments in each pipe or tubing section. The pipeline is
divided into sections by entering distance and elevation data (or TVD/MD)
on NODE statements. Each section is then sub-divided by the program
into a number of segments for calculation purposes. The default number 
of segments is 4; allowable range is 1 to 500. The intermediate segment
data will only be printed if PRINT (p.583) sub-code SEGMENT is
selected. The MAXSEGLEN= subcode (below) can also be used to
subdivide sections. The EOFS= setting may add 2 additional short
segments to the section, see below.

MAXSEGLEN= The maximum segment length to be used by the program (ft or m). The
number of segments in each section is computed by dividing the section
length by the specified MAXSEGLEN= length. The final number of 
segments used is the maximum of this calculation, rounded up, and the
number specified by the SEGMENTS= subcode. above. The default for 
MAXSEGLEN= is infinite. The EOFS= setting may add 2 additional short
segments to the section, see below.

EOFS= “Extra One-Foot Segments”. Pipe sections between NODE statements

are divided into segments for calculation purposes, under the control of 
the SEGMENTS= and MAXSEGLEN= subcodes above. In addition, extra
short segments are added to the start and end of the section to ensure
the reported fluid properties and flowrates are calculated at an almost
identical temperature and pressure as that reported at the node. In fact,
the fluid properties are calculated at segment average pressure and
temperature. With EOFS enabled, the discrepancies caused by this
mismatch are minimized; however, it does have some effect of the
runtime. Can be set to ON or OFF. Default is ON.

Keyword Index 
568 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 586/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

SEC= Controls the calculation of pressure losses due to Sudden Expansions

and Contractions (SEC) of pipe diameter. Can be set to ON or OFF. The
default is ON.

SECLIM= The lower limit for printing of SEC pressure losses. Any SEC DP less than
this value will not be reported. DPs are reported with a one-line message
in the primary output page. Default is 10 psi.

GRIDPRES=(...) Values of pressure to be used in the P/T grid for compositional

interpolated flash calculations. Psia or bara. Exclusive with
NUMGRIDPRES=.

GRIDTEMP=(...) Values of temperature to be used in the P/T grid for compositional

interpolated flash calculations. F or C. Exclusive with NUMGRIDTEMP=.

NUMGRIDPRES= The number of grid pressure points desired in the P/T grid for 
compositional interpolated flash calculations. A number between 60 and
100, default 60. If this subcode is specified, the actual values of grid
pressure will be generated internally using an arithmetic increment
algorithm, between atmospheric pressure and approximately. 40,000 psi.
Exclusive with GRIDPRES=.

NUMGRIDTEMP= The number of grid temperature points desired in the P/T grid for 
compositional interpolated flash calculations. A number between 60 and
100, default 60. If this subcode is specified, the actual values of grid
temperature will be generated internally using a linear increment
algorithm, between -60 and +300 F. Exclusive with GRIDTEMP=.

2010GRID= Reverts from the current 60x60 compositional table pressure-temperature

grid size to the 21x21 grid size present in PIPESIM 2010.1 and earlier 
releases.

HTCRD= “Heat Transfer Coefficient Reference Diameter”. All HTCs printed on the
Heat Transfer Output pages will normally use a reference diameter equal
to the local pipe outside diameter. However, if a value is provided for 
HTCRD=, the supplied reference diameter will be used instead. This is
useful when sensitizing on pipe diameter, or when different pipe diameters
are present in the system, because it allows HTCs to be compared without
the need to convert for different diameters. Units are In. or mm.

GTGRADIENT= Controls geothermal gradient assumptions in flowlines and risers. When

a temperature profile is provided for a well tubing with TEMP= on the
various NODE statements, the values are assumed to specify measured
points on a geothermal gradient, so temperatures are interpolated
between them based on the true vertical Depth. However, when
temperatures are provided for flowlines and risers, they are assumed to
be specifications that exhibit a step-change at the nodes. This subcode
can be used to force flowlines and risers to interpolate the temperatures

Keyword Index 
569
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 587/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

according to the elevation or depth (not distance). Can be set to ON of 

OFF, the default is OFF.

PPMETHOD= Compositional Flashing method (p.144) for determination of fluid

transport properties. Can be set to 1, 2, or 3. The default is 1. The meaning
of these is:

1: Always Interpolate (fastest). This option uses interpolation between

physical properties from flash results in a predefined grid of temperature
and pressure points. This grid can be modified using the GRIDPRES=
and GRIDTEMP= subcodes above.

2: Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolation

elsewhere. This is a compromise between speed and accuracy, which
assumes that properties will change more rapidly when close to a phase
boundary. Interpolation is performed whenever the grid points comprising
a rectangle all show the presence of the same phases. For example. if all
4 points in the rectangle have some oil, some gas, and no water, then we
assume the rectangle lies entirely within the 2-phase region of the
hydrocarbon phase envelope, so interpolation is appropriate. If however 
one, two or three of the points have no oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon
dew point line crosses the rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.

3: Always Rigorous Flash (slowest). Interpolation never occurs: properties

are obtained by flashing at the required pressure and temperature. This
is the most accurate method, but it is also the slowest.

THMETHOD= Compositional Flashing method (p.144) for Temperature/enthalpy

balance calculation. In most simulations, for every PP flash that is
performed, there are about 5 to 10 TH flashes, so these have the greatest
effect on speed and run-time. The inaccuracies of TH interpolated flashes
are usually minimal. Can be set to 1, 2, or 3, as for PPMETHOD=.

IFP= This is a way to switch off all existing completion options in the model.
Should only be used by another program controlling the engine as a sub-
task. Can be set to ON or OFF. The default is ON.

 ACTIVELAYER= In a multi-layer well, specifies that only one of the reservoir layers is to be
active. Must be set to a number between 1 and the number of reservoir 
layers in the well. Layers are numbered starting with 1 for the deepest.

COMPLETION= or  Controls the way temperature and enthalpy changes are handled when
COMPHBAL= modelling the pressure drop calculations across a completion. may be set
to:
 ADIABATIC or ISENTHALPIC: The pressure change will be at constant
enthalpy, so the fluid will undergo a temperature change according to it's
Joule-Thomson coefficient. For Liquids this will result in a temperature
increase; for gases, temperature will usually decrease, but in high-
pressure reservoirs it may increase.

Keyword Index 
570 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 588/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ISOTHERMAL: The pressure change will be at constant temperature. The

fluid temperature will not change, so a consequent enthalpy change will
occur,

MAXEMULSION= Maximum value for the multiplier as interpolated or extrapolated from the
emulsion viscosity table for user-supplied and Woleflin emulsion
correlations (p.678). Default 100. The limit will be applied silently. This
is a global (model-wide) option.

MAXCUTOFF= Maximum value for the BOUNDARY= and CUTOFF= (p.678) keywords
on the LVIS statement, default 70. Limit will be applied silently. This is a
global (model-wide) option.

MAXLIQVISC= Maximum liquid viscosity the engine will allow. If any correlation predicts
values greater than this they will be limited to it. Default 1e7 cP. Limit will
be applied with warnings. This is a global (model-wide) option.

SMOOTHCUTOFF= Size of the transition region that is used to interpolate the viscosity
multiplier when watercut is above the cutoff value. Default 5%. This is a
global (model-wide) option.

EMUL3PHASE= Method for assigning priority between Emulsion options and a 3-phase
flow correlation. This is a PIPE component level option. May be set to one
of the following values:

EMULSION: Emulsion option will take priority. Any fluid with an emulsion
viscosity will override a 3-phase correlation. Oil and water phase
Viscosities and densities will be set to the emulsion liquid phase values
before calling the correlation.

3PHASE: 3 phase correlation will take priority. Separate oil and water 
phase densities and viscosities will be passed to it, and its answers will
be used as-is. The liquid phase emulsion viscosity will be ignored. This is
the default setting, chosen for backward compatibility with previous
versions of the engine.

HYBRID: The 3 phase correlation will be called as for the 3PHASE option,
and its prediction of the mixing status of the liquid phase will be examined.
If it predicts separate, unmixed oil and water phases, the answers will be
used as-is. If however it predicts mixed oil and water, and the fluid has an
emulsion viscosity, then the answers will be discarded, and a further call
made in the EMULSION mode as described above.

Note: The test for "the fluid has an emulsion viscosity" is that the mixed
liquid viscosity has to be at least 1% greater than the maximum of the oil
and water phase viscosities. The test will therefore give a positive result

Keyword Index 
571
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 589/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

for any emulsion option, that is, it is not restricted to Woleflin and user-
supplied-table options

HYDRATECALC= Controls calculation of Hydrate Formation Temperature (HFT) in

compositional models. HFT optionally appears in the profile plot file, but
calculating it results in a large increase in CPU time required, hence it is
not enabled by default. Can be set to OFF or ON.

WAXCALC= Controls calculation of Wax Formation Temperature (WFT or Cloud Point)

in compositional models. WFT optionally appears in the profile plot file,
but calculating it results in a large increase in CPU time required, hence
it is not enabled by default. Can be set to OFF or ON.

 ASPHALTCALC= Controls calculation of Asphaltene Formation Temperature (AFT) in

compositional models. AFT optionally appears in the profile plot file, but
calculating it results in a large increase in CPU time required, hence it is
not enabled by default. Can be set to OFF or ON.

 ALHANATI= Controls calculation of Alhanati Gas Lift Instability (GLI) criteria. GLI
criteria can be calculated for wells that have gas lift, but the calculation
requires a number of additional data items that are not needed for any
other purpose. Can be set to ON or OFF, default OFF.

ON: GLI criteria calculation is requested. If the additional data items are
available, the calculated criteria values will be written to the system plot
file; otherwise, diagnostic message(s) will be issued to enumerate the
missing data. To remove the messages, you can either supply the missing
data, or switch the calculation OFF.

OFF: GLI criteria will not be calculated, and diagnostic messages will not
appear.

GLMAXMASS= Specifies a maximum gas lift rate limit, in mass ratio terms. Unlimited gas
lift in a network branch can lead to the existence of multiple network
solutions, so the network may converge to an unwanted solution, where
a well produces nothing but lift gas. This subcode specifies the maximum
mass rate of gas that can be injected, as a ratio with the current production
mass flow rate. Its purpose is to prevent the well from converging at the
unwanted solution. It is only applied in a network model. The default value
is 0.2, thus the gas lift mass rate will be limited to 20% of the current
production mass flowrate in a network model.

GLMAXGLR= Specifies a maximum gas lift rate limit as a GLR. Unlimited gas lift in a
network branch can lead to the existence of multiple network solutions,
so the network may converge to an unwanted solution, where a well
produces nothing but lift gas. This subcode specifies the maximum rate
of gas that can be injected, as a volume ratio with the current production
stock-tank liquid flow rate. Its purpose is to prevent the well from

Keyword Index 
572 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 590/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

converging at the unwanted solution. The default value is infinite. A

sensible value for this limit is in the range 1000 to 2000 scf/sbbl. Units are
scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3.

FMMINTEMP= Specifies the minimum temperature used in fluid property flash

calculations.
However some Units arepackages
flash F or C. The
will default value
refuse to is 0K results
produce (absolute
at zero).
temperatures higher than this. For example, NIST Refprop requires
temperature to be above -100F. This keyword can be used to limit the
temperature range for the iterative PH flash algorithm when calculating
temperature from enthalpy. If the temperature is out of the flash package
range, you get an error message stating this. Only the minimum
temperature the package will allow is reported. Use this keyword to set
the equivalent minimum temperature. A similar keyword FMMAXTEMP=
is used for the maximum temperature.

SYSTEMTYPE= Specifies if the branch or model represents a production well or an

injection
unnecessary well.for
Usually
this tothere is no ambiguity
be explicitly between
stated by these
the user. and it is
However 
sometimes the model is open to interpretation either way. If it makes a
difference, the user can supply an override value here. One example
where this can be important is the production of VFP tables for a flowline
branch. If there is no elevation difference between the branch start and
end, then the system type is moot. However, VFP tables must be written
with VFPPROD for a production branch and VFPINJ for an injection
branch. Also, a VFPPROD allows sensitivity on GLR, Watercut and
 Artificial lift, and these must be provided in the table. Can be set to
PRODUCER or INJECTOR. If omitted, PIPESIM will determine the
system type, based on overall branch elevation change and the
location(s) and numbers of completions it contains.
LAYERINJECT= Controls the ability for reservoir layers to operate in injection mode. By
default layers are able to accept fluid injection if the tubing pressure
exceeds the layer pressure. Setting this option to NO makes all layers to
refuse to allow injection; if the tubing pressure exceeds the layer pressure,
the layer's flowrate will be zero. Can be set to YES or NO, default is YES.

ELIQLOADING=, LLE= Specifies the correction factor to be applied to Turner's general equation
in liquid loading (p.359) calculations. Minimum is 0.1, maximum is 10.0
and the default is 1.2.

LLVELOCITY= Controls which Gas Velocity is used in liquid loading (p.359) calculations
to get the Critical Gas Rate (CGR). Choices are: VSG, VM, VG, and EQN,
whose meanings are:

VSG: The Superficial Gas Velocity is used. This yields a result that is
closest to that obtained by a hand calculation (from which it differs
because the fluid phase behaviour is predicted by the selected fluid PVT
package). However it is insensitive to Liquid Volume Fraction (LVF), and

Keyword Index 
573
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 591/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

under some conditions can predict a CGR that reduces when LVF
increases. This is the default.

VM: The fluid Mean Velocity is used (i.e. the average of the gas and liquid
phase velocities, the velocity at no-slip conditions). This yields a
conservative result, i.e. a CGR somewhat higher than that obtained with
VSG. Its main advantage is that the CGR it calculates should increase
with VFL.

VG: The Actual Gas Velocity is used. VG is calculated by the selected

multiphase flow correlation, thus in principle it ought to be the most
accurate choice. The CGR it calculates is generally the largest, or most
conservative. However it will always be considerably larger than a hand
calculated result, and will be strongly affected by the choice of multiphase
flow correlation.

EQN: The gas velocity is calculated from the Stock-tank gas flowrate
using the equation: Vg = Qgas* (T+460) * Z / (3.067 * P * A) . This allows
the resulting CGR to be verified by hand calculation. However, it takes no
account of the fluid PVT behaviour.

LLANGLEMIN= or  Maximum pipe angle for liquid loading (p.81) calculations. The Turner 
 ALIQLOADING= equation assumes vertical or near vertical uphill flow. As deviation
increases, so the equation becomes less applicable; so it makes sense
to restrict it to pipe sections where the local deviation angle is a
reasonable approximation to the vertical. By default the limit is 45
degrees. It can be set to any vertical deviation angle between 0.1 and 90
degrees. When the Pipe is deviated greater than this, the calculation is
not performed.

LLFRNLIQMAX= Maximum Liquid Volume Fraction (LVF) for liquid loading (p.81)

calculations. The Turner equation assumes a continuous gas phase with
small dispersed liquid droplets entrained in it. As LVF increases, so the
equation becomes less applicable, and it makes sense to restrict it to pipe
segments where the LVF is consistent with the description “liquid droplets
in a continuous gas phase”. By default the limit is 0.1. It can be set to any
value between 0 and 1. When the LVF is greater than this, the calculation
is not performed.

RAMEYTIME= Specifies the length of time a well has been operating when HEAT
(p.664) subcode RAMEYMETHOD is invoked for a piece of tubing.
Minimum is 0 hour and default is 168 hours. The minimum recommended
value for RAMEYMETHOD=LARGETIME is 168 hours.

UFACTOR= Specifies a multiplier for all supplied (not calculated) U-values in heat loss
calculations. U-values are entered on the numerous NODE statements
that specify the geometry of the pipe and tubing of the branch. This
multiplier is applied to all of these before they are used in calculation of 
heat transfer and temperature change of the fluid. This is useful if you
want to sensitize on the overall effective U-value for the branch. Note it is

Keyword Index 
574
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 592/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

NOT used if the U-value is calculated. Default is 1, allowed range is 0 to

1e10.

SEPMASSCALC= Method for calculating the flowrate of fluid separated when a

compositional fluid passes through a separator. Can be set to TABLE or 
FLASH, default TABLE.

MPBOOSTROUTE= Specifies an override thermodynamic route to adjust the fluid temperature

and enthalpy at the discharge of any multiphase booster. Can be set to
ISENTHALPIC, ISOTHERMAL, or NONE.

FCVSHUTMODE= Shut-in behaviour for Flow Control Valves (FCVs). An FCV can be
specified with a table of fixed bean areas, and a flowrate limit. PIPESIM
enforces the flowrate limit by selecting the largest area that results in a
flowrate at or below the limit. However, it may happen that the smallest
bean area in the table is too large to enforce the limit. In this case the
value specified on this subcode is used to select a mode of behaviour.
Can be set to OPEN, SHUT, or EXACT, whose meanings are:

OPEN: The smallest non-zero bean area is used, so the flowrate will
exceed the specified limit.

SHUT: The valve will be set to the closed position, so the flowrate will be
zero.

EXACT: The flowrate will be set to the limit, and the required bean area
will be calculated and reported.

RETAINHEEL= Can be set to YES or NO. If YES, selects the Multiple Completion
algorithm for the well's iterative solution, regardless of the number of 
completions the well may contain. The default is NO.
IFC= An override on the state of the IFC= subcode on the HEAT statement.
Can be set to INPUT or CALC; if set to CALC, this overrides any
subsequent HEAT statement that may set it to INPUT.

SLUGREGIME= Specifies the Flow Regimes that allow slug length calculations.

NOSLUGREGIME= Specifies the Flow Regimes that do not allow slug length calculations.

MINSEGLEN= The minimum segment length to be used when pipe sections are
subdiivided. (ft or m).

OPPOINTS= Controls the explicit generation of Operating Points in the Nodal Analysis
operation. Can be set to YES, to generate them, or NO, to omit them. This
subcode is also available on the NAPLOT (p.694) statement; it is
duplicated here so that it can be used without the additional effects that
occur when NAPLOT is used.

DOWNHILLPREC= Downhill Pressure Recovery method. When a two-phase fluid flows in a

pipe that is angled downhill, the liquid phase usually flows faster than the

Keyword Index 
575 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 593/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

gas. Sometimes the liquid flows downhill at its terminal , or critical, velocity,
whereby its speed is limited by friction against the pipe walls, and there
is no net pressure gain due to the elevation change. This is often called
slack flow conditions. The multiphase flow correlations will not usually
model slack flow, so this keyword allows a choice of methods for 

simulating howthe
and will affect pressure recovery
value for is modelled
Elevation Pressureingradient:
downhill pipe sections,

CORR or NORMAL: Downhill pressure recovery is modelled by the

selected multiphase flow correlation. The exact calculations performed
will depend on the selected correlation. Typically, they use some mixture
fluid density based on the calculated liquid holdup. This is the default
method.

GAS: Downhill pressure recovery is calculated using the density of the

gas phase alone. This option assumes the liquid will segregate into a
stream at the bottom of the pipe and flow at its terminal velocity, similar 

to open-channell
liquid flow.isN.B.
volume fraction less This
than option
0.8; at is applied
higher only the
values, when the in-situ
CORR method
is used.

NONE: Downhill Pressure Recovery is disabled. The elevation pressure

gradient is set to zero in downhill pipe sections.

SSMETHOD= Segment Solution Method. The pipe and tubing objects (for example,
flowlines, risers, tubing strings, and distributed completions) are divided
into computational elements called segments. Each segment is simulated
one after another in a so-called marching algorithm. This subcode allows
a choice of segment length selection and solution method. (Note: To

activate this subcode

please contact requires a Currently,
Schlumberger.) specific debug flag. To get
the following the debug
choices are flag,
available:

1: This is the Original method, which uses predefined, fixed segment

lengths. The segment length is defined using the SEGMENTS= and
MAXSEGLEN= keywords. (See above.) All pressure drop, heat transfer,
and fluid inflow calculations are based on this segment length. If the
segment convergence algorithm fails, then the entire section (NB, not just
the current segment) is subdivided into double the previous number of 
segments and the calculation is restarted from the start of the section.

2: This is the Gradient method, which uses values of gradients to select

a suitable segment length at the position in the system being simulated.
The gradients considered are Pressure, Temperature, Enthalpy, and
Reservoir Fluid Inflow. These are expressed as a change in the quantity
per unit length of pipe. For example, pressure gradient is expressed as
psi/ft or bar/m, temperature gradient is expressed as F/ft or C/m, and so
on. Each gradient is evaluated at the segment boundaries. For each
gradient, a user-specifyable tolerance  exists which, when divided by the

Keyword Index 
576 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 594/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

gradient, yields a segment length. The minimum of these segment lengths

is used as the length of the next segment in the simulation. (For reasons
of backwards-compatability, the values of SEGMENTS= and
MAXSEGLEN= keywords are also honoured in this method.) If the
segment convergence algorithm fails, the segment length is halved and

the calculation
original method,isthe
restarted. This isonly
chop applies known as current
to the a "chop". NB, unlike
segment andthe
not to
the entire section.

DPRTOL= Delta Pressure Relative Tolerance is a tolerance used by the Gradient

method. This is a unitless ratio of pressure expressed as (PIN-POUT)/
PIN, where PIN is the segment inlet pressure, and POUT is the segment
outlet pressure. The segment length for the next segment is calculated as
DPRTOL*PIN/PGRAD, where PGRAD is the pressure gradient (DP per 
length) from the previous segment. The default is 0.04. Smaller values
will result in smaller, and therefore more, segments.

DPATOL= Delta Pressure

method. This is Absolute
a value ofTolerance is a tolerance
Delta Pressure used of
(DP) in units bypsi
theorGradient
Bar. The
segment length for the next segment is calculated as DPATOL/PGRAD,
where PGRAD is the pressure gradient (DP per length) from the previous
segment. The default is 1 psi. Smaller values will result in smaller, and
therefore more, segments.

DTATOL= Delta Temperature Absolute Tolerance is a tolerance used by the

Gradient method. This is a value of Delta Temperature (DT) in units of 
Farenheit or Celcius. The segment length for the next segment is
calculated as DTATOL/TGRAD, where TGRAD is the temperature
gradient (DT per length) from the previous segment. This ensures that the
temperature change across any segment is never more than DTATOL.
The default is 5 F. Smaller values will result in smaller, and therefore more,
segments.

DHATOL= Delta Enhtalpy Absolute Tolerance is a tolerance used by the Gradient

method. This is a value of Delta Enthalpy in units of BTU/lb or KJ/Kg. The
segment length for the next segment is calculated as DHATOL/HGRAD,
where HGRAD is the enthalpy gradient (DH per length) from the previous
segment. This ensures that the enthalpy change across any segment is
never more than DHATOL. The default is 10 btu/lb. Smaller values will
result in smaller, and therefore more, segments.

DPGTOL= Delta
method.Pressure
This is Gradient
a unitlessTolerance is a tolerance
ratio of pressure used
gradients byisthe
that Gradient
used to
validate the results of the current segment's DP calculation. The pressure
gradient in the current segment is compared to the previous segment. If 
the difference is greater than this tolerance, the segment is "chopped", or 
divided into two smaller segments. This allows the algorithm to identify
and recover from a pressure gradient discontinuity, such as what is often

Keyword Index 
577 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 595/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

encountered in multiphase flow correlations. The default value is 0.05.

Smaller values will result in smaller, and therefore more, segments.

DTGTOL= Delta Temperature Gradient Tolerance is a tolerance used by the

Gradient method. This is a unitless ratio of temperature gradients that is
used to validate the results of the current segment's DT calculation. The
temperature gradient in the current segment is compared to the previous
segment. If the difference is greater than this tolerance, the segment is
"chopped", or divided into two smaller segments. This allows the algorithm
to identify and recover from a temperature gradient discontinuity, such as
what is caused step-changes in ambient temperature. The default value
is 0.25. Smaller values will result in smaller, and therefore more,
segments.

DQGTOL= Delta Flowrate Gradient Tolerance is a tolerance used by the Gradient

method. This is a unitless ratio of flowrates and/or flowrate gradients. It is
relevant only in distributed completions and horizontal wells. It is used in

the following ways:

• The segment length for the next segment is calculated as DQGTOL/
QGRAD. QGRAD is the inflow rate gradient that is calculated from QI/
QP/Segl, where QI is segment inflow rate (the rate entering the
segment from the reservoir), QP is segment production rate (the rate
entering at the segment inlet), and Segl is segment length. These
values are all from the previous segment. This ensures the flowrate
change across any segment, when expressed as a ratio, is never more
than DQATOL.
• Used to validate the results of the current segment's Delta Flowrate
(DQ) calculation. The inflow gradient in the current segment is
compared to the previous segment. If the difference is greater than
this tolerance, then the segment is "chopped", or divided into two
smaller segments. This allows the algorithm to identify and recover 
from an inflow gradient discontinuity, such as what is caused by step-
changes in reservoir properties ( for example, pressure, and step-
changes in reservoir fluid properties.)
The default value is 0.2 .Smaller values will result in smaller, and therefore
more, segments.

MEMCHOPFACTOR= Memory Chop factor is a factor used by the Gradient method. When a
previous segment length was set as a result of a "chop" (see above), it is
desirable to restrict
to grow. The maximum the speed at which
segment lengthsubsequent segments
for the current areisallowed
segment limited
to the length of the previous segment multiplied by this factor. The default
value is 2.

5.3.6 RATE: Fluid Flow Rate Data

Main-code: RATE

Keyword Index 
578 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 596/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

RATE allows flow rate to be defined for all fluid types.

For both Blackoil and Compositional fluids, a flow rate may be defined in volumetric terms using the
GAS= or LIQ= subcodes, or in mass terms using MASS=. A mass rate refers to the total stream
without regard for which phases may exist. A volumetric rate refers only to the phase it specifies, and
is always measured at stock-tank conditions. The other phase may or may not be present at stock-
tank conditions, depending on the fluid definition, but it is never included in the specified flowrate.
Stock tank conditions are 1.013 bara and 15.6 oC, or 14.7 psia and 60 oF.

LIQ= Gross liquid flow rate at stock tank conditions (sm 3/d or STB/D). The liquid phase
includes both hydrocarbon and aqueous phases (oil and water), but not gas.

GAS= Gas flow rate at stock tank conditions (MMsm 3/d or MMscf/d).

MASS= The total mass flow rate (kg/s or lb/s). Note this defines the mass flow rate of the
total stream, in contrast to LIQ= and GAS=, which defines a flow rate for one phase
only.

MULTIPLIER= Factor to mix or split a previously defined flow rate by a fixed ratio. Supplied value
must be greater than zero. Valid only within the system profile, that is after the
PROFILE or the first NODE statement.

 ADDLIQ= Quantity to be added to a previously defined stock-tank liquid flow rate. Supplied
value may be greater or less than zero. (sm 3/d or STB/D). Valid only within the
system profile, that is after the PROFILE or the first NODE statement. See also the
INJFLUID. (p.630) statement.

 ADDGAS= Quantity to be added to a previously defined stock-tank gas flow rate. Supplied value
may be greater or less than zero. (MMsm 3/d or MMscf/d). Valid only within the
system profile, that is after the PROFILE or the first NODE statement.. See also the
INJFLUID and INJGAS. (p.630) statements.

 ADDMASS= Quantity to be added to a previously defined total mass flow rate. Supplied value
may be greater or less than zero. (kg/s or lb/s). Valid only within the system profile,
that is after the PROFILE or the first NODE statement.. See also the INJFLUID.
(p.630) statement.

 ADDER= Quantity to be added to a previously defined flow rate (may be greater or less than
zero). Note The units of ADDER= are inferred from the type of flowrate as originally
defined, viz. Gas, Liquid or Mass, and the system of unit conversions currently in
force, that is Engineering or SI. ). Valid only within the system profile, that is after 
the PROFILE or first NODE statement.

WCUT= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.675) statement.

GWR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.675) statement.

WGR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.675) statement.

GLR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.675) statement.

Keyword Index 
579
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 597/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

GOR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.675) statement.

LGR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.675) statement.

OGR= Obsolete: see the BLACKOIL. (p.675) statement.

 A Blackoil fluid must define its stock-tank volume phase split on the BLACKOIL statement, using the
subcodes: GLR=, GOR=, OGR=, or LGR=, and WCUT=, WGR= or GWR=. For historical reasons
these subcodes are also available on the RATE statement. However, since RATE applies to all types
of fluid (Compositional and Steam in addition to Blackoil), it is natural to assume that GLR= and so
on behave similarly. Alas they do not, they apply to black oil fluids only. You are strongly encouraged
to refrain from using these subcodes on RATE; use them on the BLACKOIL or COMPOSITION.
(p.687) statement instead.

5.3.7 ITERN Iteration Data (Optional)

 Allows the System Outlet Pressure to be specified.
Because PIPESIM performs a heat balance simultaneously with the pressure loss calculations, it is
necessary for the calculation procedure to begin at the pipeline source and proceed in the direction
of flow. A problem with a fixed delivery pressure therefore requires an iterative solution. The program
will iterate on the user's specified Control variable, whuich can be System Inlet Pressure, Flow Rate,
or a user-defined variable, as specified with the TYPE subcode.
The ITERN main-code should appear in the initial part of the input file, i.e. before the PROFILE or 
NODE statements.
Main-code: ITERN

POUT= The required System Outlet Pressure (psia or Bara).

TYPE= Specifies the identity of the Control variable ('guess') to be changed ('guessed') in
order to match the specified outlet pressure. May be one of:

PRESSURE or IPRESSURE: The system inlet pressure.

GFLOW: The system gas flow rate.

LFLOW: The system liquid flow rate.

MFLOW: The system mass flow rate.

PGEN+: A User-specified variable, as defined with the special symbol ?XITERN.

See note 1 below. Outlet pressure is expected to increase as ?XITERN increases.

PGEN-: A User-specified variable, as defined with the special symbol ?XITERN.

See note 1 below. Outlet pressure is expected to decrease as ?XITERN increases.

XEST= Initial Estimate of the Control Variable ('guess') to be changed ('guessed') in order 
to match the specified outlet pressure. The units for this is dependent on the TYPE.
For example: = Estimated inlet pressure (bara or psia) if TYPE=PRES. = Estimated

Keyword Index 
580 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 598/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

mass flow rate (kg/s or lb/s) if TYPE=MFLOW. = Estimated gas flow rate (kg/s or 
lb/s) if TYPE=GFLOW.= Estimated liquid flow rate (kg/s or lb/s) if TYPE=LFLOW

PTOL= Allows control over the Outlet Pressure Tolerance. The program will iterate until the
difference between the calculated outlet pressure and the pressure specified in the
POUT sub-code is less than outlet pressure tolerance. The user can specify the
required tolerance, as a percentage, by use of the PTOL sub-code. If PTOL is not
specified, the program will use a value of 1% or 1 psi, whichever is the smaller.

XTOL= Allows control over the Control Variable ('guess') Tolerance. This is important if the
system being simulated is prone to becoming 'ill-conditioned' (i.e., when a small
change in guess results in a disproportionately large change in outlet pressure).
Under such conditions it may take the iterative procedure many more iterations than
usual to calculate a solution to within the outlet pressure tolerance (if it can manage
it at all). Also, the user may not be interested in such accuracy, because for 
example, s/he may only be able to control the guess to within fairly coarse limits.
XTOL exists to stop the program performing numerous unnecessarry iterations, by

terminating the iterative

specified tolerance. Theprocedure when two
user can control the successive
value of thisguesses fallas
tolerance, within
a the
percentage, with the XTOL sub-code. The default value for XTOL is 1.0E-4 %.

XMIN= Specifies a lower bound for the Control variable. If the iterative procedure attempts
to guess below this limit, the guess will be reset to the limit. If this shows the required
answer lies below the limit, the iterative procedure will terminate with a suitable
diagnostic, and case output will be written.

XMAX= Specifies an upper bound for the Control variable. If the iterative procedure attempts
to guess above this limit, the guess will be reset to the limit. If this shows the required
answer lies above the limit, the iterative procedure will terminate with a suitable

diagnostic, and case output will be written.

LIMIT= Specifies the maximum allowed number of iterations. The default value is 40 and
the maximum is 100. If a solution has not been obtained within this number of 
iterations, the iterative procedure will be terminated, and results printed for this case
with the current (i.e. last guessed) value of input pressure or flow rate.

SCREEN Gives node by node output on the user's terminal for each iteration. If this sub-code
is omitted, the only output that appears on the terminal during the iteration
procedure is one line for each iteration, summarizing the iteration progress so far.
Note this sub-code has no effect if PIPESIM is running in batch mode.

OPWI Enables OPWI ("Output Printing While Iterating") mode. Node-by-node output for 
the system profile is written to the output files during every iteration. Normally, this
output would be suppressed until the iterative procedure has converged. This is
useful for debugging the iterative procedure.

LASTANSWER Using this sub-code, the guess from the previous case is used as an estimate for 
the next case. Thus the value which you have set for XEST will only be used in the
first case.

Keyword Index 
581
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 599/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

CFCMODE= Controls the iteration routine's interaction with a system containing a Choke in
critical flow. Can be set to ON or OFF, default is ON. In the ON state, a choke in
critical flow will terminate the iterative procedure early. Thus is usually beneficial,
since the converged solution is likely to require the choke to be in critical flow.
However when TYPE=PGEN, and the Control variable is applied downstream of 
the choke, an early iterative termination will prevent correct convergence, so the
OFF state is preferable.

CFCSOLN= Controls the post-convergence behaviour when a case has converged with a choke
in critical flow. Can be set to ON or OFF, default ON. In the ON state, a further round
of iteration is performed, to converge on the pressure downstream of the choke that
allows the specified system outlet pressure to be achieved. In the OFF state, this
further round is omitted, thus the system outlet pressure will be higher that the one
specified.

TITLE= Specifies the title to be used for the Control variable in the system and profile plot
files.

Notes:
1. When TYPE=PGEN+ or PGEN- is used, the iterations will guess the value of a user-defined
variable in order to achieve the specified outlet pressure. The variable is called ?XITERN, and the
user must arrange that this name appears at a suitable point in the input file as the value of a
subcode that will have an effect on the system outlet pressure. This is how PIPESIM implements
its user variable (p.188) feature. PGEN is an acronym for "Pseudo-GENeral iterative mode" (it is
not truly general since it converges only on outlet pressure).

5.3.8 INLET System Inlet Data

Main-code: INLET
The INLET statement is optional. It is useful if the system contains no reservoir completions, and is
typically used to define a Generic Source at the start of a surface pipeline model. If supplied, must
appear before the PROFILE or first NODE statement.

TEMPERATURE= The temperature of the fluid entering the system at the System inlet. ( oC or oF).
If omitted, the inlet fluid is assumed to enter the system at the ambient
temperature as defined on the first NODE statement.

PRESSURE= The System inlet pressure (bara or psia). Not required if the inlet pressure is to

be determined
reservoir using
pressure is the iteration
supplied withoption
a well(see theperformance
inflow ITERN main-code),
option . or if the

ENTHALPY= or H= As an alternative to temperature, the inlet fluid enthalpy can be supplied;

PIPESIM will then calculate its temperature. (btu/lb or Kj/kg)

Keyword Index 
582 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 600/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

QUALITY= As an alternative to Temperature or Enthalpy, and only if the fluid is specified

as Steam, the inlet steam quality can be supplied. Quality is the steam mass
fraction vapour: must be in the range 0 to 1.

5.3.9 PRINT Output Printing Options (Optional)

Main-code: PRINT
PIPESIM offers a wide choice as to the amount of printed output. The PRINT maincode controls most
of the available options, which can be divided into 4 behavioral categories:
Per-case Output pages
Subcodes such as PRIMARY and AUXILIARY control the production of complete pages
which are repeated for as many cases as desired (as specified on CASES=). Pages are
typically 132 characters wide and usually have (at least) one line for every node in the system,
or otherwise have about 60 lines of relevant data. These page selections should be made at
the start of the job or between cases.
Attributes
Subcodes such as SEC and TITLES affect the way data appears on output pages, e.g. by
adding something to an existing page or changing the representation of the data on the page.
Page attributes are best selected at the start of the job and not changed thereafter.
Point reports
Subcodes such as SPOT and PHASE SPLIT control the production of localized reports
dedicated to an aspect of the system at a chosen position, or to a piece of equipment within
it. Reports are requested by supplying the PRINT statement, with the required subcode, at
the position within the system profile where the information is required. They are written to
one of the selected output pages (as specified on REPORTS=) and appear for as many
cases, and as many positions, as desired.
One-off Output pages
Subcodes such as SYNTAX, ECHO and NARESULT control the production of single page
reports that appear only once per job. These page selections should be made at the start of 
the job.
Except where noted, the options can appear without a value, in which state a value of ON will be
assumed. Values of OFF or ON can be provided if desired

Per-case output page options

The per-case output page options are as follows:

Default

PRIMARY The primary output page consists of a line for each node, containing node ON
distance and elevation, pipe angle, fluid pressure, temperature and mean
velocity, friction and elevation pressure drop, phase flowrates, phase
densities, and Flow Regime pattern.

Keyword Index 
583
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 601/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 AUXILIARY The Auxiliary output page consists of a line for each node, containing ON
node distance and elevation, , phase superficial velocities, mass flow
rates and viscosities, overall Reynolds number, Liquid volume fraction,
Liquid Holdup fraction, Flowing Liquid Watercut, total enthalpy, Erosion
velocity, Erosion rate, Corrosion rate, Hydrate sub-cooling Delta
Temperature, Liquid loading Velocity ratio, and segment iteration
counters. For compositional fluids 3 additional columns hold table
interpolation diagnostics.

HORWELL The Horizontal Well output page consists of a line for each node, OFF
containing: node distance and elevation; Reservoir and Wellbore
Pressure; Reservoir, Inflow, and Wellbore temperature; Inflow Joule-
Thomson Coefficient; Distributed Productivity Index; Wellbore flowrate;
Specific inflow (i.e., flowrate between wellbore and reservoir, per unit
length); Friction Gradient; Reservoir and Wellbore GLR and Watercut;
and Liquid Viscosities for Reservoir, Inflow and Wellbore. The Horwell
output is restricted to the portion of the system that is defined to be a
distributed completion (see the COMPLETION (p.613) statement).
FLUID The Input Fluid data page shows the definition of the Blackoil or  ON
Compositional fluids used as input to the case (fluid definitions resulting
from mixing or separation can be obtained with the SPOT=FLUIDSPEC
subcode, see below). A compositional fluid is specified mostly by its
component list and their respective molar flowrates, along with other data
controlling the attributes of the selected PVT package and table
interpolation control data. A blackoil fluid is specified by a number of 
correlation choices and tunable values. This page also specifies fluid
input flowrates.

PROFILE The profile and Flow Correlations output page consists of a line for each ON
node, containing node distance and elevation, pipe section length,
cumulative length, ambient temperature, input U-value, node TVD and
MD, and fluid definition detail. In addition the selected Horizontal, Vertical,
and Single Phase flow correlation choices will be echoed, along with
pertinent options currently in force.

ITERATION The case-level iteration progress log page. This page will only appear if  ON
the case is iterative, i.e. the Outlet Pressure has been specified. Data is
one line per iteration plus information on how each iteration's guess is
computed. Errors encountered during iteration will also appear on this
page.

INFLOW Details of the selected Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) appear on OFF
this page. Data includes relevant input values and all derived or computed
values and answers. If the model contains multiple completions, each will
have its own section on this page.

HINPUT The heat Transfer Input data page has a line for each node showing the OFF
input data for detailed heat transfer calculations across multiple layers of 

Keyword Index 
584
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 602/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

pipe and coatings. Values are: node distance, wax pipe and coatings
thicknesses, wax pipe and coatings conductivities, burial depth, ambient
fluid velocity, and ambient temperature.

HOUTPUT The Heat Transfer Output page has a line for each node showing the OFF
results of heat transfer calculations. Values are: Node distance, fluid
temperature and enthalpy, Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient (HTC), Fluid
film HTC, wax pipe and coatings HTCs, soil/ambient HTC, and text
description of burial configuration. (All HTCs are referenced to the Pipe
(Note: not coatings) outside diameter, this can be changed with the
HTCRD= subcode of HEAT (p.665) ).

SLUG The Slug output page has a line for every node showing the results of  OFF
slugging calculations. Values are: node distance and elevation, mean
slug length and frequency, 1 in a thousand slug length and frequency, 1
in a hundred slug length and frequency, 1 in ten slug length and
frequency, PI-SS, and flow regime pattern.

GLINPUT The gas Lift Input data page has a line for every gas lift valve in the OFF
system, showing the input data supplied for it.

Note: The lines in this page appear in order of depth from the wellhead,
i.e. shallowest at the top of the page, deepest at the bottom; this is the
opposite to the direction of fluid flow in a gas lifted well, so this page will
usually be in reverse order when compared with all other pages.

Values are: Valve TVD and MD, valve port diameter, Cv, test rack
pressure, Ap/Ab, Throttling factor, valve type, and valve operation mode.
(To request this page be produced in the same direction as the rest of 
the output pages specify GLINPUT=*FWD). N.B. The values in this page
are only useful when MODE=SIMULATE has been specified on a
GASLIFT (p.624) statement.

GLOUTPUT The Gas Lift Output page has a line for every gas lift valve in the system, OFF
showing all calculated values for the valve. The lines are ordered
shallowest first as for the GLINPUT page (see above). Values are: valve
MD, test rack dome pressure, valve operating temperature at depth,
dome pressure at depth, casing and tubing pressure at depth, valve
opening and closing pressures, DP across valve, Orifice gas flowrate,
throttled gas flowrate, actual gas flowrate, and text description of valve

operating
as the reststatus.
of the (To request
output pagesthis page be
specify produced in the same
GLOUTPUT=*FWD). direction
N.B. The
values in this page are only useful when MODE=SIMULATE has been
specified on a GASLIFT (p.624) statement.

3PHASE For Shell clients only, this page has a line for every node showing three OFF
phase flow values as calculated by the SRTCA 3-phase flow correlation.

Keyword Index 
585 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 603/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The 3-phase SRTCA (p.601) correlation must be the selected

multiphase flow correlation for this page to appear.

 ARTSLUG For Shell clients only, this page has a line for every node showing the OFF
results of Artificial Slug calculations. The Artificial Slug SRTCA
(p.601) correlation must be the selected multiphase flow correlation for 
this page to appear.

WAX this page has a line for every node showing Wax Deposition input data, OFF
calculations and results.

CUSTOM=(x,x,x) The Custom output page allows you to create your own page of output OFF
organized one node per line. Values appear in columns on the page and
are chosen from the set of Profile Plot variables. Identifiers are provided
as a multiple value set (p.559). An up-to-date list of the available
identifiers can be obtained using the SYNTAX subcode of PLOT
(p.591). Each column will be 10 characters wide plus one space, so 11
columns will conveniently fit on a standard width page. If desired you can
specify up to 40 identifiers, but be aware this will give an output page that
is 440 characters wide.

INDATA This is a combination of PROFILE and FLUID. ON

EXTRA= The Extra output page allows installation-specific data to be printed. This OFF
subcode requires an equated value. If the value TGRAD is provided, the
result is a page containing a line for each node with temperature Gradient
information from heat transfer calculations. Other values are installation-
specific..

Attributes
The Attributes are:

Default

TITLES Print case titles on job summary output ON

SEGMENTS Print segment data. The pipe or tubing section between each node is sub- OFF
divided for computation purposes into a number of segments (as controlled
by OPTIONS SEG= (p.568) and MAXSEGLEN= (p.568) , and the accuracy
needs of the calculation at each point). With this subcode selected, each
segment will have its own line of output in all the per-case output pages;
without it, the output will be restricted to each node.
SEC Print details of pressure drops caused by Sudden Expansion and ON
Contraction. When Pipe ID changes, the junctions between the non-
matching diameters are assumed to be straight-edged, and to cause
pressure reduction due to turbulence effects. With this subcode enabled a
one-line message will be written to the primary output where SEC losses

Keyword Index 
586 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 604/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

are greater than a specified threshold value (as defined with OPTIONS
SECLIM=).

CASES= Specifies the number of cases to print. This subcode requires a numeric 1
value. The selected per-case output pages will appear for as many cases
as are specified. In Nodal Analysis jobs, the value applies to both the inflow
and the outflow cases, thus the actual number of cases printed will be
double.

REPORTS= Specifies the name of the per-case output page to receive point report PRIMARY
output. Any of the per-case page names can be provided to direct the point
reports to the specified page. In addition the value DEDICATED specifies
that an additional page be created to hold them instead.

Point report subcodes

The point report subcodes must appear on a PRINT statement, positioned within the system profile,

at the position where

PRINTstatement mustthe
bevalues areeach
used for required.
report.If Each
multiple reports
report are required
is written at anypage
to the output pointchosen
a separate
with
the REPORTS= subcode above. Reports vary in length between 6 and 200 lines. They are:

SPOT=STPROPS Fluid Stock-tank properties: phase flowrates and physical properties are
reported at stock-tank conditions, viz. 14.7 psia, 60 F.

SPOT=FLPROPS Fluid flowing properties: phase flowrates and physical properties are
reported at the current pressure and temperature

SPOT=MPFLOW Multiphase Flow values: Fluid properties, pipe dimensions, and calculated
values with particular relevance to multi-phase flow calculations. See note
1.

SPOT=SLUG Slug flow values: fluid properties and calculated values with relevance to
slug size calculations. See note 1.

SPOT=SGLV Sphere-Generated Liquid Volume values: input data and results from SGLV
calculations. See note 1.

SPOT=HTINPUT Heat Transfer Input values: fluid properties, pipe and coatings thicknesses
and conductivities etc. as used in heat transfer calculations. See note 1.

SPOT=HTOUTPUT Heat transfer output and calculated values: heat transfer coefficients,
coating layer temperatures, film coefficients and dimensionless groups. See
note 1.
SPOT=FLUIDSPEC Fluid specification values. The complete set of values that define the fluid.
 A compositional fluid is specified mostly by its component list and their 
respective molar flowrates, along with other data controlling the attributes of 
the selected PVT package and table interpolation control data. A blackoil
fluid is specified by a number of correlation choices and tunable values.

Keyword Index 
587 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 605/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

SPOT=ACVALUES 'Accululated' values. These are values that accumulate over the length of 
the system, for example total liquid holdup, total friction DP, total pipeline
volume, etc.

SPOT=SHELL Shell clients only, a report specific to the SRTCA slugging and 3-phase flow
correlation. See note 1.
SPOT=COMPLETION Distributed or multipoint completion values: reservoir inflow, drawdown,
Distributed P.I., Skin values, relevant pipe dimensions, fluid phase flowrates
and physical properties. See note 1.

USPOT=(x,x,x) Custom spot report: allows you to create a report of values of your choice.
Values are chosen from the set of Profile Plot variables. Identifiers are
provided as a multiple value set (p.559). An up-to-date list of the available
identifiers can be obtained using the SYNTAX subcode of PLOT. (p.590)

MAP Print the flow regime map at the current position. A flow regime map is
specific to each choice of multiphase flow correlation, and is affected by fluid
properties, pipe dimensions, and (critically) pipe angle. Since the map must
be requested at a node position, please note that the pipe angle (and
perhaps other dimensions) may change across the selected node. The
dimensions and angle used to generate the map are those of the Upstream
pipe section. The fluid properties used are those at the current pressure and
temperature. If the map is requested at the start of the profile, pipe
dimensions and angle are taken from the first pipe section.

PHASESPLIT Print a Phase Split report, for compositional fluids only. This lists the molar 
flowrates of all components in the feed stream and in the phases that exist
at that pressure and temperature. Additional phase properties such as
density, viscosity etc. are also printed.
PRESSURE= Pressure value for use with PHASESPLIT; if provided, will be used instead
of the system current pressure. (psia or Bara)

TEMPERATURE= Temperature value for use with PHASESPLIT; if provided, will be used
instead of the system current temperature. (F or C)

PHASENV= Produce a plot file containing the Phase Envelope (and other lines) for the
current compositional fluid. Note this option produces no printed output;
instead, a plot file will be created, named with an 8-character code known
as the handle, and with an extension of .ENV. This file can be processed by
the plotting post-processor PSPLOT to display the phase envelope.

N.B., you do not need to know the name of the file to plot the phase envelope.
From the GUI, select Profile Plot, then select Series, and choose axes of 
pressure and temperature. The phase envelope file(s) will be automatically
processed along with the model's profile plot data, so you should see the
phase envelope and other available line(s) along with the pipeline system's
pressure-temperature traverse.

Keyword Index 
588 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 606/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

By default the phase envelope file will contain a number of lines, depending
on the phase behaviour of the fluid, the capabilities of the selected PVT
package, and the PVT feature licenses you have available. The lines can be
selected by supplying a list of line types as a multiple value set. (p.563)
 Available line types are:

HYDROCARBON: the hydrocarbon phase envelope, consisting of a bubble

point line and a dew point line

CRITICALPOINT: the Hydrocarbon critical point

WATERDEW: the water dew point line

HYDRATE1: Hydrate type 1 line

HYDRATE2: Hydrate type 2 line

WATERICE: the water ice line

WAX: the wax appearance, or cloud point, line

 ASPHALTENE: the asphaltene appearance line

If you do not supply a list of line types, the file will contain as many lines as
the PVT package is capable of generating for the fluid, and for which you
have a valid license.

QUALITY= Values of Quality for use with PHASENV. If present, must be equated to a
multiple value set (p.563) of quality values, each in the range 0 to 1. The
resulting plot file will contain a hydrocarbon quality line for each value.

Note: The values in this report are calculated during the simulation of a piece of pipe, and therefore
refer to the pipe segment immediately upstream of the statement's position.

One-off output pages

The One-off output pages are:

Default

NARESULT Nodal Analysis result page. Lists the pressure, temperature and flowrate ON
at the Nodal Analysis point for all cases in each inflow and outflow curve.
Will only appear in Nodal Analysis jobs.
SUMFILE Controls the generation of the summary output file. This file is named ON
from the model file's root name with an extension of .SUM, and contains
a line for each labelled node for every case that was run in the job. Data
values are: Stock-tank watercut, Stock-tank liquid flow rate, flowing free
gas flow rate, pressure, temperature, friction elevation and total pressure

Keyword Index 
589
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 607/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

losses, mixture velocity, liquid holdup fraction, liquid holdup volume, and
flow regime pattern.

SUMMARY Requests that the summary file be copied to the end of the main output ON
file at the end of the job. Requires that SUMFILE be set to ON.

WAXRESULT For Shell clients only, this page has one line per case or per reporting OFF
interval showing the history of wax deposition in the system.

ECHO Writes a line-numbered copy of the input data file at the start of the job. ON
 All included files will be expanded in-line, and any syntax errors
generated will appear after the line that caused them.

SYNTAX Print formatted table of valid keyword input data. This extends over about OFF
20 pages and lists the available maincodes, subcodes, value types they
can be equated to, conversion factors, maximum and minimum limits for 
numeric data, and allowable character values. This report is generated
from the engine code used to read and validate the input data file. It is
useful when up-to-date documentation is not to hand or appears to be
incorrect.

NEWINPUTDATA Writes a copy of the input data file, but with the numeric data converted OFF
to the units system specified for output (with UNITS OUT=).

5.3.10 PLOT Output Plotting Options (Optional)

Main-code: PLOT (or NOPLOT to switch off)
The PLOT statement requests the production of plot files, and controls various aspects of program
behavior with relevance to plotting. Plot files are post-processed with the BJA plotting program
PSPLOT, or your chosen plotting program (for example Microsoft EXCEL). When driven using the
PIPESIM GUI, plots will normally appear concurrently with running the engine.

CASE or PROFILE Requests the production of the Profile Plot File, which contains data that
is organized to be plotted against position in the pipeline system. For 
example a pressure profile for a flowline shows pressure on the Y-axis
against total distance on the X-axis; A temperature profile shows
temperature against total distance. For a well the axes may be reversed,
and/or the Y-axis might be elevation or depth. The profile plot file will
contain many quantities that can sensibly be plotted against distance,
elevation, or total length. (They may also be plotted against one another,
with varying degrees of usefulness.) By default, each NODE (p.635) in
the system will produce a point on the plot, and each case (p.699) will
produce a separate line on the plot. The SEGMENT subcode (see below)
will increase the number of plot points on each line.

CASE= or PROFILE= As above, and if a value is provided, it specifies the data that is to appear 
in the plot file. Identifiers are provided as a multiple value set (p.563). An
up-to-date list of the available identifiers can be obtained using the
SYNTAX subcode (see below). If no value is supplied a default set of 

Keyword Index 
590 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 608/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

plot file data will be written. If your supplied value starts with a plus sign
[+], your identifiers will be added to the default set instead of replacing
it.

JOB or SYSTEM Requests the production of the System Plot File, which contains data that
is organized to be plotted against sensitivity variables. For example a job
that sensitizes on flowline ID could produce a plot of ID on the X-axis
against flowrate on the Y-axis (or ID against holdup, or flowrate against
holdup, etc...). The plot file will contain many values, and you can plot
anything against anything, with varying degrees of usefulness. Each
case will produce one point on the plot, and separate lines on the plot
are produced by combinations of sensitivity variables as specified by
MULTICASE or NAPLOT statements.

JOB= or SYSTEM= As above, and if a value is provided, it specifies the data that is to appear 
in the plot file. Identifiers are provided as a multiple value set. An up-to-
date list of the available identifiers can be obtained using the SYNTAX

subcode (see below).

will be written. If no value
If your supplied is supplied
value a default
starts with a plusset of plot
sign file data
[+], your 
identifiers will be added to the default set instead of replacing it.

SEGMENT Requests that profile plot data be written for every segment. By default
a point is written only for each node, but the pipe between each node is
usually sub-divided into a number of segments for calculation purposes.
With this subcode you can plot the intermediate segment data as well.

HERE= Requests that specified profile plot variables be added to the existing
system plot file at the current profile position. This can be used for 
example to obtain fluid properties at any point, so they can be plotted

against sensitivity are

profile. Identifiers variables. This
provided assubcode is only
a multiple valuevalid within thechosen
set (p.563). system
from the profile plot variables list (see SYNTAX below).

SYNTAX Will create a list (in the standard output file) in two columns of available
plot file variables and their identifiers (for example A, B, Y2, etc.) These
identifiers can be provided to the JOB=, CASE= or HERE= subcodes
(see above), and to SPOT= and CUSTOM= subcodes of PRINT
(p.583).

EQUIPJOB= Controls the addition of equipment plot variables to the system plot file.
Each item of equipment (for example, pumps, chokes, heaters, and so
on) placed in the profile will, by default, result in additional plot variables
being added to the system plot file. For each equipment item, between
6 and 20 additional variables will be added, the exact number and
selection being specific to the equipment concerned. Can be set to ON
or OFF, default ON.

PVTDATA= Presence of this subcode triggers production of a fluid calibration plot

file, similar to that produced when one of the PLOT buttons in the Black
oil dialog advanced calibration tab is pressed. If a value is provided it

Keyword Index 
591
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 609/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

must be a multiple value set of identifiers specifying the fluid properties

to be written to the plot file. The file created is named from the model or 
branch root file name with an extension of .PEX.

FORMAT= The overall textual layout of the plot files. Can be set to:

BJA: Write the plot files in BJA (i.e., original PIPESIM) format. This is the
default option. BJA format plot files are composed of printable ASCII
characters, arranged in lines of less than 200 columns. Header 
information is present at the start of the file. This is the option to use if 
you intend to read the file with PSPLOT.

LOTUS: Write the plot files in LOTUS '.PRN' file format. Files will be
named with the extension .PRN. The Lotus 123 spreadsheet program
will recognize .PRN files and will often read them without further user 
intervention.

NEUTRAL: Write the plot files in NEUTRAL format. NEUTRAL format

consists entirely of lines of numeric data arranged in columns. No header 
information is written.

CSV: Write plot files in Comma Separated Value format. Files will be
named with the extension .CSV. The EXCEL spreadsheet program will
recognize .CSV files and will usually read them without further user 
intervention.

PACKEDCSV: As for CSV above, but the data is written in a compressed

form that occupies less space, thus using less disk space; however, it
takes more run-time to produce.

GOAL: Write files in GOAL-compatible format. This is a combination of 

revision B (see below) and BJA.

XYJOB= For the System plot file, specifies the identifiers to be used as the X and
Y axes when the plotfile is first opened by PSPLOT. Identifiers are
provided as a multiple value set.

XYCASE= For the Profile plot file, specifies the identifiers to be used as the X and
Y axes when the plotfile is first opened by PSPLOT. Identifiers are
provided as a multiple value set.

VERSION= or  Specifies the revision standard that the plot file is to be written to
REVISION= conform to. May be set to B or C, whose meanings are:

B: Revision B plot files conform to an older standard that contains some

fixed-format data and hence is not forward compatible. Some older 
programs that read plot files, notably GOAL, can only process revision
B plot files.

C: Revision C plot files contain additional information, and are written

using textual Tags at the start of every line. This allows a measure of 

Keyword Index 
592 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 610/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

forward compatibility, thus additional features may be present in the file,

and these can be silently ignored by an older reading program, without
causing an error.

COMPOSITIONS= Controls the addition of  composition records to the system plot file.
Composition records specify the fluid definition at the system outlet, and
are important in .PWH files created for use in PIPESIM.net's Wells Off-
line mode. With composition records present, a PWH file can be used to
replace a well definition in a network run, resulting in considerable
speedup of the network solution. Can be set to YEs (the default) or NO.

CASEFILENAME= or  Specifies the name of the profile plot file. By default this will be created
PROFILEFILENAME= at run-time from the root name of the branch or model input file name,
with an extension of .PLC.

JOBFILENAME= or  Specifies the name of the system plot file. By default this will be created
SYSTEMFILENAME= at run-time from the root name of the branch or model input file name,
with an extension of .PLT.

PVTFILENAME= Specifies the name of the Fluid calibration plot file produced with the
PVTDATA= subcode. By default this will be created at run-time from the
root name of the branch or model input file name, with an extension
of .PEX.

 ALHANATI= Controls the calculation of Alhanati gas lift Instability criteria. The
 Alhanati criteria are required by GOAL, so production of GOAL-format
files will enable this option. If it is enabled, but some of the data it requires
is missing, warning messages will be produced: these will list the nature
of the required missing data. This subcode allows the calculation to be
controlled explicitly, thus the messages can be suppressed if the
calculation is not required. Can be set to YES or NO, default being
dependent on model input data.

 A PLOT statement should appear before the first NODE card in a case, to specify the required
SYSTEM and PROFILE plot options. Additional PLOT HERE statements can appear anywhere in
the profile.

5.3.11 NOPRINT Output Print Suppression Options (Optional)

Main-code: NOPRINT
The NOPRINT card has the opposite effect to PRINT (p.583) and suppresses printing of the specified
data. The same sub-codes as specified under PRINT are valid (with the exception of MAP). This card
is often used to suppress output in the second and subsequent cases of a job.

5.3.12 BEGIN , END - Block delimiters

Main-codes: BEGIN, END
The BEGIN and END statements delimit a block of one or more further statements that collectively
define an entity, and give it a name which can be referred to later. There are two types of entity that

Keyword Index 
593
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 611/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

can be defined, a CURVE, or a FLUID. The input file can contain as many BEGIN..END blocks as
are needed to define as many fluids or curves as desired.

FLUID Specifies that the block defines a fluid. A Blackoil or Compositional fluid can be specified
with as many delimited statements as are necessary, and the resulting fluid can be referred
to on subsequent main-codes (such as . LAYER, INJGAS, INJFLUID, GASLIFT,
BLACKOIL, COMPOSITION) to specify the injected or reservoir layer fluids

CURVE Specifies that the block defines a curve. Curve definitions are used in 2 situations: Inflow
performance : a reservoir or layer can be characterized by a curve of Bottom hole pressure
against flowrate. Also, variation of GLR and Watercut can be specified as a coning
relationship. Pumps and compressors: these devices can be specified with curves of 
flowrate against head, power and efficiency

NAME The name of the entity being defined.

INHERIT Optional, for FLUID blocks only. Controls inheritance of black oil fluid properties from the
'current' fluid. By default, each new fluid starts off with nothing defined. However the fluid
already defined and currently in use can he inherited as the basis for a new fluid if desired.
This is useful in legacy .PSM files which define only one black oil fluid and do not give it
a name, and when additional fluids are being defined in additional input files. (p.564)

Example
The subcodes can appear on either maincode. Blocks cannot be nested, but it is possible to refer to
an earlier block when defining a subsequent block.
For example:

begin fluid name=oil1

BLACKOIL
PROP API = 33 GASSG=0.65 PSAT=4000 TSAT=250
GSAT=320
LVIS T1=250 VIS1=0.6 T2=60 VIS2=20
RATE GOR=320 WCUT=30
end fluid

begin
BLACKOIL
PROP API = 45 GASSG=0.6 PSAT=3770 TSAT=240
GSAT=350
LVIS T1=250 VIS1=0.63 T2=60 VIS2=22
RATE GOR=300 WCUT=10
end fluid name=oil2

begin fluid name=oil3

BLACKOIL USE = oil1
RATE GOR=600 WCUT=12
end

BLACKOIL use = oil2

Keyword Index 
594
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 612/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.3.13 PUSH - Remote Action Editing (optional)

The PUSH statement is provided primarily to allow other computer programs to exert control over a
PIPESIM engine run, without the need to modify an existing input file. For a human, almost everything
that is possible with the PUSH statement can be accomplished far more easily by editing the main
input ('.psm') file with a text editor. However, designing a computer program to reliably interpret and
correctly modify a .PSM file without human help is surprisingly difficult. PUSH is best viewed a
replacement for a text editor and a human. Nevertheless, humans can sometimes find PUSH
statements useful as an alternative way to organize input data. (Beware however that a .psm file
containing PUSH statements may not behave as expected if it is itself the subject of control by another 
program using PUSH.)
The PUSH statements are generally supplied in an additional input file (p.564) but this is not a
requirement.
PUSH allows an editing action (the action ) to be performed on a subsequent statement (the target).
The target is specified by its maincode and label The action can be: the addition of extra text on the
end of the target statement; addition of an extra statement before or after the target; or the removal

of the target statement.

Main-code: PUSH

MAINCODE= Required: Specifies the target maincode.

LABEL= or OBJECT= Specifies the label of the target statement. Serves to distinguish the
required target statement when multiple statements having the same
maincode are present. To specify that the target has no label (and thus
prevent an earlier statement that does have a label from being the target),
supply LABEL=*NONE.

TEXT= Text to be appended to the target statement. The text should be enclosed

in quotes since
keywords it will usually
and values. containtext
The supplied spaces,
must and equated
conform pairs
to the of 
syntax
necessary for the target maincode, otherwise a syntax error will occur and
processing will terminate.

ETEXT= Exclusive text to be appended to the target statement. When 2 or more

PUSH operations append text to the same target, the appended text will
normally grow as each push is actioned; however if ETEXT= is specified
the current text will replace any existing text resulting from earlier 
push(es).

LINE= OR LINEAFTER= Text to be added as a separate line after the target statement.

LINEBEFORE= Text to be added as a separate line before the target statement.

REMOVE Results in the target statement being removed from the input. (This is
actually achieved by transforming it into a comment by prepending the
comment character '!'.)

Keyword Index 
595 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 613/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ERROR= Sets the severity of the action when errors occur. The most common error  
is that the position or target was not found, so the action did not occur.
May be set to one of the following:

FATAL: Errors will be fatal, i.e. processing will terminate. A diagnostic

message will be issued to the screen and the output file. This is the default
behavior.

WARNING: Errors will result in a diagnostic message on the output file

and a message box on the screen, but processing will continue.

NOTE: Errors will result in a diagnostic message on the output file,

processing will continue.

SILENT: Errors will be silently ignored.

GLOBAL Specifies that this push statement is to be applied to all matching

statements. If GLOBAL is not specified, the first statement that matches
the specified maincode and label will be the only target.

Notes:
• Multiple PUSH statements may be present in the input file or additional files.
• If many PUSHes specify the same target, the order in which the actions occur is the order in which
they appear in the file. However the result may turn out to be reversed from that expected by the
user. For example, if 2 pushes each add a line after the same target (the LINE= subcode), the
second push will insert its new line immediately after the target thus displacing the one added by
the first push. For the TEXT= and LINEBEFORE= subcodes this does not cause a problem,
because the definition of the action corresponds to what the user expects. If one push specifies
REMOVE=, then all subsequent pushes will not find the target, so position this push last.
• The text added with TEXT=, LINE= etc can be any text valid for the specified position in the file.
Multiple statements can be provided by separating them with a semicolon (':'). Remember to
enclose the text in quotes ('"') or apostrophes ('''). If the text you are adding itself contains quotes ,
enclose it in apostrophes, and vice-versa.
• The subcodes TEXT=, ETEXT=, LINE=, LINEBOFORE= and REMOVE are mutually exclusive.
• Any statement that has a label starting with an exclamation point ('!') will be excluded from being
selected as a PUSH target. This is useful to prevent a line that was previously inserted with one
push from being modified or removed by a subsequent push.

5.3.14 PLOTFILEDATA
Main-code: PLOTFILEDATA

5.3.15 EXECUTE - deferred execution of a statement

Main-code: EXECUTE

Keyword Index 
596 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 614/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The EXECUTE statement allows some other statement to be positioned within the system profile, to
be executed during system simulation. Normally, any statement in the profile is processed by the
input processor, and is used to build the system model. The system model consists of a set of global
values, (for example fluid properties, options, inlet pressure, and so on.) and a set of connected
equipment items (for example pipes, pumps, chokes, flowlines, and so on). When the system model

is simulated,
makes some the global
values valuesfor
available cannot normally be changed, but use of the EXECUTE statement
control.
EXECUTE has no subcodes: instead, any text supplied on it will be stored, and interpreted as a
statement by the input processor when the system is simulated.
The EXECUTE statement should appear within the profile, that is after the PROFILE statement.

EXECUTE text comprising an otherwise complete and valid statement

5.3.16 USERDLL - Equipment

The API for the inclusion of user-defined 32-bit equipment DLL's is provided by Schlumberger.
See User Equipment DLL Case Study - User Pump (p.316)
Main-code: USERDLL

FILENAME= The name of the DLL.

EPNAME= The entry point of the DLL - the actual name of the routine as exported
from the DLL

PSNAME= The internal PIPESIM name of the routine. The psname's must be unique
- the user should check that other DLLs specified in the userdll.dat file
(located in C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\data for a standard
installation of PIPESIM - look for ep_ident) do not use the same psname's.

LINKTYPE= 24 The DLL linkage type. Note that it must be 24

EPTYPE= EQUIPMENT The type entry point for the DLL. Note that it must be equipment to
distinguish it from flow correlations.

TITLE= The title text describing the DLL.

OPTIONS= The string that will be sent as the first argument to the routine. (This is a
global option, perhaps specified by the author of the DLL).

SDESCRIPTION=

LDESCRIPTION=

Keyword Index 
597 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 615/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.4 Flow Modeling

5.4.1 FLOW CORRELATION DATA
VCORR (p.598) Vertical Flow Correlation Options
HCORR (p.601) Horizontal Flow Correlation Options
Single Phase Flow Options (p.604)
User Defined DLL (p.606)

VCORR Vertical Flow Correlation Options

See also: SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (p.604)
Main-code: VCORR

PLOSS= Pressure loss correlation (refer to the table next page).

HOLDUP= Holdup correlation (refer to the table next page).

MAP= Flow regime map (refer to the table next page).

 ANGLE=  Angle above which vertical flow correlations are used (default = 45 o)

TYPE= This sub-code allows the commonly recommended combinations of flow regime
maps, holdup, and pressure loss correlations to be specified with one sub-code
instead of separate MAP=, HOLDUP=, and PLOSS= sub-codes. Please refer to
the table next page.

FFACTOR= Correlating or matching factor to be applied (as a multiplier) to the calculated

friction
('tune') pressure gradient
the friction (default
pressure = 1.0).calculated
drop values This subcode cancorrelation
by the be used totoadjust
match
measured data.

HFACTOR= Correlating or matching factor to be applied (as a multiplier) to the calculated

liquid holdup fraction (default = 1.0). This subcode can be used to adjust ('tune')
the liquid holdup (and hence elevation pressure drop) values calculated by the
correlation to match measured data.

SOURCE=

OVERRIDE=

 ACCELL=
SWITCHES=

ENTRAINMENT=

OPTIONS=

Keyword Index 
598 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 616/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Summary of Valid Vertical Flow Correlation Combinations

The following table summarizes the valid combinations of pressure loss, holdup and flow pattern map
available for vertical flow. Entering non-valid combinations will result in an input data error.

PLOSS HOLDUP MAP TYPE

DR DR DR/TD DR

BBO BBO BB/TD BBO

BBR BBR BB/TD BBR

ORK ORK ORK ORKISZEWSKI

GA GA GA

HB HB BB/DR/BJA HBR

HBO HBO BB/DR/BJA

BJA BJA1/BJA2 TD BJA

MB MB MB

 Any BRIMIN1 Any

 Any BRIMIN2 Any

NOSLIP NOSLIP NOSLIP NOSLIP

GRAY GRAY TD GRAY

Vertical Flow Correlations - Abbreviations

The abbreviations for vertical flow correlations is different for each source. This topic covers the BJA
and TULSA sources. For OpenLink users and for flow correlations like OLGAS,LEDA, TUFFP defined
in the userdll.dat file, the source is the identifier (IDENT) for the flow correlation, while the abbreviation
is the entry point identifier (ep_ident) for the selection that the user wants to use.

BJA
The abbreviations for BJA are as follows:
ANSARI
 Ansari Vertical Flow Correlation
BBO
Beggs & Brill Original
BBR.
Beggs & Brill Revised
BJA
BJA correlation

Keyword Index 
599
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 617/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

BJA1
Original BJA holdup correlation
BJA2
Revised BJA holdup correlation

BRIMIN 1 or 2
Brill & Minami Holdup Correlation
DR
Duns and Ros
GA
Govier and Aziz and Forgassi
GRAY
Gray Vertical Flow Correlation
GRAYM
Gray (modified)
GRAYO
Gray (original)
HB
Hagedorn and Brown (Revised)
HBO
Hagedorn & Brown (Original)
HBR
Hagedorn & Brown
HBRDR
Hagedorn & Brown, Duns & Ros map
LEDA
LEDA steady-state correlation
MB
Mukherjee and Brill
NOSLIP
No Slip Assumption

OLGA
OLGA-S steady-state correlation
ORK
Orkiszewski
TD
Taitel Dukler 

Keyword Index 
600 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 618/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

TU2P
TUFFP Unified 2-phase v2007.1

TULSA
The abbreviations for Tulsa are as follows:
TBB
Beggs & Brill
TDR
Duns & Ros
TGA
Govier, Aziz
THB
Hagedorn & Brown (Original)

THBR
Hagedorn & Brown (Revised)
TMB
Mukherjee & Brill
TORK
Orkiszewski

HCORR Horizontal Flow Correlation Options

See also: SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (p.604)

Main-code: HCORR
PLOSS= Pressure loss correlation (refer to the table next page).

HOLDUP= Holdup correlation (refer to the table next page).

MAP= Flow regime map (refer to the table next page).

TYPE= This sub-code allows the commonly recommended combinations of flow regime
maps, holdup, and pressure loss correlations to be specified with one sub-code
instead of the separate MAP=, HOLDUP=, and PLOSS= sub-codes. Please refer 
to the table next page.

FFACTOR= Correlating or matching

friction pressure gradientfactor to be
(default applied
= 1.0). This(as a multiplier)
subcode can be to used
the calculated
to adjust
('tune') the friction pressure drop values calculated by the correlation to match
measured data.

HFACTOR= Correlating or matching factor to be applied (as a multiplier) to the calculated

liquid holdup fraction (default = 1.0). This subcode can be used to adjust ('tune')

Keyword Index 
601
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 619/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

the Liquid holdup (and hence elevation pressure drop) values calculated by the
correlation to match measured data.

SOURCE=

 ANGLE=

OVERRIDE=

 ACCELL=

SWITCHES=

ENTRAINMENT=

Summary of Valid Horizontal Flow Correlation Combinations

The following summarizes the valid combinations of pressure loss, holdup and flow pattern map
available for horizontal or inclined flow. Entering non-valid combinations will result in an input data
error.
PLOSS HOLDUP MAP TYPE

DR DR/BJA DR/TD DR

DKAGAF DKAGA TD

DKAGAF EATON TD DKAGAF

BBO BBO/BJA1/BJA2 BB/TD BBO

BBR BBR/BJA1/BJA2 BB/TD BBR

BJA BJA1/BJA2/EATON TD BJA

BJA1 BJA1/BJA2/EATON TD

MB MB MB

HB HB BB/DR/BJA HBR

HBO HBO BB/DR/TD

OLI BJA1/BJA2/EATON TD OLIEMANS

MB MB MB
 Any BRIMIN1 Any

 Any BRIMIN2 Any

NOSLIP NOSLIP NOSLIP NOSLIP

Keyword Index 
602 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 620/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Index of Abbreviations
The abbreviations for vertical flow correlations is different for each source. This topic covers the
BJA and TULSA sources. For OpenLink users and for flow correlations like OLGAS,LEDA, TUFFP
defined in the userdll.dat file, the source is the identifier (IDENT) for the flow correlation, while the
abbreviation is the entry point identifier (ep_ident) for the selection that the user wants to use.

BJA
The abbreviations for BJA are as follows:
BBR
Beggs and Brill (Revised)
BBO
Beggs and Brill (Original)
BBOTD
Beggs & Brill, Taitel Dukler map

BJA
Baker Jardine Revised
BJA1
BJA correlation
BJA2
Revised BJA holdup correlation
BRIMIN 1or 2
Brill and Minami Holdup Correlation
DKAGA
Dukler (AGA)
DKAGAD
Dukler, AGA & Flanagan
DKAGAF
Dukler, AGA & Flanagan (Eaton Holdup)
DR
Duns and Ros
HB
Hagedorn and Brown Revised
HBO
Hagedorn and Brown Original
LEDA
LEDA steady-state correlation
LOCKMAR
Lockhart & Martinelli

Keyword Index 
603
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 621/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

LOCKMARTD
Lockhart & Martinelli
MB
Mukherjee and Brill

NOSLIP
No Slip Assumption
OLIEMANS
Oliemans
OLGA
OLGA-S Steady-State Correlation
OLI
Oliemans Correlation
TD
Taitel Dukler 
TU2P
TUFFP Unified 2-phase v2007.1
XIAO
Xiao horizontal mechanistic model

TULSA
The abbreviations for TULSA are as follows:
TBB

Beggs & Brill

TDUK
Dukler 
TMB
Mukherjee & Brill

SPHASE Single Phase Flow Options (Optional)

See also: Single Phase Flow Correlations (p.348), Horizontal Flow Correlation Options (p.339),
Vertical Flow Correlation Options (p.343)

PIPESIM will
depending onautomatically selectat
the phase behavior either the specified
the particular two-phase
section or single-phase
in the pipeline. The singlecorrelation
phase correlation
is set by default to the MOODY correlation. If no single-phase correlation is specified but single-
phase flow is encountered in the pipeline, the program automatically switches to the MOODY
correlation.
In addition, when the specified phase correlation is the Moody correlation or the Cullender-Smith
correlation, PIPESIM will calculate the Moody friction factor using either an iterative implicit method
(Colebrook-White equation (Moody chart)), an explicit method (see the Sonnad and Goudar paper 

Keyword Index 
604
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 622/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

(p.552)) or a fast explicit or approximate method (see the Moody paper (p.548)) . The default
calculation method for the friction factor is the explicit method. The Moody friction factor calculation
method will also have an impact on the horizontal and vertical flow correlations as the friction factor 
used to compute the pressure gradient in the flow correlations will be evaluated based on the method
specified by the Moody friction factor calculation method.

Main-code: SPHASE
CORRELATION= Single-phase flow correlation.

 AGA Use the AGA dry gas equation for single phase
flow.

MOODY At Reynolds numbers greater than 2000, use the

method specified by the MOODYCALC option and
at Reynolds numbers less than 2000, assume
laminar flow (f=64/Re) (default).

PANA

PANB

WEYMOUTH

HAZENWILL

CULLSMITH Uses the Cullender and Smith Correlation for Gas

with a Moody friction factor calculated using the
method specified by the MOODYCALC option.

DRAGFACTOR= The AGA drag factor (default = 0.98).

LFMIN= The liquid volume fraction below which single

phase gas flow is assumed to exist (default =
0.00001).

LFMAX= The liquid volume fraction above which single

phase liquid flow is assumed to exist (default =
0.99).

TRMIN=

TRMAX=

TRMETHOD=
INTERPOLATE

CUTOFF

MAXIMUM

CUTOFF

Keyword Index 
605 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 623/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

COMPARE=

ON

OFF

C= Hazen-Williams C parameter  

LFPROP=

MOODYCALC EXPLICIT or SONNAD Sonnad 2007 linear approximation (default)

 APPROXIMATE or MOODY Moody 1947 approximation

IMPLICIT or ITERATIVE Colebrook-White equation (Moody chart)

USERDLL - Flow Correlations

The API for user-defined multiphase flow correlation plug-in is provided by Schlumberger.
For a standard installation of PIPESIM, example Fortran source code is provided in the following
directory (assuming the default installation location):

C:\Program Files\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Developer Tools\User Flow Correlations

\Fortran_code

. Two files are included, “UFC2P_Demo.f90” for 2-phase correlations and “UFC3P_Demo.f90” for 3-
phase correlations. These files are self-documenting templates that will compile as is (using Beggs-
Brill as an example) and can be modified to interface with your own correlation and compiled into a
dll that is called directly by the PIPESIM engine. Configuration of the flow correlations and related
options is contained within the USERDLL.dat file which may be edited by selecting Setup »
Preferences  » Choose Paths.

5.4.2 SYSTEM DATA

PIPE (p.636) Pipe Dimensions
INLET (p.582) System Inlet Data
EQUIPMENT (p.618) Equipment Data
NODE (p.635) System Profile Data
Changing Parameters within the System Profile (p.607)

SLUG (p.643) Slug Calculation Options

COMPRESSOR (p.615) Compressor 
CHOKE (p.608) Choke
EXPANDER (p.620) Expander 
HEATER (p.624) Heater/Cooler 
PUMP (p.638) Pump

Keyword Index 
606 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 624/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ESP (p.638) Electrical submersible Pump

PCP (p.426) Progressive Cavity Pump
MPUMP (p.633) Multiphase Pump
PUMPCRV (p.632) Pump Performance Curves
COMPCRV (p.612) Compressor Performance Curves
SEPARATOR (p.642) Separator 
EROSION (p.617) Erosion Rate and Velocity
CORROSION (p.616) Corrosion Rate
COMPLETION (p.613) Completion Profile Delimiter 
TUBING (p.613) Tubing Profile Delimiter 
FLOWLINE (p.613) Flowline Profile Delimiter 
RISER (p.613) Riser Profile Delimiter 

FMPUMP (p.623)
REINJECTOR (p.641)
MPBOOSTER (p.632)

Changing Parameters within the System Profile

One of the features of PIPESIM which gives a great deal of flexibility is the ability to change any
parameter, for example, flow rate or fluid property, at any point (node) in the system. In fact, almost
any main-code can be inserted at any point in the System Profile, that is the cards between the first
NODE card and the ENDCASE card. There are one or two exceptions where the main-code must
appear before the first NODE card (for example ITERN main-code) and these are documented in the
relevant sections. This feature allows changes of pipe diameter, fluid inflow and outflow, and so on,
to be easily modeled.
The main-code to change parameters within the System Profile should be inserted after the NODE
card at which it is to take effect. There is no limit to the number of parameters which can be changed
at a particular node.

Example
Example:
 A pressure contr ol valve is located at a position 2000' down a flowline and sets the downstream
pressure to 800 psia. There is a change of pipe diameter (to 6"), and another flowline from a similar 
well joins thus doubling the flow rate.

Multiple Cases
If multiple cases are to be considered, where the same feature within the profile is to be repeated but
with a different value assigned to it, then the user has a choice. Either the whole profile may be
repeated or an ASSIGN (p.707) card may be used to avoid repetition of the profile.

Keyword Index 
607 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 625/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The MULTICASE (p.699) card provides a convenient alternative to the use of repeated
ENDCASE cards.

CHOKE (Optional)
 Also refer to Choke Theory (p.405)
Main-code: CHOKE
 All subcodes are optional unless noted otherwise:

DBEAN= Required. Diameter of the choke bean (mm or inches)

DBEAN64= An alternative to DBEAN=, allows the bean diameter to be

specified in units of 1/64 in.

CCORR= Selects the Critical flow correlation. May be one of:

GILBERT Gilbert (p.412) correlation

ROS Ros (p.412) correlation

BAXENDELL Baxendell (p.412) correlation

 ACHONG  Achong (p.412) correlation

PILEHVARI Pilehvari (p.412) correlation

 ASHFORD  Ashford and Pierce (p.411) correlation

 ASHFORDT Sachdeva (p.411) correlation

POETBECK Poetmann and Beck (p.411) correlation

OMANA Omana (p.411) correlation

THEORY or  (default) The MECHANISTIC choke model is purely

MECHANISTIC theoretical, based on a combination of Bernoulli's equation
with an equation of continuity. Advanced users may wish
to' fine-tune' the model, or override some of the calculated
values, by means of the sub-codes CD, CSP, CPCV,
YCRIT, GASCP,and LIQCP.

USER User-supplied
equation as the(p.412) correlation.
Gilbert,Ros (p.412)This
anduses
so onthe same
correlations,
but with parameters supplied with the subcodes A=, B= C=
and E=.

SCCORR= Selects the required sub-critical flow correlation. Maybe

one of:

Keyword Index 
608 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 626/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 ASHFORD = Ashford and Pierce (p.411) correlation

MECHANISTIC (default) The MECHANISTIC choke model (see above).

 API14B This is a special-case of the MECHANISTIC model,

wherein
and 0.85the GAS and Liquid Csp values are preset to 0.9
respectively.

CPRATIO= Pressure ratio at which flow through choke becomes

critical. (Default = 0.53). (It is also possible to force
PIPESIM to calculate the Critical Pressure Ratio; to do this,
enter CPRATIO=0.0.)

TOL= Percentage tolerance, for identification of critical flow

conditions. (Default 0.5%)

CD= Discharge coefficient (default = 0.6). This value is used to

calculate the flow coefficient, CSP.

CSP= Flow coefficient. This is normally calculated by PIPESIM,

but can be overridden, if desired, by use of this sub-code.
The valid range is 0 to 1.3, typically it is 0.6. It is used to
calculate the pressure drop.

CPCV= Fluid-specific heat ratio, γ  = C P  / C V  . This is normally

calculated by PIPESIM, but can be overridden if desired.
The valid range is 0.7 to 2. Typically it is 1.26 for a natural
gas, for a diatomic gas it is 1.4. It is used to calculate the
critical pressure ratio, if CPRATIO=0.0 is specified.

YCRIT= Gas expansion factor at critical flow. This is normally

calculated by PIPESIM, but can be overridden if desired.
The valid range is 0.5 to 1. It is used to modify the pressure
drop equation to allow for gas compressibility.

GASCSP= Flow coefficient for the gas phase. This is normally equal
to the value calculated or input for CSP, but can be
overridden if desired. For API14B compatibility, set it to 0.9.

LIQCSP= Flow coefficient for the liquid phase. This is normally equal
to the value calculated or input for CSP, but can be
overridden if desired. For API14B compatibility, set it to
0.85.

CRITERION= Allows the reasons for identification of critical, and

supercritical, flow to be defined. This subcode will accept
one or more of the following values, supplied in multiple
value syntax (p.559) :

PRATIO Pressure ratio < critical pressure ratio (default)

Keyword Index 
609
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 627/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

FLOWRATE Flowrate flowrate at critical flow

SONICUP Upstream velocity sonic

SONICDOWN Downstream velocity sonic

 ALL All of the above

NONE The value NONE will effectively prevent the identification of  

critical and supercritical flow, thus flow will always be
subcritical. NONE should be used for API14B compatibility.

VERBOSE= ON or OFF (Default OFF). Allows detailed choke calculation output for  
the MECHANISTIC correlation. The detailed output
appears on the user's terminal screen and on the primary
output page. This output is intended primarily to aid the
development and debugging of the choke model, but can
also be of use to the advanced user.

SCADJUST ON or OFF If ON, the selected sub-critical correlation is adjusted to

 ADJUSTSC= ensure it predicts a flowrate at critical pressure ratio that
matches that predicted by the critical correlation. Default is
OFF.

 A=, B=, C=, E= Parameters for the USER critical correlation.

IDPIPE= or  The diameter of the upstream pipe section (in or mm). It is
DPIPE= or  used to calculate the Diameter Ratio Δ (For more
PIPEID= information, refer to Choke Geometry (p.405).) This
subcode is required only if the choke is present in a branch
and there is no other accompanying pipe equipment. If the
subcode is provided, PIPESIM uses that value instead of 
the ID from any existing upstream pipe.

The choke model will calculate the pressure ratio across the choke for the current flow rate. The
pressure ratio calculated is then categorized in one of 3 ways:
Subcritical
The pressure ratio (Pout/Pin) is higher than the critical pressure ratio. PIPESIM continues
the case with the calculated pressure drop.
Critical

The pressure ratio is within the tolerance of the critical pressure ratio. PIPESIM continues
the case with the calculated pressure drop, and writes an explanatory message to all output
pages. Pressures calculated in the profile from this point on represent maximum values rather 
than true values; in reality, the pressures could be less than those reported. The reason for 
this is that in critical flow, the flow rate is independent of the system's downstream pressure.

Keyword Index 
610 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 628/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Supercritical
The pressure ratio is lower than the critical pressure ratio. This represents a situation that
cannot occur in reality, therefore PIPESIM will abort the case or iteration. In a non-iterative
case, this will result in a CASE ABORTED message, but in an iterative case, a further iteration
is started, at a higher inlet pressure or lower flow rate.
PIPESIM does not attempt to model the entire system analytically, rather it breaks it down into small
elements, each of which are then analyzed in turn to achieve the desired answer. Because the
system's heat balance is calculated rigorously at every element, it is not possible for PIPESIM to work
backwards up the system profile from a known outlet pressure. Consequently, if the user fixes the
outlet pressure, an iterative solution to the case is required. For non-iterative cases, PIPESIM starts
its analysis of the profile with a fixed inlet pressure and flow rate. Iterative cases are made up of 
several passes down the profile, with the iteration routine taking informed guesses at the inlet
pressure or flow rate; thus, for each separate iteration, the inlet pressure and flow rate are effectively
fixed, as for the non-iterative case.
When PIPESIM encounters a choke in the profile, it evaluates the pressure drop across the choke,
and labels it as one of critical, subcritical, or supercritical. The supercritical condition means that the
current flow rate cannot pass through the choke with the current upstream pressure: i.e., it is a
situation that cannot occur in reality. (Another example of such an impossible situation is a negative
pressure; PIPESIM must cope with this too). PIPESIM deals with this by aborting the case or iteration.
If the case is iterative, the iteration routine will then guess a lower flow rate or higher inlet pressure,
and another pass down the profile will begin. The critical condition is comparatively difficult to hit; it
means that, at the current pressure upstream of the choke, the flow rate is very close to the maximum
possible flow rate through the choke. When critical conditions exist, the flow rate is independent of 
the downstream pressure. The subcritical condition needs no special handling.
In an iterative case, it often happens that the user's specified outlet pressure cannot be met. This
occurs when a choke in the profile is in critical flow. Any increase in the flow rate will result in
supercritical flow through the choke, and so this sets an upper limit for the iteration routine. However,
the outlet pressure for the flow rate that gives critical flow might be much higher than that required.
Normally in this situation, the iteration routine would increase the flow rate and try again, but the
presence of the choke in critical flow makes this pointless. Therefore, the iteration routine considers
the case to have converged on a solution, and prints the case results. The pressure profile on the
downstream side of the choke, while it does not represent the actual required solution, nevertheless
represents the maximum pressure that can be achieved there; in reality, the pressures will be lower.
 A wellhead choke or bean is used to control the production rate from a well. In the design of tubing
and well completions one must ensure that neither the tubing nor the perforations control the
production from the well. The flow capacity of the tubing and perforations always should be greater 
than the inflow performance behavior of the reservoir. It is the choke that is designed to control the
production rate from a well. Wellhead chokes usually are selected so that fluctuations in the line
pressure
throughoutdownstream of thebe
the choke must choke have flow
at critical no effect on thethat
condition; wellis,
flow rate.
flow To ensure
through this condition,
the choke flow
is at acoustic
velocity. For this condition to exist, downstream line pressure must be approximately 0.55 or less of 
the tubing or upstream pressure. Under this conditions the flow rate is a function of the upstream or 
tubing pressure only.
Chokes are subjected to sand and gas cutting as well as asphalt and wax deposition, which changes
the shape and size of the choke. This then could result in considerable error when compared to
calculate values of choke for a standard choke size. A small error in the choke size caused by a worn

Keyword Index 
611
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 629/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

choke can produce a much larger error in the predicted oil rate. Thus a 'cut' choke could result in
estimated oil rates considerably lower than measured.
From the inflow performance relationship of a well and by knowing the tubing size in the well, the
tubing pressure curve for various flow rates can be calculated.

COMPCRV and PUMPCRV: Compressor and Pump performance curves

Main-code: PUMPCRV or COMPCRV
Centrifugal pump and compressor performance curves are specified as a range of head and efficiency
or power values versus volumetric flow rates. These values should be specified before the profile,
and each curve is given a name so it can be referenced on a subsequent PUMP or COMPRESSOR
statement.

NAME= Required: The name of the curve, for referencing on a subsequent PUMP or 
COMPRESSOR statement.

SPEED= The speed for which this curve was generated. (rpm)

Q= Values of flow rate, supplied as a multiple value set (p.559) . Flowrates are measured
in volumetric terms at the flowing pressure and temperature at the inlet to the device.
For a pump curve, units are bbl/day or m3/day; for a compressor curve, they are ft
3/min or m3/sec. (See note below).

FLOWRATE= Synonym for Q =.

HEAD= Values of head, supplied as a multiple value set (p.559). For a pump curve, units
are feet or metres. For a compressor curve they are ft-lbf/lbm (foot-pounds force per 
pound mass) or Kj/kg. Note that the conversion factor between ft-lbf/lbm and feet is
1.

EFFICIENCY= Values of efficiency (%), supplied as a multiple value set (p.559). (Default is 100%).
Exclusive with POWER=.

POWER= Values of power (hp or kw), supplied as a multiple value set (p.559). Exclusive with
EFFICIENCY=.

STAGES= For a Pump curve only, the number of stages for which this curve is defined (normally
1).

WHEELS= For a compressor curve only, the number of compressor wheels for which this curve
is defined.

The multiple value sets (p.559) supplied for Q=, HEAD=, and EFF= or POWER= sub-codes must
contain at least 3, and no more than 30 values, separated by commas, and enclosed in parentheses.
The values need not be entered in ascending or descending order, however there is a strict one-for-
one correspondence between the values in each list, based on their position. Each list must contain
the same number of values.
Since the multiple value lists can be quite lengthy, they may be supplied across more than one line
in the input file. This can be achieved either by use of the continuation character &, or by repeating

Keyword Index 
612 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 630/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

the maincode and curve name on each line. The examples below illustrate this, they both have the
same effect:

Examples

Example 1

PumpCrv name = GN7000 stages = 100 speed = 3600

PumpCrv name = GN7000 Q = (1250 ,3750 ,5800 ,7400 ,9000 ,
10666.7)
PumpCrv name = GN7000 head = (4827.88 ,4176.29,3624.68,3160.3 ,
2338.76,971.734)
PumpCrv name = GN7000 eff = (23.6865 ,55.0738,67.3463,71.3873,63.476 ,
31.7383)

Example 2 

PumpCrv name = GN7000 stages = 100 speed = 3600 &

Q = (1250 ,3750 ,5800 ,7400 ,9000 ,10666.7) &
head = (4827.88 ,4176.29,3624.68,3160.3 ,2338.76,971.734) &
eff = (23.6865 ,55.0738,67.3463,71.3873,63.476 ,31.7383)

COMPLETION Completion Profile Delimiter 

Main-code: COMPLETION
The profile delimiters (supercodes) are used by PIPESIM as required flags if the model contains
horizontal wells or if you wish to perform system analysis anywhere in the system profile. The
presence of the COMPLETION delimiter informs PIPESIM that subsequent wellbore sections form a
"completion," or "productive interval." The program will therefore model the flow of reservoir fluid into
the wellbore.

INLINE= If this sub code is present, the entire profile is modeled as a single unit. If it is absent,
the completion is modeled separately from the rest of the system profile.

EFFLENG= The effective length of the horizontal completion (m or ft). This allows you to specify a
completion length which is less than the actual length supplied with subsequent NODE
maincodes. Thus, sensitivities on length can be performed using the NAPLOT
maincode.

IPRPOINT=

DPRETIO=

TOL=
LABEL=

TYPE=

For datum reset feature, please refer to Node (p.635) .

Keyword Index 
613
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 631/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Supercode
The supercodes are:
TUBING
Tubing Profile Delimiter 

FLOWLINE
Flowline Profile Delimiter 
RISER
Riser Profile Delimiter 
Main-code: TUBING, FLOWLINE, RISER
The profile delimiters (supercodes) are used by PIPESIM as required flags if the model contains
horizontal wells or if you wish to perform system analysis anywhere in the system profile. The portions
of profile so delimited are sometimes be described as objects.
When any of these are encountered after the COMPLETION delimiter, the inflow modeling is switched

off, and the resulting flowrate is used for the remainder of the system profile.
Other modes of program behavior depend on the current delimiter, and the junctions of different
delimiters. For example, Heat Transfer data implying that a pipe is buried, will not be applied to a
riser; the junction of a flowline and an upward-going riser is identified as a riser-base and triggers
checks on slugging parameters; the junction of tubing and flowline triggers actions relevant to the
wellhead.

LABE L= or NAME= The name of the profile object. This is used to print on the output file, and for 
object identification with the PUSH (p.595) statement.

DATUMRESET= Can be set to YES (the default) or NO. The NODE statements on either side
of a supercode are, by default, assumed to be coincident. This allows the last
node of (for example) a previous flowline to specify the same position as the
first node of the next flowline, with no intermediate length of pipe joining them,
regardless of the values of distance and elevation these 2 nodes may specify.
This behavior can be reversed with DATUMRESET=NO, which will model a
pipe section between the 2 nodes in the same way as between any other 2
nodes in the same object.

INHERIT= Can be set to YES (the default) or NO. Controls the application of Upstream
Inheritance. Pipe object dimensions (for example Pipe ID, wall thickness,
coatings thickness and conductivity, burial configuration, and so on.) are by
default inherited from upstream objects. This allows each subsequent object
to be specified with a minimum of input data, as the only required values are
those that change between objects. However, mistakes in the specification of 
data can easily occur with this mode of behavior, particularly when complex
pipe coatings and burial configurations are being specified, as unwanted data
from previous objects can be mistakenly inherited by the current object.
Specification of INHERIT=NO will ensure that each new object inherits nothing
from its upstream neighbor.

Keyword Index 
614
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 632/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

COMPRESSOR Compressor (Optional)

Main-code: COMPRESSOR
Sub-codes: TYPE, ROUTE, POUT, DP, PRATIO, POWER, EFF, NAME, SPEED, WHEELS,
STONEWALL VERBOSE

TYPE= COMPRESSOR type.

CENTRIFUGA Centrifugal compressor 

ROUTE= ADIABATIC Adiabatic compression is performed (default). For black oil models
the heat capacity ratio (C p/C v) for the adiabatic exponent in the
compression equations is assumed to be constant with a value
equal to 1.26. For compositional models the heat capacity ratio is
calculated using the relationship: Cp = Cv - R The heat capacity is
obtained at the average of the compressor suction and discharge
conditions.

POLYTROPIC Polytropic compression is performed. The heat capacity ratio (C p/

C v) is calculated as outlined above for ADIABATIC compression.
This is the default for Black Oil cases.

MOLLIER Compression is based upon the Mollier method, that is isoentropic

compression from suction to discharge pressures. This option is
valid for compositional models only, where it is also the default.

POUT= Discharge pressure from the compressor (bara or psia) (default

20,000 psia)

DP= Pressure differential across the compressor (bar or psi) (default

10,000 psi)
PRATI= Compressor pressure ratio (default 1000)

POWER= Power available for compression (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

EFF= Overall efficiency of the compression (default = 100%)

NAME= The name of a previously specified Compressor Curve (see the

COMPCRV (p.612) maincode)

SPEED= Speed at which the compressor will run. This is only useful when a
compressor curve name has been specified. (rpm) (default
unlimited)

WHEELS=

STONEWALL=

VERBOSE=

Keyword Index 
615 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 633/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Notes:
1. At least one of the subcodes POUT, DP, PRATIO, POWER and SPEED should be supplied. If 2
or more are present, PIPESIM will treat them as upper limits, and will use whichever gives the
smallest DeltaP. The others will be recalculated and displayed as answers on the output file.
2. If a compressor curve name is supplied, the speed may also be specified. This is used to adjust
the supplied curve against its specified speed (as set with SPEED (p.612) = on the COMPCRV
(p.612) maincode). The adjustment is done using the so called affinity or fan laws, which state
that "capacity is directly proportional to speed, head is proportional to square of speed, and power 
is proportional to cube of speed".
3. In order to avoid confusion with the COMPOSITION main code, the minimum abbreviation
acceptable for COMPRESSOR is COMPR.

CORROSION
Maincode: CORROSION
Subcodes:
This maincode allows corrosion rate to be calculated.
METHOD= or MODEL= Specifies the correlation to be used. Choices are:

DEWAARD Uses the de Waard model.

NONE disables corrosion calculations

PHACT= Optional: Specifies the actual pH of the fluid system. If not

supplied the value will be calculated internally.

CC= or EFFICIENCY= The multiplier Cc to correct for inhibitor efficiency or to match

field data

RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump

Main-code: RODPUMP or CVFMD
The RODPUMP statement allows the outline specification for a Rod- or Beam-pump to be supplied.
 A rod-pump is an example of a Constant Volume Fluid Motive Device (CVFMD). CVFMDs are fixed-
volume, positive-displacement pumps or compressors designed to move liquids, gases or 2-phase
mixtures. Other notable CVFMD examples are: Progressive cavity pumps, Twin screw multiphase
boosters, and reciprocating compressors. The statement allows a simplistic simulation of such a
device to be performed.

NOMLIQRATE= The flowing volume flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge (m 3/day or bbl/day).

Keyword Index 
616 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 634/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

SLIPCOEF= A coefficient to specify the change in flowrate with respect to Delta pressure
(m3/day/bar or bbl/day/psi). This is used to compute the pressure rise across the
device when the actual flowrate is less than the specified nominal rate.

MAXDP= Maximum pressure rise the device is allowed to exhibit (psi or bar). This is used
to prevent excess rod loading.
MAXPOWER= Maximum power the device is allowed to draw (hp or kw). This is used to prevent
excess rod loading.

RODDIAMETER= The Diameter of the drive rod (in or mm). The drive rod will be assumed to exist
in the downstream pipe or tubing, and will stretch up to the wellhead or the end
of the tubing. The fluid will flow in the annular space between the tubing ID and
the rod OD. The rod diameter can be adjusted in downstream pipe sections by
use of the RODDIAM= subcode on the PIPE (p.636) statement, this is useful
to simulate taper rods.

VOLUME= The sweptlength

the stroke volume of the
(bbl pump
or m3). In cylinder, i.e. with
conjunction its cross-section
SPEED=, this area multiplied
is an by
alternative
to the nominal rate.

SPEED= The pump speed, in strokes per minute. In conjunction with VOLUME=, this is
an alternative to the nominal rate.

NOMINALRATE= The flowing volume flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge (m 3/sec or ft3/min). this is the same
information as NOMLIQRATE= but in different units, more suited to other types
of CVFMD.

EROSION Erosion Rate and Velocity (Optional)

Maincode: EROSION
This maincode allows erosion rate and erosional velocity to be calculated.
METHOD= Specifies the correlation method to be used. Available methods are:

 API14E: The API 14 E method. This calculates erosional velocity assuming

solids-free production. Erosion rate is not calculated. The only other 
subcode this method recognizes is K=, all others are ignored

SALAMA The SALAMA 2000 method.

K= or KEROS= The desired constant in the API 14 E equation. Default value is 100 in
engineering units. A value of 100 specified when SI units are being used will
be in SI units: this translates to approximately 82 in engineering units. The
value may be qualified with the units descriptor 'ENG' or 'SI' to specify which
units system to use when interpreting it.

H= or EROSRATE= The acceptable erosion rate. Used to calculate erosional velocity. Units are
in/1e3/year or mm/year, default 0.1 mm/year.

Keyword Index 
617 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 635/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

SANDRATIO= The rate of sand production, specified as a ratio with liquid rate. Units are
Parts Per Million , by volume, against stock-tank liquid rate. (The
equations in Salama's paper use a sand rate in Kg/day. This is obtained from
the supplied volume ratio using Salama's 'typical value' for sand density,
2650 kg/m3.) If sand production ratio is zero, erosion rate will not be
calculated
W= or SANDRATE= The absolute rate of sand production, kg/day or lb/day. Use of this subcode
is not recommended unless the model also fixes the system flowrate. Sand
production rate is better specified as a ratio with liquid rate, using the
SANDRATIO= subcode (see above).

SM= or S= This is the Geometry constant Sm in the Salama method, default 5.5.

CE= or EFFICIENCY= Multiplier to match field data, default 1.

D= or SANDSIZE= The mean size of the sand grains. Units are in/1e3 or mm. Default 0.25 mm

SANDDENSITY= Density of the sand grains. Units are lb/ft3or kg/m3. Default 2650 kg/m3.

SANDSG= Specific gravity of the sand grains relative to water. Default 2.650

EQUIPMENT Generic Equipment

Main-code: EQUIPMENT
The EQUIPMENT maincode may be used to simulate a generic unit operation in which the pressure
and/or temperature of the stream are modified.

DP= Pressure gain (positive), or loss (negative). (Bar or psi). NB. In a network model,
the DP is assumed to follow the flow direction in the branch, so if the branch flow
reverses, the DP will change sign. This can be controlled with DPIFD=, see
below. See note 2

DPIFD= "DP is Independent of Flow Direction". Set this to YES to ensure the sign of the
dp supplied with DP= is independent of branch flow direction in a network model.
Default is NO, thus if the branch flow reverses, the dp will change sign. An
example of a device whose DP is direction -independent is a choke. An example
of a direction-dependent DP is a vertical section of pipe.

POUT= or SETP= Equipment outlet set pressure (bara or psia). NB. In a network model, the
imposition of a set pressure is likely to prevent the model from converging. In a
single-branch model,
SETP= will cause if the data
an input outleterror.
pressure and flowrate
See note 2 are fixed, the use of 

PRATIO= Pressure Ratio: the equipment outlet pressure is set to the specified multiple of 
the inlet pressure. Exclusive with MAXP=, MINP=, SETP= and DP=. See note 2.

MAXP= Maximum pressure (psia or bara). If the pressure at the equipment is greater 
than the supplied limit, then it will be adjusted down to the limit. See note 3.

Keyword Index 
618 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 636/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

MINP= Minimum pressure (psia or bara). If the pressure at the equipment is less than
the supplied limit, then it will be adjusted up to the limit. See note 3.

ROUTE= Allows the thermodynamic route to be specified, for calculation of fluid

temperature change consequent upon changes in pressure. Exclusive with DT=
and SETT= ;can be used with DUTY=. See note 4. Available choices are:
ISENTHALPIC or ADIABATIC: Constant enthalpy (default)

ISENTROPIC or MOLLIER: Constant entropy (compositional cases only)

ISOTHERMAL: Constant temperature

DT= Temperature gain (+ve), or loss (-ve). (C or F). See note 1.

TOUT= or SETT= Outlet set temperature ( &deg;C or &deg;F). See note 1.

DUTY= Duty to be used to raise the temperature of the fluid (KW or Btu/hr). See notes
1, 4 and 6.
MAXT= Maximum temperature (F or C). If the temperature at the equipment is greater 
than the supplied limit, then it will be adjusted down to the limit. See note 7.

MINT= Minimum temperature (F or C). If the temperature at the equipment is less than
the supplied limit, then it will be adjusted up to the limit See note 7.

NAME= Defines the NAME of a user-supplied equipment entrypoint, as defined in a prior 

USERDLL statement. Note: The presence of this subcode causes all others
(except OPTIONS=) to be ignored.

OPTIONS= A character string that is supplied to the user-supplied equipment routine. Must
be used with NAME=.

VERBOSE= Controls the appearance of the one-line output in the report. may be set to ON
or OFF, default ON.

Notes:
1. The subcodes SETT=, DT= and DUTY= are mutually exclusive.
2. The subcodes SETP=, DP= and PRATIO= are mutually exclusive.
3. If a MAXP= or MINP= is specified, the limit is applied AFTER any pressure change resulting from
a SETP=, DP= or PRATIO=, and BEFORE any temperature or enthalpy change is applied or 
calculated.
4. If SETT= or DT is specified, the fluid outlet temperature will be set accordingly, otherwise it will
be calculated using the selected (or defaulted) thermodynamic ROUTE= and DUTY=.
5. If SETP=, DP= or PRATIO= are specified in the absence of TOUT and DT, the choice of 
thermodynamic route is used to calculate the fluid outlet temperature. To simulate chokes and to

Keyword Index 
619
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 637/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

predict Joule-Thomson cooling across pressure reduction valves etc. the most appropriate route
is ISENTHALPIC (the default).
6. If a DUTY is specified, the corresponding fluid enthalpy change will be calculated, and added to
that resulting from any pressure change using the selected ROUTE=. The outlet temperature is
then adjusted accordingly.
7. If a MAXT= or MINT= is specified, the limit is applied AFTER any temperature change resulting
from any other subcode.
8. All subcodes are optional.

Examples

Example 1
 A pipeline compressor station (located at distance 120 Km and elevation 20 m) raises the pipeline
pressure 35 bar and after coolers cool the compressed gas down to 40 C before it reenters the
pipeline. Pipeline gas is withdrawn to power the compressors, so a RATE statement is used to
subtract 2.5 kg/sec from the pipeline. The following three lines define the compressor station:

NODE DIST= 120 km ELEV= 20 m

EQUIPMENT DP = 35 bar SETT = 40 C
RATE ADDMASS = -2.5 kg/sec

Example 2 
 A wellhead choke is to be set to reduce the calculated wellhead pressure to 60 bara. The program
will calculate the resulting temperature change across the choke (assuming an isoenthalpic
expansion) :

EQUIPMENT SETP = 60 bar

EXPANDER Expander (Optional)

Main-code: EXPANDER

DP= Pressure differential across the expander (bar or psi) (default 10,000)

POUT= Discharge pressure from the expander (bara or psia) (default 20 psia)

PRATIO= Expander pressure ratio (Pin/Pout ; default 1000)

EFF= Overall efficiency of the expansion (%) (Default = 100%)

POWER= Power required from expansion (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

ROUTE=

Keyword Index 
620 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 638/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 ADIABATIC Adiabatic expansion is performed (default). For black oil models the
heat capacity ratio (C p/C v) used as the adiabatic exponent in the
expansion equations is assumed to be constant with a value equal
to 1.26 . For compositional models the heat capacity ratio is
calculated using the relationship : Cp = Cv - R. The heat capacity
is obtained at the average of the expander suction and discharge
conditions.

POLYTROPIC Polytropic expansion is performed. The heat capacity ratio (C p/C

v) is calculated in a similar manner to that outlined above for 
 ADIABATIC expansion. This is the default for Black Oil cases.

MOLLIER Expansion is based upon the Mollier method, that is isoentropic

expansion from suction to discharge pressures. This option is valid
for compositional models only, where it is the default.

UNDEFINED Undefined

NAME=

SPEED=

WHEELS=

STONEWALL=

ON

OFF

VERBOSE=
ON

OFF

Note:  At least one of the subcodes POUT, DP, PRATIO, and POWER should be supplied. If 2 or 
more are present, PIPESIM will treat them as upper limits, and will use whichever gives the smallest
DeltaP. The others will be recalculated and displayed as answers on the output file.

FITTING : Valves and Fittings

Main-code: FITTING
Pipe fittings can be modeled in PIPESIM using the FITTING keyword. Either a resistance coefficient
should be specified, or the type and dimensions of the fittings should be specified and the resistance
will be calculated.

TYPE= "GLOBE-CONV" Globe Valve Conventional

Keyword Index 
621
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 639/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

"GLOBE-YPAT" Globe Valve Y-Pattern

"ANGLE-CONV" Angle Valve Conventional

"CHECK-SWING1" Check Swing Valve Conventional

"CHECK-SWING2" Check Swing Valve Clearway

"CHECK-LIFT1" Check Lift Globe Valve

"CHECK-LIFT2" Check Lift Angle Valve

"BALL-VALVE" Ball Valve

"GATE-VALVE" GateValve

"ELBOW-STD45" Standard 45 degree Elbow

"ELBOW-STD90" Standard 90 degree Elbow

"ELBOW-LR90" Standard 90 degree Long Radius Elbow

"ELBOW-SR90" Standard 90 degree Short Radius Elbow

"TEE-RUN" Tee - Flow through run

"TEE-BRANCH" Tee - Flow through branch

NOMINALD Nominal diameter (mm or inches)

MINORD= Minor internal diameter (mm or inches)

MAJORD= Major internal diameter (mm or inches)

DANGLE= Deflection angle

KVALUE = Resistance coefficient

If the resistance K  is not specified it will be calculated. In this case the nominal diameter (p.523) must
be specified, together with the internal diameter of the fitting. Some fittings require two internal
diameters to be specified, the minor diameter d 1 at a constriction and the major diameter d 2.

If the resistance is specified, one of the internal diameters (d 1 or d 2) should also be specified. If both

internal diameters are specified, the resistance is assumed to apply at the major internal diameter 
d 2, that is K  = K 2.

See the Technical description (p.413) for further details.

EXAMPLES
The fitting keyword can be inserted between node keywords in a pipe. The fitting is placed immediately
after the preceding node.

Keyword Index 
622 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 640/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

...
node dist = 0 elev = 0
node dist = 1000 elev = 0
fitting kvalue = 1.6 majord = 4.815
node dist = 1010 elev = 0
fitting type = "ANGLE_CONV" nominald = 5 majord = 5.047 minord = 4 dangle = 45
node
... dist = 1200 elev = 0

FMPUMP (Optional)
Main-code: FMPUMP

FRAMO 2009 (Optional)

See also Multiphase Boosting Technology (p.431), Framo 2009 Helico-Axial Multiphase Booster 
(p.95).
Main-code: FRAMO2009
This keyword requests a Framo pump, modelled with the framo2009 dll provided by Framo.
POUT= Discharge pressure from the pump (bara or psia)

DP= Pressure differential across the pump (bar or psi)

PRATIO= Pump pressure ratio

POWER= Power available for pump (KW or hp)

LIMSPEED= Maximum pump speed (valid range 0.2 – 1.0 )

TUNE= Tuning parameter (valid range 0.7 – 1.5 )

QRECIN= Flow in recirculation

NPARA= Number of pumps in parallel (valid range 1-7 )

NAME= The name of the pump

FILE= Framo file containing pump performance curves. This sub-code must be specified.
Only the file name should be specified, not the path. The file must exist in the framo09
sub-directory of the PIPESIM data directory (default location “C:\Program files
\Schlumberger\PIPESIM\data\framo09).

PLOT Requests a pump performance plot. A plot file called “file_n.pfm” will be created in
the model directory, where “file” is the pump name specified by the NAME sub-code
and “n” is the case number.
The pump name should be unique, otherwise plot files will over write each other.
If the NAME sub-code is not given, the plot file will be called “framopump_n.pfm”.
Pump performance plot files can be viewed by PSPlot.

Keyword Index 
623
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 641/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

EXAMPLE

framo2009 file='framopump.dat' name='test' dp=100 plot

HEATER Heater/Cooler (Optional)

Main-code: HEATER

DP= Pressure drop across the heater (bar or psi) (Default =0)

POUT= Discharge pressure from the heater (bara or psia)

PRATIO= Pressure ratio across the heater 

TOUT= Discharge temperature from the heater ( oC or oF)

DT= Temperature drop/increase through the heater/cooler (oC or oF)

VERBOSE=
STATUS=

Notes:
1. The subcodes TOUT DT and DUTY are mutually exclusive only one should be supplied.
Specification of the outlet temperature or DT will result in the calculation of the duty required to
meet these conditions. If the DUTY is supplied PIPESIM will calculate the outlet temperature.
2. The subcodes POUT and DP are mutually exclusive and optional. Changes in pressure across a
heater are modeled using an isoenthalpic route; if large pressure changes are required you are
better served by modeling the DP with a separate EQUIPMENT maincode which gives a choice
of route.

GASLIFT: Multiple Injection Ports in Gaslifted Wells

The GASLIFT statement is required to simulate the multiple gas lift valves resulting from a Gas Lift
Design in the PIPESIM GUI. It is also used to calculate the Deepest point of Injection (DIP).
GASLIFT should be entered in the initial part of the input file, ie. before the profile or the first NODE
statement. It specifies generic gas lift data such as casing head pressure (CHP), injection gas flow
rate and properties, etc. The profile may then include one or more INJPORT statements to specify
the position and properties of the gas lift valves.

Two modes of operation are available, viz. Deepest Injection Point (DIP), and Simulate; these are
selected with the MODE= subcode.
In DIP mode, PIPESIM will calculate the deepest possible injection point for the system as specified.
 Any existing injection points and gas lift valves will be ignored. Required subcodes for this mode are
INJGASRATE=, DP=, CHP= and TEMP=.
In SIMULATE mode, PIPESIM will accept a set of gas lift valves positioned at various depths in the
system profile. Each valve has its associated settings such as Port diameter, test rack Pressure

Keyword Index 
624
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 642/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Setting. etc. The program will simulate the entire system as specified, determining which valve(s) are
operating, and calculate the injection gas flowrate through each valve. Required subcodes for this
mode are MAXQ=, CHP=, and TEMP=.
For either mode, the recommended job will fix the reservoir pressure and outlet (wellhead) pressure,
and calculate the system flowrate; i.e., use ITERN (p.580) TYPE=LFLOW. (Other iteration types are
more difficult to use since the design of the gaslift system constrains the Injection valves to a narrow
range of operating pressure, outside which no gas injection will occur, rendering meaningful results
unlikely.)

Main-code: GASLIFT

MODE= Required. Specifies the operational mode for the gaslift system. Available
modes are:

SIMULATE: requests a rigorous simulation of the system with a set of gas

lift valves installed. The important feature of this mode is that it calculates
the total flowrate of gas that is injected into all the valves, using the
positions and settings of the installed gas lift valves. Be aware however,
that this mode is very sensitive to the exact position and settings of the
valves. Consequently its results are usually difficult to interpret due to the
likleyhood multiple solutions, or no solution, to the model cases. For this
reason, PIPESIM uses one of the DIP modes instead (see below).
Injection valves must be provided at appropriate depths with INJPORT
(p.628) statements.

DIP: requests a calculation of the Deepest Injection Point (DIP). In this

mode, any existing Injection valves will be ignored. The program will
simulate the injection of gas at the maximum possible depth for the given
system parameters, and report the calculated DIP depth. In this mode the
fixed flowrate of gas as specified with INJGASRATE= is injected at the
deepest depth.

DIP3: similar to DIP mode, but the calculated deepest injection depth is
constrained to be coincident with the position of one of the existing
injection valves specified with INJPORT statements. See note 2.

MAXFLOWRATE= or  Required for MODE=SIMULATE. The maximum available lift gas flow rate
MAXQ= (MMscf/d or MMm 3/d).

TEMPERATURE= Required. The temperature of the lift gas (F or C) at the casing head. The
program will adjust this by a formula that takes account of geothermal
temperature gradient and production temperature to calculate the annulus
temperature for each injection valve.

CHP= Required. The casing head pressure (psia or bara) at the wellhead where
the lift gas is supplied to the well. The program will adjust this by the
pressure of the static head of gas in the annulus between the wellhead
and the injection port to calculate the annulus pressure for each injection
valve.

Keyword Index 
625 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 643/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

DP= Required for MODE=DIP. The minimum allowable pressure difference

across the injection valve. The valve will be positioned at a depth that
ensures the DP between casing and tubing is at least this value. (psi or 
bar)

FLOWRATE= or  For MODE=DIP. The flow rate of lift gas (MMscf/d or MMm 3/d) to be
INJGASRATE= injected. See note 1.

FTEMPERATURE= Optional. A factor (f) that allows the injection port temperature (Tp) to be
interpolated between the casing gas temperature (Tc) and the production
wellbore temperature (Tw) using the formula Tp = Tc*(1-f) + Tw*f. Can be
set to a value between 0 and 1, default 1. The injection port temperature
is important in gas-charged valves because it determines the dome
pressure and hence the valve opening and closing pressures.

PLOT= Optional, can be set to OFF or ON, default OFF. Produces a plot file
representing the performance characteristics of each valve. One file is
produced for each valve, these are named model.Vxx, where model is the
model file core name, and xx is the valve number (shallowest being 01).
The valve performance is exercised over a range of casing and tubing
pressures, and the plot typically has tubing pressure on the X-axis against
gas flowrate in the Y-axis, with the casing pressure giving a number of 
different lines.

MINFLOWRATE= or  Optional, for MODE=SIMULATE. The lower limit of gas flowrate to be
MINQ= injected (MMscf/d or MMm 3/d). If the simulation for any case predicts less
than this gas flowrate, additional gas will be injected at the shallowest
valve. This simulates the effect of the operator increasing CHP to inject
more gas.

FLUIDNAME= or USE= Optional. The name of the fluid (Black Oil or Compositional) representing
the lift gas fluid specification, as specified with a BEGIN FLUID (p.593)
block.

SGGAS= Optional. For Black Oil fluids only, the lift gas specific gravity. (Default =
SG of the produced gas).

KGAS= Optional. For Black Oil fluids only, The lift gas thermal conductivity.
(Default = K of the produced gas).

CPGAS= Optional. For Black Oil fluids only, The lift gas heat capacity. (Default =

CP of the produced gas).

METHOD= Optional. Specifies the equation used to calculate gas flowrate across the
valve. Allowable values are 1 for PIPESIM's standard mechanistic choke
correlation, and 2 for the Thornhill-Craver equation.

PVTFILE= Optional. For compositional fluids only, the name of the PVT file containing
the composition of the lift gas.

Keyword Index 
626 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 644/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

GLR= For MODE=DIP, injects the gas flowrate required to make the production
fluid Gas Liquid Ratio (GLR) equal the supplied value. (scf/sbbl or sm3/
sm3) See note 1.

GOR= For MODE=DIP, injects the gas flowrate required to make the production
fluid Gas Oil Ratio (GOR) equal the supplied value. (scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3)
See note 1.

INJGLR= For MODE=DIP, injects the gas flowrate required to increase the
production fluid Gas Liquid Ratio (GLR) by the supplied value. (scf/sbbl or 
sm3/sm3) See note 1.

INJGOR= For MODE=DIP, injects the gas flowrate required to increase the
production fluid Gas Oil Ratio (GOR) by the supplied value. (scf/sbbl or 
sm3/sm3) See note 1.

MAXDEPTH= Optional, for MODE=DIP, limits the injection depth to the specified
maximum.

FRICTION= Optional, For Mode=DIP. Requests a rigorous treatment of injection gas

pressure profile resulting from friction in the annulus. This can make a
significant difference to the calculated DIP when gas rate is high or 
annulus cross-section area is small. Can be set to ON or OFF, default
OFF.

U= Optional, for FRICTION=ON, specifies the overall Heat Transfer  

Coefficient to be used for calculating injection gas temperature changes
due to heat exchange with the tubing and casing. (btu/hr/ft2/F or W/m2/
C). Default 20 btu/hr/ft2/F.

IFACTOR= Optional, for FRICTION=ON, A factor (f) that allows the ambient
temperature (Ta) used in gas friction heat transfer calculations to be
interpolated between the ambient rock temperature (Tr) and the
production wellbore temperature (Tw) using the formula Ta = Tr*(1-f) +
Tw*f. Can be set to a value between 0 and 1, default 0.9.

PRINTF= Optional, for FRICTION=ON, requests detailed output from the simulation
of gas flow in the annulus. The resulting output pages are similar to those
produced for the production wellbore. Can be set to ON or OFF, default
ON.

SIP= Optional. Specifies the Surface Injection Pressure used for Alhanati

  Gas
Lift Instability Criteria calculation (p.209) . (psia or bara)

Notes:
1. The subcodes FLOWRATE=, GLR=, GOR=, INJGLR= and INJGOR= are mutually exclusive.
2. Any subcode valid for MODE=DIP is also valid for MODE=DIP3.

Keyword Index 
627 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 645/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

INJPORT Gas Lift Injection Valve

INJPORT statements specify the position of Gas Lift Injection Valves. In conjunction with the
GASLIFT (p.624) statement they allow a well with multiple injection valves to be simulated. PIPESIM
will calculate the production flowrate and the quantity of gas injected through each valve.

INJPORT
statement statements
representingshould be positioned
the desired position in
forthe system
each profile
valve. immediately
In a typical gas liftfollowing theprofile
design, the NODEwill
contain between 4 and 10 injection valves.
Main-code: INJPORT

DPORT= The diameter of the valve port (in. or mm). Required.

PTR= The Test Rack Pressure Setting for the valve, measured at test rack
conditions, that is 60 oF and 14.7 psia. This is the pressure (applied
to the casing side of the valve, with the tubing side open to
atmosphere) required to just open the valve. Required.

MODE= The valve's mode of operation. Required.

DUMMY

ORIFICE

TUBING

IPO

PPO

CASING

 AP2AB= The ratio of the Port Area to the Bellows Area, AP/AB, for the valve.
Required.

CV= The flow coefficient for the valve port. This is a value normally in the
range 0.4 to 1.6, used to characterize the port in the equation for gas
flow. The valve manufacturer usually measures this in the
laboratory. Optional, default 0.6.

TYPE= The construction type of the valve. (Optional,)

DUMMY

ORIFICE
BELLOWS Default

SPRING

LABEL= An identifier for the valve.

Keyword Index 
628 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 646/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

TF= Throttling factor for the valve (mscfd/psi or msm3d/bar). Optional, if 
not supplied it will be calculated using an assumed value of (P open-
Pclose).

PCO= Experimental: the Casing Opening pressure for the valve. If supplied
this value will be used instead of the calculated value.
PTC= Experimental: the Tubing Closing pressure for the valve. If supplied
this value will be used instead of the calculated value.

PDT= Experimental: the Dome Pressure of the valve at operating

temperature. If supplied this value will be used instead of the
calculated value.

TEMPERATURE= Experimental: The valve operating temperature. If supplied this

value will be used instead of the calculated value.

The values of TYPE= and OPMODE= determine the characteristics of the valve.
 A Bellows valve has a dome and bellows, which is charged with gas (usually nitrogen) in the test rack
to provide the required closing force on the valve plunger. The force exerted by the gas charge
depends on its pressure, which increases with temperature. Since the temperature where the valve
is installed in the tubing is much higher than test rack temperature, this pressure correction must be
done using an accurate value for valve operating temperature if the valve simulation is to be relied
upon.
 A Spring valve has a spring instead of a bellows to provide the closing force on the valve plunger.
The spring force is relatively insensitive to temperature variation.
 An Orifice valve has no plunger, and is equivalent to a normal choke. It will always be open, regardless
of tubing and casing pressure, thus in theory not only can gas flow from casing to tubing, but
production fluid can also flow from tubing to casing. In practice this is not a problem as static head
limits fluid buildup in the casing. An orifice valve is sometimes specified as the deepest injection valve,
because it will not suffer from unwanted closure if the gas lift design no longer matches the system
operating parameters.
 A dummy valve is a plug that passes no gas.
Bellows and spring valves are sensitive to both tubing and casing pressure to a greater or lesser 
extent, depending on their construction and the way they are installed in the tubing string. The
objective of valve design, placement and test rack pressure setting is to achieve a desired response
to changes in tubing and casing pressure. These are called Modes of Operation, and have the
following names and meanings:

IPO:
Injection Pressure operated. Valve will respond only to changes in injection gas pressure.
Response is off-on rather than proportional.
PPO:
Production Pressure Operated. Valve will respond only to changes in tubing pressure.
Response is off-on rather than proportional.

Keyword Index 
629
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 647/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

TUBING:
Tubing-sensitive proportional response. Valve will respond predominantly to changes in
tubing pressure, exhibiting a proportional response.
CASING:

Casing-sensitive
casing pressure, proportional response. Valve
exhibiting a proportional will respond predominantly to changes in
response.

INJGAS: Injection Gas (Optional) and INJFLUID: Fluid Injection

INJGAS and INJFLUID allow the injection and mixing of a side-stream fluid. They both work for 
Blackoil and Compositional fluids.
INJGAS simulates a single gas injection point, and allows a specified quantity of gas to be added to
the production fluid at any position. This quantity can be expressed in volume or ratio terms. It differs
from GASLIFT (p.624) in that it always injects the specified gas quantity, whereas GASLIFT
(p.624) will calculate how much gas is injected.
INJFLUID simulates a single fluid injection point, and allows the mixing of the main stream with a
side-stream of any required composition and phase. It allows a base pressure and temperature to be
specified for the side stream, this is used to fix the volume flowrate if specified as a gas or liquid rate.
INJGAS will only allow the injected fluid to be gas, it will apply certain sanity limits when working in
PIPESIM-NET mode, and it will calculate values for Alhanati Gas Lift Stability criteria. It also allows
injected gas properties such as SG, Cp and K to be defined for a black oil fluid.
Main-code: INJGAS or INJFLUID

GASRATE= Defines the flow rate of injection gas in volumetric terms (mmscf/d or 
mmsm3/d).

MASSRATE= Defines the flow rate of injected fluid in mass terms (lb/sec or kg/sec).

LIQRATE= INJFLUID only. Defines the flow rate of injected fluid in volumetric terms
of its stock-tank liquid phase (sbbl/day or sm3/day).

FLOWRATE= or RATE= INJGAS only, a synonym for GASRATE=.

GOR= or GLR= Defines the flowrate of injection gas in terms of Gas Liquid Ratio or Gas
Oil Ratio. Sufficient gas will be injected to adjust the produced fluid's
GLR or GOR to the specified value. If the fluid currently has a higher 
value, no gas will be injected.

INJGLR= or INJGOR= Defines the flowrate of injection gas in terms of an increase in Gas Liquid

Ratio or Gas
produced Oil GLR
fluid's Ratio.orSufficient
GOR by thegasspecified
will be injected
value. to increase the

TEMP= or IPTEMP= Temperature of injection fluid at the point of injection (F or C). If omitted,
defaults to the temperature of the produced fluid at the injection point

SG= INJGAS only, optional. For black oil fluids only, Specific gravity of the
injection gas (default = Value of gas SG from produced fluid)

Keyword Index 
630 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 648/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

CP= INJGAS only, optional. For black oil fluids only, Heat capacity of injection
gas (default = Value of gas Cp from produced fluid)

KGAS= INJGAS only, optional. For black oil fluids only, Thermal conductivity of  
injection gas (default = Value of gas K from produced fluid)

CHP= INJGAS only, Optional. Casing head pressure to be used for Alhanati
Gas Lift Stability Criteria calculation. (psia or Bara)

DSIC= INJGAS only, Optional. Diameter of the Surface Injection Choke. Used
for Alhanati Gas Lift Stability Criteria calculation (in. or mm). Exclusive
with SIP=.

IDCT= INJGAS only, optional: the presence of the IDCT= subcode signals that
gas injection is occurring through coiled tubing. The value supplied is
the Internal Diameter of the Coiled Tubing (in. or mm.). The Cullinder &
Smith correlation is used to calculate the DP in the injection string, this
is compared with the available Casing Head Pressure and tubing
pressure, and insufficient CHP will trigger an informative message. NB:
Subsequent flow up the tubing should be specified as ANNULAR, using
an appropriate PIPE statement that supplies the correct annulus
dimensions with AID= and AOD= subcodes. Coiled tubing being used
as a 'velocity string' (i.e. with no injected gas) should be specified simply
as annular flow with an appropriate PIPE statement as above, there is
no need for any INJGAS statement.

SIP= INJGAS only, optional. Surface Injection Pressure. Used for Alhanati
gas Lift Stability Criteria calculation. (psia or Bara).

DP= INJGAS only, Optional.. Injection port delta pressure (psia or Bara).
used to calculate casing pressure for Alhanait Gas Lift Stability Criteria
calculation. (psi or Bar). Exclusive with DPORT=.

DPORT= INJGAS only, Optional. Injection port diameter. Used for Alhanati gas
Lift Stability Criteria calculation. (in. or mm)

PVTFILE= Optional. For compositional fluids only, the name of a PVT file
containing the composition of the injected fluid. Exclusive with
FLUIDNAME=, USE=, and STREAMNAME=.

FLUIDNAME= or USE= Optional. The name of the fluid (Black Oil or Compositional)
representing the injected fluid specification, as specified with a BEGIN
FLUID (p.593) block. ( A special-case fluid name of *SEP_DISCARD
specifies that the injected fluid specification and flowrate is obtained
from the discard stream of a separator (p.642) located somewhere
upstream in the same branch. See also STREAMNAME= below.).
Exclusive with PVTFILE= and STREAMNAME=.

HANDLE=

Keyword Index 
631
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 649/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

STREAMNAME= Optional, INJFLUID only. The name of the fluid stream representing the
injected fluid specification, as specified on the DISCARDNAME=
subcode of an upstream separator. The injected stream definition
includes its fluid definition (Black Oil or Compositional), flowrate, and
enthalpy. This feature provides the same functionality as
*SEP_DISCARD described above, but in addition ensures the fluid
enthalpy is conserved. Multiple separated streams may be re-injected
within the same branch by ensuring they are defined with unique names.
Exclusive with PVTFILE=, FLUIDNAME= and USE=.

PRINT= Optional. Requests a verbose printout of the specification of the injected

fluid.

CHTEMP= INJGAS only, Optional. Injection gas temperature can be provided at

the casing head (wellhead) as an alternative to TEMP=. This will be
corrected to a temperature at the injection point by use of a formula that
depends on geothermal gradient and production temperature. (F or C)

LIMIT= or LIMITMR=

GLRLIMIT= or LIMITGLR=

The quantity of gas or fluid to be injected must usually be specified, either as a volumetric or mass
rate, or as a ratio with the liquid phase of the produced fluid. Thus one of the subcodes GASRATE=,
MASSRATE=, LIQRATE= GOR=, GLR=, INJGOR= or INJGLR= should be specified. However, if 
STREAMNAME= or *SEP_DISCARD is used, the flowrate is obtained from the upstream separator..
Mixing of the injected and the produced fluid is assumed to occur at the pressure which pertains at
the injection point during the simulation. The temperature of the fluid after mixing is calculated by a
heat balance around the mixing point.
 Alhanati gas-lift stability criteria are calculated for a gas lift system and added to the Plot file for use
by the Well Optimization feature, if sufficient information is provided on the INJGAS statement. Any
two of the subcodes SIP=, DPORT=, CHP=, DP= and DSIC= should be provided, preferably the first
two. The others will then be calculated.

MPBOOSTER (Optional)
Main-code: MPBOOSTER

TYPE= Multiphase pump type.

GENERIC

TWINSCREW

VENDOR

NAME= The pump name.

ROUTE=

Keyword Index 
632 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 650/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 ADIABATIC Adiabatic compression is performed (default). For black oil models the
heat capacity ratio (C p/C v) for the adiabatic exponent in the
compression equations is assumed to be constant with a value equal
to 1.26. For compositional models the heat capacity ratio is calculated
using the relationship: Cp = Cv - R. The heat capacity is obtained at
the average of the compressor suction and discharge conditions.
POLYTROPIC Polytropic compression is performed. The heat capacity ratio (C p/C v)
is calculated as outlined above for ADIABATIC compression.

MOLLIER Compression is based upon the Mollier method, that is isoentropic

compression from suction to discharge pressures. This option is valid
for compositional models only

POUT= Discharge pressure from the multiphase pump (bara or psia) (default
20,000 psia)

DP= Pressure differential across the pump (bar or psi) (default 10,000 psi)
PRATIO= Multiphase pump pressure ratio (default 1000)

POWER= Power available (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

PUMPEFF= Efficiency of compression of the gas phase (default 100%)

SPEED= Pump speed

VISCORR=

STATUS= Status of the pump.

GENERIC

TWINSCREW

VENDOR

MPUMP Multiphase Pump (Optional)

Main-code: MPUMP

TYPE= Multiphase pump type.

CENTRIFUGA Centrifugal pump.

NAME= The pump name.

ROUTE=

 ADIABATIC Adiabatic compression is performed (default). For black oil

models the heat capacity ratio (C p/C v) for the adiabatic
exponent in the compression equations is assumed to be

Keyword Index 
633
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 651/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

constant with a value equal to 1.26. For compositional models

the heat capacity ratio is calculated using the relationship: Cp =
Cv - R. The heat capacity is obtained at the average of the
compressor suction and discharge conditions.

POLYTROPIC Polytropic compression is performed. The heat capacity ratio (C

p/C v) is calculated as outlined above for ADIABATIC
compression.

MOLLIER Compression is based upon the Mollier method, that is

isoentropic compression from suction to discharge pressures.
This option is valid for compositional models only

POUT= Discharge pressure from the multiphase pump (bara or psia)

(default 20,000 psia)

DP= Pressure differential across the pump (bar or psi) (default 10,000
psi)

PRATIO= Multiphase pump pressure ratio (default 1000)

POWER= Power available (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

COMPEFF= Efficiency of pumping the liquid phase (default 100%)

PUMPEFF= Efficiency of compression of the gas phase (default 100%)

SPEED= Pump speed

STAGES=

STONEWALL=
ON

OFF

VERBOSE=

ON

OFF

TARGETGAS=

TARGETLIQUID=

TARGETMASS=

Keyword Index 
634
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 652/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note:  At least one of the subcodes POUT, DP, PRATIO, and POWER should be supplied. If 2 or 
more are present, PIPESIM will treat them as upper limits, and will use whichever gives the smallest
DeltaP. The others will be recalculated and displayed as answers on the output file.

NODE System Profile Data (Required)

Main-code: NODE
The physical geometry of the pipeline system is defined by entering the distance and elevation
coordinates of each system node. A minimum of two nodes are required to define a system and there
is a maximum limit of 1,000 nodes.

Note: For the calculation of temperature and pressure profiles, PIPESIM internally subdivides the
section of pipe between each node into a number of segments. Normally 4 segments are created,
but this can be controlled from 1 to 50 if desired (see Options (p.568) ).

DISTANCE= Horizontal distance coordinate of the node (km or feet).

ELEVATION= Vertical elevation coordinate of the node (m or feet).

MD= Measured Depth (m or feet)

TVD= True Vertical Depth (m or feet)

TEMP=  Ambient temperature at the node ( oC or oF). If no value is entered, the value will be
calculate: see below.

U= Overall heat transfer coefficient relative to the pipe outside diameter (W/m 2/K or Btu/
hr/ft2/ oF). If no value is entered the value from the previous node is assumed. The
U sub-code is not required if the heat transfer coefficients are to be calculated by the
program (if specified they will be ignored)

LABEL= Node labels are for information only and can appear on any node card. There is a
maximum length limitation of 12 characters. The label should be included in quotes
if it contains delimiter characters (for example blanks). If a node is labelled, it will
appear on the Summary Output at the end of the job.

MP=

MT=

Notes:
1. Each node may have either specification of DISTANCE= and ELEVATION= , or TVD= and MD=,
but not both. It is also possible to join together pipe sections with either specification, in which
case the nodes where the sections join are assumed to occupy the same position.
2. The ambient temperature is optional.

Keyword Index 
635 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 653/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

3. If it is omitted on MD/TVD nodes, it is assumed to be a point on a geothermal temperature gradient,

and its value is calculated by linear interpolation against TVD between known values on either 
side. On the DIST/ELEV nodes however, the value from the previous node will be used.
4. It is possible to place separate sections of pipe within the PIPESIM input file exactly as they were
measured, i.e. with their own particular X/Y datums, effectively a datum reset feature. Datums are
reset whenever a change of NODE card specification occurs (change from using DISTANCE=
and ELEVATION= to MD= and TVD=), and when a supercode is used (COMPLETION, TUBING,
FLOWLINE, RISER NAPOINT, see Completion (p.613) and NAPOINT (p.698) ) .
5. As with all other maincodes and subcodes, the node data keywords can be abbreviated down to
the minimum number of letters required to make them unique.
6. In addition, if distance and elevation is used, the subcodes can be omitted, as long as the data is
supplied in the correct order, viz distance, elevation, temperature, U, label. Blank fields should be
delimited by commas.
7. Zero length pipe sections can be defined, that is NODE cards with DISTANCE= and ELEVATION=
sub-codes the same as the previous one can be defined.

PIPE: Pipe or Tubing cross-section dimensions (Required)

Main-code: PIPE

ID= Pipe Internal diameter (mm or inches).

WT= Pipe wall thickness (Default = 12.7 mm or 0.5 inches)

ROUGHNESS= Pipe roughness (Default = 0.025 mm or .001 inches).

 AID= Annulus inside Diameter (mm or inches). (Default = 0).

See notes below.

 AOD= Annulus Outside Diameter (mm or inches). See notes

below.

FLOWTYPE= Specifies the flowpath for a tubing/annulus system.

May be:

TUBING Flow is in the normal tubing or pipe, whose internal

diameter is specified with ID=. This is the default.

 ANNULUS Flow is in the annular space between tubing and

casing, dimensions set with AID= and AOD=
BOTH or  Flow is in both tubing and annulus: tubing internal
TUBANN diameter is set with ID=, casing dimensions set with
 AOD=, ID= and WT=; the AID= subcode will be
ignored.

CONDUCTIVITY= or KPIPE= Pipe thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF)

Keyword Index 
636 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 654/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

WAXTHIKNESS= The thickness of a coating of wax that exists on the

inside of the pipe (in or mm) (default zero).

WAXK= The thermal Conductivity of the wax (W/m/K or Btu/hr/

ft/ oF)

RODDIAM= Specifies that a pump drive rod exists in the centre of  

the pipe or tubing, and supplies its diameter (in or mm).
If flowtype is set to TUBING, Fluid will flow in the
annular space between the rod and the pipe internal
diameter specified with the ID= subcode.

 AXID= or AAREA= or  Optional. The cross-section area of the flowpath (ft 2or 
 ANNULUSAREA= m 2). If specified, this value is used preference to the
area that would otherwise be calculated from ID=,
 AID=, flowpath and so on to compute the fluid velocity.
This is useful for modelling flow in ducts that do not
have a circular or annular shape.
 AWP= Optional. The total Wetted Perimeter WP (in or mm).
If specified, this value is used in preference to the sum
of the relevant diameters specified with ID=, AID- and
 AOD=, depending on the flowpath. This is useful for 
modelling flow in ducts that do not have a circular or 
annular shape.

 AEHD= Optional. The Equivalent Hydraulic Diameter (in or 

mm). This is normally calculated from the relation EHD
= 4 AXID / WP . It is used to obtain the friction factor.
This is useful for modelling flow in ducts that do not
have a circular or annular shape.

ILH= In-Line Heater. This subcode allows a fixed power or  

duty to be specified, that is used to transfer heat to the
fluid flowing in the pipe. The value is interpreted as
power per unit length (BTU/hr/ft or Kw/m).

RODDIAM= Drive rod diameter. This subcode allows the pipe

cross-section area to be reduced, to simulate the
presence of a drive rod for a pump. The diameter of 
the rod must be provided (inches or mm). Note, if the
RODPUMP or CVFMD statement is used to place a
pump in the system, the drive rod diameter can also
be set there, in which case it is not necessary to supply
it here as well.

Keyword Index 
637 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 655/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Notes:
1. The AID= and AOD= subcodes should only be used if annular flow is desired. For normal pipe or 
tubing flow, ID=should be used. The FLOWTYPE subcode should always be used to confirm the
desired type of flow.
2. Both AID= and AOD= refer to the dimensions of the annulus, that is the space between tubing
and casing, or between successive casings. For example, if annular flow between tubing and
casing is to be modeled, the AOD= is the casing inner diameter, and the AID= is the tubing outer 
diameter.
3. Most of the published multiphase flow correlations have been developed assuming normal pipe
flow, not annular flow. Whilst Schlumberger have taken every care in the coding and validation of 
these correlations, you should carefully examine the results of annular flow simulation to ensure
the selected correlation behaves as expected. We recommend that the results from a number of 
correlations be compared when annular flow is modeled.

PUMP Pump (Optional)

Main-code: PUMP

POUT= Discharge pressure from the pump (bara or psia) (default 20,000
psia)

DP= Pressure differential across the pump (bar or psi) (default 10,000
psia)

PRATIO= Pump pressure ratio (default 1000)

POWER= Power available for pump (KW or hp) (default unlimited)

EFF= Overall efficiency of the pump (%) (Default = 100%)

NAME= The name of the pump. Used to specify which pump curve
defined before the profile under the PUMPCRV main-code is to
be used.

SPEED= The pump impeller speed (rpm) (default unlimited)

STAGES= The number of stages for this particular pump. (default: number  
of stages as specified on the PUMPCRV maincode.)

ROUTE= The thermodynamic route of operation of the pump

 ADIABATIC No heat transfer 

ISENTHALPIC Constant enthalpy

MOLLIER Mollier  

ISENTROPIC Constant entropy

Keyword Index 
638 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 656/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ISOTHERMAL Constant temperature

 ACF

UNDEFINED Undefined

VISCCORR= Viscosity correction

NONE

CENTRILIFT

REDA

TURZO

USER

VERBOSE=

ON

OFF

STAGECALCS= Perform the calculations through the pump on a stage-by-stage

basis. The details are then reported in the output file.

ON

OFF

SEPEFF=

EQUILIBRIUM=

ON

OFF

CALCNSTAGES=

MAXWCUT=

MINSSU=

VISCFLUID=
OIL

WATER

LIQUID

MIXTURE

Keyword Index 
639
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 657/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

VISCFACTOR=

STATUS=

Notes:
1. At least one of the subcodes POUT, DP, PRATIO, POWER and SPEED should be supplied. If 2
or more are present, PIPESIM will treat them as upper limits, and will use whichever gives the
smallest DeltaP. The others will be recalculated and displayed as answers on the output file.
2. If a pump curve name is supplied, the speed and/or number of stages may also be supplied. These
are used to adjust the supplied curve against its specified speed and number of stages (as set
with SPEED= and STAGES= on the PUMPCRV maincode). The adjustment for speed is done
using the so called affinity or fan laws, which state that "capacity is directly proportional to speed,
head is proportional to square of speed, and power is proportional to cube of speed".

COMPCRV and PUMPCRV: Compressor and Pump performance curves

Main-code: PUMPCRV or COMPCRV
Centrifugal pump and compressor performance curves are specified as a range of head and efficiency
or power values versus volumetric flow rates. These values should be specified before the profile,
and each curve is given a name so it can be referenced on a subsequent PUMP or COMPRESSOR
statement.

NAME= Required: The name of the curve, for referencing on a subsequent PUMP or 
COMPRESSOR statement.

SPEED= The speed for which this curve was generated. (rpm)

Q= Values of flow rate, supplied as a multiple value set (p.559) . Flowrates are measured
in volumetric terms at the flowing pressure and temperature at the inlet to the device.
For a pump curve, units are bbl/day or m3/day; for a compressor curve, they are ft
3/min or m3/sec. (See note below).

FLOWRATE= Synonym for Q =.

HEAD= Values of head, supplied as a multiple value set (p.559). For a pump curve, units
are feet or metres. For a compressor curve they are ft-lbf/lbm (foot-pounds force per 
pound mass) or Kj/kg. Note that the conversion factor between ft-lbf/lbm and feet is
1.

EFFICIENCY= Values of efficiency (%), supplied as a multiple value set (p.559). (Default is 100%).
Exclusive with POWER=.

POWER= Values of power (hp or kw), supplied as a multiple value set (p.559). Exclusive with
EFFICIENCY=.

STAGES= For a Pump curve only, the number of stages for which this curve is defined (normally
1).

Keyword Index 
640 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 658/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

WHEELS= For a compressor curve only, the number of compressor wheels for which this curve
is defined.

The multiple value sets (p.559) supplied for Q=, HEAD=, and EFF= or POWER= sub-codes must
contain at least 3, and no more than 30 values, separated by commas, and enclosed in parentheses.
The values need not be entered in ascending or descending order, however there is a strict one-for-
one correspondence between the values in each list, based on their position. Each list must contain
the same number of values.
Since the multiple value lists can be quite lengthy, they may be supplied across more than one line
in the input file. This can be achieved either by use of the continuation character &, or by repeating
the maincode and curve name on each line. The examples below illustrate this, they both have the
same effect:

Examples

Example 1

PumpCrv name = GN7000 stages = 100 speed = 3600

PumpCrv name = GN7000 Q = (1250 ,3750 ,5800 ,7400 ,9000 ,
10666.7)
PumpCrv name = GN7000 head = (4827.88 ,4176.29,3624.68,3160.3 ,
2338.76,971.734)
PumpCrv name = GN7000 eff = (23.6865 ,55.0738,67.3463,71.3873,63.476 ,
31.7383)

Example 2 

PumpCrv name = GN7000 stages = 100 speed = 3600 &

Q = (1250 ,3750 ,5800 ,7400 ,9000 ,10666.7) &
head = (4827.88 ,4176.29,3624.68,3160.3 ,2338.76,971.734) &
eff = (23.6865 ,55.0738,67.3463,71.3873,63.476 ,31.7383)

REINJECTOR (Optional)
Main-code: REINJECTOR

RODPUMP: Rod- or Beam-pump

Main-code: RODPUMP or CVFMD
The RODPUMP statement allows the outline specification for a Rod- or Beam-pump to be supplied.
 A rod-pump is an example of a Constant Volume Fluid Motive Device (CVFMD). CVFMDs are fixed-
volume,
mixtures.positive-displacement
Other notable CVFMD pumps or compressors
examples designed
are: Progressive to pumps,
cavity move liquids, gasesmultiphase
Twin screw or 2-phase
boosters, and reciprocating compressors. The statement allows a simplistic simulation of such a
device to be performed.

NOMLIQRATE= The flowing volume flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge (m 3/day or bbl/day).

Keyword Index 
641
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 659/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

SLIPCOEF= A coefficient to specify the change in flowrate with respect to Delta pressure
(m3/day/bar or bbl/day/psi). This is used to compute the pressure rise across the
device when the actual flowrate is less than the specified nominal rate.

MAXDP= Maximum pressure rise the device is allowed to exhibit (psi or bar). This is used
to prevent excess rod loading.
MAXPOWER= Maximum power the device is allowed to draw (hp or kw). This is used to prevent
excess rod loading.

RODDIAMETER= The Diameter of the drive rod (in or mm). The drive rod will be assumed to exist
in the downstream pipe or tubing, and will stretch up to the wellhead or the end
of the tubing. The fluid will flow in the annular space between the tubing ID and
the rod OD. The rod diameter can be adjusted in downstream pipe sections by
use of the RODDIAM= subcode on the PIPE (p.636) statement, this is useful to
simulate taper rods.

VOLUME= The sweptlength

the stroke volume of the
(bbl pump
or m3). In cylinder, i.e. with
conjunction its cross-section
SPEED=, this area multiplied
is an by
alternative
to the nominal rate.

SPEED= The pump speed, in strokes per minute. In conjunction with VOLUME=, this is
an alternative to the nominal rate.

NOMINALRATE= The flowing volume flowrate that the pump would produce, if it were pumping
with no back-pressure at its discharge (m 3/sec or ft3/min). this is the same
information as NOMLIQRATE= but in different units, more suited to other types
of CVFMD.

SEPARATOR Separator (Optional)

Main-code: SEPARATOR

TYPE= Type of separator: required, and may be set to one of:

GAS Defines a gas separator: the Gas phase will be wholly or partly
discarded.

LIQUID Defines a liquid separator: the liquid phase(s) will be wholly or partly
discarded.

WATER Defines a water separator: the Aqueous Liquid phase will wholly or 
partly discarded.
EFFICIENCY= The volumetric efficiency of separation expressed as a percentage, 0
to 100. At 100% efficiency, all of the discarded phase will be removed;
at lower values, some of the discard phase will remain in the kept
stream. Note that the efficiency applies only to the discarded phase; no
portion of the kept phase(s) will be discarded at any efficiency.

Keyword Index 
642 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 660/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

DISCARDNAME= Optional: the name of the discarded fluid stream. The discarded stream
can be re-injected in the branch, in a downstream fluid injector, if it is
given a name. This is an alternative to *SEP_DISCARD, as described
in note 3 below.

VERBOSE= Optional: allows control over the detailed output for the separator,
written to the report file (.out).

ON Separator output is written to report file.

OFF Separator output is not written to report file.

Notes:
1. In a Black Oil case, the separator will result in a redefinition of the fluid's stock-tank Gas to Liquid
Ratio (originally supplied on the RATE maincode as GLR, GOR, OGR or LGR) to a GLR or LGR.
In a compositional case, a rigorous flash is performed at the separator pressure and temperature,
and the molar composition re-defined in terms of the flowrates of the components in the kept
phase(s).
2. If the efficiency is 100% and the flowrate is defined in terms of the discarded phase, the flowrate
basis will be changed to that of the kept phase.
3. Use of the SEPARATOR statement normally results in the separated phase being discarded from
the system. In a single branch model, or within a given branch of a network model, the discarded
phase can be recovered and re-injected into the branch further downstream, by use of the special
fluid name *SEP_DISCARD (p.630) on the INJFLUID (p.630) statement. In a network model, a
Network Separator (p.724) can be used (at the network level) to ensure both separator outlet
streams are kept.

SLUG Slug Calculation Options (Optional)

Main-code: SLUG
The SLUG main-code allows the selection of slug behavior correlations. At present three slug
correlations are available: the severe-slugging group PI-SS proposed by Pots (p.550) , and the slug
sizing correlations of Norris (p.549) and of Scott, Shoham and Brill (p.552) .

PISS= ON Start calculation of PI-SS

OFF End calculation of PI-SS

SIZE= SSB Switch on Scott, Shohan and Brill slug size correlation.

NORRIS Switch on Norris slug size correlation.

OFF Switch off slug size correlation.

BP= ON Use BP Slug method. To see the results of this the following should also be used:
print custom = (b,o,a24, b24, c24, d24, e24,f24,g24,h24,i24)

Keyword Index 
643
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 661/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The SIZE and PISS sub-codes are not related, and can be set independently of one another.

The PI-SS routine is based upon a correlation developed at Koninklijke Shell Laboratory. PI-SS is a
dimensionless number that is a means of quantifying the likelihood of severe riser-slugging. Normally
one would turn the PI-SS calculation on after the first node of the flowline and switch it off at the
downstream riser base. If the value of PI-SS is less than one at the riser base and the flow regime
(as predicted by the Taitel-Dukler correlation) is stratified, then severe riser slugging is possible.
Conversely, PI-SS values significantly greater than one indicate that severe riser slugging is not likely.
The PI-SS number can also be used to estimate slug size. As a rule of thumb the slug length will be
approximately equal to the riser height divided by PI-SS, that is PI-SS values less than unity imply
slug lengths greater than the riser height. PI-SS is calculated at each node in the flowline (while
PISS=ON) using averaged holdup data, etc., but it is only the value recorded at the downstream riser 
base which is of any real significance. PI-SS is printed as part of the PRIMARY output (see the PRINT
(p.583) main code).
The SIZE sub-code enables the user to specify a slug sizing correlation. At present two correlations
are available, NORRIS and SSB. The NORRIS correlation was developed from Prudhoe Bay
operational data and gives slug size as a function of pipe diameter. The SSB correlation was
developed by Scott, Shohan and Brill and published in SPE paper 15103 in April 1986. The correlation
takes account of slug growth. Normally one would switch the SIZE option on at the start of the profile
and slug sizes will be automatically estimated whenever the flow regime (as predicted by the chosen
correlation) is one that will support slugs. It should be noted that the slug size data output is only
printed if SLUG is specified on the PRINT main code.

Slug catcher size

The following comments may help to determine the size of a slug catcher.
The slug output pages should be switched on from the Define Output dialog.
The size of a slug catcher is determined by one of the following parameters.
1. The amount of liquid generated by pigging the lines.
2. The amount of liquid generated by changing the flowrate in the flowline. At low flowrates there will
be a large holdup of liquid in the pipeline and at high flowrates there will be a small holdup of liquid
in the line. As the flowrate is increased you get a surge of liquid from the pipeline. The flowrate
increase can be calculated using Cunliffe's method (p.355).
3. Dealing with slugs created by severe riser slugging. The likelihood of severe riser slugging is
determined by the PI-SS correlation. Slugging will occur if there is a segregated flow regime and
a PI-SS number less than one. The size of the slug is determined by using the following formula.
Slug Size = Riser Volume/PI-SS number.
4. Dealing with hydrodynamic Slugging. This is determined by use of the SSB or Norris Correlations.
You need a slugging flow regime for this to occur such as intermittent. The slug size and frequency
is taken from the slug length and frequency table in the output. It is normal that the slug catcher 
is sized for the 1 in 1000 slug. These two correlations can predict huge slug sizes with volumes
greater than the holdup in the pipeline. Therefore one must be careful to check the holdup as the
slug cannot be bigger than the total amount of liquid in the pipeline.

Keyword Index 
644
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 662/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5. Dealing with terrain slugging. PIPESIM cannot accurately predict slugging. If the holdup increases
as the pipeline goes over successive humps - this may indicate a propensity for terrain slugging.

WELLHEAD Wellhead Profile Delimiter 

Main-code: WELLHEAD
This maincode marks the position of the wellhead in the system profile. It is required when modeling
multiple injection ports in gas lifted wells.

5.4.3 WELL PERFORMANCE MODELING

INTRODUCTION (p.645)
WELLPI (p.646) Well Productivity Index
VOGEL (p.647) Data for the Vogel Equation
FETKOVICH (p.647) Data for the Fetkovich Equation
JONES (p.648) Data for the Jones Equation
IFPPSSE (p.648) Data for the Pseudo-steady state inflow equation
WCOPTION (p.650) Well Completion Data
IPRCRV or IFPCRV (p.653) Well performance and/or coning relationship tabulation
IFPTAB (p.654) Inflow Performance Tabulation (obsolete)
CONETAB (p.656) Coning relationship Tabulation (obsolete)
BACKPRES (p.656) Backpressure Equation (BPE)
NAPOINT (p.698) System Analysis Point
NAPLOT (p.694) System Analysis
HORWELL (p.657) Horizontal Well Inflow Performance
LAYER (p.659) Reservoir Layer properties
PERMTAB (p.661) Permeability Saturation Relationship Tabulation
HVOGEL (p.662)
FORCHHEIMER (p.662) Data for the Forchheimer Equation
FRACTURE (p.56) Data for the Hydraulic Fracture IPR
TRANSIENT (p.663) Data for the Transient inflow equation.

INTRODUCTION
Several options f or well performance modeling have been introduced. A number of basic options are
presently available and are summarized below with application limits:
1. Well Productivity Index (p.646). Oil and gas reservoirs. Black oil and compositional.
2. Vogel's Equation (p.647). Oil reservoirs. Black oil only.
3. Fetkovich's Equation (p.647). Oil reservoirs. Black oil only.
4. Jones' Equation (p.648) . Oil and gas reservoirs. Black oil and compositional.

Keyword Index 
645 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 663/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5. Pseudo Steady State Equation (p.648) . Oil and gas reservoirs. Black oil and single phase
compositional.
6. Well Completion Options (p.650) (such as perforation and gravel steady state pack models) are
available in association with the pseudo equation..
7. Inflow Performance Tabulation (p.654). Oil and gas reservoirs. Black oil and compositional.
Options 1 to 7 are mutually exclusive (except the Well Completion options, which must be used in
combination with the Pseudo-Steady-State Equation). If more than one option is entered, the last one
entered will be invoked. Normally inflow performance data would be entered after the INLET
statement, and must appear before the first NODE card in a case. However, if injection wells are
modeled, the system profile should describe the well geometry in the direction of flow, that is ending
at the bottom hole. The appropriate inflow performance data should appear after the bottom hole and
before the ENDCASE.
Printing Inflow Performance Data
 A comprehensive printout of the well inflow performance data can be obtained by invoking
the PRINT INFLOW option (Ref. Section 1.6).
Definition of Reservoir Type
For black oil cases, PIPESIM will interpret the reservoir type (oil or gas) from the way in which
the flow rate is defined under the RATE or ITERN statement as follows:
• If the rate is defined on the basis of liquid flow plus a gas/liquid ratio (that is LIQ plus GLR
sub-codes) then an "oil" reservoir is assumed.
• If the rate is defined on the basis of gas flow plus a liquid/gas ratio (that is . GAS plus LGR
sub-codes) then a "gas" reservoir is assumed.

WELLPI Well Productivity Index (Optional)

Main-code: WELLPI
The WELLPI statement allows the Productivity Index (p.361) to be specified for a point-type
completion or a distributed completion. Exactly one of the subcodes LPI=, GPI=, MIPI=, MCPI=,
LDPI=, GDPI=, MIDPI=, or MCDPI= should be provided.

Subcodes

PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom hole pressure at zero
flow rate.

LPI= Liquid Productivity Index (bbl/day/psi or sm 3/day/bar)

GPI= Gas Productivity Index (MMscf/day/psi/psi or MMsm 3/day/bar/bar) Note: Under 

normal circumstances, a gas well PI is much smaller than the typical liquid well PI.
Typical gas well PIs are between 1E-3 and 1E-6 mmscf/day/psi 2. Oil well PIs usually
vary between 1 and 40 STB/D/psi.

MIPI= Mass Incompressible Productivity Index (lb/sec/psi or kg/s/bar)

MCPI= Mass Compressible Productivity Index, (lb/sec/psi/psi or kg/s/bar/bar)

Keyword Index 
646 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 664/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

LDPI= Liquid Distributed Productivity Index (bbl/day/psi/ft or sm 3/day/bar/m)

GDPI= Gas Distributed Productivity Index (MMscf/day/psi/psi/ft or MMsm 3/day/bar/bar/m)

MIDPI= Mass Incompressible Distributed Productivity Index (lb/sec/psi/ft or kg/s/bar/m)

MCDPI= Mass Compressible Distributed Productivity Index, (lb/sec/psi/psi/ft or kg/s/bar/bar/m)

BPCORR= Allows a correction to the straight-line PI to allow for gas breakout when the fluid goes
below its bubble point pressure: can be set to ON or OFF (default OFF). If enabled,
the portion of the IPR below the bubble point is modelled with a Vogel relationship.

PICOEF= Specifies the PI coefficient for the Vogel equation used if BPCORR= is enabled.
(default 0.8)

WPCURVE (Optional)
Main-code: WPCURVE
This statement is obsolete, please do not use it.

VOGEL Vogel Equation (Optional)

Main-code: VOGEL
This keyword is used to specify data for Vogel's Equation (p.362).

Subcodes

PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom hole pressure at zero
flow rate.

 AOFP=  Absolute Open Flow Potential of the well (sm 3/d or STB/D). This is a hypothetical
liquid flow rate when bottom hole pressure is set to 0.0 psia

PICOEF= The PI-coefficient used in Vogel's equation to adjust the degree of curvature of the
inflow performance curve. Curvature increases with increasing PICOEF. A straight
line is produced when PICOEF=0. (Default = 0.8).

FETKOVICH Fetkovich Equation (Optional)

Main-code: FETKOVICH
This keyword is used to specify data for Fetkovitch's Equation (p.363).

Subcodes
PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom hole pressure at zero
flow rate.

 AOFP=  Absolute Open Flow Potential of the well (sm 3/d or STB/D). This is a hypothetical
liquid flow rate when bottom hole pressure is set at 0.0 psia.

Keyword Index 
647 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 665/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

EXP= Exponent used in the Fetkovich equation to adjust the degree of curvature of the inflow
performance curve. Unlike the Vogel equation it is not possible to produce a linear 
well inflow characteristic as a special case of the Fetkovich equation. The default is
1.0.

JONES Jones Equation (Optional)

Main-code: JONES or FORCHHEIMER
This keyword is used to specify data for the Jones Equation (p.364).

Subcodes

PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom hole pressure at
a flow rate of zero.

 A= Turbulent flow coefficient. (Use TYPE= to define fluid type.)

B= Laminar flow coefficient. (Use TYPE= to define fluid type.)

TYPE= Used to define the type of fluid.

LIQ Liquid

GAS Gas

LA= Liquid turbulent flow coefficient. (psi /MMscf 2/d 2 or bar/m 6/d 2)

LB= Liquid laminar flow coefficient. (psi/MMscf/d or bar/m 3/d)

GA= Gas turbulent flow coefficient. (psi 2/MMscf 2/d 2 or bar 2/m 6/d 2)

GB= Gas laminar flow coefficient. (psi 2/MMscf/d or bar 2/m 3/d)

IFPPSSE : Data for the Pseudo Steady State Equation (Optional)

Main-code: IFPPSSE
The Pseudo Steady-state equation employs a radial reservoir model. The equation takes into account
both the effects of laminar and turbulent flows on pressure drawdown.

PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom
hole pressure at zero flow rate.

PERM= Average formation permeability (md).

THICKNESS= Average formation thickness (metres or feet).

RADE= Radius of external boundary of drainage area (metres or  

feet). Default = 609.6 m or 2000 ft.

SKIN= Dimensionless skin factor (mechanical). Default = 0.

Keyword Index 
648 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 666/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

DIAMWELL= Wellbore diameter.

IPRTYPE= Inflow performance relationship model

PSS Pseudo steady-state model

JONES Jones mode;

BASIS= or FLOWTYPE=

LIQUID

GAS

2PHASE

GASMETHOD=

PSEUDO Use pseudo pressure

SQUARED Use pressure squared

GA=

GB=

SOURCE=

ST Use the stock tank flow formulation of the pseudo steady

equation (default)

RES Use the reservoir flow formulation of the pseudo steady

equation

BPCORRECTION= Controls whether to apply the Vogel correction below the

bubble point

YES

NO

PICOEFF= Vogel coefficient for Vogel correction. Default = 0.8

DSKINLIQUID= Dynamic skin for liquid phase. Default = 0.

DSKINGAS= Dynamic skin for gas phase. Default = 0.

RESAREA= Reservoir area. (If entered, reservoir radius is calculated)

SHAPEFACTOR= Reservoir shape factor. (If entered, reservoir radius is

calculated) Default = 31.62

DRAINAGESKIN= Reservoir drainage skin.

Keyword Index 
649
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 667/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

RESMOBILITY= Reservoir mobility. Should only be used for injection systems

(1/cp).

Note: If the skin is entered with the IFPPSSE main-code, any skin associated with the Well

Completion options (see Section 7.6) will be overwritten by this value.

WCOPTION Well Completion Data (Optional)

Main-code: WCOPTION
Well Completion Options (WCOPTION) allow the mechanical and dynamic skin factors to be
calculated from the details of the well completion configuration. Note: The well completion options
are only valid when used in conjunction with the Pseudo-Steady-State or Transient equations (as
defined under the IFPPSSE and TRANSIENT main-codes).
The WCOPTION maincode is an alternative to the FRACTURE maincode, and is exclusive with it.
TYPE= Specifies the type of well completion

OPENHOLE Openhole completion option. The program calculates the

skin factors assuming the well is not cemented. The
required data are DDAMAGE, PDAMAGE, INTERVAL,
PVERT and DEVIATION. All other sub-codes will be
ignored.

OPENGRAVEL Openhole gravel pack completion option. The required

data are DDAMAGE, PDAMAGE, INTERVAL, PVERT,
DEVIATION, PGRAV and DSCREEN. All other sub-
codes will be ignored.

PERFORATED Perforated completion option. The program calculates

the skin factors using the McLeod (p.382) or Karakas/
Tariq model. The required sub-codes are; DDAMAGE,
PDAMAGE, INTERVAL, PVERT, DEVIATION,
PERFSNMTHD, SHOTS, LPERF, DPERF,
PHASEANGLE, DCOMP, PCOMP. All other sub-codes
will be ignored.

GRAVELPACKED Gravel-packed and perforated completion Option. The

required sub-codes are; DDAMAGE, PDAMAGE,
INTERVAL, PVERT, DEVIATION, PERFSNMTHD,
SHOTS, LPERF, DPERF, PHASEANGLE, DCOMP,
PCOMP, PGRAV, DSCREEN, CASINGID and
LTUNNEL. All other sub-codes will be ignored.

FRACPACK Fracpack completion option. (i.e. a gravel packed

hydraulic fracture model). The required sub-codes are;
INTERVAL, PVERT, DEVIATION, SHOTS, DPERF,
PGRAV, DSCREEN, CASINGID, LTUNNEL,
FPHLFRAC, FPWFRAC, FPPPERM, FPDDEPTH,

Keyword Index 
650 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 668/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

FPDPERM, FPCLEN, FPCPERM. All other sub-codes

will be ignored

INTERVAL= Completion interval length (metres or feet). Default =

formation thickness, as defined previously under the
IFPPSSE (p.648) main-code.

PDAMAGEDZONE= Permeability of the damaged zone around well bore

(md). The formation data should be given under the
IFPPSSE (p.648) main-code. Default = formation
permeability.

DDAMAGEDZONE= Diameter of the damaged zone around well bore (mm or  

inches). Default = well bore radius (i.e., damaged zone
does not exist).

LPERFORATION= Length of perforation into the formation (mm or inches).

Default = infinity (which will result in a zero skin due to
perforation).
SHOTS= Shot density (shots/m or shots/ft). Default = 13.12 shots/
m or 4 shots/ft.

PCOMPACTEDZO= Permeability of the compacted zone (or crushed zone)

around the perforation. Default = permeability of the
damaged If neither the damaged zone nor compacted
zone permeability is defined, the default value for 
compacted zone permeability will be the formation
permeability specified under IFPPSSE. zone.

PVERTICAL= Permeability in the vertical direction (md). Default =

formation permeability, as defined previously under the
IFPPSSE (p.648) main-code.

DPERFORATION= Diameter of perforation (mm or inches). Default = 12.7

mm or 0.5 inches.

DCOMPACTEDZO= Diameter of the compacted zone (or crushed zone)

around the perforation. Default = diameter of the
perforation (i.e., compacted zone does not exist).

PGRAVEL= Permeability of gravel pack (md). Default = estimated

according to sieve size input.

SIEVESIZE=

LTUNNEL= Length of tunnel; which is usually the sum of the

thicknesses of cement, casing and annulus (mm or 
inches). Default = 0.0.

DSCREEN= Gravel pack screen ID (mm or inches).

Keyword Index 
651
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 669/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PHASEANGLE= Perforation phase angle (degrees).

DEVIATION= Well deviation (degrees).

CASINGID= Casing ID (mm or inches).

FPDDEPTH= Fracture damage depth (mm or inches). For fracture face

skin term.

FPDPERM= Fracture face damage permeability (md). For fracture

face skin term.

FPPPERM = Fracture proppant permeability (md). Frac pack proppant

permeability.

FPCLEN = Frac pack choke length (mm or inches). Choke length for  
choke fracture skin term.

FPCPERM= Frac pack choke permeability (md). Choke permeability

for choke fracture skin term.

FPWFRAC= Fracture width (mm or inches). Frac pack fracture width.

FPHLFRAC= Fracture half length (ft or m). Frac pack fracture half  
length.

PERFSKNMETHOD= Method for calculation of perforation skin.

0 McLeod (p.382) model

1 Karakas / Tariq model

DZSKINCALC=

GPSKINCALC=

PFSKINCALC=

PPDSKINCALC=

FPSKINCALC=

FACESKINCALC=

CHOKESKINCALC=

Note: The well completion options are only valid when used in conjunction with either the Pseudo-
Steady-State equation or the Transient equation (as defined under the IFPPSSE (p.648) and
TRANSIENT (p.663) maincodes). All data entered under the WCOPTION main-code will be ignored
if the IFPPSSE or TRANSIENT main-codes are not also specified.

Keyword Index 
652 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 670/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

IPRCRV or IFPCRV: Inflow Performance Curve

The IPRCRV statement is a generalized replacement for IFPTAB, GIFPTAB, and CONETAB. It allows
a tabular Inflow Performance Relationship (IPR) to be specified using PIPESIM's multiple value
syntax (p.563). A Coning relationship can also be supplied, either stand-alone, or in addition to a
tabular IPR. The available range of formats in which the data can be supplied is a superset of those
available with IFPTAB, GIFPTAB and CONETAB.
Maincode: IPRCRV or IFPCRV

NAME= Required. Defines the name of the curve. This name is then used on (a)
subsequent LAYER statement(s).

GAS=(...) Specifies values of Gas flowrate (mmscfd or mmsm3d). Exclusive with LIQ= and
MASS=.

LIQ=(...) Specifies values of liquid flowrate (sbbl/d or sm3/d). Exclusive with GAS= and
MASS=.

MASS=(...) Specifies values of mass flowrate (lb/sec or kg/sec). Exclusive with GAS= and
LIQ=.

GLR=(...) Specifies values of Gas Liquid Ratio (scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3). Exclusive with GOR=,
OGR=, LGR=.

GOR=(...) Specifies values of Gas Oil Ratio (scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3). Exclusive with GLR=,
OGR=, LGR=.

OGR=(...) Specifies values of Oil Gas Ratio (sbbl/mmscf or sm3/mmsm3). Exclusive with
GOR=, GLR=, LGR=.

LGR=(...) Specifies values of Liquid Gas Ratio (sbbl/mmscf or sm3/mmsm3). Exclusive with
GOR=, OGR=, OGR=.

GWR=(...) Specifies values of Gas Water Ratio (scf/sbbl or sm3/sm3). Exclusive with WGR= ,
WCUT=.

WGR=(...) Specifies values of Water Gas Ratio (sbbl/mmscf or sm3/mmsm3). Exclusive with
GWR= , WCUT=.

WCUT=(...) Specifies values of Watercut (% vol/vol). Exclusive with WGR= , GWR=.

PWSTATIC= Specifies the reservoir static (zero flowrate) pressure (psia or Bara).

PWF=(...) Specifies values of Flowing Bottom Hole Pressure (psia or bara). Exclusive with
DP=. Must be accompanied by PWSTATIC= unless the first flowrate value point
is zero.

DP=(...) Specifies values of drawdown (Delta pressure, the difference between PWS and
PWF). (psi or bar). Exclusive with PWF=, and must be accompanied by
PWSTATIC=.

Keyword Index 
653
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 671/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

GASSG=(...) Specifies values of Gas Specific Gravity in a coning table. Exclusive with
CONEDGASSG=.

DEGREE= The degree of polynomial to fit to the data, default 1.

CONEDGASSG= Specifies
produced the
gasSpecific gravity with
SG. Exclusive of the gas in the gas cap. Used to calculate the
GASSG=.

Exactly one of the flowrate subcodes GAS=, LIQ= or MASS= must be specified. Then:
• To specify an IPR table, supply also one of PWF= or DP=.
• To specify a gas or liquid coning table, supply also one of GLR=, GOR=, LGR=, or OGR=. The
gas specific gravity may be provided with GASSG= values, or a single value of CONEDGASSG=.
• To specify a water coning table, supply one of WGR=, GWR=, or WCUT=.
Gas and Water coning can be supplied with IPR data in the same table.
Care must be taken when combining the coning subcodes, since some combinations can cause
unphysical situations, and others can leave the system undefined. For example, if OGR= and WCUT=
are provided, the water flowrate is undefined when OGR is zero, so WGR= should be used instead
of WCUT= or LGR= instead of OGR=. If GLR= and GWR= are provided, the GWRs must always be
less than the GLRs, so WCUT= should be used instead of GWR=, or OGR= onstead of LGR=

Examples
1. This defines a coning table for a liquid production well. The statement has been provided on 2 lines
using the '&' character as the continuation marker at the end of the first line. The entire statement
(i.e. the total characters in all the continued lines) may be no more than 255 characters in length.

IFPCRV name=cc1 LIQ=(0,1000,2000,3000,4000) GLR=(300,300,550,600,620) &

WCUT=(10,10,18,22,30) GASSG=(.71 ,.71 ,.68 ,.67 ,.669)

2. This defines the same coning table as above, but shows how multiple statements can be used.
Each statement may be no more than 255 characters in length, but the use of multiple statements
allows more data points to be entered if necessary. Note that the curve name must appear on every
statement.

IFPCRV name=cc1 LIQ= (0 ,1000,2000,3000,4000)

IFPCRV name=cc1 GLR= (300 ,300 ,550 ,600 ,620 )
IFPCRV name=cc1 WCUT= (10 ,10 ,18 ,22 ,30 )
IFPCRV name=cc1 GASSG=(.71 ,.71 ,.68 ,.67 ,.669)

IFPTAB Inflow Performance Tabulation (Optional)

Main-code: IFPTAB

Note: The IFPTAB statement is obsolete, its functionality has been replaced by IPRCRV (p.653).

Specifies a liquid inflow performance relationship in the form of a table of bottom hole pressure versus
flow rate. Each IFPTAB statement holds a single data point. To complete the tabulation, at least four 
statements are required.

Keyword Index 
654
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 672/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Values
should be provided without keywords in a strict positional order, as follows:

value 1 Data point ordinal. If the IFPTAB statements are provided in order of increasing flowrate
this can be set to 0 for all statements (recommended) ; otherwise, it must be a value
between 1 and 30 to specify the ordinal.
value 2 Liquid flow rate value at stock tank conditions. (sbbl/day or sm3/day)

value 3 Bottom hole pressure (bara or psia).

value 4 Gas Oil Ratio (optional, scf/sbbl or sm 3/sm3)

value 5 Watercut (optional, %)

EXECUTE see note 4.

Notes:
1. The first 3 values are mandatory. If values 4 and 5 are present they define a table of coning
performance for the well or completion
2. One of the data points must be at zero flow rate such that the corresponding pressure is the static
bottom hole (and reservoir) pressure.
3. The ordinal (value 1) is present for historical reasons to ensure backwards compatibility with earlier 
versions of the PIPESIM engine. As long as the statements are provided in order of increasing
flowrate, and no other statements apart from IFPTAB appear in the middle of the table, the value
can be left at zero.
4. If the IFPTAB table is provided inside the system profile, the last statement must contain no values,
but instead must contain the EXECUTE sub-code. This syntax ensures that only one completion
is actually executed regardless of the number of IFPTAB statements actually present. If IFPTAB
is provided outside the system profile the EXECUTE subcode is unnecessary.
5. If your model contains multiple completions, 2 or more IFPTAB tables can be used to enter data
relevant to each completion.

Example

! n liq pwf gor wcut

ifptab 0 0 3000 986 0
ifptab 0 1000 2990 986 2.0
ifptab
ifptab 0
0 2699
6329 2920
2800 1096
2540 2.2
2.8
ifptab 0 7288 2600 2980 3.9
ifptab 0 8082 2400 3370 5.6
ifptab 0 8805 2003 3770 8.0
ifptab execute

The ! line is a comment line.

Keyword Index 
655 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 673/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

CONETAB Coning Relationship Tabulation (Optional)

Main-code: CONETAB
The CONETAB statement is obsolete, its functionality has been replaced by IPRCRV (p.653).
Specifies a coning relationship for a well or completion, in the form of a table of stock-tank liquid
flowrate versus produced GOR and watercut. Each CONETAB statement holds a single data point.
To complete the tabulation, at least four statements are required. CONETAB does not define an inflow
performance relationship, it is intended to be used in addition to an existing maincode that specifies
the desired IPR. Values should be provided without keywords in a strict positional order, as follows:

LIQUID= Liquid flow rate value at stock tank conditions. (sbbl/day or sm 3/day)

GOR= Gas Oil Ratio (scf/sbbl or sm 3/sm 3)

WCUT= Watercut (%)

Notes:
1. The CONETAB table should be provided in the system profile immediately before the maincode
specifying the required IPR.
2. No other maincode should appear in the body of the table.
3. Values should be provided in increasing order of liquid flow rate.
4. If your model contains multiple completions, 2 or more CONETAB tables can be used to enter 
data for each completion.
5. For  BLACKOIL (p.674) fluids, the Specific Gravity of the coned and associated gas should be
provided with the PROP (p.677) statement. See example below.

Example
For example:

! liq gor wcut conetab 0 986 0 conetab 1000 986 2.0 conetab 2699 1096 2.2
conetab 6329 2540 2.8 conetab 7288 2980 3.9 conetab 8082 3370 5.6 conetab 8805
3770 8.0

BACKPRES Back Pressure Equation (BPE) (Optional)

Main-code: BACKPRES
This keyword is used to specify data for the Back Pressure Equation (p.365).

Subcodes

PWSTATIC The static reservoir pressure (psia or bar)

N The back pressure exponent (dimensionless).

C The back pressure constant (dimensions of (mmscf/d)/ (psi 2) n or equivalent SI).

Keyword Index 
656 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 674/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

HORWELL Horizontal Well Inflow Performance

The following Inflow Performance options are available in addition to the Distributed Productivity Index
Inflow option (see WELLPI (p.646))
• Pseudo-steady state equation of Babu and Odeh for oil wells

• Joshi's steady-state equation

• Backpressure equation
The backpressure equation is accessed via the BACKPRES maincode BACKPRES (p.656), which
applies to horizontal completions as well as vertical. As with the WELLPI maincode, WELLPI
(p.646), the backpressure C and N parameters are assumed to apply per unit length of wellbore. The
steady-state and pseudo steady-state options are both accessed via the TYPE= subcode of the
HORWELL maincode. The well completion option, WCOPTION (p.650) , can be used in conjunction
with the HORWELL maincode.
Main-code: HORWELL

TYPE= PSSOIL The PSSOIL subcode calculates the horizontal well distributive
productivity index based on Babu and Odeh's (p.539) SPE paper 
18298. It is recommended the user read this reference before applying
the equation. The equation is based upon the pseudo-steady state IPR
well model applied to a rectangular drainage area.

 ADIM Drainage width perpendicular to the well (ft or m).

BDIM Drainage width parallel to the well (ft or m).

THICK Reservoir thickness (ft or m).

KX Permeability in the x-direction (that is Kh) (mD)

KY Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to well) (mD).

KZ Permeability in the z-direction (that is Kv) (mD).

XZERO X-ordinate of horizontal well trajectory (ft or m).

YONE Starting y-ordinate of horizontal well trajectory (ft or m).

YTWO Ending y-ordinate of horizontal well trajectory (ft or m).

ZZERO Z-ordinate of horizontal well trajectory (ft or m).

RWELL Sandface radius (such as pipe + annulus + cement) (in or mm).

SKIN Mechanical skin factor (dimensionless).

PSSGAS The pseudo-steady state gas flow equation is based upon a circular 
drainage area and is described in Joshi's (p.546) "Horizontal Well
Technology". It is recommended that the user read this reference and
Inflow Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions (p.389) .
This equation contains two skin terms; the skin due to drilling/

Keyword Index 
657 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 675/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

perforations and the rate-dependent skin due to turbulent gas flow

around the wellbore.

THICK Reservoir thickness (ft or m).

KX Permeability in the x-direction (that is Kh) (mD).

KY Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to well) (mD).

KZ Permeability in the z-direction (that is Kv) (mD).

RWELL Sandface radius (i.e. pipe+annulus+cement) (in or mm).

REXT External boundary radius of drainage area (ft. or m). Default = infinity

SKIN Mechanical skin factor (dimensionless).

SSOIL The simplest form of horizontal well productivity calculations are the
steady-state analytical solutions which assumes that the pressure at
any point in the reservoir does not change with time. The steady-state
distributive productivity index is based upon Joshi's (p.546) SPE 16868
"Review of Horizontal and Drainhole Technology". The equation is
based on the assumption that the horizontal well drains an ellipsoidal
volume around the wellbore of length L. See Inflow Performance
Relationships for Horizontal Completions (p.389) , for more details.

ECCENT Wellbore eccentricity (i.e. offset of the well from the centre of the pay
zone) (in or mm).

THICK Reservoir thickness (ft or m).

KX Permeability in the x-direction (that is Kh) (mD).

KY Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to well) (mD).

KZ Permeability in the z-direction (i.e. Kv) (mD).

RWELL Sandface radius (that is pipe+annulus+cement) (in or mm).

REXT External boundary radius of drainage area (ft or m).

SKIN Mechanical skin factor (dimensionless).

SSGAS The steady-state gas distributive productivity equation is described in

Joshi's (p.546) "Horizontal Well Technology", Chapter 9, and Inflow
Performance Relationships for Horizontal Completions (p.389)

THICK Reservoir thickness (ft or m).

KX Permeability in the x-direction (that is Kh) (mD).

KY Permeability in the y-direction (parallel to well) (mD).

Keyword Index 
658 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 676/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

KZ Permeability in the z-direction (that is Kv) (mD).

RWELL Sandface radius (that is pipe+annulus+cement) (in or mm).

REXT External boundary radius of drainage area (ft or m).

SKIN Mechanical skin factor (dimensionless).

LAYER Reservoir Layer Properties

Main-code: LAYER
LAYER specifies the presence of a distinct reservoir Layer or Zone. It allows the properties of a fluid
to be defined, along with its pressure and temperature. Some additional layer-specific properties can
also be set. LAYER is intended to be used in a model that contains multiple completions, which may
be point-type, or distributed/horizontal. It should only appear within the system profile, and be followed
by a statement that selects a choice of IPR relationship, for example, WELLPI, FETKOVICH,
IFPPSSE, and so on.
 All subcodes are optional.

PWSTATIC= or  Reservoir layer (Static bottom hole) pressure (bara or psia). This can
PRESSURE= also be defined on the selected IPR maincode, in which case it may
be omitted from LAYER. If supplied on both, the one on the IPR will
be used.

TEMPERATURE= Reservoir layer temperature (F or C). This should be the same as the
ambient temperature on the node, and is therefore unnecessary.

USE= or FLUIDNAME= Name of a Black Oil or Compositional fluid, as previously defined with
BEGIN FLUID (p.593) . Exclusive with PVTFILE=.

PVTFILE= Name of an existing .PVT file defining a compositional fluid. Exclusive

with USE=.

INJECT= Controls if the a layer will accept fluid injection: can be set to YES or  
NO, default YES.

IPRCURVENAME= Specifies the name of an Inflow Performance and/or Coning curve for 
the Completion, as defined in (a) previous IPRCRV (p.653)
statement(s).

LDORATE= or MDORATE= Specifies a fixed, overriding value for the Specific Inflow Rate in a

or GDORATE= horizontal completion.

calculated Normally
from the supplied thePerformance
Inflow inflow rate of data,
a horwell is
and reservoir 
and wellbore pressure difference. If one of these subcodes is supplied
however, all other data is ignored, and the reservoir inflow rate is
unconditionally set to this value. LDORATE= supplies a Liquid rate
(bbl/day/ft or m3/day/m); GDORATE= supplies a gas rate (mmscf/day/
ft or mmsm3/day/m), MDORATE= supplies a mass rate (lb/sec/ft or 
Kg/sec/m).

Keyword Index 
659
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 677/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

EXECUTE= For use with IPRCURVENAME=. If the supplied curve specifies a

complete Inflow Performance relationship, this subcode can be used
to render it executable.

PERMCURVENAM= or  Specifies the name of an Oil/Water Relative Permeability table or 
PERMCRVNAME= curve for the completion, as defined in (a) previous PERMCRV
(p.660) statement(s).

SATURATION= For use with PERMCURVENAME=. Allows the reservoir saturation

value to be specified. This results in the calculation of the watercut of 
the produced fluid. If absent, the specified fluid watercut is used, and
reservoir saturation calculated from it.

HBALANCE= or ROUTE= Specifies the thermodynamic route for calculation of temperature/

enthalpy change consequent upon the DP across the completion. May
be set to ISENTHALPIC, for constant enthalpy (the default), or 
ISOTHERMAL, for constant temperature.

Examples

Example 1
This is a simple layer and point completion such as might appear as part of a larger multi-completion
model:

LAYER temp = 220 use = 'fluid A' label = 'Layer one'

WELLPI pwstatic = 3650 LPI=9.5

Example 2 

This completion includes a coning relationship defined with . IPRCRV (p.653) , which must appear 
first. LAYER follows because it references the curve name defined in the IPRCRV. Finally the selected
IPR, JONES, comes last:

IFPCRV name=cc1 LIQ= (0 ,1000,2000,3000,4000)

IFPCRV name=cc1 GLR= (300 ,300 ,550 ,600 ,620 )
IFPCRV name=cc1 WCUT= (10 ,10 ,18 ,22 ,30 )
IFPCRV name=cc1 GASSG=(.71 ,.71 ,.68 ,.67 ,.669)
LAYER temp=240 F pres=4503 psia use='fluid B' inject=NO IPRCURV=cc1
label='Layer two'
JONES LA=1e-4 LB=3e-2

RESERVOIR
Main-code: RESERVOIR
This maincode is obsolete, please do not use it.

PERMCRV: Curves of Relative Permeability versus Saturation (Optional)

Main-code: PERMCRV

Keyword Index 
660 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 678/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The PERMCRV statement is an alternative to PERMTAB (p.661) . Both these statements allow a
table/curve of oil/water relative permiability to be entered as a function of water saturation. They differ 
in the format of the statements: PERMTAB allows a tabular data entry format using multiple
statements, whereas PERMCRV offers subcodes that accept PIPESIM's multiple value syntax
(p.563). PERMCRV requires the curve to be given a name that can be referenced in one or more

subsequent completions.
NAME= Required. Defines the name of the curve. This name is then used on (a) subsequent LAYER
statement(s).

SAT= Water Saturation in the reservoir, as a ratio 0 to 1.

OIL= Oil relative permeability, as a ratio 0 to 1.

WAT= Water relative permeability, as a ratio 0 to 1.

The complete definition of a curve requires all subcodes to be specified, but they may be spread over 
2 or 3 statements that reference the same curve name. NAME= must appear on all statements.

Example
This example shows a table containing the same data as the example given for PERMTAB
(p.661) :

PERMCRV name=pc1 SAT = (0.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3 , 0.4 , 0.5 , 0.6, 0.7 , 0.8 ,
0.9 , 1 )
PERMCRV name=pc1 OIL = (0.9, 0.9, 0.9, 0.6 , 0.43, 0.35 , 0.2, 0.13, 0.07,
0 , 0 )
PERMCRV name=pc1 WAT = (0.0, 0.0, 0.0, 0.05, 0.1 , 0.125, 0.2, 0.33, 0.44,
0.44, 0.44)
layer PERMCURV=pc1 temp = 185 F use = oil44 inject=no label = 'strat bk'
ifppsse pwstatic = 4269 psia perm = 200 md thickness = 50 ft &
rade = 2000 ft skin = 2 diamwell = 5 in

PERMTAB: Tabulation of Relative Permeability versus Saturation (Optional)

Main-code: PERMTAB
The PERMTAB statement is an alternative to PERMCRV. (p.660) Both statements allow entry of a
table of oil and water relative permeability against water saturation, in a different format.
Each PERMTAB statement holds a single data point. To complete the tabulation, at least four 
statements are required. PERMTAB does not define an IPR relationship, it should only be used in
addition to the IFPPSSE maincode. If provided with any other IFP maincode it will be ignored.
Values should be provided without keywords in a strict positional order, as follows:

value 1 Water Saturation in the reservoir, as a ratio 0 to 1.

value 2 Oil relative permeability, as a ratio 0 to 1.

value 3 Water relative permeability, as a ratio 0 to 1.

Keyword Index 
661
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 679/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Notes:
1. The PERMTAB table should be provided in the system profile immediately before the IFPPSSE
maincode.

2. No other maincode should appear in the body of the table

3. Values should be provided in increasing order of Water Saturation
4. If your model contains multiple completions, 2 or more PERMTAB tables can be used to enter 
data for each completion.

Example
This example shows a table containing the same data as the example given for PERMCRV (p.660) :

! wsat oil rp water rp

permtab 0.0 0.9 0.0
permtab 0.1 0.9 0.0
permtab 0.2 0.9 0.0
permtab 0.3 0.6 0.05
permtab 0.4 0.43 0.1
permtab 0.5 0.35 0.125
permtab 0.6 0.2 0.2
permtab 0.7 0.13 0.33
permtab 0.8 0.07 0.44
permtab 0.9 0.0 0.44
permtab 1.0 0.0 0.44
layer temp = 185 F use = oil44 inject=no label = 'strat bk'
ifppsse pwstatic = 4269 psia perm = 200 md thickness = 50 ft &
rade = 2000 ft skin = 2 diamwell = 5 in

HVOGEL (Optional)
Main-code: HVOGEL

PWSTATIC=

 AOFP= Absolute open flow potential

RF= Recovery factor  

FORCHHEIMER (Optional)
Main-code: FORCHHEIMER
see the JONES (p.648) maincode.

FRACTURE: Data for Hydraulic Fracture

Main-code: FRACTURE
This maincode specifies that the mechanical and dynamic skin factors are to be calculated from the
details of the well fracture configuration provided. Note: The fracture options are only valid when used

Keyword Index 
662 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 680/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

in conjunction with the Pseudo-Steady-State or Transient equations (as defined under the IFPPSSE
and TRANSIENT main-codes).
The FRACTURE maincode is an alternative to the WCOPTION maincode, WCOPTION (p.650), and
is exclusive with it.

PERMEABILITY= Average fracture permeability (md).

WIDTH= Average fracture width (feet or metres).

LENGTH= Fracture half-length (feet or metres).

RESAREA= Reservoir area (square feet or square metres).

TRANSIENT= Controls the Transient option. May be set to ON or OFF. Default OFF.

POROSITY= Reservoir porosity (dimensionless, a value between 0 and 1.) Ignored unless
TRANSIENT=ON.

COMPRESS= Reservoir compressibility (1/psi or 1/Bar). Ignored unless TRANSIENT=ON.

TIME= Elapsed time since start of production (hours). Ignored unless TRANSIENT=ON.

CONDUCTIVITY=

See also Hydraulic Fracturing (p.56).

TRANSIENT: Data for the Transient Inflow equation (Optional)

Main-code: TRANSIENT

PWSTATIC= Static bottom hole pressure (bara or psia). This is the bottom hole
pressure at zero flow rate.
PERMEABILITY= Average formation permeability (md).

THICKNESS= Average formation thickness (metres or feet) .

RADEXTERNAL= Radius of external boundary of drainage area (metres or feet).

Default = 609.6 m or 2000 ft.

SKIN= Dimensionless skin factor. Default = 0.

DIAMWELLBORE= Wellbore diameter (inches or mm).

FLOWTYPE= Type of flow in well.

LIQ Liquid flow

GAS Gas flow

GASMETHOD=

Keyword Index 
663
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 681/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PSEUDO Use pseudo pressure

SQUARED Use pressure squared

SOURCE=

ST Use the stock tank flow formulation of the transient IPR equation
(default)

RES Use the reservoir flow formulation of the transient IPR equation

BPCORRECTION= Allows user to choose whether to apply the Vogel correction below
the bubble point.

ON Applies Vogel correction.

OFF Does not apply Vogel correction.

PICOEFFICIEN= Vogel coefficient for Vogel correction. Default = 0.8.

DSKINLIQUID= Dynamic skin for liquid phase. Default = 0.

DSKINGAS= Dynamic skin for gas phase. Default = 0.

DRAINAGESKIN=

POROSITY= Porosity of the reservoir, fraction (0 - 1)

COMPRESSIBIL= Total system compressibility (1/psi or 1/bar).

TIME= Time since the well started to flow, hours.

SWAPTOPSS=

ON

OFF

5.5 HEAT TRANSFER DATA

HEAT (p.665) Heat Balance Options
COAT (p.668) COAT Pipe Coat and Annular Space Medium Data

TCOAT (p.669) Pipe Coat Thickness Data

KCOAT (p.670) Pipe Coat Thermal Conductivity Data
KFLUID (p.672) Fluid Thermal Conductivity Data
CONFIG (p.673) Configuration Data
Pipeline burial depth examples (p.674)

Keyword Index 
664
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 682/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.5.1 Notes on Heat Transfer Output Printing

1. Normally heat transfer input and output data is invoked by using: PRINT (p.583) HINPUT
HOUTPUT (See Section 1)
2. The radial temperature profile of coatings surrounding the pipe can be printed by invoking: PRINT
(p.583) EXTRA=TGRAD
3. Details of convective heat transfer calculations can be printed by invoking: PRINT (p.583)
EXTRA=CONVx where 'x' can be either 1, 2, 3, or 4 representing coats 1 to 4 respectively. Note
that details can only be obtained for 1 coat in each PIPESIM case performed.

5.5.2 HEAT Heat Balance Options (Optional)

Main-code: HEAT

BALANCE= OFF No heat balance is performed and the fluid temperature is

set equal to the ambient (or local ground) temperature as
specified in the system profile under the NODE main-code.

ON A heat balance is performed (default).

U= CALC Calculate heat transfer coefficients from data supplied in this

section.

INPUT Heat transfer coefficients are to be read from the NODE

cards (default).

HTCRD= Heat Transfer Coefficient Reference Diameter (in or mm).

This value will be used as the reference diameter (instead
of the current Pipe Outside Diameter) for all Heat Transfer 
Coefficients
(p.583) page.printed in the Heat Transfer Output Data

IFCMODE= INPUT Controls whether a separate Inside Film Coefficient (IFC) is

calculated when U values are supplied on NODE statements
(U=INPUT, see above). May be set to INPUT or CALC.
INPUT means the U supplied on the Nodes is assumed to
include the IFC; CALC means it does not, so IFC will be
calculated separately and added (using the correct
reciprocal formula) to the supplied U.(If INPUT is used, the
IFC is calculated, but not added; the calculated value is
compared to the supplied U, and if grossly smaller, will
trigger the production of a warning message.) Applies only
if U=INPUT. Default=INPUT.

CALC IFC is calculated and added to the supplied U value.

SPIFCMETHOD= Single phase fluid Inside Film Coefficient (HFI) correlation.

To be used in conjunction with MPIFCMETHOD= .If the flow

Keyword Index 
665 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 683/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

conditions are single phase then the PIPESIM engine uses

this correlation. The default method is BJA.

SEIDERTATE Seider and Tate

ORIGINAL Original

VOLAVERAGE Kreith eqn 8-20 (Vol Ave.)

KREITH10 Kreith eqn 10-6

GH9 Groothuis & Hendal eqn 9

GH10 Groothuis & Hendal eqn 10

BJA BJA (Kreith eqn 8-20)

SHELL Shell

BP Bp
MPIFCMETHOD= Multiphase Inside Film Coefficient (HFI) correlation method
that is used in conjunction with SPIFCMETHOD=. If the flow
conditions are multiphase then the PIPESIM engine uses
this correlation. The default method is BJA.

KAMINSKY Kaminsky

ORIGINAL Original

VOLAVERAGE Kreith eqn 8-20 (Vol Ave.)

KREITH10 Kreith eqn 10-6

GH9 Groothuis & Hendal eqn 9

GH10 Groothuis & Hendal eqn 10

BJA BJA (Kreith eqn 8-20)

SHELL Shell

BP Bp

HOLDUP= IFC depends on holdup

ON

OFF Default

TRMIN=

TRMAX

Keyword Index 
666 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 684/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

WAX= Wax calculation mode.

PARTBURYMETH= Partial burial calculation method

2009 2009 Method

2000 2000 Method

1983 1983 Method

MASTER= Enthalpy is master.

TEMPERATURE

ENTHALPY

UVALUE=

RAMEYMETHOD= The Ramey heat transfer calculation method for tubings.

OFF Heat transfer coefficients for tubing are to be read from the
NODE cards (default).

LARGETIME Heat transfer coefficients are to be calculated for tubing

using the Ramey model (p.72) (for times greater than 168
hr). Note that the time is specified via OPTIONS subcode
RAMEYTIME.

GRNDCP= Ground specific heat capacity (default = 837.4 J/kg/K or 0.2

Btu/lb/oF) used in the Ramey model.

GRNDDEN= Ground density (default = 2242.6 kg/m 3) or 140lb/ft3) used

in the Ramey model.

DHEQUATION= Energy equation to calculate temperature changes in pipe

flow.

2009 Rigorous energy equation taking into account elevation,

friction and heat loss.

1983 Simplified energy equation.

Heat transfer mode

There are three heat transfer modes to select from:
1. No heat balance is performed and the fluid temperature is set equal to the ambient (or local ground)
temperature as specified in the system profile under the NODE main-code.
2. A heat balance is performed using overall heat transfer coefficients input under the NODE main-
code. Note: This is the default option. So, if the HEAT main-code is omitted, the program will
perform a heat balance and expect heat transfer coefficients to be entered under the NODE

Keyword Index 
667 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 685/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

maincode. If the program fails to find a 'U' value on the first node card an input data error will be
generated.
3. A heat balance is performed using heat transfer coefficients calculated by the program from the
data specified in this section.

5.5.3 COAT Pipe Coat and Annular Space Medium Data (Optional)
Main-code: COAT
The COAT statement allows the data for pipe coating or annular space thickness, conductivity and
medium to be specified for a single coat or annular space. For multiple coats, additional COAT
statements may be provided, up to a maximum of 26. COAT is an alternative to the TCOAT and
KCOAT statements, they both allow the same information to be entered.

NUMBER= The coat or annular space number to be specified. Coat 1 is the innermost
coat. Must be an integer between 1 and 26

THICKNESS= Coating or annular space thickness (ins or mm, default zero). All coats are
assumed to be of zero thickness until specified with a positive thickness
CONDUCTIVITY= , K= Coat thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF, default infinite). Exclusive
with MEDIUM=.

MEDIUM= The name of the fluid medium contained in the annular space. This must
match the core portion of a filename with the extension .APF in the PIPESIM
installation's data directory. Default available filenames to specify typical
annular fluids are provided, these are as documented for the KCOAT
statement. Exclusive with CONDUCTIVITY=.

PRESSURE= The average pressure in the annular space (psia or Bar, default 1000 psia).

LABEL=, NAME= The name of the coat or space.

U= The overall heat transfer coefficient for this coat (W/m2/K or Btu/hr/ft2/ oF).
This value will be used instead of any calculated value. The reference
diameter for this will be the pipe outside diameter, that is the junction
between the pipe and the first coat, this can be changed using the RD=
subcode below.

RD= The Reference Diameter to be used for the U= subcode provided above (in
or mm).

RESETALL Specifies that information

new coatings all previousto
coatings information
be supplied be reset toCOAT
with subsequent zero. This allows
(or TCOAT
and KCOAT) statements without risk that earlier higher-numbered coats will
be remembered.

Note:  As with other data, any coat thickness data specified at a particular node will automatically be
carried forward to subsequent nodes unless altered or reset to zero thickness. A coat can be removed

Keyword Index 
668 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 686/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

(effectively) by specifying its thickness as zero. This will not affect the properties of higher-numbered
coats. All coats can be removed by use of the RESETALL subcode.

Example
PIPE ID=5.25 thickness =.375 K = 56.4
COAT resetall
COAT num = 1 thickness = 3 medium=brine name='brine-filled annulus'
COAT num = 2 thickness = 0.5 K = 50 name='casing 1'
COAT num = 3 thickness = 2 medium=gas65 name='gas filled annulus'
COAT num = 4 thickness = 0.5 K = 50 name='casing 2'
COAT num = 5 thickness = 3 K = 3.5 name='cement'

Note:  All keywords can be entered using the EKT (p.84).

5.5.4 TCOAT Pipe Coat Thickness Data (Optional)

Main-code: TCOAT
The TCOAT and KCOAT main-codes are used to specify up to ten concentric pipe coatings for use
in the heat transfer calculations. This data is only required if U=CALCULATE is specified with the
HEAT (p.665) main-code. Note that the pipe thickness is specified under the PIPE (p.636) main-code.

TPIPE= Thickness of pipe (default = 0.0 mm or in).

TWAX= Thickness of wax (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T1= Thickness of coat 1 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T2= Thickness of coat 2 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T3= Thickness of coat 3 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T4= Thickness of coat 4 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T5= Thickness of coat 5 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T6= Thickness of coat 6 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T7= Thickness of coat 7 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T8= Thickness of coat 8 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T9= Thickness of coat 9 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

T10= Thickness of coat 10 (default = 0.0 mm or in).

Keyword Index 
669
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 687/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note:  As with other data, any coat thickness data specified at a particular node will automatically be
carried forward to subsequent nodes unless altered or reset to zero.

5.5.5 KCOAT Pipe Coat Thermal Conductivity Data (Optional)

Main-code: KCOAT

KPIPE= Pipe thermal conductivity (default = 60.6 W/m/ oK or 35 Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

K1= Coat 1 thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

K2= Coat 2 thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

K3= Coat 3 thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

K4= Coat 4 thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

KWAX=

Note: The default value for coat thermal conductivities is infinity (effectively), which means that the
default thermal resistance is effectively zero.

The sub-codes described here are utilized in the modeling of convective heat transfer within fluid filled
annuli.

F1= The name of the data file in which annular fluid properties for Coat No. 1 are stored.

F2= The name of the data file in which annular fluid properties for Coat No. 2 are stored.
F3= The name of the data file in which annular fluid properties for Coat No. 3 are stored.

F4= The name of the data file in which annular fluid properties for Coat No. 4 are stored.

P1= Average pressure in Coat No. 1 (default = 1,000 psia / 70 bara)

P2= Average pressure in Coat No. 2 (default = 1,000 psia / 70 bara)

P3= Average pressure in Coat No. 3 (default = 1,000 psia / 70 bara)

P4= Average pressure in Coat No. 4 (default = 1,000 psia / 70 bara)

Convective (Fx) and conductive (Kx) coatings can be specified in any sequence desired. The example
below illustrates the modeling of a riser within a gas filled caisson which is insulated on the outside
with 0.5" neoprene. Physical properties for the gas contained within the caisson will be read from the
file 'GAS65.APF'.

Keyword Index 
670 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 688/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Note: The Fx and Kx subcodes for any coating are mutually exclusive. Calculated convective heat
transfer coefficients are printed to the HOUTPUT page as normal. In addition an equivalent thermal
conductivity is calculated from the convective heat transfer coefficient and printed to the relevant
position in the HINPUTpage.

Files
BJA have prepared data files for the most common annular fluids such as natural gas, brine, mud
and so on. These files are located in the PIPESIM data directory. The files currently available are
listed below together with a brief description of the file contents.

File Name Contents

wbm.apf Properties of a typical water based mud

obm.apf Properties of a typical oil based mud

gas65.apf Properties of a 0.65 S.G. gas

brine.apf Properties of a typical brine

 Annular property data files are written in a simple to understand text file format to enable users to edit
files or create their own if required.

Example
The example below illustrates the table format.

Note:  A column containing line numbers is not part of the file.

Line 1 Specification of file format. Should not be modified

Line 2 Title line. May be modified as necessary

Line 3 Specifies the number of properties to be read

Line 4 Format in which lines are to be read. Should not be modified

Lines 5 - 10 Identifies the properties contained in the file and the order in which they are arranged.
Note that this order is fixed and cannot be changed by the user. The two columns of 
numbers contain
units specified the file
in the conversion factors
to standard necessary
PIPESIM to convert
SI units. Columnthe propertythe
1 contains from the
additive
conversion factor whilst column 2 contains the multiplying factor. This specification
allows users to specify data in different units as required.

Line 11 Should not be modified.

Line 12 - 29 Contains the necessary physical property data in the sequence specified in Lines 5 -
10. Columns 1 & 2 contain the pressure and temperature to which the physical property

Keyword Index 
671
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 689/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

data relates. Note that the maximum number of pressure and temperature points
permitted within a file is 20.

Line 30 Identifies the end of file.

Example File: BRINE.APF

ANPROP-1.0 LINEAR TABLE-1 ,A, 0, 0, NOGO
JOB : WATER TEST-1
6
(7f11.0)
Pressure PSIA 0. 6.894730
Temperature F 255.3722 .5555555
Liquid Density LB/FT3 0. 16.01800
Liquid Viscosity cP 0. 1.000000
Liquid conductivity BTU/hrftF 0. 1.730104
Liquid Heat Capacity BTU/LBF 0. 4.186800
NEWLINE, SCALE, CONT
14.7 50 62.4 0.880 .332 1.000
14.7 60 62.3 0.760 .340 0.999
14.7 70 62.3 0.658 .347 0.998
14.7 80 62.2 0.578 .353 0.998
14.7 90 62.1 0.514 .359 0.997
14.7 100 62.0 0.458 .364 0.998
14.7 150 61.2 0.292 .384 1.000
14.7 200 60.1 0.205 .394 1.000
14.7 400 53.8 0.001 .394 1.000
1000 50 62.4 0.880 .332 1.000
1000 60 62.3 0.760 .340 0.999
1000 70 62.3 0.658 .347 0.998
1000 80 62.2 0.578 .353 0.998
1000 90 62.1 0.514 .359 0.997
1000 100 62.0 0.458 .364 0.998
1000 150 61.2 0.292 .384 1.000
1000 200 60.1 0.205 .394 1.000
1000 400 53.8 0.001 .394 1.000
composition

Typical Thermal Conductivities (p.528) in W/m/K (Solids) Thermal Conductivities (p.528) in W/m/K
(Liquids and Gases)

Note:  All keywords can be entered using the EKT (p.84).

5.5.6 FLUID Fluid Thermal Conductivity Data (Optional)

Main-code: KFLUID
The fluid thermal conductivities are used in the calculation of the pipe internal film heat transfer 
coefficients. Default values are supplied and should be adequate for most cases.

OIL= Oil thermal conductivity (default = 0.138 W/m/K or 0.08 Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

GAS= Gas thermal conductivity (default = 0.035 W/m/K or 0.02 Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

Keyword Index 
672 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 690/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

WATER= Water thermal conductivity (default = 0.605 W/m/K or 0.35 Btu/hr/ft/ oF).

Note:  All keywords can be entered using the EKT (p.84).

5.5.7 CONFIG: Pipe Heat Transfer Configuration Data (Optional)

Main-code: CONFIG
This data is only required if U=CALCULATE is specified under the HEAT main-code and if near-
surface horizontal or near-horizontal pipe is being considered. For pipe or tubing situated away from
the influences of air and seawater the CONFIG card is not required.

DEPTH= The burial depth (in mm or inches) as measured from the ground surface or mudline
to the center-line of the pipe. A negative burial depth implies that the pipe center-line
is above the surface and the pipe is therefore partially buried or fully exposed. Default
is Fully Buried at depth of 800 feet.

KGROUND= Ground thermal conductivity (W/m/K or Btu/hr/ft/F).

VAIR= Ambient air velocity. Used to calculate the outside film heat transfer coefficient
(Default = 0.033 m/s or 0.1 ft/s). Exclusive with VWATER=.

VWATER= Ambient water velocity. Used to calculate the outside film heat transfer coefficient.
(Default = 0.033 m/s or 0.1 ft/s). Exclusive with VAIR=.

WDENS= Ambient water density. (lb/ft3 or kg/m3).

WVISC= Ambient water viscosity. (cP)

WCP= Ambient water specific heat capacity. (btu/lb/F or KJ/Kg/C)

WK= Ambient water thermal conductivity. (btu/ft2/ft/F or KJ/m2/m/C)

WBETA= Ambient water coefficient of thermal expansion.

 ADENS= Ambient air density. (lb/ft3 or kg/m3)

 AVISC= Ambient air viscosity.(cP)

 ACP= Ambient air specific heat capacity. (btu/lb/F or KJ/Kg/C)

 AK= Ambient air thermal conductivity. (btu/ft2/ft/F or KJ/m2/m/C)

 ABETA= Ambient air coefficient of thermal expansion.

TOPDEPTH= The burial depth (in mm or inches) as measured from the surface to the top of the
pipe.

Keyword Index 
673
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 691/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.5.8 Pipeline burial depth examples

For a horizontal pipeline
Z  : burial depth.
D : outside diameter of pipe and coatings

Burial depth Pipe and coatings Exposed to Schematic

air or water 
− D  / 2 > Z   above ground / yes
seabed

Z  = − D  / 2 resting on ground/ yes

seabed

0 > Z   > − D  / 2 partially (less than yes

half) buried

D  / 2 > Z  > 0 partially (more than yes

half) buried

Z  > D  / 2 completely buried no

5.6 Fluid Modeling

5.6.1 BLACK OIL DATA
BLACKOIL (p.675) Black Oil Correlation Options
PROP (p.677) Fluid Property Data
LVIS (p.678) Liquid Viscosity Data

Keyword Index 
674
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 692/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

CPFLUID (p.683) Fluid Heat Capacity Data

JTFLUID (p.683) Joule Thomson Heat Coefficients Data
RATE (p.578) Flow Rate Data
ITERN Iteration Data (Optional) (p.580)
TPRINT (p.684) Black Oil Table Printing
CALIBRATE (p.684) Black Oil Property Calibration
INJGAS and INJFLUID (p.630) Injection Gas and side stream fluid injection
WELLHEAD (p.645) Wellhead Profile Delimiter 
GASLIFT (p.624) Multiple Injection Ports in Gaslifted Wells
INJPORT (p.628) Gas Lift Injection Port
CONTAMINANTS (p.686) Gas contaminants data

BLACKOIL: Black Oil Fluid definitions

Main-code: BLACKOIL
Fluid properties can be generated internally by so called "black oil" correlations which have been
developed by correlating gas/oil ratios for live crudes with various properties, such as oil and gas
gravities. The selected correlation is used to predict the quantity of gas dissolved in the oil at a
particular pressure and temperature.
The black oil correlations have been developed specifically for crude oil/gas/water systems and are
therefore most useful in predicting the phase behavior of crude oil well streams. When used in
conjunction with the calibration options, the black oil correlations can produce accurate phase
behavior data from a minimum of input data. They are particularly convenient in gas lift studies where
the effects of varying GLR and water cut are under investigation.

 A Blackoil fluid must define its stock-tank volume phase split using one of: GLR=, GOR=, OGR=, or 
LGR=, and one of WCUT=, WGR= and GWR=.

Gas saturation (RS) correlations

RSCORR= ELSHARK Elsharkawy

GHETTO de Ghetto

GLASO Glasø (p.464) correlation.

KART Kartoatmodjo

LASATER Lasater (p.465) correlation (default for bubble point pressure and solution
gas).

PETROSK Petrosky-Farshad

STANDING Standing (p.465) correlation (default for oil formation volume factor at the
bubble point)

Keyword Index 
675 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 693/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

VAZBEG Vazquezand Beggs (p.465) correlation (default for oil formation volume
factor above the bubble point).

Gas densities are calculated using a Z-factor correlation developed by Katz (p.546) and Standing
and so the black oil correlations can also be used for single phase gas systems and gas/condensate
systems with more or less constant gas/liquid ratios. However, if the accurate phase behavior 
prediction of light hydrocarbon systems is important, it is recommended that the more rigorous
compositional models is employed.

Gas Compressibility correlation choices

GASZCORR= DPR The Dranchuk, Purvis and Robinson correlation for curve fitting the
Standing- Katz (p.546) reduced pressure-reduced temperature Z-
Factor chart.

GOPAL The Gopal correlation for curve fitting the Standing- Katz (p.546)
reduced pressure-reduced temperature Z-Factor chart.

HALLYAR Hall & Yarborough correlation for curve fitting the Standing- Katz
(p.546) reduced pressure-reduced temperature Z-Factor chart.

STANDING The Standing modification to the Brill and Beggs correlation for curve-
fitting the Standing- Katz (p.546) reduced pressure-reduced
temperature Z-Factor chart.

TSTANDING

Oil Formation Volume Factor correlation choices

OFVFCORR= ELSHARKAWY Elsharkawy

KART Kartoatmodjo

PETROSKY Petrosky

STANDING Standing

VAZBEG Kartoatmodjo

Gas dissolution and saturation in water 

WRSCORR= HPPAC

KATZ

NONE

Gas viscosities are calculated using the Lee et al. (p.547) correlation.
Blackoil fluids that have been previously defined with BEGIN FLUID (p.593) can be selected with the
FLUIDNAME= or USE= subcode.

Keyword Index 
676 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 694/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Stock-tank Phase Ratios

 A Blackoil fluid must define its stock-tank volume phase split using one of: GLR=, GOR=, OGR=, or 
LGR=, and one of WCUT=, WGR= and GWR=. (For historical reasons, these subcodes are also
available on the RATE statement, but you are strongly encouraged to use them here instead. A
compositional fluid can also define them but they must be supplied on the COMPOSITION
statement. ).
GWR= Gas Water ratio at stock-tank conditions. (sm 3/sm 3 or scf/STB)

WGR= Water/gas ratio at stock-tank conditions. (sm 3/mmsm 3 or STB/mmscf).

WCUT= Watercut, i.e. the volume % aqueous phase in the total liquid phase at stock tank conditions.

GLR= Gas/liquid ratio at stock tank conditions. (sm 3/sm 3 or scf/STB).

GOR= Gas/oil Ratio at stock tank conditions. (sm 3/sm 3 or scf/STB).

LGR= Liquid/gas ratio at stock-tank conditions. (sm 3/mmsm 3 or STB/mmscf).

OGR= Oil/gas ratio at stock-tank conditions. (sm 3/mmsm 3 or STB/mmscf).

Care must be exercised in combining these subcodes, as it is possible to specify a value for one of 
them that renders the use of the other one meaningless or illegal: such as with WCUT=100, any value
for GOR= is meaningless; for example, GLR=0 conflicts with any non-zero value for GWR=. It is
however always possible to re-state the desired definition correctly by well-chosen alternative
subcodes.

PROP Fluid Property Data (Optional)

Main-code: PROP

 API= Dead oil API gravity at stock tank conditions (see note 1). Default = 30 API. The
 API gravity is defined as follows: - API = (141.5/sg) - 131.5 where sg is the oil
specific gravity relative to water. Exclusive with DOD=.

DOD= Dead oil density (kg/sm 3 or lb/ft 3) at stock tank conditions (see note 1). Default
= 876 kg/sm 3. Exclusive with API=.

GASSG= Associated gas specific gravity relative to air (MW/28.964) at stock tank
conditions (see note 1). Range 0.55 < GASSG 1.2. Default = 0.64.

CONEDGASSG= Coned gas specific gravity (default: same as associated gas SG as defined with
GASSG=). The coned gas SG will only be used if a coning relationship has been
defined for the completion with CONETAB (p.656) or IPRCRV (p.653). Coning
will result in a mix of associated and coned gas, resulting in a produced gas SG
somewhere between these 2 values.

WATERSG= Water specific gravity at stock tank conditions (see note 1). Default = 1.02.

Keyword Index 
677 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 695/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

STENSION= Specifies the method for calculating Liquid/gas interfacial tension. This allows for 
the possibility of three phase (gas/oil/water) flow where the liquid hydrocarbon
(oil or condensate) flows as a segregated layer on top of the aqueous phase.
Some 2-phase flow correlations (such as BJA and Duns and Ros) take account
of the interfacial surface tension when calculating such parameters as the liquid
wave height. Can be set to MIXED or SEGREGATED, meaning:
MIXED: Surface tension is calculated based on the average properties of the
water and hydrocarbon liquid mixture. This is the default value.

SEGREGATED: Surface tension is calculated based on properties of the

hydrocarbon liquid only. This option should only be used when it is expected that
the liquid hydrocarbon and aqueous phases will be segregated, for example, long
pipelines operating in the stratified flow regime.

GSAT= The quantity of gas which would dissolve in the oil, and saturate it, at a given
pressure and temperature (sm3/sm3 or scf/bbl) (see note 2).

PSAT= The saturation pressure for GSAT= (bara or psia) (see note 2).

TSAT= The saturation temperature for GSAT= ( oC or oF) (see note 2).

PSEP= The separator pressure used by Kartoatmodjo (etc) correlations

TSEP= The separator temperature used by Kartoatmodjo (etc) correlations

Notes:
1. The oil, water and gas properties should be entered at stock tank conditions, that is 14.7 psia and
o
60 F .
2. The oil saturated gas content at a known temperature and pressure (for example at reservoir 
conditions) should be entered to allow calibration of the black oil model. Such calibration will
significantly improve the accuracy of the predicted gas/liquid ratios. If the calibration data is omitted
the program will calibrate the correlation on the basis of oil and gas gravity alone and there will
be a consequent loss in accuracy. Note, the value of GSAT= is independent of any GLR= or GOR=
supplied on the BLACKOIL statement

LVIS: Liquid Viscosity Data (Optional)

Main-code: LVIS

DOVCORR= Specifies the choice of Dead Oil Viscosity correlation.

USER or BEAL Dead oil viscosity will be calculated by fitting two

measured values of viscosity versus temperature to
Beal's chart. Use with TEMP1=, TEMP2=, VIS1= and
VIS2=. PIPESIM will fit a curve of the form

Keyword Index 
678 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 696/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1
log ( μ ) ∝
T  
through the two given data points and then interpolate
(or extrapolate) to find dead oil viscosities at given
temperatures. Normally you would enter viscosity data
at temperatures close to the expected maximum and
minimum operating temperatures. Entering two
identical temperatures or viscosities will cause an error.

TABLE Dead oil viscosity will be calculated by fitting a table of  

viscosity vs. temperature to Beal's chart. Use with
TEMPS= and VISCS=. See note 1 below

BEGROB Beggs and Robinson (1975). This correlation is

constrained to work within limits as published by the
 API (Petroleum Engineering handbook, Page 22-16),
that is Temperature between 70 and 295 oF, and oil API
gravity between 16 and 58.

GLASO Dead oil Viscosity will be calculated using the

correlation of Glasϕ (1980)

KARTOATMODJO Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt correlation

GHETTO De Ghetto correlation

HOSSAIN Hossain correlation

ELSHARKAWY Elsharkawy correlation

PETROVSKY Petrovsky correlation

LOVCORR= Specifies the choice of Live (gas-saturated) Oil
Viscosity correlation. May be set to one of:

CHEWCON Chew and Connally correlation

BEGROB Beggs and Robinson correlation

KARTOATMODJO Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt correlation

KHAN Khan correlation

GHETTO De Ghetto correlation

HOSSAIN Hossain correlation

ELSHARKAWY Elsharkawy correlation

PETROVSKY Petrovsky correlation

Keyword Index 
679
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 697/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

UOVCORR= Specifies the choice of Undersaturated Oil Viscosity

correlation. May be set to one of:

VAZBEG Vasquez and Beggs correlation (default)

KOUZEL Kouzel
KA= andcorrelation. Coefficients are supplied with the
KB= subcodes.

KARTOATMODJO Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt correlation

KHAN Khan correlation

GHETTO De Ghetto correlation

HOSSAIN Hossain correlation

ELSHARKAWY Elsharkawy correlation

BERGMAN Bergman and Sutton correlation

PETROVSKY Petrovsky correlation

NONE Undersaturated oil viscosity calculation will be omitted,

oil viscosity will be set to the result of the Live Oil
viscosity correlation at the minimum of (actual and
bubble point) pressure.

EMULSION= Used to select one of various options for the calculation

of oil-water mixture viscosities. The water viscosity
data is generated internally by PIPESIM, using the van
Wingel correlation. Generally speaking, at water cuts
less than approximately 60% water (by volume), the oil
phase is continuous with the water phase distributed.
Under these conditions some oil-water mixtures can
form highly viscous water-in-oil emulsions, particularly
at water cuts in the range of 30-50%. Emulsion
viscosities many times higher than that of either the oil
or water are not uncommon. At water cuts above 60%,
water is usually the continuous phase and the resulting
oil-in-water emulsion has a viscosity similar to that of 
water. Used in conjunction with the CUTOFF=
subcode.

SWAP The mixture viscosity equals the oil viscosity at water  

cuts less than or equal to cutoff % and equals the water 
viscosity at water cuts greater than cutoff % (default).

VOLRATIO The mixture viscosity equals the volume ratio of the oil
and water viscosities.

Keyword Index 
680 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 698/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

WLOOSE Use Woleflin "Loose Emulsion" correlation at watercuts

below the cutoff, set to water viscosity above.

WMEDIUM Use Woleflin "Medium Emulsion" correlation at

watercuts below the cutoff, set to water viscosity
above.
WTIGHT Use Woleflin "Tight Emulsion" correlation at watercuts
below the cutoff, set to water viscosity above.

WORIG Use PIPESIM original woleflin loose emulsion

correlation at watercuts below the cutoff, set to water 
viscosity above.

TABLE Emulsion viscosities are interpolated from the table

supplied with the EWCUTS= and EVISCS= subcodes.
See note 1 below.

BRINKMAN Use the Brinkman correlation. This generally predicts

elevated liquid viscosities on either side of the cutoff.

VAND Use the Vand correlation, using Vand's coefficients.

This generally predicts elevated liquid viscosities on
either side of the cutoff.

VANDBARNEA Use the Vand correlation, using Barnea and Mizrahi

coefficients. This generally predicts elevated liquid
viscosities on either side of the cutoff.

VANDUSER Use the Vand correlation, using coefficients supplied

with the K1= and K2= subcodes. This predicts liquid
viscosities on either side of the cutoff. Suitable choice
of coefficients can yield elevated or depressed
viscosities.

RICHARDSON Use the Richardson correlation, using coefficients

supplied with the RKOIW= and RKWIO= subcodes.
This predicts liquid viscosities on either side of the
cutoff. Suitable choice of coefficients can yield elevated
or depressed viscosities.

LEVITON Use the Leviton and Leighton correlation. This

generally predicts elevated liquid viscosities on either 
side of the cutoff.

REDAOIW

REDAWIO

REDASWAP

Keyword Index 
681
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 699/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

 ABPCORR=

ON

OFF

ORDER=

UCORR=

TEMP1= Temperature 1 for DOVCORR=USER. (Default = 93.3

oC/200 oF)

VIS1= Oil viscosity at temperature 1 for DOVCORR=USER.

(Default = 0.5 centipoise)

TEMP2= Temperature 2 for DOVCORR=USER. (Default = 15.6

oC / 60 oF).

VIS2= Oil viscosity at temperature 2 for DOVCORR=USER.

(Default = 10 centipoise).

VISCS= List of oil viscosities for DOVCORR=TABLE, in Multiple

Value format. See note 1.

TEMPS= List of temperatures for DOVCORR=TABLE, in

Multiple Value format. See note 1.

CUTOFF= or  The value of watercut where Phase Inversion occurs.

BOUNDARY= In an oil-water mixture at low watercuts, water droplets
are carried dispersed in a continuous oil phase. At
much higher watercuts, water is the continuous phase
and oil droplets are dispersed in it. The CUTOFF is the
watercut where the continuous phase changes. It is
used by the Emulsion subcode, see above. (%, default
60)

PRESSURES=

FLTYPES=

LIVEOIL

DEADOIL
EWCUTS= List of Watercuts for EMULSION=TABLE, in Multiple
Value format. The first watercut value in the table must
be zero. See note 1.

EVISCS= List of oil viscosities for EMULSION=TABLE, in

Multiple Value format. The first viscosity value in the

Keyword Index 
682 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 700/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

table is used to divide into all the others to yield

multipliers. See note 1.

K1= or VANDK1= Coefficient k1 for use in the VANDUSER correlation,

default 2.5

K2= or VANDK2= Coefficient k2 for use in the VANDUSER correlation,

default 0.609

RK= or 
KRICHARDSON=

RKOIW= or KROIW= Coefficient k for the RICHARDSON correlation, used

when oil-in-water conditions expected (watercut >
cutoff).

RKWIO= or KRWIO= Coefficient k for the RICHARDSON correlation, used

when water-in-oil conditions expected (watercut <
cutoff).
KA= Value of the A parameter for the Kouzel UOV
correlation, default 0.0239

KB= Value of the B parameter for the Kouzel UOV

correlation, default 0.01638

TPVT= Controls three-point viscosity tuning.

ON

OFF

Note: When using the user-supplied table options (DOVCORR=TABLE and EMULSION=TABLE),
at least 3 and no more than 30 viscosity and (temperature or watercut) values must be supplied. The
values need not be entered in any particular order, but there is a strict one-to-one correspondence
between the values in the subcode pairs. Once read, he values will be sorted in order of increasing
temperature/watercut for use by the engine. Viscosity must never increase with temperature, but may
vary with watercut as desired.

CPFLUID: Fluid Heat Capacity Data (Optional)

Main-code: CPFLUID
Fluid specific heat capacity data is required for the calculation of fluid enthalpies.

OIL= Oil heat capacity. Default = 1.89 kJ/kg/K or 0.45 Btu/lb/ oF.

GAS= Gas heat capacity. Default = 2.31 kJ/kg/K or 0.55 Btu/lb/ oF.

WATER= Water heat capacity. Default = 4.3 kJ/kg/K or 1.0 Btu/lb/ oF.

Keyword Index 
683
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 701/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

HVAP= Latent heat of vaporization. Default = 0.0 kJ/kg or 0.0 BTU/lb

CPFLUID: Fluid Heat Capacity Data (Optional)

Main-code: CPFLUID
Fluid specific heat capacity data is required for the calculation of fluid enthalpies.

OIL= Oil heat capacity. Default = 1.89 kJ/kg/K or 0.45 Btu/lb/ oF.

GAS= Gas heat capacity. Default = 2.31 kJ/kg/K or 0.55 Btu/lb/ oF.

WATER= Water heat capacity. Default = 4.3 kJ/kg/K or 1.0 Btu/lb/ oF.

HVAP= Latent heat of vaporization. Default = 0.0 kJ/kg or 0.0 BTU/lb

TPRINT Black Oil Table Printing (Optional)

Main-code: TPRINT
The TEMPERATURE and PRESSURE sub-codes have been added to the TPRINT main-code to
permit the generation of tables of black oil properties.
Note that the property table is printed for information only and cannot be used as input for subsequent
PIPESIM jobs.

TEMPERATURE= Temperature points at which properties should be tabulated ( oC or oF). A

maximum of 20 points may be specified

PRESSURE= Pressure points at which properties should be tabulated (bara or psia). A

maximum of 20 points may be specified.

The format of the table is similar to that generated for a compositional table, however the properties
tabulated in the table do differ from the compositional case.

Example
In the following example, a table of black oil properties at 5 temperatures and pressures is specified:

TPRINT temp = (400,300, 250, 200, 150)

TPRINT pressure =(3000,2500,2000,1500,1000)

Note:  All keywords can be entered using the EKT (p.84).

CALIBRATE: Black Oil Property Calibration (Optional)

In many cases, actual measured values for some properties show a slight variance when compared
with the value calculated by the black oil model. In this situation it is useful to calibrate (or match, or 

Keyword Index 
684
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 702/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

tune) the property using the measured point. PIPESIM uses the known data for the property to
calculate a calibration constant K c as noted below:

Measuredproperty (T  , p )
K c  = Eq. 5.1
Calculatedproperty (T  , p )

This calibration constant is then used to modify all subsequent calculations of the property in question,
that is:

CalibratedValue  = K c  × PIPESIMCalculatedValue  Eq. 5.2

Properties which may be calibrated in this manner are

• Saturated Oil formation volume factor 
• Saturated oil viscosity
• Undersaturated oil formation volume factor 
• Undersaturated oil viscosity
• Gas viscosity
• Gas compressibility factor 

Main-code: CALIBRATE

FVFRN= Measured value for Saturated oil formation volume factor.

TFVFRN= Temperature to which the figure given for FVFRN= refers (oC or oF).

PFVFRN= Pressure to which the figure given for FVFRN= refers (bara or psia).

LOVIS= Measured value for saturated oil viscosity (cP).

TLOVIS= Temperature to which the figure given for LOVIS= refers (oC or oF).

PLOVIS= Pressure to which the figure given for LOVIS= refers (bara or psia).

UFVFRN= Measured value for undersaturated oil formation volume factor.

TUFVFRN= Temperature to which the figure given for UFVFRN= refers (oC or oF).

PUFVFRN= Pressure to which the figure given for UFVFRN= refers (bara or psia).

UOVIS= Measured value for undersaturated oil viscosity (cP).

TUOVIS= Temperature to which the figure given for UOVIS= refers (oC or oF).

PUOVIS= Pressure to which the figure given for UOVIS= refers (bara or psia).

GASZ= Measured gas compressibility factor.

TGASZ= Temperature to which the figure given for GASZ= refers (oC or oF).

Keyword Index 
685 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 703/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PGASZ= Pressure to which the figure given for GASZ= refers (bara or psia).

GVIS= Measured gas viscosity (cP).

TGVIS= Temperature to which the figure given for GVIS= refers (oC or oF).

PGVIS= Pressure to which the figure given for GVIS= refers (bara or psia).

For each property being calibrated all three subcodes that is property, temperature and pressure must
be specified.

Example
The example below supplies calibration values for the saturated oil formation volume factor and
viscosity:

CALIBRATE FVFRN = 1.4 TFVFRN = 250 PFVFRN = 4000

CALIBRATE LOVIS = 0.85 TLOVIS = 275 PLOVIS = 2200

CONTAMINANTS Gas phase contaminants data (optional)

Main-code: CONTAMINANTS
Gas Compressibility Factor may be corrected for the presence of non hydrocarbon impurities. These
must be measured as mole fractions (i.e. a value between 0 and 1) of the gas phase at stock-tank
conditions.

CO2= Mole fraction of CO2 (default zero)

H2S= Mole fraction of H2S (default zero)

N2= Mole fraction of N2 (default zero)

H2= Mole fraction of H2 (default zero)

CO= Mole fraction of CO (default zero)

The CO2 and H2S values are used to modify the pseudo-critical pressure and temperature (used to
calculate gas compressibility factor) as described in Beggs pages 30-31. The N2 value is used to
adjust the gas compressibility factor as described in McCain page 120.
The Black Oil model treats contaminants as part of the gas phase, and assumes they dissolve in the
oil as pressure increases in the same manner as the hydrocarbon gas components. Thus for any
given fluid, the mole fractions will not vary with pressure, temperature or RS.

5.6.2 COMPOSITIONAL DATA

COMP (p.687) Fluid Data File Specification
TPRINT (p.694) Tabular Data Print Options
RATE (p.578) Flow Rate Data

Keyword Index 
686 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 704/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

AQUEOUS: Aqueous Component Specification

 Also refer to Compositional Modeling (p.127) , COMPOSITION (p.687), LIBRARY (p.691),
PETROFRAC (p.693) and MODEL. (p.692)
 A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The name

of this file can

composition is be referenced
with with the
the LIBRARY, COMPOSITION
PETROFRAC, (p.687)and
AQUEOUS keyword.
MODELAnother way to define a
statements.
The composition consists of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature. The AQUEOUS keyword specifies the unit system in which the aqueous
components will be specified.
Main-code: AQUEOUS

BASIS= Selects the desired units. Can be one of:

MOLAR: Aqueous components are specified in moles
GAS: Aqueous components are specified as WGR in m3/mmsm3
LIQUID: Aqueous components are specified as watercut percent in vol/vol

COMPOSITION: Compositional Fluid Specification

 Also refer to Compositional Modeling (p.127), LIBRARY (p.691), PETROFRAC (p.693),
 AQUEOUS (p.687) and MODEL. (p.692)
 A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The name
of this file can be referenced with COMPOSITION as documented here. (Another way to define a
composition is with the LIBRARY (p.691), PETROFRAC (p.693), AQUEOUS (p.687) and MODEL
(p.692) statements.)
PVT files can also be written by other pr ograms, and can conform to a number of different formats.
PVT files may contain a table of fluid physical properties and phase split at various pressures and
temperatures; this table may be in addition to, or instead of, a fluid composition. (In the absence of 
a composition certain PIPESIM features will not be available; these include fluid mixing ( INJGAS,
INJFLUID (p.630)), separation ( SEPARATOR (p.642)) and the transformation subcodes described
below.)
The composition will consist of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature.

The supplied composition may be transformed to match a given stock tank phase split. The subcodes
GLR=, WCUT= and so on allow this predefined composition to be transformed so as to match a
specified phase ratios; this of necessity will change the components' mole fractions. The original
composition must exhibit a phase split at stock-tank conditions that includes some of the phase(s) to
be adjusted.
 An example of few example of composition are below
library name='CARBON DIOXIDE' comp=0.020600

Keyword Index 
687 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 705/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

library name=NITROGEN comp=0.005060

library name=METHANE comp=0.760200
library name=ETHANE comp=0.078500
library name=PROPANE comp=0.039500
library name=ISOBUTANE comp=0.005960
library name=BUTANE comp=0.014400
library name=ISOPENTANE comp=0.004670
library name=PENTANE comp=0.006058
petro name=BPC6 comp=0.007548 tboil=129.29 molwt=0.860E2 sg=0.676
petro name=BPC7 comp=0.010000 tboil=167.09 molwt=0.930E2 sg=0.725
petro name=BPC8 comp=0.010600 tboil=228.29 molwt=0.105E3 sg=0.760
petro name=BPC9 comp=0.006852 tboil=271.49 molwt=0.117E3 sg=0.780

petro name=BP19 comp=0.010400 tboil=359.69 molwt=0.148E3 sg=0.805

petro name=BP27 comp=0.009832 tboil=519.89 molwt=0.212E3 sg=0.835
petro name=BP37 comp=0.001986 tboil=717.89 molwt=0.325E3 sg=0.864
petro name=BP47 comp=0.000794 tboil=876.29 molwt=0.477E3 sg=0.883
model eos=rks bip=oil1 vis=pedersen
aqueous basis=molar 
library name=WATER comp=0.007014

Example of fluid using the default package Multiflash and the RKS equation of state

library name=N2 comp=0.005060

library name=C1 comp=0.760200
library name=C2 comp=0.078500
library name=C3 comp=0.039500
library name=IC4 comp=0.005960
library name=NC4 comp=0.014400
library name=IC5 comp=0.004670
library name=NC5 comp=0.006058
petro name=BPC6 comp=0.007548 tboil=129.29 molwt=0.860E2 sg=0.676
petro name=BPC7 comp=0.010000 tboil=167.09 molwt=0.930E2 sg=0.725
petro name=BPC8 comp=0.010600 tboil=228.29 molwt=0.105E3 sg=0.760
petro name=BPC9 comp=0.006852 tboil=271.49 molwt=0.117E3 sg=0.780
petro name=BP19 comp=0.010400 tboil=359.69 molwt=0.148E3 sg=0.805
petro name=BP27 comp=0.009832 tboil=519.89 molwt=0.212E3 sg=0.835

Keyword Index 
688 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 706/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

petro name=BP37 comp=0.001986 tboil=717.89 molwt=0.325E3 sg=0.864

petro name=BP47 comp=0.000794 tboil=876.29 molwt=0.477E3 sg=0.883
model eos=E300PR2
comp package = PVT_E300
aqueous basis=molar 
library name=H2O comp=0.007014

Example of fluid using the Eclipse 300 flash package and the Peng Robinson 2 equation of state

Main-code: COMPOSITION

FILENAME= or  The name of the data file in which the fluid definition and/or property data
PVTFILENAME= or FILE= tables are stored. The name should be enclosed in quotes if it contains
delimiter characters or spaces.

USE= Optional. The name of the fluid as specified with a BEGIN FLUID
(p.593) block.
LVISFACTOR= A multiplier for adjusting the tabular liquid viscosity data. (Default = 1.0).

CRICONDENBAR= Upper pressure limit (bara or psia) or the two-phase region which is used
to decide the method of interpolation between 100% liquid and 100%
vapor data points. Above this value PIPESIM will assume dense phase
and interpolate the tabular data appropriately. (Default = 0.0)

WCUT= Watercut, that is the volume % aqueous phase in the total liquid phase
at stock tank conditions. See note 1.

GLR= 3 3
Gas/liquid
1. ratio at stock tank conditions (sm /sm or scf/stb). See note

GOR= Gas/oil Ratio at stock tank conditions (sm 3/sm 3or scf/stb). See note 1.

LGR= Liquid/gas ratio (sm 3/mmsm 3or stb/mmscf) .See note 1.

OGR= Oil/gas ratio at stock tank conditions (sm 3/sm 3or stb/mmscf). See note
1.

GWR= Gas/water ratio at stock tank conditions (sm 3/sm 3or scf/stb). See note
1.

WGR= Water/gas ratio (sm 3/mmsm 3or stb/mmscf) .See note 1.

PPMETHOD= Flashing method for Physical Properties prediction: may be 1, 2, or 3.

See note 5 below.

THMETHOD= Flashing method for Temperature-Enthalpy-Entropy balance: may be 1,

2, or 3. See note 5 below.

Keyword Index 
689
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 707/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PRINT Prints a verbose printout of the fluid composition and stock-tank phase
split.

ONECOMPONENT= Controls "one component" behavior. Can be set to ON or OFF (default

is OFF). If enabled, the fluid is assumed to consist entirely of one
component molecule, and hence does not exhibit a classical phase
envelope when graphed on axes of pressure versus temperature. Salient
Examples of such systems are pure water or steam, pure Carbon
Dioxide, pure methane, and so on. Special algorithms must be employed
to ensure accurate results in such systems.

PACKAGE= Selects the desired PVT code package name. It can be one of:
MULTIFLASH: The third party company Infochem supplies the Multiflash
package
SHELL: Shell oil company's proprietary package
PVT_E300: Eclipse 300 PVT package
PVT_DBR: DBR PVT 2-Phase package
PVT_GERG: GERG PVT package
PVT_NIST: NIST REFPROP PVT package

SFLASH_TYPE= Selects the desired flash option when using the SIS-FLASH package.
Can be either: "TWO-PHASE" or "THREE-PHASE".
When selecting the SIS-Flash PVT package, the "TWO-PHASE" option
which can also be set as "TWOPHASE" or "2PHASE" is the PIPESIM
default option from Release 2009.1.

Note:
1. The presence of any of the subcodes GLR=, GOR=, LGR=, OGR=, WCUT=, WGR= or GWR=
causes the supplied composition to be transformed match the specified phase ratios. The fluid is
flashed at stock-tank pressure and temperature, and the resulting phases are re-combined to yield
a new composition.
2. The subcodes GLR=, GOR=, OGR= and LGR= are optional, and mutually exclusive..
3. The subcodes WCUT=, WGR= and GWR= are optional and mutually exclusive
4. Care must be exercised in combining these subcodes, as it is possible to specify a value for one
of them that renders the use of the other one meaningless or illegal: for example with WCUT=100,
any value for GOR= is meaningless; for example GLR=0 conflicts with any non-zero value for 
GWR=. It is however always possible to re-state the desired definition correctly by well-chosen
alternative subcodes.
5. The PPMETHOD= and THMETHOD subcodes control the manner in which Physical properties
are computed. The balance is between speed and accuracy. Each of these subcodes can be set
to the value 1, 2 or 3, which have the following meanings:

Keyword Index 
690 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 708/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• 1: Always Interpolate (fastest). This option uses linear interpolation between physical
properties stored on a predefined grid of temperature and pressure points (default).
• 3: Always Rigorous Flash (slowest). Interpolation never occurs: properties are obtained by
flashing at the required pressure and temperature. This is the slowest, but most accurate,
method.
• 2: Rigorous Flash when close to the Phase Envelope, interpolation elsewhere. This is a
compromise between speed and accuracy, which assumes that properties will change more
rapidly when close to a phase boundary. Interpolation is performed whenever the grid points
comprising a rectangle all show the presence of the same phases. For example if all 4 points
in the rectangle have some oil, some gas, and no water, then we assume the rectangle lies
entirely within the 2-phase region of the hydrocarbon phase envelope, so interpolation is
appropriate. If however one, two or three of the points have no oil, then clearly the hydrocarbon
dew point line crosses the rectangle, so a rigorous flash is required.
PPMETHOD= controls determination of transport Physical properties (PP) These are the values
required to perform the multiphase fluid flow and heat transfer calculations, and include phase
volume fractions, densities, viscosities, heat capacities and surface tensions.
THMETHOD= controls the Temperature-Energy Balance These values are used to maintain the
temperature/enthalpy/entropy balance of the fluid.
In most simulations, for every PP flash that is performed, there are about 5 to 10 TH flashes, thus
the TH flashes will have the greatest effect on speed and run time. The inaccuracies of TH
interpolated flashes are usually minimal.
The speed impact of each choice will obviously depend on the composition, and the phase
behavior in the PT region of interest. As a rough guide, taking the base case as interpolation,
swapping just the PP flashes to "rigorous" will multiply your run time by about 4. With TH flashes
also "rigorous", run time will probably increase at least 20 fold. Use of the 'compromise' choices

will be faster.
For those requiring more accuracy, we have found the "most useful" setting (that is the greatest
increase in accuracy for the smallest effect on performance) to be PPMETHOD=2,
THMETHOD=1..

LIBRARY: Library Component Specification

 Also refer to Compositional Modeling (p.127) , COMPOSITION (p.687), PETROFRAC (p.693),
 AQUEOUS (p.687) and MODEL. (p.692)
 A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The name
of this file can be referenced with the COMPOSITION (p.687) keyword. Another way to define a
composition is with the LIBRARY, PETROFRAC, AQUEOUS and MODEL statements.
The composition consists of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature. The LIBRARY keyword specifies the name and the composition of the
library component..
Main-code: LIBRARY

Keyword Index 
691
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 709/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

NAME= The name of the component in the library

COMPOSITION= The composition (in moles for non aqueous elements and in the unit specified by
the AQUEOUS (p.687) keyword for aqueous elements)

MODEL: Model Properties Specification

 Also refer to Compositional Modeling (p.127) , COMPOSITION (p.687), LIBRARY (p.691),
PETROFRAC (p.693), AQUEOUS (p.687) and MODEL. (p.692)
 A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The name
of this file can be referenced with the COMPOSITION (p.687) keyword. Another way to define a
composition is with the LIBRARY, PETROFRAC, AQUEOUS and MODEL statements.
The composition consists of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature. The MODEL keyword specifies the fluid property model in terms of EOS,
Viscosity model, BIP set, Physical properties method and Temperature-Enthalpy balance method. In
addition, the flash package can be specified. This is a requested package and the engine will try to
honor it if another package has not yet be loaded. To enforce the loading of a specific package, use
the package subcode of the main code COMPOSITION (p.687).
Main-code: MODEL

RKS= optional – Always 0

PR= optional – Always 0

EOS= optional – RKS or PR or CSM or RKSS or CPA or BWRS or CSMA or PVTIPRC or 
PVTIPRC3P or PVTIPRS or PVTIPR3P or E300PR2 or E300PR2C or E300PR3C
or E300SRK2 or E300SRK3 or DBR2PR2C or DBR2PR3C or DBR2SRK2 or 
DBR2SRK3 or GERG-2008 or NIST-DEFAULT.

VISCOSITY= optional – PEDERSEN, PEDERSEN-E, PED-E, LBC, LBC-E, LBC-D, LBCSE,

LBCVR, LBCWOEL. PEDSE, PEDVR, PEDWOEL, SHELL_MODEL

BIP= optional – PVTIDEFAULT, FILE (BIP File), OIL1, OIL2, OIL3, OIL4,
E300_DEFAULT, E300_USERFILE, DBR2_DEFAULT, DBR2_USERFILE,
GERG_DEFAULT, NIST_DEFAULT. See BIP (p.133).

PACKAGE= optional –
MULTIFLASH: The third party company Infochem supplies the Multiflash package
SHELL: Shell oil company's proprietary package
PVT_E300: Eclipse 300 PVT package
PVT_DBR: DBR PVT 2-Phase package
PVT_GERG: GERG PVT package
PVT_NIST: NIST REFPROP PVT package

Keyword Index 
692 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 710/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

PPPACKAGE= optional –
MULTIFLASH: The third party company Infochem supplies the Multiflash package
SHELL: Shell oil company's proprietary package
PVT_E300: Eclipse 300 PVT package
PVT_DBR: DBR PVT 2-Phase package
PVT_GERG: GERG PVT package
PVT_NIST: NIST REFPROP PVT package

PPMETHOD= optional – 1, 2 or 3

THMETHOD= optional – 1, 2 or 3

PETROFRAC: Petroleum Fraction Specification

 Also refer to Compositional Modeling (p.127) , COMPOSITION (p.687), LIBRARY (p.691),
 AQUEOUS (p.687) and MODEL. (p.692)
 A compositional fluid is usually defined with the PIPESIM GUI, and is written to a PVT file. The name
of this file can be referenced with the COMPOSITION (p.687) keyword. Another way to define a
composition is with the LIBRARY, PETROFRAC, AQUEOUS and MODEL statements.
The composition consists of a set of component names, their respective mole fractions, and a
collection of modeling parameters for the phase behavior package. As such it specifies the
composition of the total stream, regardless of any phase split the composition may exhibit at any
pressure and temperature. The PETROFRAC keyword specifies the name, composition and
properties of the petroleum fraction..
Main-code: PETROFRAC

NAME= The name of the petroleum fraction

COMPOSITION= The composition (in moles) — default 0

BPOINT= optional — Boiling Point

MW= optional — The molecular weight

SG= optional — The specific gravity

TCRIT= optional — The critical temperature

PCRIT= optional — The critical pressure

 ACENTRIC= optional — The acentric factor 

VISCOSITY= optional — The reference viscosity

Note: Minimum data requirements for a petrofraction component are for the Multiflash, SIS and
SPPTS flash packages:

Keyword Index 
693
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 711/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1. Either MW and SG
2. BPOINT and SG
3. PCRIT, TCRIT and ACENTRIC

Note: There is no petroleum fraction supported in GERG and NIST. In E300 and DBR, the minimum
data required is the molecular weight (MW)

TPRINT Tabular Data Print Options (Optional)

Main-code: TPRINT

FILE= The name of the fluid data file to be printed (12 characters maximum) which should be
entered in quotes if the string contains delimiter characters. Up to five different files can be
specified. Once a file has been specified it will be printed at the beginning of each case in

the
usejob
theuntil table*printing
wildcard INLINE.is switched off using the NONE sub-code. To print the main fluid,

NONE= Turns the table printing option off. Table printing can produce large amounts of output, so
it is common practice to print the data files in the first case of a job and then insert a TPRINT,
NONE command in the second case to suppress table printing in the subsequent cases.

5.7 PIPESIM OPERATIONS OPTIONS

MULTICASE Introduction and Summary (p.699)
Explicit Subcodes (p.700)
General PurposeSubcodes (p.702)
Combining MULTICASE and CASE/ENDCASE (p.704)
Multiple Case and PS PLOT (p.705)
Reservoir Simulator Tabular Data Interface (p.705)
Changing Profile Data by Assignment (p.707)
ITERN Iteration Data (Optional) (p.580)
Wax Deposition (p.182)

5.7.1 NAPLOT: Nodal Analysis

Main-code: NAPLOT
This maincode, in conjunction with PIPESIM graphics processor PS-PLOT, allows the generation of 
a graph of inflow/outflow curves about the Nodal Analysis point specified with the NAPOINT
maincode.
The '?' - delimiter symbols are like the general purpose ("greek") sub-codes on the MULTICASE
statement. They can be used anywhere in the subsequent profile, and be equated to multiple values

Keyword Index 
694
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 712/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

in the same way as the sub-codes on MULTICASE. For more information see MULTICASE
(p.699).
 All subcodes are optional.

?INFLOW= The inflow sensitivity values. Each value will produce one inflow curve. If omitted,
a single inflow curve will be generated. See note 6.
?INFLOW2= These sub codes may be equated to a range of values, the number of values
?INFLOW3= provided must equal the number provided in the ?INFLOW subcode. The values
provided are selected in step with those on ?INFLOW. See note 6.
?INFLOW4=
?INFLOW5=

?OUTFLOW= The outflow sensitivity values. Each value will produce one outflow curve. If omitted,
a single inflow curve will be generated. See note 6.

?OUTFLOW2= These sub codes may be equated to a range of values, the number of values

?OUTFLOW3= provided
provided must equal the
are selected in number
step withprovided in?OUTFLOW.
those on the ?OUTFLOW
Seesubcode.
note 6. The values
?OUTFLOW4=
?OUTFLOW5=

NINPTS= The number of points to be used to generate each inflow curve (default 20,
maximum 200).

NOUTPTS= The number of points to be used to generate each outflow curve (default 20,
maximum 200).

POUT= The system outlet pressure. This is used to generate the outflow curves. If this
subcode is omitted the system outlet pressure will be obtained from the POUT=
subcode of the ITERN statement. See note 3. (Psia or Bara.)

LIMITIN= This subcode controls the application of any flowrate limit to the inflow curves.
(Flowrate limits are supplied on the MAXLIQ=, MAXGAS= or MAXMASS=
subcodes, or are assumed implicitly from the maximum value on GAS=, LIQ= or 
MASS= subcodes.) Can be set to YES or NO, the default being NO. If YES, the
limit is applied, so the inflow curves will extend to that flowrate limit or to each curve's
natural AOFP (Absolute Open Flow Potential, i.e. the rate at which the operating
point pressure falls to zero), whichever is smaller. If NO, the limit is not applied so
all inflow curves will extend to their natural AOFP..

LIMITOUT= This subcode controls the application of a calculated pressure limit to the outflow
curves. (The pressure limit will be calculated from the maximum pressure occurring
on any of the inflow curves. Note: an explicit pressure limit can also be provided
with the MAXP= subcode, which will take priority.) Can be set to YES or NO, the
default being NO. If the limit is applied, then the outflow curves will extend to the
maximum rate limit supplied or calculated, or to 20% above the maximum pressure
calculated for any of the inflow curves.

Keyword Index 
695 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 713/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

MAXP= The maximum pressure to be used when generating the outflow curves. (Psia or 
Bara.) Default is double the maximum pressure in any of the inflow curves.

MINP= The minimum pressure to be used when generating the inflow curves. (Psia or 
bara). Default is none, so the inflow curves will extend to their AOFP or the specified
flowrate limit.
MAXLIQ= The maximum liquid flow rate to be used when generating the outflow curves. See
notes 2 and 4. (m 3/d or STB/D).

MAXGAS= The maximum gas flow rate to be used when generating the outflow curves. See
notes 2 and 4. (MMm 3/d or MMscf/d).

MAXMASS= The maximum mass flow rate to be used when generating the outflow curves. See
notes 2 and 4. (kg/s or lbs/s).

PRINT= Sets the number of cases for which detailed output will be generated in the output
file: default is 1. This number is applied separately to the inflow, outflow and
operating points, so you actually get 3 times as many cases printed as the value
you supply. Eg. at its default of 1, you will get detailed output for the first inflow point,
the first outflow point, and the first operating point; set it to 5 and you get the first 5
cases of inflow, the first 5 of outflow, and the first 5 operating points.

OPPOINTS= Controls the explicit generation and display of Operating Points. Can be set to YES
or NO, default is YES.
The intersection of one inflow curve and one outflow curve is known as an Operating
Point. Whilst it is possible to infer the system flowrate geometrically from the line
intersections alone, it is more accurate and far safer to calculate the flowrate by
simulating the system end-to-end, which PIPESIM is well designed to do. The
resulting pressure and flow rate is displayed on the Nodal Analysis graph as an
Operating Point. This explicit calculation ensures the inflow and outflow fluid
properties and temperature are identical, thus eliminating the possibility of a
mismatch and consequent error in answer interpretation.
Operating points are generated for each permutation from the lists of inflow and
outflow sensitivity variables, as supplied in the ?INFLOW= and ?OUTFLOW=
subcodes. However, it is possible to set up the sensitivities so that some
combinations are invalid, and these do not result in operating points being
generated and displayed. For example, if you set both inflow and outflow sensitivity
to the fluid watercut, most of the permutations will be invalid, because the fluid at
the intersection cannot have 2 different values for watercut. With Operating point
generation enabled, the valid intersections are clearly distinguishable from the
invalid ones: operating points will only be generated for "valid" combinations.
Sometimes it will happen that the displayed operating point does not coincide with
the geometric intersection. The cause of this will always be that the outflow fluid
properties or temperature do not match that of the operating point. The fact that the
mismatch is evident should be regarded as a feature, not a bug, and should alert
the user to a problem or condition that requires particular caution and attention.

Keyword Index 
696 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 714/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

With operating point generation enabled, the profile plot file will contain valid profile
plots for each operating point: these can be viewed by selecting “Reports > Profile
Plot” in the PIPESIM GUI.

MATCH= This subcode selects the method by which the fluid temperature and composition
is matched between the inflow and outflow curves. Can be set to:
MAXFL: The inflow curve with the maximum AOFP rate is used. All outflow curves
will use the values interpolated from this single inflow curve. (This was the
behaviour in release 2009.1 and earlier, before the operating points were available).
OP: The generated Operating Points are used, along with the appropriate inflow
curve on the low flowrate side. At flowrates higher than the operating points, the
temperature and composition from the highest appropriate operating point is used.
This is the default. If operating point generation is suppressed however (see
OPPOINT= below), the MAXFL method will be used.
OP2: The generated Operating Points are used, along with the appropriate inflow
curve on both sides. This option can cause the outflow curves to exhibit marked
changes in slope at high flowrates, caused by the use of unrealistially low
temperatures interpolated from the high rate inflow curve close to its AOFP.
OFF: matching is turned off. The outflow curves will use the system-defined fluid
properties and inlet temperature.
Matching is important to ensure the fluid temperature/enthalpy and composition are
consistent across inflow and outflow curves. Without it, the intersections or 
operating points between the curves may bear little or no resemblance to physical
reality. The matching is achieved by using the temperatures and composition(s)
from the correct inflow curve or operating point(s) to generate the ones used for the
outflow curves. For example, if the inflow curves are generated from multiple
completions, each of which has a different reservoir fluid, the resulting mixed fluid
composition at the NA point will change at each value of flowrate. The matching
algorithm ensures the temperature and composition are interpolated from the
correct inflow curves and operating points, so as to produce outflow curves that use
an appropriate fluid composition and temperature. Thus each point on the outflow
curve will usually have a unique temperature and composition. Matching is
applicable to both black oil and compositional fluids.

MATCHENTH= Allows the use of Enthalpy, instead of temperature, in the matching (see MATCH=
above). Can be set to YES or NO. The default is NO.

LIQ= A set of stock-tank liquid flow rates to be used when generating the outflow curves.
 A maximum of 200 flow rates may be specified. If omitted, the program will generate
the set of flowrates at run-time. See notes 1, 2, 5 and 6. (m 3/d or STB/D).
GAS= A set of stock-tank gas flow rates to be used when generating the outflow curves.
 A maximum of 200 flow rates may be specified. If omitted, the program will generate
the set of flowrates at run-time See notes 1, 2, 5 and 6. (MMm 3/d or MMscf/d).

Keyword Index 
697 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 715/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

MASS= A set of mass flow rates to be used when generating the outflow curves. A maximum
of 200 flow rates may be specified. If omitted, the program will generate the set of 
flowrates at run-time. See notes 1, 2, 5 and 6. (kg/s or lbs/s).

Notes:
1. If a set of flow rates are supplied with GAS= LIQ= or MASS= subcodes, they will be used to
generate the outflow curves. A maximum of 200 flow rates may be supplied, and the Range Format
can be used. If omitted, then the program will choose the rates for the outflow curves using an
algorithm designed to distribute the points on the curve to best effect. This will result in rates being
clustered close together in areas where the pressure is changing fastest, i.e. in regions of 
maximum slope. Rates will also be generated at the operating points, to make the validity (or 
otherwise) of the curve intersections evident. (The rates used for the inflow curves are always
generated with this algorithm.)
2. The subcodes LIQ=, GAS=, MASS=, MAXLIQ=, MAXGAS=, and MAXMASS= are mutually

exclusive.
3. The pressure iteration is the only valid iterative option when doing nodal analysis, and is only
applicable to the outflow curves. The outlet pressure and the flow rate are known which requires
the calculation of an inlet flowing pressure. POUT can be specified either on the NAPLOT
statement, or the ITERN statement.
4. MAXLIQ=, MAXGAS= and MAXMASS= will also apply to the inflow curves if LIMITINFLOW=YES.
5. The special value "*none" can be used on the LIQ=, GAS= and MASS= subcodes. If used, its
effect is to remove or cancel an existing list of flowrates supplied on a previous statement. An
example of why this might be useful is to override a list of rates supplied by PIPESIM.
6. The multiple values should be supplied enclosed in parenthesis, and separated by commas. A

multi-value
(p.563) range can also be specified. For more information, see Multiple value Data Sets.

5.7.2 NAPOINT System Analysis Point

Main-code: NAPOINT
Use this main-code to specify the required system (nodal) analysis point. NAPOINT divides the profile
into two halves, and effectively runs separate jobs on each half. NAPOINT can be placed anywhere
in the profile.

LABEL=

RESETDATUM=

ON

OFF

Keyword Index 
698 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 716/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.7.3 MULTICASE Introduction and Summary

The MULTICASE card is available to allow the user to set up many PIPESIM cases without having
to enter many CASE and ENDCASE cards. By use of the MULTICASE card, it is possible to specify
multiple values for various flow parameters on one card, rather than repeating cases.

The central idea behind MULTICASE is that its sub-codes can accept more than one value. So if, for 
example, you want to run 8 cases at various different flow rates, then instead of having to append an
extra 7 explicit cases to your input file, a single MULTICASE card can be used to specify all 8 flow
rates, and PIPESIM will execute the 8 separate cases automatically.
If a second multiple-valued subcode is provided, PIPESIM will execute as many separate cases as
are required to combine all the values in each multiple subcode. So, for example, if we had:
Example

MULTICASE LIQ=(10,20,30,40,50,60,70,80) WCUT=(30,60,90)

The result would be 24 cases, representing the combination of all specified flow rates with all specified
water cuts.
There are two distinct classes of sub-code available:
1. Explicit sub codes, such as LIQ=, WCUT, and IPRES are simply duplicates (or duplicate the
function of) sub codes that appear on other main codes, such as RATE and INLET. The important
difference is that they only accept multiple values on the MULTICASE card.
2. General purpose sub codes, such as ?ALPHA and ?BETA, which accept multiple values on the
MULTICASE card and are then used in place of a sub code value further down the input data.
The provision of MULTICASE has allowed other sophisticated PIPESIM features to be built alongside
it, for example the Reservoir Table Interface (p.705) and Well Performance Curve Generation.

General Rules for use with MULTICASE

The following notes apply to all subcodes on MULTICASE. Further restrictions exist for particular sub-
codes and combinations of sub-codes, and these are documented where they arise.
1. The MULTICASE main-code must appear before the first NODE card in the job.
2. Each multiple-valued sub-code can be equated to a maximum of 20 values, separated from one
another by commas, and the whole group enclosed in parentheses.
3. In any job, the maximum number of subcodes containing multiple values is 5.
4. The MULTICASE card cannot be continued: however, 2 or more MULTICASE cards can appear 
sequentially in the input file, thus allowing many sub-codes to be specified.

5. Each sub-code containing

of 80 characters is allowedmultiple valuesenclosed
for all values must appear on a single MULTICASE
in parentheses. The maximumcard.
inputAline
maximum
length
is 140 characters.
6. The MULTICASE card(s) should appear immediately before the first NODE card in the job, except
when greek symbols are used, when the card(s) using the greeks should appear between
MULTICASE and NODE.

Keyword Index 
699
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 717/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

7. MULTICASE was designed to be used instead of explicit extra cases (the CASE and ENDCASE
cards), however both can be used in combination as long as no MULTICASE cards appear in
subsequent explicit cases.
8. When subsequent explicit cases are used with MULTICASE, each subsequent explicit case will
result in another complete set of multiple cases (see Section 8.4 for an example of this). The LIMIT
subcode applies only to the set of multiple cases defined by the MULTICASE card(s), not to the
total number of cases in the job.
9. MULTICASE jobs contain an implied 'loop' structure in the input data. Every line of input between
the MULTICASE card(s) and the beginning of the system profile is scanned at the start at the
beginning of every case, to ensure that any Greek symbols are assigned the correct values. Only
the symbolic information is processed, and any other input is ignored except on the first case.

Multiple Case Specification Card

Main-code: MULTICASE
The subcodes available on the MULTICASE card can be divided into two distinct categories as
outlined in Explicit subcodes (p.700) and general purpose subcodes (p.702) .

5.7.4 Explicit Subcodes

LIQ= ( , ) Gross liquid flow rate values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20
flow rates may be specified (sm 3/d or STB/D).

GLR= ( , ) Gas/liquid ratio values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values

may be specified (sm3/sm3 scf/STB/D). Default = 0.

GAS= ( , ) Gas flow rate values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 flow rates
may be specified. (mmsm3/d or mmscf/d).

LGR= ( , ) Liquid/gas ratio values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values

may be specified. (sm3/d or STB/scf). Default= 0.

GOR= ( , ) Gas/oil ratio values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values may
be specified. (sm 3/sm 3 or scf/STB). Default = 0.

OGR= ( , ) Oil/gas ratio values at stock tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values may
be specified. (sm 3/d or STB/scf). Default = 0. Note that the flow rate may
be expressed either on the basis of the stock tank liquid or gas flow rate.
The LIQ+GLR and GAS+LGR options are therefore mutually exclusive.
 An error will be reported if an invalid combination is entered and program
execution will be terminated.
MASS= ( , ) Mass flow rates for use with compositional cases. A maximum of 20 flow
rates may be specified. (Kg/s or lbs/s).

WCUT= ( , ) Water cut values that is the volume % water in the liquid phase at stock
tank conditions. A maximum of 20 values may be specified. Default = 0.

Keyword Index 
700 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 718/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

WTYPE= ( , ) Alphanumeric sub-code. This describes the type of well under 

consideration that is Injector (INJ) or Producer (PRD). This sub-code is
only required if the WTHP sub-code is used.

WTHP= ( , ) Tubing head pressure values. The definition of tubing head pressure is
dependent on the physical configuration of the well. In the case of a
producer it is the system outlet (last node) pressure, that is tubing head
pressure for a well only, or the separator pressure in the case of a well and
flowline. In the case of an injector it is the system inlet (first node) pressure,
(bara or psia). A maximum of 20 values may be specified. The WTYPE
sub-code must accompany this sub-code.

IPRES= ( , ) Inlet set pressure (bara or psia). This provides a means of specifying the
inlet pressure of a system. The maximum number of values which may be
specified is 20.

OPRES= ( , ) Outlet set pressure (bara or psia). Similar usage to the IPRES sub-code
above. The maximum number of values which may be specified is 20.
XEST= This sub-code does not take multiple values under the MULTICASE
option, but may take a value for iterative cases as defined previously under 
the ITERN card (see Section 2.4). For cases where the inlet or bottom hole
pressures are to be calculated an estimate of the parameter may be made
using the following formula.

Default = well (pipe) vertical length x pressure gradient + WTHP (OPRES)

Pressure 0.0679 bar/m or 0.3 psi/ft for liquid) = 0.0113 bar/m or 0.05 psi/ft (for gas).
gradient =

ITYPE= Iteration Type see ITERN card description.

PRINT= If the MULTICASE option is specified then all output except titles will be
suppressed after the first case. In order to override this 'auto-noprint'
procedure the sub-code PRINT must be included. Care should be
exercised here if a large number of cases are set up as very large
quantities of output can be generated.

LIMIT= This sub-code sets a limit on the number of cases which will be run, and
will abort the job at the start of execution if the number of cases to be run
is greater than this. The default value is ONE, and therefore a limit must
be set by you as a guard against an excessive number of cases being run.

LINE= When using 3 or more Multicase options, this sub-code allows you to
specify which loop controls the line structure. In the absence of a LINE=
sub-code, the innermost loop controls this. Every time the innermost loop
resets to its first value, a new line is started in the Job Plot file. You can
specify the depth of the required controlling loop with the LINE= sub-code.

Keyword Index 
701
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 719/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Notes:
1. Some sub-codes on the MULTICASE card are duplicates, or equivalents of sub-codes on the
ITERN, RATE, and INLET cards (for example the IPRES sub-code is equivalent to the PRES sub-
code on the INLET card and the XEST sub-code serves the same purpose as the one appearing
on the ITERN card ). If such duplicate or equivalent sub-codes are used on both the MULTICASE
card and elsewhere in the same case, then the values supplied on the MULTICASE card will
override the values supplied elsewhere. For example, Here the LASTANSWER sub-code (see
Section 9.1) has been specif ied along with the MULTICASE card. Outlet and Inlet Pressures have
been specified under both the ITERN and INLET cards in addition to being specified under the
MULTICASE card. In such an example PIPESIM will ignore the POUT, TYPE, PRESS and XEST
sub-codes specified under the ITERN and INLET sub-codes and will use IPRESS, OPRESS and
XEST values specified under the MULTICASE card. The LASTANSWER option will be in
operation even though the rest of the sub-codes specified under the ITERN card will be ignored.
2. The sub-codes can be entered in any order.
3. The use of certain sub-codes excludes the use of other sub-codes
a. Flow rate must be defined (with LIQ, GAS or MASS sub-codes) when the WTHP sub-code is
used.
b. The well type must be defined with the WTYPE sub-code when the WTHP sub-code is used.
c. ITYPE, IPRES and OPRES sub-codes exclude the use of the WTHP sub-code .
d. Iteration type must be defined with the ITYPE sub-code when the OPRES sub-code is used
and outlet pressure must be defined under OPRES when the ITYPE sub-code is used.
e. If LIQ, GAS or MASS sub-codes appear on the MULTICASE card then either IPRES or OPRES
may be used but not both.

5.7.5 General Purpose Subcodes

Sub-codes : ?ALPHA, ?BETA, ?GAMMA, ?DELTA, ?EPSILON
The subcodes described here greatly increase the power and flexibility of MULTICASE.
The purpose of the MULTICASE maincode is to allow the user to execute a PIPESIM case for every
combination of a set of input variables. For example, suppose we specify 3 water cuts, 4 flow rates,
5 GLR's and 6 outlet pressures: all possible combinations of these values will result in PIPESIM
executing 360 individual cases, since 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 = 360. The process of selecting every possible
combination of a series of variables is called permutation, and so we often use the verb permute when
describing what the MULTICASE maincode can do.
Five new general-purpose symbolic subcodes have been added, namely: ?ALPHA, BETA, ?
GAMMA, ?DELTA, and ?EPSILON. They are collectively known as Greeks. They can be equated to
multiple values in the same way as other subcodes on MULTICASE. The symbols can then be used
further down the input data in place of any other value. Thus, the greeks behave similarly to symbols
created by the ASSIGN (p.707) maincode.

Keyword Index 
702 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 720/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Examples
In the following example, 3 values of inlet temperature are permuted with 2 values of Gas-Lift GLR
in a well:

Example 1
Example

RATE LIQ=45 GLR=180

MULTICASE ?ALPHA =(210,250,290)
MULTICASE ?BETA=(200, 220)
INLET PRESS=4200 TEMP=?BETA
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=-4000 TEMP=?BETA
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=-3000 LABEL='GAS LIFT'
RATE GLR=?ALPHA
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=-2000

The symbol ?BETA is set to 2 values on the MULTICASE card. ?BETA is then used on the INLET
card in place of the value of Inlet Temperature. Note that, while it is possible to control Inlet Pressure
with the existing IPRES subcode on the MULTICASE card, Inlet Temperature is not available as an
explicit subcode on MULTICASE. However, because of the 'general-purpose' nature of the Greek
symbols, it is now possible to control it (and, in principle, almost anything else) from the MULTICASE
card.
The symbol ?ALPHA is set to 3 values on the MULTICASE card. ?ALPHA is then used on the RATE
card in the profile, in place of the value for GLR. Thus, like the ASSIGN card, the greek symbols
provide a convenient way to change values within the system profile. Unlike the ASSIGN card
however, the values equated on the MULTICASE card will be permuted to result in a number of cases
being executed.

Example 2
The values equated to the greeks can be any appropriate numeric value or character string,
depending on the use to which it is put further down the input data. For example, it is possible to
permute a range of flow correlations:

MULTICASE ?DELTA=(BBO,BJA1,BJA2)?GAMMA=(BB,TD)
HCORR PLOSS=BBO HOLDUP=?DELTA MAP=?GAMMA

Notes:
1. The new greek subcodes can be used in conjunction with the existing MULTICASE subcodes, but
the maximum number of multiple value specifications on any MULTICASE card set remains 5.
One 'multiple value specification' consists of a keyword equated to a number of values in
parentheses.
2. PIPESIM scans its input data once, starting at the top, so any greek symbols must be equated on
the MULTICASE card before they are used in place of a value elsewhere.

Keyword Index 
703
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 721/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.7.6 Combining MULTICASE and CASE/ENDCASE

The MULTICASE card is a way of achieving a large number of PIPESIM cases for comparatively little
input data. It can be called a 'shortcut', for the alternative is to provide explicit extra cases in the input
data, with the ENDCASE and CASE cards. In general, it is always possible to 'expand' a job containing
MULTICASE cards into one containing a (large?) number of explicit cases, with CASE and ENDCASE
cards (except where certain maincodes require the presence of MULTICASE, viz. TABLE and
WPCURVE). However, it is not always possible to 'compress' a job consisting of a number of explicit
cases into a MULTICASE job. The choice is therefore open to you, depending on the application,
whether to use MULTICASE or explicit cases. It is also possible (but tricky) to combine the two.
Why would anyone want to use MULTICASE and explicit cases? There are a number of things that
are just not possible with MULTICASE, where explicit extra cases are the only way to achieve the
desired result. For example, suppose you want to see the effect of changing pipe diameter and flow
rate on the resulting outlet pressure from a flowline. You might set up something like this:
Example

MULTICASE LIQ=(200,300,400,500,600,700,800)
MULTICASE ?ALPHA=(4.2,5,5.5,6.2)
PIPE ID=?ALPHA
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=0

This would result in 28 cases, one for each flow rate/diameter combination. However, it is incomplete.
The pipe wall thickness has not been specified on the PIPE card. And it's when we try to add the wall
thickness that the problems arise, because each pipe diameter has its own particular wall thickness.
We can't use another greek on the MULTICASE card to specify the wall thicknesses, because to do
so would result in PIPESIM permuting all combinations of diameter and wall thickness and running
112 cases, which is definitely not what we want! The only sensible solution to this problem is to remove
the pipe diameter from the MULTICASE, and add 3 more explicit cases to do what we want. However,
there is a catch. To see what the catch is, look at the modified input data:
Example

PIPE ID=4.2 WT=.6

MULTICASE LIQ=(200,300,400,500,600,700,800)
MULTICASE ?ALPHA=(4.2,5,5.5,6.2)
NODE DIST=0 ELEV=0
...
ENDCASE
CASE Second size
PIPE ?ID=5 WT=0.8
ENDCASE
CASE Third size
PIPE ID=6.2 WT=0.8

Now we have complete control over what is with what. The first explicit case will consist of 7 multicase
cases, one for each of the flow rates on three MULTICASE card, all at the first pipe diameter and wall
thickness. The second explicit case changes the diameter and wall thickness, and because it changes
nothing else, it too will consist of 7 multiple cases for each flow rate. And so for the third and fourth
explicit cases. What, therefore, is the catch?
The catch in the above example concerns the position of the first PIPE card. Notice that, in the first
example, the PIPE card appeared after the MULTICASE cards. It had to appear there because it

Keyword Index 
704
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 722/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

contained a greek symbol which was defined on the MULTICASE card. Why, therefore, have we
moved it? The reason : All input data between the MULTICASE cards and the first NODE card is
scanned by PIPESIM on each case. Therefore, values supplied in these cards will override any values
supplied in subsequent explicit cases.
This, then is the 'MULTICASE/Explicit Case Combination Catch': it is perfectly possible to mix
MULTICASE and explicit cases in the same job, but take care not to put any cards between the
MULTICASE cards and the first NODE card unless they really need to be there, that is if they use
greek symbols defined on the MULTICASE cards.
There is something else which, although perfectly possible and legal, you are advised not to do: do
not put further MULTICASE cards in subsequent cases. You almost certainly will not get the result
you expect if you do.

5.7.7 Multiple Case and PS-PLOT

The order in which the subcodes appear on the MULTICASE card determines the order in which the
cases will be executed, which in turn determines which points make up a single 'line' on the finished
graph.
order. Therefore, care should be exercised to ensure that the subcodes appear in an appropriate
 An example will serve to clarify this point:

MULTICASE WCUT=(0,25,50,75,90) LIQ=(20,50,100,150,200,250)

This multicase card will result in 30 cases being executed. Since the LIQ subcode appears last, it
forms the 'inner' loop of the execution process: PIPESIM will take the first WCUT value and execute
6 cases, one at each of the liquid flow rates. Then it will take the second WCUT value, and execute
another 6 cases, one for each of the liquid flow rates. This loop will be repeated until all 5 water cut
values have been executed. Since the plot file is written to at the end of every case, the first 6 points
will represent 6 different flow rates at the first water cut, the next 6 will represent 6 flow rates at the
second water cut, and so on. Thus the graph that PS-PLOT will draw will contain 5 curves, Bone for 
each water cut. Each curve will consist of 6 points, corresponding to the flow rates. Now consider the
following MULTICASE card:

MULTICASE LIQ=(20,50,100,150,200,250) WCUT=(0,25,50,75,90)

The only difference between this card and the previous card is the order of the subcodes. Now, the
WCUT subcode appears last and so will form the 'inner' loop of execution. Thus the graph that PS-
PLOT will draw will contain 6 curves, Bone for each flow rate; each curve will consist of 5 points, one
for each water cut.

5.7.8 Reservoir Simulator Tabular Data Interface

Main-code : TABLE
This main-code is used to write tabular performance data to a file for input into another model (such
as a reservoir simulator). The effects of variations of one or more (up to four) parameters are
investigated. A tabular data file is created in a format as specified under the TYPE sub-code
accordingly.

Keyword Index 
705 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 723/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

The TABLE main-code should appear before the first NODE (p.635) card in a job and for PIPESIM
versions 2.4+ should appear after the MULTICASE (p.699) card.

FLOWTYPE= Type of flow by definition specified by the Reservoir Simulator. This must
be specified by the user and may be LIQ or GAS for multiphase flow or 
OIL, WATER, or GAS for single phase flow

LIQ Liquid

GAS Gas

OIL Oil

WATER Water  

TYPE= Type (or format) of data file to which the results of the calculations are
written.

PORES PORES

ECLIPSE ECLIPSE

VIP VIP

WEPS WEPS

MORES MORES

COMP4 COMP4

 ADDTEMP= Type of variable to write to the data file (Default = NO)

NO Write out only the BHP data

YES In addition to the BHP data, also write out the Temperature data in a
separate VFP Table file

USERELEV= User specified bottom hole datum depth, in default system unit. If given, it
overrides the engine computed default value.

NUMBER= Table number (between 1 and 10000) which forms part of the name of the
interface data file to be created and appears within the file itself (for 
example, if input file is fred.psm and NUMBER=2, for a production well,
the BHP data file name is fred.VFPPROD.BHP.02.txt). Default = 1.

 ALQ= Artifical Lift Quantity. Sensitivity values can be specified for one of the
following quantities: INJGAS, GLR, GOR, INJGLR, INJGOR, INJMAS,
INJLIQ, PUMPDP, PUMPPR, PUMPPO, PUMPPW, PUMPST and
PUMPSP.

Note:

Keyword Index 
706 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 724/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

1. Any RATE (p.578) or ITERN (p.580) card in the job input is ignored once the MULTICASE
(p.699) and TABLE option have been selected.
2. The sub-codes can be entered in any order.

5.7.9 ASSIGN Changing Profile Data by Assignment

Main-code: ASSIGN
In PIPESIM Versions 2.70 and higher, ASSIGN can be used to supply "parallel values" in
MULTICASE'd jobs. Any ASSIGN card defining a multiple-valued symbol, which appears after a
MULTICASE card defining a Greek symbol or explicit multi-value subcode, will be treated as parallel
to the multicase symbol or sub-code immediately preceding it. Please note, a multi-value ASSIGN
card must not appear before the first MULTICASE card.
Suppose you want to set up a MULTICASE job to permute a range of PIPE IDs against something
else, e.g. water cut. To make the analysis more rigorous the correct wall thickness (WT) for each ID
should be used. If a 3rd Greek on the MULTICASE card is included, this will permute all the
combinations of ID and WT, not what is required. However, by using an ASSIGN card, containing the
extra data, at the correct point, will result in the required result.

Notes:
1. In PIPESIM Versions 2.41 and higher it is now possible to change variable values within a system
profile without repeating the whole profile. Previously, if a value within the profile was changed in
a second or subsequent case, then the complete system profile had to be re-entered. It is possible
for you to invent one or more symbols and then assign different values to the symbol in subsequent
cases. The symbol is typically used within the profile in place of a numeric value. The value can
then be assigned outside the profile, thus obviating the need to repeat the entire system profile in
subsequent cases.
2. All symbols must begin with a question mark "?" and are limited to 12 characters. The value
assigned can be any appropriate numeric value or alphanumeric string. If delimiters are included,
the string must be enclosed in quotes. Up to 30 symbols can be defined and assigned.
3. ASSIGN may be used to update data within the profile but it can not be used to introduce new
main-codes or sub-codes within the profile. If a new main-code or sub-code is introduced within
the profile (that is after the second NODE card) then the whole profile must be repeated.

Example

MULTICASE ?BETA =(0,20,50,80)

MULTICASE ?ALPHA=(3,4,4.5,5,6)
ASSIGN ?THICK=(0.4,0.5,0.5,0.6,0.6)
INLET PRESS=900 TEMP=70
RATE LIQ=3000 WCUT=?BETA
PIPE ID=?ALPHA WT=?THICK

Keyword Index 
707 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 725/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.7.10 OPTIMIZE
 Allows the PIPESIM single branch engine to calculate optimal values of parameters to match
measured pressure and / or temperature data.
Main-code: OPTIMIZE

?OPT01= (...,...) Range of values for 1st optimization variable.

?OPT02= (...,...) Range of values for 2nd optimization variable.

?OPT03= (...,...) Range of values for 3rd optimization variable.

?OPT04= (...,...) Range of values for 4th optimization variable.

?OPT05= (...,...) Range of values for 5th optimization variable.

PMATCH= Weighting factor for pressure match.

TMATCH= Weighting factor for temperature match.

TOL= Accuracy (default 0.01). Optimization converges when the fractional change in
the RMS is less than the specified accuracy.

MAXIT= Maximum number of iterations (default 200). Optimization finishes without

convergence if the number of PIPESIM iterations needed exceeds this limit. The
actual number of PIPESIM runs may be less than the reported number of 
iterations. This is because the optimizer may call PIPESIM with the same inputs
as an earlier iteration. In this case PIPESIM is not re-run — the results are read
from memory.

VERBOSE= ON Outputs details of optimizer iteration runs

OFF Outputs details of the initial and optimized runs. (Default)

Examples

Example 1: optimizing flow correlation parameters to match measured pressure data

In this example the friction factor and hold up factor for the vertical flow correlation are set equal to
the first two optimization variables. The OPTIMIZE keyword is used to set the range for these two
variables (0,2 to 5 in both cases) and to select measured pressure data matching. The OPTIMIZE
keyword is used to set the range for these two variables (0,2 to 5 in both cases) and to select measured
pressure data matching.

optimize ?opt01(0.2,5) ?opt02=(0.2,5) pmatch=1

vcorr type=HBR ffactor=?opt01 hfactor=?opt02

Example 2: optimizing heat loss rate to match measured temperature data

In this example the u value multiplier is set equal to the first optimization variable. The OPTIMIZE
keyword is used to set the range (0,01 to 100) and to select measured temperature data matching.

Keyword Index 
708 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 726/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

optimize ?opt01(0.01,100) tmatch=1

vcorr ufactor=?opt01

Example 3: matching measured pressure and temperature data simultaneously

In this example the two previous examples are combined to match both pressure and temperature
data simultaneously. This can be important in cases when the heat loss affect the pressure
calculations. The relative weightings of the pressure and temperature matches have been set equal
in this example. The MULTICASE keyword is also used to allow multiple flow correlations to be used.

multicase ?beta=(ANSARI,DR,HBR)
optimize ?opt01(0.2,5) ?opt02=(0.2,5) ?opt03=(0.01,100) pmatch=1 tmatch=1
vcorr type=?beta ffactor=?opt01 hfactor=?opt02
options ufactor=?opt03

Example 4: controlling the optimization

To control the optimization you can set the accuracy and maximum number of iterations:

optimize tol=0.001 maxit=500

The keyword can be supplied using Engine Options (p.150) to control the Data Matching (p.175)
operation.

5.7.11 Wax deposition and Time Stepping modeling options

Main-code: WAX or TIME
The deposition of wax from a fluid on to the walls of the pipe or tubing can be modeled as a function
of time. Data must be provided to specify the required wax properties, the required time parameters,
and timestep calculation criteria. Since these properties overlap to a considerable degree they can
all be provided on either the WAX or TIME maincode. All times are currently assumed to be in HOURS.
Wax deposition can also be modeled on an instantaneous basis. The rate of wax deposition can be
calculated, and used to produce a graph of (for example) wax deposition rate against distance.
Multiple sensitivity cases can then be used in the usual way to sensitize on variables of interest, so
as to observe their effect on wax deposition rate. To do this, ensure your job omits any of the following
time-based subcodes, and specify the desired sensitivity variable values with MULTICASE.

Time subcodes
Subcodes concerned only with setting time-based data and options:

DURATION= Duration of the simulation: provides an alternative to ENDTIME=. To simulate

the system over a period of time the duration must be positive: if it is zero, the
simulation will consist of a normal PIPESIM steady-state run, valid for an
arbitrary instant in time (which is useful for investigating the factors that
contribute to wax deposition).

STEPSIZE= The size of each timestep: only used if OPTION is 1. Timestep size can also be
computed automatically during the run by selecting a suitable OPTION.

Keyword Index 
709
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 727/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

STARTTIME= Time at which simulation is to start. (Default zero)

ENDTIME= Time at which simulation is to finish: see also DURATION= below. (Default zero)

UNITS= Units of time to be used in simulation. Can be any of YEARS, MONTHS,

WEEKS, DAYS, HOURS, MINUTES, or SECONDS.

MINSTEPSIZE= The minimum allowable time step size that can be computed from OPTIONS 2
through 5.

REPINTERVAL= The interval between reporting steps. This can be set independently of the
timestep size to allow a number of timesteps to occur with no reported output,
if desired. The timestep size will be adjusted to ensure that one ends at each
report interval, in order to allow the report to be written.

PRINT= Specifies the number of timesteps for which the detailed wax deposition output
page will appear. This value will override the CASES= subcode of PRINT.

RESTART= Time at which to restart from a previous simulation. If a restart time is specified
it overrides any supplied STARTTIME. The wax profile to restart from is
obtained from the restart file, see READRESTART.

READRESTART= Specifies the name of the restart file to read (default model name.WRS). Has
no effect unless accompanied by RESTART=. The file will be searched for a
profile representing the specified restart time. If necessary, 2 existing profiles
will be interpolated to create a profile representing the required time.

WRITERESTART= Specifies the name of the restart file to write to (default model name.WRS) A
restart file is always written if the run is stepping through time (that is has a
positive duration, see above). If the run is restarting and the read and write
restart filenames are identical, the new profiles will be written at the file position
corresponding to the time of restart, thus any pre-existing profiles for later 
timesteps will be overwritten and lost. If this is not the desired behavior, this or 
the previous subcode can be used to specify alternate file names, which can
be copies or new files as appropriate. In addition the model name may be
changed (with the File/Save As) menu.

Termination subcodes
Subcodes concerned with or terminating the timestepping simulation, as a result of simulation
conditions:

MAXPIGDP= The maximum Delta Pressure available to push a wax removal

scraper pig through the line. The simulation will terminate early
when sufficient wax has deposited to cause the specified DP to
occur.

MAXSYSDP= An upper limit on the Delta Pressure between system inlet and
outlet (psi or bar). In order to take effect, the simulation operation

Keyword Index 
710 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 728/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

must have specified that inlet pressure or outlet pressure be the

calculated variable.

MAXWAXTHICK= or   An upper limit in the thickness of the wax deposit anywhere in the
MAXTHICKNESS= system (in or mm).

MAXVOLUME= or  The maximum volume of wax allowed to accumulate in the system.
MAXWAXVOLUME= or  (ft3 or m3)
MAXPIGVOLUME=

MINLIQRATE=  A lower limit for system stock-tank liquid flowrate. (bbl or m3). In
order to take effect, the simulation operation must have specified
that flowrate be the calculated variable.

MINGASRATE=  A lower limit for system stock-tank gas flowrate. (mmscf 3 or 
mmm3). In order to take effect, the simulation operation must have
specified that flowrate be the calculated variable.

MINMASSRATE= A lower limit for system total mass flowrate. (lb/sec or kg/sec). In
order to take effect, the simulation operation must have specified
that flowrate be the calculated variable.

MINID= or MINWAXID= A lower limit on the internal Diameter of the wax deposit anywhere
in the system (in or mm).

Wax subcodes
Subcodes concerned with Setting wax properties, deposition properties, and modelling options:

METHOD= or  The chosen Wax Deposition method. May be:

CLIENTMODEL= DBR or DBRS: D. B. Robinson and Associates, single-phase
DBRM: D. B. Robinson and Associates, multi-phase
SHELL: Shell oil Company proprietary method
BP: British Petroleum Company proprietary method
Note that all methods require an explicit license. D .B. Robinson and
 Associates is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Schlumberger.

DENSITY= or RHOWAX= or  Wax density (lb/ft3 or kg/m3).

WAXRHO=

CONDUCTIVITY= or  Wax thermal conductivity (BTU/hr/ft/F or W/m/C).

WAXCONDUCTIVITY=

ROUGHMODE = Specifies whether wax wall roughness is to be calculated. Set to

INPUT to use the roughness suppied with ROUGH= below (or on the
PIPE statement), or CALC to have it calculated.

Keyword Index 
711
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 729/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ROUGHNESS= or  Surface roughness of the wax (in or mm) .

WAXROUGHNESS= or 
ROUGH=

WAXYIELDSTR = or  the Yield strength of the deposited wax (psi or/bar). Used to calculate
TAUWAX= or WAXTAU= or  DP during pigging.
YIELDSTRENGTH=

IFCMETHOD= Inside Film Coefficient method. This is provided for backwards

compatibility, and accepts the same values as SPIFCMETHOD= and
MPIFCMETHOD= subcodes on the HEAT statement.

BP, DBRS or DBRM method subcodes

Subcodes that are specific to the BP, DBRS or DBRM methods:

FILENAME= or FNAME= or  The name of the Wax properties file. the BP and DBR

INPUTFNAME= methods requireand

thermodynamic a separate file properties,
deposition to hold waxthe format of 
which is proprietary to each method.

BPFILENAME= or BPFNAME= or  Same as FILENAME=, and sets METHOD=BP.

BPINPUTFNAME=

DBRFILENAME= or DBRFNAME= or  Same as FILENAME=, and sets METHOD=DBRS.

DBRINPUTFNAME=

OILFRAC= Oil fraction in the wax (0 to 1).

SHEARCOEF= or SRMULT= Shear coefficient to simulate wax stripping. Also known as

Shear reduction Multiplier. (0 to 1).
DIFFCO= or MDMULT= Molecular Diffusion coefficient multiplier (0.1 to 1).
DIFCOEFACTOR=

COEFWAXK= Multiplier for the oil thermal conductivity, to simulate the

thermal conductivity of the wax deposit. Must be in the
range 1 to 2. BP method only

DCMETHO= or FLAGDIFFCOEF= Diffusion Coefficient method, may be:

WILKECHANG: Wilke & Chang

HAYDUMINHAS: Hayduk & Minhas

USER: user-supplied with DIFFCO=
BP method only.

ROUGHCOEF= Roughness multiplier (0 to 1). BP method only.

BPFFMETHOD= BP Friction factor method. Can be set to ON or OFF.

Controls which Friction factor is used for calculating the

Keyword Index 
712 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 730/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Inside Film Coefficient with BP method

(IFCMETHOD=BP). If set to ON, then the friction factor is
calculated using the BP internal flow correlation. if set to
OFF, the friction factor is calculated by the PIPESIM
selected flow correlation. BP method only.

COEFWAXK= Wax Thermal Conductivity Coefficient (0 to 100). BP

method only.

LHCOEF= Coefficient on Liquid Holdup for two-phase scaling (-5 to

+5). DBRM method only.

S2YCOEFF= Coefficient on ratio of shear stress to yield stress (-5 to

+5). DBRM method only.

SFCOEF= Coefficient on shear factor used in porosity calculation (-5

to +5). DBRM method only.

SWCOEFF= Coefficient on Surface Wetting for two-phase scaling (-5

to +5) DBRM method only.

T2RCOEFF= Coefficient on ratio of wax thickness to radius (-5 to

+5).DBRM method only.

TFCOEF= Coefficient on temperature factor used in oil fraction

calculation (-5 to +5). DBRM method only.

TRANSTEMPRANGE= or  Wax transition temperature range / region (F or C). DBRM

WAXTRANSTEMP= method only.

Shell subcodes
Subcodes specific to the SHELL method:

OPTION= Options to control how the timestep size is computed. An integer in the
range 1 through 5, meaning:
1: Fixed timestep using the user's specified step size.
2: Auto timestep, all constraints: Wax DX, HTC , DP.
3: Auto timestep, wax DX and DP constraints only.
4: Auto timestep, wax DX and HTC constraints only.

5: Auto timestep, wax DX constraint only.

MINDX= The minimum allowable increase in wax ID. This sets a lower limit on
the timestep size computed from OPTIONS 2 through 5.

SETDX= The maximum increase in wax ID. This is used to compute the timestep
size from OPTIONS 2 through 5.

Keyword Index 
713
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 731/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

HTCLIMIT= Controls the application of the Heat Transfer Coefficient limit on the
timestep size. Set to ON or OFF.

RELAX= The relaxation factor for automated timestep adjustment computed from
OPTIONS 2 through 5. Must be a real number between 0 and 1; higher 
values favour the new value, lower the old.
DFRACTION= Fraction of the pressure drop change allowed with the new timestep
(0.01 == 1%) computed from OPTIONS 2 through 5.

CWDPRES= Critical Wax Deposition Pressures. A vector of pressures, up to 30 may

be provided, which must be in ascending order (psia or bara). Values
are separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

CWDTEMP= Critical Wax Deposition Temperatures. A vector of temperatures, up to

30 may be provided, to correspond with the values for CWDPRES= (F
or C). Values are separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

MPTEMP= Modeling Parameter temperatures. A vector of temperatures, up to 30

may be provided, which must be in ascending order (F or C). Values are
separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

MPA= Modeling Parameter A values. A vector of coefficients, up to 30 may be

provided, to correspond with the values for MBTEMP=. Values are
separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

MPB= Modeling Parameter B values. A vector of coefficients, up to 30 may be

provided, to correspond with the values for MBTEMP=. Values are
separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses

MPC=, MPD=, MPE=,  Additional subcodes to specify modelling parameters C through J. Each
MPF=, MPG=, MPH=, requires a vector of coefficients, up to 30 may be provided, to
MPI=, MPJ= correspond with the values for MBTEMP=. Values are separated by
commas and enclosed in parentheses

RATEMODEL= or  Deposition rate model number. Currently there is only one rate model,
MODEL= number 1.

CWRPRES= Critical Wax Removal Pressures. A vector of pressures, up to 30 may

be provided, which must be in ascending order (psia or bara). Values
are separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

CWRTEMP= Critical
may beWax Removal
provided, Temperatures.
to correspond with A vector
the of temperatures,
values for CWDPRES= up(F
to or 
30
C). Values are separated by commas and enclosed in parentheses.

MODE= Controls whether to model wax deposition or removal: set to

DEPOSITION or REMOVAL.

Keyword Index 
714
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 732/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

5.8 PIPESIM-Net keywords

SETUP (p.715)
BRANCH (p.717)
SOURCE (p.719)
SINK (p.722)
JUNCTION (p.724)
NSEPARATOR (p.724)

Note: The preferred order of statements is: SETUP (p.715) , SOURCE (p.719) , JUNCTION
(p.724) , SINK (p.722) , BRANCH (p.717) , NSEPARATOR (p.724).

See Input Files and Data Conventions (p.559) for more detailed information on formatting.

5.8.1 SETUP
SETUP is a network keyword (p.715), used to define various network options.

Subcodes
TITLE= The model title. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.

TOLERANCE= The overall tolerance of the converged network solution. Must

be between 0.5 and 1e-6, default 0.01.

MAXITER= The maximum allowable number of overall network iterations.

Must be between 3 and 1000, default 100.

FLUIDMODEL= or COMPOSITION= An override on the type of fluid model to use. This is not
normally required, as it is obtained from the fluid definitions
supplied in the branch files, but can be supplied here if 
desired. Can be set to:

BLACKOIL: Fluid type is set to black oil

COMPOSITION: Fluid type is set to compositional

STEAM: fluid type is set to steam

UNSTABLEWELL= How to in
results treat unstable
a well wells.inIfits
operating the converged
unstable, network solution
or liquid-loaded
region, you may wish it be automatically shut in. Can be set
to SHUT or FLOW, meaning:

SHUT: Shut in any well that is operating in its unstable region.

This is the default.

FLOW: allow unstable wells to remain in operation.

Keyword Index 
715 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 733/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

RECIPBYPASS= How to treat redundant Reciprocating Compressor (recips).

The network solution can converge with a recip in a so-called
“redundant” state, where pressure actually reduces across it
instead of increasing. Clearly, a recip in this state is not doing
the job it was intended to do, and the network would be better 
off without it. If this subcode is set to ON, then any redindant
recip will be bypassed, i.e. effectively removed from the model
solution. Can be set to ON or OFF, default ON.

 ALGORITHM= The choice of network solution algorithm. Can be set to

WEGSTEIN or JACOBIAN, default WEGSTEIN.

WOFLMODE= Global settings for Wells Off Line Mode. May be set to:

OFF: Disable WOFL mode. All pressure-specified production

wells and source branches are modelled ON-line.

CREATE: Enable WOFL mode, and unconditionally create

WOFL files for all pressure-specified sources and production
wells at the start of the simulation.

CREATE?: Enable WOFL mode. Read and validate any

existing WOFL files, comparing the fluid definition, pressure
boundary condition, and branch geometry in them to the
corresponding values in the current model for the branch. If 
they match, use the file, otherwise re-create it.

USE: Enable WOFL mode. Unconditionally read any existing

WOFL files and use them, despite possible mismatch
between them and the current model settings. No new files
will be created.

ECHOBRANCH= Allows the contents of all well and branch geometry files to be
echoed to the network output file. Can be set to YES or NO,
default NO.

SKIPINACTIVE= Controls the “skipping” (i.e., omission of processing) of  

geometry files for inactive branches: can be set to YES or NO.

In a coupled PIPESIM/Eclipse/IAM simulation, it is common

practice to start the simulation with a number of branches
turned OFF. The timestepping simulation then turns them ON
at a later timestep, maybe after many hours of simulation CPU
time. If at this time it is found that the branch geometry files
concerned contain syntax or logic errors, the simulation has
to be aborted, resulting in much time and work lost. Clearly,
for this type of simulation, it is preferable to check and validate
all branch geometry files at the start of the run, so as to

Keyword Index 
716 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 734/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

diagnose such errors as early as possible. Thus the default

state for a coupled simulation is NO.

By contrast, in a normal uncoupled PIPESIM run, a branch's

ON or OFF state will not change during the run, so any syntax
or logic errors caused by the contents of inactive geometry
files can be ignored. Thus the default state for an uncoupled
simulation is YES.

This flag can also be set with the -E command line switch,
which has the same effect as setting it to YES.

RESTARTINTERVAL= Specifies the time interval between writing restart files: a value
in seconds, default 1800. The interval is measured in real (i.e.
wallclock, not CPU) seconds.

Restart files are written at the end of every simulation, and at

the end of any as-yet-unconverged network iteration after the
specified interval. The purpose of the restart file is to allow the
simulation to be restarted, which is useful to allow a new
simulation to re-use the converged results of a previous one,
and/or to recover from a simulation that terminated
abnormally. However, the file writing can take considerable
time, and so impose a speed penalty on the overall simulation.
So there is strong incentive to minimise the frequency of 
writing them.

By default the files are written every half-hour, the idea being
that if the program is interrupted or fails abnormally, you can
restart it, having lost at most half an hour's work. If you would
prefer to loose less work in this event, set the interval to a
value smaller than 1800 seconds, but by doing so you accept
the extra overhead of writing the files more often.

You can also increase the interval to reduce the restart file
writing. Setting it to a very large value (eg 1e10) will result in
the files being written only when the simulation converges, or 
when it hits iteration limit.

ECHONET= Controls the echo of the network input data to the output file.
can be set to YES or NO, default YES.

5.8.2 BRANCH
BRANCH is a network keyword (p.715), used to define a branch and associated network topology.

Keyword Index 
717 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 735/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Subcodes
NAME= The name of the branch. Can include spaces if enclosed in
quotes.

FILENAME= The file name containing the Branch's input data, as formatted
for a Single-branch PIPESIM model. Can include spaces if 
enclosed in quotes. See note 1.

START= The branch start Network Node name. See note 1.

END= The branch end Network Node name. See note 1.

BLOCK= Specifies a direction in which flow is “blocked”, i.e. not allowed

to go. Can be set to:

NONE: No flow block exists, so flow may go in either direction

FORWARD: Flow is blocked in the forward direction, so it may

only go in reverse.

REVERSE: Flow is blocked in the reverse direction, so it may

only go forward,

BOTH: flow is blocked in both directions, so the branch is

effectively inactive.

ON Specifies that the branch is “active” and that no flow block exists
in it, so flow can go in either direction. has the same effect as
BLOCK=NONE.

OFF Specifies that the branch is “inactive” and flow is blocked in both
directions. has the same effect as BLOCK=BOTH.

ESTLIQUID= or EST_LIQUID= An estimate of the flowrate in the branch, as a stock-tank liquid

rate (sbbl/d or sm3/d). The iterative network solution algorithm
will commence with this as the branch flowrate.

ESTGAS= or EST_GAS= An estimate of the flowrate in the branch, as a stock-tank gas

rate (mmscf/d or mmsm3/d). The iterative network solution
algorithm will commence with this as the branch flowrate.

ESTMASS= or EST_MASS= An estimate of the flowrate in the branch, as a mass rate (lb/sec
or Kg/sec). The
commence with iterative network
this as the branchsolution algorithm will
flowrate.

UPPERMASS= or MAXMASS= or  Upper limit of mass flowrate for the branch (lb/sec or Kg/sec)..
LIMITMASS= See note 2.

UPPEROIL= or MAXOIL= or  Upper limit of oil flowrate for the branch(sbbl/d or sm3/d). See
LIMITOIL= note 2.

Keyword Index 
718 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 736/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

UPPERLIQ= or MAXLIQ= or  Upper limit of liquid flowrate for the branch (sbbl/d or sm3/d).
LIMITLIQ= See note 2.

UPPERGAS= or MAXGAS= or  Upper limit of gas flowrate for the branch (mmscf/d or mmsm3/
LIMITGAS= d). See note 2.

UPPERWAT= or MAXWAT= or  Upper limit of water flowrate for the branch (sbbl/d or sm3/d).
LIMITWAT= See note 2.

USERESTART= A per-branch override on the use of solution data from restart

files. When a model run is restarted (p.189), by default, the
solution information for all branches is extracted from the restart
file, and used as the start point for the run. This subcode allows
the restart information for this branch to be ignored, so the run
will use default information for the branch. Can be set to YES,
to use the restart data, or NO, to ignore it. Default is YES.

Notes:
1. The names of the network nodes which adjoin the branch must be specified with the START= and
END= subcodes. Network nodes are defined with the statements SOURCE, (p.719) SINK
(p.722) , JUNCTION (p.724) and NSEPARATOR (p.724) statements. The pipeline geometry
as detailed in the file supplied with the FILENAME= subcode, is assumed to start at the network
node named with the START= subcode, and end at the node named with END=. Note, this does
not specify the direction of fluid flow: the network solution will determine if the branch actually flows
forward, i.e. with the geometry direction, or reverse, i.e. against the geometry direction.
2. Any combination of Maximum Flowrate limits may be specified, the simulation will enforce
whichever turns out to be most limiting. The limits are enforced by the addition of a choke at the

branch outlet.
will occur Thethe
across choke bean
choke. diameter
Flowrate is calculated
limits so as totoenforce
may be applied the limit,
all branches, so a pressure
except drop
for (a) any
branch connected to the outlet of a network separator, and (b) any branch draining a source with
a fixed flowrate specification.

5.8.3 SOURCE
SOURCE is a network keyword (p.715), used to define conditions at a network inlet.

Subcodes

NAME= The name of the source. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.
PRESSURE= Source pressure specification (psia or bara). See note 1.

TEMPERATURE= Temperature of fluid flowing from the source (F or C). If absent, this
is obtained from the data in the branch geometry file.

LIQUIDRATE= or LIQ= Source flowrate specification, as a stock tank liquid rate (sbbl/d or 
sm3/d). See note 1.

Keyword Index 
719
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 737/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

GASRATE= or GAS= Source flowrate specification, as a Stock tank gas rate (mmscf/d or 
mmscm/d) . See note 1.

MASSRATE= or MASS= Source flowrate specification, as a Stock tank mass rate (lb/sec or 
Kg/sec). See note 1.

REBC= “Remove Existing Boundary Condition” for the source. This is used
when multiple SOURCE statements refer to the same named
source, and you want this statement to remove all boundary
conditions for this source specified with earlier statements.

FCLIQUID= Source flowrate specification, as a Flowing liquid rate (bbl/d or m3/

d). See notes 1 & 2.

FCGAS= Source flowrate specification, as a Flowing gas rate (mmscfd or sm3/

d). Note the units of this are at stock-tank conditions.

FCPRESSURE= The pressure for the accompanying flowing rate specified with
FCLIQ= or FCGAS= (psia or Bara)

FCTEMPERATUR= The temperature for the accompanying flowing rate specified with
FCLIQ= or FCGAS= (F or C)

CURVEP= For curve specified source, an array of pressures (psia or bara). See
note 3. Example:

CURVEP=(20,1000,2000) psia

CURVEL= For curve specified sources, an array of liquid rates (bbl/d or m3/d).
See note 3. Example:

CURVEL=(20,1000,2000) bbld

CURVEG= For curve specified sources, an array of gas rates (mmscfd or  

mmsm3d). See note 3. Example:

CURVEG=(20,1000,2000) mmscfd

CURVEM= For curve specified sources, an array of mass rates (lb/s or Kg/s).
See note 3. Example:

CURVEM=(20,1000,2000) lb/s

CURVET= For
notecurve specified sources, an array of temperatures (F or C). See
3. Example:

CURVET=(20,40,60) F

ON Specifies that the source is active, or switched ON.

OFF Specifies that the source is inactive, or switched OFF.

Keyword Index 
720 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 738/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

CURVEFILE= Specifies that the source and adjoining branch has already been
simulated in Wells Off-Line (WOFL) mode, and that the results of 
this are available in the named file. Example:

CURVEFILE='Curve1.PWH'

 A number of additional special values may be supplied instead of 

the filenale, these are distinguished by the first character being an
asterisk, '*', namely:

CURVEFLIE=*USE: this has the same effect as above, but the

filename to read from is assumed from the default source and branch
names.

CURVEFLIE=*CREATE : Specifies that a WOFL file for the source

and adjoining branch are to be created at the start of the network
simulation. The network simulation will then use the results in this
file.

CURVEFLIE=*CREATE?: Same as above, except that any pre-

existing file will be used if its specifications match the current
network's.

QUALITY= For steam systems, the quality (fraction gas) of the steam flowing
into the source. If absent, this will be obtained from the branch
geometry file.

CURVESENS_P= For WOFL specified sources, supplies sensitivity information in units

that match the data in the WOFL file.

CURVESENS_T= For WOFL specified sources, supplies sensitivity information in units

that match the data in the current (.TNT) file.

CURVESENS_S= For WOFL specified sources, supplies sensitivity information in

Strict SI units.

UPPERMASS= or  Upper limit of mass flowrate for the source (lb/sec or Kg/sec).. See
MAXMASS= or LIMITMASS= note 4.

UPPEROIL= or MAXOIL= or  Upper limit of oil flowrate for the source (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note
LIMITOIL= 4.

UPPERLIQ= or MAXLIQ= or  Upper limit of liquid flowrate for the source (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See
LIMITLIQ= note 4.

UPPERGAS= or MAXGAS= or  Upper limit of gas flowrate for the source (mmscf/d or mmsm3/d).
LIMITGAS= See note 4.

UPPERWAT= or MAXWAT= Upper limit of water flowrate for the source (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See
or LIMITWAT= note 4.

Keyword Index 
721
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 739/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

ELEVATION= Absolute elevation of the source (ft or m). If supplied, this will be used
as a datum for plotting branch elevations. If more than one junction
has an elevation, they will be used to cross-check with other source,
sink and junction elevations, to help identify where loop elevation
mismatch error(s) have occurred.

N.B. It is useful to supply the absolute elevations of any number of 

Network nodes (Junctions, Sources, and Sinks). This allows the
elevation data in the connecting branches to be checked. Note that
the same node name may appear in multiple SOURCE statements:
the data on each statement is additive for the overall node
specification. Thus for example, a series of SOURCE statements
can be supplied under Setup » Engine options to set the node
elevations for sources already specified in the GUI's model. Same
goes for JUNCTION and SINK statements.

ESTPRESSURE= Estimate of pressure to be used as a starting point for the network

solution (psia or bara).

Notes:
1. A source may have a pressure specification, or a flowrate specification, or a curve specification.
These are known as Hydraulic Boundary Conditions. (p.40)
2. A “flowing flowrate” may be specified as an alternative to a stock-tank flowrate. It must be
accompanied by FCPRES= and FCTEMP= .
3. A source may be specified with a curve of flowrate against pressure, as an alternative to a fixed
pressure or flowrate. The subcodes CURVEP=, and one of (CURVEG=, CURVEL=, or 
CURVEM=) are used for this, they all accept Multiple Value Data Set (p.563). The curve may be
accompanied by a temperature array with CURVET=. All subcodes so specified must have the
same number of values. Between 3 and 30 values may be supplied.
4. Any combination of Maximum Flowrate limits may be specified, the simulation will enforce
whichever turns out to be most limiting. The limits are enforced in the adjoining branch, by the
addition of a choke at the branch outlet. The choke bean diameter is calculated so as to enforce
the limit, so a pressure drop will occur across the choke.

5.8.4 SINK
SINK is a network keyword (p.715), used to define conditions at a network outlet.

Subcodes
NAME= The name of the sink. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.

PRESSURE= Sink pressure specification (psia or bara). See note 1.

Keyword Index 
722 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 740/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

LIQUIDRATE= or LIQ= Sink flowrate specification, as a stock tank liquid rate (sbbl/d or sm3/
d). See note 1.

GASRATE= or GAS= Sink flowrate specification, as a Stock tank gas rate (mmscf/d or 
mmscm/d) . See note 1.

MASSRATE= or MASS= Source flowrate specification, as a Stock tank mass rate (lb/sec or Kg/
sec). See note 1.

REBC= “Remove Existing Boundary Condition” for the sink. This is used when
multiple SINK statements refer to the same named sink, and you want
this statement to remove all boundary conditions for this sink specified
with earlier statements.

ON Specifies that the sink is active, or switched ON.

OFF Specifies that the sink is inactive, or switched OFF.

UPPERMASS= or  Upper limit of mass flowrate for the sink (lb/sec or Kg/sec).. See note
MAXMASS= 2.

UPPEROIL= or MAXOIL= Upper limit of oil flowrate for the sink (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 2.

UPPERLIQ= or MAXLIQ= Upper limit of liquid flowrate for the sink (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 2.

UPPERGAS= or MAXGAS= Upper limit of gas flowrate for the sink (mmscf/d or mmsm3/d). See
note 2.

UPPERWAT= or  Upper limit of water flowrate for the sink (sbbl/d or sm3/d). See note 2.
MAXWAT=

ELEVATION= Absolute elevation of the sink (ft or m). If supplied, this will be used as
a datum for plotting branch elevations. If more than one network node
has an elevation, they will be used to cross-check with other source,
sink and junction elevations, to help identify where loop elevation
mismatch error(s) have occurred.

N.B. It is useful to supply the absolute elevations of any number of 

Network nodes (Junctions, Sources, and Sinks). This allows the
elevation data in the connecting branches to be checked. Note that the
same node name may appear in multiple SINK statements: the data
on each statement is additive for the overall node specification. Thus
for example, a series of SINK statements can be supplied under 
Setup » Engine options to set the node elevations for sinks already
specified in the GUI's model. The same goes for JUNCTION and
SOURCE statements.

ESTPRESSURE= Estimate of sink pressure to be used as a starting point for the network
solution (psia or bara).

Keyword Index 
723
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 741/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Notes:
1. A sink may have a pressure specification, or a flowrate specification. These are known as
Hydraulic Boundary Conditions. (p.40)

2. Any combination
whichever of Maximum
turns out to be mostFlowrate
limiting. limits may are
The limits be specified, thethe
enforced in simulation
adjoiningwill enforce
branch, by the
addition of a choke at the branch outlet. The choke bean diameter is calculated so as to enforce
the limit, so a pressure drop will occur across the choke.

5.8.5 JUNCTION
JUNCTION is a network keyword (p.715), used to define a junction, or to supply additional or override
data for an existing junction.

Subcodes
NAME= Name of the junction. Can include spaces if enclosed in quotes.

ESTPRESSURE= Estimate of pressure to be used as a starting point for the network solution
(bara or psia)

ESTTEMPERATURE= Estimate of fluid temperature to be used as a starting point for the network
solution (F or C)

ELEVATION= Absolute elevation of the junction (ft or m). If supplied, this will be used as
a datum for plotting branch elevations. If more than one Network node has
an elevation, they will be used to cross-check with other node elevations, to

help identify where loop elevation mismatch error(s) have occurred.

N.B. It is possible, and useful, to supply the absolute elevations of any
number of Network nodes (Junctions, Sources, and Sinks). This allows the
elevation data in the connecting branches to be checked. Note that the same
node name may appear in multiple JUNCTION statements: the data on each
statement is additive for the overall node specification. Thus for example, a
series of JUNCTION statements can be supplied under  Setup » Engine
options to set the node elevations for junctions already specified in the
GUI's model. Same goes for SOURCE and SINK statements.

5.8.6 NSEPARATOR
NSEPARATOR is a network keyword (p.715), used to define a network separator.

Subcodes
NAME= Name of the separator  

FEEDBRANCH= Name of the branch feeding the separator 

Keyword Index 
724
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 742/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

DISCARDBRANCH= Name of the branch to receive the “discarded” stream. See note 1.

TYPE= The phase of the “discarded” stream: may be GAS, LIQUID, or WATER. See
note 1.

PRESSURE= Separator pressure (psia or bara). This is optional: see note 2.

EFFICIENCY= Percentage efficiency of the separation process: see note 3. Must be in the
range 10 to 100.

Notes:
1. A network separator causes a feed stream to be separated into 2 outlet streams, as specified by
the TYPE= subcode. They are known as the “discard” stream and the “kept” stream, for 
compatability with the single-branch separator (p.642). In a network model however, the term
“discard” is misleading, because the discard stream is not “discarded”, it is separated and made
to flow into the branch named with the DISCARDBRANCH= subcode.
2. The requirements of the network solution dictate that a pressure discontinuity must occur at the
outlets of a network separator. If a pressure has been specified, then both of the outlet branches
will exhibit a pressure discontinuity, calculated to ensure that the separated streams' flowrates are
maintained in the downstream network(s). If a pressure is not specified, then only the “discard”
branch will exhibit a discontinuity. These discontinuities represent the necessary pressure control
valves and/or pumps that are required to maintain liquid level control in the separator.
3. The efficiency term refers to how much of the “discard” phase is separated from the feed stream.
For example, an efficiency of 90% in a gas separator will cause 90% of the gas phase to be sent
down the discard branch; the remaining gas, plus ALL of the liquid, will go down the keep branch.
4. Separators work at flowing, or in-situ, pressure and temperature. The flowing phase split as
predicted by the selected fluid PVT model will usually be very different from the stock-tank phase
split, please bear this in mind when you look at the resulting branch flowrates. In particular,
PIPESIM allows you to display branch and node flowrates using the “report tool”, but alas this
shows only stock-tank rates, which are not useful to understand separator performance.
5. If the phase to be separated does not exist, then clearly the separator cannot function as expected.
In this case all flow will go down the keep branch. Inlet and outlet compositions will be identical.
6. If the phase to be separated is the only phase present, then clearly the separator cannot function
as expected. In this case the “efficient” fraction of the flow will go down the discard branch, with
the remainder going down the keep branch. Inlet and outlet compositions will be identical.

5.9 Keyword Index

Input Files and Input Data Conventions (p.559)
General Data (p.566)
Compositional Data (p.686)
Blackoil Data (p.674)
Heat Transfer Data (p.664)

Keyword Index 
725 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 743/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Flow Correlation Data (p.598)

System and Equipment Data (p.606)
Well Performance Modeling (p.645)
PIPESIM Operations (p.694)
Keyword List
PIPESIM-Net Keywords (p.715)

5.9.1 Keyword List

 A (p.555) B (p.555) C (p.556) D (p.556) E (p.556) F (p.556) G (p.556) H (p.557) I (p.557) J (p.557) K
(p.557) L (p.557) M (p.557) N (p.558) O (p.558) P (p.558) Q (p.558) R (p.558) S (p.558) T (p.559) U
(p.559) V (p.559) W (p.559) X (p.559) Y (p.559) Z (p.559)

A
•  ASSIGN (p.707)

B
• BACKPRES (p.656)
• BEGIN (p.593)
• BLACKOIL (p.675)
• BRANCH (p.717)

C
• CASE (p.567)
• CALIBRATE (p.684)
• CHOKE (p.608)
• COMP (p.687)
• COMPCRV (p.612)
• COMPLETION (p.613)
• COMPRESSOR (p.615)
• CONETAB (p.656)
• CONFIG (p.673)

• CONTAMINANTS (p.686)
• CORROSION (p.616)
• CPFLUID (p.683)

DE
• END (p.593)

Keyword Index 
726 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 744/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• ENDCASE (p.593)
• ENDJOB (p.593)
• EROSION (p.617)
• EQUIPMENT (p.618)
• ESP (p.638)
• EXPANDER (p.620)

F
• FETKOVICH (p.647)
• FITTING (p.621)
• FLOWLINE (p.613)
• FMPUMP (p.623)
• FORCHHEIMER (p.662)
• FRACTURE (p.662)
• FRAMO2009 (p.623)

G
• GASLIFT (p.624)

H
• HCORR (p.601)
• HEATER (p.624)
• HEADER (p.566)
• HEAT (p.665)
• HORWELL (p.657)
• HVOGEL (p.662)

I
• IFPPSSE (p.648)
• IFPTAB (p.654)
• IFPCRV (p.653)
• INLET (p.582)
• INJGAS (p.630)
• INJFLUID (p.630)
• INJPORT (p.628)
• IPRCRV (p.653)
• ITERN (p.580)

Keyword Index 
727 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 745/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

J
• JOB (p.567)
• JONES (p.648)
• JUNCTION (p.724)

K
• KCOAT (p.670)

L
• LAYER (p.659)
• LVIS (p.678)

M
• MPBOOSTER (p.632)
• MPUMP (p.633)
• MULTICASE (p.699)

N
• NAPLOT (p.694)
• NAPOINT (p.698)
• NODE (p.635)
• NOPRINT (p.593)

• NSEPARATOR (p.724)
O
• OPTIONS (p.568)
• OPTIMIZE (p.708)

P
• PCP (p.638)
• PERMCRV (p.660)
• PERMTAB (p.661)
• PETROFRAC (p.645)
• PIPE (p.636)
• PLOT (p.590)
• PRINT (p.583)
• PROP (p.677)

Keyword Index 
728 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 746/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• PUMP (p.638)
• PUMPCRV (p.612)
• PUSH (p.595)

QR
• RATE - Compositional (p.694)
• RATE - Blackoil (p.578)
• REINJECTOR (p.641)
• RISER (p.613)

S
• SEPARATOR (p.642)
• SETUP (p.715)

• SINK (p.722)
• SLUG (p.643)
• SOURCE (p.719)
• SPHASE (p.604)

T
• TABLE (p.705)
• TCOAT (p.669)
• TIME (p.182)
• TPRINT - Compositional (p.694)
• TPRINT - Blackoil (p.684)
• TRANSIENT (p.663)
• TUBING (p.613)

U
• UNITS (p.567)
• USERDLL - Flow Correlations (p.606)
• USERDLL - Equipment (p.597)

V
• VCORR (p.598)
• VOGEL (p.647)

W
• Wax Deposition (p.182)

Keyword Index 
729
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 747/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

• WELLHEAD (p.645)
• WELLPI (p.646)
• WCOPTION (p.650)
• WPCURVE (p.647)

XYZ

Keyword Index 
730 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 748/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

6 
Open Link
Open Link is a set of API calls that can be made by any application to control PIPESIM or elements
of PIPESIM.
Two sets of controls exist:
1. Controlling the GUI.
2. Controlling the calculation engines directly.
Please refer to the Open Link documentation installed with the software.

Open Link 
731
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 749/760
 7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Third party applications 7 

PIPESIM has been designed with "Openness" in mind. Therefore key modules can be "driven" from
3rd party applications, for example, Microsoft Excel, VB, C++, and so on.
Schlumberger have collected these open modules together into a single product, called Open Link.
 As the development of Open Link components are an ongoing process the latest documentation is
available with the installed documentation.
Examples of using the Open Link technology, using Microsoft Excel are provided in the Case
Studies\Open Link directory. Documentation is also provided in the form of PDF files
(AdobeAcrobat reader is required for this; a copy of which can be found on the PIPESIM CD) from
the start menu Schlumberger\PIPESIM\Documentation\Open Link or from the directory
Program Files\Schlumberger\pipesim\programs Folder.

Third party applications

732 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 750/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Index
0-9 Bergman and Sutton
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 475
***
modeling Biot number .............................................................. 454
sand modeling .......................................................... BIP .................................................................... 133, 134
scale prediction ........................................................ Black oil
solids appearance .................................................... CALIBRATE keyword ........................................... 684
wax modeling ........................................................... calibration ............................................................. 122
correlations ........................................................... 460
A data sets ............................................................... 121
 Abort Run ................................................................. 173 enthalpy ................................................................ 479
 Alhanati .................................................................... 209 fluid modeling ........................................................ 120
 Annular Gas Pressure Design Method ..................... 211 fluid modeling theory ............................................. 460
mixing ................................................................... 481
 Ansari ....................................................................... 343
options .................................................................. 122
 API14B critical flow correlation ................................. 411 surface tension ..................................................... 479
 AQUEOUS keyword ................................................. 687 thermal data .......................................................... 126
 Artificial Lift analysis TPRINT Table printing .......................................... 684
basic steps ............................................................ 190 BLACK OIL DATA keyword ...................................... 674
creating curves ..................................................... 190 BLACKOIL keyword ................................................. 675
performance curves .............................................. 182
Boundary conditions ........................................... 40, 108
 Asphaltene ............................................................... 499
Bracketing ................................................................ 192
 ASSIGN keyword ..................................................... 707
Branch ........................................................................ 35
BRANCH keyword .................................................... 717
B
Brauner and Ullman correlation ................................ 503
Babu and Odeh .......................................................... 46
Brill and Minami ........................................................ 343
Back Pressure equation
Brinkman correlation ................................................ 503
4 point test .............................................................. 52
BACKPRES keyword ............................................ 656 Bubble point
data required ........................................................... 52 calibration data ..................................................... 123
details ................................................................... 365 correction .............................................................. 376
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 462
Batch mode .............................................................. 241
Beggs and Brill ......................................................... 343
Beggs and Robinson C
CALIBRATE keyword ............................................... 684
Dead oil viscosity .................................................. 469
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 471 Calibration
bubble point calibration data ................................. 123
BEGIN keyword ........................................................ 593
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 466
Benedict-Webb-Rubin-Starling ................................. 492
CASE/ENDCASE keyword ....................................... 704

 
733
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 751/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

CASE keyword ......................................................... 567 flashing ................................................................. 144

Case studies ............................................................. 244 fluid: AQUEOUS keyword ..................................... 687
Casing fluid: LIBRARY keyword ....................................... 691
standard sizes ....................................................... 518 fluid: MODEL keyword .......................................... 692
fluid modeling ........................................................ 127
Casing head pressure .............................................. 181
fluid specification .................................................. 687
Character Input ......................................................... 562
importing composition ........................................... 135
Check model ............................................................ 172 petroleum fraction specification ............................ 693
Chew and Connally property models .................................................... 132
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 471 selecting components ........................................... 128
Choke specifying composition .......................................... 134
 Achong critical flow correlation ............................. 411 template ................................................................ 127
 API 14–B subcritical flow correlation .................... 407 viscosity models for compositional fluids .............. 498
 Ashford and Pierce critical flow correlation ........... 411 COMPOSITIONAL DATA keyword .................. 686, 694
 Ashford and Pierce critical pressure ratio ............. 410 COMPOSITION keyword ......................................... 687
 Ashford and Pierce subcritical flow correlation ..... 407
Compressor 
Baxendall critical flow correlation .......................... 411
curve ............................................................. 162, 163
critical flow correlations ......................................... 411
data entry .............................................................. 218
critical pressure ratio ............................................. 410
entering details ....................................................... 82
Gilbert critical flow correlation ............................... 411
reciprocating ......................................................... 163
Mechanistic critical flow correlation ...................... 411
theory .................................................................... 416
Mechanistic subcritical flow correlation ................. 407
user curves ........................................................... 164
Omana critical flow correlation .............................. 411
COMPRESSOR keyword ......................................... 615
Pilehvari critical flow correlation ............................ 411
Poetmann-Beck critical flow correlation ................ 411 condensate pipeline
Ros critical flow correlation ................................... 411 case study ............................................................. 245
Sachdeva critical flow correlation ......................... 411 Conduction shape factor .......................................... 453
subcritical flow correlations ................................... 407 CONETAB keyword .................................................. 656
theory .................................................................... 404 CONFIG keyword ..................................................... 673
user-defined critical flow correlation ..................... 412 Coning ...................................................................... 403
CHOKE keyword ...................................................... 608 Coning Relationship Tabulation ............................... 656
Clear Dictionary ........................................................ 237 CONTAMINANTS keyword ...................................... 686
Coating ..................................................................... 668 Convective heat transfer .......................................... 670
COAT keyword ......................................................... 668 Conversion factors ................................................... 536
Coiled tubing .............................................................. 77 Copy ......................................................................... 233
Comment Statements ............................................... 563 Correlation
COMPCRV keyword ......................................... 612, 640 black oil ................................................................. 120
COMPLETION keyword ........................................... 613 comparison ........................................................... 111
Completion options ..................................................... 59 matching ............................................................... 175
Compositional options .................................................................. 675
selecting a flow correlation ................................... 110

 
734
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 752/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Corrosion .................................................................. 153 Dry gas data entry .................................................... 118

CORROSION keyword ............................................. 616 Duns and Ros ........................................................... 343
corrosion model) Dynamic skin ............................................................ 378
de Waard's equation ............................................. 353
CPA .................................................................. 489, 492 E
CPFLUID keyword ............................................ 683, 684 E300 Flash ............................................................... 489
Critical unloading gas rate ........................................ 179 Editing ...................................................................... 595
CSMA ....................................................................... 492 Elbows ...................................................................... 531
Cunliffe's Method ...................................................... 355 Electrical Submersible Pumps — see ESP ...... 212, 419
CVFMD keyword .............................................. 616, 641 Elsharkawy and Alikhan
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 471
D live oil viscosity ..................................................... 471
Damaged zone ........................................................... 48 undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 475

Darcy Emulsion viscosities ................................................. 132

data required ........................................................... 52 END keyword ........................................................... 593
equation ................................................................ 365 Energy equation ....................................................... 442
Data files .......................................................... 375, 563 Engine
Data matching options .................................................................. 150
case study ............................................................. 324 preferences ........................................................... 155
procedure .............................................................. 175 Engine Keyword Tool ................................................. 84
DBR flash ................................................................. 489 Equations of State
Dead oil viscosity ...................................................... 469 components of non-cubic ...................................... 497
Deepest Injection Point ............................................ 191 Equations of State — Cubic ..................................... 489
De Ghetto Equations of State — non-cubic ............................... 492
correlations ........................................................... 460 Equipment .................................................................. 89
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 470 EQUIPMENT keyword .............................................. 618
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 473 Erosion ..................................................................... 153
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 463
EROSION keyword .................................................. 617
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 474
ESP
Delimiters ................................................................. 560
curve ..................................................................... 162
Design ...................................................................... 204 data entry ...................................................... 165, 218
Design Control (Gas lift) ........................................... 195 design ................................................................... 218
Design method ......................................................... 195 overview ........................................................ 212, 419
Design Parameters (Gas lift) .................................... 200 selection/design .................................... 166, 217, 425
Detailed tubing model ................................................. 70 system components: pumps ......................... 213, 421
user curves ........................................................... 164
de Waard .................................................................. 353
EXCEL ...................................................................... 240
Distributed Productivity Index Method ...................... 402
EXECUTE keyword .................................................. 596
Drainage radius ........................................................ 530

 
735 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 753/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Expander  vertical options ...................................................... 598

curve ..................................................................... 163 Flowing Conditions ................................................... 145
equations .............................................................. 428 Flowline ...................................................................... 86
EXPANDER keyword ............................................ 620 Flowrate .................................................................... 110
parameters .............................................................. 85
Flowrate Operator details ......................................... 102
Expert mode ..................................... 240, 242, 555, 725
Flow regimes ............................................................ 337
Explicit Subcodes ..................................................... 700
Fluid
External PVT tables
black oil calibration ............................................... 122
see Fluid Property Tables ..................................... 140
black oil options .................................................... 122
calibration ............................................................. 120
F calibration to match lab data ................................. 122
Facilities ............................................................... 81, 82 compositional fluid modeling ................................. 127
Fetkovich ............................................................ 51, 363 fluid models dialog ................................................ 159
FETKOVICH keyword .............................................. 647 modeling ............................................................... 120
File conversion ........................................................... 31 property data ......................................................... 677
property table files ................................................ 502
Find ............................................................................ 28
specific heat capacity data ............................ 683, 684
First law of thermodynamics ..................................... 442
typical values of properties ................................... 527
Fittings viscosity models for compositional ....................... 498
equations .............................................................. 413
FLUID keyword ......................................................... 672
FITTING keyword ................................................. 621
Fluid model calibration ............................................. 124
Flash
Fluid Property Tables ............................................... 140
flash/separation .................................................... 138
FMPUMP keyword ................................................... 623
Flashing
compositional ........................................................ 144 Forchheimer equation ........................................ 55, 364
in-line .................................................................... 145 FORCHHEIMER keyword ........................................ 662
Flow .......................................................................... 604 FRACTURE keyword ............................................... 662
Flow control valves Framo
mechanistic theory ................................................ 412 FRAMO2009 keyword .......................................... 623
purpose and how to add ....................................... 171 multiphase booster 1999 ........................................ 98
FLOW CORRELATION DATA keyword ................... 598 multiphase booster 2009 ........................................ 95
Flow correlations Friction ...................................................................... 111
comparison/matching ............................................ 175 Friction and Holdup factors
defining ................................................................. 111 Moody and AGA Friction factors ........................... 348

horizontal multiphase ............................................ 339 Moody Friction factor ............................................ 349

matching ............................................................... 175 Friction pressure drop
single phase .......................................................... 348 Cullender and Smith ............................................. 350
valid horizontal combinations ................................ 602 Hazen-Williams ..................................................... 352
valid vertical combinations .................................... 599 Panhandle A ......................................................... 351
vertical multiphase ................................................ 343 Panhandle B ......................................................... 351

 
736 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 754/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Weymouth ............................................................. 351 Generic Pump .......................................................... 163

GERG ....................................................................... 492
G Glasø
Gas compressibility .................................................. 475 correlations ........................................................... 460
Gas condensate reservoirs ...................................... 360 dead oil viscosity ................................................... 469
Gas condensate systems ......................................... 118 solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 464
Gas lift Glossary of symbols ................................................. 532
 Annular Gas Pressure Design method ................. 211 GLR Matching .......................................................... 139
bracketing ............................................................. 192 Govier and Aziz ........................................................ 343
Deepest Injection Point operation ......................... 191 Graphical reports ...................................................... 231
design ................................................................... 194 Gravel pack ................................................................ 48
design parameters ................................................ 200
Gray .......................................................................... 343
design procedure .................................................. 194

Design Summary screen ...................................... 205 H

diagnostics ............................................................ 208
Diagnostics operation ........................................... 207 Hagedorn and Brown ............................................... 343
Diagnostics operation data ................................... 208 HCORR keyword ...................................................... 601
injection valve ....................................................... 628 HEADER keyword .................................................... 566
instability ............................................................... 209 Heat Balance ............................................................ 665
in the riser ............................................................. 104 Heat configuration data ............................................ 673
Lift Gas Response Curves .................................... 193
HEATER keyword .................................................... 624
minimum data set ................................................. 204
Heat Exchanger .......................................................... 88
multiple injection ports in wells ............................. 624
overview ................................................................ 190 HEAT keyword ......................................................... 665

properties ................................................................ 74 Heat transfer 

rate vs Casing head pressure ............................... 181 between flowline and ground ................................ 453
safety factors ........................................................ 201 between well and rock .......................................... 458
setting injection points ............................................ 75 coefficient .............................................................. 443
theory .................................................................... 209 conductive coefficient calculations ........................ 450
valve list ................................................................ 170 convective coefficient calculations ........................ 452
valves ...................................................................... 75 IFC correlations .................................................... 446
GASLIFT keyword .................................................... 624 input or calculate U ................................................. 90
options .................................................................. 149
Gas phase contaminants .................................. 126, 686
pipe coat thermal conductivity .............................. 670
Gas reservoirs .......................................................... 360
wellbore .................................................................. 72
Gas viscosity ............................................................ 478
HEAT TRANSFER DATA keyword .......................... 664
gas well performance analysis
Holdup factor ............................................................ 111
case study ............................................................. 286
Holdup factors .......................................................... 347
Gas wells .................................................................. 400
Horizontal completion
General Data ............................................................ 566
data entry ................................................................ 44
General Purpose Subcodes ..................................... 702 determining length .................................................. 44

 
737 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 755/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

Inflow Performance options .................................. 657 Bubble point correction ......................................... 376
IPR model ............................................................... 44 data file ................................................................. 375
IPRs ...................................................................... 389 Fetkovich's equation ............................................. 363
length optimization ................................................ 179 Fetkovich's equation data ....................................... 51
optimal length ....................................................... 179 Forchheimer equation ........................................... 364
overview .................................................................. 43 Forchheimer equation data ..................................... 55
properties options ................................................... 48 horizontal completions .......................................... 389
Horizontal flow hydraulic fracturing ................................................. 56
correlation abbreviations ....................................... 603 Jones' equation ..................................................... 364
correlation options ................................................ 601 Jones equation data ............................................... 51
regimes ................................................................. 338 multilayer reservoir ................................................. 65
valid correlations ................................................... 602 Multi-rate data ......................................................... 55
Horizontal gas wells ................................................. 400 oil/water relative permeability ............................... 403
Productivity Index (PI) ........................................... 361
Horizontal Multiphase Flow Correlations .................. 339
Pseudo steady state/Darcy ................................... 365
HORWELL keyword ................................................. 657
Pseudo steady state/Darcy data ............................. 52
Hossain solution gas-drive reservoirs ................................. 400
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 470 summary for vertical completions ......................... 360
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 471 Transient IPR ........................................................ 370
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 474 Transient IPR data .................................................. 58
Hot Keys ..................................................................... 22 vertical completion .................................................. 49
HVOGEL keyword .................................................... 662 Vogel's equation ................................................... 362
Hydrate Vogel's equation data ............................................. 50
inhibitors ............................................................... 500 Inflow Performance Tabulation ................................. 654
model details ......................................................... 501 Inflow Production Profiles ......................................... 393
overview ................................................................ 500 Injection performance ................................................. 80
sub-cooling calculation ......................................... 149
Injection Point ............................................................. 92
Hydraulic fracture ..................................................... 662
Injection well ......................................................... 38, 79
Hydraulic fracturing
INJFLUID keyword ................................................... 630
overview and data required .................................... 56
INJGAS keyword ...................................................... 630

I INJPORT keyword .................................................... 628

INLET keyword ......................................................... 582
Ice prediction ............................................................ 502
Inlet pressure ............................................................ 109
IFPCRV keyword ...................................................... 653
In-line flashing .......................................................... 145
IFPPSSE keyword .................................................... 648
IFPTAB keyword ...................................................... 654 Input data ................................................................. 559
Input files .......................................................... 559, 564
Inflow Performance Curve ........................................ 653
Inside Film Coefficient method ................................. 149
Inflow Performance Relationships (IPRs)
Back Pressure equation ........................................ 365 Internal Fluid Film Heat Transfer Coefficient ............ 446
Back pressure equation data .................................. 52 IPRCRV keyword ..................................................... 653

 
738 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 756/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

IPR keyword ............................................................. 647 LAYER keyword ....................................................... 659

IPR — see Inflow Performance Relationships LBC .......................................................................... 498
(IPRs) ....................................................................... 400 Lee method .............................................................. 478
Iteration Data ............................................................ 580 Leviton and Leighton correlation .............................. 506
Library components — non-cubic EoS ..................... 497
J
LIBRARY keyword .................................................... 691
JOB keyword ............................................................ 567
Lift Gas Response Curves ....................................... 193
Jones data ................................................................ 648
Limits ........................................................................ 517
Jones equation ........................................................... 51
Liquid by sphere ....................................................... 356
Jones Equation ......................................................... 364
Liquid-gas surface tension ....................................... 508
JONES keyword ....................................................... 648
Liquid holdup ............................................................ 356
Joshi ........................................................................... 45
Liquid loading
JTFLUID: Joule Thomson Heat Coefficient Data ............
JUNCTION keyword ................................................. 724 displaying point ..................................................... 179
equations .............................................................. 359
implementation ....................................................... 81
K inclination angle ...................................................... 81
Kartoatmodjo and Schmidt Liquid properties ....................................................... 503
correlations ........................................................... 460 Liquid viscosity
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 470 and oil/water emulsions ........................................ 503
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 472 correlations ........................................................... 503
Oil Formation Volume Factor ................................ 467 data ....................................................................... 678
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 464
Live oil viscosity ........................................................ 471
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 474
Load Dictionary ........................................................ 237
KCOAT keyword ....................................................... 670 Local Fluid Data ....................................................... 120
Keyword abbreviations ............................................. 561
looped gas gathering network
Keywords .................................................................. 715
case study ............................................................. 306
KFLUID keyword ...................................................... 672
LVIS keyword ........................................................... 678
Khan
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 472 M
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 474
Measured data ......................................................... 175
Kouzel
Mechanical skin ........................................................ 377
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 473
Minimum data set (Gas lift) ...................................... 204
Kreith ........................................................................ 446
Mixing (Black oil) ...................................................... 481

L Model building ............................................................ 31

Laplace equation ...................................................... 455 modeling ........................................................... 140, 509

Lasater  Modeling systems ..................................................... 117

correlations ........................................................... 460 Modeling wells ............................................................ 79
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 465 MODEL keyword ...................................................... 692

 
739
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 757/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

MOODYCALC keyword ............................................ 606 NAPLOT keyword ................................................. 694

MPBOOSTER keyword ............................................ 632 NAPOINT keyword ............................................... 698
Mukherjee and Brill ................................................... 343 performing ............................................................. 177

MULTICASE keyword ...................................... 699, 704 point ........................................................................ 79

NODE keyword ......................................................... 635
Multiflash .......................................................... 489, 492
Non-cubic Equations of State ................................... 497
Multilayer reservoir ..................................................... 65
NOPRINT keyword ................................................... 593
Multiphase ................................................................ 343
NOSLIP .................................................................... 343
Multiphase booster 
efficiencies tables ................................................. 441 NSEPARATOR keyword .......................................... 724
Framo 1999 ............................................................ 98 Numeric data ............................................................ 562
Framo 2009 ............................................................ 95
generic .................................................................... 92 O
overview ................................................................ 431 Oil/water emulsions .................................................. 503
twin screw boosters ................................................ 93 Oil/water relative permeability .................................. 403
Multiphase pump Oil Formation Volume Factor (OFVF)
MPUMP keyword .................................................. 633 defined .................................................................. 467
vendor performance curve format ......................... 100 saturated systems ................................................. 467
Multiple case ............................................................ 705 undersaturated systems ....................................... 468
Multiple completion well ............................................. 80 Oil reservoirs ............................................................ 360
Multiple injection ports .............................................. 624 Oil viscosity
Multiple Value Data Sets .......................................... 563 black oil ................................................................. 469
Multi-rate .................................................................... 55 undersaturated ...................................................... 473
Multi-stage separation .............................................. 138 oil well performance analysis
case study ............................................................. 262
N OLGA-S .................................................................... 343
NAPLOT keyword ..................................................... 694 Open Link ................................................................. 731
NAPOINT keyword ................................................... 698 Operations ................................................................ 694
Network OPTIMIZE keyword .................................................. 708
constraints .............................................................. 41 Options ..................................................................... 160
estimates ................................................................ 41 OPTIONS keyword ................................................... 568
iterations ............................................................... 157 Orkiszewski .............................................................. 343
separator ................................................................. 36
Outlet pressure ......................................................... 109
Network models .......................................................... 33
Output options .......................................................... 150
Network Option Control ............................................ 150
Network Report tool .................................................. 238 P
Network source .......................................................... 34 Parameters ............................................................... 607
NIST recommendation for pure fluid / mixture .......... 492 Paths used by tools .................................................. 147
Nodal Analysis PCP

 
740 
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 758/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

data entry .............................................................. 169 Pressure drop

standard curves .................................................... 168 effect on productivity ............................................. 389
PCP curve ................................................................ 167 for gas ................................................................... 351
Pedersen .................................................................. 498 multiphase ............................................................ 393
single phase .......................................................... 392
Peng-Robinson ......................................................... 489
Principle of conservation of energy .......................... 442
Perforation .................................................................. 49
Print .......................................................................... 233
PERMCRV keyword ................................................. 660
PRINT keyword ........................................................ 583
Permeability .............................................................. 529
Production well ........................................................... 37
PERMTAB keyword .................................................. 661
Progressive cavity pump — see PCP ...................... 426
PETROFRAC keyword ............................................. 693
Project Data .............................................................. 147
Petroleum fractions
setting up .............................................................. 129 Property calibration .................................................. 684
Petrosky and Farshad PROP keyword ......................................................... 677
correlations ........................................................... 460 Pseudo steady state
dead oil viscosity ................................................... 470 data for equation ................................................... 648
live oil viscosity ..................................................... 471 equation and data ................................................... 52
solution gas-oil ratio .............................................. 465 IPR ........................................................................ 365
undersaturated oil viscosity .................................. 475 productivity ............................................................ 397
Phase Behavior package ......................................... 128 PS-PLOT keyword .................................................... 705
Phase envelope ........................................................ 136 PsPlot utility .............................................................. 231
PI Pump
data required ........................................................... 50 curve ..................................................................... 162
equations .............................................................. 361 data entry .............................................................. 218
Pipe coating ...................................................... 668, 669 entering parameters .............................................. 107
user curves ........................................................... 164
Pipe dimensions ....................................................... 636
PUMPCRV keyword ......................................... 612, 640
PIPE keyword ........................................................... 636
PUMP keyword ......................................................... 638
Pipeline
burial ..................................................................... 674 PUSH keyword ......................................................... 595
burial method ........................................................ 149 PVT File .................................................................... 135
operations ............................................................... 81
pipeline and facilities model .................................... 82 Q
selecting size .......................................................... 78 Quality lines .............................................................. 137
standard sizes ....................................................... 523

tools ........................................................................ 81 R
PLOTFILEDATA keyword ........................................ 596 Ramey model ........................................................... 457
PLOT keyword .......................................................... 590 RATE keyword ......................................................... 578
Plotting options ......................................................... 590 Reciprocating compressor 
Pressure ................................................................... 109 adding to database or model .................................. 84
Pressure/Temperature profile ................................... 174 entering details ....................................................... 83

 
741
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 759/760
7/14/2019 Pipesim User Guide

PIPESIM User Guide

overview ................................................................ 419 properties .............................................................. 106

Red box (missing data) .............................................. 32 SEPARATOR keyword ............................................. 642
References ............................................................... 538 SETUP keyword ....................................................... 715
REFPROP ................................................................ 492 Shape factor ............................................................... 52
REINJECTOR keyword ............................................ 641 Simple profile model ................................................... 68
Relative permeability ................................................ 403 Single phase flow ..................................................... 604
Remedial coiled tubing ............................................... 77 Single phase flow correlations .................................. 348
Remote action editing ............................................... 595 Single phase gas critical pressure ratio .................... 410
Report ....................................................................... 238 Sink ............................................................................ 35
Reports ..................................................................... 231 SINK keyword ........................................................... 722
Report Tool ....................................................... 105, 237 SIS flash ................................................................... 489
Reservoir  Sizing tubing and pipelines ......................................... 78

creating look-up tables .......................................... 180 Skin factor 

layer properties ..................................................... 659 completion options .................................................. 59
simulation data ...................................................... 705 damaged zone ...................................................... 381
tables .................................................................... 179 deviation ............................................................... 380
RESERVOIR keyword .............................................. 660 equations .............................................................. 377
Restart Model ........................................................... 189 Frac pack .............................................................. 386
Richardson correlation ............................................. 503 gravel pack ........................................................... 381
in horizontal completion .......................................... 49
Riser Details ............................................................. 102
partial penetration ................................................. 380
Rod pump
perforated well ...................................................... 382
module .................................................................. 219
Pseudo Steady State equation ............................... 54
RODPUMP keyword ......................................... 616, 641 Transient IPR data .................................................. 59
Roughness ............................................................... 528 Slug .......................................................................... 644
Run Model ................................................................ 172 Slug calculation ........................................................ 643
Running multiple models 241 Sl h 644

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/pipesim-user-guide-56327c267db9d 760/760